Liisa-Ly Pakosta
Justiits- ja Digiministeerium
[email protected] 05.10.2026 nr 16-9/26/3749
Ettepanek Riigi Teataja seaduse muutmiseks seoses
IMO koodeksite tõlkimise ja avaldamisega
Austatud Liisa-Ly Pakosta
Kliimaministeerium teeb Justiits- ja Digiministeeriumile ettepaneku algatada Riigi Teataja
seaduse (RTS) ja meresõiduohutuse seaduse (MSOS) muutmine, et toetada riigi ressursside
eesmärgipärast ja säästlikku kasutamist ja aidata vähendada sisemist bürokraatiat.
I Ettepanek seadusmuudatusteks
1) Täiendada RTS § 4 lõiget 1 punktiga 4 järgmises sõnastuses:
„4) seaduses sätestatud juhul välislepingu alusel antud valdkonnaspetsiifilisi tehnilisi norme
sisaldavat regulatiivset instrumenti, välja arvatud juhul, kui selle eestikeelset tõlget nõuab avalik
huvi.“;
2) täiendada MSOS § 1 lõikega 62 järgmises sõnastuses:
„(62 ) Transpordiamet avaldab oma veebilehel IMO konventsioonide alusel antud
valdkonnaspetsiifilisi tehnilisi norme sisaldava regulatiivse instrumendi inglise keeles, kui seadus
ei sätesta teisiti.“.
II Muudatusettepanekute põhjendused
Rahvusvaheline Mereorganisatsioon (IMO) kehtestab rahvusvahelisi meresõiduohutuse ja
merereostuse vältimise alaseid konventsioone ning nende alusel kohustuslikke tehnilisi
instrumente (nt koodeks). Eestis on enamik IMO konventsioone tõlgitud ja avaldatud, kuid enam
kui 30 kohustuslikust tehnilisest koodeksist on eesti keeles ametlikult avaldatud vaid neli. Neist
kaks on tõlgitud ja avaldatud Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrustena Euroopa Liidu Teatajas.
Tõlkimata instrumentide maht on ligikaudu 2000 lehekülge ning toimetamist ja avaldamist vajava
materjali kogumaht ületab 6000 lehekülge.
Suur-Ameerika 1 / Tallinn 10122 / 626 2802/
[email protected] / www.kliimaministeerium.ee/
Registrikood 70001231
2024. aastal Eesti suhtes toimunud IMO auditi ettevalmistamise käigus jõuti riigisiseselt
seisukohale, et tehnilised koodeksid tuleks tõlkida eesti keelde ja avaldada Riigi Teatajas
tavakorras. Seetõttu tuvastas audit puuduse FD-1: Eesti ei ole kõiki kohustuslikke koodekseid
riigisiseselt täielikult jõustanud. Puuduse kõrvaldamise parenduste esimese etapi tähtaeg on 2028.
aasta lõpp.
Koodeksite eestikeelseks avaldamiseks tuleb tõlked toimetada, kuna neis esineb arvukalt
ebatäpsusi, ning koostada koodeksite heakskiitmiseks vajalikud õigusaktid ja seletuskirjad.
Tegemist ei ole ühekordse töökoormusega, kuna koodekseid ajakohastatakse pidevalt. See toob
riigile kaasa korduva ja märkimisväärse tõlkimiskulu ja õigusloomekoormuse. Näiteks võetakse
IMDG koodeksi ligikaudu 1000-leheküljeline terviktekst vastu iga kahe aasta järel ning selle
tõlkimine maksab üle 20 000 euro.
Koodeksid on suunatud kitsale professionaalsele sihtrühmale – laevandussektorile. Laevanduse
töökeel on valdavalt inglise keel ning praktikas kasutatakse regulatsioonide ingliskeelseid tekste.
Eesti lipu all sõitvatel laevadel ei ole tuvastatud puudusi, mis oleksid seotud koodeksite
eestikeelsete tõlgete puudumisega.
Üks nullbürokraatia algatuse eesmärke on vähendada avaliku sektori sisest bürokraatiat,
sealhulgas tegevusi, mis ei loo lisandväärtust või on avaliku sektori koostööpartnerite jaoks
raskesti mõistetavad ja koormavad. Koalitsioonileppes on seatud eesmärgiks tugevdada õigusriigi
aluseid ning muuta õiguse ja õigluse saavutamine kiiremaks ja efektiivsemaks. Samuti on jätkuvalt
eesmärk vähendada ettevõtete, inimeste ja avaliku sektori halduskoormust. Üks võimalus neid
eesmärke saavutada on vähendada õigusloome mahtu ja vältida tööd, mille järele sihtrühmal
praktikas vajadus puudub. RTSi ja MSOSi muutmine viisil, mis võimaldaks avaldada IMO
laevandusspetsiifilised tehnilised koodeksid Transpordiameti veebilehel nende originaalkeeles,
vähendaks riigi tõlkimise ja õigusloome koormust.
Muudatusettepaneku tinginud analüüs on lisatud manusena.
Oleme vajadusel valmis kohtuma, et teemat täiendavalt selgitada ja küsimustele vastata.
Lugupidamisega
(allkirjastatud digitaalselt)
Kuldar Leis
taristuminister
Lisad: 1. Analüüs muudatusettepaneku juurde
2. IMDG koodeks
3. IGF koodeks
Teadmiseks: Välisministeerium
Gerli Ehte, 6259029
[email protected]
Analüüs
Riigi Teataja seaduse muutmise ettepaneku juurde seoses IMO koodeksite tõlkimise ja
avaldamisega
Laevandusalased välislepingud
Rahvusvaheline Mereorganisatsioon (IMO) on Ühinenud Rahvaste Organisatsiooni
spetsialiseerunud asutus, mille vastutusalaks on meresõiduohutus ning laevade põhjustatud
merereostuse ja õhusaaste ennetamine. IMO kehtestab rahvusvahelisi merendusalaseid
standardeid erinevate instrumentide kaudu:
- konventsioonid on IMO peamised ja õiguslikult siduvad rahvusvahelised lepingud,
millega ühinemine tekitab riikidele kohustusi. Konventsioonid võivad sisaldada lisasid ning
viidata eraldi koodeksitele, kus on sätestatud detailsemad tehnilised nõuded;
- protokollid on õiguslikult siduvad rahvusvahelised lepingud, millega muudetakse
konventsioone, mis on vastu võetud, kuid ei ole veel jõustunud;
- muud instrumendid, mis on üldjuhul tehnilist laadi ning võivad olla õiguslikult
siduvast soovituslikuni. IMO resolutsiooniga A.911(22)1 on kehtestatud ühtse sõnastuse
põhimõtted IMO instrumentidele viitamiseks ning selle järgi on koodeksid kohustuslikud ning
suunised, käsiraamatud ja juhised soovituslikud instrumendid. Tehnilised nõuded ja standardid
ei ole otseselt kohustuslikud instrumendid, kuid osalisriigid on kohustatud kehtestama riiklikud
standardid, mis on eelnimetatutega samaväärsed. Kuigi IMO koodeksid on üldjuhul
kohustuslikud, siis algab nende väljatöötamine soovitusliku koodeksi vastuvõtmisega, mille
eesmärk on koguda praktilist kogemust ja hinnata regulatiivseid lahendusi. Seejärel töötatakse
saadud kogemuste analüüsi alusel välja kohustuslik koodeks, mis muudetakse õiguslikult
siduvaks vastava rahvusvahelise konventsiooni kaudu.
IMO ametlikud keeled on araabia, hiina, hispaania, inglise, prantsuse ja vene ning töökeeled
inglise, prantsuse ja hispaania. Eesti ametnikkond kasutab üldjuhul dokumentide ingliskeelseid
tekste.
Laevandusalaste välislepingute riigisisene seis
Enamik IMO konventsioone ja protokolle on eesti keelde tõlgitud ja Riigi Teatajas avaldatud.
Samas on iga-aastane IMO-st tulenevate rahvusvaheliste lepingute muudatuste hulk
märkimisväärne, mistõttu esineb viivitusi konventsioonide ja protokollide muudatuste
õigeaegse riigisisese avaldamisega. IMO konventsioonide alusel kehtestatud kohustuslikest
koodeksitest, mida on kokku üle 30, on seni eesti keeles ametlikult avaldatud üksnes neli. Neist
kaks on tõlgitud ja avaldatud Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrustena Euroopa Liidu
Teatajas:
- 1974. aasta rahvusvahelise konventsiooni inimelude ohutusest merel (SOLAS) alusel
kehtestatud laevade ohutu ekspluateerimise ja reostuse vältimise korraldamise
rahvusvaheline koodeks (ISM koodeks);2
1 Resolution A.911(22), 29th November 2001, Uniform wording for referencing IMO instruments, kättesaadav:
https://wwwcdn.imo.org/localresources/en/KnowledgeCentre/IndexofIMOResolutions/AssemblyDocuments/A.9
11(22).pdf
2 Eesti keelne tõlge kättesaadav Euroopa Liidu Teatajas: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-
content/ET/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A02006R0336 -20190726
- SOLAS alusel kehtestatud laevade ja sadamarajatiste rahvusvahelise turvalisuse
koodeks (ISPS koodeks).3
Riigi Teatajas on eesti keeles seni avaldatud kaks IMO koodeksit:
- Rahvusvahelise Tööorganisatsiooni meretöö konventsiooni (MLC) koodeks;4
- 1978. aasta meremeeste väljaõppe, diplomeerimise ja vahiteenistuse aluste
rahvusvahelise konventsiooni (STCW) lisaks olev meremeeste väljaõppe,
diplomeerimise ja vahiteenistuse koodeks.5
Alljärgnevalt on esitatud ülevaade IMO instrumentidest, mis on rahvusvaheliste
konventsioonide või EL õigusaktide alusel kohustuslikuks tehtud, kuid mille tõlked on seni
Eestis ametlikult avaldamata:
Pealkiri Tõlge Lk Muudatusi Kokku lk
arv
SOLAS konventsioon
International Code for rahvusvaheline koodeks 162 6 483
Construction and Equipment of ohtlikke kemikaale
Ships Carrying Dangerous mahtlastina vedava laeva
Chemicals in Bulk (IBC Code) ehituse ja seadmete kohta
International Code for the rahvusvaheline koodeks 193 6 206
Construction and Equipment of veeldatud gaasi mahtlastina
Ships Carrying Liquefied vedava laeva ehituse ja
Gases in Bulk (IGC Code) seadmete kohta
Internatonal Code for the Safe rahvusvaheline vilja 29 1 33
Carriage of Grain in Bulk puistlastina ohutu veo
(Grain Code) koodeks
International Code of Safety rahvusvaheline kiirlaevade 221 9 253
for High-Speed Craft (1994 ohutuse koodeks
HSC Code)
2000 International Code of 2000. aasta rahvusvaheline 237 10 310
Safety for High-Speed Craft kiirlaevade ohutuse
(2000 HSC Code) koodeks
Code of Safe Practice for Cargo lasti paigutamise ja 50 - 50
Stowage and Securing (CSS kinnitamise ohutuskoodeks
Code)
Guidelines for the administratsiooni nimel 18 1 20
Authorization of organizations tegutsevate
Acting on Behalf of the organisatsioonide
Administration6 volitamist käsitlevad
suunised
3 Eesti keelne tõlge kättesaadav Euroopa Liidu Teatajas: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-
content/ET/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A02004R0725 -20090420&qid=1769512343385
4 MLC konventsioon ja koodeks on avaldatud Riigi Teatajas: https://www.riigiteataja.ee/akt/208032016004
5 Eesti keelne tõlge kättesaadav Riigi Teatajas: https://www.riigiteataja.ee/akt/223082013001
6 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiiv 2009/15/EÜ, 23. aprill 2009, laevade kontrollimise ja ü levaatusega
tegelevate organisatsioonide ja veeteede ametite vastavat tegevust käsitlevate ühiste eeskirjade ja standardite
kohta, ELT L 131, 28.5.2009, lk 47–56, art 5 lg 2 p a) alusel kohustuslikuks tehtud suunis.
Specifications on the survey administratsiooni nimel 14 - 14
and certification functions of tegutsevate tunnustatud
recognized organizations organisatsioonide kontrolli
acting on behalf of the ja sertifitseerimisnõue te
Administration7 kirjeldus
International Code on the rahvusvaheline 437 3 451
Enchanced Programme of puistlastilaevade ja
Inspections During Surveys of naftatankerite ülevaatuste
Bulk Carriers and Oil Tankers käigus tehtavate kontrollide
(2011 ESP Code) tõhustatud
programmi koodeks
International Life-Saving rahvusvaheline 47 11 85
Appliances (LSA Code) päästevahendite koodeks
International Code for rahvusvaheline tulekatse 208 1 210
Application of Fire Test kohaldamise koodeks
Procedures (2010 FTP Code)
International Code for the Safe rahvusvaheline koodeks 9 4 17
Carriage of Packaged pakendatud kasutatud
Irradiated Nuclear Fuel, tuumkütuse, plutooniumi ja
Plutonium and High-Level kõrgradioaktiivsete
Radioactive Wastes on Board jäätmete ohutu veo kohta
Ships (INF Code) laevadel
International Code for Fire rahvusvaheline 39 12 108
Safety Systems (FSS Code) tuleohutussüsteemide
koodeks
International Maritime rahvusvaheline ohtlike 954 - Iga 2 aasta
dangerous Goods (IMDG kaupade mereveo koodeks järel
Code) antakse
välja uus
konsolidee
ritud
versioon,
võrdväärse
s mahus
Technical provisions for means juurdepääsuvahendite 10 - 10
of access for inspections ülevaatuse tehnilised sätted
Standards and criteria for sideühekordse plaadistusega 21 - 21
structures of bulk carriers on puistlastilaevade
single-skin construction pardakonstruktsioonide
standardid ja kriteeriumid
Standards for owners omanikupoolse 4 - 4
inspection and maintenance of puitlastilaeva lastiluukide
bulk carrier hatch covers
7 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määruse (EÜ) nr 391/2009, 23. aprill 2009, laevade kontrollimise ja
ülevaatusega tegelevate organisatsioonide ühiste eeskirjade ja standardite kohta, ELT L 131, 28.5.2009, I lisa ptk
A p 7 alusel kohustuslikuks tehtud dokument.
ülevaatuse tehnohoolduse
standardid
Performance standard for tehnilised nõuded kõigi 20 2 24
protective coatings for laevade ja puistlastilaevade
dedicated seawater ballast topeltplaadistusega
tanks in all types of ships and ruumide eriotstarbeliste
double-side skin spaces of bulk merevee ballasttankide
carriers kaitsekatetele
International Code of the laevaõnnetuste ja ohtlike 21 - 21
International Standards and juhtumite ohutusjuurdluse
Recommended Practices for a rahvusvaheliste aluste ja
Safety Investigation into a soovituslike tavade
Marine Casualty of Marine koodeks (ohutusjuurdluse
Incident (Casualty koodeks)
Investigation Code)
International Code on Intact rahvusvaheline vigastamata 91 2 97
Stability (2008 IS Code) laeva püstuvuse koodeks
International Maritime Solid rahvusvaheline puistlastide 514 2 1100
Bulk Cargoes (IMSBC Code) mereveo ohutuskoodeks
International Goal-based Ship toornaftatankerite 7 - 7
Construction Standards for lastitankide kaitsekihtidele
Bulk Carriers and Oil Tankers esitatavad tehnilised
nõuded
Performance Standard for toornaftatankerite lasti- 26 2 30
Protective Coatings for tankide alternatiivsetele
Alternative Means of roostekaitsevahenditele
Corrosion Protection for Cargo esitatavad tehnilised
Oil Tanks of Crude Oil Tankers nõuded
Code on Noise Levels on laeva müratasemete 34 1 68
Board Ships (NOISE Code) koodeks
Code for Recognized tunnustatud 60 - 60
Organizations (RO Code) organisatsioonide koodeks
Code for Ships Operating in polaarkoodeks 57 - 57
Polar Waters (Polar Code)
International Code of safety for gaaskütusel või muudel 121 6 146
Ships using Gases or other madala leekpunktiga
Low-flashing Point Fuels (IGF kütustel töötavate laevade
Code) ohutuse rahvusvaheline
koodeks
Requirements for maintenance, Päästevarustuse 11 1 13
thorough examination, hoolduseks, testimiseks,
operational testing, overhaul remonttöödeks ning
and repair of lifeboats and veeskamisseadmete
rescue boats, launching tehnilised nõuded
appliances and release gear (the
Requirements)
International Code of Safety Polaarvetes sõitvate 25 - 25
for Ships Carrying Industrial laevade meeskonnaliikmete
Personnel (IP Code) ohutusnõuded
MARPOL konventsioon
Code for the Construction and ohtlikke kemikaale 65 10 158
Equipment of Ships Carrying mahtlastina vedava laeva
Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk ehituse ja seadmete
(BCH Code) koodeks
Code for Approval of Ballast ballastvee käitlemis- 39 - 39
Water Management Systems süsteemide heakskiitmise
(BWMS Code) eeskiri8
STCW konventsioon
STCW Code Meremeeste väljaõppe, - 12 82
diplomeerimise ja
vahiteenistuse (STCW)
koodeks
KOKKU: 6077
Eeltoodud IMO instrumentidest on ligikaudu 2000 lehekülge eesti keelde tõlkimata. Lisaks
vajavad olemasolevad tõlked toimetamist ning koostamata on instrumentide heakskiitmiseks
vajalikud õigusaktid ja nende sisu avavad seletuskirjad. IMO instrumentide ajakohastamise
sagedus on erinev. Kui mõnda instrumenti on pärast selle vastuvõtmist muudetud vaid üksikutel
kordadel kui sedagi, siis näiteks enam kui 900-leheküljelise IMDG koodeksi uus terviktekst
võetakse vastu iga kahe aasta järel. Seega ei piirdu koodeksite riigisisese avaldamisega seotud
töö ühekordse tõlkimise, toimetamise ja õigusaktide koostamisega, vaid eeldab instrumentide
pidevat ajakohastamist ning toob riigile kaasa püsiva töökoormuse ja korduva tõlkekulu.
Ainuüksi IMDG koodeksi tervikteksti tõlkimine maksab üle 20 000 euro.
2024. aastal toimus Eestis IMO kohustuslik audit, mille käigus hinnati Eesti kohustuste täitmist
lipu-, sadama- ja rannikuriigina. Muu hulgas tuvastati auditi leiuna (finding; FD-1), et Eesti ei
ole kehtestanud asjakohaseid riigisiseseid õigusakte, et täielikult ja terviklikult jõustada IMO
konventsioonide alusel kohustuslikuks muudetud koodeksid. Parenduste ajakava järgi on
koodeksite avaldamise esimese etapi tähtaeg 2028. aasta lõpp.
Koodeksid on suunatud eeskätt laevandussektori professionaalsetele kasutajatele ning nende
tehniline sisu ei ole mõeldud laiapõhjaliseks avalikuks kasutamiseks. Laevanduse töökeel on
valdavalt inglise keel ning praktikas kasutatakse koodeksite ingliskeelseid originaaltekste. Eesti
lipu all sõitvatel laevadel ei ole tuvastatud puudusi, mis oleksid seotud koodeksite eestikeelsete
tõlgete puudumisega. Seetõttu on põhjendatud hinnata, kas kõigi tehniliste koodeksite
tõlkimiseks, toimetamiseks ja Riigi Teatajas avaldamiseks vajaliku püsiva ressursikulu
tegemine on proportsionaalne nende tõlgete tegeliku kasutuse ja sihtrühma vajadustega.
Välislepingute jõustumine
Välissuhtlemisseaduse (VäSS) § 19 kohaselt võtab Eesti Vabariik välislepingu sõlmimisega
endale välislepingus ettenähtud kohustused. Välisleping sõlmitakse sellele alla kirjutades, kirju
või noote vahetades, lepingut ratifitseerides, heaks kiites, sellega ühinedes või muul lepingus
8 Õige tõlge oleks ballastvee käitlemis-süsteemide heakskiitmise koodeks.
ettenähtud viisil. VäSS § 25 sätestab välislepingu muutmise korra – üldjuhul toimub see
välislepingu sõlmimisega samas korras. Paragrahvi 25 lõigete 2 ja 3 alusel on teatavatel
tingimustel võimalik anda välislepingu muutmiseks nõusolek ka Vabariigi Valitsusel või
valdkonna eest vastutaval ministril. Ministri määrusega välislepingu muudatuste heakskiitmise
võimalus loodi VäSS 2025. aastal jõustunud muudatustega, mille eesmärk oli vähendada
Riigikogu, Vabariigi Valitsuse ja ministeeriumide halduskoormust. Seaduse seletuskirjas
viidatakse muudatuste Riigi Teatajas õigeaegse avaldamise tähtsusele, et avalikkus pääseks ligi
välislepingutest tulenevate reeglite, õiguste ja kohustustega seonduvale teabele.
Kuigi muudatustega lihtsustati välislepingute muutmise menetlust ja vähendati sellega seotud
halduskoormust, on IMO tehniliste instrumentide puhul menetlusega kaasnev töökoormus
jätkuvalt märkimisväärne. Nimelt tuleb ka VäSS § 25 lõike 3 alusel ministri määrusega
heakskiidetavate muudatuste puhul järgida asjakohaseid hea õigusloome ja normitehnika
eeskirja (HÕNTE) nõudeid. See tähendab, et IMO kohustuslike koodeksite ja muude tehniliste
instrumentide riigisiseseks heakskiitmiseks tuleb ette valmistada vajalikud õigusaktid ning
koostada nende eelnõude sisu avavad materjalid, sealhulgas asjakohane analüüs ja mõjude
hindamine.
Aastaid kehtinud koodeksite iga tehnilise normi kohta selgitusi koostada on
ebaproportsionaalselt töömahukas ning ühtlasi puudub selleks riigis piisav erialane võimekus.
Koodeksite ja muude tehniliste instrumentide iga muudatuse riigisisene menetlemine nõuab
märkimisväärset ametnike tööaega, kuigi vastavate selgituste koostamine ei pruugi anda nende
professionaalsetele kasutajatele (meremehed) olulist lisaväärtust. Selline töökoormus on eriti
problemaatiline olukorras, kus instrumente ajakohastatakse regulaarselt ning nende
eestikeelsete tõlgete järele puudub praktikas tuvastatud vajadus.
Vastavalt rahvusvaheliste lepingute õiguse Viini konventsiooni art 24 p-le 1 jõustuvad
rahvusvahelised lepingud lepingus ettenähtud korras. Seega pole välislepingu avaldamine tema
jõustumise tingimus ning konventsioonide teistel osalisriikidel on näiteks sadamariigi kontrolli
raames õigus kontrollida ja nõuda Eesti lippu kandva laeva nõuetele vastavust. Olukorras, kus
rahvusvahelise õiguse alusel koodeksid jm IMO instrumendid kehtivad, kuid riigisisese õiguse
järgi nad justkui kohustuslikud ei ole, tekib õiguslik vaakum. Laevaomanikel võib tekkida
ekslik arusaam, et nõuded nende suhtes ei kehti, kuigi tegelikkuses on nõuded nende suhtes
formaalselt kehtivad, kuid riigisiseselt de facto mittekohaldatavad. See tähendab, et Eesti
lipuriigina ei saa laeva suhtes koodeksitest tulenevate nõuete osas oma jurisdiktsiooni
kohaldada, kuid välisriik (sadamariik) saab.
Välisriikide praktika
Riigikogu 12.11.2020 otsuse „Õigusloomepoliitika põhialuste aastani 2030 heakskiitmine“ 9
punkti II.8 järgi tuleks võrrelda, kuidas samalaadseid probleeme lahendatakse Eestiga
õiguslikult, kultuuriliselt ja ühiskonnakorralduslikult sarnastes riikides. Mitmetes EL
liikmesriikides üldjuhul ei tõlgita välislepingute tehnilise iseloomuga instrumentide muudatusi.
Soomes ei ole vaja muudatusi tõlkida, kui välislepingu muudatusi ei pea parlament
ratifitseerima ning kui nad ei ole oma olemuselt sisulised (“yleiselta merkilykseltaan vähäisiä”).
IMO tehnilised instrumendid jõustatakse enamasti valitsuse määrusega. Määruses viidatakse
koodeksit või selle muudatust sisaldavale IMO resolutsiooni numbrile, kuid resolutsiooni või
9 Riigikogu 12.11.2020 otsuse „Õigusloomepoliitika põhialuste aastani 2030 heakskiitmine“, kättesaadav:
https://www.riigiteataja.ee/akt/317112020002
selle tõlget määrusele ei lisata. Määruses sisaldub märkus, mille kohaselt on muudatused
kättesaadavad Soome Transpordiameti veebilehel www.traficom.fi ja ametis kohapeal, kus on
võimalik saada muudatuste kohta teavet soome ja rootsi keeles. 10, 11, 12 Parlamendi heakskiitu
vajavad muudatused juhul, kui IMO tehniline instrument reguleerib üksikisikute õigusi ja
kohustusi ning samad küsimused on juba reguleeritud Soome õigusaktides. Näiteks 2011. aastal
kiitis parlament heaks resolutsiooniga MSC.294(87) vastu võetud IMDG koodeksi muudatused,
lugedes seadusandliku tasandi reguleerimisalasse kuuluvaks üksnes peatüki 1.3, mis avaldati
koos tõlkega.13 Eelnõus rõhutati, et ülejäänud koodeksi sätted on väga tehnilised ja
üksikasjalikud ning neid kohaldab kitsas professionaalne sihtrühm, mistõttu ei peetud
põhjendatuks kogu resolutsiooni seadusega jõustada ja Soome õigusaktide kogus avaldada.14
Muudatuste osalise avaldamata jätmise õiguslik alus on Soome õigusaktide kogu seaduse (Laki
Suomen säädöskokoelmasta, 188/2000) § 9.15 Säte võimaldab erandjuhul otsustada, et lepingut,
mille on heaks kiitnud parlament või mille heakskiitmiseks on vaja parlamendi nõusolekut, ei
avaldata lepingute sarjas, kui lepingu sätted on üldise tähenduse seisukohalt väheolulised või
kui lepingu sätete rakendamiseks Soomes ei ole vaja vastu võtta eraldi seadust. Sellisel juhul
peab ministeerium tagama lepingu originaalkeeles avaliku kättesaadavuse üldkasutatavas
andmesidevõrgus (nt pädeva Soome asutuse koduleht, kuid mitte Soome Riigi Teataja)16, 17 ning
tuleb nimetada asutus, kust saab lepingu ärakirju ning mis annab lepingu kohta teavet soome ja
rootsi keeles.
Rootsis muudetakse IMO tehnilised instrumendid siduvaks transpordiameti
(Transportstyrelsen) määrusega. Seejuures kasutatakse kas inkorporeerimise või
ümberkirjutamise (sh tekstiline ülevõtmine) meetodit. IMDG koodeksi rakendamiseks on
valitud tekstilise ülevõtmise meetod, kuid seletuskirjas ei ole valikut põhjendatud.18 IMSBC
koodeksi puhul on ainsaks sobivaks meetodiks peetud aga inkorporeerimismeetodit (viiteline
ülevõtmine). Rootsi parlament (Riksdag) on märkinud, et kui rahvusvahelisel lepingul puudub
autentne rootsikeelne tekst, tuleks üldreeglina kasutada ümberkirjutamist. Kui aga esinevad
erilised põhjused, näiteks juhul, kui normid on peamiselt suunatud ametiasutustele või
konkreetsetele isikute rühmadele, kelle puhul ei saa eeldada, et lepinguga tutvumine valmistab
raskusi, võib kasutada ka inkorporeerimismeetodit. Inkorporeerimise korral sätestatakse
õigusaktis, et rahvusvahelise lepingu sätted on Rootsis vahetult kohaldatavad ning kui leping
10 Valitsuse määrus, millega kiidetakse heaks IMSBC koodeksi muudatusi sisaldav IMO resolutsioon
MSC.575(110), https://www.finlex.fi/api/media/statute/1080242/mainPdf/main.pdf?timestamp=2026 -08-
24T07%3A15%3A25.549Z.
11 Valitsuse määrus, millega kiidetakse heaks IBC koodeksi ja BCH koodeksi muudatusi sisaldavad IMO
resolutsioonid MEPC.302(72) ja MEPC.303(72),
https://www.finlex.fi/api/media/statute/38638/mainPdf/main.pdf?timestamp=2019-10-
10T00%3A00%3A00.000Z.
12 Valitsuse määrus, millega kiidetakse heaks SOLAS konventsiooni ja mitmete koodeksite muudatusi sisaldavad
IMO resolutsioonid, https://www.finlex.fi/api/media/treaty/893078/mainPdf/main.pdf?timestamp=2025-11-
25T06%3A52%3A44.000Z
13 Seadus, millega kiidetakse heaks IMDG koodeksi peatüki 1.3 sätted,
https://www.finlex.fi/api/media/treaty/909749/mainPdf/main.pdf?timestamp=2026-01-
27T09%3A06%3A55.840Z.
14 https://api.eduskunta.fi/documents/fi/HE/2011/he_102%2B2011.pdf.
15 Seaduse inglise keelne tõlge: https://www.finlex.fi/api/media/statute-foreign-language-
translation/688635/mainPdf/main.pdf?timestamp=2000-02-24T22%3A00%3A00.000Z.
16 Välislepingute muudatuste menetlemine, lk 20.
17 § 9, Laki Suomen säädöskokoelmasta, kättesaadav:
https://www.finlex.fi/fi/lainsaadanto/saadoskokoelma/2000/188
18 IMDG koodeksi konsultatsioonimaterjalid: https://www.transportstyrelsen.se/sv/om-oss/dina-rattigheter-lagar-
och-regler/lagar-och-regler/utgangna-remisser/remiss-av-imdg-koden/.
on koostatud võõrkeeles, muutub võõrkeelne tekst õiguslikult kehtivaks.19 Sellist lahendust
võimaldab seadus (1976:633) § 14 neljas lõige.20 IMSBC koodeksi puhul on leitud, et tõlkimise
nõudest kõrvalekaldumiseks esinevad erilised põhjused, kuna regulatsioon ei ole suunatud
laiemale avalikkusele. Koodeksit sisaldav IMO resolutsioon on heaks kiidetud transpordiameti
määrusega, mille lisas on resolutsioon ja koodeksi ingliskeelne tekst.
Lätis moodustavad IMO kohustuslikud instrumendid osa riigisisesest õigusest ning neid
kohaldatakse üldjuhul vahetult alates nende rahvusvahelisest jõustumisest. Nende õiguslik
toime ei sõltu läti keelde tõlkimisest. Läti keelde tõlgitakse ja ametlikult avaldatakse eelkõige
rahvusvahelised konventsioonid ja nende muudatused ning teatavatel juhtudel ka kohustuslike
IMO koodeksite muudatused (ISM, ISPS ja STCW koodeksid). Kõiki IMO koodekseid ei ole
kohustust täies ulatuses läti keelde tõlkida, kuna see ei mõjuta instrumendi jõustumist,
rakendamist ega täitmise tagamist. Praktikas kasutavad pädevad merendusasutused,
laevaomanikud, klassifikatsiooniühingud ja teised osapooled inglise keelt.21
Leedus on koodeksite tõlkimise küsimus samuti arutlusel. Enamik IMO koodekseid ei ole leedu
keelde tõlgitud. Leedu transpordiohutuse ameti hinnangul oleks kõikide koodeksite tõlkimine
väga ajamahukas, samas kui praktikas ei pruugita tõlkeid isegi kasutada. Samuti esineb ameti
hinnangul riigikeelde tõlkimisel vigade tekkimise risk. 22
Kliimaministeeriumile teadaolevalt ei tõlgita koodekseid ka Taanis ega Hollandis.
Bürokraatia vähendamise ettepanek
Nullbürokraatia algatus
Koalitsioonileppe 2025–2027 alapeatükk 7.2 (Õigusriik) käsitleb muu hulgas 2015.–2016.
aastal käivitatud nullbürokraatia algatusi23 . Üks nullbürokraatia algatusi on vähendada avaliku
sektori sisest bürokraatiat, sealhulgas tegevusi, mis ei loo lisandväärtust või on avaliku sektori
siseste koostööpartnerite jaoks raskesti mõistetavad ja koormavad. Koalitsioonileppes on
seatud eesmärgiks tugevdada õigusriigi aluseid ning teha õiguse ja õigluse saavutamine
kiiremaks ja efektiivsemaks. Samuti on jätkuvalt eesmärk vähendada ettevõtete, inimeste ja
avaliku sektori halduskoormust. Nende eesmärkide saavutamise üks võimalus on vähendada
õigusloome mahtu. Õigusloome mahu vähendamise vajadus tuleneb ka riigi piiratud
haldusvõimekusest. Mahukas õigusloome võib mõjutada ametnike suutlikkust koostada ja
menetleda eelnõusid õigeaegselt ning tagada nende kvaliteet. Seetõttu on oluline hinnata, kas
kavandatav õigusloome on vajalik ja otstarbekas ning kas seatud eesmärke on võimalik
saavutada väiksema halduskoormusega.
Riigikogu 12.11.2020 otsuse „Õigusloomepoliitika põhialuste aastani 2030 heakskiitmine“ 24
punkti II.4 kohaselt tuleb õigusloomes arvestada, et riigi pidamine peab olema paindlik, tõhus
ja kokkuhoidlik. Otsuse punkti II.6 esimese lause kohaselt seatakse sihiks, et aasta-aastalt
19 IMSBC koodeksi konsultatsioonimaterjalid: https://www.transportstyrelsen.se/sv/om-oss/dina-rattigheter-lagar-
och-regler/lagar-och-regler/utgangna-remisser/remiss-imsbc-koden/.
20 Sätte kohaselt leping, millel puudub rootsikeelne tekst, avaldatakse koos rootsikeelse tõlkega, välja arvatud
juhul, kui erilised põhjused tingivad teisiti. Lag (1976:633) om kungörande av lagar och andra författningar,
https://rkrattsbaser.gov.se/sfst?bet=1976:633.
21 Läti mereadministratsiooni (Latvijas Jūras administrācijā) sisend.
22 Leedu transpordiohutuse ameti (Lietuvos transporto saugos administracija) sisend.
23 Avaliku sektori sisese bürokraatia vähendamine, 2019. a vahearuanne. Rahandusministeerium, 2020.
24 Riigikogu 12.11.2020 otsuse „Õigusloomepoliitika põhialuste aastani 2030 heakskiitmine“, kättesaadav:
https://www.riigiteataja.ee/akt/317112020002
väheneb õigusloome regulatiivne koormus tuntavalt. Punktis III.12.3.5 rõhutatakse samuti
sisulise koormuse vähendamise ning normide kehtestamise vajalikkuse ja otstarbekuse
hindamise olulisust. Jätkuvalt tuleb otsida võimalusi vähendada olemasolevat koormust.
Seetõttu tuleb hinnata, milliste õigusaktide koostamine või muutmine on ühiskonna vaates
hädavajalik.
Koodeksite tõlkimise mittevajalikkus
Kliimaministeeriumi hinnangul ei ole kõigi IMO tehniliste koodeksite eesti keelde tõlkimine ja
Riigi Teatajas avaldamine ühiskonna vajadusi ning koodeksite tegelikku kasutuspraktikat
arvestades hädavajalik. IMO rahvusvahelistes konventsioonides (SOLAS, MARPOL, STCW,
LL, TONNAGE, COLREG) ning nende alusel kehtestatud koodeksites sisalduvad nõuded
kohalduvad konventsioonis määratletud laevadele. Laevade vastavust rahvusvahelistele
tehnilistele nõuetele kontrollitakse tehniliste ülevaatuste käigus, mille tegemine on üldjuhul
volitatud klassifikatsiooniühingutele. Klassifikatsiooniühing on eraõiguslik juriidiline isik, kes
osutab muuhulgas laevade klassifitseerimise ja sertifitseerimisega seotud teenuseid. Nende
tegevuse eesmärk on hinnata laeva konstruktsiooni tugevust ja oluliste detailide terviklikkust,
masinate ja roolisüsteemide töökindlust, energiavarustust ning muude laeva ohutuks
ekspluateerimiseks vajalike süsteemide töökorras olekut.
Eesti laevaregistris olev laev saab oma sertifitseerimiseks kasutada vaid
klassifikatsiooniühingut, millega Transpordiamet on sõlminud halduslepingu ning üksnes
lepingus sätestatud ulatuses25 . Eestis ei ole asutatud ühtegi klassifikatsiooniühingut ning valik
tuleb teha kuue välismaise klassifikatsiooniühingu hulgast, mille dokumendid on
ingliskeelsed.26 See tähendab, et laevaomaniku suhtlus klassifikatsiooniühinguga toimub
samuti eelduslikult inglise keeles.
Koodeksite tõlkimise mittevajalikkust näitab ka asjaolu, et senini (üle 30 aasta) ei ole
koodekseid (v.a ISM, ISPS, MLC, STCW) eesti keelde tõlgitud. Kui rahvusvahelise
välislepingu vastu on suur avalik huvi, on see enamasti üle võetud Euroopa Liidu õigusakti (nt
ISM koodeks ja ISPS koodeks), millest tulenevalt avaldatakse Euroopa Liidu Teatajas ka selle
tõlge. Samas sõidavad Eesti lippu kandvad laevad rahvusvaheliselt ning vastavad
rahvusvahelistele (sh koodeksite) nõuetele. Eesti lipp kuulub Paris MoU 27 lipuriikide
tulemusnimekirja28 alusel valgesse nimekirja (White List), mis näitab, et Eesti lipu all sõitvate
laevade välissadamates kinnipidamise protsent on järjepidevalt madal. Aastatel 2021–2024
teostatud kontrollidel avastati Eesti lippu kandvatel laevadel korduvaimad puudused MLC ja
25 Transpordiamet on sertifitseerimise üldjuhul volitanud klassifikatsiooniühingule. Erandite andmine ning ISM
koodeksi, ISPS koodeksi ja MLC konventsiooni kohase ülevaatuse tegemine on klassifikatsiooniühingule
volitatud üksnes juhtumipõhiselt, st üldreeglina teostab vastavaid ülevaatusi Transpordiamet ise.
26 Eestis tunnustatud klassifikatsiooniühingud on Lloyd´s Register (LR), Bureau Veritas (BV), DNV AS, American
Bureau of Shipping (ABS), Registro Italiano Navale (RINA) ja Polish Register of Shipping (PRS), kättesaadav:
https://www.transpordiamet.ee/laevaregistrid#tunnustatud-klassifi
27 Paris MoU (26. jaanuari 1982. a Pariisi vastastikuse mõistmise memorandum laevakontrolli kohta) ühendab
endas 28 liikmesriiki. Paris MoU missioon on välistada nõuetele mittevastavate laevade liiklus Euroopa meredel
ja Põhja Atlandil Ameerikast Euroopani sadamariigi kontrolli ühtlustatud süsteemi kaudu. Paris MoU sadamates
toimub välismaiste laevade pardal aastas üle 17 000 kontrolli, millega tagatakse et laevad vastavad
rahvusvahelistele ohutus-, turvalisus- ja keskkonnanõuetele ning et meeskonnaliikmetel on piisavad elu- ja
töötingimused. Paris MoU põhimõte on, et esmavastutus merenduse rahvusvahelistes konventsioonides sätestatud
nõuete täitmise eest lasub laevaomanikul. Vastutus sellise vastavuse tagamise eest on aga lipuriigil.
28 Paris MoU vaatab iga-aastaselt üle inspektsioonide tulemused ja kinnitab lipuriikide tulemusnimekirja. Nimekiri
on jagatud kolme kategooriasse: valge (White List), hall (Grey List) ja must (Black List). Kategooriad jaotuvad
vastavalt sellele, kui palju riigi lippu kandvaid laevu välissadamates kinni peetakse.
ISM nõuete osas.29 2025. aastal avastati enim puudusi töötingimuste (MLC) ja tuleohutuse osas.
Kuna Eesti lippu kandvate laevade korduvaimad puudused on töötingimuste osas, mille puhul
on regulatsioonid eesti keelde tõlgitud, siis ei ole kontrollides avastatud puudused seotud
asjaoluga, et koodeksid on eesti keelde tõlkimata ja Riigi Teatajas avaldamata.
Laevandus on rahvusvaheline valdkond ning olukord, kus rahvusvaheliselt sõitval laeval on
üksnes ühest rahvusest ja ühe emakeelega laevapere, on pigem erandlik. Seetõttu on laeva
töökeel üldjuhul inglise keel või vähemalt kasutatakse seda töökeele kõrval. Inglise keeles
suheldakse tellijate, tarnijate, sadamate ja ametiasutustega (load, kontrollid), samuti teiste
laevadega merel, mille lihtsustamiseks kasutatakse regulatsioonide ingliskeelseid tekste.
Üksnes eesti keeles tegutsemine on rahvusvahelises laevanduses võimatu. Seetõttu on laevapere
liikmete koolitusnõudeid sisaldavas määruses sätestatud kohustus tagada, et meremeestel oleks
piisav inglise keele oskus, et nad oleksid suutelised täitma oma kohustusi laeval. 30 Ka juhul,
kui Eesti lipu all sõitva laeva töökeel ei ole inglise, prantsuse ega hispaania keel, tuleb näiteks
laeva turvaplaan tõlkida ühte nendest keeltest. 31 Laevapere liikme töö- ja puhkeaja arvestust
peetakse Eesti laeval eesti ja inglise keeles.32
Lisaks on ka riigisisese parvlaevateenuse osutajad kinnitanud, et kasutavad regulatsioonide
ingliskeelseid tekste ning ei pea vajalikuks nende tõlkimist eesti keelde.
Tõlke ebakvaliteetsus
RTS § 6 lg 3 p 2 järgi on vandetõlgi pädevuses Riigi Teatajas avaldatava välislepingu tõlkimine
eesti keelde. Vandetõlgi seaduse § 7 lg 1 näeb ette, et kõiki dokumente, mille tõlge peab
välisriigi või Eesti õigusakti kohaselt olema ametlik või kinnitatud, tõlgivad Eestis üksnes
vandetõlgid. Justiitsministri 13. novembri 2013 määruses nr 36 „Vandetõlgile tõlketööde
määramise ja täitmise kord ning tasumäärad“ on mitmeid sätteid, mille eesmärk on tõlgete
kvaliteedi ja nendes kasutatud terminite ühtsuse tagamine. Sellest hoolimata on MERI
kogemusel tõlgete tellimine vaevarikas ja aeganõudev, kuna kõik tõlked tuleb tellijal
(ametnikel) üle kontrollida. Vandetõlk ei järgi alati Riigi Teatajas avaldatud välislepingus
kasutatud erialatermineid, samuti ei ole tõlge järjepidev. Näiteks on SOLAS konventsiooni ja
1988. a protokolli 2017. aasta konsolideeritud tekstis üks ja sama instrument (resolutsiooniga
A.714(17) vastu võetud lasti paigutamise ja kinnitamise ohutuskoodeks) kahel juhul tõlgitud
kui eeskiri ja kahel juhul kui koodeks. Vandetõlgi töös esineb ka sisulisi vigu. Näiteks tõlkis
vandetõlk hiljuti resolutsioonis MSC.520(106) sisalduvat reeglit selliselt, et vedelkütust
vedavad laevad peavad enne kütuse tankimist esitama vedelkütuse tarnija esindaja allkirjastatud
ja kinnitatud deklaratsiooni, mis tõendab, et tarnitav kütus vastab reeglitele. Õige tõlge olnuks,
et vedelkütust vedavatele laevadele tuleb enne kütuse tankimist esitada eelnimetatud
deklaratsioon. Esimesel juhul olnuks kohustatud pooleks laev, kuigi reegli järgi on selleks
vedelkütuse tarnija. Seega ei taga vandetõlgi kasutamise nõue tõlgete kvaliteeti ning ametnikele
kaasneb tõlke tellimisega ja üle kontrollimisega ebaproportsionaalselt suur koormus, kui
arvestada ka seda, et tegemist pole filoloogidega. Juhul, kui ametlikult avaldatud välislepingu
tõlkes on sisulised vead, lähtutakse kohustuste kindlaksmääramisel välislepingu autentsest
29 Inspection Results Deficiencies, Paris MoU of Port State Control, kättesaadav:
https://parismou.org/Statistics%26Current-Lists/inspection-results-deficiencies
30 Vabariigi Valitsuse 20.06.2013 määrus nr 96 „Laevapere liikmete koolitus- ja kvalifikatsiooninõuded ning
diplomeerimise kord“, § 9 lg 2, kättesaadav: https://www.riigiteataja.ee/akt/118092024003
31 ISPS koodeksi A osa p 9.1, kättesaadav: https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-
content/ET/TXT/?uri=CELEX%3A02004R0725 -20090420
32 Vabariigi Valitsuse 10.07.2014 määrus nr 111 „Laevapere liikme töö - ja puhkeaja arvestuse pidamise kord“,
kättesaadav: https://www.riigiteataja.ee/akt/112072014173
tekstist ning selle mittetundmine ei vabasta laevaomanikku vastutusest. Seepärast on mõistlik
töötada välislepingu autentsest tekstist lähtudes ning nii see laevanduses valdavalt ongi.
Terviktekstide süsteemi puudumine
Seni on Välisministeerium leidnud, et välislepingu põhiteksti ja lisade ning nende muudatuste
erinevates kohtades avaldamisel on avalikkusel raske lepingu tekstis orienteerida ning kannatab
õigusselgus. Õigusselguse huvides ning võimaldamaks terviktekstide süsteemi teket, toetab
Välisministeerium seda, et välislepingute muudatused, sh lisade kui lepingute lahutamatute
osade muudatused, tuleks jätkuvalt tõlkida eesti keelde ning avaldada Riigi Teatajas. 33 Antud
seisukoht ei arvesta IMO õigusloome praktikaga ega ka sellega, et kõnealused õigusaktid on
suunatud majandus- ja kutsetegevuses tegutsevatele isikutele. Nimelt on IMO õigusaktide
normi adressaadi vaatest üks suurimaid probleeme see, et enamasti muudetakse välislepingus
üksikuid sätteid või lisatakse üksikud reeglid, ilma lepingu või selle osa (lisa) tervikteksti
koostamata. Riigi Teatajas avaldatakse muudatused samas vormis ehk riigisiseselt puudub
mehhanism, mis looks välislepingu ajakohase tervikteksti sarnaselt riigisisestele õigusaktidele.
Selliselt on aga sisuliselt võimatu kehtivates nõuetes orienteeruda, mistõttu kasutavad
laevandussektor ja Transpordiameti laevainspektorid IMO õigusaktide ingliskeelseid
andmebaase. Koodeksite eestikeelsetel tõlgetel puudub seega kasutajaskond, mistõttu ei
kaasneks koodeksite tõlkimise kohustuse kaotamisega negatiivset mõju ega kannataks
õigusselgus. Küll aga vähendaks see oluliselt ametnike töökoormust ning riigi kulusid.
Kooskõla põhiseadusega
Leiame, et koodeksite eesti keelde tõlkimata jätmine on õiguslikult võimalik ning ei ole
vastuolus põhiseadusega (PS).
PS § 120 sätestab, et Eesti Vabariigi suhtlemise korra teiste riikide ja rahvusvaheliste
organisatsioonidega sätestab seadus. Välissuhtlemine ja välislepingute riigisisene menetlus on
reguleeritud VäSS-ga. Selle § 3 lg 2 kohaselt on välisleping Eesti Vabariigi ja välisriigi või
rahvusvahelise organisatsiooni kahe- või mitmepoolne ühest või mitmest dokumendist koosnev
kirjalik kokkulepe, mida reguleeritakse rahvusvahelise õigusega. Käesoleva analüüsi aluseks
olevad IMO instrumendid on välislepingu alusel kehtestatud laevandusspetsiifilised tehnilised
dokumendid, mis on ühtlasi välislepingu osad.
PS § 3 lg 2 kohaselt avaldatakse seadused ettenähtud korras. Täitmiseks kohustuslikud saavad
olla üksnes avaldatud seadused. Õigusaktide avaldamise kord on kehtestatud Riigi Teataja
seaduses (RTS). Selle § 3 lg 3 p 2 järgi avaldatakse Riigi Teataja teises osas „Välislepingud ja
muud välissuhtlemisalased aktid“ sõlmitud välisleping eesti keeles või selle tõlge eesti keelde,
kui välislepingu tekst on ainult võõrkeeltes, ja vähemalt ühes tõlgendamise aluseks olevas
võõrkeeles. Eesti Vabariigi põhiseaduse kommenteeritud väljaande kohaselt loetakse seaduse
avaldamiseks õiguslikus mõttes selle ametlikku avaldamist Riigi Teatajas (PS § 108). 34 Samas
eristatakse väljaandes välislepingut selgelt riigisisesest seadusest – kui välislepingu normid
oma sisu ja eesmärgi poolest võivad reguleerida riigisiseseid suhteid ja on selleks piisava
33 Välislepingute muudatuste menetlemine, lk 20. Välisministeerium, kättesaadav:
https://www.vm.ee/sites/default/files/documents/2023-
05/V%C3%A4lislepingute%20muudatuste%20menetlemine_23.pdf
34 Madise, L ja Mälksoo, L. PS § 3 kommentaarid, p 14 – Eesti Vabariigi põhiseadus. Kommenteeritud väljaanne,
viies, parandatud ja täiendatud väljaanne. Justiitsministeerium: 2020. Kättesaadav:
https://pohiseadus.ee/public/PSkomm2020.pdf
konkreetsusastmega, siis kohaldatakse välislepingu norme riigisiseselt kui rahvusvahelise
õiguse norme. Välislepingu jõustumist ja kehtivusmuudatusi reguleerib rahvusvaheline õigus.35
Seega võib väita, et kuna välisleping ei ole seadus PS § 108 mõttes ning selle norme
kohaldatakse Eesti õigusaktide kõrval, ei sea põhiseadus välislepingu puhul nõudeks just Riigi
Teatajas avaldamist. Sellist tõlgendust võimaldab seisukoht, et õigusriigi printsiibist lähtuvalt
tuleb üldjuhul õigusaktid, mis sisaldavad õigusnorme (materiaalsed seadused),
normiadressaatidele teatavaks teha kas nende avaldamisega Riigi Teatajas või avalikustamisega
muus vormis.36 See tähendab, et on ka muid avaldamise viise ja kohti, millel on Riigi Teatajaga
samaväärne tähendus. Õigusaktide avaldamise eesmärk on pakkuda isikutele võimalus nendega
tutvuda, sest salajast õigust olla ei või. Oluline on, et normi adressaadil on mõistlik võimalus
normi olemasolust ja sisust teada saada. Kuna erialakirjanduse kohaselt on lubatav õigusaktide
avalikustamine ka muus vormis, siis leiame, et valdkonnaspetsiifiliste tehniliste normide
(konventsioonide osaks olevad koodeksid) puhul võib lubada nende avaldamist valdkonna
ametiasutuse (antud juhul Transpordiamet) koduleheküljel. Seejuures oleks piisav
õigusnormide avaldamine originaaltekstidena (inglise keeles), kuna IMO regulatsioonide
adressaadid tegutsevad oma majandus- ja kutsetegevuses rahvusvahelises valdkonnas
(laevanduses), kus suheldakse üldreeglina inglise keeles.
Antud teema juures võib tuua paralleeli standarditest. Standardid on oma olemuselt
vabatahtlikud, kuid õigusaktiga võib standardi kohustuslikuks teha. Standardite levitamise osas
on nii Euroopa kui ka rahvusvahelised standardiorganisatsioonid kokku leppinud reeglid.
Reeglite peamiseks eesmärgiks on standardiorganisatsioonidele kuuluvate standardite
autoriõiguste kaitse tagamine, mille kaudu omakorda tagatakse standardimise finantseerimine.
Seetõttu on standardid üldreeglina tasulised ning kättesaadavad riigi standardiorganisatsiooni
juures. Eesti standardiorganisatsioonil (EVS) on õigus standardeid Eesti standardiks üle võtta,
valides kolme meetodi vahel: jõustumisteate-, ümbertrüki- või tõlkemeetod. Kahe esimese
meetodi puhul võetakse standard üle ühes standardiorganisatsiooni ametlikus keeles.
Tõlkemeetodi puhul tõlgitakse ülevõetav standard eesti keelde. Ülevõtmise meetodi valik
sõltub asjast huvitatud isikute vajadustest, eelistusest ning võimalusest ja valmidusest seda
protsessi rahastada. Eesti standardid hakkavad kehtima hetkest, mil nende vastuvõtmise kohta
on avaldatud teade Eesti standardiorganisatsiooni ametlikus väljaandes EVS Teataja, mis ilmub
igakuiselt veebiväljaandena ning on tasuta kättesaadav EVS-i interneti kodulehelt. EVS
Teatajas avaldatakse üksnes teade sellise standardi kehtima hakkamisest või kehtetuks
muutumisest vmt, standardi teksti ei avaldata. Standardeid reguleeriva toote nõuetele vastavuse
seaduse seletuskirjas on leitud, et seaduseelnõu ega ka PS § 3 nõua EVS-ilt standardite tasuta
kättesaadavuse tagamist avalikkusele. Viidatud on, et ka Riigikohus on seaduse kättesaadavuse
nõudele lähenenud leebelt ning lugenud seaduse avaldamise nõude täidetuks juhul kui isikule
on tegelikult seadus kättesaadav (3-4-1-6-01, punkt 16). Ühtlasi on märgitud, et standardi alusel
ei teostata riigivõimu PS § 3 mõistes, sest riigivõimu teostamiseks peab alati olema konkreetne
õigusnorm, mida standard võib üksnes aidata täpsustada ja sisustada. 37 Eeltoodust nähtub, et
teatud valdkondades on aktsepteeritud tehniliste normide avaldamine mujal kui Riigi Teatajas
ja ilma eestikeelse tõlketa. Kui riigisisesed õigusaktid viitavad standarditele, tuleb neid järgida.
Kuigi IMO instrumentides (koodeksid ja eeskirjad) sisalduvad tehnilised normid on igal juhul
kohustuslikud, ei ole need õigusnormid, vaid üksnes aitavad täpsustada ja sisustada
konventsiooni põhitekstis sisalduvaid kohustusi.
35 Mälksoo, L., jt. PS § 123 kommentaarid, p 4 – ibid.
36 Madise, L. ja Mälksoo, L. PS § 3 kommentaarid, p 14 – ibid.
37 Toote nõuetele vastavuse seaduse eelnõu seletuskiri (702 SE), eelnõu 5. peatükk (lk 24 jj), kättesaadav:
https://www.riigikogu.ee/tegevus/eelnoud/eelnou/7c5abf4d-bd03-51cd-d327-a40bda1447f6/toote-nouetele-
vastavuse-seadus/
Kokkuvõtvalt
Arvestades heakskiitu vajavate IMO instrumentide mahtu (2026. a septembri seisuga ca 2000
lk tõlkimist ja ca 6000 lk tõlke sõna-sõnalist terminikontrolli, reeglite sisuliste selgituste ja
mõjuhinnangu koostamist) ei ole IMO auditi järgsete parenduste teostamine ettenähtud
tähtajaks võimalik. Lisaks olemasolevatele IMO õigusaktidele lisandub konventsioonide
muudatusi pidevalt, kuna IMO komiteedes käib järjepidev töö. Puudujäägid IMO auditis ja
parenduste ajakava järgimises madaldavad Eesti riigi reitingut erinevates valdkondlikes
konkurentsivõime edetabelites (näiteks ICS Flag State performance Table), mis omakorda
kahjustab Eesti mainet ning merendusalast konkurentsivõimet. See on aga vastuolus
koalitsioonileppe 2025–2027 p-ga 353, milles on kokku lepitud laevandussektori
konkurentsivõime tõstmine.
Laevandussektoril puudub vajadus ja huvi tehniliste nõuete eesti keelde tõlkimise vastu,
mistõttu ei looks koodeksite eestikeelsete tekstide avaldamine lisandväärtust. Avalikus sektoris
lisandväärtust mitteloovate tegevuste vähendamine on üks nullbürokraatia algatuse eesmärke.
Leiame, et koodeksite eesti keelde tõlkimisest loobumine aitaks vähendada ametnike
töökoormust ja hoida kärbete ajal kokku olulisi finantsressursse.
Eeltoodust johtuvalt teeme ettepaneku muuta RTS-i selliselt, et seaduses sätestatud juhul (nt
MSOS) võib välislepingu alusel antud valdkonnaspetsiifilisi tehnilisi norme sisaldavad
regulatiivsed instrumendid avaldada vastava valdkonna valitsusasutuse koduleheküljel, välja
arvatud juhul, kui välislepingu eestikeelset tõlget nõuab avalik huvi (nt MLC ja STCW
koodeksid). Rõhutame, et konventsioonide põhitekst ja selle lisa ning nende muudatused
avaldataks endiselt Riigi Teatajas koos tõlkega.
Lisad:
1. IMDG koodeks
2. IGF koodeks
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108)
(adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
THE MARITIME SAFETY COMMITTEE,
RECALLING Article 28(b) of the Convention on the International Maritime Organization
concerning the functions of the Committee,
RECALLING ALSO resolution MSC.122(75) by which it adopted the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code (hereinafter referred to as "the IMDG Code"), which has become
mandatory under chapter VII of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea
(SOLAS), 1974, as amended (hereinafter referred to as "the Convention"),
RECALLING FURTHER article VIII(b) and regulation VII/1.1 of the Convention concerning the
procedure for amending the IMDG Code,
HAVING CONSIDERED, at its 108th session, amendments to the IMDG Code, proposed and
circulated in accordance with article VIII(b)(i) of the Convention,
1 ADOPTS, in accordance with article VIII(b)(iv) of the Convention, amendments to the
IMDG Code, the text of which is set out in the annex to the present resolution;
2 DETERMINES, in accordance with article VIII(b)(vi)(2)(bb) of the Convention, that the
said amendments shall be deemed to have been accepted on 1 July 2025, unless prior to that
date more than one third of the Contracting Governments to the Convention or Contracting
Governments the combined merchant fleets of which constitute not less than 50% of the gross
tonnage of the world's merchant fleet, have notified their objections to the amendments;
3 INVITES Contracting Governments to the Convention to note that, in accordance
with article VIII(b)(vii)(2) of the Convention, the amendments shall enter into force
on 1 January 2026 upon their acceptance in accordance with paragraph 2 above;
4 AGREES that Contracting Governments to the Convention may apply the
aforementioned amendments in whole or in part on a voluntary basis from 1 January 2025;
5 REQUESTS the Secretary-General, for the purposes of article VIII(b)(v) of the
Convention, to transmit certified copies of the present resolution and the text of the
amendments contained in the annexes to all Contracting Governments to the Convention;
6 ALSO REQUESTS the Secretary-General to transmit copies of this resolution and its
annexes to Members of the Organization which are not Contracting Governments to the
Convention.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
ANNEX
AMENDMENTS TO THE INTERNATIONAL MARITIME
DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
AMENDMENT 42-24
Note: This annex is split into appendix 1 (parts 1-2 and 4-7) and appendix 2 (part 3,
appendices A and B, and index).
The complete text of the IMDG Code is replaced with the following:
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Appendix 1 VOLUME
(parts 1-2 and 4-7)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Contents
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS, DEFINITIONS AND TRAINING
Chapter 1.1 General provisions
1 .1 .0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1 .1 .1 Application and implementation of the Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1 .1 .2 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1 .1 .3 Dangerous goods forbidden from transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Chapter 1.2 Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations
1 .2 .1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 .2 .2 Units of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1 .2 .3 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chapter 1.3 Training
1 .3 .0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1 .3 .1 Training of shore-side personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Chapter 1.4 Security provisions
1 .4 .0 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1 .4 .1 General provisions for companies, ships and port facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1 .4 .2 General provisions for shore-side personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1 .4 .3 Provisions for high consequence dangerous goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Chapter 1.5 General provisions concerning radioactive material
1 .5 .1 Scope and application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1 .5 .2 Radiation protection programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1 .5 .3 Management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1 .5 .4 Special arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1 .5 .5 Radioactive material possessing other dangerous properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1 .5 .6 Non-compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
PART 2 CLASSIFICATION
Chapter 2.0 Introduction
2 .0 .0 Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2 .0 .1 Classes, divisions, packing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2 .0 .2 UN numbers and proper shipping names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2 .0 .3 Classification of substances, mixtures and solutions with
multiple hazards (precedence of hazard characteristics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2 .0 .4 Transport of samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2 .0 .5 Transport of wastes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2 .0 .6 Classification of articles as articles containing dangerous goods, N .O .S . . . . . 51
Chapter 2.1 Class 1 – Explosives
2 .1 .0 Introductory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.1.1 Definitions and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.1.2 Compatibility groups and classification codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.1.3 Classification procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 2.2 Class 2 – Gases
2.2.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.2.1 Definitions and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.2.2 Class subdivisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.2.3 Mixtures of gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.2.4 Gases not accepted for transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Chapter 2.3 Class 3 – Flammable liquids
2.3.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3.1 Definitions and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3.2 Assignment of packing group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3.3 Determination of flashpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.3.4 Determination of initial boiling point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.3.5 Substances not accepted for transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chapter 2.4 Class 4 – Flammable solids; substances liable
to spontaneous combustion; substances which,
in contact with water, emit flammable gases
2.4.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.4.1 Definition and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.4.2 Class 4.1 – Flammable solids, self-reactive substances,
solid desensitized explosives and polymerizing substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.4.3 Class 4.2 – Substances liable to spontaneous combustion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.4.4 Class 4.3 – Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases 77
2.4.5 Classification of organometallic substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Chapter 2.5 Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides
2.5.0 Introductory note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.5.1 Definitions and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.5.2 Class 5.1 – Oxidizing substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.5.3 Class 5.2 – Organic peroxides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Chapter 2.6 Class 6 – Toxic and infectious substances
2.6.0 Introductory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.6.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.6.2 Class 6.1 – Toxic substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.6.3 Class 6.2 – Infectious substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Chapter 2.7 Class 7 – Radioactive material
2.7.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2.7.2 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 2.8 Class 8 – Corrosive substances
2.8.1 Definition, general provisions and properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.8.2 General classification provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
2.8.3 Packing group assignment for substances and mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
2.8.4 Alternative packing group assignment methods for mixtures:
step-wise approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
2.8.5 Substances not accepted for transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Chapter 2.9 Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles
(class 9) and environmentally hazardous substances
2.9.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2.9.2 Assignment to class 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2 .9 .3 Environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2 .9 .4 Lithium batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
2 .9 .5 Sodium ion batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Chapter 2.10 Marine pollutants
2 .10 .1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2 .10 .2 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2 .10 .3 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
PART 3 DANGEROUS GOODS LIST, SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND EXCEPTIONS
See Appendix 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
PART 4 PACKING AND TANK PROVISIONS
Chapter 4.1 Use of packagings, including intermediate bulk
containers (IBCs) and large packagings
4 .1 .0 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4 .1 .1 General provisions for the packing of dangerous goods in packagings,
including IBCs and large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4 .1 .2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4 .1 .3 General provisions concerning packing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4 .1 .4 List of packing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Packing instructions concerning the use of packagings
(except IBCs and large packagings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Packing instructions concerning the use of IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Packing instructions concerning the use of large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4 .1 .5 Special packing provisions for goods of class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4 .1 .6 Special packing provisions for goods of class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4 .1 .7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides (class 5 .2)
and self-reactive substances of class 4 .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4 .1 .8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances of category A
(class 6 .2, UN 2814 and UN 2900) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4 .1 .9 Special packing provisions for radioactive material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Chapter 4.2 Use of portable tanks and multiple-element
gas containers (MEGCs)
4 .2 .0 Transitional provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4 .2 .1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport
of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4 .2 .2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport
of non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure . . . . . . . . . 248
4 .2 .3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport
of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4 .2 .4 General provisions for the use of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) 250
4 .2 .5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Portable tank instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Portable tank special provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
4 .2 .6 Additional provisions for the use of road tank vehicles
and road gas elements vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Chapter 4.3 Use of bulk containers
4 .3 .1 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4 .3 .2 Additional provisions applicable to bulk goods
of classes 4 .2, 4 .3, 5 .1, 6 .2, 7 and 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4 .3 .3 Additional provisions for the use of sheeted bulk containers (BK1) . . . . . . . . . 265
4 .3 .4 Additional provisions for the use of flexible bulk containers (BK3) . . . . . . . . . . 265
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
PART 5 CONSIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Chapter 5.1 General provisions
5.1.1 Application and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.1.2 Use of overpacks and unit loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings or units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.1.4 Mixed packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.1.5 General provisions for class 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.1.6 Packages packed into a cargo transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Chapter 5.2 Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs
5.2.1 Marking of packages including IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.2.2 Labelling of packages including IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Chapter 5.3 Placarding and marking of cargo transport units
and bulk containers
5.3.1 Placarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
5.3.2 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Chapter 5.4 Documentation
5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
5.4.3 Documentation required aboard the ship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.4.4 Other required information and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.4.5 Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
5.4.6 Retention of dangerous goods transport information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Chapter 5.5 Special provisions
5.5.1 [Reserved] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) 304
5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to packages and cargo transport units
containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for
cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen,
refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen) 305
5.5.4 Devices containing dangerous goods, which are in use or intended
for use during transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
PART 6 CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF PACKAGINGS, INTERMEDIATE BULK
CONTAINERS (IBCs), LARGE PACKAGINGS, PORTABLE TANKS,
MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs) AND
ROAD TANK VEHICLES
Chapter 6.1 Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings
6.1.1 Applicability and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
6.1.3 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
6.1.4 Provisions for packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
6.1.5 Test provisions for packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Chapter 6.2 Provisions for the construction and testing of pressure
receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles
containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges
containing liquefied flammable gas
6.2.1 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
6.2.2 Provisions for UN pressure receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
6.2.3 Provisions for non-UN pressure receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
6.2.4 Provisions for aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas
(gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas 353
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.3 Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings
for class 6.2 infectious substances of category A
(UN 2814 and UN 2900)
6.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
6.3.2 Provisions for packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
6.3.4 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
6.3.5 Test provisions for packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Chapter 6.4 Provisions for the construction, testing and approval
of packages for radioactive material and for the approval
of such material
6.4.1 [Reserved] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6.4.2 General provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6.4.3 Additional provisions for packages transported by air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6.4.4 Provisions for excepted packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6.4.5 Provisions for industrial packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6.4.6 Provisions for packages containing uranium hexafluoride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
6.4.7 Provisions for Type A packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
6.4.8 Provisions for Type B(U) packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
6.4.9 Provisions for Type B(M) packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6.4.10 Provisions for Type C packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6.4.11 Provisions for packages containing fissile material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding
and evaluating criticality safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6.4.14 Target for drop tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6.4.15 Test for demonstrating ability to withstand normal conditions of transport . . 370
6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages designed for liquids and gases . . . . . . 371
6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident conditions of transport 371
6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages
containing more than 105A2 and Type C packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.4.21 Tests for packagings designed to contain uranium hexafluoride . . . . . . . . . . 373
6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6.4.23 Applications for approval and approvals for radioactive material transport . . 373
6.4.24 Transitional measures for class 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Chapter 6.5 Provisions for the construction and testing
of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)
6.5.1 General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
6.5.2 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
6.5.3 Construction requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
6.5.5 Specific provisions for IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
6.5.6 Test provisions for IBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Chapter 6.6 Provisions for the construction and testing of large packagings
6.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
6.6.3 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
6.6.4 Specific provisions for large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
6.6.5 Test provisions for large packagings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.7 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks and multiple-element
gas containers (MEGCs)
6 .7 .1 Application and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
6 .7 .2 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable
tanks intended for the transport of substances of class 1
and classes 3 to 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
6 .7 .3 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable
tanks intended for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases
of class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
6 .7 .4 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable
tanks intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 . . . 436
6 .7 .5 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing
of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) intended for
the transport of non-refrigerated gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Chapter 6.8 Provisions for road tank vehicles
and road gas elements vehicles
6 .8 .1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
6 .8 .2 Road tank vehicles for long international voyages
for substances of classes 3 to 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
6 .8 .3 Road tank vehicles and road gas elements vehicles
for short international voyages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Chapter 6.9 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of bulk containers
6 .9 .1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
6 .9 .2 Application and general provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
6 .9 .3 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing
of freight containers used as BK1 or BK2 bulk containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
6 .9 .4 Provisions for the design, construction and approval of BK1
or BK2 bulk containers other than freight containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
6 .9 .5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing
of flexible bulk containers BK3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Chapter 6.10 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks with shells made of
fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) materials
6 .10 .1 Application and general requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
6 .10 .2 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of FRP
portable tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
PART 7 PROVISIONS CONCERNING TRANSPORT OPERATIONS
Chapter 7.1 General stowage provisions
7 .1 .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
7 .1 .2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
7 .1 .3 Stowage categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
7 .1 .4 Special stowage provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
7 .1 .5 Stowage codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
7 .1 .6 Handling codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Chapter 7.2 General segregation provisions
7 .2 .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
7 .2 .2 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
7 .2 .3 Segregation provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
7 .2 .4 Segregation table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
7 .2 .5 Segregation groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
7 .2 .6 Special segregation provisions and exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
7 .2 .7 Segregation of goods of class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
7 .2 .8 Segregation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Annex: Segregation flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Chapter 7.3 Consigning operations concerning the packing and use of
cargo transport units (CTUs) and related provisions
7 .3 .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
7 .3 .2 General provisions for cargo transport units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
7 .3 .3 Packing of cargo transport units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
7 .3 .4 Segregation provisions within cargo transport units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
7 .3 .5 Tracking and monitoring equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
7 .3 .6 Opening and unloading cargo transport units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
7 .3 .7 Cargo transport units under temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
7 .3 .8 Loading of cargo transport units on board ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Chapter 7.4 Stowage and segregation on containerships
7 .4 .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
7 .4 .2 Stowage requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
7 .4 .3 Segregation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Chapter 7.5 Stowage and segregation on ro-ro ships
7 .5 .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
7 .5 .2 Stowage provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
7 .5 .3 Segregation provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Chapter 7.6 Stowage and segregation on general cargo ships
7 .6 .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
7 .6 .2 Stowage and handling provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
7 .6 .3 Segregation provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Chapter 7.7 Shipborne barges on barge-carrying ships
7 .7 .1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
7 .7 .2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
7 .7 .3 Barge loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
7 .7 .4 Stowage of shipborne barges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
7 .7 .5 Segregation between barges on board barge-carrying ships . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Chapter 7.8 Special requirements in the event of an incident and fire
precautions involving dangerous goods
7 .8 .1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
7 .8 .2 General provisions in the event of incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
7 .8 .3 Special provisions for incidents involving infectious substances . . . . . . . . . . . 518
7 .8 .4 Special provisions for incidents involving radioactive material . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
7 .8 .5 General fire precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
7 .8 .6 Special fire precautions for class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
7 .8 .7 Special fire precautions for class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
7 .8 .8 Special fire precautions for class 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
7 .8 .9 Special fire precautions and fire fighting for class 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Chapter 7.9 Exemptions, approvals and certificates
7 .9 .1 Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
7 .9 .2 Approvals (including permits, authorizations or agreements)
and certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
7 .9 .3 Contact information for the main designated national
competent authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
APPENDICES
Appendix A List of generic and N.O.S. proper shipping names
See Appendix 2
Appendix B Glossary of terms
See Appendix 2
INDEX
See Appendix 2
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
PART 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS,
DEFINITIONS AND TRAINING
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 1.1
General provisions
1.1.0 Introductory note
It should be noted that other international and national modal regulations exist and that those regulations
may recognize all or part of the provisions of this Code. In addition, port authorities and other bodies and
organizations should recognize the Code and may use it as a basis for their storage and handling bye-laws
within loading and discharge areas.
1.1.1 Application and implementation of the Code
1.1.1.1 The provisions contained in this Code are applicable to all ships to which the International Convention for the
Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), as amended, applies and which are carrying dangerous goods as defined
in regulation 1 of part A of chapter VII of that Convention.
1.1.1.2 The provisions of regulation II-2/19 of that Convention apply to passenger ships and to cargo ships constructed
on or after 1 July 2002.
For:
.1 a passenger ship constructed on or after 1 September 1984 but before 1 July 2002; or
.2 a cargo ship of 500 gross tons or over constructed on or after 1 September 1984 but before 1 July 2002;
or
.3 a cargo ship of less than 500 gross tons constructed on or after 1 February 1992 but before 1 July 2002,
the requirements of regulation II-2/54 of SOLAS, as amended by resolutions MSC.1(XLV), MSC.6(48),
MSC.13(57), MSC.22(59), MSC.24(60), MSC.27(61), MSC.31(63) and MSC.57(67), apply (see II-2/1.2).
For cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons constructed on or after 1 September 1984 and before 1 February
1992, it is recommended that Contracting Governments extend such application to these cargo ships as far
as possible.
1.1.1.3 All ships, irrespective of type and size, carrying substances, materials or articles identified in this Code as
marine pollutants are subject to the provisions of this Code.
1.1.1.4 In certain parts of this Code, a particular action is prescribed, but the responsibility for carrying out the action
is not specifically assigned to any particular person. Such responsibility may vary according to the laws and
customs of different countries and the international conventions into which these countries have entered. For
the purpose of this Code, it is not necessary to make this assignment, but only to identify the action itself. It
remains the prerogative of each Government to assign this responsibility.
1.1.1.5 Although this Code is legally treated as a mandatory instrument under chapter VII of SOLAS, as amended,
the following provisions of the Code remain recommendatory:
.1 paragraph 1.1.1.8 (Notification of infringements);
.2 paragraphs 1.3.1.4 to 1.3.1.7 (Training);
.3 chapter 1.4 (Security provisions) except 1.4.1.1, which is mandatory;
.4 section 2.1.0 of chapter 2.1 (Class 1 – Explosives, Introductory notes);
.5 section 2.3.3 of chapter 2.3 (Determination of flashpoint);
.6 columns 15 and 17 of the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2;
.7 the segregation flow chart and example in the annex to chapter 7.2;
.8 section 5.4.5 of chapter 5.4 (Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form), insofar as the layout of the form is
concerned;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.9 chapter 7.8 (Special requirements in the event of an incident and fire precautions involving dangerous
goods);
.10 section 7.9.3 (Contact information for the main designated national competent authorities); and
.11 appendix B.
1.1.1.6 Application of standards
Where the application of a standard is required and there is any conflict between the standard and the
provisions of this Code, the provisions of this Code take precedence. The requirements of the standard that
do not conflict with the provisions of this Code shall be applied as specified, including the requirements of
any other standard, or part of a standard, referenced within that standard as normative.
Note: A standard provides details on how to meet the provisions of this Code and may include requirements
in addition to those set out in this Code.
1.1.1.7 Transport of dangerous goods used as a coolant or conditioner
Dangerous goods, that are only asphyxiant (which dilute or replace the oxygen normally in the atmosphere),
when used in cargo transport units for cooling or conditioning purposes are only subject to the provisions of
section 5.5.3.
Note: When carried on board as ship’s stores or equipment, these coolants and conditioners are not subject
to the provisions of this Code.
1.1.1.8 Notification of infringements
When a competent authority has reasons to believe that the safety of the transport of dangerous goods is
compromised as a result of serious or repeated infringements of this Code by an enterprise which has its
headquarters on the territory of another competent authority, it should if necessary notify that competent
authority of such infringements.
1.1.1.9 Lamps containing dangerous goods
The following lamps are not subject to this Code provided that they do not contain radioactive material and do
not contain mercury in quantities above those specified in special provision 366 of chapter 3.3:
.1 lamps that are collected directly from individuals and households when transported to a collection or
recycling facility;
.2 lamps each containing not more than 1 g of dangerous goods and packaged so that there is not more
than 30 g of dangerous goods per package, provided that:
(i) the lamps are manufactured according to a certified quality management system;
Note: The application of ISO 9001:2008 may be considered acceptable for this purpose.
and
(ii) each lamp is either individually packed in inner packagings, separated by dividers, or surrounded
with cushioning material to protect the lamps and packed into strong outer packagings meeting the
general provisions of 4.1.1.1 and capable of passing a 1.2 m drop test.
.3 used, damaged or defective lamps each containing not more than 1 g of dangerous goods with not more
than 30 g of dangerous goods per package when transported from a collection or recycling facility. The
lamps shall be packed in strong outer packagings sufficient for preventing release of the contents under
normal conditions of transport meeting the general provisions of 4.1.1.1 and that are capable of passing
a drop test of not less than 1.2 m.
Note: Lamps containing radioactive material are addressed in 2.7.2.2.2.2.
.4 lamps containing only gases of class 2.2 (according to 2.2.2.2) provided they are packaged so that the
projectile effects of any rupture of the bulb will be contained within the package.
1.1.1.10 Devices containing dangerous goods, which are in use or intended for use during transport
For devices containing dangerous goods, which are in use or intended for use during transport, see 5.5.4.
1.1.2 Conventions
1.1.2.1 International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974
Part A of chapter VII of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), as amended,
deals with the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form, and is reproduced in full:
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter VII
Carriage of dangerous goods
Part A
Carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form
Regulation 1
Definitions
For the purpose of this chapter, unless expressly provided otherwise:
1 IMDG Code means the International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code adopted by the Maritime
Safety Committee of the Organization by resolution MSC.122(75), as may be amended by the Organization,
provided that such amendments are adopted, brought into force and take effect in accordance with the provisions
of article VIII of the present Convention concerning the amendment procedures applicable to the annex other
than chapter I.
2 Dangerous goods mean the substances, materials and articles covered by the IMDG Code.
3 Packaged form means the form of containment specified in the IMDG Code.
Regulation 2
Application
1 Unless expressly provided otherwise, this part applies to the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form
in all ships to which the present regulations apply and in cargo ships of less than 500 gross tonnage.
2 The provisions of this part do not apply to ships’ stores and equipment.
3 The carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form is prohibited except in accordance with the provisions
of this chapter.
4 To supplement the provisions of this part, each Contracting Government shall issue, or cause to be issued,
detailed instructions on emergency response and medical first aid relevant to incidents involving dangerous
goods in packaged form, taking into account the guidelines developed by the Organization.
Regulation 3
Requirements for the carriage of dangerous goods
The carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form shall be in compliance with the relevant provisions of the
IMDG Code.
Regulation 4
Documents
1 Transport information relating to the carriage of dangerous goods in packaged form and the container/
vehicle packing certificate shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code and shall be
made available to the person or organization designated by the port State authority.
2 Each ship carrying dangerous goods in packaged form shall have a special list, manifest or stowage plan
setting forth, in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code, the dangerous goods on board and
the location thereof. A copy of one of these documents shall be made available before departure to the person
or organization designated by the port State authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Regulation 5
Cargo Securing Manual
Cargo, cargo units and cargo transport units shall be loaded, stowed and secured throughout the voyage in
accordance with the Cargo Securing Manual approved by the Administration. The Cargo Securing Manual shall
be drawn up to a standard at least equivalent to the guidelines developed by the Organization.
Regulation 6
Reporting of incidents involving dangerous goods
1 When an incident takes place involving the loss or likely loss overboard of dangerous goods in packaged
form into the sea, the master, or other person having charge of the ship, shall report the particulars of such an
incident without delay and to the fullest extent possible to the nearest coastal State. The report shall be drawn up
based on general principles and guidelines developed by the Organization.
2 In the event of the ship referred to in paragraph 1 being abandoned, or in the event of a report from such a
ship being incomplete or unobtainable, the company, as defined in regulation IX/1.2, shall, to the fullest extent
possible, assume the obligations placed upon the master by this regulation.
1.1.2.2 International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL)
1.1.2.2.1 Annex III of the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the
Protocol of 1978 relating thereto (MARPOL), deals with the prevention of pollution by harmful substances
carried by sea in packaged form and is reproduced in full, as revised by the Marine Environment Protection
Committee.
Annex III
Regulations for the prevention of pollution by harmful substances
carried by sea in packaged form
Chapter 1 – General
Regulation 1
Definitions
Definitions
1 For the purposes of this Annex:
Harmful substances are those substances which are identified as marine pollutants in the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code) or which meet the criteria in the appendix of this Annex.
2 Packaged form is defined as the forms of containment specified for harmful substances in the IMDG Code.
3 Audit means a systematic, independent and documented process for obtaining audit evidence and evaluating
it objectively to determine the extent to which audit criteria are fulfilled.
4 Audit Scheme means the IMO Member State Audit Scheme established by the Organization and taking into
account the guidelines developed by the Organization.¶
5 Code for Implementation means the IMO Instruments Implementation Code (III Code) adopted by the
Organization by resolution A.1070(28).
6 Audit Standard means the Code for Implementation.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Regulation 2
Application
1 The carriage of harmful substances is prohibited, except in accordance with the provisions of this Annex.
2 To supplement the provisions of this Annex, the Government of each Party to the Convention shall issue,
or cause to be issued, detailed requirements on packing, marking, labelling, documentation, stowage, quantity
limitations and exceptions for preventing or minimizing pollution of the marine environment by harmful
substances.
3 For the purposes of this Annex, empty packagings which have been used previously for the carriage of
harmful substances shall themselves be treated as harmful substances unless adequate precautions have been
taken to ensure that they contain no residue that is harmful to the marine environment.
4 The requirements of this Annex do not apply to ship’s stores and equipment.
Regulation 3
Packing
Packages shall be adequate to minimize the hazard to the marine environment, having regard to their specific
contents.
Regulation 4
Marking and labelling
1 Packages containing a harmful substance shall be durably marked or labelled to indicate that the substance
is a harmful substance in accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code.
2 The method of affixing marks or labels on packages containing a harmful substance shall be in accordance
with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code.
Regulation 5
Documentation
1 Transport information relating to the carriage of harmful substances shall be in accordance with the relevant
provisions of the IMDG Code and shall be made available to the person or organization designated by the port
State authority.
2 Each ship carrying harmful substances shall have a special list, manifest or stowage plan setting forth, in
accordance with the relevant provisions of the IMDG Code, the harmful substances on board and the location
thereof. A copy of one of these documents shall be made available before departure to the person or organization
designated by the port State authority.
Regulation 6
Stowage
Harmful substances shall be properly stowed and secured so as to minimize the hazards to the marine environment
without impairing the safety of the ship and persons on board.
Regulation 7
Quantity limitations
Certain harmful substances may, for sound scientific and technical reasons, need to be prohibited for carriage
or be limited as to the quantity which may be carried aboard any one ship. In limiting the quantity, due
consideration shall be given to size, construction and equipment of the ship, as well as the packaging and the
inherent nature of the substances.
Regulation 8
Exceptions
1 Jettisoning of harmful substances carried in packaged form shall be prohibited, except where necessary for
the purpose of securing the safety of the ship or saving life at sea.
2 Subject to the provisions of the present Convention, appropriate measures based on the physical, chemical
and biological properties of harmful substances shall be taken to regulate the washing of leakages overboard,
provided that compliance with such measures would not impair the safety of the ship and persons on board.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Regulation 9
Port State control on operational requirements
1 A ship when in a port or an offshore terminal of another Party is subject to inspection by officers duly
authorized by such Party concerning operational requirements under this Annex.
2 Where there are clear grounds for believing that the master or crew are not familiar with essential shipboard
procedures relating to the prevention of pollution by harmful substances, the Party shall take such steps, including
carrying out detailed inspection and, if required, will ensure that the ship shall not sail until the situation has been
brought to order in accordance with the requirements of this Annex.
3 Procedures relating to the port State control prescribed in article 5 of the present Convention shall apply to
this regulation.
4 Nothing in this regulation shall be construed to limit the rights and obligations of a Party carrying out control
over operational requirements specifically provided for in the present Convention.
Chapter 2 – Verification of compliance with the provisions of this Annex
Regulation 10
Application
Parties shall use the provisions of the Code for Implementation in the execution of their obligations and respon-
sibilities contained in this Annex.
Regulation 11
Verification of compliance
1 Every Party shall be subject to periodic audits by the Organization in accordance with the audit standard to
verify compliance with and implementation of this annex.
2 The Secretary-General of the Organization shall have responsibility for administering the Audit Scheme,
based on the guidelines developed by the Organization.
3 Every Party shall have responsibility for facilitating the conduct of the audit and implementation of a
programme of actions to address the findings, based on the guidelines developed by the Organization.
4 Audit of all Parties shall be:
.1 based on an overall schedule developed by the Secretary-General of the Organization, taking into
account the guidelines developed by the Organization; and
.2 conducted at periodic intervals, taking into account the guidelines developed by the Organization.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Appendix to Annex III
Criteria for the identification of harmful substances in packaged form
For the purpose of this Annex, substances, other than radioactive materials, identified by any one of the following
criteria are harmful substances:
(a) Acute (short-term) aquatic hazard
Category: Acute 1
96 hr LC50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L
(b) Long-term aquatic hazard
(i) Non-rapidly degradable substances for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available
Category: Chronic 1
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/L
Category: Chronic 2
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L
(ii) Rapidly degradable substances for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available
Category: Chronic 1
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.01 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.01 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.01 mg/L
Category: Chronic 2
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/L
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(iii) Substances for which adequate chronic toxicity data are not available
Category: Chronic 1
96 hr LC50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L
and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500
(or, if absent, the log Kow ≥ 4).
Category: Chronic 2
96 hr LC50 (for fish) > 1 mg/L but ≤ 10 mg/L and/or
48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) > 1 mg/L but ≤ 10 mg/L and/or
72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) > 1 mg/L but ≤ 10 mg/L
and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500
(or, if absent, the log Kow ≥ 4).
Additional guidance on the classification process for substances and mixtures is included in the IMDG Code.
1.1.2.3 International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended
1.1.2.3.1 Regulations 1 and 2 of annex I to the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention),
as amended, deal with safety approval plates and maintenance and examination of containers, and are
reproduced in full.
Annex I
Regulations for the testing, inspection, approval
and maintenance of containers
Chapter I
Regulations common to all systems of approval
Regulation 1
Safety Approval Plate
1 (a) A Safety Approval Plate conforming to the specifications set out in the appendix to this annex shall
be permanently affixed to every approved container at a readily visible place, adjacent to any other
approval plate issued for official purposes, where it would not be easily damaged.
(b) On each container, all maximum operating gross mass markings shall be consistent with the maximum
operating gross mass information on the Safety Approval Plate.
(c) The owner of the container shall remove the Safety Approval Plate on the container if:
(i) the container has been modified in a manner which would void the original approval and the
information found on the Safety Approval Plate, or
(ii) the container is removed from service and is not being maintained in accordance with the
Convention, or
(iii) the approval has been withdrawn by the Administration.
2 (a) The plate shall contain the following information in at least the English or French language:
CSC SAFETY APPROVAL
Country of approval and approval reference
Date (month and year) of manufacture
Manufacturer’s identification number of the container or, in the case of existing containers for which
that number is unknown, the number allotted by the Administration
Maximum operating gross mass (kg and lb)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Allowable stacking load for 1.8g (kg and lb)
Transverse racking test force (newtons).
(b) A blank space should be reserved on the plate for insertion of end-wall and/or side-wall strength
values (factors) in accordance with paragraph 3 of this regulation and annex II, tests 6 and 7. A blank
space should also be reserved on the plate for the first and subsequent maintenance examination
dates (month and year) when used.
3 Where the Administration considers that a new container satisfies the requirements of the present Convention
in respect of safety and if, for such container, the end-wall and/or side-wall strength values (factors) are designed
to be greater or less than those stipulated in annex II, such values shall be indicated on the Safety Approval Plate.
Where the stacking or racking values are less than 192,000 kg or 150 kN, respectively, the container shall be
considered as having limited stacking or racking capacity and shall be conspicuously marked, as required under
the relevant standards,* at or before their next scheduled examination or before any other date approved by the
Administration, provided this is not later than 1 July 2015.
4 The presence of the Safety Approval Plate does not remove the necessity of displaying such labels or other
information as may be required by other regulations which may be in force.
5 A container, the construction of which was completed prior to 1 July 2014, may retain the Safety Approval
Plate as permitted by the Convention prior to that date as long as no structural modifications occur to that
container.
Regulation 2
Maintenance and examination
1 The owner of the container shall be responsible for maintaining it in safe condition.
2 (a) The owner of an approved container shall examine the container or have it examined in accordance
with the procedure either prescribed or approved by the Contracting Party concerned, at intervals
appropriate to operating conditions.
(b) The date (month and year) before which a new container shall undergo its first examination shall be
marked on the Safety Approval Plate.
(c) The date (month and year) before which the container shall be re-examined shall be clearly marked on
the container on or as close as practicable to the Safety Approval Plate and in a manner acceptable to
that Contracting Party which prescribed or approved the particular examination procedure involved.
(d) The interval from the date of manufacture to the date of the first examination shall not exceed five
years. Subsequent examination of new containers and re-examination of existing containers shall be
at intervals of not more than 30 months. All examinations shall determine whether the container has
any defects which could place any person in danger.
3 (a)
As an alternative to paragraph 2, the Contracting Party concerned may approve a continuous
examination programme if satisfied, on evidence submitted by the owner, that such a programme
provides a standard of safety not inferior to the one set out in paragraph 2 above.
(b) To indicate that the container is operated under an approved continuous examination programme,
a mark showing the letters ACEP and the identification of the Contracting Party which has granted
approval of the programme shall be displayed on the container on or as close as practicable to the
Safety Approval Plate.
(c) All examinations performed under such a programme shall determine whether a container has any
defects which could place any person in danger. They shall be performed in connection with a major
repair, refurbishment, or on-hire/off-hire interchange and in no case less than once every 30 months.
4 As a minimum, approved programmes should be reviewed once every 10 years to ensure their continued
viability. In order to ensure uniformity by all involved in the inspection of containers and their ongoing operational
safety, the Contracting Party concerned shall ensure the following elements are covered in each prescribed
periodic or approved continuous examination programme:
(a) methods, scope and criteria to be used during examinations;
(b) frequency of examinations;
(c) qualifications of personnel to carry out examinations;
(d) system of keeping records and documents that will capture:
(i) the owner’s unique serial number of the container;
(ii) the date on which the examination was carried out;
(iii) identification of the competent person who carried out the examination;
(iv) the name and location of the organization where the examination was carried out;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(v) the results of the examination; and
(vi) in the case of a periodic examination scheme (PES), the next examination date (NED);
(e) a system for recording and updating the identification numbers of all containers covered by the
appropriate examination scheme;
(f) methods and systems for maintenance criteria that addresses the design characteristics of the specific
containers;
(g) provisions for maintaining leased containers if different than those used for owned containers; and
(h) conditions and procedures for adding containers into an already approved programme.
5 The Contracting Party shall carry out periodic audits of approved programmes to ensure compliance with
the provisions approved by the Contracting Party. The Contracting Party shall withdraw any approval when the
conditions of approval are no longer complied with.
6 For the purpose of this regulation, the Contracting Party concerned is the Contracting Party of the territory
in which the owner is domiciled or has his head office. However, in the event that the owner is domiciled or
has his head office in a country the government of which has not yet made arrangements for prescribing or
approving an examination scheme and until such time as the arrangements have been made, the owner may use
the procedure prescribed or approved by the Administration of a Contracting Party which is prepared to act as
the Contracting Party concerned. The owner shall comply with the conditions for the use of such procedures set
by the Administration in question.
7 Administrations shall make information on approved continuous examination programmes publicly available.
1.1.3 Dangerous goods forbidden from transport
1.1.3.1 Unless provided otherwise by this Code, the following are forbidden from transport:
Any substance or article which, as presented for transport, is liable to explode, dangerously react,
produce a flame or dangerous evolution of heat or dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable
gases or vapours under normal conditions of transport.
In chapter 3.3, special provisions 349, 350, 351, 352, 353 and 900 list certain substances, which are forbidden
for transport.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 1.2
Definitions, units of measurement and abbreviations
1.2.1 Definitions
The following is a list of definitions of general applicability that are used throughout this Code. Additional
definitions of a highly specific nature are presented in the relevant chapters.
For the purposes of this Code:
Aerosols or aerosol dispensers means an article consisting of non-refillable receptacles meeting the provisions
of 6.2.4, made of metal, glass or plastics and containing a gas compressed, liquefied or dissolved under
pressure, with or without a liquid, paste or powder, and fitted with a release device allowing the contents to
be ejected as solid or liquid particles in suspension in a gas, as a foam, paste or powder or in a liquid state
or in a gaseous state.
Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or MEGC
that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other than those
specified in this Code (see, for instance, 6.7.5.11.1).
Animal material means animal carcasses, animal body parts, foodstuffs or feedstuffs derived from animals.
Approval
Multilateral approval, for the transport of radioactive material, means approval by the relevant competent
authority of the country of origin of the design or shipment, as applicable, and also, where the consignment
is to be transported through or into any other country, approval by the competent authority of that country.
Unilateral approval, for the transport of radioactive material, means an approval of a design which is required
to be given by the competent authority of the country of origin of the design only.
Bags means flexible packagings made of paper, plastic film, textiles, woven material, or other suitable
materials.
Barge-carrying ship means a ship specially designed and equipped to transport shipborne barges.
Barge feeder vessel means a vessel specially designed and equipped to transport shipborne barges to or
from a barge-carrying ship.
Boxes means packagings with complete rectangular or polygonal faces, made of metal, wood, plywood,
reconstituted wood, fibreboard, plastics, or other suitable material. Small holes for purposes such as ease of
the handling or opening of the box or to meet classification provisions are permitted as long as they do not
compromise the integrity of the packaging during transport.
Bulk containers are containment systems (including any liner or coating) intended for the transport of
solid substances which are in direct contact with the containment system. Packagings, intermediate bulk
containers (IBCs), large packagings and portable tanks are not included.
Bulk containers:
– are of a permanent character and accordingly strong enough to be suitable for repeated use;
– are specially designed to facilitate the transport of goods by one or more means of transport without
intermediate reloading;
– are fitted with devices permitting ready handling; and
– have a capacity of not less than 1 cubic metre.
Examples of bulk containers are freight containers, offshore bulk containers, skips, bulk bins, swap bodies,
trough-shaped containers, roller containers, load compartments of vehicles or flexible bulk containers.
Bundles of cylinders are pressure receptacles comprising an assembly of cylinders or cylinder shells that
are fastened together and which are interconnected by a manifold and transported as a unit. The total water
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
capacity shall not exceed 3,000 L except that bundles intended for the transport of gases of class 2.3 shall
be limited to 1,000 L water capacity.
Cargo transport unit means a road transport tank or freight vehicle, a railway transport tank or freight wagon,
a multimodal freight container or portable tank, or an MEGC.
Carrier means any person, organization or Government undertaking the transport of dangerous goods by any
means of transport. The term includes both carriers for hire or reward (known as common or contract carriers
in some countries) and carriers on own account (known as private carriers in some countries).
Cellular ship means a ship in which containers are loaded under deck into specially designed slots giving
a permanent stowage of the container during sea transport. Containers loaded on deck in such a ship are
specially stacked and secured on fittings.
Closed cargo transport unit, with the exception of class 1, means a cargo transport unit which totally encloses
the contents by permanent structures with complete and rigid surfaces. Cargo transport units with fabric
sides or tops are not considered closed cargo transport units; for definition of closed cargo transport unit for
class 1, see 7.1.2.
Closed cryogenic receptacles are thermally insulated pressure receptacles for refrigerated liquefied gases of
a water capacity of not more than 1,000 L.
Closed ro-ro cargo space means a ro-ro cargo space which is neither an open ro-ro cargo space nor a
weather deck.
Closure means a device which closes an opening in a receptacle.
Note: For pressure receptacles, closures are, for example, valves, pressure relief devices, pressure gauges
or level indicators.
Combination packagings means a combination of packagings for transport purposes, consisting of one or
more inner packagings secured in an outer packaging in accordance with 4.1.1.5.
Competent authority means any body or authority designated or otherwise recognized as such for any
purpose in connection with this Code.
Compliance assurance means a systematic programme of measures applied by a competent authority which
is aimed at ensuring that the provisions of this Code are met in practice.
Composite packagings means packagings consisting of an outer packaging and an inner receptacle so
constructed that the inner receptacle and the outer packaging form an integral packaging. Once assembled,
it remains thereafter an integrated single unit; it is filled, stored, transported and emptied as such.
Confinement system, for the transport of radioactive material, means the assembly of fissile material and
packaging components specified by the designer and agreed to by the competent authority as intended to
preserve criticality safety.
Consignee means any person, organization or Government which is entitled to take delivery of a consignment.
Consignment means any package or packages, or load of dangerous goods, presented by a consignor for
transport.
Consignor means any person, organization or Government which prepares a consignment for transport.
Containment system, for the transport of radioactive material, means the assembly of components of the
packaging specified by the designer as intended to retain the radioactive material during transport.
Control temperature means the maximum temperature at which certain substances (such as organic
peroxides and self-reactive and related substances) can be safely transported during a prolonged period of
time.
Conveyance means:
.1 for transport by road or rail: any vehicle,
.2 for transport by water: any ship, or any cargo space or defined deck area of a ship,
.3 for transport by air: any aircraft.
Crates are outer packagings with incomplete surfaces.
Criticality safety index (CSI) assigned to a package, overpack or freight container containing fissile material, for
the transport of radioactive material, means a number which is used to provide control over the accumulation
of packages, overpacks or freight containers containing fissile material.
Critical temperature is the temperature above which the substance cannot exist in the liquid state.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
CTU Code means the IMO/ILO/UNECE Code of Practice for Packing of Cargo Transport Units
(MSC.1/Circ.1497).
Cylinders are pressure receptacles of a water capacity not exceeding 150 L.
Defined deck area means the area, of the weather deck of a ship, or of a vehicle deck of a roll-on/roll-off ship,
which is allocated for the stowage of dangerous goods.
Degree of filling means the ratio, expressed in %, of the volume of liquid or solid introduced at 15°C into the
means of containment and the volume of the means of containment ready for use.
Design, for the transport of radioactive material, means the description of fissile material excepted under
2.7.2.3.5.6, special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material, package or packaging which
enables such an item to be fully identified. The description may include specifications, engineering drawings,
reports demonstrating compliance with regulatory requirements, and other relevant documentation.
Design life, for composite cylinders and tubes, means the maximum life (in number of years) to which the
cylinder or tube is designed and approved in accordance with the applicable standard.
Dose rate means the ambient dose equivalent or the directional dose equivalent, as appropriate, per unit
time, measured at the point of interest.
Drums means flat-ended or convex-ended cylindrical packagings made of metal, fibreboard, plastics,
plywood or other suitable materials. This definition also includes packagings of other shapes, such as round
taper-necked packagings, or pail-shaped packagings. Wooden barrels and jerricans are not covered by this
definition.
Elevated temperature substance means a substance which is transported or offered for transport:
– in the liquid state at a temperature at or above 100°C
– in the liquid state with a flashpoint above 60°C that is intentionally heated to a temperature above its
flashpoint; or
– in the solid state at a temperature at or above 240°C.
Emergency temperature means the temperature at which emergency procedures shall be implemented.
Exclusive use, for the transport of radioactive material, means the sole use, by a single consignor, of a
conveyance or of a large freight container, in respect of which all initial, intermediate and final loading and
unloading and shipment are carried out in accordance with the directions of the consignor or consignee,
where so required by the provisions of this Code.
Filling ratio means the ratio of the mass of gas to the mass of water at 15°C that would fill completely a
pressure receptacle fitted ready for use.
Flashpoint means the lowest temperature of a liquid at which its vapour forms an ignitable mixture with air.
Foodstuff includes foodstuffs, feeds or other edible substances intended for consumption by humans or
animals.
Freight container means an article of transport equipment that is of a permanent character and accordingly
strong enough to be suitable for repeated use; specially designed to facilitate the transport of goods, by
one or more modes of transport, without intermediate reloading; designed to be secured and/or readily
handled, having fittings for these purposes, and approved in accordance with the International Convention
for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended. In addition: Small freight container means a freight
container that has an internal volume of not more than 3 m3. Large freight container means a freight container
that has an internal volume of more than 3 m3.
For freight containers for the transport of radioactive material, a freight container may be used as a packaging.
A small freight container is that which has either any overall outer dimension less than 1.5 m, or an internal
volume of not more than 3 m3. Any other freight container is considered to be a large freight container.
Fuel cell means an electrochemical device that converts the chemical energy of a fuel to electrical energy,
heat and reaction products.
Fuel cell engine means a device used to power equipment and which consists of a fuel cell and its fuel supply,
whether integrated with or separate from the fuel cell, and includes all appurtenances necessary to fulfil its
function.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
GHS means the ninth revised edition of the Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of
Chemicals, published by the United Nations as document ST/SG/AC.10/30/Rev.9.
IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material means one of the editions of those Regulations,
as follows:
.1 for the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990) editions: IAEA Safety Series No. 6;
.2 for the 1996 edition: IAEA Safety Series No. ST-1;
.3 for the 1996 (revised) edition: IAEA Safety Series No. TS-R-1 (ST-1, Revised);
.4 for the 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 editions: IAEA Safety Standards Series No. TS-R-1;
.5 for the 2012 edition: IAEA Safety Standards Series No. SSR-6; and
.6 for the 2018 edition: IAEA Safety Standards Series No. SSR-6 (Rev.1).
IMO type 4 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of dangerous goods of classes 3 to 9 and
includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis, with at least four
twist locks that take account of ISO standards (e.g. ISO 1161:1984).
IMO type 6 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and
includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis which is fitted with
items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases.
IMO type 8 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and
includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached thermally insulated tank fitted with items of service
equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases.
IMO type 9 tank means a road gas elements vehicle for the transport of compressed gases of class 2 with
elements linked to each other by a manifold, permanently attached to a chassis, which is fitted with items of
service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases. Elements are cylinders,
tubes and bundles of cylinders, intended for the transport of gases as defined in 2.2.1.1.
Inner packagings means packagings for which an outer packaging is required for transport.
Inner receptacles means receptacles which require an outer packaging in order to perform their containment
function.
Inner vessel, for a closed cryogenic receptacle, means the pressure vessel intended to contain the refrigerated
liquefied gas.
Inspection body means an independent inspection and testing body approved by the competent authority.
Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) means rigid or flexible portable packagings, other than specified in
chapter 6.1, that:
.1 have a capacity of:
.1 not more than 3.0 m3 (3,000 L) for solids and liquids of packing groups II and III;
.2 not more than 1.5 m3 for solids of packing group I when packed in flexible, rigid plastics, composite,
fibreboard or wooden IBCs;
.3 not more than 3.0 m3 for solids of packing group I when packed in metal IBCs;
.4 not more than 3.0 m3 for radioactive material of class 7;
.2 are designed for mechanical handling; and
.3 are resistant to the stresses produced in handling and transport, as determined by tests.
Remanufactured IBCs are metal, rigid plastics or composite IBCs that:
.1 are produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; or
.2 are converted from one UN design type to another UN design type.
Remanufactured IBCs are subject to the same provisions of this Code that apply to new IBCs of the same
type (see also design type definition in 6.5.6.1.1).
Repaired IBCs are metal, rigid plastics or composite IBCs that, as a result of impact or for any other
cause (e.g. corrosion, embrittlement or other evidence of reduced strength as compared to the design
type) are restored so as to conform to the design type and to be able to withstand the design type tests.
For the purposes of this Code, the replacement of the rigid inner receptacle of a composite IBC with
a receptacle conforming to the original design type from the same manufacturer is considered repair.
However, routine maintenance of rigid IBCs (see definition below) is not considered repair. The bodies of
rigid plastics IBCs and the inner receptacles of composite IBCs are not repairable. Flexible IBCs are not
repairable, unless approved by the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Routine maintenance of flexible IBCs is the routine performance on plastics or textile flexible IBCs of
operations, such as:
.1 cleaning; or
.2 replacement of non-integral components, such as non-integral liners and closure ties, with
components conforming to the original manufacturer’s specification;
provided that these operations do not adversely affect the containment function of the flexible IBC or
alter the design type.
Note: For rigid IBCs, see “Routine maintenance of rigid IBCs”.
Routine maintenance of rigid IBCs is the routine performance on metal, rigid plastics or composite IBCs
of operations such as:
.1 cleaning;
.2 removal and reinstallation or replacement of body closures (including associated gaskets), or of
service equipment, conforming to the original manufacturer’s specifications, provided that the
leaktightness of the IBC is verified; or
.3 restoration of structural equipment not directly performing a dangerous goods containment or
discharge pressure retention function so as to conform to the design type (e.g. the straightening of
legs or lifting attachments) provided that the containment function of the IBC is not affected.
Note: For flexible IBCs, see “Routine maintenance of flexible IBCs”.
Intermediate packagings means packagings placed between inner packagings, or articles, and an outer
packaging.
Jerricans means metal or plastics packagings of rectangular or polygonal cross-section.
Large packagings means packagings consisting of an outer packaging which contains articles or inner
packagings and which:
.1 are designed for mechanical handling; and
.2 exceed 400 kg net mass or 450 L capacity but have a volume of not more than 3 m3.
Large salvage packaging means a special packaging which:
.1 is designed for mechanical handling; and
.2 exceeds 400 kg net mass or 450 L capacity but has a volume of not more than 3 m³;
into which damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming dangerous goods packages, or dangerous goods
that have spilled or leaked are placed for purposes of transport for recovery or disposal.
Liner means a separate tube or bag inserted into a packaging (including IBCs and large packagings) but not
forming an integral part of it, including the closures of its openings.
Liquids are dangerous goods which at 50°C have a vapour pressure of not more than 300 kPa (3 bar), which
are not completely gaseous at 20°C and at a pressure of 101.3 kPa, and which have a melting point or initial
melting point of 20°C or less at a pressure of 101.3 kPa. A viscous substance for which a specific melting point
cannot be determined shall be subjected to the ASTM D 4359-90 test; or to the test for determining fluidity
(penetrometer test) prescribed in section 2.3.4 of Annex A of the Agreement concerning the International
Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
Long international voyage means an international voyage that is not a short international voyage.
Management system, for the transport of radioactive material, means a set of interrelated or interacting
elements (system) for establishing policies and objectives and enabling the objectives to be achieved in an
efficient and effective manner.
Manual of Tests and Criteria means the seventh revised edition of the United Nations publication entitled
Manual of Tests and Criteria (ST/SG/AC.10/11/Rev.7 and Amend.1).
Maximum capacity as used in 6.1.4 means the maximum inner volume of receptacles or packagings expressed
in litres.
Maximum net mass as used in 6.1.4 means the maximum net mass of contents in a single packaging or
maximum combined mass of inner packagings and the contents thereof and is expressed in kilograms.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Maximum normal operating pressure, for the transport of radioactive material, means the maximum pressure
above atmospheric pressure at mean sea-level that would develop in the containment system in a period of
one year under the conditions of temperature and solar radiation corresponding to environmental conditions
in the absence of venting, external cooling by an ancillary system, or operational controls during transport.
Metal hydride storage system means a single complete hydrogen storage system, including a pressure
receptacle shell, metal hydride, pressure relief device, shut-off valve, service equipment and internal
components used for the transport of hydrogen only.
Multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) are multimodal assemblies of cylinders, tubes or bundles of
cylinders which are interconnected by a manifold and which are assembled within a framework. The MEGC
includes service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases.
Net explosive mass (NEM) means the total mass of the explosive substances, without the packagings,
casings, etc. (Net explosive quantity (NEQ), net explosive contents (NEC), or net explosive weight (NEW) are
often used to convey the same meaning.)
Neutron radiation detector is a device that detects neutron radiation. In such a device, a gas may be contained
in a hermetically-sealed electron tube transducer that converts neutron radiation into a measureable electric
signal.
Offshore bulk container means a bulk container specially designed for repeated use for the transport of
dangerous goods to, from and between offshore facilities. An offshore bulk container is designed and
constructed in accordance with Guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas
(MSC/Circ.860).
Open cargo transport unit means a unit which is not a closed cargo transport unit.
Open cryogenic receptacle means a transportable thermally insulated receptacle for refrigerated liquefied
gases maintained at atmospheric pressure by continuous venting of the refrigerated liquefied gas.
Open ro-ro cargo space means a ro-ro cargo space either open at both ends, or open at one end and
provided with adequate natural ventilation effective over its entire length through permanent openings in the
side plating or deckhead to the satisfaction of the Administration.
Outer packaging means the outer protection of a composite or combination packaging together with
any absorbent materials, cushioning and any other components necessary to contain and protect inner
receptacles or inner packagings.
Overpack means an enclosure used by a single consignor to contain one or more packages and to form one
unit for the convenience of handling and stowage during transport. Examples of overpacks are a number of
packages either:
.1 placed or stacked on to a load board, such as a pallet, and secured by strapping, shrink-wrapping,
stretch-wrapping, or other suitable means; or
.2 placed in a protective outer packaging such as a box or crate.
Overstowed means that a package or container is directly stowed on top of another.
Package means the complete product of the packing operation, consisting of the packaging and its contents
prepared for transport.
Packaging means one or more receptacles and any other components or materials necessary for the
receptacles to perform their containment and other safety functions.
Pressure drums are welded pressure receptacles of a water capacity exceeding 150 L and of not more than
1,000 L (e.g. cylindrical receptacles equipped with rolling hoops, spheres on skids).
Pressure receptacles are transportable receptacles intended for holding substances under pressure including
its closure(s) and other service equipment and it is a collective term that includes cylinders, tubes, pressure
drums, closed cryogenic receptacles, metal hydride storage systems, bundles of cylinders and salvage
pressure receptacles.
Pressure receptacle shell means a cylinder, a tube, a pressure drum or a salvage pressure receptacle without
its closures or other service equipment, but including any permanently attached device(s) (e.g. neck ring, foot
ring, etc.).
Note: The terms “cylinder shell”, “pressure drum shell” and “tube shell” are also used.
Quality assurance means a systematic programme of controls and inspections applied by any organization
or body which is aimed at providing adequate confidence that the standard of safety prescribed in this Code
is achieved in practice.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Radiation detection system is an apparatus that contains radiation detectors as components.
Radioactive contents, for the transport of radioactive material, mean the radioactive material together with
any contaminated or activated solids, liquids, and gases within the packaging.
Receptacles means containment vessels for receiving and holding substances or articles, including any
means of closing.
Reconditioned packagings include:
.1 metal drums that:
.1 are cleaned to original materials of construction, with all former contents, internal and external
corrosion, and external coatings and labels removed;
.2 are restored to original shape and contour, with chimes (if any) straightened and sealed, and all
non-integral gaskets replaced; and
.3 are inspected after cleaning, but before painting, with rejection of packagings with visible pitting,
significant reduction in material thickness, metal fatigue, damaged threads or closures, or other
significant defects;
.2 plastic drums and jerricans that:
.1 are cleaned to original materials of construction, with all former contents, external coatings and
labels removed;
.2 have all non-integral gaskets replaced; and
.3 are inspected after cleaning, with rejection of packagings with visible damage such as tears, creases
or cracks, or damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects.
△ Recycled plastics material means material recovered from used industrial packagings or from other plastics
material that has been pre-sorted and prepared for processing into new packagings, including IBCs. The
specific properties of the recycled material used for production of new packagings, including IBCs, shall be
assured and documented regularly as part of a quality assurance programme recognized by the competent
authority. The quality assurance programme shall include a record of proper pre-sorting and verification
that each batch of recycled plastics material, which is of homogeneous composition, is consistent with the
material specifications (melt flow rate, density, and tensile properties) of the design type manufactured from
such recycled material. This necessarily includes knowledge about the plastics material from which the
recycled plastics have been derived, as well as awareness of the prior use, including prior contents, of the
plastics material if that prior use might reduce the capability of new packagings, including IBCs, produced
using that material. In addition, the packaging or IBC manufacturer’s quality assurance programme under
6.1.1.3 or 6.5.4.1 shall include performance of the appropriate mechanical design type tests in 6.1.5 or 6.5.6
on packagings or IBCs, manufactured from each batch of recycled plastics material. In this testing, stacking
performance may be verified by appropriate dynamic compression testing rather than static load testing.
△ Note: ISO 16103:2005, Packaging – Transport packages for dangerous goods – Recycled plastics material,
provides additional guidance on procedures which may be followed in approving the use of recycled plastics
material. These guidelines have been developed based on the experience of the manufacturing of drums and
jerricans from recycled plastics material and as such may need to be adapted for other types of packagings,
IBCs and large packagings made of recycled plastics material.
Remanufactured IBCs (see Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)).
Remanufactured large packaging means a metal or rigid plastics large packaging that:
.1 is produced as a UN type from a non-UN type; or
.2 is converted from one UN design type to another UN design type.
Remanufactured large packagings are subject to the same provisions of this Code that apply to new large
packagings of the same type (see also design type definition in 6.6.5.1.2).
Remanufactured packagings include:
.1 metal drums that:
.1 are produced as a UN type from a non-UN type;
.2 are converted from one UN type to another UN type; or
.3 undergo the replacement of integral structural components (such as non-removable heads); or
.2 plastic drums that:
.1 are converted from one UN type to another UN type (such as 1H1 to 1H2); or
.2 undergo the replacement of integral structural components.
Remanufactured drums are subject to the same provisions of this Code that apply to a new drum of the same
type.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Repaired IBCs (see Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)).
Re-used large packaging means a large packaging to be refilled which has been examined and found free
of defects affecting the ability to withstand the performance tests: the term includes those which are refilled
with the same or similar compatible contents and are transported within distribution chains controlled by the
consignor of the product.
Re-used packagings means packagings to be refilled which have been examined and found free of defects
affecting the ability to withstand the performance tests; the term includes those which are refilled with
the same or similar compatible contents and are transported within distribution chains controlled by the
consignor of the product.
Road tank vehicle means a vehicle equipped with a tank with a capacity of more than 450 L, fitted with
pressure-relief devices.
Ro-ro cargo space means spaces not normally subdivided in any way and extending to either a substantial
length or the entire length of the ship in which goods (packaged or in bulk, in or on rail or road cars, vehicles
(including road or rail tankers), trailers, containers, pallets, demountable tanks or in or on similar stowage
units or other receptacles) can be loaded and unloaded normally in a horizontal direction.
Ro-ro ship (roll-on/roll-off ship) means a ship which has one or more decks, either closed or open, not
normally subdivided in any way and generally running the entire length of the ship, carrying goods which are
normally loaded and unloaded in a horizontal direction.
Routine maintenance of IBCs (see Intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)).
Salvage packagings are special packagings into which damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming
dangerous goods packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked, are placed for purposes of
transport for recovery or disposal.
Salvage pressure receptacle means a pressure receptacle with a water capacity not exceeding 3,000 L into
which are placed damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming pressure receptacle(s) for the purpose of
transport, e.g. for recovery or disposal.
Self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) means the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating
decomposition may occur in a substance in the packaging, IBC or portable tank as offered for transport. The
SADT shall be determined in accordance with the test procedures given in Part II, Section 28 of the Manual
of Tests and Criteria.
Self-accelerating polymerization temperature (SAPT) means the lowest temperature at which self-accelerating
polymerization may occur with a substance in the packaging, IBC or portable tank as offered for transport.
The SAPT shall be determined in accordance with the test procedures established for the self-accelerating
decomposition temperature for self-reactive substances in accordance with part II, Section 28 of the Manual
of Tests and Criteria.
Semi-trailer means any trailer designed to be coupled to a motor vehicle in such a way that part of it rests on
the motor vehicle and a substantial part of its mass and of the mass of its load is borne by the motor vehicle.
Service equipment of a pressure receptacle means closure(s), manifold(s), piping, porous, absorbent or
adsorbent material and any structural devices, e.g. for handling.
Service life, for composite cylinders and tubes, means the number of years the cylinder or tube is permitted
to be in service.
Settled pressure means the pressure of the contents of a pressure receptacle in thermal and diffusive
equilibrium.
Shipborne barge or barge means an independent, non-self-propelled vessel, specially designed and
equipped to be lifted in a loaded condition and stowed aboard a barge-carrying ship or barge feeder vessel.
Shipment means the specific movement of a consignment from origin to destination.
Shipper, for the purpose of this Code, has the same meaning as consignor.
Short international voyage means an international voyage in the course of which a ship is not more than
200 miles from a port or place in which the passengers and crew could be placed in safety. Neither the distance
between the last port of call in the country in which the voyage begins and the final port of destination nor
the return voyage shall exceed 600 miles. The final port of destination is the last port of call in the scheduled
voyage at which the ship commences its return voyage to the country in which the voyage began.
Sift-proof packagings are packagings impermeable to dry contents, including fine solid material produced
during transport.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Solid bulk cargo means any material, other than liquid or gas, consisting of a combination of particles,
granules or any larger pieces of material, generally uniform in composition, which is loaded directly into the
cargo spaces of a ship without any intermediate form of containment (this includes a material loaded in a
barge on a barge-carrying ship).
Solids are dangerous goods, other than gases, that do not meet the definition of liquids in this chapter.
Special category space means an enclosed space, above or below deck, intended for the transport of motor
vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their own propulsion, into and from which such vehicles can be driven and
to which passengers have access.
Tank means a portable tank (including a tank-container), a road tank-vehicle, a rail tank-wagon or a receptacle
to contain solids, liquids, or liquefied gases and has a capacity of not less than 450 L when used for the
transport of gases as defined in 2.2.1.1.
Test pressure means the required pressure applied during a pressure test for qualification or requalification
(for portable tanks, see 6.7.2.1).
Through or into means through or into the countries in which a consignment is transported but specifically
excludes countries “over” which a consignment is carried by air, provided that there are no scheduled stops
in those countries.
Transboundary movement of wastes means any shipment of wastes from an area under the national jurisdiction
of one country to or through an area under the national jurisdiction of another country, or to or through an
area not under the national jurisdiction of any country, provided at least two countries are concerned by the
movement.
Transport index (TI) assigned to a package, overpack or freight container, or to unpackaged LSA-I or SCO-I
or SCO-III, for the transport of radioactive material, means a number which is used to provide control over
radiation exposure.
Tube means a pressure receptacle of seamless or composite construction having a water capacity exceeding
150 L and of not more than 3,000 L.
Unit load means that a number of packages are either:
.1 placed or stacked on and secured by strapping, shrink-wrapping, or other suitable means to a load
board, such as a pallet;
.2 placed in a protective outer enclosure, such as a pallet box;
.3 permanently secured together in a sling.
Vehicle means a road vehicle (including an articulated vehicle, i.e. a tractor and semi-trailer combination) or
railroad car or railway wagon. Each trailer shall be considered as a separate vehicle.
Wastes means substances, solutions, mixtures, or articles containing or contaminated with one or more
constituents which are subject to the provisions of this Code and for which no direct use is envisaged but
which are transported for dumping, incineration, or other methods of disposal.
Water-reactive means a substance which, in contact with water, emits flammable gas.
Weather deck means a deck which is completely exposed to the weather from above and from at least two
sides.
Wooden barrels means packagings made of natural wood, of round cross-section, having convex walls,
consisting of staves and heads and fitted with hoops.
Working pressure:
.1 for a compressed gas, means the settled pressure at a reference temperature of 15°C in a full pressure
receptacle;
.2 for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, means the calculated settled pressure at a uniform reference
temperature of 15°C in an acetylene cylinder containing the specified solvent content and the maximum
acetylene content; and
.3 for UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, means the working pressure which was calculated for the equivalent
cylinder for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved.
1.2.1.1 Clarifying examples for certain defined terms
The following explanations and examples are meant to assist in clarifying the use of some of the packaging
terms defined in this chapter.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
The definitions in this chapter are consistent with the use of the defined terms throughout the Code. However,
some of the defined terms are commonly used in other ways. This is particularly evident in respect of the term
“inner receptacle” which has often been used to describe the “inners” of a combination packaging.
The “inners” of “combination packagings” are always termed “inner packagings”, not “inner receptacles”.
A glass bottle is an example of such an “inner packaging”.
The “inners” of “composite packagings” are normally termed “inner receptacles”. For example, the “inner” of
a 6HA1 composite packaging (plastics material) is such an “inner receptacle” since it is normally not designed
to perform a containment function without its “outer packaging” and is not, therefore, an “inner packaging”.
1.2.2 Units of measurement
1.2.2.1 The following units of measurement are applicable in this Code:
Acceptable
Measurement of: SI unita Relationship between units
alternative unit
Length m (metre) – –
Area m2 (square metre) – –
Volume m3 (cubic metre) Lb (litre) 1L = 10-3 m3
Time s (second) min (minute) 1 min = 60 s
h (hour) 1h = 3,600 s
d (day) 1d = 86,400 s
Mass kg (kilogram) g (gram) 1g = 10-3 kg
t (ton) 1t = 103 kg
Mass density kg/m3 kg/L 1 kg/L = 103 kg/m3
Temperature K (kelvin) °C (degree Celsius) 0°C = 273.15 K
Difference of temperature K (kelvin) °C (degree Celsius) 1°C =1K
Force N (newton) – 1N = 1 kg·m/s2
Pressure Pa (pascal) bar (bar) 1 bar = 105 Pa
1 Pa = 1 N/m2
Stress N/m2 N/mm2 1 N/mm2 = 1 MPa
Work
Energy
Quantity of heat
} J (joule)
kWh (kilowatt hour)
eV (electronvolt)
1 kWh
1J
1 eV
= 3.6 MJ
= 1 N·m = 1 W·s
= 0.1602 ×10-18 J
Power W (watt) – 1W = 1 J/s = 1 N·m/s
Electrical resistance Ω (ohm) – 1Ω = 1 kg ∙ m2 ∙ s-3 ∙ A−2
Kinematic viscosity m2/s mm2/s 1 mm2/s = 10-6 m2/s
Dynamic viscosity Pa·s mPa·s 1 mPa·s = 10-3 Pa·s
Activity Bq (becquerel) – –
Dose equivalent Sv (sievert) – –
Conductivity S/m
(siemens/metre) – –
a
The International System of Units (SI) is the result of decisions taken at the General Conference on Weights and
Measures (Address: Pavillon de Breteuil, Parc de St-Cloud, F-92312 Sèvres).
b
The abbreviation “ℓ” for litre may also be used in place of the abbreviation “L”.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Force Stress
1 kg = 9.807 N 1 kg/mm2 = 9.807 N/mm2
1 N = 0.102 kg 1 N/mm2 = 0.102 kg/mm2
Pressure
1 Pa = 1 N/m2 = 10-5 bar = 1.02 × 10-5 kg/cm2 = 0.75 × 10-2 torr
1 bar = 105 Pa = 1.02 kg/cm2 = 750 torr
1 kg/cm2 = 9.807 × 104 Pa = 0.9807 bar = 736 torr
1 torr = 1.33 × 102 Pa = 1.33 × 10-3 bar = 1.36 × 10-3 kg/cm2
Energy, work, quantity of heat
1 J = 1 N·m = 0.278 × 10-6 kWh = 0.102 kg·m = 0.239 × 10-3 kcal
1 kWh = 3.6 × 106 J = 367 × 103 kg·m = 860 kcal
1 kg·m = 9.807 J = 2.72 × 10-6 kWh = 2.34 × 10-3 kcal
1 kcal = 4.19 ×103 J = 1.16 × 10-3 kWh = 427 kg·m
Power Kinematic viscosity
1 W = 0.102 kg·m/s = 0.86 kcal/h 1 m2/s = 104 St (stokes)
1 kg·m/s = 9.807 W = 8.43 kcal/h 1 St = 10-4 m2/s
1 kcal/h = 1.16 W = 0.119 kg·m/s
Dynamic viscosity
1 Pa·s = 1 N·s/m2 = 10 P (poise) = 0.102 kg·s/m2
1 P = 0.1 Pa·s = 0.1 N·s/m2 = 1.02 × 10-2 kg·s/m2
1 kg·s/m2 = 9.807 Pa·s = 9.807 N·s/m2 = 98.07 P
The decimal multiples and sub-multiples of a unit may be formed by prefixes or symbols, having the following
meanings, placed before the name or symbol of the unit:
Multiplying factor Prefix Symbol
1 000 000 000 000 000 000 = 1018 quintillion exa E
1 000 000 000 000 000 = 1015 quadrillion peta P
1 000 000 000 000 = 1012 trillion tera T
1 000 000 000 = 109 billion giga G
1 000 000 = 106 million mega M
1 000 = 103 thousand kilo k
100 = 102 hundred hecto h
10 = 101 ten deca da
0.1 = 10-1 tenth deci d
0.01 = 10-2 hundredth centi c
0.001 = 10-3 thousandth milli m
0.000 001 = 10-6 millionth micro μ
0.000 000 001 = 10-9 billionth nano n
0.000 000 000 001 = 10-12 trillionth pico p
0.000 000 000 000 001 = 10-15 quadrillionth femto f
0.000 000 000 000 000 001 = 10-18 quintillionth atto a
Note: 109 = 1 billion is United Nations usage in English. By analogy, so is 10-9 = 1 billionth.
1.2.2.2 [Reserved]
1.2.2.3 Whenever the mass of a package is mentioned, the gross mass is meant unless otherwise stated. The mass
of containers or tanks used for the transport of goods is not included in the gross mass.
1.2.2.4 Unless expressly stated otherwise, the sign “%” represents:
.1 in the case of mixtures of solids or of liquids, and also in the case of solutions and of solids wetted by a
liquid: a percentage mass based on the total mass of the mixture, the solution or the wetted solid;
.2 in the case of mixtures of compressed gases: when filled by pressure, the proportion of the volume
indicated as a percentage of the total volume of the gaseous mixture, or, when filled by mass, the
proportion of the mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture;
.3 in the case of mixtures of liquefied gases and gases dissolved under pressure: the proportion of the
mass indicated as a percentage of the total mass of the mixture.
1.2.2.5 Pressures of all kinds relating to receptacles (such as test pressure, internal pressure, safety-valve opening
pressure) are always indicated in gauge pressure (pressure in excess of atmospheric pressure); however, the
vapour pressure of substances is always expressed in absolute pressure.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
1.2.2.6 Tables of equivalence
1.2.2.6.1 Mass conversion tables
1.2.2.6.1.1 Conversion factors
Multiply by to obtain
Grams 0.03527 Ounces
Grams 0.002205 Pounds
Kilograms 35.2736 Ounces
Kilograms 2.2046 Pounds
Ounces 28.3495 Grams
Pounds 16 Ounces
Pounds 453.59 Grams
Pounds 0.45359 Kilograms
Hundredweight 112 Pounds
Hundredweight 50.802 Kilograms
1.2.2.6.1.2 Pounds to kilograms and vice versa
When the central value in any row of these mass conversion tables is taken to be in pounds, its equivalent
value in kilograms is shown on the left; when the central value is in kilograms, its equivalent in pounds is
shown on the right.
← → ← → ← →
kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb
0.227 0.5 1.10 22.7 50 110 90.7 200 441
0.454 1 2.20 24.9 55 121 95.3 210 463
0.907 2 4.41 27.2 60 132 99.8 220 485
1.36 3 6.61 29.5 65 143 102 225 496
1.81 4 8.82 31.8 70 154 104 230 507
2.27 5 11.0 34.0 75 165 109 240 529
2.72 6 13.2 36.3 80 176 113 250 551
3.18 7 15.4 38.6 85 187 118 260 573
3.63 8 17.6 40.8 90 198 122 270 595
4.08 9 19.8 43.1 95 209 125 275 606
4.54 10 22.0 45.4 100 220 127 280 617
4.99 11 24.3 47.6 105 231 132 290 639
5.44 12 26.5 49.9 110 243 136 300 661
5.90 13 28.7 52.2 115 254 159 350 772
6.35 14 30.9 54.4 120 265 181 400 882
6.80 15 33.1 56.7 125 276 204 450 992
7.26 16 35.3 59.0 130 287 227 500 1,102
7.71 17 37.5 61.2 135 298 247 545 1,202
8.16 18 39.7 63.5 140 309 249 550 1,213
8.62 19 41.9 65.8 145 320 272 600 1,323
9.07 20 44.1 68.0 150 331 318 700 1,543
11.3 25 55.1 72.6 160 353 363 800 1,764
13.6 30 66.1 77.1 170 375 408 900 1,984
15.9 35 77.2 79.4 175 386 454 1,000 2,205
18.1 40 88.2 81.6 180 397
20.4 45 99.2 86.2 190 419
1.2.2.6.2 Liquid measure conversion tables
1.2.2.6.2.1 Conversion factors
Multiply by to obtain
Litres 0.2199 Imperial gallons
Litres 1.759 Imperial pints
Litres 0.2643 US gallons
Litres 2.113 US pints
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Gallons 8 Pints
Imperial gallons 4.546 Litres
Imperial gallons
Imperial pints } 1.20095 { US gallons
US pints
Imperial pints 0.568 Litres
US gallons 3.7853 Litres
US gallons
US pints } 0.83268 { Imperial gallons
Imperial pints
US pints 0.473 Litres
1.2.2.6.2.2 Imperial pints to litres and vice versa
When the central value in any row of these liquid measure conversion tables is taken to be in pints, its
equivalent value in litres is shown on the left; when the central value is in litres, its equivalent in pints is shown
on the right.
← →
L pt L pt
0.28 0.5 0.88
0.57 1 1.76
0.85 1.5 2.64
1.14 2 3.52
1.42 2.5 4.40
1.70 3 5.28
1.99 3.5 6.16
2.27 4 7.04
2.56 4.5 7.92
2.84 5 8.80
3.12 5.5 9.68
3.41 6 10.56
3.69 6.5 11.44
3.98 7 12.32
4.26 7.5 13.20
4.55 8 14.08
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
1.2.2.6.2.3 Imperial gallons to litres and vice versa
When the central value in any row of these liquid measure conversion tables is taken to be in gallons, its
equivalent value in litres is shown on the left; when the central value is in litres, its equivalent in gallons is
shown on the right.
← → ← →
L gal L gal L gal L gal
2.27 0.5 0.11 159.11 35 7.70
4.55 1 0.22 163.65 36 7.92
9.09 2 0.44 168.20 37 8.14
13.64 3 0.66 172.75 38 8.36
18.18 4 0.88 177.29 39 8.58
22.73 5 1.10 181.84 40 8.80
27.28 6 1.32 186.38 41 9.02
31.82 7 1.54 190.93 42 9.24
36.37 8 1.76 195.48 43 9.46
40.91 9 1.98 200.02 44 9.68
45.46 10 2.20 204.57 45 9.90
50.01 11 2.42 209.11 46 10.12
54.55 12 2.64 213.66 47 10.34
59.10 13 2.86 218.21 48 10.56
63.64 14 3.08 222.75 49 10.78
68.19 15 3.30 227.30 50 11.00
72.74 16 3.52 250.03 55 12.09
77.28 17 3.74 272.76 60 13.20
81.83 18 3.96 295.49 65 14.29
86.37 19 4.18 318.22 70 15.40
90.92 20 4.40 340.95 75 16.49
95.47 21 4.62 363.68 80 17.60
100.01 22 4.84 386.41 85 18.69
104.56 23 5.06 409.14 90 19.80
109.10 24 5.28 431.87 95 20.89
113.65 25 5.50 454.60 100 22.00
118.19 26 5.72 613.71 135 29.69
122.74 27 5.94 681.90 150 32.98
127.29 28 6.16 909.20 200 43.99
131.83 29 6.38 1,022.85 225 49.48
136.38 30 6.60 1,136.50 250 54.97
140.92 31 6.82 1,363.80 300 65.99
145.47 32 7.04 1,591.10 350 76.96
150.02 33 7.26 1,818.40 400 87.99
154.56 34 7.48 2,045.70 450 98.95
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
1.2.2.6.3 Temperature conversion tables
Degrees Fahrenheit to degrees Celsius and vice versa
When the central value in any row of these temperature conversion tables is taken to be in °F, its equivalent
value in °C is shown on the left; when the central value is in °C, its equivalent in °F is shown on the right.
General formula: °F = (°C × _
95 ) + 32; °C = (°F – 32) × _
5
9
← → ← → ← →
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
-73.3 -100 -148 -21.1 -6 21.2 1.1 34 93.2
-67.8 -90 -130 -20.6 -5 23.0 1.7 35 95
-62.2 -80 -112 -20.0 -4 24.8 2.2 36 96.8
-56.7 -70 -94 -19.4 -3 26.6 2.8 37 98.6
-51.1 -60 -76 -18.9 -2 28.4 3.3 38 100.4
-45.6 -50 -58 -18.3 -1 30.2 3.9 39 102.2
-40 -40 -40 -17.8 0 32.0 4.4 40 104
-39.4 -39 -38.2 -17.2 1 33.8 5 41 105.8
-38.9 -38 -36.4 -16.7 2 35.6 5.6 42 107.6
-38.3 -37 -34.6 -16.1 3 37.4 6.1 43 109.4
-37.8 -36 -32.8 -15.6 4 39.2 6.7 44 111.2
-37.2 -35 -31 -15.0 5 41.0 7.2 45 113
-36.7 -34 -29.2 -14.4 6 42.8 7.8 46 114.8
-36.1 -33 -27.4 -13.9 7 44.6 8.3 47 116.6
-35.6 -32 -25.6 -13.3 8 46.4 8.9 48 118.4
-35 -31 -23.8 -12.8 9 48.2 9.4 49 120.2
-34.4 -30 -22 -12.2 10 50.0 10.0 50 122.0
-33.9 -29 -20.2 -11.7 11 51.8 10.6 51 123.8
-33.3 -28 -18.4 -11.1 12 53.6 11.1 52 125.6
-32.8 -27 -16.6 -10.6 13 55.4 11.7 53 127.4
-32.2 -26 -14.8 -10.0 14 57.2 12.2 54 129.2
-31.7 -25 -13 -9.4 15 59.0 12.8 55 131.0
-31.1 -24 -11.2 -8.9 16 60.8 13.3 56 132.8
-30.6 -23 -9.4 -8.3 17 62.6 13.9 57 134.6
-30 -22 -7.6 -7.8 18 64.4 14.4 58 136.4
-29.4 -21 -5.8 -7.2 19 66.2 15.0 59 138.2
-28.9 -20 -4 -6.7 20 68 15.6 60 140.0
-28.3 -19 -2.2 -6.1 21 69.8 16.1 61 141.8
-27.8 -18 -0.4 -5.6 22 71.6 16.7 62 143.6
-27.2 -17 1.4 -5 23 73.4 17.2 63 145.4
-26.7 -16 3.2 -4.4 24 75.2 17.8 64 147.2
-26.1 -15 5 -3.9 25 77 18.3 65 149.0
-25.6 -14 6.8 -3.3 26 78.8 18.9 66 150.8
-25.0 -13 8.6 -2.8 27 80.6 19.4 67 152.6
-24.4 -12 10.4 -2.2 28 82.4 20.0 68 154.4
-23.9 -11 12.2 -1.7 29 84.2 20.6 69 156.2
-23.3 -10 14.0 -1.1 30 86 21.1 70 158.0
-22.8 -9 15.8 -0.6 31 87.8 21.7 71 159.8
-22.2 -8 17.6 0 32 89.6 22.2 72 161.6
-21.7 -7 19.4 0.6 33 91.4 22.8 73 163.4
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
← → ← → ← →
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
23.3 74 165.2 37.8 100 212 52.2 126 258.8
23.9 75 167.0 38.3 101 213.8 52.8 127 260.6
24.4 76 168.8 38.9 102 215.6 53.3 128 262.4
25.0 77 170.6 39.4 103 217.4 53.9 129 264.2
25.6 78 172.4 40 104 219.2 54.4 130 266.0
26.1 79 174.2 40.6 105 221 55.0 131 267.8
26.7 80 176.0 41.1 106 222.8 55.6 132 269.6
27.2 81 177.8 41.7 107 224.6 56.1 133 271.4
27.8 82 179.6 42.2 108 226.4 56.7 134 273.2
28.3 83 181.4 42.8 109 228.2 57.2 135 275.0
28.9 84 183.2 43.3 110 230 57.8 136 276.8
29.4 85 185 43.9 111 231.8 58.3 137 278.6
30 86 186.8 44.4 112 233.6 58.9 138 280.4
30.6 87 188.6 45 113 235.4 59.4 139 282.2
31.1 88 190.4 45.6 114 237.2 60.0 140 284.0
31.7 89 192.2 46.1 115 239.0 65.6 150 302.0
32.2 90 194 46.7 116 240.8 71.1 160 320.0
32.8 91 195.8 47.2 117 242.6 76.7 170 338.0
33.3 92 197.6 47.8 118 244.4 82.2 180 356.0
33.9 93 199.4 48.3 119 246.2 87.8 190 374.0
34.4 94 201.2 48.9 120 248.0 93.3 200 392.0
35 95 203 49.4 121 249.8 98.9 210 410.0
35.6 96 204.8 50.0 122 251.6 104.4 220 428.0
36.1 97 206.6 50.6 123 253.4 110.0 230 446.0
36.7 98 208.4 51.1 124 255.2 115.6 240 464.0
37.2 99 210.2 51.7 125 257.0 121.1 250 482.0
1.2.3 List of abbreviations
ASTM merican Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box
A
C700, West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959, United States of America)
CGA ompressed Gas Association (CGA, 14501 George Carter Way, Suite 103, Chantilly, VA 20151,
C
United States of America)
CCC IMO Sub-Committee on Carriage of Cargoes and Containers
CSC International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended
ECOSOC Economic and Social Council (UN)
EmS The EmS Guide: Revised Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods
EN (standard) uropean standard published by the European Committee for Standardization (CEN) (CEN, 36 rue de
E
Stassart, B-1050 Brussels, Belgium)
FAO Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO, Viale delle Terme di Caracalla, 00100 Rome, Italy)
HNS International Convention on Liability and Compensation for Damage in Connection with the Carriage
Convention of Hazardous and Noxious Substances by Sea (IMO)
IAEA International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA, P.O. Box 100, A – 1400 Vienna, Austria)
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO, 999 University Street, Montreal, Quebec H3C 5H7,
Canada)
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC, 3 rue de Varembé, P.O. Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20,
Switzerland)
ILO International Labour Organization/Office (ILO, 4 route des Morillons, CH-1211 Geneva 22, Switzerland)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
IMGS International Medical Guide for Ships
IMO International Maritime Organization (IMO, 4 Albert Embankment, London SE1 7SR, United Kingdom)
IMDG Code International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code
IMSBC Code International Maritime Solid Bulk Cargoes Code
INF Code International Code for the Safe Carriage of Packaged Irradiated Nuclear Fuel, Plutonium and
High-Level Radioactive Wastes on board Ships
ISO (standard) n international standard published by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO, 1, ch.
A
de la Voie-Creuse, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland)
MARPOL International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as amended by the 1978
and 1997 Protocols relating thereto
MAWP Maximum allowable working pressure
MEPC Marine Environment Protection Committee (IMO)
MFAG Medical First Aid Guide for use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods
MSC Maritime Safety Committee (IMO)
N.O.S. not otherwise specified
SADT self-accelerating decomposition temperature
SAPT self-accelerating polymerization temperature
SOLAS International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as amended
UNECE nited Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE, Palais des Nations, 8–14 avenue de la
U
Paix, CH-1211 Geneva 10, Switzerland)
UN number f our-digit United Nations number is assigned to dangerous, hazardous and harmful substances,
materials and articles most commonly transported
UNEP nited Nations Environment Programme (United Nations Avenue, Gigiri, PO Box 30552, 00100,
U
Nairobi, Kenya)
UNESCO/IOC N Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization/Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission
U
(UNESCO/IOC, 1 rue Miollis, 75732 Paris Cedex 15, France)
WHO World Health Organization (Avenue Appia 20, CH-1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland)
WMO World Meteorological Organization (WMO, 7bis, avenue de la Paix, Case postale No. 2300, CH-1211
Geneva 2, Switzerland)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 1.3
Training
1.3.0 Introductory note
The successful application of regulations concerning the transport of dangerous goods and the achievement
of their objectives are greatly dependent on the appreciation by all persons concerned of the risks involved
and on a detailed understanding of the regulations. This can only be achieved by properly planned and
maintained initial and retraining programmes for all persons concerned with the transport of dangerous
goods. The provisions of paragraphs 1.3.1.4 to 1.3.1.7 remain recommendatory (see 1.1.1.5).
1.3.1 Training of shore-side personnel
1.3.1.1 Shore-based personnel engaged in the transport of dangerous goods intended to be transported by sea
shall be trained in the contents of dangerous goods provisions commensurate with their responsibilities.
Employees shall be trained in accordance with the provisions of 1.3.1 before assuming responsibilities
and shall only perform functions, for which required training has not yet been provided, under the direct
supervision of a trained person. Training requirements specific to security of dangerous goods in chapter 1.4
shall also be addressed.
Entities engaging shore-based personnel in such activities shall determine which staff will be trained, what
levels of training they require and the training methods used to enable them to comply with the provisions of
the IMDG Code. This training shall be provided or verified upon employment in a position involving dangerous
goods transport. For personnel who have not yet received the required training, the entities shall ensure that
those personnel may only perform functions under the direct supervision of a trained person. The training
shall be periodically supplemented with refresher training to take account of changes in regulations and
practice. The competent authority, or its authorized body, may audit the entity to verify the effectiveness
of the system in place, in providing training of staff commensurate with their role and responsibilities in the
transport chain.
1.3.1.2 Shore-based personnel such as those who:
– classify dangerous goods and identify proper shipping names of dangerous goods;
– pack dangerous goods;
– mark, label or placard dangerous goods;
– load/unload cargo transport units;
– prepare transport documents for dangerous goods;
– offer dangerous goods for transport;
– accept dangerous goods for transport;
– handle dangerous goods in transport;
– prepare dangerous goods loading/stowage plans;
– load/unload dangerous goods into/from ships;
– carry dangerous goods in transport;
– enforce or survey or inspect for compliance with applicable rules and regulations; or
– are otherwise involved in the transport of dangerous goods as determined by the competent authority
shall be trained in the following:
1.3.1.2.1 General awareness/familiarization training:
.1 each person shall be trained in order to be familiar with the general provisions of dangerous goods
transport provisions;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 such training shall include a description of the classes of dangerous goods; labelling, marking, placarding,
packing, stowage, segregation and compatibility provisions; a description of the purpose and content
of the dangerous goods transport documents (such as the Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form and the
Container/Vehicle Packing Certificate); and a description of available emergency response documents.
1.3.1.2.2 Function-specific training: Each person shall be trained in specific dangerous goods transport provisions
which are applicable to the function that person performs. An indicative list, for guidance purposes only,
of some of the functions typically found in dangerous goods transport operations by sea and training
requirements is given in paragraph 1.3.1.6.
1.3.1.3 Records of training received according to this chapter shall be kept by the employer and made available to the
employee or competent authority, upon request. Records shall be kept by the employer for a period of time
established by the competent authority.
1.3.1.4 Safety training: Commensurate with the risk of exposure in the event of a release and the functions performed,
each person should be trained in:
.1 methods and procedures for accident avoidance, such as proper use of package-handling equipment
and appropriate methods of stowage of dangerous goods;
.2 available emergency response information and how to use it;
.3 general dangers presented by the various classes of dangerous goods and how to prevent exposure to
those hazards, including, if appropriate, the use of personal protective clothing and equipment; and
.4 immediate procedures to be followed in the event of an unintentional release of dangerous goods,
including any emergency response procedures for which the person is responsible and personal
protection procedures to be followed.
1.3.1.5 Recommended training needs for shore-side personnel involved in the transport
of dangerous goods under the IMDG Code
The following indicative table is for information purposes only as every entity is arranged differently and may
have varied roles and responsibilities within that entity.
Numbers in this column refer
Function Specific training requirements to the list of related codes
and publications in 1.3.1.7
1 Classify dangerous Classification requirements, in particular .1, .4, .5 and .12
goods and identify – the structure of the description of substances
proper shipping name – the classes of dangerous goods and the principles
of their classification
– the nature of the dangerous substances and
articles transported (their physical, chemical and
toxicological properties)
– the procedure for classifying solutions and mixtures
– identification by proper shipping name
– use of Dangerous Goods List
2 Pack dangerous goods Classes .1 and .4
Packaging requirements
– type of packages (IBC, large packaging, tank
container and bulk container)
– UN marking for approved packagings
– segregation requirements
– limited quantities and excepted quantities
Marking and labelling
First aid measures
Emergency response procedures
Safe handling procedures
3 Mark, label or placard Classes .1
dangerous goods Marking, labelling and placarding requirements
– primary and subsidiary hazard labels
– marine pollutants
– limited quantities and excepted quantities
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Numbers in this column refer
Function Specific training requirements to the list of related codes
and publications in 1.3.1.7
4 Load/unload cargo Documentation .1, .6, .7 and .8
transport units Classes
Marking, labelling and placarding
Stowage requirements, where applicable
Segregation requirements
Cargo securing requirements (as contained in the
CTU Code)
Emergency response procedures
First aid measures
CSC requirements
Safe handling procedures
5 Prepare transport Documentation requirements .1
documents for – transport document
dangerous goods – container/vehicle packing certificate
– competent authorities’ approval
– waste transport documentation
– special documentation, where appropriate
6 Offer dangerous Thorough knowledge of the IMDG Code .1 to .10 and .12
goods for transport Local requirements at loading and discharge ports
– port byelaws
– national transport regulations
7 Accept dangerous Thorough knowledge of the IMDG Code .1 to .12
goods for transport Local requirements at loading, transiting and discharge
ports
– port byelaws, in particular quantity limitations
– national transport regulations
8 Handle dangerous Classes and their hazards .1, .2, .3, .6, .7, .8 and .10
goods in transport Marking, labelling and placarding
Emergency response procedures
First aid measures
Safe handling procedures such as
– use of equipment
– appropriate tools
– safe working loads
CSC requirements, local requirements at loading, transit
and discharge ports
Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitation
National transport regulations
9 Prepare dangerous Documentation .1, .10, .11 and .12
goods loading/ Classes
stowage plans Stowage requirements
Segregation requirements
Document of compliance
Relevant IMDG Code parts, local requirements at loading,
transit and discharge ports
Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitations
10 Load/unload Classes and their hazards .1, .2, .3, .7, .9, .10 and .12
dangerous goods into/ Marking, labelling and placarding
from ships Emergency response procedures
First aid measures
Safe handling procedures such as
– use of equipment
– appropriate tools
– safe working loads
Cargo securing requirements
CSC requirements, local requirements at loading, transit
and discharge ports
Port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitation
National transport regulations
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Numbers in this column refer
Function Specific training requirements to the list of related codes
and publications in 1.3.1.7
11 Carry dangerous Documentation .1, .2, .3, .6, .7, .10, .11 and
goods Classes .12
Marking, labelling and placarding
Stowage requirements, where applicable
Segregation requirements
Local requirements at loading, transit and discharge ports
– port byelaws, in particular, quantity limitations
– national transport regulations
Cargo securing requirements (as contained in the
CTU Code)
Emergency response procedures
First aid measures
CSC requirements
Safe handling procedures
12 Enforce or survey or Knowledge of IMDG Code and relevant guidelines and .1 to .13
inspect for compliance safety procedures
with applicable rules
and regulations
13 Are otherwise involved As required by the competent authority commensurate –
in the transport of with the task assigned
dangerous goods,
as determined by the
competent authority
1.3.1.6 Indicative table describing sections of the IMDG Code or other relevant instruments that may be
appropriate to be considered in any training for the transport of dangerous goods
Emergency response procedures
National transport regulations
Safe handling procedures
SOLAS chapter II-2/19
Function
First aid measures
Port byelaws
CTU Code
IMDG Code part/section
CSC
*
1 2 2.0 3 4 5 6 6 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9
1 Classify X X X X X
2 Pack X X X X X X X X X X X X
3 Mark, label, placard X X X
4 Load/unload cargo X X X X X X X X X X X X X
transport units
5 Prepare transport X X X X X X X
documents
6 Offer for transport X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7 Accept for transport X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8 Handle in transport X X X X X X X X X X X X
9 Prepare loading/ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
stowage plans
10 Load/unload from ships X X X X X X X X X X X X X
11 Carry X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
*
Only sections 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 6.5.2, 6.6.3, 6.7.2.20, 6.7.3.16 and 6.7.4.15 apply.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
1.3.1.7 Related Codes and publications which may be appropriate for function-specific training
.1 International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code), as amended
.2 The EmS Guide: Revised Emergency Response Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS)
.3 Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG), as amended
.4 United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods – Model Regulations, as
amended
.5 United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods – Manual of Tests and Criteria,
as amended
.6 IMO/ILO/UNECE Code of Practice for Packing of Cargo Transport Units (CTU Code)
.7 Recommendations on the Safe Transport of Dangerous Cargoes and Related Activities in Port Areas
.8 International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended
.9 Code of Safe Practice for Cargo Stowage and Securing (CSS Code), as amended
.10 Revised Recommendations on the safe use of pesticides in ships applicable to the fumigation of cargo
transport units (MSC.1/Circ.1361/Rev.1)
.11 International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS), as amended
.12 International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973 as modified by the Protocol
of 1978 (MARPOL), as amended.
.13 Inspection programmes for cargo transport units carrying dangerous goods (MSC.1/Circ.1442, as
amended by MSC.1/Circ.1521).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 1.4
Security provisions
1.4.0 Scope
1.4.0.1 The provisions of this chapter address the security of dangerous goods in transport by sea. National
competent authorities may apply additional security provisions, which should be considered when offering
or transporting dangerous goods. The provisions of this chapter remain recommendatory except 1.4.1.1
(see 1.1.1.5).
1.4.0.2 The provisions of 1.4.2 and 1.4.3 do not apply to:
.1 UN 2908 and UN 2909 excepted packages;
.2 UN 2910 and UN 2911 excepted packages with an activity level not exceeding the A2 value; and
.3 UN 2912 LSA-I and UN 2913 SCO-I.
1.4.1 General provisions for companies, ships and port facilities
1.4.1.1 The relevant provisions of chapter XI-2 of SOLAS, as amended, and of part A of the International Ship and
Port Facility Security Code (ISPS Code) apply to companies, ships and port facilities engaged in the transport
of dangerous goods and to which regulation XI-2 of SOLAS, as amended, apply taking into account the
guidance given in part B of the ISPS Code.
1.4.1.2 For cargo ships of less than 500 gross tons engaged in the transport of dangerous goods, it is recommended
that Contracting Governments to SOLAS, as amended, consider security provisions for these cargo ships.
1.4.1.3 Any shore-based company personnel, ship-based personnel and port facility personnel engaged in the
transport of dangerous goods should be aware of the security requirements for such goods, in addition to
those specified in the ISPS Code, and commensurate with their responsibilities.
1.4.1.4 The training of the company security officer, shore-based company personnel having specific security duties,
port facility security officer and port facility personnel having specific duties, engaged in the transport of
dangerous goods, should also include elements of security awareness related to those goods.
1.4.1.5 All shipboard personnel and port facility personnel who are not mentioned in 1.4.1.4 and are engaged in the
transport of dangerous goods should be familiar with the provisions of the relevant security plans related to
those goods, commensurate with their responsibilities.
1.4.2 General provisions for shore-side personnel
1.4.2.1 For the purpose of this subsection, shore-side personnel covers individuals mentioned in 1.3.1.2. However,
the provisions of 1.4.2 do not apply to:
– the company security officer and appropriate shore-based company personnel mentioned in 13.1 of
part A of the ISPS Code,
– the ship security officer and the shipboard personnel mentioned in 13.2 and 13.3 of part A of the ISPS
Code,
– the port facility security officer, the appropriate port facility security personnel and the port facility
personnel having specific security duties mentioned in 18.1 and 18.2 of part A of the ISPS Code.
For the training of those officers and personnel, refer to the International Ship and Port Facility Security Code
(ISPS Code).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
1.4.2.2 Shore-side personnel engaged in transport by sea of dangerous goods should consider security provisions
for the transport of dangerous goods commensurate with their responsibilities.
1.4.2.3 Security training
1.4.2.3.1 The training of shore-side personnel, as specified in chapter 1.3, shall also include elements of security
awareness.
1.4.2.3.2 Security awareness training should address the nature of security risks, recognizing security risks, methods
to address and reduce risks and actions to be taken in the event of a security breach. It should include
awareness of security plans (if appropriate, refer to 1.4.3) commensurate with the responsibilities of individuals
and their part in implementing security plans.
1.4.2.3.3 Such training should be provided or verified upon employment in a position involving dangerous goods
transport and should be periodically supplemented with retraining.
1.4.2.3.4 Records of all security training received should be kept by the employer and made available to the employee or
competent authority, upon request. Records should be kept by the employer for a period of time established
by the competent authority.
1.4.3 Provisions for high consequence dangerous goods
1.4.3.1 Definition of high consequence dangerous goods
1.4.3.1.1 High consequence dangerous goods are those which have the potential for misuse in a terrorist event and
which may, as a result, produce serious consequences such as mass casualties, mass destruction or,
particularly for class 7, mass socio-economic disruption.
1.4.3.1.2 An indicative list of high consequence dangerous goods in classes and divisions other than class 7 is given
in table 1.4.1 below.
Table 1.4.1 – Indicative list of high consequence dangerous goods
Class 1, Division 1.1 explosives
Class 1, Division 1.2 explosives
Class 1, Division 1.3 compatibility group C explosives
Class 1, Division 1.4 UN Nos. 0104, 0237, 0255, 0267, 0289, 0361, 0365, 0366, 0440, 0441, 0455, 0456,
0500, 0512 and 0513
Class 1, Division 1.5 explosives
Class 1, Division 1.6 explosives
Class 2.1 flammable gases in quantities greater than 3,000 L in a road tank vehicle, a railway
tank wagon or a portable tank
Class 2.3 toxic gases
Class 3 flammable liquids of packing groups I and II in quantities greater than 3,000 L in a road
tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon or a portable tank
Class 3 liquid desensitized explosives
Class 4.1 solid desensitized explosives
Class 4.2 goods of packing group I in quantities greater than 3,000 kg or 3,000 L in a road tank
vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container
Class 4.3 goods of packing group I in quantities greater than 3,000 kg or 3,000 L in a road tank
vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container
Class 5.1 oxidizing liquids of packing group I in quantities greater than 3,000 L in a road tank
vehicle, a railway tank wagon or a portable tank
Class 5.1 perchlorates, ammonium nitrate, ammonium nitrate fertilizers and ammonium nitrate
emulsions or suspensions or gels in quantities greater than 3,000 kg or 3,000 L in a
road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Class 6.1 toxic substances of packing group I
Class 6.2 infectious substances of Category A (UN 2814 and UN 2900) and medical waste of
Category A (UN 3549)
Class 8 corrosive substances of packing group I in quantities greater than 3,000 kg or 3,000 L
in a road tank vehicle, a railway tank wagon, a portable tank or a bulk container
1.4.3.1.3 For dangerous goods of class 7, high consequence radioactive material is that with an activity equal to or
greater than a transport security threshold of 3,000 A2 per single package (see also 2.7.2.2.1) except for the
following radionuclides where the transport security threshold is given in table 1.4.2 below.
Table 1.4.2 – Transport security thresholds for specific radionuclides
Element Radionuclide Transport security threshold (TBq)
Americium Am-241 0.6
Gold Au-198 2
Cadmium Cd-109 200
Californium Cf-252 0.2
Curium Cm-244 0.5
Cobalt Co-57 7
Cobalt Co-60 0.3
Caesium Cs-137 1
Iron Fe-55 8,000
Germanium Ge-68 7
Gadolinium Gd-153 10
Iridium Ir-192 0.8
Nickel Ni-63 600
Palladium Pd-103 900
Promethium Pm-147 400
Polonium Po-210 0.6
Plutonium Pu-238 0.6
Plutonium Pu-239 0.6
Radium Ra-226 0.4
Ruthenium Ru-106 3
Selenium Se-75 2
Strontium Sr-90 10
Thallium Tl-204 200
Thulium Tm-170 200
Ytterbium Yb-169 3
1.4.3.1.4 For mixtures of radionuclides, determination of whether or not the transport security threshold has been
met or exceeded can be calculated by summing the ratios of activity present for each radionuclide divided
by the transport security threshold for that radionuclide. If the sum of the fractions is less than 1, then the
radioactivity threshold for the mixture has not been met nor exceeded.
This calculation can be made with the formula:
∑
A
__i < 1
T
i i
where:
Ai = activity of radionuclide i that is present in a package (TBq)
Ti = transport security threshold for radionuclide i (TBq).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
1.4.3.1.5 When radioactive materials possess subsidiary hazards of other classes or divisions, the criteria of table 1.4.1
should also be taken into account (see also 1.5.5.1).
1.4.3.2 Specific security provisions for high consequence dangerous goods
1.4.3.2.1 The provisions of this section do not apply to ships and to port facilities (see the ISPS Code for ship security
plan and for port facility security plan).
Note: In addition to the security provisions of this Code, competent authorities may implement further
security provisions for reasons other than safety of dangerous goods during transport. In order to not impede
international and multimodal transport by different explosives security marks, it is recommended that such
marks be formatted consistent with an internationally harmonized standard (e.g. European Union Commission
Directive 2008/43/EC).
1.4.3.2.2 Security plans
1.4.3.2.2.1 Consignors and others engaged in the transport of high consequence dangerous goods (see 1.4.3.1) should
adopt, implement and comply with a security plan that addresses at least the elements specified in 1.4.3.2.2.2.
1.4.3.2.2.2 The security plan should comprise at least the following elements:
.1 specific allocation of responsibilities for security to competent and qualified persons with appropriate
authority to carry out their responsibilities;
.2 records of dangerous goods or types of dangerous goods transported;
.3 review of current operations and assessment of vulnerabilities, including intermodal transfer, temporary
transit storage, handling and distribution, as appropriate;
.4 clear statements of measures, including training, policies (including response to higher threat conditions,
new employee/employment verification, etc.), operating practices (e.g. choice/use of routes where
known, access to dangerous goods in temporary storage, proximity to vulnerable infrastructure, etc.),
equipment and resources that are to be used to reduce security risks;
.5 effective and up-to-date procedures for reporting and dealing with security threats, breaches of security
or security-related incidents;
.6 procedures for the evaluation and testing of security plans and procedures for periodic review and
update of the plans;
.7 measures to ensure the security of transport information contained in the plan; and
.8 measures to ensure that the distribution of transport information is limited as far as possible. (Such
measures shall not preclude provision of transport documentation required by chapter 5.4 of this Code.)
1.4.3.2.3 For radioactive material, the provisions of this chapter are deemed to be complied with when the provisions of
the Convention on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material (INFCIRC/274/Rev.1, IAEA, Vienna (1980)) and the
IAEA circular on Nuclear Security Recommendations on Physical Protection of Nuclear Material and Nuclear
Facilities (INFCIRC/225/Rev.5, IAEA, Vienna (2011)) are applied.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 1.5
General provisions concerning radioactive material
1.5.1 Scope and application
1.5.1.1 The provisions of this Code establish standards of safety which provide an acceptable level of control of the
radiation, criticality and thermal hazards to people, property and the environment that are associated with
the transport of radioactive material. These provisions are based on the 2018 edition of the IAEA Regulations
for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material. Explanatory material can be found in Advisory Material for the
IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material (2018 Edition), Safety Standard Series No.
SSG-26 (Rev.1), IAEA, Vienna (2019).
1.5.1.2 The objective of this Code is to establish provisions that shall be satisfied to ensure safety and to protect
people, property and the environment from harmful effects of ionizing radiation during the transport of
radioactive material. This protection is achieved by requiring:
.1 containment of the radioactive contents;
.2 control of external dose rate;
.3 prevention of criticality; and
.4 prevention of damage caused by heat.
These provisions are satisfied firstly by applying a graded approach to contents limits for packages and
conveyances and to performance standards applied to package designs depending upon the hazard of the
radioactive contents. Secondly, they are satisfied by imposing conditions on the design and operation of
packages and on the maintenance of packagings, including a consideration of the nature of the radioactive
contents. Thirdly, they are satisfied by requiring administrative controls including, where appropriate, approval
by competent authorities. Finally, further protection is provided by making arrangements for planning and
preparing emergency response to protect people, property and the environment.
1.5.1.3 The provisions of this Code apply to the transport of radioactive material by sea, including transport which
is incidental to the use of the radioactive material. Transport comprises all operations and conditions
associated with and involved in the movement of radioactive material; these include the design, manufacture,
maintenance and repair of packaging, and the preparation, consigning, loading, transport including in-transit
storage, unloading and receipt at the final destination of loads of radioactive material and packages. A graded
approach is applied to the performance standards in the provisions of this Code that are characterized by
three general severity levels:
.1 routine conditions of transport (incident-free);
.2 normal conditions of transport (minor mishaps); and
.3 accident conditions of transport.
1.5.1.4 The provisions of this Code do not apply to any of the following:
.1 radioactive material that is an integral part of the means of transport;
.2 radioactive material moved within an establishment which is subject to appropriate safety regulations in
force in the establishment and where the movement does not involve public roads or railways;
.3 radioactive material implanted or incorporated into a person or live animal for diagnosis or treatment;
.4 radioactive material in or on a person who is to be transported for medical treatment because the person
has been subject to accidental or deliberate intake of radioactive material or to contamination;
.5 radioactive material in consumer products which have received regulatory approval, following their sale
to the end user;
.6 natural material and ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides (which may have been processed),
provided the activity concentration of the material does not exceed 10 times the values specified in
table 2.7.2.2.1, or calculated in accordance with 2.7.2.2.2.1 and 2.7.2.2.3 to 2.7.2.2.6. For natural materials
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
and ores containing naturally occurring radionuclides that are not in secular equilibrium the calculation
of the activity concentration shall be performed in accordance with 2.7.2.2.4; and
.7 non-radioactive solid objects with radioactive substances present on any surfaces in quantities not in
excess of the limit set out in the definition for “contamination” in 2.7.1.2.
1.5.1.5 Specific provisions for the transport of excepted packages
1.5.1.5.1 Excepted packages which may contain radioactive material in limited quantities, instruments, manufactured
articles or empty packagings as specified in 2.7.2.4.1 shall be subject only to the following provisions of
parts 5 to 7:
.1 the applicable provisions specified in 5.1.1.2, 5.1.2, 5.1.3.2, 5.1.5.2.2, 5.1.5.2.3, 5.1.5.4, 5.1.5.5, 5.2.1.7,
5.4.1.5.7.1.6.1 and .2, 5.4.1.5.7.1.9, 7.1.4.5.9, 7.1.4.5.10, 7.1.4.5.12, 7.8.4.1 to 7.8.4.6 and 7.8.9.1,
.2 the requirements for excepted packages specified in 6.4.4;
except when the radioactive material possesses other hazardous properties and has to be classified in a
class other than class 7 in accordance with special provision 290 or 369 of chapter 3.3, where the provisions
listed in .1 and .2 above apply only as relevant and in addition to those relating to the main class or division.
1.5.1.5.2 Excepted packages shall be subject to the relevant provisions of all other parts of this Code.
1.5.2 Radiation protection programme
1.5.2.1 The transport of radioactive material shall be subject to a radiation protection programme which shall consist
of systematic arrangements aimed at providing adequate consideration of radiation protection measures.
1.5.2.2 Doses to persons shall be below the relevant dose limits. Protection and safety shall be optimized in order that
the magnitude of individual doses, the number of persons exposed, and the likelihood of incurring exposure
shall be kept as low as reasonably achievable, economic and social factors being taken into account, within
the restrictions that the doses to individuals be subject to dose constraints. A structured and systematic
approach shall be adopted and shall include consideration of the interfaces between transport and other
activities.
1.5.2.3 The nature and extent of the measures to be employed in the programme shall be related to the magnitude
and likelihood of radiation exposures. The programme shall incorporate the provisions in 1.5.2.2, 1.5.2.4 and
7.1.4.5.13 to 7.1.4.5.18. Programme documents shall be available, on request, for inspection by the relevant
competent authority.
1.5.2.4 For occupational exposures arising from transport activities, where it is assessed that the effective dose
either:
.1 is likely to be between 1 and 6 mSv in a year, a dose assessment programme via workplace monitoring
or individual monitoring shall be conducted; or
.2 is likely to exceed 6 mSv in a year, individual monitoring shall be conducted.
When workplace monitoring or individual monitoring is conducted, appropriate records shall be kept.
Note: For occupational exposures arising from transport activities, where it is assessed that the effective dose
is most unlikely to exceed 1 mSv in a year, no special work patterns, detailed monitoring, dose assessment
programmes or individual record keeping need be required.
1.5.3 Management system
1.5.3.1 A management system based on international, national or other standards acceptable to the competent
authority shall be established and implemented for all activities within the scope of this Code, as identified
in 1.5.1.3, to ensure compliance with the relevant provisions of this Code. Certification that the design
specification has been fully implemented shall be available to the competent authority. The manufacturer,
consignor or user shall be prepared:
.1 to provide facilities for inspection during manufacture and use; and
.2 to demonstrate compliance with this Code to the competent authority.
Where competent authority approval is required, such approval shall take into account and be contingent
upon the adequacy of the management system.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
1.5.4 Special arrangement
1.5.4.1 Special arrangement shall mean those provisions, approved by the competent authority, under which
consignments which do not satisfy all the provisions of this Code applicable to radioactive material may be
transported.
1.5.4.2 Consignments for which conformity with any provision applicable to radioactive material is impracticable
shall not be transported except under special arrangement. Provided the competent authority is satisfied
that conformity with the radioactive material provisions of this Code is impracticable and that the requisite
standards of safety established by this Code have been demonstrated through means alternative to the other
provisions of this Code, the competent authority may approve special arrangement transport operations for a
single consignment or a planned series of multiple consignments. The overall level of safety in transport shall
be at least equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable provisions in this Code had been
met. For international consignments of this type, multilateral approval shall be required.
1.5.5 Radioactive material possessing other dangerous properties
1.5.5.1 In addition to the radioactive and fissile properties, any subsidiary hazard of the contents of a package, such
as explosiveness, flammability, pyrophoricity, chemical toxicity and corrosiveness, shall also be taken into
account in the documentation, packing, labelling, marking, placarding, stowage, segregation and transport,
in order to be in compliance with all relevant provisions for dangerous goods. (See also special provision 172
and, for excepted packages, special provision 290.)
1.5.6 Non-compliance
1.5.6.1 In the event of non-compliance with any limit in the provisions of this Code applicable to dose rate or
contamination,
.1 the consignor, carrier , consignee and any organization involved during transport who may be affected,
as appropriate, shall be informed of the non-compliance:
.1 by the carrier if the non-compliance is identified during transport; or
.2 by the consignee if the non-compliance is identified at receipt;
.2 the consignor, carrier, or consignee, as appropriate, shall:
.1 take immediate steps to mitigate the consequences of the non‑compliance;
.2 investigate the non-compliance and its causes, circumstances and consequences;
.3 take appropriate action to remedy the causes and circumstances that led to the non-compliance
and to prevent a recurrence of the causes and circumstances similar to those that led to the
non-compliance; and
.4 communicate to the relevant competent authority(ies) on the causes of the non-compliance and the
corrective or preventive actions taken or to be taken;
.3 The communication of the non-compliance to the consignor and relevant competent authority(ies),
respectively, shall be made as soon as practicable and it shall be immediate whenever an emergency
exposure situation has developed or is developing.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
PART 2
CLASSIFICATION
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.0
Introduction
Note: For the purposes of this Code, it has been necessary to classify dangerous goods in different classes,
to subdivide a number of these classes and to define and describe characteristics and properties of the
substances, materials and articles which would fall within each class or division. Moreover, in accordance
with the criteria for the selection of marine pollutants for the purposes of Annex III of the International
Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 relating
thereto (MARPOL), a number of dangerous substances in the various classes have also been identified as
substances harmful to the marine environment (MARINE POLLUTANTS).
2.0.0 Responsibilities
2.0.0.1 The classification shall be made by the shipper/consignor or by the appropriate competent authority where
specified in this Code.
2.0.0.2 A consignor who has identified, on the basis of test data, that a substance listed by name in column 2 of the
Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 meets classification criteria for a hazard class or division that is not
identified in the list, may, with the approval of the competent authority, consign the substance:
– under the most appropriate "generic" or "not otherwise specified" (N.O.S.) entry reflecting all hazards; or
– under the same UN number and name but with additional hazard communication information as
appropriate to reflect the additional subsidiary hazard(s) (documentation, label, placard) provided that the
primary hazard class remains unchanged and that any other transport conditions (e.g. limited quantity,
packaging and tank provisions) that would normally apply to substances possessing such a combination
of hazards are the same as those applicable to the substance listed.
Note: When a competent authority grants such approvals, it should inform the United Nations Sub-Committee
of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods accordingly and submit a relevant proposal of amendment
to the Dangerous Goods List. Should the proposed amendment be rejected, the competent authority should
withdraw its approval.
2.0.1 Classes, divisions, packing groups
2.0.1.1 Definitions
Substances (including mixtures and solutions) and articles subject to the provisions of this Code are assigned
to one of the classes 1–9 according to the hazard or the most predominant of the hazards they present. Some
of these classes are subdivided into divisions. These classes or divisions are as listed below:
Class 1: Explosives
Division 1.1: substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard
Division 1.2: substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard
Division 1.3: substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a
minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard
Division 1.4: substances and articles which present no significant hazard
Division 1.5: very insensitive substances which have a mass explosion hazard
Division 1.6: extremely insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosion hazard
Class 2: Gases
Class 2.1: flammable gases
Class 2.2: non-flammable, non-toxic gases
Class 2.3: toxic gases
Class 3: Flammable liquids
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Class 4: Flammable solids; substances liable to spontaneous combustion; substances which, in contact
with water, emit flammable gases
Class 4.1: flammable solids, self-reactive substances, solid desensitized explosives and polymerizing
substances
Class 4.2: substances liable to spontaneous combustion
Class 4.3: substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases
Class 5: Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides
Class 5.1: oxidizing substances
Class 5.2: organic peroxides
Class 6: Toxic and infectious substances
Class 6.1: toxic substances
Class 6.2: infectious substances
Class 7: Radioactive material
Class 8: Corrosive substances
Class 9: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles
The numerical order of the classes and divisions is not that of the degree of danger.
2.0.1.2 Marine pollutants
2.0.1.2.1 Many of the substances assigned to classes 1 to 6.2, 8 and 9 are deemed as being marine pollutants (see
chapter 2.10).
2.0.1.2.2 Known marine pollutants are noted in the Dangerous Goods List and are indicated in the Index.
2.0.1.3 For packing purposes, substances other than those of classes 1, 2, 5.2, 6.2 and 7, and other than self-reactive
substances of class 4.1, are assigned to three packing groups in accordance with the degree of danger they
present:
Packing group I: substances presenting high danger;
Packing group II: substances presenting medium danger; and
Packing group III: substances presenting low danger.
The packing group to which a substance is assigned is indicated in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2.
Articles are not assigned to packing groups. For packing purposes, any requirement for a specific packaging
performance level is set out in the applicable packing instruction.
2.0.1.4 Dangerous goods are determined to present one or more of the dangers represented by classes 1 to 9,
marine pollutants and, if applicable, the degree of danger (packing group) on the basis of the provisions in
chapters 2.1 to 2.10.
2.0.1.5 Dangerous goods presenting a danger of a single class or division are assigned to that class or division and
the packing group, if applicable, determined. When an article or substance is specifically listed by name in
the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2, its class or division, its subsidiary hazard(s) and, when applicable,
its packing group are taken from this list.
2.0.1.6 Dangerous goods meeting the defining criteria of more than one hazard class or division and which are not
listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List are assigned to a class or division and subsidiary hazard(s) on
the basis of the precedence of hazard provisions prescribed in 2.0.3.
2.0.2 UN numbers and proper shipping names
2.0.2.1 Dangerous goods are assigned to UN numbers and proper shipping names according to their hazard
classification and their composition.
2.0.2.2 Dangerous goods commonly transported are listed in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. Where an
article or substance is specifically listed by name, it shall be identified in transport by the proper shipping
name in the Dangerous Goods List. Such substances may contain technical impurities (for example those
deriving from the production process) or additives for stability or other purposes that do not affect their
classification. However, a substance listed by name containing technical impurities or additives for stability
or other purposes affecting its classification shall be considered a mixture or solution (see 2.0.2.5). For
dangerous goods not specifically listed by name, “generic” or “not otherwise specified” entries are provided
(see 2.0.2.7) to identify the article or substance in transport. The substances listed by name in column (2) of
the Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3.2 shall be transported according to their classification in the list or
under the conditions specified in 2.0.0.2.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Each entry in the Dangerous Goods List is assigned a UN number. This list also contains relevant information
for each entry, such as hazard class, subsidiary hazard(s) (if any), packing group (where assigned), packing
and tank transport provisions, EmS, segregation and stowage, properties and observations, etc.
Entries in the Dangerous Goods List are of the following four types:
.1 single entries for well-defined substances or articles:
e.g. UN 1090 acetone
UN 1194 ethyl nitrite solution
.2 generic entries for well-defined groups of substances or articles:
e.g. UN 1133 adhesives
UN 1266 perfumery product
UN 2757 carbamate pesticide, solid, toxic
UN 3101 organic peroxide type B, liquid
.3 specific N.O.S. entries covering a group of substances or articles of a particular chemical or technical
nature:
e.g. UN 1477 nitrates, inorganic, N.O.S.
UN 1987 alcohols, N.O.S.
.4 general N.O.S. entries covering a group of substances or articles meeting the criteria of one or more
classes:
e.g. UN 1325 flammable solid, organic, N.O.S.
UN 1993 flammable liquid, N.O.S.
2.0.2.3 All self-reactive substances of class 4.1 are assigned to one of 20 generic entries in accordance with the
classification principles described in 2.4.2.3.3.
2.0.2.4 All organic peroxides of class 5.2 are assigned to one of 20 generic entries in accordance with the classification
principles described in 2.5.3.3.
2.0.2.5 A mixture or solution meeting the classification criteria of this Code composed of a single predominant
substance identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List and one or more substances not subject to the
provisions of this Code and/or traces of one or more substances identified by name in the Dangerous Goods
List, shall be assigned the UN number and proper shipping name of the predominant substance named in the
Dangerous Goods List unless:
.1 the mixture or solution is identified by name in the Dangerous Goods List;
.2 the name and description of the substance named in the Dangerous Goods List specifically indicate that
they apply only to the pure substance;
.3 the hazard class or division, subsidiary hazard(s), packing group, or physical state of the mixture or
solution is different from that of the substance named in the Dangerous Goods List; or
.4 the hazard characteristics and properties of the mixture or solution necessitate emergency response
measures that are different from those required for the substance identified by name in the Dangerous
Goods List.
In those other cases, except the one described in .1, the mixture or solution shall be treated as a dangerous
substance not specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List.
2.0.2.6 When the class, physical state or packing group has changed in comparison with the pure substance, the
solution or mixture shall be shipped in accordance with the provisions for the changed hazard under an
appropriate N.O.S. entry.
2.0.2.7 Substances or articles which are not specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List shall be
classified under a “generic” or “not otherwise specified” (N.O.S.) proper shipping name. The substance or
article shall be classified according to the class definitions and test criteria in this part, and the article or
substance classified under the generic or “N.O.S.” proper shipping name in the Dangerous Goods List which
most appropriately describes the article or substance. This means that a substance is only to be assigned
to an entry of type .3, as defined in 2.0.2.2, if it cannot be assigned to an entry of type .2, and to an entry of
type .4 if it cannot be assigned to an entry of type .2 or .3.
2.0.2.8 When considering a solution or mixture in accordance with 2.0.2.5, due account shall be given to whether the
dangerous constituent comprising the solution or mixture has been identified as a marine pollutant. If this is
the case, the provisions of chapter 2.10 are also applicable.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.0.2.9 A mixture or solution, containing one or more substances identified by name in this Code or classified under
an N.O.S. or generic entry and one or more substances not subject to the provisions of this Code, is not
subject to the provisions of this Code if the hazard characteristics of the mixture or solution are such that they
do not meet the criteria (including human experience criteria) for any class.
2.0.2.10 A mixture or solution meeting the classification criteria of this Code that is not identified by name in the
Dangerous Goods List and that is composed of two or more dangerous goods shall be assigned to an entry
that has the proper shipping name, description, hazard class or division, subsidiary hazard(s) and packing
group that most precisely describe the mixture or solution.
2.0.3 Classification of substances, mixtures and solutions with
multiple hazards (precedence of hazard characteristics)
2.0.3.1 The table of precedence of hazard characteristics in 2.0.3.6 shall be used to determine the class of a
substance, mixture or solution having more than one hazard when it is not specifically listed by name in this
Code or to assign the appropriate entry for articles containing dangerous goods N.O.S. (UN 3537 to 3548,
see 2.0.6). For substances, mixtures or solutions having multiple hazards which are not specifically listed
by name, the most stringent packing group of those assigned to the respective hazards of the goods takes
precedence over other packing groups, irrespective of the precedence of hazard table in 2.0.3.6.
2.0.3.2 The precedence of hazard table indicates which of the hazards shall be regarded as the primary hazard. The
class which appears at the intersection of the horizontal line and the vertical column is the primary hazard and
the remaining class is the subsidiary hazard. The packing groups for each of the hazards associated with the
substance, mixture or solution shall be determined by reference to the appropriate criteria. The most stringent
of the groups so indicated shall then become the packing group of the substance, mixture or solution.
2.0.3.3 The proper shipping name (see 3.1.2) of a substance, mixture or solution when classified in accordance with
2.0.3.1 and 2.0.3.2 shall be the most appropriate N.O.S. (“not otherwise specified”) entry in this Code for the
class shown as the primary hazard.
2.0.3.4 The precedence of hazard characteristics of the following substances, materials and articles have not been
dealt with in the precedence of hazard table, as these primary hazards always take precedence:
.1 substances and articles of class 1;
.2 gases of class 2;
.3 liquid desensitized explosives of class 3;
.4 self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives of class 4.1;
.5 pyrophoric substances of class 4.2;
.6 substances of class 5.2;
.7 substances of class 6.1 with a packing group I vapour inhalation toxicity;
.8 substances of class 6.2; and
.9 materials of class 7.
2.0.3.5 Apart from excepted radioactive material (where the other hazardous properties take precedence), radioactive
material having other hazardous properties shall always be classified in class 7, with the greatest of the
additional hazards being identified. For radioactive material in excepted packages, except for UN 3507,
URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE, special provision 290 of
chapter 3.3 applies.
2.0.3.6 Precedence of hazards
Class and 5.1 5.1 5.1 6.1, I 6.1, I 6.1 6.1 8, I 8, I 8, II 8, II 8, III 8, III
4.2 4.3
Packing Group I II III Dermal Oral II III Liquid Solid Liquid Solid Liquid Solid
3 I* 4.3 3 3 3 3 3 – 3 – 3 –
3 II* 4.3 3 3 3 3 8 – 3 – 3 –
3 III* 4.3 6.1 6.1 6.1 3 8 – 8 – 3 –
4.1 II* 4.2 4.3 5.1 4.1 4.1 6.1 6.1 4.1 4.1 – 8 – 4.1 – 4.1
4.1 III* 4.2 4.3 5.1 4.1 4.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 4.1 – 8 – 8 – 4.1
4.2 II 4.3 5.1 4.2 4.2 6.1 6.1 4.2 4.2 8 8 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
4.2 III 4.3 5.1 5.1 4.2 6.1 6.1 6.1 4.2 8 8 8 8 4.2 4.2
4.3 I 5.1 4.3 4.3 6.1 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3
4.3 II 5.1 4.3 4.3 6.1 4.3 4.3 4.3 8 8 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Class and 5.1 5.1 5.1 6.1, I 6.1, I 6.1 6.1 8, I 8, I 8, II 8, II 8, III 8, III
4.2 4.3
Packing Group I II III Dermal Oral II III Liquid Solid Liquid Solid Liquid Solid
4.3 III 5.1 5.1 4.3 6.1 6.1 6.1 4.3 8 8 8 8 4.3 4.3
5.1 I 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1
5.1 II 6.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 8 8 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1
5.1 III 6.1 6.1 6.1 5.1 8 8 8 8 5.1 5.1
6.1 I, Dermal 8 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1
6.1 I, Oral 8 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1
6.1 II, Inhalation 8 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1
6.1 II, Dermal 8 6.1 8 6.1 6.1 6.1
6.1 II, Oral 8 8 8 6.1 6.1 6.1
6.1 III 8 8 8 8 8 8
For hazards not shown in this table, see 2.0.3.4 and 2.0.3.5.
2.0.4 Transport of samples
2.0.4.1 When the hazard class of a substance is uncertain and it is being transported for further testing, a tentative
hazard class, proper shipping name and identification number shall be assigned on the basis of the consignor’s
knowledge of the substances and application of:
.1 the classification criteria of this Code; and
.2 the precedence of hazards given in 2.0.3.
The most severe packing group possible for the proper shipping name chosen shall be used.
Where this provision is used, the proper shipping name shall be supplemented with the word “SAMPLE” (such
as FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S., SAMPLE). In certain instances, where a specific proper shipping name is
provided for a sample of a substance considered to meet certain classification criteria (such as UN 3167, GAS
SAMPLE, NON-PRESSURIZED, FLAMMABLE), that proper shipping name shall be used. When an N.O.S.
entry is used to transport the sample, the proper shipping name need not be supplemented with the technical
name as required by special provision 274.
2.0.4.2 Samples of the substance shall be transported in accordance with the provisions applicable to the tentative
assigned proper shipping name provided:
.1 the substance is not considered to be a substance prohibited for transport by 1.1.3;
.2 the substance is not considered to meet the criteria for class 1 or considered to be an infectious
substance or a radioactive material;
.3 the substance is in compliance with 2.4.2.3.2.4.2 or 2.5.3.2.5.1 if it is a self-reactive substance or an
organic peroxide, respectively;
.4 the sample is transported in a combination packaging with a net mass per package not exceeding 2.5 kg;
and
.5 the sample is not packed together with other goods.
2.0.4.3 Samples of energetic materials for testing purposes
2.0.4.3.1 Samples of organic substances carrying functional groups listed in tables A6.1 and/or A6.3 in appendix 6
(Screening Procedures) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria may be transported under UN 3224 (self-reactive
solid type C) or UN 3223 (self-reactive liquid type C), as applicable, of class 4.1 provided that:
.1 the samples do not contain any:
– known explosives;
– substances showing explosive effects in testing;
– compounds designed with the view of producing a practical explosive or pyrotechnic effect; or
– components consisting of synthetic precursors of intentional explosives;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 for mixtures, complexes or salts of inorganic oxidizing substances of class 5.1 with organic material(s),
the concentration of the inorganic oxidizing substance is:
– less than 15%, by mass, if assigned to packing group I (high hazard) or II (medium hazard); or
– less than 30%, by mass, if assigned to packing group III (low hazard);
.3 available data do not allow a more precise classification;
.4 the sample is not packed together with other goods; and
.5 the sample is packed in accordance with packing instruction P520 and special packing provisions PP94
or PP95 of 4.1.4.1, as applicable.
2.0.5 Transport of wastes
2.0.5.1 Preamble
Wastes, which are dangerous goods, shall be transported in accordance with the relevant international
recommendations and conventions and, in particular, where it concerns transport by sea, with the provisions
of this Code.
2.0.5.2 Applicability
2.0.5.2.1 The provisions of this chapter are applicable to the transport of wastes by ships and shall be considered in
conjunction with all other provisions of this Code.
2.0.5.2.2 Substances, solutions, mixtures or articles containing or contaminated with radioactive material are subject
to the applicable provisions for radioactive material in class 7, and are not to be considered as wastes for the
purposes of this chapter.
2.0.5.3 Transboundary movements under the Basel Convention
2.0.5.3.1 Transboundary movement of wastes is permitted to commence only when:
.1 notification has been sent by the competent authority of the country of origin, or by the generator or
exporter through the channel of the competent authority of the country of origin, to the country of final
destination; and
.2 the competent authority of the country of origin, having received the written consent of the country of
final destination stating that the wastes will be safely incinerated or treated by other methods of disposal,
has given authorization to the movement.
2.0.5.3.2 In addition to the transport document required in chapter 5.4, all transboundary movements of wastes shall
be accompanied by a waste movement document from the point at which a transboundary movement
commences to the point of disposal. This document shall be available at all times to the competent authorities
and to all persons involved in the management of waste transport operations.
2.0.5.3.3 The transport of solid wastes in bulk in cargo transport units and road vehicles is only permitted with the
approval of the competent authority of the country of origin.
2.0.5.3.4 In the event that packages and cargo transport units containing wastes are suffering from leakage or spillage,
the competent authorities of the countries of origin and destination shall be immediately informed and advice
on the action to be taken obtained from them.
2.0.5.4 Classification of wastes
2.0.5.4.1 A waste containing only one constituent which is a dangerous substance subject to the provisions of this
Code shall be regarded as being that particular substance. If the concentration of the constituent is such that
the waste continues to present a hazard inherent in the constituent itself, it shall be classified according to
the criteria of the applicable classes.
2.0.5.4.2 A waste containing two or more constituents which are dangerous substances subject to the provisions of
this Code shall be classified under the applicable class in accordance with their dangerous characteristics
and properties as described in 2.0.5.4.3 and 2.0.5.4.4.
2.0.5.4.3 The classification according to the dangerous characteristics and properties shall be carried out as follows:
.1 determination of the physical and chemical characteristics and physiological properties by measurement
or calculation followed by classification according to the criteria of the applicable class(es); or
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 if the determination is not practicable, the waste shall be classified according to the constituent presenting
the predominant hazard.
2.0.5.4.4 In determining the predominant hazard, the following criteria shall be taken into account:
.1 if one or more constituents fall within a certain class and the waste presents a hazard inherent in these
constituents, the waste shall be included in that class; or
.2 if there are constituents falling under two or more classes, the classification of the waste shall take into
account the order of precedence applicable to dangerous substances with multiple hazards set out
in 2.0.3.
2.0.5.4.5 Wastes harmful to the marine environment only shall be transported under the class 9 entries for
ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S., UN 3082, or ENVIRONMENTALLY
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S., UN 3077, with the addition of the word “WASTE”. However, this
is not applicable to substances which are covered by individual entries in this Code.
2.0.5.4.6 Wastes not otherwise subject to the provisions of this Code but covered under the Basel Convention may be
transported under the class 9 entries for ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S.,
UN 3082 or ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S., UN 3077 with the addition of
the word WASTE.
2.0.6 Classification of articles as articles containing dangerous goods, N.O.S.
Note: For articles which do not have an existing proper shipping name and which contain only dangerous
goods within the permitted limited quantity amounts specified in column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List,
see UN 3363 and special provision 301 of chapter 3.3.
2.0.6.1 Articles containing dangerous goods may be classified as otherwise provided by this Code under the proper
shipping name for the dangerous goods they contain or in accordance with this section. For the purposes of
this section “article” means machinery, apparatus or other devices containing one or more dangerous goods
(or residues thereof) that are an integral element of the article, necessary for its functioning, and that cannot
be removed for the purpose of transport. An inner packaging shall not be an article.
2.0.6.2 Such articles may in addition contain cells or batteries. Lithium cells and batteries that are integral to the
article shall be of a type proven to meet the testing requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III,
subsection 38.3. For articles containing pre-production prototype lithium cells or batteries transported for
testing, or for articles containing lithium cells or batteries manufactured in production runs of not more than
100 cells or batteries, the requirements of special provision 310 of chapter 3.3 shall apply. Where a lithium
battery installed in an article is damaged or defective, the battery shall be removed.
2.0.6.3 This section does not apply to articles for which a more specific proper shipping name already exists in the
Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3.2.
2.0.6.4 This section does not apply to dangerous goods of class 1, class 6.2, class 7 or radioactive material contained
in articles. However, this section applies to articles containing explosives which are excluded from Class 1 in
accordance with 2.1.3.4.2.
2.0.6.5 Articles containing dangerous goods shall be assigned to the appropriate class determined by the hazards
present using, where applicable, the Precedence of Hazards table in 2.0.3.6 for each of the dangerous goods
contained in the article. If dangerous goods classified as class 9 are contained within the article, all other
dangerous goods present in the article shall be considered to present a higher hazard.
2.0.6.6 Subsidiary hazards shall be representative of the primary hazard posed by the other dangerous goods
contained within the article. When only one dangerous good is present in the article, the subsidiary hazard(s),
if any, shall be the subsidiary hazard(s) identified in column 4 of the Dangerous Goods List. If the article
contains more than one dangerous good and these could react dangerously with one another during
transport, each of the dangerous goods shall be enclosed separately (see 4.1.1.6).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.1
Class 1 – Explosives
2.1.0 Introductory notes (these notes are not mandatory)
Note 1: Class 1 is a restricted class, that is, only those explosive substances and articles that are listed in the
Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 may be accepted for transport. However, the competent authorities
retain the right by mutual agreement to approve transport of explosive substances and articles for special
purposes under special conditions. Therefore entries have been included in the Dangerous Goods List for
“Substances, explosive, not otherwise specified” and “Articles, explosive, not otherwise specified”. It is
intended that these entries should only be used when no other method of operation is possible.
Note 2: General entries such as “Explosive, blasting, type A” are used to allow for the transport of new substances.
In preparing these provisions, military ammunition and explosives have been taken into consideration to the
extent that they are likely to be transported by commercial carriers.
Note 3: A number of substances and articles in class 1 are described in appendix B. These descriptions are given
because a term may not be well-known or may be at variance with its usage for regulatory purposes.
Note 4: Class 1 is unique in that the type of packaging frequently has a decisive effect on the hazard and therefore on
the assignment to a particular division. The correct division is determined by use of the procedures provided
in this chapter.
2.1.1 Definitions and general provisions
2.1.1.1 Class 1 comprises:
.1 explosive substances (a substance which is not itself an explosive but which can form an explosive
atmosphere of gas, vapour or dust is not included in class 1), except those which are too dangerous to
transport or those where the predominant hazard is one appropriate to another class;
.2 explosive articles, except devices containing explosive substances in such quantity or of such a
character that their inadvertent or accidental ignition or initiation during transport shall not cause any
effect external to the device either by projection, fire, smoke, heat or loud noise (see 2.1.3.4); and
.3 substances and articles not mentioned under .1 and .2 which are manufactured with a view to producing
a practical explosive or pyrotechnic effect.
2.1.1.2 Transport of explosive substances which are unduly sensitive, or so reactive as to be subject to spontaneous
reaction, is prohibited.
2.1.1.3 Definitions
For the purposes of this Code, the following definitions apply:
.1 Explosive substance means a solid or liquid substance (or a mixture of substances) which is in itself
capable by chemical reaction of producing gas at such a temperature and pressure and at such a speed
as to cause damage to the surroundings. Pyrotechnic substances are included even when they do not
evolve gases.
.2 Pyrotechnic substance means an explosive substance designed to produce an effect by heat, light,
sound, gas or smoke or a combination of these as the result of non-detonative self-sustaining exothermic
chemical reactions.
.3 Explosive article means an article containing one or more explosive substances.
.4 Mass explosion means one which affects almost the entire load virtually instantaneously.
.5 Phlegmatized means that a substance (or “phlegmatizer”) has been added to an explosive to enhance its
safety in handling and transport. The phlegmatizer renders the explosive insensitive, or less sensitive, to
the following actions: heat, shock, impact, percussion or friction. Typical phlegmatizing agents include,
but are not limited to: wax, paper, water, polymers (such as chlorofluoropolymers), alcohol and oils (such
as petroleum jelly and paraffin).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.6 Explosive or pyrotechnic effect means, in the context of 2.1.1.1.3, an effect produced by self-sustaining
exothermic chemical reactions including shock, blast, fragmentation, projection, heat, light, sound, gas
and smoke.
2.1.1.4 Hazard divisions
The six hazard divisions of class 1 are:
Division 1.1 Substances and articles which have a mass explosion hazard
Division 1.2 Substances and articles which have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard
Division 1.3 Substances and articles which have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a minor
projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard
This division comprises substances and articles:
.1 which give rise to considerable radiant heat; or
.2 which burn one after another, producing minor blast or projection effects or both.
Division 1.4 Substances and articles which present no significant hazard
This division comprises substances and articles which present only a small hazard in the event
of ignition or initiation during transport. The effects are largely confined to the package and no
projection of fragments of appreciable size or range is to be expected. An external fire must not
cause virtually instantaneous explosion of almost the entire contents of the package.
Note: Substances and articles in this division are in compatibility group S if they are so
packaged or designed that any hazardous effects arising from the accidental functioning are
confined within the package unless the package has been degraded by fire, in which case
all blast or projection effects are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder fire
fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package.
Division 1.5 Very insensitive substances which have a mass explosion hazard
This division comprises substances which have a mass explosion hazard but are so insensitive
that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under
normal conditions of transport.
Note: The probability of transition from burning to detonation is greater when large quantities
are transported in a ship. As a consequence, the stowage provisions for explosive substances
in division 1.1 and for those in division 1.5 are identical.
Division 1.6 Extremely insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosion hazard
This division comprises articles which predominantly contain extremely insensitive substances
and which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation.
Note: The hazard from articles of division 1.6 is limited to the explosion of a single article.
2.1.1.5 Any substance or article having or suspected of having explosive characteristics shall first be considered for
classification in class 1 in accordance with the procedures in 2.1.3. Goods are not classified in class 1 when:
.1 unless specially authorized, the transport of an explosive substance is prohibited because sensitivity of
the substance is excessive;
.2 the substance or article comes within the scope of those explosive substances and articles which are
specifically excluded from class 1 by the definition of this class; or
.3 the substance or article has no explosive properties.
2.1.2 Compatibility groups and classification codes
2.1.2.1 Goods of class 1 are considered to be “compatible” if they can be safely stowed or transported together
without significantly increasing either the probability of an accident or, for a given quantity, the magnitude of
the effects of such an accident. By this criterion, goods listed in this class have been divided into a number
of compatibility groups, each denoted by a letter from A to L (excluding I), N and S. These are described
in 2.1.2.2 and 2.1.2.3.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.1.2.2 Compatibility groups and classification codes
Compatibility Classification
Description of substance or articles to be classified
group code
Primary explosive substance A 1.1A
Article containing a primary explosive substance and not containing two or more B 1.1B
effective protective features. Some articles, such as detonators for blasting, 1.2B
detonator assemblies for blasting and primers, cap-type, are included even though 1.4B
they do not contain primary explosives
Propellant explosive substance or other deflagrating explosive substance or article C 1.1C
containing such explosive substance 1.2C
1.3C
1.4C
Secondary detonating explosive substance or black powder or article containing a D 1.1D
secondary detonating explosive substance, in each case without means of initiation 1.2D
and without a propelling charge, or article containing a primary explosive substance 1.4D
and containing two or more effective protective features 1.5D
Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, without means of E 1.1E
initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing a flammable liquid or gel 1.2E
or hypergolic liquids) 1.4E
Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance with its own means of F 1.1F
initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing a flammable liquid or gel 1.2F
or hypergolic liquids) or without a propelling charge 1.3F
1.4F
Pyrotechnic substance, or article containing a pyrotechnic substance, or article G 1.1G
containing both an explosive substance and an illuminating, incendiary, tear- or 1.2G
smoke-producing substance (other than a water-activated article or one containing 1.3G
white phosphorus, phosphides, a pyrophoric substance, a flammable liquid or gel, or 1.4G
hypergolic liquids)
Article containing both an explosive substance and white phosphorus H 1.2H
1.3H
Article containing both an explosive substance and a flammable liquid or gel J 1.1J
1.2J
1.3J
Article containing both an explosive substance and a toxic chemical agent K 1.2K
1.3K
Explosive substance or article containing an explosive substance and presenting a L 1.1L
special hazard (such as due to water-activation or presence of hypergolic liquids, 1.2L
phosphides or a pyrophoric substance) and needing isolation of each type 1.3L
(see 7.2.7.1.4, note 2)
Articles predominantly containing extremely insensitive substances N 1.6N
Substance or article so packaged or designed that any hazardous effects arising S 1.4S
from accidental functioning are confined within the package unless the package has
been degraded by fire, in which case all blast or projection effects are limited to the
extent that they do not significantly hinder or prohibit fire fighting or other emergency
response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package
Note 1: Articles of compatibility groups D and E may be fitted or packed together with their own means of
initiation provided that such means have at least two effective protective features designed to prevent an
explosion in the event of accidental functioning of the means of initiation. Such articles and packages shall
be assigned to compatibility groups D or E.
Note 2: Articles of compatibility groups D and E may be packed together with their own means of initiation,
which do not have two effective protective features when, in the opinion of the competent authority of the
country of origin, the accidental functioning of the means of initiation does not cause the explosion of an
article under normal conditions of transport. Such packages shall be assigned to compatibility groups D or E.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.1.2.3 Scheme of classification of explosives, combination of hazard division with compatibility group
Hazard Compatibility group
∑ A–S
division A B C D E F G H J K L N S
1.1 1.1A 1.1B 1.1C 1.1D 1.1E 1.1F 1.1G 1.1J 1.1L 9
1.2 1.2B 1.2C 1.2D 1.2E 1.2F 1.2G 1.2H 1.2J 1.2K 1.2L 10
1.3 1.3C 1.3F 1.3G 1.3H 1.3J 1.3K 1.3L 7
1.4 1.4B 1.4C 1.4D 1.4E 1.4F 1.4G 1.4S 7
1.5 1.5D 1
1.6 1.6N 1
∑ 1.1–1.6 1 3 4 4 3 4 4 2 3 2 3 1 1 35
2.1.2.4 The definitions of compatibility groups in 2.1.2.2 are intended to be mutually exclusive, except for a substance
or article which qualifies for compatibility group S. Since the criterion of compatibility group S is an empirical
one, assignment to this group is necessarily linked to the tests for assignment to division 1.4.
2.1.3 Classification procedure
2.1.3.1 Any substance or article having or suspected of having explosive characteristics shall be considered for
classification in class 1. Substances and articles classified in class 1 shall be assigned to the appropriate
division and compatibility group. Goods of class 1 shall be classified in accordance with the Manual of Tests
and Criteria, as amended.
2.1.3.2 Prior to transport, the classification of all explosive substances and articles, together with the compatibility
group assignment and the proper shipping name under which the substance or article is to be transported,
shall have been approved by the competent authority of the country of manufacture. A new approval would
be required for:
.1 a new explosive substance; or
.2 a new combination or mixture of explosive substances which is significantly different from other
combinations or mixtures previously manufactured and approved; or
.3 a new design of an explosive article, an article containing a new explosive substance, or an article
containing a new combination or mixture of explosive substances; or
.4 an explosive substance or article with a new design or type of packaging, including a new type of inner
packaging.
2.1.3.3 Assessment of the hazard division is usually made on the basis of test results. A substance or article shall
be assigned to the hazard division which corresponds to the results of the tests to which the substance or
article, as offered for transport, has been subjected. Other test results, and data assembled from accidents
which have occurred, may also be taken into account.
2.1.3.4 Exclusion from class 1
2.1.3.4.1 The competent authority may exclude an article or substance from class 1 by virtue of test results and the
class 1 definition.
2.1.3.4.2 An article may be excluded from class 1 by the competent authority when three unpackaged articles, each
individually activated by its own means of initiation or ignition or external means to function in the designed
mode, meet the following test criteria:
.1 no external surface shall have a temperature of more than 65°C. A momentary spike in temperature up
to 200°C is acceptable;
.2 no rupture or fragmentation of the external casing or movement of the article or detached parts thereof
of more than one metre in any direction;
Note: Where the integrity of the article may be affected in the event of an external fire these criteria shall be
examined by a fire test. One such method is described in ISO 14451-2 using a heating rate of 80 K/min.
.3 no audible report exceeding 135 dB(C) peak at a distance of one metre;
.4 no flash or flame capable of igniting a material such as a sheet of 80 ± 10 g/m² paper in contact with the
article; and
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.5 no production of smoke, fumes or dust in such quantities that the visibility in a one cubic metre chamber
equipped with appropriately sized blow out panels is reduced more than 50% as measured by a
calibrated light (lux) meter or radiometer located one metre from a constant light source located at the
midpoint on opposite walls. The general guidance on Optical Density Testing in ISO 5659-1 and the
general guidance on the Photometric System described in Section 7.5 in ISO 5659-2 may be used or
similar optical density measurement methods designed to accomplish the same purpose may also be
employed. A suitable hood cover surrounding the back and sides of the light meter shall be used to
minimize effects of scattered or leaking light not emitted directly from the source.
Note 1: If during the tests addressing criteria .1, .2, .3 and .4 no or very little smoke is observed the test
described in .5 may be waived.
Note 2: The competent authority may require testing in packaged form if it is determined that, as packaged
for transport, the article may pose a greater hazard.
2.1.3.5 Assignment of fireworks to hazard divisions
2.1.3.5.1 Fireworks shall normally be assigned to hazard divisions 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4 on the basis of test data derived
from Test Series 6 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria. However:
.1 waterfalls containing flash composition (see note 2 of 2.1.3.5.5) shall be classified as 1.1G regardless of
the results of Test Series 6;
.2 since the range of fireworks is very extensive and the availability of test facilities may be limited,
assignment to hazard divisions may also be made in accordance with the procedure in 2.1.3.5.2.
2.1.3.5.2 Assignment of fireworks to UN Nos. 0333, 0334, 0335 or 0336, and assignments of articles to UN 0431 for
those used for theatrical effects meeting the definition for article type and the 1.4G specification in the default
fireworks classification table in 2.1.3.5.5 may be made on the basis of analogy, without the need for Test
Series 6 testing, in accordance with the default fireworks classification table in 2.1.3.5.5. Such assignment
shall be made with the agreement of the competent authority. Items not specified in the table shall be
classified on the basis of test data derived from Test Series 6 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria.
Note: The addition of other types of fireworks to column 1 of the table in 2.1.3.5.5 shall only be made on the
basis of full test data submitted to the UN Sub-Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods
for consideration.
2.1.3.5.3 Where fireworks of more than one hazard division are packed in the same package they shall be classified on
the basis of the highest hazard division unless test data derived from Test Series 6 of the Manual of Tests and
Criteria indicate otherwise.
2.1.3.5.4 The classification shown in the table in 2.1.3.5.5 applies only for articles packed in fibreboard boxes (4G).
2.1.3.5.5 Default fireworks classification table
Note 1: References to percentages in the table, unless otherwise stated, are to the mass of all pyrotechnic
substances (e.g. rocket motors, lifting charge, bursting charge and effect charge).
Note 2: “Flash composition” in this table refers to pyrotechnic substances in powder form or as pyrotechnic
units as presented in the fireworks that are used in waterfalls, or to produce an aural effect or used as a
bursting charge, or propellant charge unless:
(a) the time taken for the pressure rise in the HSL Flash Composition Test in appendix 7 of the Manual of
Tests and Criteria is demonstrated to be more than 6 ms for 0.5 g of pyrotechnic substance; or
(b) the pyrotechnic substance gives a negative “–” result in the US Flash Composition Test in Appendix 7 of
the Manual of Tests and Criteria.
Note 3: Dimensions in millimetres refers to:
– for spherical and peanut shells, the diameter of the sphere of the shell;
– for cylinder shells, the length of the shell;
– for a shell in mortar, Roman candle, shot tube firework or mine, the inside diameter of the tube comprising
or containing the firework;
– for a bag mine or cylinder mine, the inside diameter of the mortar intended to contain the mine.
Type Includes: / Synonym: Definition Specification Classification
Shell, spherical Spherical display shell: aerial shell, colour Device with or without propellant charge, with delay fuse All report shells 1.1G
or cylindrical shell, dye shell, multi-break shell, multi- and bursting charge, pyrotechnic unit(s) or loose pyrotechnic
effect shell, nautical shell, parachute substance and designed to be projected from a mortar Colour shell: ≥ 180 mm 1.1G
shell, smoke shell, star shell; report shell: Colour shell: < 180 mm with > 25% flash 1.1G
maroon, salute, sound shell, thunderclap, composition, as loose powder and/or
aerial shell kit report effects
Colour shell: < 180 mm with ≤ 25% flash 1.3G
composition, as loose powder and/or
report effects
Colour shell: ≤ 50 mm, or ≤ 60 g 1.4G
pyrotechnic substance, with ≤ 2% flash
composition as loose powder and/or
report effects
Peanut shell Device with two or more spherical aerial shells in a common The most hazardous spherical aerial shell
wrapper propelled by the same propellant charge with separate determines the classification
external delay fuses
Preloaded mortar, shell in mortar Assembly comprising a spherical or cylindrical shell inside a All report shells
mortar from which the shell is designed to be projected
Colour shell: ≥ 180 mm 1.1G
Colour shell: > 25% flash composition as 1.1G
loose powder and/or report effects
Colour shell: > 50 mm and < 180 mm 1.2G
AMENDMENTS TO THE
Colour shell: ≤ 50 mm, or ≤ 60 g 1.3G
pyrotechnic substance, with ≤ 25% flash
composition as loose powder and/or
report effects
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Type Includes: / Synonym: Definition Specification Classification
Shell of shells (spherical) Device without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting > 120 mm 1.1G
(Reference to percentages for shell charge, containing report shells and inert materials and designed
of shells are to the gross mass of the to be projected from a mortar
fireworks article)
Device without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting ≤ 120 mm 1.3G
charge, containing report shells ≤ 25 g flash composition per
report unit, with ≤ 33% flash composition and ≥ 60% inert
materials and designed to be projected from a mortar
Device without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting > 300 mm 1.1G
charge, containing colour shells and/or pyrotechnic units and
designed to be projected from a mortar
Device without propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting > 200 mm and ≤ 300 mm 1.3G
charge, containing colour shells ≤ 70 mm and/or pyrotechnic
units, with ≤ 25% flash composition and ≤ 60% pyrotechnic
substance and designed to be projected from a mortar
Device with propellant charge, with delay fuse and bursting ≤ 200 mm 1.3G
charge, containing colour shells ≤ 70 mm and/or pyrotechnic
units, with ≤ 25% flash composition and ≤ 60% pyrotechnic
substance and designed to be projected from a mortar
Battery/ Barrage, bombardos, cakes, finale box, Assembly including several elements either containing the same The most hazardous firework type
combination flowerbed, hybrid, multiple tubes, shell type or several types each corresponding to one of the types of determines the classification
cakes, banger batteries, flash banger fireworks listed in this table, with one or two points of ignition
batteries
Roman candle Exhibition candle, candle, bombettes Tube containing a series of pyrotechnic units consisting of ≥ 50 mm inner diameter, containing flash 1.1G
alternate pyrotechnic substance, propellant charge, and composition, or < 50 mm with > 25%
transmitting fuse flash composition
AMENDMENTS TO THE
≥ 50 mm inner diameter, containing no 1.2G
flash composition
< 50 mm inner diameter and ≤ 25% flash 1.3G
composition
1.4G
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
≤ 30 mm inner diameter, each
pyrotechnic unit ≤ 25 g and ≤ 5% flash
composition
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Shot tube Single shot Roman candle, small Tube containing a pyrotechnic unit consisting of pyrotechnic ≤ 30 mm inner diameter and pyrotechnic 1.3G
preloaded mortar substance, propellant charge with or without transmitting fuse unit > 25 g, or > 5% and ≤ 25% flash
composition
≤ 30 mm inner diameter, pyrotechnic unit 1.4G
≤ 25 g and ≤ 5% flash composition
Type Includes: / Synonym: Definition Specification Classification
Rocket Avalanche rocket, signal rocket, whistling Tube containing pyrotechnic substance and/or pyrotechnic units, Flash composition effects only 1.1G
rocket, bottle rocket, sky rocket, missile equipped with stick(s) or other means for stabilization of flight,
type rocket, table rocket and designed to be propelled into the air Flash composition > 25% of the 1.1G
pyrotechnic substance
> 20 g pyrotechnic substance and flash 1.3G
composition ≤ 25 %
≤ 20 g pyrotechnic substance, black 1.4G
powder bursting charge and ≤ 0.13 g
flash composition per report and ≤ 1 g
in total
Mine Pot-a-feu, ground mine, bag mine, Tube containing propellant charge and pyrotechnic units and > 25% flash composition, as loose 1.1G
cylinder mine designed to be placed on the ground or to be fixed in the ground. powder and/or report effects
The principal effect is ejection of all the pyrotechnic units in a
single burst producing a widely dispersed visual and/or aural ≥ 180 mm and ≤ 25% flash composition, 1.1G
effect in the air or: as loose powder and/or report effects
Cloth or paper bag or cloth or paper cylinder containing < 180 mm and ≤ 25% flash composition, 1.3G
propellant charge and pyrotechnic units, designed to be placed in as loose powder and/or report effects
a mortar and to function as a mine
≤ 150 g pyrotechnic substance, 1.4G
containing ≤ 5% flash composition as
loose powder and/or report effects. Each
pyrotechnic unit ≤ 25 g, each report
effect < 2 g; each whistle, if any, ≤ 3 g
Fountain Volcanos, gerbs, lances, Bengal fire, Non-metallic case containing pressed or consolidated ≥ 1 kg pyrotechnic substance 1.3G
AMENDMENTS TO THE
flitter sparkle, cylindrical fountains, cone pyrotechnic substance producing sparks and flame
fountains, illuminating torch Note: Fountains intended to produce a vertical cascade or < 1 kg pyrotechnic substance 1.4G
curtain of sparks are considered to be waterfalls (see row below).
Waterfall Cascades, showers Pyrotechnic fountain intended to produce a vertical cascade or Containing flash composition regardless 1.1G
curtain of sparks of the results of Test Series 6
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
(see 2.1.3.5.1.1)
Not containing flash composition 1.3G
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Sparkler Handheld sparklers, non-handheld Rigid wire partially coated (along one end) with slow-burning Perchlorate based sparklers: > 5 g per 1.3G
sparklers, wire sparklers pyrotechnic substance with or without an ignition tip item or > 10 items per pack
Perchlorate based sparklers: ≤ 5 g per 1.4G
item and ≤ 10 items per pack
Nitrate based sparklers: ≤ 30 g per item
Bengal stick Dipped stick Non-metallic stick partially coated (along one end) with Perchlorate based items: > 5 g per item 1.3G
slow-burning pyrotechnic substance and designed to be held in or > 10 items per pack
the hand
Perchlorate based items: ≤ 5 g per item 1.4G
and ≤ 10 items per pack; nitrate based
items: ≤ 30 g per item
Type Includes: / Synonym: Definition Specification Classification
Low hazard Table bombs, throwdowns, crackling Device designed to produce very limited visible and/or audible Throwdowns and snaps may contain up 1.4G
fireworks and granules, smokes, fog, snakes, glow effect which contains small amounts of pyrotechnic and/or to 1.6 mg of silver fulminate; snaps and
novelties worm, serpents, snaps, party poppers explosive substance party poppers may contain up to 16 mg
of potassium chlorate/red phosphorus
mixture; other articles may contain up
to 5 g of pyrotechnic substance, but no
flash composition
Spinner Aerial spinner, helicopter, chaser, ground Non-metallic tube or tubes containing gas- or spark-producing Pyrotechnic substance per item > 20 g, 1.3G
spinner pyrotechnic substance, with or without noise-producing containing ≤ 3% flash composition as
substance, with or without aerofoils attached report effects, or whistle composition ≤ 5 g
Pyrotechnic substance per item ≤ 20 g, 1.4G
containing ≤ 3% flash composition as
report effects, or whistle composition ≤ 5 g
Wheels Catherine wheels, Saxon Assembly including drivers containing pyrotechnic substance and ≥ 1 kg total pyrotechnic substance, no 1.3G
provided with a means of attaching it to a support so that it can report effect, each whistle (if any) ≤ 25 g
rotate and ≤ 50 g whistle composition per wheel
< 1 kg total pyrotechnic substance, no 1.4G
report effect, each whistle (if any) ≤ 5 g
and ≤ 10 g whistle composition per wheel
Aerial wheel Flying Saxon, UFOs, rising crown Tubes containing propellant charges and sparks-, flame- and/or > 200 g total pyrotechnic substance or 1.3G
noise-producing pyrotechnic substances, the tubes being fixed to > 60 g pyrotechnic substance per driver,
a supporting ring ≤ 3% flash composition as report effects,
each whistle (if any) ≤ 25 g and ≤ 50 g
whistle composition per wheel
≤ 200 g total pyrotechnic substance and 1.4G
AMENDMENTS TO THE
≤ 60 g pyrotechnic substance per driver,
≤ 3% flash composition as report effects,
each whistle (if any) ≤ 5 g and ≤ 10 g
whistle composition per wheel
Selection pack Display selection box, display selection A pack of more than one type each corresponding to one of the The most hazardous firework type
pack, garden selection box, indoor types of fireworks listed in this table determines the classification
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
selection box; assortment
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Firecracker Celebration cracker, celebration roll, Assembly of tubes (paper or cardboard) linked by a pyrotechnic Each tube ≤ 140 mg of flash composition 1.4G
string cracker fuse, each tube intended to produce an aural effect or ≤ 1 g black powder
Banger Salute, flash banger, lady cracker Non-metallic tube containing report composition intended to > 2 g flash composition per item 1.1G
produce an aural effect
≤ 2 g flash composition per item and 1.3G
≤ 10 g per inner packaging
≤ 1 g flash composition per item and 1.4G
≤ 10 g per inner packaging or ≤ 10 g
black powder per item
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.1.3.6 Classification documentation
2.1.3.6.1 A competent authority assigning an article or substance into class 1 should confirm with the applicant that
classification in writing.
2.1.3.6.2 A competent authority classification document may be in any form and may consist of more than one page,
provided pages are numbered consecutively. The document should have a unique reference.
2.1.3.6.3 The information provided shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.
2.1.3.6.4 Examples of the information that may be provided in the classification documents are as follows:
.1 the name of the competent authority and the provisions in national legislation under which it is granted
its authority;
.2 the modal or national regulations for which the classification document is applicable;
.3 confirmation that the classification has been approved, made or agreed in accordance with the United
Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods or the relevant modal regulations;
.4 the name and address of the person in law to which the classification has been assigned and any company
registration which uniquely identifies a company or other body corporate under national legislation;
.5 the name under which the explosives will be placed on the market or otherwise supplied for transport;
.6 the Proper Shipping Name, UN number, Class, Hazard Division and corresponding compatibility group
of the explosives;
.7 where appropriate, the maximum net explosive mass of the package or article;
.8 the name, signature, stamp, seal or other identification of the person authorized by the competent
authority to issue the classification document is clearly visible;
.9 where safety in transport or the hazard division is assessed as being dependent upon the packaging, the
packaging mark or a description of the permitted:
– inner packagings
– intermediate packagings
– outer packagings
.10 the classification document states the part number, stock number or other identifying reference under
which the explosives will be placed onto the market or otherwise supplied for transport;
.11 the name and address of the person in law who manufactured the explosives and any company
registration which uniquely identifies a company or other body corporate under national legislation;
.12 any additional information regarding the applicable packing instruction and special packing provisions
where appropriate;
.13 the basis for assigning the classification, i.e. whether on the basis of test results, default for fireworks,
analogy with classified explosive, by definition from the Dangerous Goods List etc.;
.14 any special conditions or limitations that the competent authority has identified as relevant to the safety
for transport of the explosives, the communication of the hazard and international transport; and
.15 the expiry date of the classification document is given where the competent authority considers one to
be appropriate.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.2
Class 2 – Gases
2.2.0 Introductory note
“Toxic” has the same meaning as “poisonous”.
2.2.1 Definitions and general provisions
2.2.1.1 A gas is a substance which:
.1 at 50°C has a vapour pressure greater than 300 kPa; or
.2 is completely gaseous at 20°C at a standard pressure of 101.3 kPa.
2.2.1.2 The transport condition of a gas is described according to its physical state as:
.1 compressed gas: a gas which when packaged under pressure for transport is entirely gaseous at -50°C;
this category includes all gases with a critical temperature less than or equal to -50°C;
.2 liquefied gas: a gas which when packaged under pressure for transport is partially liquid at temperatures
above -50 °C. A distinction is made between:
high pressure liquefied gas: a gas with a critical temperature between -50°C and +65°C, and
low pressure liquefied gas: a gas with a critical temperature above +65°C;
.3 refrigerated liquefied gas: a gas which when packaged for transport is made partially liquid because of
its low temperature;
.4 dissolved gas: a gas which when packaged under pressure for transport is dissolved in a liquid phase
solvent;
.5 adsorbed gas: a gas which when packaged for transport is adsorbed onto a solid porous material
resulting in an internal receptacle pressure of less than 101.3 kPa at 20°C and less than 300 kPa at 50°C.
2.2.1.3 The class comprises compressed gases, liquefied gases, dissolved gases, refrigerated liquefied gases,
adsorbed gases, mixtures of one or more gases with one or more vapours of substances of other classes,
articles charged with a gas, aerosols and chemicals under pressure.
2.2.1.4 Gases are normally transported under pressure varying from high pressure in the case of compressed gases
to low pressure in the case of refrigerated gases.
2.2.1.5 According to their chemical properties or physiological effects, which may vary widely, gases may be:
flammable; non-flammable; non-toxic; toxic; supporters of combustion; corrosive; or may possess two or
more of these properties simultaneously.
2.2.1.5.1 Some gases are chemically and physiologically inert. Such gases as well as other gases, normally accepted
as non-toxic, will nevertheless be suffocating in high concentrations.
2.2.1.5.2 Many gases of this class have narcotic effects which may occur at comparatively low concentrations or may
evolve highly toxic gases when involved in a fire.
2.2.1.5.3 All gases which are heavier than air will present a potential danger if allowed to accumulate in the bottom of
cargo spaces.
2.2.2 Class subdivisions
Class 2 is subdivided further according to the primary hazard of the gas during transport:
Note: For UN 1950 AEROSOLS, see also the criteria in special provision 63. For chemicals under pressure of
UN Nos. 3500 to 3505, see also special provision 362. For UN 2037 RECEPTACLES, SMALL, CONTAINING
GAS (GAS CARTRIDGES), see also special provision 303.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.2.2.1 Class 2.1 Flammable gases
Gases which at 20°C and a standard pressure of 101.3 kPa:
.1 are ignitable when in a mixture of 13% or less by volume with air; or
.2 have a flammable range with air of at least 12 percentage points regardless of the lower flammable limit.
Flammability shall be determined by tests or calculation in accordance with methods adopted by the
International Organization for Standardization (see ISO 10156:2017). Where insufficient data are available
to use these methods, tests by a comparable method recognized by a national competent authority may
be used.
2.2.2.2 Class 2.2 Non-flammable, non-toxic gases
Gases which:
.1 are asphyxiant – gases which dilute or replace the oxygen normally in the atmosphere; or
.2 are oxidizing – gases which may, generally by providing oxygen, cause or contribute to the combustion
of other material more than air does; or
.3 do not come under the other classes.
Note: In 2.2.2.2.2, “gases which cause or contribute to the combustion of other material more than air does”
means pure gases or gas mixtures with an oxidizing power greater than 23.5% as determined by a method
specified in ISO 10156:2017.
2.2.2.3 Class 2.3 Toxic gases
Gases which:
.1 are known to be so toxic or corrosive to humans as to pose a hazard to health; or
.2 are presumed to be toxic or corrosive to humans because they have a LC50 value (as defined in 2.6.2.1)
equal to or less than 5,000 mL/m3 (ppm).
Note: Gases meeting the above criteria owing to their corrosivity are to be classified as toxic with a subsidiary
corrosive hazard.
2.2.2.4 Gases and gas mixtures with hazards associated with more than one division take the following precedence:
.1 class 2.3 takes precedence over all other classes;
.2 class 2.1 takes precedence over class 2.2.
2.2.2.5 Gases of class 2.2 are not subject to the provisions of this Code if they are transported at a pressure of less
than 200 kPa at 20°C and are not liquefied or refrigerated liquefied gases.
2.2.2.6 Gases of class 2.2 are not subject to the provisions of this Code when contained in the following:
.1 foodstuffs (except UN 1950), including carbonated beverages;
.2 balls intended for use in sports; or
.3 tyres (except for air transport).
Note: This exemption does not apply to lamps. For lamps see 1.1.1.9.
2.2.3 Mixtures of gases
For the classification of gas mixtures (including vapours of substances from other classes), the following
principles shall be used:
.1 Flammability shall be determined by tests or calculation in accordance with methods adopted by the
International Organization for Standardization (see ISO 10156:2017). Where insufficient data are available
to use these methods, tests by a comparable method recognized by a national competent authority may
be used.
.2 The level of toxicity is determined either by tests to measure the LC50 value (as defined in 2.6.2.1) or by a
calculation method using the following formula:
LC 50 1
Toxic (mixture) = _____n
∑ __T
fi
i=1 i
where: fi = mole fraction of the ith component substance of the mixture;
Ti = toxicity index of the ith component substance of the mixture (the Ti equals the LC50 value
when available).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
When LC50 values are unknown, the toxicity index is determined by using the lowest LC50 value of
substances of similar physiological and chemical effects, or through testing if this is the only practical
possibility.
.3 A gas mixture has a subsidiary hazard of corrosivity when the mixture is known by human experience
to be destructive to the skin, eyes or mucous membranes or when the LC50 value of the corrosive
components of the mixture is equal to or less than 5,000 mL/m3 (ppm) when the LC50 is calculated by the
formula:
LC 50 1
Corrosive (mixture) = _____n
∑ __
fci
T ci
i=1
where: fci = mole fraction of the i corrosive component substance of the mixture;
th
Tci = toxicity index of the ith corrosive component substance of the mixture (the Tci equals
the LC50 value when available).
.4 Oxidizing ability is determined either by tests or by calculation methods adopted by the International
Organization for Standardization (see note in 2.2.2.2).
2.2.4 Gases not accepted for transport
Chemically unstable gases of class 2 shall not be accepted for transport unless the necessary precautions
have been taken to prevent the possibility of a dangerous decomposition or polymerization under normal
conditions of transport or unless transported in accordance with special packing provision (r) of packing
instruction P200 (5) of 4.1.4.1, as applicable. For the precautions necessary to prevent polymerization, see
special provision 386 of chapter 3.3. To this end particular care shall be taken to ensure that receptacles and
tanks do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.3
Class 3 – Flammable liquids
2.3.0 Introductory note
The flashpoint of a flammable liquid may be altered by the presence of an impurity. The substances listed
in class 3 in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 shall generally be regarded as chemically pure.
Since commercial products may contain added substances or impurities, flashpoints may vary, and this
may have an effect on classification or determination of the packing group for the product. In the event of
doubt regarding the classification or packing group of a substance, the flashpoint of the substance shall be
determined experimentally.
2.3.1 Definitions and general provisions
2.3.1.1 Class 3 includes the following substances:
.1 flammable liquids (see 2.3.1.2 and 2.3.1.3);
.2 liquid desensitized explosives (see 2.3.1.4).
2.3.1.2 Flammable liquids are liquids, or mixtures of liquids, or liquids containing solids in solution or suspension
(such as paints, varnishes, lacquers, etc., but not including substances which, on account of their other
dangerous characteristics, have been included in other classes) which give off a flammable vapour at or
below 60°C closed-cup test (corresponding to 65.6°C open-cup test), normally referred to as the “flashpoint”.
This also includes:
.1 liquids offered for transport at temperatures at or above their flashpoint; and
.2 substances transported or offered for transport at elevated temperatures in a liquid state, which give off
a flammable vapour at temperatures equal to or below the maximum transport temperature.
2.3.1.3 However, the provisions of this Code need not apply to such liquids with a flashpoint of more than 35°C which
do not sustain combustion. Liquids are considered to be unable to sustain combustion for the purposes of
the Code if:
.1 they have passed the suitable combustibility test (see the Sustained Combustibility Test prescribed in
part III, 32.5.2 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria); or
.2 their fire point according to ISO 2592:1973 is greater than 100°C; or
.3 they are water-miscible solutions with a water content of more than 90%, by mass.
2.3.1.4 Liquid desensitized explosives are explosive substances which are dissolved or suspended in water or other
liquid substances, to form a homogeneous liquid mixture to suppress their explosive properties. Entries in the
Dangerous Goods List for liquid desensitized explosives are UN 1204, UN 2059, UN 3064, UN 3343, UN 3357,
UN 3379 and UN 3555.
2.3.2 Assignment of packing group
2.3.2.1 The criteria in 2.3.2.6 are used to determine the hazard grouping of a liquid that presents a hazard due to
flammability.
2.3.2.1.1 For liquids whose only hazard is flammability, the packing group for the substance is the hazard grouping
shown in 2.3.2.6.
2.3.2.1.2 For a liquid with additional hazard(s), the hazard group determined from 2.3.2.6 and the hazard group based
on the severity of the additional hazard(s) shall be considered, and the classification and packing group
determined in accordance with the provisions in chapter 2.0.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.3.2.2 Viscous flammable liquids such as paints, enamels, lacquers, varnishes, adhesives and polishes having a
flashpoint of less than 23°C may be placed in packing group III in conformity with the procedures prescribed
in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 32.3, provided that:
.1 The viscosity and flashpoint are in accordance with the following table:
Kinematic viscosity
(extrapolated) Flashpoint (closed-cup)
Flow-time t in seconds Jet diameter (mm)
v (at near-zero shear rate) in °C
mm2 /s at 23°C
20 < v ≤ 80 20 < t ≤ 60 4 above 17
80 < v ≤ 135 60 < t ≤ 100 4 above 10
135 < v ≤ 220 20 < t ≤ 32 6 above 5
220 < v ≤ 300 32 < t ≤ 44 6 above -1
300 < v ≤ 700 44 < t ≤ 100 6 above -5
700 < v 100 < t 6 no limit
.2 less than 3% of the clear solvent layer separates in the solvent separation test;
.3 the mixture or any separated solvent does not meet the criteria for class 6.1 or class 8;
.4 the substances are packed in receptacles of not more than 450 L capacity.
2.3.2.3 [Reserved]
2.3.2.4 Substances classified as flammable liquids due to their being transported or offered for transport at elevated
temperatures are included in packing group III.
2.3.2.5 Viscous liquids which:
– have a flashpoint of 23°C or above and less than or equal to 60°C;
– are not toxic or corrosive;
– are not environmentally hazardous or are environmentally hazardous transported in single or combination
packagings containing a net quantity per single or inner packaging of 5 L or less, provided the packagings
meet the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.4 to 4.1.1.8;
– contain not more than 20% nitrocellulose provided the nitrocellulose contains not more than 12.6%
nitrogen by dry mass; and
– are packed in receptacles of not more than 450 L capacity,
are not subject to the provisions for the marking, labelling and testing of packages in chapters 4.1, 5.2
and 6.1, if:
.1 in the solvent separation test (see part III, 32.5.1 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria) the height of the
separated layer of solvent is less than 3% of the total height; and
.2 the flowtime in the viscosity test (see part III, 32.4.3 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria) with a jet diameter
of 6 mm is equal to or greater than:
.1 60 s; or
.2 40 s if the viscous liquid contains not more than 60% of class 3 substances.
The following statement shall be included in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 2.3.2.5
of the IMDG Code” (see 5.4.1.5.10).
2.3.2.6 Hazard grouping based on flammability
Flammable liquids are grouped for packing purposes according to their flashpoint, their boiling point, and
their viscosity. This table shows the relationship between two of these characteristics.
Packing group Flashpoint (closed-cup) in °C Initial boiling point in °C
I – ≤ 35
II < 23 > 35
III ≥ 23 to ≤ 60 > 35
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.3.3 Determination of flashpoint
Note: The provisions of this section are not mandatory.
2.3.3.1 The flashpoint of a flammable liquid is the lowest temperature of the liquid at which its vapour forms an
ignitable mixture with air. It gives a measure of the risk of formation of explosive or ignitable mixtures when
the liquid escapes from its packing. A flammable liquid cannot be ignited so long as its temperature remains
below the flashpoint.
Note: Do not confuse the flashpoint with the ignition temperature, which is the temperature to which an
explosive vapour–air mixture must be heated to cause actual explosion. There is no relationship between the
flashpoint and the ignition temperature.
2.3.3.2 The flashpoint is not an exact physical constant for a given liquid. It depends to some extent on the construction
of the test apparatus used and on the testing procedure. Therefore, when providing flashpoint data, specify
the name of the test apparatus.
2.3.3.3 Several standard apparatuses are in current use. They all operate on the same principle: a specified quantity
of the liquid is introduced into a receptacle at a temperature well below the flashpoint to be expected, then
slowly heated; periodically, a small flame is brought near to the surface of the liquid. The flashpoint is the
lowest temperature at which a “flash” is observed.
2.3.3.4 The test methods can be divided into two groups, depending on the use in an apparatus of an open receptacle
(open-cup methods) or a closed one which is only opened to admit the flame (closed-cup methods). As a rule,
the flashpoints found in an open-cup test are a few degrees higher than in a closed-cup test.
2.3.3.5 In general, reproducibility in closed-cup apparatus is better than in open-cup.
2.3.3.5.1 It is therefore recommended that flashpoints, especially in the range around 23°C, shall be determined by
means of closed-cup (c.c) methods.
2.3.3.5.2 Flashpoint data in this Code are generally based on closed-cup methods. In countries where it is customary
to determine flashpoints by the open-cup method, the temperatures given by that method would need to be
reduced to correspond with those in this Code.
2.3.3.6 Determination of flashpoint
The following methods for determining the flashpoint of flammable liquids may be used:
International standards:
ISO 1516
ISO 1523
ISO 2719
ISO 13736
ISO 3679
ISO 3680
National standards:
American Society for Testing Materials International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700,
West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, USA 19428-2959:
ASTM D3828-07a, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed Cup Tester
ASTM D56-05, Standard Test Method for Flash Point by Tag Closed Cup Tester
ASTM D3278-96(2004)e, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup
Apparatus
ASTM D93-08, Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester
Association française de normalisation, AFNOR, 11, rue Francis de Pressensé, 93571 La Plaine Saint-Denis
Cedex:
French Standard NF M 07-019
French Standards NF M 07-011/NF T 30-050/NF T 66-009
French Standard NF M 07-036
Deutsches Institut für Normung, Burggrafenstr. 6, D-10787 Berlin:
Standard DIN 51755 (flashpoints below 65°C)
State Committee of the Council of Ministers for Standardization, 113813, GSP, Moscow,
M-49 Leninsky Prospect, 9:
GOST 12.1.044-84
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.3.4 Determination of initial boiling point
The following methods for determining the initial boiling point of flammable liquids may be used:
International standards:
ISO 3924
ISO 4626
ISO 3405
National standards:
American Society for Testing Materials International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700,
West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania, USA 19428-2959:
ASTM D86-07a, Standard Test Method for Distillation of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure
ASTM D1078-05, Standard Test Method for Distillation Range of Volatile Organic Liquids
Further acceptable methods:
Method A.2 as described in Part A of the Annex to Commission Regulation (EC) No. 440/2008.
2.3.5 Substances not accepted for transport
Chemically unstable substances of class 3 shall not be accepted for transport unless the necessary
precautions have been taken to prevent the possibility of a dangerous decomposition or polymerization
under normal conditions of transport. For the precautions necessary to prevent polymerization, see special
provision 386 of chapter 3.3. To this end particular care shall be taken to ensure that receptacles and tanks
do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.4
Class 4 – Flammable solids;
substances liable to spontaneous combustion;
substances which, in contact with water,
emit flammable gases
2.4.0 Introductory note
Since organometallic substances can be classified in classes 4.2 or 4.3 with additional subsidiary hazards,
depending on their properties, a specific classification flowchart for these substances is given in 2.4.5.
2.4.1 Definition and general provisions
2.4.1.1 In this Code, class 4 deals with substances, other than those classified as explosives, which, under conditions
of transport, are readily combustible or may cause or contribute to a fire. Class 4 is subdivided as follows:
Class 4.1 – Flammable solids
Solids which, under conditions encountered in transport, are readily combustible or may cause or contribute
to fire through friction; self-reactive substances (solids and liquids) and polymerizing substances which are
liable to undergo a strongly exothermic reaction; solid desensitized explosives which may explode if not
diluted sufficiently;
Class 4.2 – Substances liable to spontaneous combustion
Substances (solids and liquids) which are liable to spontaneous heating under normal conditions encountered
in transport, or to heating up in contact with air, and being then liable to catch fire;
Class 4.3 – Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases
Substances (solids and liquids) which, by interaction with water, are liable to become spontaneously
flammable or to give off flammable gases in dangerous quantities.
2.4.1.2 As referenced in this chapter, test methods and criteria, with advice on application of the tests, are given in
the Manual of Tests and Criteria for the classification of following types of substances of class 4:
.1 flammable solids (class 4.1);
.2 self-reactive substances (class 4.1);
.3 polymerizing substances (class 4.1);
.4 pyrophoric solids (class 4.2);
.5 pyrophoric liquids (class 4.2);
.6 self-heating substances (class 4.2); and
.7 substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases (class 4.3).
Test methods and criteria for self-reactive substances and polymerizing substances are given in part II of the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, and test methods and criteria for the other types of substances of class 4 are
given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, section 33.
2.4.2 Class 4.1 – Flammable solids, self-reactive substances,
solid desensitized explosives and polymerizing substances
2.4.2.1 General
Class 4.1 includes the following types of substances:
.1 flammable solids (see 2.4.2.2);
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 self-reactive substances (see 2.4.2.3);
.3 solid desensitized explosives (see 2.4.2.4); and
.4 polymerizing substances (see 2.4.2.5).
Some substances (such as celluloid) may evolve toxic and flammable gases when heated or if involved in a fire.
2.4.2.2 Class 4.1 Flammable solids
2.4.2.2.1 Definitions and properties
2.4.2.2.1.1 For the purpose of this Code, flammable solids means readily combustible solids and solids which may cause
fire through friction.
2.4.2.2.1.2 Readily combustible solids means fibres, powdered, granular, or pasty substances which are dangerous if
they can be easily ignited by brief contact with an ignition source such as a burning match, and if the flame
spreads rapidly. The danger may come not only from the fire but also from toxic combustion products. Metal
powders are especially dangerous because of the difficulty of extinguishing a fire, since normal extinguishing
agents such as carbon dioxide or water can increase the hazard.
2.4.2.2.1.3 Metal powders means powders of metals or metal alloys.
2.4.2.2.2 Classification of flammable solids
2.4.2.2.2.1 Powdered, granular or pasty substances shall be classified as readily combustible solids of class 4.1 when
the time of burning of one or more of the test runs, performed in accordance with the test method described
in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 33.2, is less than 45 s or the rate of burning is more than
2.2 mm/s. Metal powders shall be classified in class 4.1 when they can be ignited and the reaction spreads
over the whole length of the sample in 10 min or less.
2.4.2.2.2.2 Solids which may cause fire through friction shall be classified in class 4.1 by analogy with existing entries
(such as matches) until definitive criteria are established.
2.4.2.2.3 Assignment of packing groups
2.4.2.2.3.1 Packing groups are assigned on the basis of the test methods referred to in 2.4.2.2.2.1. For readily combustible
solids (other than metal powders), packing group II shall be assigned if the burning time is less than 45 s and
the flame passes the wetted zone. Packing group II shall be assigned to metal powders if the zone of reaction
spreads over the whole length of the sample in five minutes or less.
2.4.2.2.3.2 Packing groups are assigned on the basis of the test methods referred to in 2.4.2.2.2.1. For readily combustible
solids (other than metal powders), packing group III shall be assigned if the burning time is less than 45 s and
the wetted zone stops the flame propagation for at least four minutes. Packing group III shall be assigned to
metal powders if the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in more than five minutes but not
more than 10 min.
2.4.2.2.3.3 For solids which may cause fire through friction, the packing group shall be assigned by analogy with existing
entries or in accordance with any appropriate special provision.
2.4.2.2.4 Pyrophoric metal powders, if wetted with sufficient water to suppress their pyrophoric properties, may be
classified as class 4.1.
2.4.2.3 Class 4.1 Self-reactive substances
2.4.2.3.1 Definitions and properties
2.4.2.3.1.1 For the purposes of this Code:
Self-reactive substances are thermally unstable substances liable to undergo a strongly exothermic
decomposition even without participation of oxygen (air). Substances are not considered to be self-reactive
substances of class 4.1, if:
.1 they are explosives according to the criteria of class 1;
.2 they are oxidizing substances according to the classification procedure for class 5.1 (see 2.5.2) except
that mixtures of oxidizing substances which contain 5.0% or more of combustible organic substances
shall be subjected to the classification procedure defined in note 3;
.3 they are organic peroxides according to the criteria of class 5.2;
.4 their heat of decomposition is less than 300 J/g; or
.5 their self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) (see 2.4.2.3.4) is greater than 75°C for a 50 kg
package.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Note 1: The heat of decomposition may be determined using any internationally recognized method such as
differential scanning calorimetry and adiabatic calorimetry.
Note 2: Any substance which shows the properties of a self-reactive substance shall be classified as such,
even if this substance gives a positive test result according to 2.4.3.2 for inclusion in class 4.2.
Note 3: Mixtures of oxidizing substances meeting the criteria of class 5.1 which contain 5.0% or more of
combustible organic substances, which do not meet the criteria mentioned in .1, .3, .4 or .5 above, shall be
subjected to the self-reactive substance classification procedure.
A mixture showing the properties of a self-reactive substance, types B to F, shall be classified as a self-reactive
substance of class 4.1.
A mixture showing the properties of a self-reactive substance, type G, according to the principle of 2.4.2.3.3.2.7
shall be considered for classification as a substance of class 5.1 (see 2.5.2).
2.4.2.3.1.2 The decomposition of self-reactive substances can be initiated by heat, contact with catalytic impurities
(such as acids, heavy-metal compounds, bases), friction or impact. The rate of decomposition increases with
temperature and varies with the substance. Decomposition, particularly if no ignition occurs, may result in the
evolution of toxic gases or vapours. For certain self-reactive substances, the temperature shall be controlled.
Some self-reactive substances may decompose explosively, particularly if confined. This characteristic may
be modified by the addition of diluents or by the use of appropriate packagings. Some self-reactive substances
burn vigorously. Self-reactive substances are, for example, some compounds of the types listed below:
.1 aliphatic azo compounds (–C–N=N–C–);
.2 organic azides (–C–N3);
.3 diazonium salts (–CN2+ Z-
);
.4 N-nitroso compounds (–N–N=O); and
.5 aromatic sulphonylhydrazides (–SO2–NH–NH2).
This list is not exhaustive and substances with other reactive groups and some mixtures of substances may
have similar properties.
2.4.2.3.2 Classification of self-reactive substances
2.4.2.3.2.1 Self-reactive substances are classified into seven types according to the degree of danger they present. The
types of self-reactive substance range from type A, which may not be accepted for transport in the packaging
in which it is tested, to type G, which is not subject to the provisions for self-reactive substances of class 4.1.
The classification of types B to F is directly related to the maximum quantity allowed in one packaging.
2.4.2.3.2.2 Self-reactive substances permitted for transport in packagings are listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3, those permitted for
transport in IBCs are listed in packing instruction IBC520 and those permitted for transport in portable tanks
are listed in portable tank instruction T23. For each permitted substance listed, the appropriate generic entry
of the Dangerous Goods List (UN 3221 to UN 3240) is assigned, and appropriate subsidiary hazards and
remarks providing relevant transport information are given. The generic entries specify:
.1 self-reactive substance type (B to F);
.2 physical state (liquid or solid); and
.3 temperature control, when required (2.4.2.3.4).
2.4.2.3.2.3 List of currently assigned self-reactive substances in packagings
In the column “Packing Method” codes “OP1” to “OP8” refer to packing methods in packing instruction
P520. Self-reactive substances to be transported shall fulfil the classification and the control and emergency
temperatures (derived from the SADT) as listed. For substances permitted in IBCs, see packing instruction
IBC520, and for those permitted in tanks, see portable tank instruction T23. The formulations not listed in this
subsection but listed in packing instruction IBC520 of 4.1.4.2 and in portable tank instruction T23 of 4.2.5.2.6
may also be transported packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of
4.1.4.1, with the same control and emergency temperatures, if applicable.
Note: The classification given in this table is based on the technically pure substance (except where a
concentration of less than 100% is specified). For other concentrations, the substances may be classified
differently following the procedures in 2.4.2.3.3 and 2.4.2.3.4.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
UN Concen- Control Emergency
Packing
generic Self-reactive substance tration temper- temper- Remarks
method
entry (%) ature (°C) ature (°C)
3222 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-4-SULPHONYL CHLORIDE 100 OP5 (2)
2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONYL CHLORIDE 100 OP5 (2)
3223 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID, SAMPLE OP2 (8)
3224 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE C < 100 OP6 (3)
2,2′-AZODI(ISOBUTYRONITRILE) as a ≤ 50 OP6
water-based paste
N,N′-DINITROSO-N,N′-DIMETHYL- 72 OP6
TEREPHTHALAMIDE, as a paste
N,N′-DINITROSOPENTAMETHYLENETETRAMINE 82 OP6 (7)
SELF-REACTIVE SOLID, SAMPLE OP2 (8)
3226 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION TYPE D < 100 OP7 (5)
1,1′-AZODI(HEXAHYDROBENZONITRILE) 100 OP7
BENZENE-1,3-DISULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE 52 OP7
as a paste
BENZENESULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE 100 OP7
4-(BENZYL(ETHYL)AMINO)-3-ETHOXY- 100 OP7
BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
3-CHLORO-4-DIETHYLAMINOBENZENE- 100 OP7
DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOLSULPHONIC ACID ESTER < 100 OP7 (9)
MIXTURE TYPE D
2,5-DIETHOXY-4-(4-MORPHOLINYL)- 100 OP7
BENZENEDIAZONIUM SULPHATE
DIPHENYLOXIDE-4,4′-DISULPHONYL HYDRAZIDE 100 OP7
4-DIPROPYLAMINOBENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC 100 OP7
CHLORIDE
4-METHYLBENZENESULPHONYLHYDRAZIDE 100 OP7
SODIUM 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-4-SULPHONATE 100 OP7
SODIUM 2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONATE 100 OP7
3227 PHOSPHOROTHIOIC ACID, O-[(CYANOPHENYL 82-91 OP8 (10)
METHYLENE) AZANYL] O,O-DIETHYL ESTER (Z isomer)
3228 ACETONE–PYROGALLOL COPOLYMER 100 OP8
2-DIAZO-1-NAPHTHOL-5-SULPHONATE
4-(DIMETHYLAMINO)BENZENEDIAZONIUM 100 OP8
TRICHLOROZINCATE(–1)
2,5-DIBUTOXY-4-(4-MORPHOLINYL)- 100 OP8
BENZENEDIAZONIUM
TETRACHLOROZINCATE(2:1)
3230 (7-METHOXY-5-METHYL-BENZOTHIOPHEN-2-YL) 88-100 OP7 (11)
BORONIC ACID
3232 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION < 100 OP5 (1) (2)
TYPE B, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
3233 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID, SAMPLE, TEMPERATURE OP2 (8)
CONTROLLED
3234 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION < 100 OP6 (4)
TYPE C, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
2,2′-AZODI(ISOBUTYRONITRILE) 100 OP6 +40 +45
3-METHYL-4-(PYRROLIDIN-1-YL)BENZENE- 95 OP6 +45 +50
DIAZONIUM TETRAFLUOROBORATE
SELF-REACTIVE SOLID, SAMPLE, OP2 (8)
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
TETRAMINEPALLADIUM(II) NITRATE 100 OP6 +30 +35
3235 2,2′-AZODI(ETHYL-2-METHYLPROPIONATE) 100 OP7 +20 +25
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
UN Concen- Control Emergency
Packing
generic Self-reactive substance tration temper- temper- Remarks
method
entry (%) ature (°C) ature (°C)
3236 AZODICARBONAMIDE FORMULATION < 100 OP7 (6)
TYPE D, TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
2,2′-AZODI(2,4-DIMETHYL-4-METHOXY- 100 OP7 -5 +5
VALERONITRILE)
2,2′-AZODI(2,4-DIMETHYLVALERONITRILE) 100 OP7 +10 +15
2,2′-AZODI(2-METHYLBUTYRONITRILE) 100 OP7 +35 +40
4-(BENZYL(METHYL)AMINO)-3-ETHOXY- 100 OP7 +40 +45
BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINO- 67–100 OP7 +35 +40
BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINO- 66 OP7 +40 +45
BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
2,5-DIETHOXY-4-MORPHOLINOBENZENE- 100 OP7 +30 +35
DIAZONIUM TETRAFLUOROBORATE
2,5-DIETHOXY-4-(PHENYLSULPHONYL)- 67 OP7 +40 +45
BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
2,5-DIMETHOXY-4-(4-METHYLPHENYL- 79 OP7 +40 +45
SULPHONYL)BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC
CHLORIDE
4-DIMETHYLAMINO-6-(2-DIMETHYLAMINO- 100 OP7 +40 +45
ETHOXY)TOLUENE-2-DIAZONIUM ZINC
CHLORIDE
2-(N,N-ETHOXYCARBONYLPHENYLAMINO)- 63–92 OP7 +40 +45
3-METHOXY-4-(N-METHYL-N-
CYCLOHEXYLAMINO)-
BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
2-(N,N-ETHOXYCARBONYLPHENYLAMINO)- 62 OP7 +35 +40
3-METHOXY-4-(N-METHYL-N-
CYCLOHEXYLAMINO)-
BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
N-FORMYL-2-(NITROMETHYLENE)- 100 OP7 +45 +50
1,3-PERHYDROTHIAZINE
2-(2-HYDROXYETHOXY)-1-(PYRROLIDIN-1-YL)- 100 OP7 +45 +50
BENZENE-4-DIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
3-(2-HYDROXYETHOXY)-4-(PYRROLIDIN-1-YL)- 100 OP7 +40 +45
BENZENEDIAZONIUM ZINC CHLORIDE
2-(N,N-METHYLAMINOETHYLCARBONYL)- 96 OP7 +45 +50
4-(3,4-DIMETHYLPHENYLSULPHONYL)-
BENZENEDIAZONIUM HYDROGEN SULPHATE
4-NITROSOPHENOL 100 OP7 +35 +40
3237 DIETHYLENEGLYCOL BIS(ALLYLCARBONATE) + ≥ 88 + OP8 -10 0
DI-ISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 12
Remarks
(1) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.2. The control and emergency temperatures
shall be determined by the procedure given in 7.3.7.2.
(2) “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (Model No 1, see 5.2.2.2.2) required.
(3) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.3.
(4) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.3. The control and emergency temperatures
shall be determined by the procedure given in 7.3.7.2.
(5) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.4.
(6) Azodicarbonamide formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.4. The control and emergency temperatures
shall be determined by the procedure given in 7.3.7.2.
(7) With a compatible diluent having a boiling point of not less than 150°C.
(8) See 2.4.2.3.2.4.2.
(9) This entry applies to mixtures of esters of 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-sulphonic acid and 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonic
acid meeting the criteria of 2.4.2.3.3.2.4.
(10) This entry applies to the technical mixture in n-butanol within the specified concentration limits of the (Z) isomer.
(11) The technical compound with the specified concentration limits may contain up to 12% water and up to 1% organic
impurities.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.4.2.3.2.4 Classification of self-reactive substances not listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3, packing instruction IBC520 or portable tank
instruction T23 and assignment to a generic entry shall be made by the competent authority of the country of
origin on the basis of a test report. Principles applying to the classification of such substances are provided
in 2.4.2.3.3. The applicable classification procedures, test methods and criteria, and an example of a suitable
test report, are given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II. The statement of approval shall contain the
classification and the relevant transport conditions.
.1 Activators, such as zinc compounds, may be added to some self-reactive substances to change their
reactivity. Depending on both the type and the concentration of the activator, this may result in a decrease
in thermal stability and a change in explosive properties. If either of these properties is altered, the new
formulation shall be assessed in accordance with this classification procedure.
.2 Samples of self-reactive substances or formulations of self-reactive substances not listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3,
for which a complete set of test results is not available and which are to be transported for further testing
or evaluation, may be assigned to one of the appropriate entries for self-reactive substances type C
provided the following conditions are met:
.1 the available data indicate that the sample would be no more dangerous than self-reactive substances
type B;
.2 the sample is packaged in accordance with packing method OP2 (see applicable packing instruction)
and the quantity per cargo transport unit is limited to 10 kg; and
.3 the available data indicate that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any
dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation.
2.4.2.3.3 Principles for classification of self-reactive substances
Note: This section refers only to those properties of self-reactive substances which are decisive for their
classification. A flow chart, presenting the classification principles in the form of a graphically arranged
scheme of questions concerning the decisive properties together with the possible answers, is given in
Figure 2.4.1 in chapter 2.4 of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods.
These properties shall be determined experimentally. Suitable test methods with pertinent evaluation criteria
are given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II.
2.4.2.3.3.1 A self-reactive substance is regarded as possessing explosive properties when, in laboratory testing,
the formulation is liable to detonate, to deflagrate rapidly or to show a violent effect when heated under
confinement.
2.4.2.3.3.2 The following principles apply to the classification of self-reactive substances not listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3:
.1 Any substance which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly, as packaged for transport, is prohibited from
transport under the provisions for self-reactive substances of class 4.1 in that packaging (defined as
SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE A);
.2 Any substance possessing explosive properties and which, as packaged for transport, neither detonates
nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in that package, shall also bear an
“EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2). Such a substance may be packaged
in amounts of up to 25 kg unless the maximum quantity has to be limited to a lower amount to preclude
detonation or rapid deflagration in the package (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE B);
.3 Any substance possessing explosive properties may be transported without an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary
hazard label when the substance as packaged (maximum 50 kg) for transport cannot detonate or
deflagrate rapidly or undergo a thermal explosion (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE C);
.4 Any substance which, in laboratory testing:
.1 detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under
confinement; or
.2 does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under
confinement; or
.3 does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement
may be accepted for transport in packages of not more than 50 kg net mass (defined as SELF-REACTIVE
SUBSTANCE TYPE D);
.5 Any substance which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows low or
no effect when heated under confinement may be accepted for transport in packages of not more
than 400 kg/450 L (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE E);
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.6 Any substance which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at
all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive
power may be considered for transport in IBCs (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE F); (for
additional provisions see 4.1.7.2.2);
.7 Any substance which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all
and shows no effect when heated under confinement nor any explosive power shall be exempted from
classification as a self-reactive substance of class 4.1 provided that the formulation is thermally stable
(self-accelerating decomposition temperature 60°C to 75°C for a 50 kg package) and any diluent meets
the provisions of 2.4.2.3.5 (defined as SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE G). If the formulation is not
thermally stable or a compatible diluent having a boiling point less than 150°C is used for desensitization,
the formulation shall be defined as SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID/SOLID TYPE F.
2.4.2.3.4 Temperature control provisions
2.4.2.3.4.1 Self-reactive substances are subject to temperature control in transport if their self-accelerating decomposition
temperature (SADT) is less than or equal to 55°C. For currently assigned self-reactive substances, the control
and emergency temperatures are shown in 2.4.2.3.2.3. Test methods for determining the SADT are given
in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II, section 28. The test selected shall be conducted in a manner
which is representative, both in size and material, of the package to be transported. The temperature control
provisions are given in 7.3.7.
2.4.2.3.5 Desensitization of self-reactive substances
2.4.2.3.5.1 In order to ensure safety during transport, self-reactive substances may be desensitized through the use
of a diluent. If a diluent is used, the self-reactive substance shall be tested with the diluent present in the
concentration and form used in transport.
2.4.2.3.5.2 Diluents which may allow a self-reactive substance to concentrate to a dangerous extent in the event of
leakage from a package shall not be used.
2.4.2.3.5.3 The diluent shall be compatible with the self-reactive substance. In this regard, compatible diluents are
those solids or liquids which have no detrimental influence on the thermal stability and hazard type of the
self-reactive substance.
2.4.2.3.5.4 Liquid diluents in liquid formulations requiring temperature control shall have a boiling point of at least 60°C
and a flashpoint not less than 5°C. The boiling point of the liquid shall be at least 50°C higher than the control
temperature of the self-reactive substance (see 7.3.7.2).
2.4.2.4 Class 4.1 Solid desensitized explosives
2.4.2.4.1 Definitions and properties
2.4.2.4.1.1 Solid desensitized explosives are explosive substances which are wetted with water or alcohols or are diluted
with other substances to form a homogeneous solid mixture to suppress their explosive properties. The
desensitizing agent shall be distributed uniformly throughout the substance in the state in which it is to be
transported. Where transport under conditions of low temperature is anticipated for substances containing
or wetted with water, a suitable and compatible solvent, such as alcohol, may have to be added to lower
the freezing point of the liquid. Some of these substances, when in a dry state, are classified as explosives.
Where reference is made to a substance which is wetted with water, or some other liquid, it shall be permitted
for transport as a class 4.1 substance only when in the wetted condition specified. Entries in the Dangerous
Goods List in chapter 3.2 for solid desensitized explosives are UN 1310, UN 1320, UN 1321, UN 1322, UN 1336,
UN 1337, UN 1344, UN 1347, UN 1348, UN 1349, UN 1354, UN 1355, UN 1356, UN 1357, UN 1517, UN 1571,
UN 2555, UN 2556, UN 2557, UN 2852, UN 2907, UN 3317, UN 3319, UN 3344, UN 3364, UN 3365, UN 3366,
UN 3367, UN 3368, UN 3369, UN 3370, UN 3376, UN 3380 and UN 3474.
2.4.2.4.2 Substances that:
.1 have been provisionally accepted into class 1 according to Test Series 1 and 2 but exempted from
class 1 by Test Series 6;
.2 are not self-reactive substances of class 4.1;
.3 are not substances of class 5
are also assigned to class 4.1. UN 2956, UN 3241, UN 3242 and UN 3251 are such entries.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.4.2.5 Class 4.1 Polymerizing substances and mixtures (stabilized)
2.4.2.5.1 Definitions and properties
Polymerizing substances are substances which, without stabilization, are liable to undergo a strongly
exothermic reaction resulting in the formation of larger molecules or resulting in the formation of polymers
under conditions normally encountered in transport. Such substances are considered to be polymerizing
substances of class 4.1 when:
.1 their self-accelerating polymerization temperature (SAPT) is 75°C or less under the conditions (with or
without chemical stabilization as offered for transport) and in the packaging, IBC or portable tank in
which the substance or mixture is to be transported;
.2 they exhibit a heat of reaction of more than 300 J/g; and
.3 they do not meet any other criteria for inclusion in classes 1 to 8.
A mixture meeting the criteria of a polymerizing substance shall be classified as a polymerizing substance of
Class 4.1.
2.4.2.5.2 Polymerizing substances are subject to temperature control in transport if their self-accelerating polymerization
temperature (SAPT) is:
.1 when offered for transport in a packaging or IBC, 50°C or less in the packaging or IBC in which the
substance is to be transported; or
.2 when offered for transport in a portable tank, 45°C or less in the portable tank in which the substance is
to be transported.
Note: Substances meeting the criteria of a polymerizing substance and also for inclusion in classes 1 to 8 are
subject to the requirements of special provision 386 of chapter 3.3.
2.4.3 Class 4.2 – Substances liable to spontaneous combustion
2.4.3.1 Definitions and properties
2.4.3.1.1 Class 4.2 comprises:
.1 Pyrophoric substances, which are substances, including mixtures and solutions (liquid or solid), which,
even in small quantities, ignite within 5 minutes of coming into contact with air. These substances are the
most liable to spontaneous combustion; and
.2 Self-heating substances, which are substances, other than pyrophoric substances, which, in contact
with air without energy supply, are liable to self-heating. These substances will ignite only when in large
amounts (kilograms) and after long periods of time (hours or days).
2.4.3.1.2 Self-heating of a substance is a process where the gradual reaction of that substance with oxygen (in air)
generates heat. If the rate of heat production exceeds the rate of heat loss, then the temperature of the
substance will rise which, after an induction time, may lead to self-ignition and combustion.
2.4.3.1.3 Some substances may also give off toxic gases if involved in a fire.
2.4.3.2 Classification of class 4.2 substances
2.4.3.2.1 Solids are considered pyrophoric solids which shall be classified in class 4.2 if, in tests performed in
accordance with the test method given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 33.4.4, the
sample ignites in one of the tests.
2.4.3.2.2 Liquids are considered pyrophoric liquids which shall be classified in class 4.2 if, in tests performed in
accordance with the test method given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 33.4.5, the
liquid ignites in the first part of the test, or if it ignites or chars the filter paper.
2.4.3.2.3 Self-heating substances
2.4.3.2.3.1 A substance shall be classified as a self-heating substance of class 4.2 if, in tests performed in accordance
with the test method given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 33.4.6:
.1 a positive result is obtained using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C;
.2 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is
obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 120°C and the substance is to be transported in
packages with a volume of more than 3 m3;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.3 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is
obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 100°C and the substance is to be transported in
packages with a volume of more than 450 L;
.4 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a positive result is
obtained using a 100 mm cube sample at 100°C.
Note: Self-reactive substances, giving also a positive result with this test method shall not be classified in
class 4.2 but in class 4.1 (see 2.4.2.3.1.1).
2.4.3.2.3.2 A substance shall not be classified in class 4.2 if:
.1 a negative result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C;
.2 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is
obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C, a negative result is obtained in a test using a
100 mm cube sample at 120°C and the substance is to be transported in packages with a volume not
more than 3 m3;
.3 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is
obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C, a negative result is obtained in a test using a
100 mm cube sample at 100°C and the substance is to be transported in packages with a volume not
more than 450 L.
2.4.3.3 Assignment of packing groups
2.4.3.3.1 Packing group I shall be assigned to all pyrophoric solids and liquids.
2.4.3.3.2 Packing group II shall be assigned to self-heating substances which give a positive result in a test using a
25 mm cube sample at 140°C.
2.4.3.3.3 Packing group III shall be assigned to self-heating substances if:
.1 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is
obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C and the substance is to be transported in
packages with a volume of more than 3 m3;
.2 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is
obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C, a positive result is obtained in a test using a
100 mm cube sample at 120°C and the substance is to be transported in packages with a volume of more
than 450 L;
.3 a positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm cube sample at 140°C and a negative result is
obtained in a test using a 25 mm cube sample at 140°C and a positive result is obtained in a test using a
100 mm cube sample at 100°C.
2.4.4 Class 4.3 – Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases
2.4.4.1 Definitions and properties
2.4.4.1.1 For the purpose of this Code, the substances in this class are either liquids or solids which, by interaction with
water, are liable to become spontaneously flammable or to give off flammable gases in dangerous quantities.
2.4.4.1.2 Certain substances, in contact with water, may emit flammable gases that can form explosive mixtures with
air. Such mixtures are easily ignited by all ordinary sources of ignition, for example naked lights, sparking
handtools or unprotected lamps. The resulting blast wave and flames may endanger people and the
environment. The test method referred to in 2.4.4.2 is used to determine whether the reaction of a substance
with water leads to the development of a dangerous amount of gases which may be flammable. This test
method shall not be applied to pyrophoric substances.
2.4.4.2 Classification of class 4.3 substances
2.4.4.2.1 Substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases shall be classified in class 4.3 if, in tests
performed in accordance with the test method given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 33.5:
.1 spontaneous ignition takes place in any step of the test procedure; or
.2 there is an evolution of a flammable gas at a rate greater than 1 L per kilogram of the substance per hour.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.4.4.3 Assignment of packing groups
2.4.4.3.1 Packing group I shall be assigned to any substance which reacts vigorously with water at ambient temperatures
and demonstrates generally a tendency for the gas produced to ignite spontaneously, or which reacts readily
with water at ambient temperatures such that the rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than
10 L per kilogram of substance over any one minute.
2.4.4.3.2 Packing group II shall be assigned to any substance which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures
such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gas is equal to or greater than 20 litres per kilogram of
substance per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for packing group I.
2.4.4.3.3 Packing group III shall be assigned to any substance which reacts slowly with water at ambient temperatures
such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gas is greater than 1 litre per kilogram of substance per
hour, and which does not meet the criteria for packing groups I or II.
2.4.5 Classification of organometallic substances
Depending on their properties, organometallic substances may be classified in classes 4.2 or 4.3, as
appropriate, in accordance with the following flowchart:
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Flowchart scheme for organometallic substances
Organometallic substance/formula-
tion/
solution1
Solid Organometallic substance, solid,
pyrophoric
UN 3391
No
Organometallic substance, liquid,
pyrophoric
Is the substance Liquid UN 3392
Yes Is the substance
pyrophoric? water-reactive?
test N.2 (solid) test N.5
test N.3 (liquid) Solid Organometallic substance,
solid, pyrophoric, water-reactive
UN 3393
No Yes
Organometallic substance,
liquid, pyrophoric, water-reactive
Liquid UN 3394
Organometallic substance,
No
solid, water-reactive
UN 3395
Is the substance Organometallic substance,
Yes
a flammable solid? solid, water-reactive, flammable
test N.1 UN 3396
No
Is the substance Organometallic substance,
Yes Yes
self-heating? solid, water-reactive, self-heating
test N.4 UN 3397
Is the substance Class 4.3, Organometallic substance,
Yes PG I or II or III. No
water-reactive? liquid, water-reactive
test N.5 Is the substance UN 3398
a solid?
Does the substance Organometallic substance,
No Yes
contain a diluent with a liquid, water-reactive, flammable
No flashpoint ≤ 60°C? UN 3399
Is the substance Organometallic substance,
Yes
a self-heating solid? solid, self-heating
test N.4 UN 3400
No
Substance does not have
to be classified in class 4.2
or in class 4.3
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.5
Class 5 – Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides
2.5.0 Introductory note
Because of the differing properties exhibited by dangerous goods within classes 5.1 and 5.2, it is impracticable
to establish a single criterion for classification in either class. Tests and criteria for assignment to the two
classes are addressed in this chapter.
2.5.1 Definitions and general provisions
In this Code, class 5 is divided into two classes as follows:
Class 5.1 – Oxidizing substances
Substances which, while in themselves not necessarily combustible, may, generally by yielding oxygen,
cause, or contribute to, the combustion of other material. Such substances may be contained in an article;
Class 5.2 – Organic peroxides
Organic substances which contain the bivalent –O–O– structure and may be considered derivatives of
hydrogen peroxide, where one or both of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by organic radicals.
Organic peroxides are thermally unstable substances which may undergo exothermic self-accelerating
decomposition. In addition, they may have one or more of the following properties:
– be liable to explosive decomposition;
– burn rapidly;
– be sensitive to impact or friction;
– react dangerously with other substances;
– cause damage to the eyes.
2.5.2 Class 5.1 – Oxidizing substances
Note 1: For the classification of oxidizing substances to class 5.1, in the event of divergence between test
results and known experience, judgement based on known experience shall take precedence over test results.
Note 2: By exception, solid ammonium nitrate based fertilizers shall be classified in accordance with the
procedure as set out in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, section 39.
2.5.2.1 Properties
2.5.2.1.1 Substances of class 5.1 in certain circumstances directly or indirectly evolve oxygen. For this reason, oxidizing
substances increase the risk and intensity of fire in combustible material with which they come into contact.
2.5.2.1.2 Mixtures of oxidizing substances with combustible material and even with material such as sugar, flour, edible
oils, mineral oils, etc., are dangerous. These mixtures are readily ignited, in some cases by friction or impact.
They may burn violently and may lead to explosion.
2.5.2.1.3 There will be a violent reaction between most oxidizing substances and liquid acids, evolving toxic gases.
Toxic gases may also be evolved when certain oxidizing substances are involved in a fire.
2.5.2.1.4 The above-mentioned properties are, in general, common to all substances in this class. Additionally, some
substances possess specific properties, which shall be taken into account in transport. These properties are
shown in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.5.2.2 Oxidizing solids
2.5.2.2.1 Classification of solid substances of class 5.1
2.5.2.2.1.1 Tests are performed to measure the potential for the solid substance to increase the burning rate or burning
intensity of a combustible substance when the two are thoroughly mixed. The procedure is given in the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 34.4.1 (test O.1) or alternatively, in subsection 34.4.3 (test O.3).
Tests are conducted on the substance to be evaluated mixed with dry fibrous cellulose in mixing ratios of 1:1
and 4:1, by mass, of sample to cellulose. The burning characteristics of the mixtures are compared:
.1 in the test O.1, with the standard 3:7 mixture, by mass, of potassium bromate to cellulose. If the burning
time is equal to or less than this standard mixture, the burning times shall be compared with those from
the packing group I or II reference standards, 3:2 and 2:3 ratios, by mass, of potassium bromate to
cellulose, respectively; or
.2 in the test O.3, with the standard 1:2 mixture, by mass, of calcium peroxide to cellulose. If the burning rate
is equal to or greater than this standard mixture, the burning rates shall be compared with those from the
packing group I or II reference standards, 3:1 and 1:1 ratios, by mass, of calcium peroxide to cellulose,
respectively.
2.5.2.2.1.2 The classification test results are assessed on the basis of:
.1 the comparison of the mean burning time (for the test O.1) or burning rate (for the test O.3) with those of
the reference mixtures; and
.2 whether the mixture of substance and cellulose ignites and burns.
2.5.2.2.1.3 A solid substance is classified in class 5.1 if the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested, exhibits:
.1 in the test O.1, a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 3:7 mixture (by mass)
of potassium bromate and cellulose; or
.2 in the test O.3, a mean burning rate equal to or greater than the mean burning rate of a 1:2 mixture (by
mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose.
2.5.2.2.2 Assignment of packing groups
Solid oxidizing substances are assigned to a packing group according to one of the test procedures in the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 34.4.1 (test O.1) or subsection 34.4.3 (test O.3), in accordance
with the following criteria:
.1 Test O.1:
.1 Packing group I: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested,
exhibits a mean burning time less than the mean burning time of a 3:2 mixture, by mass, of potassium
bromate and cellulose;
.2 Packing group II: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested,
exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 2:3 mixture (by mass)
of potassium bromate and cellulose, and the criteria for packing group I are not met;
.3 Packing group III: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested,
exhibits a mean burning time equal to or less than the mean burning time of a 3:7 mixture (by mass)
of potassium bromate and cellulose, and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met;
.4 Not class 5.1: any substance which, in both the 4:1 and 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass)
tested, does not ignite and burn, or exhibits mean burning times greater than that of a 3:7 mixture
(by mass) of potassium bromate and cellulose.
.2 Test O.3:
.1 Packing group I: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested,
exhibits a mean burning rate greater than the mean burning rate of a 3:1 mixture (by mass) of calcium
peroxide and cellulose;
.2 Packing group II: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested,
exhibits a mean burning rate equal to or greater than the mean burning rate of a 1:1 mixture (by mass)
of calcium peroxide and cellulose, and the criteria for packing group I are not met;
.3 Packing group III: any substance which, in the 4:1 or 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass) tested,
exhibits a mean burning rate equal to or greater than the mean burning rate of a 1:2 mixture (by
mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose, and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met;
.4 Not class 5.1: any substance which, in both the 4:1 and 1:1 sample-to-cellulose ratio (by mass)
tested, does not ignite and burn, or exhibits a mean burning rate less than the mean burning rate of
a 1:2 mixture (by mass) of calcium peroxide and cellulose.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.5.2.3 Oxidizing liquids
2.5.2.3.1 Classification of liquid substances of class 5.1
2.5.2.3.1.1 A test is performed to determine the potential for a liquid substance to increase the burning rate or burning
intensity of a combustible substance or for spontaneous ignition to occur when the two are thoroughly mixed.
The procedure is given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, 34.4.2 (test O.2). It measures the pressure
rise time during combustion. Whether a liquid is an oxidizing substance of class 5.1 and, if so, whether
packing group I, II or III shall be assigned, is decided on the basis of the test result (see also Precedence of
hazard characteristics in 2.0.3).
2.5.2.3.1.2 The classification test results are assessed on the basis of:
.1 whether the mixture of substance and cellulose spontaneously ignites;
.2 the comparison of the mean time taken for the pressure to rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa gauge with
those of the reference substances.
2.5.2.3.1.3 A liquid substance is classified in class 5.1 if the 1:1 mixture, by mass, of substance and cellulose tested
exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture, by mass,
of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose.
2.5.2.3.2 Assignment of packing groups
2.5.2.3.2.1 Liquid oxidizing substances are assigned to a packing group according to the test procedure in the Manual
of Tests and Criteria, part III, 34.4.2, in accordance with the following criteria:
.1 Packing group I: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose tested,
spontaneously ignites; or the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and
cellulose is less than that of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of 50% perchloric acid and cellulose;
.2 Packing group II: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose tested,
exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture (by
mass) of 40% aqueous sodium chlorate solution and cellulose; and the criteria for packing group I are
not met;
.3 Packing group III: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose tested,
exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture (by
mass) of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose; and the criteria for packing groups I and II are not met;
.4 Not classified as class 5.1: any substance which, in the 1:1 mixture (by mass) of substance and cellulose
tested, exhibits a pressure rise of less than 2070 kPa gauge; or exhibits a mean pressure rise time greater
than the mean pressure rise time of a 1:1 mixture (by mass) of 65% aqueous nitric acid and cellulose.
2.5.3 Class 5.2 – Organic peroxides
2.5.3.1 Properties
2.5.3.1.1 Organic peroxides are liable to exothermic decomposition at normal or elevated temperatures. The
decomposition can be initiated by heat, contact with impurities (such as acids, heavy-metal compounds,
amines), friction or impact. The rate of decomposition increases with temperature and varies with the organic
peroxide formulation. Decomposition may result in the evolution of harmful, or flammable, gases or vapours.
For certain organic peroxides the temperature shall be controlled during transport. Some organic peroxides
may decompose explosively, particularly if confined. This characteristic may be modified by the addition of
diluents or by the use of appropriate packagings. Many organic peroxides burn vigorously.
2.5.3.1.2 Contact of organic peroxides with the eyes is to be avoided. Some organic peroxides will cause serious injury
to the cornea, even after brief contact, or will be corrosive to the skin.
2.5.3.2 Classification of organic peroxides
2.5.3.2.1 Any organic peroxide shall be considered for classification in class 5.2, unless the organic peroxide formulation
contains:
.1 not more than 1.0% available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing not more than 1.0%
hydrogen peroxide; or
.2 not more than 0.5% available oxygen from the organic peroxides when containing more than 1.0% but
not more than 7.0% hydrogen peroxide.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Note: The available oxygen content (%) of an organic peroxide formulation is given by the formula:
16 × Σ(ni × ci /mi)
where:
ni = number of peroxygen groups per molecule of organic peroxide i;
ci = concentration (mass %) of organic peroxide i;
mi = molecular mass of organic peroxide i.
2.5.3.2.2 Organic peroxides are classified into seven types according to the degree of danger they present. The types
of organic peroxide range from type A, which may not be accepted for transport in the packaging in which it
is tested, to type G, which is not subject to the provisions for organic peroxides of class 5.2. The classification
of types B to F is directly related to the maximum quantity allowed in one packaging.
2.5.3.2.3 Organic peroxides permitted for transport in packagings are listed in 2.5.3.2.4, those permitted for transport
in IBCs are listed in packing instruction IBC520 and those permitted for transport in portable tanks are listed
in portable tank instruction T23. For each permitted substance listed, the generic entry of the Dangerous
Goods List (UN 3101 to UN 3120) is assigned, appropriate subsidiary hazards and remarks providing relevant
transport information are given. The generic entries specify:
.1 organic peroxide type (B to F);
.2 physical state (liquid or solid); and
.3 temperature control, when required (see 2.5.3.4).
2.5.3.2.3.1 Mixtures of the listed formulations may be classified as the same type of organic peroxide as that of the most
dangerous component and be transported under the conditions of transport given for this type. However,
as two stable components can form a thermally less stable mixture, the self-accelerating decomposition
temperature (SADT) of the mixture shall be determined and, if necessary, temperature control applied as
required by 2.5.3.4.
2.5.3.2.4 List of currently assigned organic peroxides in packagings
Note: Packing Method codes “OP1” to “OP8” refer to packing methods in packing instruction P520. Peroxides to be transported shall fulfil the classification and
the control and emergency temperatures (derived from the SADT) as listed. For substances permitted in IBCs, see packing instruction IBC520, and for those
permitted in tanks, see portable tank instruction T23. The formulations not listed in this subsection but listed in packing instruction IBC520 of 4.1.4.2 and in
portable tank instruction T23 of 4.2.5.2.6 may also be transported packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1, with
the same control and emergency temperatures, if applicable.
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3101 tert-BUTYL PEROXYACETATE > 52 – 77 ≥ 23 OP5 (3)
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE > 80 – 100 OP5 (3)
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)-3,3,5-TRIMETHYL- > 90 – 100 OP5 (3)
CYCLOHEXANE
METHYL ETHYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) see remark (8) ≥ 48 OP5 (3) (8) (13)
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)- > 86 – 100 OP5 (3)
HEXYNE-3
3102 tert-BUTYL MONOPEROXYMALEATE > 52 – 100 OP5 (3)
3-CHLOROPEROXYBENZOIC ACID > 57 – 86 ≥ 14 OP1 (3)
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE > 52 – 100 ≤ 48 OP2 (3)
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE > 77 – 94 ≥6 OP4 (3)
DI-4-CHLOROBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5 (3)
DI-2,4-DICHLOROBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5 (3)
2,2-DIHYDROPEROXYPROPANE ≤ 27 ≥ 73 OP5 (3)
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(BENZOYLPEROXY)HEXANE > 82 – 100 OP5 (3)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
DI-(2-PHENOXYETHYL) PEROXYDICARBONATE > 85 – 100 OP5 (3)
DISUCCINIC ACID PEROXIDE > 72 – 100 OP4 (3) (17)
3103 tert-AMYL PEROXYBENZOATE ≤ 100 OP5
tert-AMYLPEROXY ISOPROPYL CARBONATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
n-BUTYL 4,4-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)VALERATE > 52 – 100 OP5
tert-BUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE OP5 (13)
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
> 79 – 90 ≥ 10
tert-BUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE + DI-tert-BUTYL < 82 + > 9 ≥7 OP5 (13)
PEROXIDE
tert-BUTYL MONOPEROXYMALEATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP6
tert-BUTYL PEROXYACETATE > 32 – 52 ≥ 48 OP6
tert-BUTYL PEROXYBENZOATE > 77 – 100 OP5
tert-BUTYLPEROXY ISOPROPYLCARBONATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5
tert-BUTYLPEROXY-2-METHYLBENZOATE ≤ 100 OP5
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3103 1,1-DI-(tert-AMYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE ≤ 82 ≥ 18 OP6
(cont.)
2,2-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)BUTANE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP6
1,6-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXYCARBONYLOXY)-HEXANE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP5
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE > 52 – 80 ≥ 20 OP5
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP5 (30)
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)-3,3,5-TRIMETHYL- > 57 – 90 ≥ 10 OP5
CYCLOHEXANE
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)-3,3,5-TRIMETHYL- ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5
CYCLOHEXANE
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)-3,3,5-TRIMETHYL- ≤ 90 ≥ 10 OP5 (30)
CYCLOHEXANE
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)HEXANE > 90 – 100 OP5
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)- > 52 – 86 ≥ 14 OP5 (26)
HEXYNE-3
ETHYL 3,3-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)BUTYRATE > 77 – 100 OP5
ORGANIC PEROXIDE, LIQUID, SAMPLE OP2 (11)
3104 CYCLOHEXANONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 91 ≥9 OP6 (13)
DI-2,4-DICHLOROBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 52 as a paste with OP5
AMENDMENTS TO THE
silicon oil
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP6
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI(BENZOYLPEROXY)HEXANE ≤ 82 ≥ 18 OP5
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DIHYDROPEROXYHEXANE ≤ 82 ≥ 18 OP6
ORGANIC PEROXIDE, SOLID, SAMPLE OP2 (11)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
3105 ACETYL ACETONE PEROXIDE ≤ 42 ≥ 48 ≥8 OP7 (2)
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
tert-AMYL PEROXYACETATE ≤ 62 ≥ 38 OP7
tert-AMYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXYL CARBONATE ≤ 100 OP7
tert-AMYL PEROXY-3,5,5-TRIMETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 100 OP7
tert-BUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 80 ≥ 20 OP7 (4) (13)
tert-BUTYL PEROXYBENZOATE > 52 – 77 ≥ 23 OP7
tert-BUTYL PEROXYBUTYL FUMARATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7
tert-BUTYL PEROXYCROTONATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXYLCARBONATE ≤ 100 OP7
tert-BUTYLPEROXY ISOPROPYLCARBONATE ≤ 62 ≥ 38 OP7
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3105 1-(2-tert-BUTYLPEROXY ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7
(cont.) ISOPROPYL)-3-ISOPROPENYLBENZENE
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-3,5,5-TRIMETHYLHEXANOATE > 37 – 100 OP7
CYCLOHEXANONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP7 (5)
2,2-DI-(tert-AMYLPEROXY)BUTANE ≤ 57 ≥ 43 OP7
DI-tert-BUTYL PEROXYAZELATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE > 42 – 52 ≥ 48 OP7
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE + ≤ 43 + ≤ 16 ≥ 41 OP7
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE
DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)PHTHALATE > 42 – 52 ≥ 48 OP7
2,2-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)PROPANE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)HEXANE > 52 – 90 ≥ 10 OP7
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(3,5,5-TRIMETHYL- ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7
HEXANOYLPEROXY)HEXANE
ETHYL 3,3-DI-(tert-AMYLPEROXY)BUTYRATE ≤ 67 ≥ 33 OP7
ETHYL 3,3-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)BUTYRATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7
p-MENTHYL HYDROPEROXIDE > 72 – 100 OP7 (13)
METHYL ETHYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) see remark (9) ≥ 55 OP7 (9)
METHYL ETHYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) see remark (33) ≥ 41 ≥9 OP8 (33) (34)
METHYL ISOBUTYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 62 ≥ 19 OP7 (22)
PEROXYACETIC ACID, TYPE D, stabilized OP7 (13) (14) (19)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
≤ 43
PINANYL HYDROPEROXIDE > 56 – 100 OP7 (13)
1,1,3,3-TETRAMETHYLBUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP7
3,6,9-TRIETHYL-3,6,9-TRIMETHYL-1,4,7- ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP7 (28)
TRIPEROXONANE
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
3106 ACETYL ACETONE PEROXIDE ≤ 32 as a paste OP7 (20)
tert-BUTYL PEROXYBENZOATE OP7
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
≤ 52 ≥ 48
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE + ≤ 12 + ≤ 14 ≥ 14 ≥ 60 OP7
2,2-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)BUTANE
tert-BUTYLPEROXY STEARYLCARBONATE ≤ 100 OP7
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-3,5,5-TRIMETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP7
3-CHLOROPEROXYBENZOIC ACID ≤ 57 ≥3 ≥ 40 OP7
3-CHLOROPEROXYBENZOIC ACID ≤ 77 ≥6 ≥ 17 OP7
CYCLOHEXANONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 72 as a paste OP7 (5) (20)
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 62 ≥ 28 ≥ 10 OP7
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3106 DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE > 52 – 62 as a paste OP7 (20)
(cont.)
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE > 35 – 52 ≥ 48 OP7
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE ≤ 42 ≥ 13 ≥ 45 OP7
DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXYISOPROPYL)BENZENE(S) > 42 – 100 ≤ 57 OP7
DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)PHTHALATE ≤ 52 as a paste OP7 (20)
2,2-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)PROPANE ≤ 42 ≥ 13 ≥ 45 OP7
DI-4-CHLOROBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 52 as a paste OP7 (20)
2,2-DI-(4,4-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY) ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP7
CYCLOHEXYL)-PROPANE
DI-(1-HYDROXYCYCLOHEXYL)PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP7
DIISOPROPYLBENZENE DIHYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 82 ≥5 ≥5 OP7 (24)
DILAUROYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP7
DI-(4-METHYLBENZOYL) PEROXIDE ≤ 52 as paste OP7
with silicon oil
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(BENZOYLPEROXY)HEXANE ≤ 82 ≥ 18 OP7
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)- ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7
HEXYNE-3
DI-(2-PHENOXYETHYL)PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 85 ≥ 15 OP7
AMENDMENTS TO THE
ETHYL 3,3-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)BUTYRATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7
([3R-(3R,5aS,6S,8aS,9R,10R,12S,12aR**)]- ≤ 100 OP7
DECAHYDRO-10-METHOXY-3,6,9-
TRIMETHYL-3,12-EPOXY-12H-PYRANO[4,3-j]-1,2-
BENZODIOXEPIN)
3107 ACETYL ACETONE PEROXIDE OP8 (32)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
≤ 35 ≥ 57 ≥8
tert-AMYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 88 ≥6 ≥6 OP8
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
tert-BUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 79 > 14 OP8 (13) (23)
CUMYL HYDROPEROXIDE > 90 – 98 ≤ 10 OP8 (13)
DI-tert-AMYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP8
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE > 36 – 42 ≥ 18 ≤ 40 OP8
DI-tert-BUTYL PEROXIDE > 52 – 100 OP8
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE ≤ 27 ≥ 25 OP8 (21)
DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)PHTHALATE ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP8
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)-3,3,5-TRIMETHYL- ≤ 57 ≥ 43 OP8
CYCLOHEXANE
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)-3,3,5-TRIMETHYL- ≤ 32 ≥ 26 ≥ 42 OP8
CYCLOHEXANE
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3107 2,2-DI-(4,4-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY) ≤ 22 ≥ 78 OP8
(cont.) CYCLOHEXYL)-PROPANE
METHYL ETHYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) see remark (10) ≥ 60 OP8 (10)
3,3,5,7,7-PENTAMETHYL-1,2,4-TRIOXEPANE ≤ 100 OP8
PEROXYACETIC ACID, TYPE E, stabilized ≤ 43 OP8 (13) (15) (19)
POLYETHER POLY-tert-BUTYLPEROXY- ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8
CARBONATE
3108 tert-BUTYL CUMYL PEROXIDE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8
n-BUTYL 4,4-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)VALERATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8
tert-BUTYL MONOPEROXYMALEATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8
tert-BUTYL MONOPEROXYMALEATE ≤ 52 as a paste OP8
1-(2-tert-BUTYLPEROXYISOPROPYL)-3- ≤ 42 ≥ 58 OP8
ISOPROPENYLBENZENE
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 56.5 as a paste ≥ 15 OP8
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 52 as a paste OP8 (20)
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)HEXANE ≤ 47 as a paste OP8
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)HEXANE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP8
3109 tert-BUTYL CUMYL PEROXIDE > 42 – 100 OP8
tert-BUTYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP8 (13)
tert-BUTYL PEROXYACETATE ≤ 32 ≥ 68 OP8
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-3,5,5-TRIMETHYL-HEXANOATE OP8
AMENDMENTS TO THE
≤ 37 ≥ 63
CUMYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 90 ≥ 10 OP8 (13) (18)
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 42 ≥ 38 ≥ 13 OP8
DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8
dispersion in water
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
DI-tert-BUTYL PEROXIDE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 (25)
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE OP8
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
≤ 42 ≥ 58
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)CYCLOHEXANE ≤ 13 ≥ 13 ≥ 74 OP8
DILAUROYL PEROXIDE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8
dispersion in water
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)HEXANE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8
ISOPROPYLCUMYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP8 (13)
p-MENTHYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP8 (27)
METHYL ISOPROPYL KETONE PEROXIDE(S) See remark (31) ≥ 70 OP8 (31)
PEROXYACETIC ACID, TYPE F, stabilized ≤ 43 OP8 (13) (16) (19)
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3109 1-PHENYLETHYL HYDROPEROXIDE ≤ 38 ≥ 62 OP8
(cont.) PINANYL HYDROPEROXIDE OP8
≤ 56 ≥ 44
3110 DICUMYL PEROXIDE > 52 – 100 OP8 (12)
1,1-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)-3,3,5-TRIMETHYL- ≤ 57 ≥ 43 OP8
CYCLOHEXANE
3,6,9-TRIETHYL-3,6,9-TRIMETHYL-1,4,7- ≤ 17 ≥ 18 ≥ 65 OP8
TRIPEROXONANE
3111 tert-BUTYL PEROXYISOBUTYRATE > 52 – 77 ≥ 23 OP5 +15 +20 (3)
DIISOBUTYRYL PEROXIDE > 32 – 52 ≥ 48 OP5 -20 -10 (3)
ISOPROPYL sec-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE + ≤ 52 + OP5 -20 -10 (3)
DI-sec-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE + ≤ 28 +
DIISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 22
3112 ACETYL CYCLOHEXANESULPHONYL PEROXIDE ≤ 82 ≥ 12 OP4 -10 0 (3)
DICYCLOHEXYL PEROXYDICARBONATE > 91 – 100 OP3 +10 +15 (3)
DIISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE > 52 – 100 OP2 -15 -5 (3)
DI-(2-METHYLBENZOYL) PEROXIDE ≤ 87 ≥ 13 OP5 +30 +35 (3)
3113 tert-AMYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5 +10 +15
tert-BUTYL PEROXYDIETHYLACETATE ≤ 100 OP5 +20 +25
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE OP6
AMENDMENTS TO THE
> 52 – 100 +20 +25
tert-BUTYL PEROXYPIVALATE > 67 – 77 ≥ 23 OP5 0 +10
DI-sec-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE > 52 – 100 OP4 -20 -10
DI-(2-ETHYLHEXYL)PEROXYDICARBONATE > 77 – 100 OP5 -20 -10
2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(2-ETHYLHEXANOYLPEROXY)- ≤ 100 OP5 +20 +25
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
HEXANE
DI-n-PROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 100 OP3 -25 -15
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
DI-n-PROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP5 -20 -10
ORGANIC PEROXIDE, LIQUID, SAMPLE, OP2 (11)
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
3114 DI-(4-tert-BUTYLCYCLOHEXYL)- ≤ 100 OP6 +30 +35
PEROXYDICARBONATE
DICYCLOHEXYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 91 ≥9 OP5 +10 +15
DIDECANOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP6 +30 +35
DI-n-OCTANOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP5 +10 +15
ORGANIC PEROXIDE, SOLID, SAMPLE, OP2 (11)
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3115 ACETYL CYCLOHEXANESULPHONYL PEROXIDE ≤ 32 ≥ 68 OP7 -10 0
tert-AMYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 100 OP7 +20 +25
tert-AMYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 0 +10
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE + ≤ 31 + ≤ 36 ≥ 33 OP7 +35 +40
2,2-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY)BUTANE
tert-BUTYL PEROXYISOBUTYRATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 +15 +20
tert-BUTYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE > 77 – 100 OP7 -5 +5
tert-BUTYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 0 +10
tert-BUTYL PEROXYNEOHEPTANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 0 +10
tert-BUTYL PEROXYPIVALATE > 27 – 67 ≥ 33 OP7 0 +10
CUMYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 -10 0
CUMYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 87 ≥ 13 OP7 -10 0
CUMYL PEROXYNEOHEPTANOATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 -10 0
CUMYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 -5 +5
DIACETONE ALCOHOL PEROXIDES ≤ 57 ≥ 26 ≥8 OP7 +40 +45 (6)
DIACETYL PEROXIDE ≤ 27 ≥ 73 OP7 +20 +25 (7) (13)
DI-n-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE > 27 – 52 ≥ 48 OP7 -15 -5
DI-sec-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 -15 -5
DI-(2-ETHOXYETHYL)PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 -10 0
DI-(2-ETHYLHEXYL)PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 -15 -5
AMENDMENTS TO THE
DIISOBUTYRYL PEROXIDE ≤ 32 ≥ 68 OP7 -20 -10
DIISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 -20 -10
DIISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 32 ≥ 68 OP7 -15 -5
DI-(3-METHOXYBUTYL) PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 -5 +5
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
DI-(3-METHYLBENZOYL) PEROXIDE + BENZOYL ≤ 20 + ≤ 18 + ≤ 4 ≥ 58 OP7 +35 +40
(3-METHYLBENZOYL) PEROXIDE + DIBENZOYL
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
PEROXIDE
DI-(2-NEODECANOYLPEROXYISOPROPYL)- ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP7 -10 0
BENZENE
DI-(3,5,5-TRIMETHYLHEXANOYL) PEROXIDE > 52 – 82 ≥ 18 OP7 0 +10
1-(2-ETHYLHEXANOYLPEROXY)-1,3- ≤ 52 ≥ 45 ≥ 10 OP7 -20 -10
DIMETHYLBUTYL PEROXYPIVALATE
tert-HEXYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 71 ≥ 29 OP7 0 +10
tert-HEXYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP7 +10 +15
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3115 3-HYDROXY-1,1-DIMETHYLBUTYL ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 -5 +5
(cont.) PEROXYNEODECANOATE
ISOPROPYL sec-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE + ≤ 32 + ≥ 38 OP7 -20 -10
DI-sec-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE + ≤ 15 – 18 +
DI-ISOPROPYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 12 – 15
METHYLCYCLOHEXANONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 67 ≥ 33 OP7 +35 +40
1,1,3,3-TETRAMETHYLBUTYL PEROXY-2- ≤ 100 OP7 +15 +20
ETHYLHEXANOATE
1,1,3,3-TETRAMETHYLBUTYL PEROXY- ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP7 -5 +5
NEODECANOATE
1,1,3,3-TETRAMETHYLBUTYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 77 ≥ 23 OP7 0 +10
DIMYRISTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 100 OP7 +20 +25
DI-n-NONANOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 100 OP7 0 +10
DISUCCINIC ACID PEROXIDE ≤ 72 ≥ 28 OP7 +10 +15
3117 tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE > 32 – 52 ≥ 48 OP8 +30 +35
DI-n-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 27 ≥ 73 OP8 -10 0
tert-BUTYL PEROXYNEOHEPTANOATE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8 0 +10
dispersion in water
AMENDMENTS TO THE
1,1-DIMETHYL-3-HYDROXYBUTYL PEROXY- ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 0 +10
NEOHEPTANOATE
DIPROPIONYL PEROXIDE ≤ 27 ≥ 73 OP8 +15 +20
tert-HEXYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 52 as a stable OP8 +15 +20
dispersion in water
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
3-HYDROXY-1,1-DIMETHYLBUTYL PEROXY- ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 -5 +5
NEODECANOATE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
3118 tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 OP8 +20 +25
tert-BUTYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8 0 +10
dispersion in water
(frozen)
DI-(4-tert-BUTYLCYCLOHEXYL) ≤ 42 as a paste OP8 +35 +40
PEROXYDICARBONATE
DI-n-BUTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8 -15 -5
dispersion in water
(frozen)
DI-2,4-DICHLOROBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 52 as a paste OP8 + 20 + 25
PEROXYLAURIC ACID ≤ 100 OP8 +35 +40
Number Diluent Diluent Control Emergency Subsidiary
Concentration Inert solid Water Packing
(generic ORGANIC PEROXIDE type A type B temperature temperature hazards and
(%) (%) (%) method
entry) (%) (%)(1) (°C) (°C) remarks
3119 tert-AMYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 47 ≥ 53 OP8 0 + 10
tert-BUTYL PEROXY-2-ETHYLHEXANOATE ≤ 32 ≥ 68 OP8 +40 +45
tert-BUTYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 52 as a stable OP8 0 +10
dispersion in water
tert-BUTYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 32 ≥ 68 OP8 0 +10
tert-BUTYL PEROXYPIVALATE ≤ 27 ≥ 73 OP8 +30 +35
CUMYL PEROXYNEODECANOATE ≤ 52 as a stable OP8 -10 0
dispersion in water
DI-(4-tert-BUTYLCYCLOHEXYL) ≤ 42 as a stable OP8 +30 +35
PEROXYDICARBONATE dispersion in water
DICETYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8 +30 +35
dispersion in water
DICYCLOHEXYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8 +15 +20
dispersion in water
DI-(2-ETHYLHEXYL) PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 62 as a stable OP8 -15 -5
dispersion in water
DIISOBUTYRYL PEROXIDE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8 -20 -10
dispersion in water
DIMYRISTYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 42 as a stable OP8 +20 +25
dispersion in water
DI-(3,5,5-TRIMETHYLHEXANOYL) PEROXIDE ≤ 52 as a stable OP8 +10 +15
dispersion in water
DI-(3,5,5-TRIMETHYLHEXANOYL) PEROXIDE OP8
AMENDMENTS TO THE
≤ 38 ≥ 62 +20 +25
DI-(3,5,5-TRIMETHYLHEXANOYL) PEROXIDE > 38 – 52 ≥ 48 OP8 +10 +15
3-HYDROXY-1,1-DIMETHYLBUTYL ≤ 52 as a stable OP 8 -5 +5
PEROXYNEODECANOATE dispersion in water
1,1,3,3-TETRAMETHYLBUTYL ≤ 52 as a stable OP8 -5 +5
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
PEROXYNEODECANOATE dispersion in water
3120 DI-(2-ETHYLHEXYL)PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 52 as a stable OP8 -15 -5
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
dispersion in water
(frozen)
DICETYL PEROXYDICARBONATE ≤ 100 OP8 +30 +35
Exempt CYCLOHEXANONE PEROXIDE(S) ≤ 32 ≥ 68 (29)
Exempt DIBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 35 ≥ 65 (29)
Exempt DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXYISOPROPYL)BENZENE(S) ≤ 42 ≥ 58 (29)
Exempt DI-4-CHLOROBENZOYL PEROXIDE ≤ 32 ≥ 68 (29)
Exempt DICUMYL PEROXIDE ≤ 52 ≥ 48 (29)
Exempt 2,5-DIMETHYL-2,5-DI-(tert-BUTYLPEROXY) HEXANE ≤ 22 ≥78 (29)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Remarks
(1) Diluent type B may always be replaced by diluent type A. The boiling point of diluent type B shall be at least 60°C higher than the
SADT of the organic peroxide
(2) Available oxygen ≤ 4.7%
(3) “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label required. (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2)
(4) Diluent may be replaced by di-tert-butyl peroxide
(5) Available oxygen ≤ 9%
(6) With ≤ 9% hydrogen peroxide; available oxygen ≤ 10%
(7) Only non-metallic packagings are allowed
(8) Available oxygen > 10% and ≤ 10.7%, with or without water
(9) Available oxygen ≤ 10%, with or without water
(10) Available oxygen ≤ 8.2%, with or without water
(11) See 2.5.3.2.5.1
(12) Up to 2,000 kg per receptacle assigned to ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F on the basis of large-scale trials
(13) “CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard label required (Model No. 8, see 5.2.2.2.2)
(14) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.4
(15) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.5
(16) Peroxyacetic acid formulations which fulfil the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.6
(17) Addition of water to this organic peroxide will decrease its thermal stability
(18) No “CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard label required for concentrations below 80%
(19) Mixtures with hydrogen peroxide, water and acid(s)
(20) With diluent type A, with or without water
(21) With ≥ 25% diluent type A by mass, and in addition ethylbenzene
(22) With ≥ 19% diluent type A by mass, and in addition methyl isobutyl ketone
(23) With < 6% di-tert-butyl peroxide
(24) With ≤ 8% 1-isopropylhydroperoxy-4-isopropylhydroxybenzene
(25) Diluent type B with boiling point > 110°C
(26) With < 0.5% hydroperoxides content
(27) For concentrations more than 56%, “CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard label required (Model No. 8, see 5.2.2.2.2)
(28) Available active oxygen ≤ 7.6% in diluent type A having a 95% boil-off point in the range 200–260°C
(29) Not subject to the provisions for peroxide, class 5.2
(30) Diluent type B with boiling point > 130°C
(31) Active oxygen ≤ 6.7%
(32) Active oxygen ≤ 4.15%
(33) Available oxygen ≤ 10%
(34) Sum of diluent type A and water ≥ 55%, and in addition methyl ethyl ketone
2.5.3.2.5 Classification of organic peroxides not listed in 2.5.3.2.4, packing instruction IBC520 or portable tank
instruction T23 and assignment to a generic entry shall be made by the competent authority of the country of
origin on the basis of a test report. Principles applying to the classification of such substances are provided in
2.5.3.3. Test methods and criteria and an example of a report are given in the current edition of the Manual of
Tests and Criteria, part II. The statement of approval shall contain the classification and the relevant transport
conditions (see 5.4.4.1.3).
2.5.3.2.5.1 Samples of new organic peroxides or new formulations of currently assigned organic peroxides for which
complete test data are not available and which are to be transported for further testing or evaluation may be
assigned to one of the appropriate entries for ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C provided the following conditions
are met:
.1 the available data indicate that the sample would be no more dangerous than ORGANIC PEROXIDE
TYPE B;
.2 the sample is packaged in accordance with packing method OP2 and the quantity per cargo transport
unit is limited to 10 kg; and
.3 the available data indicate that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any dangerous
decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation.
2.5.3.3 Principles for classification of organic peroxides
Note: This section refers only to those properties of organic peroxides which are decisive for their classification.
A flow chart, presenting the classification principles in the form of a graphically arranged scheme of questions
concerning the decisive properties together with the possible answers, is given in figure 2.5.1 in chapter 2.5
of the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods. These properties shall be
determined experimentally. Suitable test methods with pertinent evaluation criteria are given in the Manual of
Tests and Criteria, part II.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.5.3.3.1 Any organic peroxide formulation shall be regarded as possessing explosive properties when, in laboratory
testing, the formulation is liable to detonate, to deflagrate rapidly or to show a violent effect when heated
under confinement.
2.5.3.3.2 The following principles apply to the classification of organic peroxide formulations not listed in 2.5.3.2.4:
.1 Any organic peroxide formulation which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly, as packaged for transport, is
prohibited from transport in that packaging under class 5.2 (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE A);
.2 Any organic peroxide formulation possessing explosive properties and which, as packaged for transport,
neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in that package,
shall bear an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2). Such an organic peroxide
may be packaged in amounts of up to 25 kg unless the maximum quantity has to be limited to a lower
amount to preclude detonation or rapid deflagration in the package (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE
TYPE B);
.3 Any organic peroxide formulation possessing explosive properties may be transported without an
“EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label when the substance as packaged (maximum 50 kg) for transport
cannot detonate or deflagrate rapidly or undergo a thermal explosion (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE
TYPE C);
.4 Any organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing:
.1 detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under
confinement; or
.2 does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under
confinement; or
.3 does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement
is acceptable for transport in packages of not more than 50 kg net mass (defined as ORGANIC P
EROXIDE
TYPE D);
.5 Any organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and
shows low or no effect when heated under confinement is acceptable for transport in packages of not
more than 400 kg/450 L (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E);
.6 Any organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state
nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or
no explosive power may be considered for transport in IBCs or tanks (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE
TYPE F); for additional provisions see 4.1.7 and 4.2.1.13;
.7 Any organic peroxide formulation which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state
nor deflagrates at all and shows no effect when heated under confinement nor any explosive power
shall be exempted from class 5.2, provided that the formulation is thermally stable (self-accelerating
decomposition temperature is 60°C or higher for a 50 kg package) and for liquid formulations diluent
type A is used for desensitization (defined as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE G). If the formulation is not
thermally stable or a diluent other than type A is used for desensitization, the formulation shall be defined
as ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F.
2.5.3.4 Temperature control provisions
2.5.3.4.0 The properties of some organic peroxides require that they be transported under temperature control. Control
and emergency temperatures for currently assigned organic peroxides are shown in the list 2.5.3.2.4. The
controlled temperature provisions are given in chapter 7.3.7.
2.5.3.4.1 The following organic peroxides shall be subjected to temperature control during transport:
.1 organic peroxides type B and C with a SADT ≤ 50°C;
.2 organic peroxides type D showing a medium effect when heated under confinement with a SADT ≤ 50°C
or showing a low or no effect when heated under confinement with a SADT ≤ 45°C; and
.3 organic peroxides types E and F with a SADT ≤ 45°C.
2.5.3.4.2 Test methods for determining the SADT are given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part II, section 28.
The test selected shall be conducted in a manner which is representative, both in size and material, of the
package to be transported.
2.5.3.4.3 Test methods for determining the flammability are given in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III,
subsection 32.4. Because organic peroxides may react vigorously when heated, it is recommended to
determine their flashpoint using small sample sizes such as described in ISO 3679.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.5.3.5 Desensitization of organic peroxides
2.5.3.5.1 In order to ensure safety during transport, organic peroxides are in many cases desensitized by organic
liquids or solids, inorganic solids or water. Where a percentage of a substance is stipulated, this refers to the
percentage by mass, rounded to the nearest whole number. In general, desensitization shall be such that, in
case of spillage or fire, the organic peroxide will not concentrate to a dangerous extent.
2.5.3.5.2 Unless otherwise stated for the individual organic peroxide formulation, the following definitions apply for
diluents used for desensitization:
.1 Diluents type A are organic liquids which are compatible with the organic peroxide and which have a
boiling point of not less than 150°C. Type A diluents may be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides.
.2 Diluents type B are organic liquids which are compatible with the organic peroxide and which have a
boiling point of less than 150°C but not less than 60°C and a flashpoint of not less than 5°C. Type B
diluents may be used for desensitization of all organic peroxides provided that the boiling point is at least
60°C higher than the SADT in a 50 kg package.
2.5.3.5.3 Diluents, other than type A or type B, may be added to organic peroxide formulations as listed in 2.5.3.2.4
provided that they are compatible. However, replacement of all or part of a type A or type B diluent by another
diluent with differing properties requires that the organic peroxide formulation be re-assessed in accordance
with the normal acceptance procedure for class 5.2.
2.5.3.5.4 Water may only be used for the desensitization of organic peroxides which are shown in 2.5.3.2.4 or in the
statement of approval according to 2.5.3.2.5 as being with water or as a stable dispersion in water.
2.5.3.5.5 Organic and inorganic solids may be used for desensitization of organic peroxides provided that they are
compatible.
2.5.3.5.6 Compatible liquids and solids are those which have no detrimental influence on the thermal stability and
hazard type of the organic peroxide formulation.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.6
Class 6 – Toxic and infectious substances
2.6.0 Introductory notes
Note 1: The word “toxic” has the same meaning as “poisonous”.
Note 2: Genetically modified microorganisms which do not meet the definition of a toxic or an infectious substance
shall be considered for classification in class 9 and assigned to UN 3245.
Note 3: Toxins from plant, animal or bacterial sources which do not contain any infectious substances, or toxins that
are contained in substances which are not infectious substances, shall be considered for classification in
class 6.1 and assigned to UN 3172 or UN 3462.
2.6.1 Definitions
Class 6 is subdivided into two classes as follows:
Class 6.1 – Toxic substances
These are substances liable either to cause death or serious injury or to harm human health if swallowed or
inhaled, or by skin contact.
Class 6.2 – Infectious substances
These are substances known or reasonably expected to contain pathogens. Pathogens are defined as micro-
organisms (including bacteria, viruses, parasites, fungi) and other agents such as prions, which can cause
disease in humans or animals.
2.6.2 Class 6.1 – Toxic substances
2.6.2.1 Definitions and properties
2.6.2.1.1 LD50 (median lethal dose) for acute oral toxicity is the statistically derived single dose of a substance that can
be expected to cause death within 14 days in 50 per cent of young adult albino rats when administered by the
oral route. The LD50 value is expressed in terms of mass of test substance per mass of test animal (mg/kg).
2.6.2.1.2 LD50 for acute dermal toxicity is that dose of the substance which, administered by continuous contact for
24 hours with the bare skin of the albino rabbit, is most likely to cause death within 14 days in one half of the
animals tested. The number of animals tested shall be sufficient to give a statistically significant result and be
in conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is expressed in milligrams per kilogram body
mass.
2.6.2.1.3 LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation is that concentration of vapour, mist or dust which, administered by
continuous inhalation to both male and female young adult albino rats for one hour, is most likely to cause
death within 14 days in one half of the animals tested. A solid substance shall be tested if at least 10% (by
mass) of its total mass is likely to be dust in the respirable range, such as the aerodynamic diameter of that
particle fraction is 10 microns or less. A liquid substance shall be tested if a mist is likely to be generated in
a leakage of the transport containment. For both solid and liquid substances, more than 90% (by mass) of a
specimen prepared for inhalation toxicity testing shall be in the respirable range as defined above. The result
is expressed in milligrams per litre of air for dusts and mists or in millilitres per cubic metre of air (parts per
million) for vapours.
2.6.2.1.4 Properties
.1 The dangers of poisoning which are inherent in these substances depend upon contact with the human
body, that is by inhalation of vapours by unsuspecting persons at some distance from the cargo or the
immediate dangers of physical contact with the substance. These have been considered in the context
of the probability of accident occurring during transport by sea.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 Nearly all toxic substances evolve toxic gases when involved in a fire or when heated to decomposition.
.3 A substance specified as “stabilized” shall not be transported in an unstabilized condition.
2.6.2.2 Assignment of packing groups to toxic substances
2.6.2.2.1 Toxic substances have for packing purposes been apportioned among packing groups according to the
degree of their toxic hazards in transport:
.1 Packing group I: substances and preparations presenting a high toxicity hazard;
.2 Packing group II: substances and preparations presenting a medium toxicity hazard;
.3 Packing group III: substances and preparations presenting a low toxicity hazard.
2.6.2.2.2 In making this grouping, account has been taken of human experience in instances of accidental poisoning,
and of special properties possessed by any individual substance, such as liquid state, high volatility, any
special likelihood of penetration, and special biological effects.
2.6.2.2.3 In the absence of human experience, the grouping has been based on data obtained from animal experiments.
Three possible routes of administration have been examined. These routes are exposure through:
– oral ingestion;
– dermal contact; and
– inhalation of dusts, mists or vapours.
2.6.2.2.3.1 For appropriate animal test data for the various routes of exposure, see 2.6.2.1. When a substance exhibits a
different order of toxicity by two or more routes of administration, the highest degree of danger indicated by
the tests has been used in assigning the packing group.
2.6.2.2.4 The criteria to be applied for grouping a substance according to the toxicity it exhibits by all three routes of
administration are presented in the following paragraphs.
2.6.2.2.4.1 The grouping criteria for the oral and dermal routes as well as for inhalation of dusts and mists are shown in
the following table:
Grouping criteria for administration through oral ingestion,
dermal contact and inhalation of dusts and mists
Inhalation toxicity
Oral toxicity Dermal toxicity
by dusts and mists
Packing group LD50 LD50
LC50
(mg/kg) (mg/kg)
(mg/L)
I ≤ 5.0 ≤ 50 ≤ 0.2
II > 5.0 and ≤ 50 > 50 and ≤ 200 > 0.2 and ≤ 2.0
III > 50 and ≤ 300 > 200 and ≤ 1,000 > 2.0 and ≤ 4.0
Tear gas substances shall be included in packing group II even if their toxicity data correspond to packing group III values.
Note: Substances meeting the criteria of class 8 and with an inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists (LC50)
leading to packing group I are only accepted for an allocation to class 6.1 if the toxicity through oral ingestion
or dermal contact is at least in the range of packing group I or II. Otherwise an allocation to class 8 is made
when appropriate (see 2.8.2.4).
2.6.2.2.4.2 The criteria for inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists in 2.6.2.2.4.1 are based on LC50 data relating to one hour
exposures, and where such information is available it shall be used. However, where only LC50 data relating
to 4-hour exposures to dusts and mists are available, such figures can be multiplied by four and the product
substituted in the above criteria, i.e. LC50 (4 hours) × 4 is considered the equivalent of LC50 (1 hour).
2.6.2.2.4.3 Liquids having toxic vapours shall be assigned to the following packing groups, where “V” is the saturated
vapour concentration in mL/m3 air at 20°C and standard atmospheric pressure:
Packing group I: if V ≥ 10 LC50 and LC50 ≤ 1,000 mL/m3.
Packing group II: if V ≥ LC50 and LC50 ≤ 3,000 mL/m3, and do not meet the criteria for packing group I.
1 LC and LC ≤ 5,000 mL/m3, and do not meet the criteria for packing groups I
Packing group III: if V ≥ __ 50 50
5
or II.
Note: Tear gas substances shall be included in packing group II even if their toxicity data correspond to
packing group III values.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.6.2.2.4.4 In figure 2-3 the criteria according to 2.6.2.2.4.3 are expressed in graphical form, as an aid to easy
classification. Because of approximations inherent in the use of graphs, substances falling on or near packing
group borderlines shall be checked using numerical criteria.
NOT DANGEROUS FOR TRANSPORT
10,000
GROUP III
GROUP II
1,000
LC50 mL/m3
GROUP I
10 100 1,000 10,000 100,000
VOLATILITY mL/m3
Figure 2-3 – Inhalation toxicity: packing group borderlines
2.6.2.2.4.5 The criteria for inhalation toxicity of vapours in 2.6.2.2.4.3 are based on LC50 data relating to one hour
exposures, and where such information is available it shall be used. However, where only LC50 data relating
to 4-hour exposures to the vapours are available, such figures can be multiplied by two and the product
substituted in the above criteria, i.e. LC50 (4 hours) × 2 is considered the equivalent of LC50 (1 hour).
2.6.2.2.4.6 Mixtures of liquids that are toxic by inhalation shall be assigned to packing groups according to 2.6.2.2.4.7 or
2.6.2.2.4.8.
2.6.2.2.4.7 If LC50 data are available for each of the toxic substances comprising a mixture, the packing group may be
determined as follows:
.1 Estimate the LC50 of the mixture using the formula:
1
LC50 (mixture) = _________
∑( ____
LC )
n
fi
i=1 50i
where: fi = mole fraction of the ith component substance of the mixture
LC50i = mean lethal concentration of the ith component substance in mL/m3.
.2 Estimate the volatility of each component substance comprising the mixture using the formula:
P × 106
Vi = _______
i
101.3
(
mL/m3 )
where: Pi =
the partial pressure of the ith component substance in kPa at 20°C and one atmosphere
pressure.
.3 Calculate the ratio of the volatility to the LC50 using the formula:
∑ ( ____
LC )
n
Vi
R =
i=1 50i
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.4 Using the calculated values of LC50 (mixture) and R, the packing group for the mixture is determined:
Packing group I: R ≥ 10 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 1,000 mL/m3.
Packing group II: R ≥ 1 and LC50 (mixture) ≤ 3,000 mL/m3 and not meeting criteria for packing group I.
Packing group III: R ≥ _1 and LC (mixture) ≤ 5,000 mL/m3 and not meeting criteria for packing groups I
5 50
or II.
2.6.2.2.4.8 In the absence of LC50 data on the toxic constituent substances, the mixture may be assigned a packing
group based on the following simplified threshold toxicity tests. When these threshold tests are used, the
most restrictive packing group shall be determined and used for transporting the mixture.
.1 A mixture is assigned to packing group I only if it meets both of the following criteria:
– A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of
1,000 mL/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test
atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day
observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 1,000 mL/m3.
– A sample of the vapour in equilibrium with the liquid mixture at 20°C is diluted with 9 equal volumes
of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test
atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the
14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than
10 times the mixture LC50.
.2 A mixture is assigned to packing group II only if it meets both of the following criteria, and the mixture
does not meet the criteria for packing group I:
– A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of
3,000 mL/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test
atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day
observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 3,000 mL/m3.
– A sample of the vapour in equilibrium with the liquid mixture at 20°C is used to form a test atmosphere.
Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and
observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die within the 14-day observation period, the
mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than the mixture LC50.
.3 A mixture is assigned to packing group III only if it meets both of the following criteria, and the mixture
does not meet the criteria for packing groups I or II:
– A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere
of 5,000 mL/m3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed
to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for 14 days. If five or more of the animals die
within the 14-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less
than 5,000 mL/m3.
– The vapour pressure of the liquid mixture is measured and if the vapour concentration is equal to or
1 the
greater than 1,000 mL/m3, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than __
5
mixture LC50.
2.6.2.3 Methods for determining oral and dermal toxicity of mixtures
2.6.2.3.1 When classifying and assigning the appropriate packing group to mixtures in class 6.1, in accordance with
the oral and dermal toxicity criteria in 2.6.2.2, it is necessary to determine the acute LD50 of the mixture.
2.6.2.3.2 If a mixture contains only one active substance, and the LD50 of that constituent is known, in the absence of
reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be transported, the oral or dermal LD50
may be obtained by the following method:
LD50 value of active substance × 100
LD50 value of preparation = ______________________________
percentage of active substance by mass
2.6.2.3.3 If a mixture contains more than one active constituent, there are three possible approaches that may be used
to determine the oral or dermal LD50 of the mixture. The preferred method is to obtain reliable acute oral and
dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be transported. If reliable, accurate data are not available, then
either of the following methods may be performed:
.1 Classify the formulation according to the most hazardous constituent of the mixture as if that constituent
were present in the same concentration as the total concentration of all active constituents; or
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2Apply the formula:
CA CB CZ
___ + ___ + … ___ 100
= ____
TA TB TZ TM
where:
C = the % concentration of constituent A, B … Z in the mixture;
T = the oral LD50 value of constituent A, B … Z;
TM = the oral LD50 value of the mixture.
Note: This formula can also be used for dermal toxicities provided that this information is available on the
same species for all constituents. The use of this formula does not take into account any potentiation or
protective phenomena.
2.6.2.4 Classification of pesticides
2.6.2.4.1 All active pesticide substances and their preparations for which the LC50 and/or LD50 values are known and
which are classified in class 6.1 shall be classified under appropriate packing groups in accordance with the
criteria given in 2.6.2.2. Substances and preparations which are characterized by subsidiary hazards shall be
classified according to the precedence of hazard table in 2.0.3 with the assignment of appropriate packing
groups.
2.6.2.4.2 If the oral or dermal LD50 value for a pesticide preparation is not known, but the LD50 value of its active
substance(s) is known, the LD50 value for the preparation may be obtained by applying the procedures
in 2.6.2.3.
Note: LD50 toxicity data for a number of common pesticides may be obtained from the most current edition
of The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and Guidelines to Classification, available
from the International Programme on Chemical Safety, World Health Organization (WHO), 1211 Geneva 27,
Switzerland. While that publication may be used as a source of LD50 data for pesticides, its classification
system shall not be used for purposes of transport classification of, or assignment of packing groups to,
pesticides, which shall be in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
2.6.2.4.3 The proper shipping name used in the transport of the pesticide shall be selected from those referenced on
the basis of the active ingredient, of the physical state of the pesticide and any subsidiary hazards which it
may exhibit.
2.6.2.5 Substances not accepted for transport
Chemically unstable substances of class 6.1 shall not be accepted for transport unless the necessary
precautions have been taken to prevent the possibility of a dangerous decomposition or polymerization
under normal conditions of transport. For the precautions necessary to prevent polymerization, see special
provision 386 of chapter 3.3. To this end particular care shall be taken to ensure that receptacles and tanks
do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions.
2.6.3 Class 6.2 – Infectious substances
2.6.3.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this Code:
2.6.3.1.1 Infectious substances are substances which are known or are reasonably expected to contain pathogens.
Pathogens are defined as micro-organisms (including bacteria, viruses, parasites, fungi) and other agents
such as prions, which can cause disease in humans or animals.
2.6.3.1.2 Biological products are those products derived from living organisms which are manufactured and distributed
in accordance with the requirements of appropriate national authorities, which may have special licensing
requirements, and are used either for prevention, treatment, or diagnosis of disease in humans or animals, or
for development, experimental or investigation purposes related thereto. They include, but are not limited to,
finished or unfinished products such as vaccines.
2.6.3.1.3 Cultures are the result of a process by which pathogens are intentionally propagated. This definition does not
include human or animal patient specimens as defined in 2.6.3.1.4.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.6.3.1.4 Patient specimens are those collected directly from humans or animals, including, but not limited to, excreta,
secreta, blood and its components, tissue and tissue fluid swabs, and body parts being transported for
purposes such as research, diagnosis, investigational activities, disease treatment and prevention.
2.6.3.1.5 [Reserved]
2.6.3.1.6 Medical or clinical wastes are wastes derived from the veterinary treatment of animals, the medical treatment
of humans or from bio-research.
2.6.3.2 Classification of infectious substances
2.6.3.2.1 Infectious substances shall be classified in class 6.2 and assigned to UN 2814, UN 2900, UN 3291, UN 3373
or UN 3549, as appropriate.
2.6.3.2.2 Infectious substances are divided into the following categories:
2.6.3.2.2.1 Category A: An infectious substance which is transported in a form that, when exposure to it occurs, is
capable of causing permanent disability, life-threatening or fatal disease in otherwise healthy humans or
animals. Indicative examples of substances that meet these criteria are given in the table in this paragraph.
Note: An exposure occurs when an infectious substance is released outside the protective packaging,
resulting in physical contact with humans or animals.
.1 Infectious substances meeting these criteria which cause disease in humans or in both humans and
animals shall be assigned to UN 2814. Infectious substances which cause disease only in animals shall
be assigned to UN 2900.
.2 Assignment to UN 2814 or UN 2900 shall be based on the known medical history and symptoms of the
source, human or animal, endemic local conditions, or professional judgement concerning individual
circumstances of the human or animal source.
Note 1: The proper shipping name for UN 2814 is INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING HUMANS.
The proper shipping name for UN 2900 is INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE, AFFECTING ANIMALS
only.
Note 2: The following table is not exhaustive. Infectious substances, including new or emerging
pathogens, which do not appear in the table but which meet the same criteria shall be assigned
to category A. In addition, if there is doubt as to whether or not a substance meets the criteria
it shall be included in category A.
Note 3: In the following table, the microorganism names written in italics are bacteria or fungi.
Indicative examples of infectious substances included in category A in any form
unless otherwise indicated (2.6.3.2.2.1.1)
UN number and
proper shipping Microorganism
name
UN 2814 Bacillus anthracis (cultures only)
Infectious Brucella abortus (cultures only)
substance, Brucella melitensis (cultures only)
affecting Brucella suis (cultures only)
humans
Burkholderia mallei – Pseudomonas mallei – Glanders (cultures only)
Burkholderia pseudomallei – Pseudomonas pseudomallei (cultures only)
Chlamydia psittaci – avian strains (cultures only)
Clostridium botulinum (cultures only)
Coccidioides immitis (cultures only)
Coxiella burnetii (cultures only)
Crimean-Congo hemorrhagic fever virus
Dengue virus (cultures only)
Eastern equine encephalitis virus (cultures only)
Escherichia coli, verotoxigenic (cultures only)
Ebola virus
Flexal virus
Francisella tularensis (cultures only)
Guanarito virus
Hantaan virus
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
UN number and
proper shipping Microorganism
name
UN 2814 Hantavirus causing hemorragic fever with renal syndrome
Infectious Hendra virus
substance, Hepatitis B virus (cultures only)
affecting Herpes B virus (cultures only)
humans
Human immunodeficiency virus (cultures only)
(cont.)
Highly pathogenic avian influenza virus (cultures only)
Japanese Encephalitis virus (cultures only)
Junin virus
Kyasanur Forest disease virus
Lassa virus
Machupo virus
Marburg virus
Monkeypox virus (cultures only)
Mycobacterium tuberculosis (cultures only)
Nipah virus
Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus
Poliovirus (cultures only)
Rabies virus (cultures only)
Rickettsia prowazekii (cultures only)
Rickettsia rickettsii (cultures only)
Rift Valley fever virus (cultures only)
Russian spring–summer encephalitis virus (cultures only)
Sabia virus
Shigella dysenteriae type 1 (cultures only)
Tick-borne encephalitis virus (cultures only)
Variola virus
Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus (cultures only)
West Nile virus (cultures only)
Yellow fever virus (cultures only)
Yersinia pestis (cultures only)
UN 2900 African swine fever virus (cultures only)
Infectious Avian paramyxovirus Type 1 – Velogenic Newcastle disease virus (cultures only)
substance, Classical swine fever virus (cultures only)
affecting Foot and mouth disease virus (cultures only)
animals only
Lumpy skin disease virus (cultures only)
Mycoplasma mycoides – Contagious bovine pleuropneumonia (cultures only)
Peste des petits ruminants virus (cultures only)
Rinderpest virus (cultures only)
Sheep-pox virus (cultures only)
Goatpox virus (cultures only)
Swine vesicular disease virus (cultures only)
Vesicular stomatitis virus (cultures only)
2.6.3.2.2.2 Category B: An infectious substance which does not meet the criteria for inclusion in category A. Infectious
substances in category B shall be assigned to UN 3373.
Note: The proper shipping name for UN 3373 is BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B.
2.6.3.2.3 Exemptions
2.6.3.2.3.1 Substances which do not contain infectious substances or substances which are unlikely to cause disease in
humans or animals are not subject to the provisions of this Code, unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in
another class.
2.6.3.2.3.2 Substances containing microorganisms which are non-pathogenic to humans or animals are not subject to
the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class.
2.6.3.2.3.3 Substances in a form that any present pathogens have been neutralized or inactivated such that they no
longer pose a health risk are not subject to the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for
inclusion in another class.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Note: Medical equipment which has been drained of free liquid is deemed to meet the requirements of this
paragraph and is not subject to the provisions of this Code.
2.6.3.2.3.4 Environmental samples (including food and water samples) which are not considered to pose a significant risk
of infection are not subject to the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another
class.
2.6.3.2.3.5 Dried blood spots, collected by applying a drop of blood onto absorbent material, are not subject to the
provisions of this Code.
2.6.3.2.3.6 Faecal occult blood screening samples are not subject to the provisions of this Code.
2.6.3.2.3.7 Blood or blood components which have been collected for the purposes of transfusion or for the preparation
of blood products to be used for transfusion or transplantation and any tissues or organs intended for use in
transplantation as well as samples drawn in connection with such purposes are not subject to the provisions
of this Code.
2.6.3.2.3.8 Human or animal specimens for which there is minimal likelihood that pathogens are present are not subject
to the provisions of this Code if the specimen is transported in a packaging which will prevent any leakage
and which is marked with the words “EXEMPT HUMAN SPECIMEN” or “EXEMPT ANIMAL SPECIMEN”, as
appropriate. The packaging should meet the following conditions:
.1 The packaging should consist of three components:
.1 a leak-proof primary receptacle(s);
.2 a leak-proof secondary packaging; and
.3 an outer packaging of adequate strength for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with at least
one surface having minimum dimensions of 100 mm × 100 mm.
.2 For liquids, absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire contents should be placed
between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging so that, during transport, any release or
leak of a liquid substance will not reach the outer packaging and will not compromise the integrity of the
cushioning material.
.3 When multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they should be
either individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them.
Note: An element of professional judgement is required to determine if a substance is exempt under this
paragraph. That judgement should be based on the known medical history, symptoms and individual
circumstances of the source, human or animal, and endemic local conditions. Examples of specimens which
may be transported under this paragraph include the blood or urine tests to monitor cholesterol levels, blood
glucose levels, hormone levels, or prostate specific antibodies (PSA); those required to monitor organ function
such as heart, liver or kidney function for humans or animals with non-infectious diseases, or therapeutic
drug monitoring; those conducted for insurance or employment purposes and are intended to determine the
presence of drugs or alcohol; pregnancy test; biopsies to detect cancer; and antibody detection in humans
or animals in the absence of any concern for infection (e.g. evaluation of vaccine-induced immunity, diagnosis
of autoimmune disease, etc.).
2.6.3.2.3.9 Except for:
.1 medical waste (UN 3291 and UN 3549);
.2 medical devices or equipment contaminated with or containing infectious substances in category A
(UN 2814 or UN 2900); and
.3 medical devices or equipment contaminated with or containing other dangerous goods that meet the
definition of another hazard class,
medical devices or equipment potentially contaminated with or containing infectious substances which are
being transported for disinfection, cleaning, sterilization, repair, or equipment evaluation are not subject to
the provisions of this Code if packed in packagings designed and constructed in such a way that, under
normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents. Packagings shall be
designed to meet the construction requirements listed in 6.1.4 or 6.6.4.
These packagings shall meet the general packing requirements of 4.1.1.1 and 4.1.1.2 and be capable of
retaining the medical devices and equipment when dropped from a height of 1.2 m.
The packagings shall be marked “USED MEDICAL DEVICE” or “USED MEDICAL EQUIPMENT”. When using
overpacks or unit loads these shall be marked in the same way, except when the inscription remains visible.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.6.3.3 Biological products
2.6.3.3.1 For the purposes of this Code, biological products are divided into the following groups:
.1 those which are manufactured and packaged in accordance with the requirements of appropriate
national authorities and transported for the purposes of final packaging or distribution, and use for
personal health care by medical professionals or individuals. Substances in this group are not subject to
the provisions of this Code;
.2 those which do not fall under .1 and are known or reasonably believed to contain infectious substances
and which meet the criteria for inclusion in category A or category B. Substances in this group shall be
assigned to UN 2814, UN 2900 or UN 3373, as appropriate.
Note: Some licensed biological products may present a biohazard only in certain parts of the world.
Competent authorities may require that such biological products comply with local requirements for infectious
substances or may impose other restrictions.
2.6.3.4 Genetically modified microorganisms and organisms
2.6.3.4.1 Genetically modified microorganisms not meeting the definition of infectious substance shall be classified in
accordance with chapter 2.9.
2.6.3.5 Medical or clinical wastes
2.6.3.5.1 Medical or clinical waste containing:
.1 Category A infectious substances shall be assigned to UN 2814, UN 2900 or UN 3549 as appropriate.
Solid medical waste containing Category A infectious substances generated from the medical treatment
of humans or veterinary treatment of animals may be assigned to UN 3549. The UN 3549 entry shall not
be used for waste from bio-research or liquid waste;
.2 Category B infectious substances shall be assigned to UN 3291.
2.6.3.5.2 Medical or clinical wastes which are reasonably believed to have a low probability of containing infectious
substances shall be assigned to UN 3291. For the assignment, international, regional or national waste
catalogues may be taken into account.
Note: The proper shipping name for UN 3291 is CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N.O.S. or (BIO) MEDICAL
WASTE, N.O.S. or REGULATED MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S.
2.6.3.5.3 Decontaminated medical or clinical wastes which previously contained infectious substances are not subject
to the provisions of this Code unless they meet the criteria for inclusion in another class.
2.6.3.6 Infected animals
2.6.3.6.1 Unless an infectious substance cannot be consigned by any other means, live animals shall not be used to
consign such a substance. A live animal which has been intentionally infected and is known or suspected
to contain an infectious substance shall only be transported under terms and conditions approved by the
competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.7
Class 7 – Radioactive material
Note: For class 7, the type of packaging may have a decisive effect on classification.
2.7.1 Definitions
2.7.1.1 Radioactive material means any material containing radionuclides where both the activity concentration and
the total activity in the consignment exceed the values specified in 2.7.2.2.1 to 2.7.2.2.6.
2.7.1.2 Contamination
Contamination means the presence of a radioactive substance on a surface in quantities in excess of 0.4 Bq/cm2
for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 0.04 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters.
Non-fixed contamination means contamination that can be removed from a surface during routine conditions
of transport.
Fixed contamination means contamination other than non-fixed contamination.
2.7.1.3 Definitions of specific terms
A1 and A2
A1 means the activity value of special form radioactive material which is listed in the table in 2.7.2.2.1 or
derived in 2.7.2.2.2 and is used to determine the activity limits for the provisions of this Code.
A2 means the activity value of radioactive material, other than special form radioactive material, which
is listed in the table in 2.7.2.2.1 or derived in 2.7.2.2.2 and is used to determine the activity limits for the
provisions of this Code.
Fissile nuclides means uranium-233, uranium-235, plutonium-239 and plutonium-241. Fissile material means a
material containing any of the fissile nuclides. Excluded from the definition of fissile material are the following:
.1 natural uranium or depleted uranium which is unirradiated;
.2 natural uranium or depleted uranium which has been irradiated in thermal reactors only;
.3 material with fissile nuclides less than a total of 0.25 g;
.4 any combination of .1, .2 and/or .3.
These exclusions are only valid if there is no other material with fissile nuclides in the package or in the
consignment if shipped unpackaged.
Low dispersible radioactive material means either a solid radioactive material or a solid radioactive material
in a sealed capsule, that has limited dispersibility and is not in powder form.
Low specific activity (LSA) material means radioactive material which by its nature has a limited specific
activity, or radioactive material for which limits of estimated average specific activity apply. External shielding
materials surrounding the LSA material shall not be considered in determining the estimated average specific
activity.
Low toxicity alpha emitters are: natural uranium; depleted uranium; natural thorium; uranium-235 or
uranium‑238; thorium-232; thorium-228 and thorium‑230 when contained in ores or physical and chemical
concentrates; or alpha emitters with a half-life of less than 10 days.
Specific activity of a radionuclide means the activity per unit mass of that nuclide. The specific activity of
a material shall mean the activity per unit mass of the material in which the radionuclides are essentially
uniformly distributed.
Note: The terms “activity concentration” and “specific activity” are synonymous for the purpose of this Code.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Special form radioactive material means either:
.1 an indispersible solid radioactive material; or
.2 a sealed capsule containing radioactive material.
Surface contaminated object (SCO) means a solid object which is not itself radioactive but which has
radioactive material distributed on its surface.
Unirradiated thorium means thorium containing not more than 10 -7 g of uranium‑233 per gram of thorium‑232.
Unirradiated uranium means uranium containing not more than 2 × 103 Bq of plutonium per gram of
uranium‑235, not more than 9 × 106 Bq of fission products per gram of uranium‑235 and not more than
5 × 10 -3 g of uranium-236 per gram of uranium-235.
Uranium – natural, depleted, enriched means the following:
Natural uranium means uranium (which may be chemically separated) containing the naturally occurring
distribution of uranium isotopes (approximately 99.28% uranium‑238, and 0.72% uranium‑235 by mass).
Depleted uranium means uranium containing a lesser mass percentage of uranium‑235 than in natural
uranium.
Enriched uranium means uranium containing a greater mass percentage of uranium‑235 than 0.72%.
In all cases, a very small mass percentage of uranium‑234 is present.
2.7.2 Classification
2.7.2.1 General provisions
2.7.2.1.1 Radioactive material shall be assigned to one of the UN numbers specified in table 2.7.2.1.1, in accordance
with 2.7.2.4 and 2.7.2.5, taking into account the material characteristics determined in 2.7.2.3.
Table 2.7.2.1.1 – Assignment of UN numbers
UN numbers Proper shipping namea and description
Excepted packages
(1.5.1.5)
2908 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING
2909 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL
URANIUM or DEPLETED URANIUM or NATURAL THORIUM
2910 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL
2911 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – INSTRUMENTS or ARTICLES
3507 URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE less than 0.1 kg per
package, non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb, c
Low specific activity radioactive material
(2.7.2.3.1)
2912 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-I), non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3321 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3322 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3324 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-II), FISSILE
3325 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, LOW SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (LSA-III), FISSILE
Surface contaminated objects
(2.7.2.3.2)
2913 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I, SCO-II or SCO-III),
non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3326 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, SURFACE CONTAMINATED OBJECTS (SCO-I or SCO-II), FISSILE
Type A packages
(2.7.2.4.4)
2915 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, non-special form, non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3327 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, FISSILE, non-special form
3332 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3333 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE A PACKAGE, SPECIAL FORM, FISSILE
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
UN numbers Proper shipping namea and description
Type B(U) package
(2.7.2.4.6)
2916 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3328 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(U) PACKAGE, FISSILE
Type B(M) package
(2.7.2.4.6)
2917 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3329 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE B(M) PACKAGE, FISSILE
Type C package
(2.7.2.4.6)
3323 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3330 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TYPE C PACKAGE, FISSILE
Special arrangement
(2.7.2.5)
2919 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT,
non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3331 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, TRANSPORTED UNDER SPECIAL ARRANGEMENT, FISSILE
Uranium hexafluoride
(2.7.2.4.5)
2977 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, FISSILE
2978 RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb
3507 URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE less than 0.1 kg per
package, non-fissile or fissile-exceptedb, c
a
The proper shipping name is found in the column “Proper shipping name and description” and is restricted
to that part shown in capital letters. In the cases of UN Nos. 2909, 2911, 2913 and 3326, where alternative
proper shipping names are separated by the word “or”, only the relevant proper shipping name shall be used.
b
The term “fissile-excepted” refers only to material excepted under 2.7.2.3.5.
c
For UN 3507, see also special provision 369 in chapter 3.3.
2.7.2.2 Determination of activity level
2.7.2.2.1 The following basic values for individual radionuclides are given in table 2.7.2.2.1:
.1 A1 and A2 in TBq;
.2 Activity concentration limits for exempt material in Bq/g; and
.3 Activity limits for exempt consignments in Bq.
Table 2.7.2.2.1 – Basic radionuclides values for individual radionuclides
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Actinium (89)
Ac-225 (a) 8 × 10-1 6 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
Ac-227 (a) 9 × 10-1 9 × 10-5 1 × 10-1 1 × 103
Ac-228 6 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Silver (47)
Ag-105 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ag-108m (a) 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 106 (b)
Ag-110m (a) 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Ag-111 2 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Aluminium (13)
Al-26 1 × 10-1 1 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Americium (95)
Am-241 1 × 101 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 104
Am-242m (a) 1 × 101 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 (b) 1 × 104 (b)
Am-243 (a) 5 × 100 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 (b) 1 × 103 (b)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Argon (18)
Ar-37 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 106 1 × 108
Ar-39 4 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 107 1 × 104
Ar-41 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 109
Arsenic (33)
As-72 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
As-73 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
As-74 1 × 100 9 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
As-76 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
As-77 2 × 101 7 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Astatine (85)
At-211 (a) 2 × 101 5 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 107
Gold (79)
Au-193 7 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Au-194 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Au-195 1 × 101 6 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Au-198 1 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Au-199 1 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Barium (56)
Ba-131 (a) 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ba-133 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ba-133m 2 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ba-135m 2 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ba-140 (a) 5 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
Beryllium (4)
Be–7 2 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Be-10 4 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 104 1 × 106
Bismuth (83)
Bi-205 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Bi-206 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Bi-207 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Bi-210 1 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Bi-210m (a) 6 × 10-1 2 × 10-2 1 × 101 1 × 105
Bi-212 (a) 7 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
Berkelium (97)
Bk-247 8 × 100 8 × 10-4 1 × 100 1 × 104
Bk-249 (a) 4 × 101 3 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Bromine (35)
Br-76 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Br-77 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Br-82 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Carbon (6)
C-11 1 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
C-14 4 × 101 3 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107
Calcium (20)
Ca-41 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 105 1 × 107
Ca-45 4 × 101 1 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107
Ca-47 (a) 3 × 100 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Cadmium (48)
Cd-109 3 × 101 2 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 106
Cd-113m 4 × 101 5 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Cd-115 (a) 3 × 100 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Cd-115m 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Cerium (58)
Ce-139 7 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ce-141 2 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 107
Ce-143 9 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ce-144 (a) 2 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 102 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Californium (98)
Cf-248 4 × 101 6 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
Cf-249 3 × 100 8 × 10-4 1 × 100 1 × 103
Cf-250 2 × 101 2 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
Cf-251 7 × 100 7 × 10-4 1 × 100 1 × 103
Cf-252 1 × 10-1 3 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
Cf-253 (a) 4 × 101 4 × 10-2 1 × 102 1 × 105
Cf-254 1 × 10-3 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 103
Chlorine (17)
Cl-36 1 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 104 1 × 106
Cl-38 2 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Curium (96)
Cm-240 4 × 101 2 × 10-2 1 × 102 1 × 105
Cm-241 2 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Cm-242 4 × 101 1 × 10-2 1 × 102 1 × 105
Cm-243 9 × 100 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 104
Cm-244 2 × 101 2 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
Cm-245 9 × 100 9 × 10-4 1 × 100 1 × 103
Cm-246 9 × 100 9 × 10-4 1 × 100 1 × 103
Cm-247 (a) 3 × 100 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 104
Cm-248 2 × 10-2 3 × 10-4 1 × 100 1 × 103
Cobalt (27)
Co-55 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Co-56 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Co-57 1 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 102 1 × 106
Co-58 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Co-58m 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 107
Co-60 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Chromium (24)
Cr-51 3 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Caesium (55)
Cs-129 4 × 100 4 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 105
Cs-131 3 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 106
Cs-132 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 105
Cs-134 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 104
Cs-134m 4 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 105
Cs-135 4 × 101 1 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107
Cs-136 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Cs-137 (a) 2 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 104 (b)
Copper (29)
Cu-64 6 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Cu-67 1 × 101 7 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Dysprosium (66)
Dy-159 2 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Dy-165 9 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Dy-166 (a) 9 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Erbium (68)
Er-169 4 × 101 1 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107
Er-171 8 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Europium (63)
Eu-147 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Eu-148 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Eu-149 2 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 102 1 × 107
Eu-150 (short-lived) 2 × 100 7 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Eu-150 (long-lived) 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Eu-152 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Eu-152m 8 × 10-1 8 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Eu-154 9 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Eu-155 2 × 101 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Eu-156 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Fluorine (9)
F-18 1 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Iron (26)
Fe-52 (a) 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Fe-55 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 106
Fe-59 9 × 10-1 9 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Fe-60 (a) 4 × 101 2 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Gallium (31)
Ga-67 7 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ga-68 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Ga-72 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Gadolinium (64)
Gd-146 (a) 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Gd-148 2 × 101 2 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
Gd-153 1 × 101 9 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Gd-159 3 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Germanium (32)
Ge-68 (a) 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Ge-69 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Ge-71 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 108
Ge-77 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Hafnium (72)
Hf-172 (a) 6 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Hf-175 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Hf-181 2 × 100 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Hf-182 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 102 1 × 106
Mercury (80)
Hg-194 (a) 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Hg-195m (a) 3 × 100 7 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Hg-197 2 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 102 1 × 107
Hg-197m 1 × 101 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Hg-203 5 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 105
Holmium (67)
Ho-166 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 105
Ho-166m 6 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Iodine (53)
I-123 6 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
I-124 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
I-125 2 × 101 3 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 106
I-126 2 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
I-129 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 102 1 × 105
I-131 3 × 100 7 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
I-132 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
I-133 7 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
I-134 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
I-135 (a) 6 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Indium (49)
In-111 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
In-113m 4 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
In-114m (a) 1 × 101 5 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
In-115m 7 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Iridium (77)
Ir-189 (a) 1 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 102 1 × 107
Ir-190 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Ir-192 1 × 100 (c) 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 104
Ir-193m 4 × 101 4 × 10 0 1 × 104 1 × 107
Ir-194 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Potassium (19)
K-40 9 × 10-1 9 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
K-42 2 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
K-43 7 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Krypton (36)
Kr-79 4 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 105
Kr-81 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 107
Kr-85 1 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 105 1 × 104
Kr-85m 8 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 1010
Kr-87 2 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 109
Lanthanum (57)
La-137 3 × 101 6 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 107
La-140 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Lutetium (71)
Lu-172 6 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Lu-173 8 × 100 8 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Lu-174 9 × 100 9 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Lu-174m 2 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 102 1 × 107
Lu-177 3 × 101 7 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 107
Magnesium (12)
Mg-28 (a) 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Manganese (25)
Mn-52 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Mn-53 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 104 1 × 109
Mn-54 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Mn-56 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Molybdenum (42)
Mo-93 4 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 108
Mo-99 (a) 1 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Nitrogen (7)
N-13 9 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 109
Sodium (11)
Na-22 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Na-24 2 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Niobium (41)
Nb-93m 4 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 107
Nb-94 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Nb-95 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Nb-97 9 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Neodymium (60)
Nd-147 6 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Nd-149 6 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Nickel (28)
Ni-57 6 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Ni-59 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 104 1 × 108
Ni-63 4 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 105 1 × 108
Ni-65 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Neptunium (93)
Np-235 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Np-236 (short-lived) 2 × 101 2 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 107
Np-236 (long-lived) 9 × 100 2 × 10-2 1 × 102 1 × 105
Np-237 2 × 101 2 × 10-3 1 × 100 (b) 1 × 103 (b)
Np-239 7 × 100 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 107
Osmium (76)
Os-185 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Os-191 1 × 101 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Os-191m 4 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Os-193 2 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Os-194 (a) 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Phosphorus (15)
P-32 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 105
P-33 4 × 101 1 × 100 1 × 105 1 × 108
Protactinium (91)
Pa-230 (a) 2 × 100 7 × 10-2 1 × 101 1 × 106
Pa-231 4 × 100 4 × 10-4 1 × 100 1 × 103
Pa-233 5 × 100 7 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 107
Lead (82)
Pb-201 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Pb-202 4 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 106
Pb-203 4 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Pb-205 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 104 1 × 107
Pb-210 (a) 1 × 100 5 × 10-2 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 104 (b)
Pb-212 (a) 7 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
Palladium (46)
Pd-103 (a) 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 108
Pd-107 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 105 1 × 108
Pd-109 2 × 100 5 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Promethium (61)
Pm-143 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Pm-144 7 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Pm-145 3 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Pm-147 4 × 101 2 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107
Pm-148m (a) 8 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Pm-149 2 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Pm-151 2 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Polonium (84)
Po-210 4 × 101 2 × 10-2 1 × 101 1 × 104
Praseodymium (59)
Pr-142 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Pr-143 3 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 104 1 × 106
Platinum (78)
Pt-188 (a) 1 × 100 8 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Pt-191 4 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Pt-193 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 107
Pt-193m 4 × 101 5 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 107
Pt-195m 1 × 101 5 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Pt-197 2 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Pt-197m 1 × 101 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Plutonium (94)
Pu-236 3 × 101 3 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
Pu-237 2 × 101 2 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Pu-238 1 × 101 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 104
Pu-239 1 × 101 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 104
Pu-240 1 × 101 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 103
Pu-241 (a) 4 × 101 6 × 10-2 1 × 102 1 × 105
Pu-242 1 × 101 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 104
Pu-244 (a) 4 × 10-1 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 104
Radium (88)
Ra-223 (a) 4 × 10-1 7 × 10-3 1 × 102 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
Ra-224 (a) 4 × 10-1 2 × 10-2 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
Ra-225 (a) 2 × 10-1 4 × 10-3 1 × 102 1 × 105
Ra-226 (a) 2 × 10-1 3 × 10-3 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 104 (b)
Ra-228 (a) 6 × 10-1 2 × 10-2 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
Rubidium (37)
Rb-81 2 × 100 8 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Rb-83 (a) 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Rb-84 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Rb-86 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Rb-87 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 104 1 × 107
Rb (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 104 1 × 107
Rhenium (75)
Re-184 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Re-184m 3 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Re-186 2 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Re-187 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 106 1 × 109
Re-188 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Re-189 (a) 3 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Re (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 106 1 × 109
Rhodium (45)
Rh-99 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Rh-101 4 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Rh-102 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Rh-102m 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Rh-103m 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 108
Rh-105 1 × 101 8 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 107
Radon (86)
Rn-222 (a) 3 × 10-1 4 × 10-3 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 108 (b)
Ruthenium (44)
Ru-97 5 × 100 5 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Ru-103 (a) 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Ru-105 1 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Ru-106 (a) 2 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 102 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
Sulphur (16)
S-35 4 × 101 3 × 100 1 × 105 1 × 108
Antimony (51)
Sb-122 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 104
Sb-124 6 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Sb-125 2 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Sb-126 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Scandium (21)
Sc-44 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Sc-46 5 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Sc-47 1 × 101 7 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Sc-48 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Selenium (34)
Se-75 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Se-79 4 × 101 2 × 100 1 × 104 1 × 107
Silicon (14)
Si-31 6 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Si-32 4 × 101 5 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Samarium (62)
Sm-145 1 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 102 1 × 107
Sm-147 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 101 1 × 104
Sm-151 4 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 108
Sm-153 9 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Tin (50)
Sn-113 (a) 4 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 107
Sn-117m 7 × 100 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Sn-119m 4 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Sn-121m (a) 4 × 101 9 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 107
Sn-123 8 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Sn-125 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Sn-126 (a) 6 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Strontium (38)
Sr-82 (a) 2 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Sr-83 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Sr-85 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Sr-85m 5 × 100 5 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Sr-87m 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Sr-89 6 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Sr-90 (a) 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 102 (b) 1 × 104 (b)
Sr-91 (a) 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Sr-92 (a) 1 × 100 3 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Tritium (1)
T (H-3) 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 106 1 × 109
Tantalum (73)
Ta-178 (long-lived) 1 × 100 8 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Ta-179 3 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
Ta-182 9 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 104
Terbium (65)
Tb-149 8 × 10-1 8 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Tb-157 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 107
Tb-158 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Tb-160 1 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Tb-161 3 × 101 7 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Technetium (43)
Tc-95m (a) 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Tc-96 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Tc-96m (a) 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 107
Tc-97 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 103 1 × 108
Tc-97m 4 × 101 1 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 107
Tc-98 8 × 10-1 7 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Tc-99 4 × 101 9 × 10-1 1 × 104 1 × 107
Tc-99m 1 × 101 4 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Tellurium (52)
Te-121 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Te-121m 5 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Te-123m 8 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Te-125m 2 × 101 9 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 107
Te-127 2 × 101 7 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Te-127m (a) 2 × 101 5 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 107
Te-129 7 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Te-129m (a) 8 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Te-131m (a) 7 × 10-1 5 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Te-132 (a) 5 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 107
Thorium (90)
Th-227 1 × 101 5 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
Th-228 (a) 5 × 10-1 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 (b) 1 × 104 (b)
Th-229 5 × 100 5 × 10-4 1 × 100 (b) 1 × 103 (b)
Th-230 1 × 101 1 × 10-3 1 × 100 1 × 104
Th-231 4 × 101 2 × 10-2 1 × 103 1 × 107
Th-232 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 101 1 × 104
Th-234 (a) 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 103 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
Th (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 100 (b) 1 × 103 (b)
Titanium (22)
Ti-44 (a) 5 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
Thallium (81)
Tl-200 9 × 10-1 9 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Tl-201 1 × 101 4 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Tl-202 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Tl-204 1 × 101 7 × 10-1 1 × 104 1 × 104
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Thulium (69)
Tm-167 7 × 100 8 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
Tm-170 3 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Tm-171 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 108
Uranium (92)
U-230 (fast lung absorption) (a) (d) 4 ×101 1 × 10-1 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
U-230 (medium lung absorption) 4 × 101 4 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
(a) (e)
U-230 (slow lung absorption) (a) (f) 3 × 101 3 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
U-232 (fast lung absorption) (d) 4 × 101 1 × 10-2 1 × 100 (b) 1 × 103 (b)
U-232 (medium lung absorption) (e) 4 × 101 7 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
U-232 (slow lung absorption) (f) 1 × 101 1 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
U-233 (fast lung absorption) (d) 4 × 101 9 × 10-2 1 × 101 1 × 104
U-233 (medium lung absorption) (e) 4 × 101 2 × 10-2 1 × 102 1 × 105
U-233 (slow lung absorption) (f) 4 × 101 6 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 105
U-234 (fast lung absorption) (d) 4 × 101 9 × 10-2 1 × 101 1 × 104
U-234 (medium lung absorption) (e) 4 × 101 2 × 10-2 1 × 102 1 × 105
U-234 (slow lung absorption) (f) 4 × 101 6 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 105
U-235 (all lung absorption types) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 104 (b)
(a) (d) (e) (f)
U-236 (fast lung absorption) (d) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 101 1 × 104
U-236 (medium lung absorption) (e) 4 × 101 2 × 10-2 1 × 102 1 × 105
U-236 (slow lung absorption) (f) 4 × 101 6 × 10-3 1 × 101 1 × 104
U-238 (all lung absorption types) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 104 (b)
(d) (e) (f)
U (nat) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 100 (b) 1 × 103 (b)
U (enriched to 20% or less) (g) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 100 1 × 103
U (dep) Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 100 1 × 103
Vanadium (23)
V-48 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 105
V-49 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 107
Tungsten (74)
W-178 (a) 9 × 100 5 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
W-181 3 × 101 3 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 107
W-185 4 × 101 8 × 10-1 1 × 104 1 × 107
W-187 2 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
W-188 (a) 4 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Xenon (54)
Xe-122 (a) 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 109
Xe-123 2 × 100 7 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 109
Xe-127 4 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 105
Xe-131m 4 × 101 4 × 101 1 × 104 1 × 104
Xe-133 2 × 101 1 × 101 1 × 103 1 × 104
Xe-135 3 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 103 1 × 1010
Yttrium (39)
Y-87 (a) 1 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Y-88 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Y-90 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 105
Y-91 6 × 10-1 6 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 106
Y-91m 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Y-92 2 × 10-1 2 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Y-93 3 × 10-1 3 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 105
Ytterbium (70)
Yb-169 4 × 100 1 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 107
Yb-175 3 × 101 9 × 10-1 1 × 103 1 × 107
Zinc (30)
Zn-65 2 × 100 2 × 100 1 × 101 1 × 106
Zn-69 3 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 104 1 × 106
Zn-69m (a) 3 × 100 6 × 10-1 1 × 102 1 × 106
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for an exempt
Radionuclide (atomic number) limit for exempt
consignment
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Zirconium (40)
Zr-88 3 × 100 3 × 100 1 × 102 1 × 106
Zr-93 Unlimited Unlimited 1 × 103 (b) 1 × 107 (b)
Zr-95 (a) 2 × 100 8 × 10-1 1 × 101 1 × 106
Zr-97 (a) 4 × 10-1 4 × 10-1 1 × 101 (b) 1 × 105 (b)
(a) A1 and/or A2 values for these parent radionuclides include contributions from their progeny with half-lives
less than 10 days, as listed in the following:
Mg-28 Al-28
Ar-42 K-42
Ca-47 Sc-47
Ti-44 Sc-44
Fe-52 Mn-52m
Fe-60 Co-60m
Zn-69m Zn-69
Ge-68 Ga-68
Rb-83 Kr-83m
Sr-82 Rb-82
Sr-90 Y-90
Sr-91 Y-91m
Sr-92 Y-92
Y-87 Sr-87m
Zr-95 Nb-95m
Zr-97 Nb-97m, Nb-97
Mo-99 Tc-99m
Tc-95m Tc-95
Tc-96m Tc-96
Ru-103 Rh-103m
Ru-106 Rh-106
Pd-103 Rh-103m
Ag-108m Ag-108
Ag-110m Ag-110
Cd-115 In-115m
In-114m In-114
Sn-113 In-113m
Sn-121m Sn-121
Sn-126 Sb-126m
Te-118 Sb-118
Te-127m Te-127
Te-129m Te-129
Te-131m Te-131
Te-132 I-132
I-135 Xe-135m
Xe-122 I-122
Cs-137 Ba-137m
Ba-131 Cs-131
Ba-140 La-140
Ce-144 Pr-144m, Pr-144
Pm-148m Pm-148
Gd-146 Eu-146
Dy-166 Ho-166
Hf-172 Lu-172
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
W-178 Ta-178
W-188 Re-188
Re-189 Os-189m
Os-194 Ir-194
Ir-189 Os-189m
Pt-188 Ir-188
Hg-194 Au-194
Hg-195m Hg-195
Pb-210 Bi-210
Pb-212 Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212
Bi-210m Tl-206
Bi-212 Tl-208, Po-212
At-211 Po-211
Rn-222 Po-218, Pb-214, At-218, Bi-214, Po-214
Ra-223 Rn-219, Po-215, Pb-211, Bi-211, Po-211, Tl-207
Ra-224 Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212
Ra-225 Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Tl-209, Po-213, Pb-209
Ra-226 Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, At-218, Bi-214, Po-214
Ra-228 Ac-228
Ac-225 Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Tl-209, Po-213, Pb-209
Ac-227 Fr-223
Th-228 Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208, Po-212
Th-234 Pa-234m, Pa-234
Pa-230 Ac-226, Th-226, Fr-222, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214
U-230 Th-226, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214
U-235 Th-231
Pu-241 U-237
Pu-244 U-240, Np-240m
Am-242m Am-242, Np-238
Am-243 Np-239
Cm-247 Pu-243
Bk-249 Am-245
Cf-253 Cm-249
(b) Parent nuclides and their progeny included in secular equilibrium are listed in the following (the activity
to be taken into account is that of the parent nuclide only):
Sr-90 Y-90
Zr-93 Nb-93m
Zr-97 Nb-97
Ru-106 Rh-106
Ag-108m Ag-108
Cs-137 Ba-137m
Ce-144 Pr-144
Ba-140 La-140
Bi-212 Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64)
Pb-210 Bi-210, Po-210
Pb-212 Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64)
Rn-222 Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214
Ra-223 Rn-219, Po-215, Pb-211, Bi-211, Tl-207
Ra-224 Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64)
Ra-226 Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214, Pb-210, Bi-210, Po-210
Ra-228 Ac-228
Th-228 Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64)
Th-229 Ra-225, Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213, Po-213, Pb-209
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Th (nat) Ra-228, Ac-228, Th-228, Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36),
Po-212 (0.64)
Th-234 Pa-234m
U-230 Th-226, Ra-222, Rn-218, Po-214
U-232 Th-228, Ra-224, Rn-220, Po-216, Pb-212, Bi-212, Tl-208 (0.36), Po-212 (0.64)
U-235 Th-231
U-238 Th-234, Pa-234m
U (nat) Th-234, Pa-234m, U-234, Th-230, Ra-226, Rn-222, Po-218, Pb-214, Bi-214, Po-214,
Pb-210, Bi-210, Po-210
Np-237 Pa-233
Am-242m Am-242
Am-243 Np-239
(c) The quantity may be determined from a measurement of the rate of decay or a measurement of the d
ose
rate at a prescribed distance from the source.
(d) These values apply only to compounds of uranium that take the chemical form of UF6, UO2F2
and UO2(NO3)2 in both normal and accident conditions of transport.
(e) These values apply only to compounds of uranium that take the chemical form of UO3, UF4, UCl4 and
hexavalent compounds in both normal and accident conditions of transport.
(f) These values apply to all compounds of uranium other than those specified in (d) and (e) above.
(g) These values apply to unirradiated uranium only.
2.7.2.2.2 For individual radionuclides:
.1 which are not listed in table 2.7.2.2.1, the determination of the basic radionuclide values referred to in
2.7.2.2.1 shall require multilateral approval. For these radionuclides, activity concentration limits for exempt
material and activity limits for exempt consignments shall be calculated in accordance with the principles
established in the Radiation Protection and Safety of Radiation Sources: International Basic Safety
Standards, IAEA Safety Standards Series No. GSR Part 3, IAEA, Vienna (2014). It is permissible to use
an A2 value calculated using a dose coefficient for the appropriate lung absorption type as recommended
by the International Commission on Radiological Protection, if the chemical forms of each radionuclide
under both normal and accident conditions of transport are taken into consideration. Alternatively, the
radionuclide values in table 2.7.2.2.2 may be used without obtaining competent authority approval;
.2 In instruments or articles in which the radioactive material is enclosed or is included as a component part
of the instrument or other manufactured article and which meet 2.7.2.4.1.3.3, alternative basic radionuclide
values to those in table 2.7.2.2.1 for the activity limit for an exempt consignment are permitted and
shall require multilateral approval. Such alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment shall be
calculated in accordance with the principles set out in GSR Part 3.
Table 2.7.2.2.2 – Basic radionuclide values for unknown radionuclides or mixtures
Activity
Activity limit
concentration
A1 A2 for exempt
Radioactive contents limit for exempt
consignments
material
(TBq) (TBq) (Bq)
(Bq/g)
Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides 0.1 0.02 1 × 101 1 × 104
are known to be present
Alpha emitting nuclides but no 0.2 9 × 10-5 1 × 10-1 1 × 103
neutron emitters are known to be
present
Neutron emitting nuclides are known 0.001 9 × 10-5 1 × 10-1 1 × 103
to be present or no relevant data are
available
2.7.2.2.3 In the calculations of A1 and A2 for a radionuclide not in table 2.7.2.2.1, a single radioactive decay chain in
which the radionuclides are present in their naturally occurring proportions, and in which no progeny nuclide
has a half-life either longer than 10 days or longer than that of the parent nuclide, shall be considered as a
single radionuclide; and the activity to be taken into account and the A1 or A2 value to be applied shall be
those corresponding to the parent nuclide of that chain. In the case of radioactive decay chains in which any
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
progeny nuclide has a half-life either longer than 10 days or greater than that of the parent nuclide, the parent
and such progeny nuclides shall be considered as mixtures of different nuclides.
2.7.2.2.4 For mixtures of radionuclides, the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.7.2.2.1 may be determined as
follows:
1
Xm = ______
∑ X(i)
f(i)
___
i
where:
f(i) is the fraction of activity or activity concentration of radionuclide i in the mixture;
X(i) is the appropriate value of A1 or A2, or the activity concentration limit for exempt material or the
activity limit for an exempt consignment, as appropriate, for the radionuclide i; and
Xm is the derived value of A1 or A2, or the activity concentration limit for exempt material or the a
ctivity
limit for an exempt consignment in the case of a mixture.
2.7.2.2.5 When the identity of each radionuclide is known but the individual activities of some of the radionuclides
are not known, the radionuclides may be grouped and the lowest radionuclide value, as appropriate, for the
radionuclides in each group may be used in applying the formulae in 2.7.2.2.4 and 2.7.2.4.4. Groups may be
based on the total alpha activity and the total beta/gamma activity when these are known, using the lowest
radionuclide values for the alpha emitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively.
2.7.2.2.6 For individual radionuclides or for mixtures of radionuclides for which relevant data are not available, the
values shown in table 2.7.2.2.2 shall be used.
2.7.2.3 Determination of other material characteristics
2.7.2.3.1 Low specific activity (LSA) material
2.7.2.3.1.1 [Reserved]
2.7.2.3.1.2 LSA material shall be in one of three groups:
.1 LSA-I
.1 uranium and thorium ores and concentrates of such ores, and other ores containing naturally
occurring radionuclides;
.2 Natural uranium, depleted uranium, natural thorium or their compounds or mixtures, that are
unirradiated and in solid or liquid form;
.3 radioactive material for which the A2 value is unlimited. Fissile material may be included only if
excepted under 2.7.2.3.5; or
.4 other radioactive material in which the activity is distributed throughout and the estimated average
specific activity does not exceed 30 times the values for activity concentration specified in 2.7.2.2.1
to 2.7.2.2.6. Fissile material may be included only if excepted under 2.7.2.3.5;
.2 LSA-II
.1 water with tritium concentration up to 0.8 TBq/L;
.2 other material in which the activity is distributed throughout and the estimated average specific
activity does not exceed 10-4A2/g for solids and gases, and 10-5A2/g for liquids;
.3 LSA-III – Solids (e.g. consolidated wastes, activated materials), excluding powders, in which:
.1 the radioactive material is distributed throughout a solid or a collection of solid objects, or is
essentially uniformly distributed in a solid compact binding agent (such as concrete, bitumen and
ceramic);
.2 the estimated average specific activity of the solid, excluding any shielding material, does not exceed
2 × 10-3 A2/g.
2.7.2.3.1.3 Deleted.
2.7.2.3.1.4 Deleted.
2.7.2.3.1.5 Deleted.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.7.2.3.2 Surface contaminated object (SCO)
SCO is classified in one of three groups:
.1 SCO‑I: A solid object on which:
.1 the non‑fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of
the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and
low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 0.4 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters;
.2 the fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface
if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 × 104 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity
alpha emitters, or 4 × 103 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters; and
.3 the non‑fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged
over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 × 104 Bq/cm2 for beta
and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 × 103 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters;
.2 SCO‑II: A solid object on which either the fixed or non‑fixed contamination on the surface exceeds the
applicable limits specified for SCO‑I in 2.7.2.3.2.1 above and on which:
.1 the non‑fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of
the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 400 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and
low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 40 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters;
.2 the fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface
if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity
alpha emitters, or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters; and
.3 the non‑fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over
300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/cm2 for beta
and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters.
.3 SCO-III: A large solid object which, because of its size, cannot be transported in a type of package
described in this Code and for which:
.1 all openings are sealed to prevent release of radioactive material during conditions defined in
4.1.9.2.4.5;
.2 the inside of the object is as dry as practicable;
.3 the non-fixed contamination on the external surfaces does not exceed the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2;
and
.4 the non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged
over 300 cm2 does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha
emitters, or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters.
2.7.2.3.3 Special form radioactive material
2.7.2.3.3.1 .1 Special form radioactive material shall have at least one dimension not less than 5 mm.
.2 When a sealed capsule constitutes part of the special form radioactive material, the capsule shall be so
manufactured that it can be opened only by destroying it.
.3 The design for special form radioactive material requires unilateral approval.
2.7.2.3.3.2 Special form radioactive material shall be of such a nature or shall be so designed that, if it is subjected to the
tests specified in 2.7.2.3.3.4 to 2.7.2.3.3.8, it shall meet the following requirements:
.1 It would not break or shatter under the impact, percussion and bending tests 2.7.2.3.3.5.1, 2.7.2.3.3.5.2,
2.7.2.3.3.5.3, and 2.7.2.3.3.6.1 as applicable;
.2 It would not melt or disperse in the applicable heat test 2.7.2.3.3.5.4 or 2.7.2.3.3.6.2 as applicable; and
.3 The activity in the water from the leaching tests specified in 2.7.2.3.3.7 and 2.7.2.3.3.8 would not exceed
2 kBq; or alternatively for sealed sources, the leakage rate for the volumetric leakage assessment test
specified in ISO 9978:1992, Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – Leakage test methods,
would not exceed the applicable acceptance threshold acceptable to the competent authority.
2.7.2.3.3.3 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards in 2.7.2.3.3.2 shall be in accordance with
6.4.12.1 and 6.4.12.2.
2.7.2.3.3.4 Specimens that comprise or simulate special form radioactive material shall be subjected to the impact test, the
percussion test, the bending test, and the heat test specified in 2.7.2.3.3.5 or alternative tests as authorized in
2.7.2.3.3.6. A different specimen may be used for each of the tests. Following each test, a leaching assessment
or volumetric leakage test shall be performed on the specimen by a method no less sensitive than the methods
given in 2.7.2.3.3.7 for indispersible solid material or 2.7.2.3.3.8 for encapsulated material.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.7.2.3.3.5 The relevant test methods are:
.1 Impact test: The specimen shall drop onto the target from a height of 9 m. The target shall be as defined
in 6.4.14;
.2 Percussion test: The specimen shall be placed on a sheet of lead which is supported by a smooth solid
surface and struck by the flat face of a mild steel bar so as to cause an impact equivalent to that resulting
from a free drop of 1.4 kg from a height of 1 m. The lower part of the bar shall be 25 mm in diameter
with the edges rounded off to a radius of (3.0 ± 0.3) mm. The lead, of hardness number 3.5 to 4.5 on
the Vickers scale and not more than 25 mm thick, shall cover an area greater than that covered by the
specimen. A fresh surface of lead shall be used for each impact. The bar shall strike the specimen so as
to cause maximum damage;
.3 Bending test: The test shall apply only to long, slender sources with both a minimum length of 10 cm
and a length to minimum width ratio of not less than 10. The specimen shall be rigidly clamped in a
horizontal position so that one half of its length protrudes from the face of the clamp. The orientation of
the specimen shall be such that the specimen will suffer maximum damage when its free end is struck by
the flat face of a steel bar. The bar shall strike the specimen so as to cause an impact equivalent to that
resulting from a free vertical drop of 1.4 kg from a height of 1 m. The lower part of the bar shall be 25 mm
in diameter with the edges rounded off to a radius of (3.0 ± 0.3) mm;
.4 Heat test: The specimen shall be heated in air to a temperature of 800°C and held at that temperature for
a period of 10 minutes and shall then be allowed to cool.
2.7.2.3.3.6 Specimens that comprise or simulate radioactive material enclosed in a sealed capsule may be excepted
from:
.1 The tests prescribed in 2.7.2.3.3.5.1 and 2.7.2.3.3.5.2 provided that the specimens are alternatively
subjected to the impact test prescribed in ISO 2919:2012, Radiation Protection – Sealed Radioactive
Sources – General requirements and classification:
.1 the class 4 impact test if the mass of the special form radioactive material is less than 200 g; and
.2 the class 5 impact test if the mass of the special form radioactive material is equal to or more than
200 g but is less than 500 g.
.2 The test prescribed in 2.7.2.3.3.5.4 provided they are alternatively subjected to the class 6 temperature
test specified in ISO 2919:2012, Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – General requirements
and classification.
2.7.2.3.3.7 For specimens which comprise or simulate indispersible solid material, a leaching assessment shall be
performed as follows:
.1 The specimen shall be immersed for 7 days in water at ambient temperature. The volume of water to be
used in the test shall be sufficient to ensure that at the end of the 7-day test period the free volume of the
unabsorbed and unreacted water remaining shall be at least 10% of the volume of the solid test sample
itself. The water shall have an initial pH of 6 to 8 and a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20°C;
.2 The water and the specimen shall then be heated to a temperature of (50 ± 5)°C and maintained at this
temperature for 4 hours;
.3 The activity of the water shall then be determined;
.4 The specimen shall then be kept for at least 7 days in still air at not less than 30°C and relative humidity
not less than 90%;
.5 The specimen shall then be immersed in water of the same specification as in 2.7.2.3.3.7.1 above and the
water and the specimen heated to (50 ± 5)°C and maintained at this temperature for 4 hours;
.6 The activity of the water shall then be determined.
2.7.2.3.3.8 For specimens which comprise or simulate radioactive material enclosed in a sealed capsule, either a leaching
assessment or a volumetric leakage assessment shall be performed as follows:
.1 The leaching assessment shall consist of the following steps:
.1 the specimen shall be immersed in water at ambient temperature. The water shall have an initial pH
of 6 to 8 with a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20°C;
.2 the water and specimen shall then be heated to a temperature of (50 ± 5)°C and maintained at this
temperature for 4 hours;
.3 the activity of the water shall then be determined;
.4 the specimen shall then be kept for at least 7 days in still air at not less than 30°C and relative
humidity of not less than 90%;
.5 the process in .1, .2 and .3 shall be repeated.
.2 The alternative volumetric leakage assessment shall comprise any of the tests prescribed in ISO
9978:1992, Radiation protection – Sealed radioactive sources – Leakage test methods, provided that
they are acceptable to the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.7.2.3.4 Low dispersible radioactive material
2.7.2.3.4.1 The design for low dispersible radioactive material shall require multilateral approval. Low dispersible
radioactive material shall be such that the total amount of this radioactive material in a package, taking into
account the provisions of 6.4.8.14, shall meet the following provisions:
.1 The dose rate at 3 m from the unshielded radioactive material does not exceed 10 mSv/h;
.2 If subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.20.3 and 6.4.20.4, the airborne release in gaseous and particulate
forms of up to 100 μm aerodynamic equivalent diameter would not exceed 100A2. A separate specimen
may be used for each test; and
.3 If subjected to the test specified in 2.7.2.3.4.3, the activity in the water would not exceed 100A2. In the
application of this test, the damaging effects of the tests specified in 2.7.2.3.4.1.2 above shall be taken
into account.
2.7.2.3.4.2 Low dispersible material shall be tested as follows:
A specimen that comprises or simulates low dispersible radioactive material shall be subjected to the
enhanced thermal test specified in 6.4.20.3 and the impact test specified in 6.4.20.4. A different specimen
may be used for each of the tests. Following each test, the specimen shall be subjected to the leach test
specified in 2.7.2.3.1.4. After each test it shall be determined if the applicable provisions of 2.7.2.3.4.1 have
been met.
2.7.2.3.4.3 A solid material sample representing the entire contents of the package shall be immersed for seven days in
water at ambient temperature. The volume of water to be used in the test shall be sufficient to ensure that at
the end of the seven-day test period the free volume of the unabsorbed and unreacted water remaining shall
be at least 10% of the volume of the solid test sample itself. The water shall have an initial pH of 6 to 8 and
a maximum conductivity of 1 mS/m at 20°C. The total activity of the free volume of water shall be measured
following the seven-day immersion of the test sample.
2.7.2.3.4.4 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards in 2.7.2.3.4.1, 2.7.2.3.4.2 and 2.7.2.3.4.3 shall
be in accordance with 6.4.12.1 and 6.4.12.2.
2.7.2.3.5 Fissile material
Fissile material and packages containing fissile material shall be classified under the relevant entry as
“FISSILE” in accordance with table 2.7.2.1.1 unless excepted by one of the provisions of subparagraphs .1
to .6 below and transported subject to the requirements of 5.1.5.5. All provisions apply only to material in
packages that meets the requirements of 6.4.7.2 unless unpackaged material is specifically allowed in the
provision.
.1 uranium enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 1% by mass, and with a total plutonium and
uranium-233 content not exceeding 1% of the mass of uranium-235, provided that the fissile nuclides
are distributed essentially homogeneously throughout the material. In addition, if uranium-235 is present
in metallic, oxide or carbide forms, it shall not form a lattice arrangement;
.2 liquid solutions of uranyl nitrate enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 2% by mass, with a total
plutonium and uranium‑233 content not exceeding 0.002% of the mass of uranium, and with a minimum
nitrogen to uranium atomic ratio (N/U) of 2;
.3 uranium with a maximum uranium enrichment of 5% by mass uranium-235 provided:
.1 there is no more than 3.5 g of uranium-235 per package;
.2 the total plutonium and uranium-233 content does not exceed 1% of the mass of uranium-235 per
package;
.3 transport of the package is subject to the consignment limit provided in 5.1.5.5.3;
.4 fissile nuclides with a total mass not greater than 2 g per package provided the package is transported
subject to the consignment limit provided in 5.1.5.5.4;
.5 fissile nuclides with a total mass not greater than 45 g either packaged or unpackaged subject to the
requirements of 5.1.5.5.5;
.6 a fissile material that meets the requirements of 5.1.5.5.2, 2.7.2.3.6 and 5.1.5.2.1.
2.7.2.3.6 Fissile material excepted from classification as “FISSILE” under 2.7.2.3.5.6 shall be subcritical without the
need for accumulation control under the following conditions:
.1 the conditions of 6.4.11.1 (a);
.2 the conditions consistent with the assessment provisions stated in 6.4.11.12 (b) and 6.4.11.13 (b) for
packages; and
.3 the conditions specified in 6.4.11.11 (a), if transported by air.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.7.2.4 Classification of packages or unpacked material
The quantity of radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the relevant limits for the package type as
specified below.
2.7.2.4.1 Classification as excepted package
2.7.2.4.1.1 A package may be classified as an excepted package if it meets one of the following conditions:
.1 it is an empty package having contained radioactive material;
.2 it contains instruments or articles not exceeding the activity limits specified in columns (2) and (3) of
table 2.7.2.4.1.2;
.3 it contains articles manufactured of natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium;
.4 it contains radioactive material not exceeding the activity limits specified in column (4) of table 2.7.2.4.1.2;
or
.5 it contains less than 0.1 kg of uranium hexafluoride not exceeding the activity limits specified in column (4)
of table 2.7.2.4.1.2.
2.7.2.4.1.2 A package containing radioactive material may be classified as an excepted package provided that the dose
rate at any point on its external surface does not exceed 5 μSv/h.
Table 2.7.2.4.1.2 – Activity limits for excepted packages
Physical state Instruments or article Material package
of contents Item limitsa Package limitsa limitsa
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Solids
special form 10-2 A1 A1 10-3 A1
other form 10-2 A2 A2 10-3 A2
Liquids 10-3 A2 10-1 A2 10-4 A2
Gases
tritium 2 × 10-2 A2 2 × 10-1 A2 2 × 10-2 A2
special form 10-3 A1 10-2 A1 10-3 A1
other forms 10-3 A2 10-2 A2 10-3 A2
a
For mixtures of radionuclides, see 2.7.2.2.4 to 2.7.2.2.6.
2.7.2.4.1.3 Radioactive material which is enclosed in or is included as a component part of an instrument or other
manufactured article may be classified under UN 2911, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE –
INSTRUMENTS or ARTICLES provided that:
.1 the dose rate at 10 cm from any point on the external surface of any unpackaged instrument or article is
not greater than 0.1 mSv/h; and
.2 each instrument or manufactured article bears the mark “RADIOACTIVE” on its external surface except
for the following:
.1 radioluminescent time-pieces or devices;
.2 consumer products that either have received regulatory approval in accordance with 1.5.1.4.5 or
do not individually exceed the activity limit for an exempt consignment in table 2.7.2.2.1 (column 5),
provided such products are transported in a package that bears the mark “RADIOACTIVE” on its
internal surface in such a manner that a warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible on
opening the package;
.3 other instruments or articles too small to bear the mark “RADIOACTIVE”, provided that they are
transported in a package that bears the mark “RADIOACTIVE” on its internal surface in such a
manner that a warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible on opening the package; and
.3 the active material is completely enclosed by non-active components (a device performing the sole
function of containing radioactive material shall not be considered to be an instrument or manufactured
article);
.4 the limits specified in columns 2 and 3 of table 2.7.2.4.1.2 are met for each individual item and each
package, respectively;
.5 reserved; and
.6 if the package contains fissile material, one of the provisions of sub-paragraphs .1 to .6 of 2.7.2.3.5
applies.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.7.2.4.1.4 Radioactive material in forms other than as specified in 2.7.2.4.1.3 and with an activity not exceeding the
limits specified in column 4 of table 2.7.2.4.1.2, may be classified under UN 2910, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL,
EXCEPTED PACKAGE – LIMITED QUANTITY OF MATERIAL provided that:
.1 the package retains its radioactive contents under routine conditions of transport;
.2 the package bears the mark “RADIOACTIVE” on either:
.1 an internal surface in such a manner that a warning of the presence of radioactive material is visible
on opening the package; or
.2 the outside of the package, where it is impractical to mark an internal surface; and
.3 if the package contains fissile material, one of the provisions of sub-paragraphs .1 to .6 of 2.7.2.3.5
applies.
2.7.2.4.1.5 Uranium hexafluoride not exceeding the limits specified in column 4 of table 2.7.2.4.1.2 may be classified
under UN 3507 URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE, less than 0.1
kg per package, non-fissile or fissile-excepted, provided that:
.1 the mass of uranium hexafluoride in the package is less than 0.1 kg; and
.2 the conditions of 2.7.2.4.5.1 and 2.7.2.4.1.4.1 and 2.7.2.4.1.4.2 are met.
2.7.2.4.1.6 Articles manufactured of natural uranium, depleted uranium or natural thorium and articles in which the sole
radioactive material is unirradiated natural uranium, unirradiated depleted uranium or unirradiated natural
thorium may be classified under UN 2909, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – ARTICLES
MANUFACTURED FROM NATURAL URANIUM or DEPLETED URANIUM or NATURAL THORIUM, provided
that the outer surface of the uranium or thorium is enclosed in an inactive sheath made of metal or some other
substantial material.
2.7.2.4.1.7 An empty packaging which had previously contained radioactive material may be classified under UN 2908,
RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE – EMPTY PACKAGING, provided that:
.1 it is in a well-maintained condition and securely closed;
.2 the outer surface of any uranium or thorium in its structure is covered with an inactive sheath made of
metal or some other substantial material;
.3 the level of internal non‑fixed contamination, when averaged over any 300 cm2, does not exceed:
.1 400 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters; and
.2 40 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters;
.4 any labels which may have been displayed on it in conformity with 5.2.2.1.12.1 are no longer visible; and
.5 if the packaging has contained fissile material, one of the provisions of sub-paragraphs .1 to .6 of 2.7.2.3.5
or one of the provisions for exclusion in 2.7.1.3 applies.
2.7.2.4.2 Classification as low specific activity (LSA) material
Radioactive material may only be classified as LSA material if the definition of LSA in 2.7.1.3 and the conditions
of 2.7.2.3.1, 4.1.9.2 and 7.1.4.5.1 are met.
2.7.2.4.3 Classification as surface contaminated object (SCO)
Radioactive material may be classified as SCO if the definition of SCO in 2.7.1.3 and the conditions of 2.7.2.3.2,
4.1.9.2 and 7.1.4.5.1 are met.
2.7.2.4.4 Classification as Type A package
Packages containing radioactive material may be classified as Type A packages provided that the following
conditions are met:
Type A packages shall not contain activities greater than either of the following:
.1 for special form radioactive material – A1;
.2 for all other radioactive material – A2.
For mixtures of radionuclides whose identities and respective activities are known, the following condition
shall apply to the radioactive contents of a Type A package:
∑ ____
A (i) ∑A ( j)
B(i) C( j)
+ ____ ≤ 1
i 1 j 2
where:
B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i as special form radioactive material;
A1(i) is the A1 value for radionuclide i;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
C( j) is the activity of radionuclide j as other than special form radioactive material;
A2( j) is the A2 value for radionuclide j.
2.7.2.4.5 Classification of uranium hexafluoride
2.7.2.4.5.1 Uranium hexafluoride shall only be assigned to:
.1 UN 2977, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, FISSILE;
.2 UN 2978, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, non-fissile or fissile-excepted; or
.3 UN 3507, URANIUM HEXAFLUORIDE, RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL, EXCEPTED PACKAGE less than 0.1 kg
per package, non-fissile or fissile-excepted.
2.7.2.4.5.2 The contents of a package containing uranium hexafluoride shall comply with the following requirements:
.1 for UN Nos. 2977 and 2978, the mass of uranium hexafluoride shall not be different from that allowed for
the package design, and for UN 3507, the mass of uranium hexafluoride shall be less than 0.1 kg;
.2 the mass of uranium hexafluoride shall not be greater than a value that would lead to an ullage smaller
than 5% at the maximum temperature of the package as specified for the plant systems where the
package shall be used; and
.3 the uranium hexafluoride shall be in solid form and the internal pressure shall not be above atmospheric
pressure when presented for transport.
2.7.2.4.6 Classification as Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C packages
2.7.2.4.6.1 Packages not otherwise classified in 2.7.2.4 (2.7.2.4.1 to 2.7.2.4.5) shall be classified in accordance with the
competent authority certificate of approval for the package issued by the country of origin of design.
2.7.2.4.6.2 The contents of a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package shall be as specified in the certificate of approval.
2.7.2.5 Special arrangements
Radioactive material shall be classified as transported under special arrangement when it is intended to be
transported in accordance with 1.5.4.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.8
Class 8 – Corrosive substances
2.8.1 Definition, general provisions and properties
2.8.1.1 Definition
2.8.1.1.1 Corrosive substances are substances which, by chemical action, will cause irreversible damage to the skin,
or, in the case of leakage, will materially damage, or even destroy, other goods or the means of transport.
2.8.1.1.2 For substances and mixtures that are corrosive to skin, general classification provisions are provided in
section 2.8.2. Skin corrosion refers to the production of irreversible damage to the skin, namely, visible
necrosis through the epidermis and into the dermis occurring after exposure to a substance or mixture.
2.8.1.1.3 Liquids and solids which may become liquid during transport, which are judged not to be skin corrosive shall
still be considered for their potential to cause corrosion to certain metal surfaces in accordance with the
criteria in 2.8.3.3.3.2.
2.8.1.2 Properties
2.8.1.2.1 In cases where particularly severe personal damage is to be expected, a note to that effect is made in
the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 in the wording “causes (severe) burns to skin, eyes and mucous
membranes”.
2.8.1.2.2 Many substances are sufficiently volatile to evolve vapour irritating to the nose and eyes. If so, this fact is
mentioned in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 in the wording “vapour irritates mucous membranes”.
2.8.1.2.3 A few substances may produce toxic gases when decomposed by very high temperatures. In these cases the
statement “when involved in a fire, evolves toxic gases” appears in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2.
2.8.1.2.4 In addition to direct destructive action in contact with skin or mucous membranes, some substances in this
class are toxic or harmful. Poisoning may result if they are swallowed, or if their vapour is inhaled; some of
them even may penetrate the skin. Where appropriate, a statement is made to that effect in the Dangerous
Goods List in chapter 3.2.
2.8.1.2.5 All substances in this class have a more or less destructive effect on materials such as metals and textiles.
2.8.1.2.5.1 In the Dangerous Goods List, the term “corrosive to most metals” means that any metal likely to be present
in a ship, or in its cargo, may be attacked by the substance or its vapour.
2.8.1.2.5.2 The term “corrosive to aluminium, zinc, and tin” implies that iron or steel is not damaged in contact with the
substance.
2.8.1.2.5.3 A few substances in this class can corrode glass, earthenware and other siliceous materials. Where
appropriate, this is stated in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2.
2.8.1.2.6 Many substances in this class only become corrosive after having reacted with water, or with moisture in
the air. This fact is indicated in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 by the words “in the presence of
moisture…”. The reaction of water with many substances is accompanied by the liberation of irritating and
corrosive gases. Such gases usually become visible as fumes in the air.
2.8.1.2.7 A few substances in this class generate heat in reaction with water or organic materials, including wood,
paper, fibres, some cushioning materials and certain fats and oils. Where appropriate, this is indicated in the
Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.8.2 General classification provisions
2.8.2.1 Substances and mixtures of class 8 are divided among the three packing groups according to their degree of
danger in transport:
.1 Packing group I: very dangerous substances and mixtures;
.2 Packing group II: substances and mixtures presenting medium danger;
.3 Packing group III: substances and mixtures that present minor danger.
2.8.2.2 Allocation of substances listed in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 to the packing groups in class 8
has been made on the basis of experience taking into account such additional factors as inhalation risk
(see 2.8.2.4) and reactivity with water (including the formation of dangerous decomposition products).
2.8.2.3 New substances and mixtures can be assigned to packing groups on the basis of the length of time of
contact necessary to produce irreversible damage of intact skin tissue in accordance with the criteria in 2.8.3.
Alternatively, for mixtures, the criteria in 2.8.4 can be used.
2.8.2.4 A substance or mixture meeting the criteria of class 8 having an inhalation toxicity of dusts and mists (LC50) in
the range of packing group I, but toxicity through oral ingestion or dermal contact only in the range of packing
group III or less, shall be allocated to class 8 (see note under 2.6.2.2.4.1).
2.8.3 Packing group assignment for substances and mixtures
2.8.3.1 Existing human and animal data including information from single or repeated exposure shall be the first line
of evaluation, as they give information directly relevant to effects on the skin.
2.8.3.2 In assigning the packing group in accordance with 2.8.2.3, account shall be taken of human experience
in instances of accidental exposure. In the absence of human experience, classification shall be based
on data obtained from experiments in accordance with OECD Test Guidelines Nos. 404, 435, 431, or
430 . A substance or mixture which is determined not to be corrosive in accordance with one of these or
non-classified in accordance with OECD Test Guideline No. 439, may be considered not to be corrosive to
skin for the purposes of this Code without further testing. If the test results indicate that the substance or
mixture is corrosive and not assigned to packing group I, but the test method does not allow discrimination
between packing groups II and III, it shall be considered to be packing group II. If the test results indicate that
the substance or mixture is corrosive, but the test method does not allow discrimination between packing
groups, it shall be assigned to packing group I if no other test results indicate a different packing group.
2.8.3.3 Packing groups are assigned to corrosive substances in accordance with the following criteria (see
table 2.8.3.4):
.1 Packing group I is assigned to substances that cause irreversible damage of intact skin tissue within an
observation period of up to 60 minutes starting after the exposure time of three minutes or less.
.2 Packing group II is assigned to substances that cause irreversible damage of intact skin tissue within an
observation period of up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more than three minutes but not
more than 60 minutes.
.3 Packing group III is assigned to substances that:
.1 cause irreversible damage of intact skin tissue within an observation period up to 14 days starting
after the exposure time of more than 60 minutes but not more than 4 hours; or
.2 are judged not to cause irreversible damage of intact skin tissue but which exhibit a corrosion
rate on either steel or aluminium surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm a year at a test temperature of 55°C
when tested on both materials. For the purposes of testing steel, type S235JR+CR (1.0037 resp.
St 37-2), S275J2G3+CR (1.0144 resp. St 44-3), ISO 3574, Unified Numbering System (UNS) G10200
or SAE 1020, and for testing aluminium, non-clad, types 7075–T6 or AZ5GU-T6 shall be used. An
acceptable test is prescribed in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, section 37.
Note: Where an initial test on either steel or aluminium indicates the substance being tested is corrosive,
the follow-up test on the other metal is not required.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Table 2.8.3.4 – Table summarizing the criteria in 2.8.3.3
Packing group Exposure time Observation period Effect
I ≤ 3 min ≤ 60 min Irreversible damage of intact skin
II > 3 min ≤ 1 h ≤ 14 d Irreversible damage of intact skin
III >1h≤4h ≤ 14 d Irreversible damage of intact skin
III – – Corrosion rate on either steel or
aluminium surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm
a year at a test temperature of 55°C
when tested on both materials
2.8.4 Alternative packing group assignment methods for mixtures:
step-wise approach
2.8.4.1 General provisions
2.8.4.1.1 For mixtures it is necessary to obtain or derive information that allows the criteria to be applied to the mixture
for the purpose of classification and assignment of packing groups. The approach to classification and
assignment of packing groups is tiered, and is dependent upon the amount of information available for the
mixture itself, for similar mixtures and/or for its ingredients. The flow chart of figure 2.8.4.1 below outlines the
process to be followed:
Test data available on the Yes Classify and assign
Apply criteria in 2.8.3
mixture as a whole packing group
No
Sufficient data available on
Yes Apply bridging principles Classify and assign
similar mixtures to estimate
in 2.8.4.2 packing group
skin corrosion hazards
No
Available skin corrosion data Yes Apply calculation method Classify and assign
for all ingredients in 2.8.4.3 packing group
Figure 2.8.4.1 – Step-wise approach to classify and assign
packing group of corrosive mixtures
2.8.4.2 Bridging principles
2.8.4.2.1 Where a mixture has not been tested to determine its skin corrosion potential, but there are sufficient data on
both the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately classify and assign a packing group
for the mixture, these data will be used in accordance with the following bridging principles. This ensures that
the classification process uses the available data to the greatest extent possible in characterizing the hazards
of the mixture.
.1 Dilution: If a tested mixture is diluted with a diluent which does not meet the criteria for class 8 and does
not affect the packing group of other ingredients, then the new diluted mixture may be assigned to the
same packing group as the original tested mixture.
Note: In certain cases, diluting a mixture or substance may lead to an increase in the corrosive properties.
If this is the case, this bridging principle cannot be used.
.2 Batching: The skin corrosion potential of a tested production batch of a mixture can be assumed to be
substantially equivalent to that of another untested production batch of the same commercial product
when produced by or under the control of the same manufacturer, unless there is reason to believe there
is significant variation such that the skin corrosion potential of the untested batch has changed. If the
latter occurs, a new classification is necessary.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.3 Concentration of mixtures of packing group I: If a tested mixture meeting the criteria for inclusion in
packing group I is concentrated, the more concentrated untested mixture may be assigned to packing
group I without additional testing.
.4 Interpolation within one packing group: For three mixtures (A, B and C) with identical ingredients, where
mixtures A and B have been tested and are in the same skin corrosion packing group, and where
untested mixture C has the same class 8 ingredients as mixtures A and B but has concentrations of
class 8 ingredients intermediate to the concentrations in mixtures A and B, then mixture C is assumed to
be in the same skin corrosion packing group as A and B.
.5 Substantially similar mixtures: Given the following:
.1 two mixtures: (A+B) and (C+B);
.2 the concentration of ingredient B is the same in both mixtures;
.3 the concentration of ingredient A in mixture (A+B) equals the concentration of ingredient C in mixture
(C+B); and
.4 data on skin corrosion for ingredients A and C are available and substantially equivalent, i.e. they are
the same skin corrosion packing group and do not affect the skin corrosion potential of B.
If mixture (A+B) or (C+B) is already classified based on test data, then the other mixture may be assigned
to the same packing group.
2.8.4.3 Calculation method based on the classification of the substances
2.8.4.3.1 Where a mixture has not been tested to determine its skin corrosion potential, nor is sufficient data available
on similar mixtures, the corrosive properties of the substances in the mixture shall be considered to classify
and assign a packing group.
Applying the calculation method is only allowed if there are no synergistic effects that make the mixture
more corrosive than the sum of its substances. This restriction applies only if packing group II or III would be
assigned to the mixture.
2.8.4.3.2 When using the calculation method, all class 8 ingredients present at a concentration of ≥ 1% shall be taken
into account, or < 1% if these ingredients are still relevant for classifying the mixture to be corrosive to skin.
2.8.4.3.3 To determine whether a mixture containing corrosive substances shall be considered a corrosive mixture and
to assign a packing group, the calculation method in the flow chart in figure 2.8.4.3 shall be applied. For this
calculation method, generic concentration limits apply where 1% is used in the first step for the assessment
of the packing group I substances, and where 5% is used for the other steps respectively.
2.8.4.3.4 When a specific concentration limit (SCL) is assigned to a substance following its entry in the Dangerous
Goods List or in a special provision, this limit shall be used instead of the generic concentration limits (GCL).
2.8.4.3.5 For this purpose, the summation formula for each step of the calculation method shall be adapted. This means
that, where applicable, the generic concentration limit shall be substituted by the specific concentration
limit assigned to the substance(s) (SCLi), and the adapted formula is a weighted average of the different
concentration limits assigned to the different substances in the mixture:
PGx1 PGx2 PGx
_____ + _____ + … + ____i ≥ 1
GCL SCL2 SCLi
Where:
PGxi = concentration of substance 1, 2 … i in the mixture, assigned to packing group x (I, II or III)
GCL = generic concentration limit
SCLi = specific concentration limit assigned to substance i
The criterion for a packing group is fulfilled when the result of the calculation is ≥ 1. The generic concentration
limits to be used for the evaluation in each step of the calculation method are those found in figure 2.8.4.3.
Examples for the application of the above formula can be found in the note below.
Note: Examples for the application of the above formula
Example 1: A mixture contains one corrosive substance in a concentration of 5% assigned to packing group I
without a specific concentration limit:
5 = 1 → assign to class 8, packing group I.
Calculation for packing group I: ______
5 (GCL)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Example 2: A mixture contains three substances corrosive to skin; two of them (A and B) have specific
concentration limits; for the third one (C) the generic concentration limits applies. The rest of the mixture
needs not to be taken into consideration.
Substance X in
Specific Specific Specific
the mixture and
Concentration (conc) concentration limit concentration limit concentration limit
its packing group
in the mixture in % (SCL) for packing (SCL) for packing (SCL) for packing
assignment within
group I group II group III
class 8
A, assigned to 3 30% none none
packing group I
B, assigned to 2 20% 10% none
packing group I
C, assigned to 10 none none none
packing group III
3 (conc A) 2 (conc B)
Calculation for packing group I: __________
+ __________
= 0.2 < 1
30 (SCL PGI) 20 (SCL PGI)
The criterion for packing group I is not fulfilled.
3 (conc A) 2 (conc B)
Calculation for packing group II: __________
+ __________
= 0.8 < 1
5 (GCL PGII) 10 (SCL PGII)
The criterion for packing group II is not fulfilled.
3 (conc A) 2 (conc B) 10 (conc C)
Calculation for packing group III: __________
+ __________
+ __________
= 3 ≥ 1
5 (GCL PGIII) 5 (GCL PGIII) 5 (GCL PGIII)
The criterion for packing group III is fulfilled, the mixture shall be assigned to class 8, packing group III.
Mixture containing Class 8 substances
Yes
∑PGIi ≥ 1%
Yes No
∑PGIi ≥ 5% ∑PGIi + ∑PGIIi ≥ 5%
No
Yes No Yes
∑PGIi + ∑PGIIi +
∑PGIIIi ≥ 5%
Yes No
Class 8, Class 8, Class 8, Class 8
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III not applicable
Figure 2.8.4.3 – Calculation method
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.8.5 Substances not accepted for transport
Chemically unstable substances of class 8 shall not be accepted for transport unless the necessary
precautions have been taken to prevent the possibility of a dangerous decomposition or polymerization
under normal conditions of transport. For the precautions necessary to prevent polymerization, see special
provision 386 of chapter 3.3. To this end particular care shall be taken to ensure that receptacles and tanks
do not contain any substances liable to promote these reactions.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.9
Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles
(class 9) and environmentally hazardous substances
Note 1: For the purposes of this Code, the environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) criteria
contained in this chapter apply to the classification of marine pollutants (see 2.10).
Note 2: Although the environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) criteria apply to all hazard
classes, except for class 7 (see paragraphs 2.10.2.3, 2.10.2.5 and 2.10.3.2), the criteria have been included in
this chapter.
2.9.1 Definition
2.9.1.1 Class 9 substances and articles (miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles) are substances and
articles which, during transport, present a danger not covered by other classes.
2.9.2 Assignment to class 9
2.9.2.1 Class 9 includes, inter alia:
.1 substances and articles not covered by other classes which experience has shown, or may show, to be
of such a dangerous character that the provisions of part A of chapter VII of SOLAS, as amended, shall
apply.
.2 substances not subject to the provisions of part A in chapter VII of the aforementioned Convention, but
to which the provisions of Annex III of MARPOL, as amended, apply.
2.9.2.2 The substances and articles of class 9 are subdivided as follows:
Substances which, on inhalation as fine dust, may endanger health
2212 ASBESTOS, AMPHIBOLE (amosite, tremolite, actinolite, anthophyllite, crocidolite)
2590 ASBESTOS, CHRYSOTILE
Substances evolving flammable vapour
2211 POLYMERIC BEADS, EXPANDABLE, evolving flammable vapour
3314 PLASTICS MOULDING COMPOUND in dough, sheet or extruded rope form evolving flammable vapour
Lithium batteries
3090 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES (including lithium alloy batteries)
3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT (including lithium alloy batteries) or
3091 LITHIUM METAL BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including lithium alloy batteries)
3480 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES (including lithium ion polymer batteries)
3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT (including lithium ion polymer batteries) or
3481 LITHIUM ION BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including lithium ion polymer batteries)
3536 LITHIUM BATTERIES INSTALLED IN CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT lithium ion batteries or lithium metal
batteries
Note: See 2.9.4.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Sodium ion batteries
3551 SODIUM ION BATTERIES with organic electrolyte
3552 SODIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT, with organic electrolyte or
3552 SODIUM ION BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT, with organic electrolyte.
Capacitors
3499 CAPACITOR, ELECTRIC DOUBLE LAYER (with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3 Wh)
3508 CAPACITOR, ASYMMETRIC (with an energy storage capacity greater than 0.3 Wh)
Life-saving appliances
2990 LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES, SELF-INFLATING
3072 LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES, NOT SELF-INFLATING containing dangerous goods as equipment
3268 SAFETY DEVICES, electrically initiated
3559 FIRE SUPPRESSANT DISPERSING DEVICES
Substances and articles which, in the event of fire, may form dioxins
This group of substances includes:
2315 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID
3432 POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID
3151 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, LIQUID or
3151 HALOGENATED MONOMETHYLDIPHENYLMETHANES, LIQUID or
3151 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, LIQUID
3152 POLYHALOGENATED BIPHENYLS, SOLID or
3152 HALOGENATED MONOMETHYLDIPHENYLMETHANES, SOLID or
3152 POLYHALOGENATED TERPHENYLS, SOLID
Examples of articles are transformers, condensers and apparatus containing those substances.
Substances transported or offered for transport at elevated temperatures
3257 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE LIQUID, N.O.S., at or above 100°C and below its flashpoint (including
molten metal, molten salts, etc.)
3258 ELEVATED TEMPERATURE SOLID, N.O.S., at or above 240°C
Environmentally hazardous substances
3077 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S.
3082 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S.
These entries are used for substances and mixtures which are dangerous to the aquatic environment that do
not meet the classification criteria of any other class or another substance within class 9. These entries may
also be used for wastes not otherwise subject to the provisions of this Code but which are covered under
the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal
and for substances designated to be environmentally hazardous substances by the competent authority of
the country of origin, transit or destination which do not meet the criteria for an environmentally hazardous
substance according to the provisions of this Code or for any other hazard class. The criteria for substances
which are hazardous to the aquatic environment are given in section 2.9.3.
Genetically modified microorganisms (GMMOs) and genetically modified organisms (GMOs)
3245 GENETICALLY MODIFIED MICROORGANISMS or
3245 GENETICALLY MODIFIED ORGANISMS
GMMOs and GMOs which do not meet the definition of toxic substances (see 2.6.2) or infectious substances
(see 2.6.3) shall be assigned to UN 3245.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
GMMOs or GMOs are not subject to the provisions of this Code when authorized for use by the competent
authorities of the countries of origin, transit and destination.
Pharmaceutical products (such as vaccines) that are packed in a form ready to be administered, including
those in clinical trials, and that contain GMMOs or GMOs are not subject to this Code.
Genetically modified live animals shall be transported under terms and conditions of the competent authorities
of the countries of origin and destination.
Ammonium nitrate based fertilizers
2071 AMMONIUM NITRATE BASED FERTILIZER
Solid ammonium nitrate based fertilizers shall be classified in accordance with the procedure as set out in the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, section 39.
Other substances or articles presenting a danger during transport, but not meeting the definitions
of another class:
1841 ACETALDEHYDE AMMONIA
1845 CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID (DRY ICE)
1931 ZINC DITHIONITE (ZINC HYDROSULPHITE)
1941 DIBROMODIFLUOROMETHANE
1990 BENZALDEHYDE
2216 FISH MEAL (FISH SCRAP), STABILIZED
2807 MAGNETIZED MATERIAL
2969 CASTOR BEANS or
2969 CASTOR MEAL or
2969 CASTOR POMACE or
2969 CASTOR FLAKE
3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or
3166 VEHICLE, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED or
3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE GAS POWERED or
3166 VEHICLE, FUEL CELL, FLAMMABLE LIQUID POWERED
3171 BATTERY-POWERED VEHICLE or
3171 BATTERY-POWERED EQUIPMENT
3316 CHEMICAL KIT or
3316 FIRST AID KIT
3334 AVIATION REGULATED LIQUID, N.O.S.
3335 AVIATION REGULATED SOLID, N.O.S.
3359 FUMIGATED CARGO TRANSPORT UNIT
3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN ARTICLES or
3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN MACHINERY or
3363 DANGEROUS GOODS IN APPARATUS
3496 BATTERIES, NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE
3509 PACKAGINGS, DISCARDED, EMPTY, UNCLEANED
3530 ENGINE, INTERNAL COMBUSTION or
3530 MACHINERY, INTERNAL COMBUSTION
3548 ARTICLES CONTAINING MISCELLANEOUS DANGEROUS GOODS N.O.S.
3556 VEHICLE, LITHIUM ION BATTERY POWERED
3557 VEHICLE, LITHIUM METAL BATTERY POWERED
3558 VEHICLE, SODIUM ION BATTERY POWERED
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.9.3 Environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment)
2.9.3.1 General definitions
2.9.3.1.1 Environmentally hazardous substances include, inter alia, liquid or solid substances pollutant to the aquatic
environment and solutions and mixtures of such substances (such as preparations and wastes).
For the purposes of this section,
Substance means chemical elements and their compounds in the natural state or obtained by any production
process, including any additive necessary to preserve the stability of the product and any impurities deriving
from the process used, but excluding any solvent which may be separated without affecting the stability of
the substance or changing its composition.
2.9.3.1.2 The aquatic environment may be considered in terms of the aquatic organisms that live in the water, and the
aquatic ecosystem of which they are part. The basis, therefore, of the identification of hazard is the aquatic
toxicity of the substance or mixture, although this may be modified by further information on the degradation
and bioaccumulation behaviour.
2.9.3.1.3 While the following classification procedure is intended to apply to all substances and mixtures, it is recognized
that in some cases, e.g. metals or poorly soluble inorganic compounds, special guidance will be necessary.
2.9.3.1.4 The following definitions apply for acronyms or terms used in this section:
BCF bioconcentration factor;
BOD biochemical oxygen demand;
COD chemical oxygen demand;
GLP good laboratory practices;
ECx the concentration associated with x% response;
EC50 the effective concentration of substance that causes 50% of the maximum response;
ErC50 EC50 in terms of reduction of growth;
Kow octanol/water partition coefficient;
LC50 (50% lethal the concentration of a substance in water which causes the death of 50% (one half) in
concentration) a group of test animals;
L(E)C50 LC50 or EC50;
NOEC (no the test concentration immediately below the lowest tested concentration with
observed effect statistically significant adverse effect. The NOEC has no statistically significant
concentration) adverse effect compared to the control;
OECD Test Test guidelines published by the Organization for Economic Co‑operation and
Guidelines Development (OECD).
2.9.3.2 Definitions and data requirements
2.9.3.2.1 The basic elements for classification of environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment) are:
.1 acute aquatic toxicity;
.2 chronic aquatic toxicity;
.3 potential for or actual bioaccumulation; and
.4 degradation (biotic or abiotic) for organic chemicals;
2.9.3.2.2 While data from internationally harmonized test methods are preferred, in practice, data from national
methods may also be used where they are considered as equivalent. In general, it has been agreed that
freshwater and marine species toxicity data can be considered as equivalent data and are preferably to be
derived using OECD Test Guidelines or equivalent according to the principles of good laboratory practices
(GLP). Where such data are not available, classification shall be based on the best available data.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.9.3.2.3 Acute aquatic toxicity means the intrinsic property of a substance to be injurious to an organism in a short-
term aquatic exposure to that substance.
Acute (short-term) hazard, for classification purposes, means the hazard of a chemical caused by its acute
toxicity to an organism during short-term aquatic exposure to that chemical.
Acute aquatic toxicity shall normally be determined using a fish 96 h LC50 (OECD Test Guideline 203 or
equivalent), a crustacea species 48 h EC50 (OECD Test Guideline 202 or equivalent) and/or an algal species
72 or 96 h EC50 (OECD Test Guideline 201 or equivalent). These species are considered as surrogate for all
aquatic organisms and data on other species such as Lemna may also be considered if the test methodology
is suitable.
2.9.3.2.4 Chronic aquatic toxicity means the intrinsic property of a substance to cause adverse effects to aquatic
organisms during aquatic exposures which are determined in relation to the life cycle of the organism.
Long-term hazard, for classification purposes, means the hazard of a chemical caused by its chronic toxicity
following long-term exposure in the aquatic environment.
Chronic toxicity data are less available than acute data and the range of testing procedures less standardized.
Data generated according to the OECD Test Guidelines 210 (Fish Early Life Stage) or 211 (Daphnia Reproduction)
and 201 (Algal Growth Inhibition) may be accepted. Other validated and internationally accepted tests may
also be used. The NOECs or other equivalent ECx shall be used.
2.9.3.2.5 Bioaccumulation means net result of uptake, transformation and elimination of a substance in an organism
due to all routes of exposure (i.e. air, water, sediment/soil and food).
The potential for bioaccumulation shall normally be determined by using the octanol/water partition
coefficient, usually reported as a log Kow determined according to OECD Test Guidelines 107, 117 or 123.
While this represents a potential to bioaccumulate, an experimentally determined bioconcentration factor
(BCF) provides a better measure and shall be used in preference when available. A BCF shall be determined
according to OECD Test Guideline 305.
2.9.3.2.6 Degradation means the decomposition of organic molecules to smaller molecules and eventually to carbon
dioxide, water and salts.
Environmental degradation may be biotic or abiotic (e.g. hydrolysis) and the criteria used reflect this fact. Ready
biodegradation is most easily defined using the biodegradability tests (A to F) of OECD Test Guidelines 301.
A pass level in these tests may be considered as indicative of rapid degradation in most environments. These
are freshwater tests and thus the use of the results from OECD Test Guideline 306, which is more suitable
for marine environments, has also been included. Where such data are not available, a BOD(5 days)/COD
ratio ≥ 0.5 is considered as indicative of rapid degradation. Abiotic degradation such as hydrolysis, primary
degradation, both abiotic and biotic, degradation in non-aquatic media and proven rapid degradation in the
environment may all be considered in defining rapid degradability.
Substances are considered rapidly degradable in the environment if the following criteria are met:
.1 In 28-day ready biodegradation studies, the following levels of degradation are achieved:
.1 tests based on dissolved organic carbon: 70%;
.2 tests based on oxygen depletion or carbon dioxide generation: 60% of theoretical maxima.
These levels of biodegradation shall be achieved within 10 days of the start of degradation which point is
taken as the time when 10% of the substance has been degraded, unless the substance is identified as a
complex, multi-component substance with structurally similar constituents. In this case, and where there is
sufficient justification, the 10-day window condition may be waived and the pass level applied at 28 days;
.2 in those cases where only BOD and COD data are available, when the ratio of BOD5/COD is ≥ 0.5; or
.3 if other convincing scientific evidence is available to demonstrate that the substance or mixture can be
degraded (biotically and/or abiotically) in the aquatic environment to a level above 70% within a 28-day
period.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.9.3.3 Substance classification categories and criteria
2.9.3.3.1 Substances shall be classified as “environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment)”, if they
satisfy the criteria for Acute 1, Chronic 1 or Chronic 2, according to table 2.9.1. These criteria describe in detail
the classification categories. They are diagrammatically summarized in table 2.9.2.
Table 2.9.1 – Categories for substances hazardous to the aquatic environment (see note 1)
(a) Acute (short-term) aquatic hazard
Category: Acute 1 (see note 2)
96 hr LC50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L (see note 3)
(b) Long-term aquatic hazard (see also figure 2.9.1)
(i) Non-rapidly degradable substances (see note 4) for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data
available
Category: Chronic 1 (see note 2)
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/L
Category: Chronic 2
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L
(ii) Rapidly degradable substances for which there are adequate chronic toxicity data available
Category: Chronic 1 (see note 2)
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.01 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.01 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.01 mg/L
Category: Chronic 2
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for fish) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for crustacea) ≤ 0.1 mg/L and/or
Chronic NOEC or ECx (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 0.1 mg/L
(iii) Substances for which adequate chronic toxicity data are not available
Category: Chronic 1 (see note 2)
96 hr LC50 (for fish) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) ≤ 1 mg/L and/or
72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) ≤ 1 mg/L (see note 3)
and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500
(or, if absent, the log Kow ≥ 4) (see notes 4 and 5)
Category: Chronic 2
96 hr LC50 (for fish) > 1 but ≤ 10 mg/L and/or
48 hr EC50 (for crustacea) > 1 but ≤ 10 mg/L and/or
72 or 96 hr ErC50 (for algae or other aquatic plants) > 1 but ≤ 10 mg/L and/or
(see note 3)
and the substance is not rapidly degradable and/or the experimentally determined BCF is ≥ 500
(or, if absent, the log Kow ≥ 4) (see notes 4 and 5)
Note 1: The organisms fish, crustacea and algae are tested as surrogate species covering a range of
trophic levels and taxa, and the test methods are highly standardized. Data on other organisms may also be
considered, however, provided they represent equivalent species and test endpoints.
Note 2: When classifying substances as Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 it is necessary at the same time to indicate
an appropriate M factor (see 2.9.3.4.6.4) to apply the summation method.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Note 3: Where the algal toxicity ErC50 (= EC50 (growth rate)) falls more than 100 times below the next most
sensitive species and results in a classification based solely on this effect, consideration shall be given to
whether this toxicity is representative of the toxicity to aquatic plants. Where it can be shown that this is not
the case, professional judgment shall be used in deciding if classification shall be applied. Classification
shall be based on the ErC50. In circumstances where the basis of the EC50 is not specified and no ErC50 is
recorded, classification shall be based on the lowest EC50 available.
Note 4: Lack of rapid degradability is based on either a lack of ready biodegradability or other evidence of lack
of rapid degradation. When no useful data on degradability are available, either experimentally determined or
estimated data, the substance shall be regarded as not rapidly degradable.
Note 5: Potential to bioaccumulate, based on an experimentally derived BCF ≥ 500 or, if absent, a log Kow ≥ 4
provided log Kow is an appropriate descriptor for the bioaccumulation potential of the substance. Measured
log Kow values take precedence over estimated values and measured BCF values take precedence over
log Kow values.
Are there
adequate chronic Classify according to the criteria
Yes given in table 2.9.1(b)(i) or 2.9.1(b)(ii)
toxicity data available for all
three trophic levels? depending on information on rapid
See note 2 to degradation
table 2.9.1
No
Assess both:
(a) according to the criteria given
in table 2.9.1(b)(i) or 2.9.1(b)(ii)
Are there (depending on information on
adequate chronic Yes rapid degradation), and
toxicity data available for one (b) (if for the other trophic level(s)
or two trophic adequate acute toxicity data are
levels? available) according to the criteria
given in table 2.9.1(b)(iii),
and classify according to the most
stringent outcome
No
Are there Yes Classify according to the criteria given
adequate acute toxicity
in table 2.9.1(b)(iii)
data available?
Figure 2.9.1 – Categories for substances long-term hazardous to the aquatic environment
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.9.3.3.2 The classification scheme in table 2.9.2 below summarizes the classification criteria for substances.
Table 2.9.2 – Classification scheme for substances hazardous to the aquatic environment
Classification categories
Acute hazard Long-term hazard
(see note 1) (see note 2)
Adequate chronic toxicity data available Adequate chronic toxicity
Non-rapidly degradable Rapidly degradable data not available
substances substances (see note 1)
(see note 3) (see note 3)
Category: Acute 1 Category: Chronic 1 Category: Chronic 1 Category: Chronic 1
L(E)C50 ≤ 1.00 NOEC or ECx ≤ 0.1 NOEC or ECx ≤ 0.01 L(E)C50 ≤ 1.00 and
lack of rapid degradability
and/or BCF ≥ 500 or, if
absent, log Kow ≥ 4
Category: Chronic 2 Category: Chronic 2 Category: Chronic 2
0.1 < NOEC or ECx ≤ 1 0.01 < NOEC or ECx ≤ 0.1 1.00 < L(E)C50 ≤ 10.0 and
lack of rapid degradability
and/or BCF ≥ 500 or, if
absent, log Kow ≥ 4
Note 1: Acute toxicity band based on L(E)C50 values in mg/L for fish, crustacea and/or algae or other aquatic
plants (or Quantitative Structure Activity Relationships (QSAR) estimation if no experimental data).
Note 2: Substances are classified in the various chronic categories unless there are adequate chronic toxicity
data available for all three trophic levels above the water solubility or above 1 mg/L. (“Adequate” means that
the data sufficiently cover the endpoint of concern. Generally this would mean measured test data, but in
order to avoid unnecessary testing it can on a case by case basis also be estimated data, e.g. (Q)SAR, or for
obvious cases expert judgment).
Note 3: Chronic toxicity band based on NOEC or equivalent ECx values in mg/L for fish or crustacea or other
recognized measures for chronic toxicity.
2.9.3.4 Mixtures classification categories and criteria
2.9.3.4.1 The classification system for mixtures covers the classification categories which are used for substances,
meaning categories Acute 1 and Chronic 1 and 2. In order to make use of all available data for purposes of
classifying the aquatic environmental hazards of the mixture, the following assumption is made and is applied
where appropriate:
The “relevant ingredients” of a mixture are those which are present in a concentration equal to or greater
than 0.1% (by mass) for ingredients classified as Acute and/or Chronic 1 and equal to or greater than 1% for
other ingredients, unless there is a presumption (e.g. in the case of highly toxic ingredients) that an ingredient
present at less than 0.1% can still be relevant for classifying the mixture for aquatic environmental hazards.
2.9.3.4.2 The approach for classification of aquatic environmental hazards is tiered, and is dependent upon the type of
information available for the mixture itself and for its ingredients. Elements of the tiered approach include:
.1 classification based on tested mixtures;
.2 classification based on bridging principles;
.3 the use of “summation of classified ingredients” and/or an “additivity formula”.
Figure 2.9.2 outlines the process to be followed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Aquatic toxicity test data available on the mixture as a whole
CLASSIFY
No Yes
For acute/long-term
hazard (2.9.3.4.3)
Sufficient data
available on CLASSIFY
similar mixtures Yes Apply bridging principles
(2.9.3.4.4) For acute/long-term
to estimate hazard
hazards
No Apply Summation Method
(2.9.3.4.6.1 to 2.9.3.4.6.4) using:
• Percentage of all ingredients
classified as “Chronic”
Either aquatic
toxicity or • Percentage of ingredients CLASSIFY
classification data Yes classified as “Acute” For acute/long-term
available for all hazard
• Percentage of ingredients
relevant ingredients
with acute toxicity data:
apply additivity formula
(2.9.3.4.5.2) and convert
No the derived L(E)C50 or
EqNOECm to the appropriate
“Acute” or “Chronic” category
Use available hazard Yes Apply Summation Method and CLASSIFY
data of known additivity formula (2.9.3.4.6.1 to For acute/long-term
ingredients 2.9.3.4.6.4) and apply 2.9.3.4.6.5 hazard
Figure2.9–Tiered approach to classification of mixtures for acute
and long-term aquatic environmental hazards
2.9.3.4.3 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are available for the complete mixture
2.9.3.4.3.1 When the mixture as a whole has been tested to determine its aquatic toxicity, this information shall be used
for classifying the mixture according to the criteria that have been agreed for substances. The classification is
normally based on the data for fish, crustacea and algae/plants (see 2.9.3.2.3 and 2.9.3.2.4). When adequate
acute or chronic data for the mixture as a whole are lacking, “bridging principles” or “summation method”
shall be applied (see 2.9.3.4.4 to 2.9.3.4.6).
2.9.3.4.3.2 The long-term hazard classification of mixtures requires additional information on degradability and in certain
cases bioaccumulation. There are no degradability and bioaccumulation data for mixtures as a whole.
Degradability and bioaccumulation tests for mixtures are not used as they are usually difficult to interpret,
and such tests may be meaningful only for single substances.
2.9.3.4.3.3 Classification for category Acute 1
(a) When there are adequate acute toxicity test data (LC50 or EC50) available for the mixture as a whole
showing L(E)C50 ≤ 1 mg/L:
Classify the mixture as Acute 1 in accordance with table 2.9.1 (a);
(b) When there are acute toxicity test data (LC50(s) or EC50(s) available for the mixture as a whole showing
L(E)C50(s) > 1 mg/L, or above the water solubility:
No need to classify for acute hazard under this Code.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.9.3.4.3.4 Classification for categories Chronic 1 and 2
(a) When there are adequate chronic toxicity data (ECx or NOEC) available for the mixture as a whole showing
ECx or NOEC of the tested mixture ≤ 1 mg/L:
(i) classify the mixture as Chronic 1 or 2 in accordance with table 2.9.1 (b)(ii) (rapidly degradable) if the
available information allows the conclusion that all relevant ingredients of the mixture are rapidly
degradable;
Note: In this situation, when ECx or NOEC of the tested mixture > 0.1 mg/L, there is no need to
classify for long-term hazard under these provisions.
(ii) classify the mixture as Chronic 1 or 2 in all other cases in accordance with table 2.9.1 (b)(i) (non-rapidly
degradable);
(b) When there are adequate chronic toxicity data (ECx or NOEC) available for the mixture as a whole showing
ECx(s) or NOEC(s) of the tested mixture > 1 mg/L or above the water solubility:
No need to classify for long-term hazard under this Code.
2.9.3.4.4 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are not available
for the complete mixture: bridging principles
2.9.3.4.4.1 Where the mixture itself has not been tested to determine its aquatic environmental hazard, but there are
sufficient data on the individual ingredients and similar tested mixtures to adequately characterize the hazards
of the mixture, these data shall be used in accordance with the following agreed bridging rules. This ensures
that the classification process uses the available data to the greatest extent possible in characterizing the
hazards of the mixture without the necessity for additional testing in animals.
2.9.3.4.4.2 Dilution
2.9.3.4.4.2.1 Where a new mixture is formed by diluting a tested mixture or a substance with a diluent which has an
equivalent or lower aquatic hazard classification than the least toxic original ingredient and which is not
expected to affect the aquatic hazards of other ingredients, then the resulting mixture shall be classified as
equivalent to the original tested mixture or substance. Alternatively, the method explained in 2.9.3.4.5 may be
applied.
2.9.3.4.4.2.2 If a mixture is formed by diluting another classified mixture or a substance with water or other totally non-toxic
material, the toxicity of the mixture shall be calculated from the original mixture or substance.
2.9.3.4.4.3 Batching
2.9.3.4.4.3.1 The aquatic hazard classification of a tested production batch of a mixture shall be assumed to be substantially
equivalent to that of another untested production batch of the same commercial product when produced by
or under the control of the same manufacturer, unless there is reason to believe there is significant variation
such that the aquatic hazard classification of the untested batch has changed. If the latter occurs, new
classification is necessary.
2.9.3.4.4.4 Concentration of mixtures which are classified with the most severe classification categories
(Chronic 1 and Acute 1)
2.9.3.4.4.4.1 If a tested mixture is classified as Chronic 1 and/or Acute 1, and the ingredients of the mixture which are
classified as Chronic 1 and/or Acute 1 are further concentrated, the more concentrated untested mixture shall
be classified with the same classification category as the original tested mixture without additional testing.
2.9.3.4.4.5 Interpolation within one toxicity category
2.9.3.4.4.5.1 For three mixtures (A, B and C) with identical ingredients, where mixtures A and B have been tested
and are in the same toxicity category, and where untested mixture C has the same toxicologically active
ingredients as mixtures A and B but has concentrations of toxicologically active ingredients intermediate to
the concentrations in mixtures A and B, then mixture C is assumed to be in the same category as A and B.
2.9.3.4.4.6 Substantially similar mixtures
2.9.3.4.4.6.1 Given the following:
(a) Two mixtures:
(i) A+B
(ii) C+B
(b) The concentration of ingredient B is essentially the same in both mixtures;
(c) The concentration of ingredient A in mixture (i) equals that of ingredient C in mixture (ii);
(d) Data on aquatic hazards for A and C are available and are substantially equivalent, i.e. they are in the
same hazard category and are not expected to affect the aquatic toxicity of B.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
If mixture (i) or (ii) is already classified based on test data, then the other mixture can be assigned the same
hazard category.
2.9.3.4.5 Classification of mixtures when toxicity data are available for all ingredients
or only for some ingredients of the mixture
2.9.3.4.5.1 The classification of a mixture shall be based on summation of the concentrations of its classified ingredients.
The percentage of ingredients classified as Acute or Chronic will feed straight into the summation method.
Details of the summation method are described in 2.9.3.4.6.1 to 2.9.3.4.6.4.1.
2.9.3.4.5.2 Mixtures may be made of a combination of both ingredients that are classified (as Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1, 2)
and those for which adequate toxicity test data are available. When adequate toxicity data are available for
more than one ingredient in the mixture, the combined toxicity of those ingredients shall be calculated using
the following additivity formulas (a) or (b), depending on the nature of the toxicity data:
(a) Based on acute aquatic toxicity:
∑
Ci
∑
Ci
_______ = ______
L(E)C50m n
L(E)C 50i
where: Ci = concentration of ingredient i (mass percentage);
L(E)C50i = LC50 or EC50 for ingredient i (mg/L);
n = number of ingredients, and i is running from 1 to n; and
L(E)C50m = L(E)C50 of the part of the mixture with test data
The calculated toxicity shall be used to assign that portion of the mixture an acute hazard category which is
then subsequently used in applying the summation method;
(b) Based on chronic aquatic toxicity:
∑C i+ ∑C j
Cj
∑ ∑
___________
Ci
=
EqNOECm ______
NOEC + __________
× NOEC
0.1
n i n j
where: Ci =
concentration of ingredient i (mass percentage) covering the rapidly degradable
ingredients;
Cj = concentration of ingredient j (mass percentage) covering the non-rapidly degradable
ingredients;
NOECi = NOEC (or other recognized measures for chronic toxicity) for ingredient i covering the
rapidly degradable ingredients, in mg/L;
NOECj = NOEC (or other recognized measures for chronic toxicity) for ingredient j covering the
non-rapidly degradable ingredients, in mg/L;
n = number of ingredients, and i and j are running from 1 to n;
EqNOECm = equivalent NOEC of the part of the mixture with test data;
The equivalent toxicity thus reflects the fact that non-rapidly degrading substances are classified
one hazard category level more “severe” than rapidly degrading substances.
The calculated equivalent toxicity shall be used to assign that portion of the mixture a long-term
hazard category, in accordance with the criteria for rapidly degradable substances (table 2.9.1 (b)(ii)),
which is then subsequently used in applying the summation method.
2.9.3.4.5.3 When applying the additivity formula for part of the mixture, it is preferable to calculate the toxicity of this
part of the mixture using for each ingredient toxicity values that relate to the same taxonomic group (i.e. fish,
crustacea or algae) and then to use the highest toxicity (lowest value) obtained (i.e. use the most sensitive of
the three groups). However, when toxicity data for each ingredient are not available in the same taxonomic
group, the toxicity value of each ingredient shall be selected in the same manner that toxicity values are
selected for the classification of substances, i.e. the higher toxicity (from the most sensitive test organism)
is used. The calculated acute and chronic toxicity shall then be used to classify this part of the mixture as
Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 or 2 using the same criteria described for substances.
2.9.3.4.5.4 If a mixture is classified in more than one way, the method yielding the more conservative result shall be used.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
2.9.3.4.6 Summation method
2.9.3.4.6.1 Classification procedure
2.9.3.4.6.1.1 In general a more severe classification for mixtures overrides a less severe classification, e.g. a classification
with Chronic 1 overrides a classification with Chronic 2. As a consequence the classification procedure is
already completed if the results of the classification is Chronic 1. A more severe classification than Chronic 1
is not possible; therefore, it is not necessary to pursue the classification procedure further.
2.9.3.4.6.2 Classification for category Acute 1
2.9.3.4.6.2.1 First, all ingredients classified as Acute 1 are considered. If the sum of the concentrations (in %) of these
ingredients is greater than or equal to 25% the whole mixture shall be classified as Acute 1. If the result of the
calculation is a classification of the mixture as Acute 1, the classification process is completed.
2.9.3.4.6.2.2 The classification of mixtures for acute hazards based on this summation of the concentrations of classified
ingredients is summarized in table 2.9.3 below.
Table 2.9.3 – Classification of a mixture for acute hazards based on summation
of the concentrations of classified ingredients
Sum of the concentrations (in %) of Mixture is classified as:
ingredients classified as:
Acute 1 × M ≥ 25% Acute 1
For explanation of the M factor, see 2.9.3.4.6.4.
2.9.3.4.6.3 Classification for categories Chronic 1 and 2
2.9.3.4.6.3.1 First, all ingredients classified as Chronic 1 are considered. If the sum of the concentrations (in %) of these
ingredients is greater than or equal to 25% the mixture shall be classified as Chronic 1. If the result of the
calculation is a classification of the mixture as Chronic 1 the classification procedure is completed.
2.9.3.4.6.3.2 In cases where the mixture is not classified as Chronic 1, classification of the mixture as Chronic 2 is
considered. A mixture shall be classified as Chronic 2 if 10 times the sum of the concentrations (in %) of all
ingredients classified as Chronic 1 plus the sum of the concentrations (in %) of all ingredients classified as
Chronic 2 is greater than or equal to 25%. If the result of the calculation is classification of the mixture as
Chronic 2, the classification process is completed.
2.9.3.4.6.3.3 The classification of mixtures for long-term hazards based on this summation of the concentrations of
classified ingredients is summarized in table 2.9.4 below.
Table 2.9.4 – Classification of a mixture for long-term hazards based on summation
of the concentrations of classified ingredients
Sum of the concentrations (in %) of Mixture classified as:
ingredients classified as:
Chronic 1 × M ≥ 25% Chronic 1
(M × 10 × Chronic 1) + Chronic 2 ≥ 25% Chronic 2
For explanation of the M factor, see 2.9.3.4.6.4.
2.9.3.4.6.4 Mixtures with highly toxic ingredients
2.9.3.4.6.4.1 Acute 1 or Chronic 1 ingredients with acute toxicities well below 1 mg/L and/or chronic toxicities well below
0.1 mg/L (if non-rapidly degradable) and 0.01 mg/L (if rapidly degradable) may influence the toxicity of
the mixture and are given increased weight in applying the summation method. When a mixture contains
ingredients classified as Acute 1 or Chronic 1, the tiered approach described in 2.9.3.4.6.2 and 2.9.3.4.6.3
shall be applied using a weighted sum by multiplying the concentrations of Acute 1 and Chronic 1 ingredients
by a factor, instead of merely adding up the percentages. This means that the concentration of Acute 1 in the
left column of table 2.9.3 and the concentration of Chronic 1 in the left column of table 2.9.4 are multiplied by
the appropriate multiplying factor. The multiplying factors to be applied to these ingredients are defined using
the toxicity value, as summarized in table 2.9.5 below. Therefore, in order to classify a mixture containing
Acute 1 and/or Chronic 1 ingredients, the classifier needs to be informed of the value of the M factor in order
to apply the summation method. Alternatively, the additivity formula (2.9.3.4.5.2) may be used when toxicity
data are available for all highly toxic ingredients in the mixture and there is convincing evidence that all other
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
ingredients, including those for which specific acute and/or chronic toxicity data are not available, are of low
or no toxicity and do not significantly contribute to the environmental hazard of the mixture.
Table 2.9.5 – Multiplying factors for highly toxic ingredients of mixtures
Acute toxicity M factor Chronic toxicity M factor
*
L(E)C50 value NOEC value NRD RD†
ingredients ingredients
0.1 < L(E)C50 ≤ 1 1 0.01 < NOEC ≤ 0.1 1 –
0.01 < L(E)C50 ≤ 0.1 10 0.001 < NOEC ≤ 0.01 10 1
0.001 < L(E)C50 ≤ 0.01 100 0.0001 < NOEC ≤ 0.001 100 10
0.0001 < L(E)C50 ≤ 0.001 1,000 0.00001 < NOEC ≤ 1,000 100
0.0001
0.00001 < L(E)C50 ≤ 0.0001 10,000 0.000001 < NOEC ≤ 10,000 1,000
0.00001
(continue in factor 10 intervals) (continue in factor 10 intervals)
Non-rapidly degradable.
Rapidly degradable.
2.9.3.4.6.5 Classification of mixtures with ingredients without any useable information
2.9.3.4.6.5.1 In the event that no useable information on acute and/or chronic aquatic toxicity is available for one or more
relevant ingredients, it is concluded that the mixture cannot be attributed (a) definitive hazard category(ies).
In this situation the mixture shall be classified based on the known ingredients only.
2.9.4 Lithium batteries
Cells and batteries, cells and batteries contained in equipment, or cells and batteries packed with equipment,
containing lithium in any form shall be assigned to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 or 3481 as appropriate. They
may be transported under these entries if they meet the following provisions:
.1 Each cell or battery is of the type proved to meet the requirements of each test of the Manual of Tests
and Criteria, part III, subsection 38.3.
Cells and batteries manufactured according to a type meeting the requirements of subsection 38.3 of
the Manual of Tests and Criteria, revision 3, amendment 1 or any subsequent revision and amendment
applicable at the date of the type testing may continue to be transported, unless otherwise provided in
this Code.
Cell and battery types only meeting the requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, revision 3,
are no longer valid. However, cells and batteries manufactured in conformity with such types before
1 July 2003 may continue to be transported if all other applicable requirements are fulfilled.
Note: Batteries shall be of a type proved to meet the testing requirements of the Manual of Tests and
Criteria, part III, subsection 38.3, irrespective of whether the cells of which they are composed are of a
tested type.
.2 Each cell and battery incorporates a safety venting device or is designed to preclude a violent rupture
under conditions normally incident to transport.
.3 Each cell and battery is equipped with an effective means of preventing external short circuits.
.4 Each battery containing cells or series of cells connected in parallel is equipped with effective means as
necessary to prevent dangerous reverse current flow (e.g. diodes, fuses, etc.).
.5 Cells and batteries shall be manufactured under a quality management programme that includes:
.1 a description of the organizational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design
and product quality;
.2 the relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation
instructions that will be used;
.3 process controls that should include relevant activities to prevent and detect internal short circuit
failure during manufacture of cells;
.4 quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates. Test data
shall be kept and made available to the competent authority upon request;
.5 management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality management programme;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.6 a process for control of documents and their revision;
.7 a means for control of cells or batteries that are not conforming to the type tested as mentioned in
2.9.4.1 above;
.8 training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel; and
.9 procedures to ensure that there is no damage to the final product.
Note: In-house quality management programmes may be accepted. Third party certification is not
required, but the procedures listed in .1 to .9 above shall be properly recorded and traceable. A copy of
the quality management programme shall be made available to the competent authority upon request.
.6 Lithium batteries, containing both primary lithium metal cells and rechargeable lithium ion cells, that are
not designed to be externally charged (see special provision 387 of chapter 3.3) shall meet the following
conditions:
.1 the rechargeable lithium ion cells can only be charged from the primary lithium metal cells;
.2 overcharge of the rechargeable lithium ion cells is precluded by design;
.3 the battery has been tested as a lithium primary battery; and
.4 component cells of the battery shall be of a type proved to meet the respective testing requirements
of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 38.3.
.7 Except for button cells installed in equipment (including circuit boards), manufacturers and subsequent
distributors of cells or batteries manufactured after 30 June 2003 shall make available the test summary
as specified in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 38.3, paragraph 38.3.5.
Note: The term “make available” means that manufacturers and subsequent distributors ensure that
the test summary for lithium cells or batteries or equipment with installed lithium cells or batteries is
accessible so that the consignor or other persons in the supply chain can confirm compliance.
2.9.5 Sodium ion batteries
Cells and batteries, cells and batteries contained in equipment, or cells and batteries packed with equipment
containing sodium ion, which are a rechargeable electrochemical system where the positive and negative
electrode are both intercalation or insertion compounds, constructed with no metallic sodium (or sodium
alloy) in either electrode and with an organic non aqueous compound as electrolyte, shall be assigned to
UN Nos. 3551 or 3552, as appropriate.
Note: Intercalated sodium exists in an ionic or quasi-atomic form in the lattice of the electrode material.
They may be transported under these entries if they meet the following provisions:
.1 Each cell or battery is of the type proved to meet the requirements of applicable tests of the Manual of
Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 38.3.
.2 Each cell and battery incorporates a safety venting device or is designed to preclude a violent rupture
under conditions normally encountered during transport.
.3 Each cell and battery is equipped with an effective means of preventing external short circuits.
.4 Each battery containing cells or a series of cells connected in parallel is equipped with effective means
as necessary to prevent dangerous reverse current flow (e.g. diodes, fuses, etc.).
.5 Cells and batteries shall be manufactured under a quality management program as prescribed under
2.9.4.5.1 to 2.9.4.5.9.
.6 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of cells or batteries shall make available the test summary as
specified in the Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3, paragraph 38.3.5.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 2.10
Marine pollutants
2.10.1 Definition
Marine pollutants means substances which are subject to the provisions of Annex III of MARPOL, as amended.
2.10.2 General provisions
2.10.2.1 Marine pollutants shall be transported under the provisions of Annex III of MARPOL, as amended.
2.10.2.2 The Index indicates by the symbol P in the column headed MP those substances, materials and articles that
are identified as marine pollutants.
2.10.2.3 Marine pollutants shall be transported under the appropriate entry according to their properties if they fall
within the criteria of any of the classes 1 to 8. If they do not fall within the criteria of any of these classes,
they shall be transported under the entry: ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, SOLID, N.O.S.,
UN 3077 or ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE, LIQUID, N.O.S., UN 3082, as appropriate,
unless there is a specific entry in class 9.
2.10.2.4 Column 4 of the Dangerous Goods List also provides information on marine pollutants using the symbol P
for single entries. The absence of the symbol P or the presence of a “–” in that column does not preclude the
application of 2.10.3.
2.10.2.5 When a substance, material or article possesses properties that meet the criteria of a marine pollutant but is
not identified in this Code, such substance, material or article shall be transported as a marine pollutant in
accordance with the Code.
2.10.2.6 With the approval of the competent authority (see 7.9.2), substances, materials or articles that are identified
as marine pollutants in this Code but which no longer meet the criteria as a marine pollutant need not be
transported in accordance with the provisions of this Code applicable to marine pollutants.
2.10.2.7 Marine pollutants also meeting the criteria for inclusion in a hazard class from 1 to 9 (except class 7), and
packaged in single or combination packagings containing a net quantity per single or inner packaging of 5 L
or less for liquids or having a net mass per single or inner packaging of 5 kg or less for solids, are not subject
to the provisions of 5.2.1.6, 5.3.2.3, 5.4.1.4.3.6 and 7.1.4.2 of this Code. These provisions do not apply to
substances transported under UN 3077 or UN 3082 (see special provision 375).
2.10.3 Classification
2.10.3.1 Marine pollutants shall be classified in accordance with chapter 2.9.3.
2.10.3.2 The classification criteria of 2.9.3 are not applicable to substances or materials of class 7.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Part 3 is in Appendix 2
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
PART 4
PACKING AND TANK PROVISIONS
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 4.1
Use of packagings, including intermediate bulk
containers (IBCs) and large packagings
4.1.0 Definitions
Effectively closed: liquid-tight closure.
Hermetically sealed: vapour-tight closure.
Securely closed: so closed that dry contents cannot escape during normal handling; the minimum provisions
for any closure.
4.1.1 General provisions for the packing of dangerous goods in packagings,
including IBCs and large packagings
Note: For the packing of goods of classes 2, 6.2 and 7, the general provisions of this section only apply as
indicated in 4.1.8.2 (class 6.2, UN 2814 and UN 2900), 4.1.9.1.5 (class 7) and in the applicable packing instructions
of 4.1.4 (P201 and LP02 for class 2 and P620, P621, P622, IBC620, LP621 and LP622 for class 6.2).
4.1.1.1 Dangerous goods shall be packed in good quality packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which
shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during transport,
including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and warehouses
as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical handling. Packagings,
including IBCs and large packagings, shall be constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents
when prepared for transport which may be caused under normal conditions of transport, by vibration, or by
changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from altitude, for example). Packagings, including
IBCs and large packagings, shall be closed in accordance with the information provided by the manufacturer.
No dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of packages, IBCs and large packagings during transport.
These provisions apply, as appropriate, to new, reused, reconditioned or remanufactured packagings, and to
new, reused, repaired or remanufactured IBCs, and to new, reused or remanufactured large packagings.
4.1.1.2 Parts of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods:
.1 shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; and
.2 shall not cause a dangerous effect, such as catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods;
.3 shall not allow permeation of the dangerous goods that could constitute a danger under normal conditions
of transport.
Where necessary, they shall be provided with a suitable inner coating or treatment.
4.1.1.3 Unless otherwise provided elsewhere in this Code, each packaging, including IBCs and large packagings,
except inner packagings, shall conform to a design type successfully tested in accordance with the
provisions of 6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable. However, IBCs manufactured before 1 January 2011
and conforming to a design type which has not passed the vibration test of 6.5.6.13 or which was not required
to meet the criteria of 6.5.6.9.5.4 at the time it was subjected to the drop test may still be used.
4.1.1.3.1 Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, may conform to one or more than one successfully tested
design type and may bear more than one mark.
4.1.1.4 When filling packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, with liquids, sufficient ullage (outage) shall
be left to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging occurs as a result of an
expansion of the liquid caused by temperatures likely to occur during transport. Unless specific provisions
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
are prescribed, liquids shall not completely fill a packaging at a temperature of 55°C. However, sufficient
ullage shall be left in an IBC to ensure that at the mean bulk temperature of 50°C it is not filled to more than
98% of its water capacity.
4.1.1.4.1 For air transport, packagings intended to contain liquids shall also be capable of withstanding a pressure
differential without leakage as specified in the international regulations for air transport.
4.1.1.5 Inner packagings shall be packed in an outer packaging in such a way that, under normal conditions of
transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the outer packaging. Inner packagings
containing liquids shall be packaged with their closures upward and placed within outer packagings consistent
with the orientation marks prescribed in 5.2.1.7.1 of this Code. Inner packagings that are liable to break or be
punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics materials, etc.,
shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents shall not
substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging.
4.1.1.5.1 Where an outer packaging of a combination packaging or a large packaging has been successfully tested with
different types of inner packagings, a variety of such different inner packagings may also be assembled in this
outer packaging or large packagings. In addition, provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained,
the following variations in inner packagings are allowed without further testing of the package:
.1 Inner packagings of equivalent or smaller size may be used provided:
– the inner packagings are of similar design to the tested inner packagings (such as shape – round,
rectangular, etc.);
– the material of construction of inner packagings (glass, plastics, metal, etc.) offers resistance to
impact and stacking forces equal to or greater than that of the originally tested inner packaging;
– the inner packagings have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of similar design (such
as screw cap, friction lid, etc.);
– sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up void spaces and to prevent significant
movement of the inner packagings;
– inner packagings are oriented within the outer packaging in the same manner as in the tested
package; and
.2 A lesser number of the tested inner packagings or of the alternative types of inner packagings identified
in .1 above may be used, provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent
significant movement of the inner packagings.
4.1.1.5.2 Use of supplementary packagings within an outer packaging (e.g. an intermediate packaging or a receptacle
inside a required inner packaging) additional to what is required by the packing instructions is authorized
provided all relevant requirements are met, including those of 4.1.1.3, and, if appropriate, suitable cushioning
is used to prevent movement within the packaging.
4.1.1.5.3 Cushioning and absorbent material shall be inert and suited to the nature of the contents.
4.1.1.5.4 The nature and the thickness of the outer packagings shall be such that friction during transport does not
generate any heating likely to alter dangerously the chemical stability of the contents.
4.1.1.6 Dangerous goods shall not be packed together in the same outer packaging, or in large packagings, with
dangerous or other goods if they react dangerously with each other and cause:
.1 combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat;
.2 evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxiant gases;
.3 the formation of corrosive substances; or
.4 the formation of unstable substances.
4.1.1.7 The closures of packagings containing wetted or diluted substances shall be such that the percentage of
liquid (water, solvent or phlegmatizer) does not fall below the prescribed limits during transport.
4.1.1.7.1 Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series on an IBC, that nearest to the substance being
transported shall be closed first.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.1.7.2 Unless otherwise specified in the Dangerous Goods List, packages containing substances which:
.1 evolve flammable gases or vapour;
.2 may become explosive if allowed to dry;
.3 evolve toxic gases or vapour;
.4 evolve corrosive gases or vapour; or
.5 may react dangerously with the atmosphere
should be hermetically sealed.
4.1.1.8 Where pressure may develop in a package by the emission of gas from the contents (as a result of temperature
increase or other causes), the packaging or IBC may be fitted with a vent provided that the gas emitted will
not cause danger on account of its toxicity, its flammability, the quantity released, etc.
A venting device shall be fitted if dangerous overpressure may develop due to normal decomposition of
substances. The vent shall be so designed that, when the packaging or IBC is in the attitude in which it is
intended to be transported, leakages of liquid and the penetration of foreign substances are prevented under
normal conditions of transport.
4.1.1.8.1 Liquids may only be filled into inner packagings which have an appropriate resistance to internal pressure that
may be developed under normal conditions of transport.
4.1.1.9 New, remanufactured or re-used packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, or reconditioned
packagings and repaired or routinely maintained IBCs shall be capable of passing the tests prescribed in
6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable. Before being filled and handed over for transport, every packaging,
including IBCs and large packagings, shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination
or other damage and every IBC shall be inspected with regard to the proper functioning of any service
equipment. Any packaging which shows signs of reduced strength as compared with the approved design
type shall no longer be used or shall be so reconditioned that it is able to withstand the design type tests. Any
IBC which shows signs of reduced strength as compared with the tested design type shall no longer be used
or shall be so repaired or routinely maintained that it is able to withstand the design type tests.
4.1.1.10 Liquids shall be filled only into packagings, including IBCs, which have an appropriate resistance to the
internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of transport. As the vapour pressure of
low-boiling-point liquids is usually high, the strength of receptacles for these liquids shall be sufficient to
withstand, with an ample factor of safety, the internal pressure likely to be generated. Packagings and IBCs
marked with the hydraulic test pressure prescribed in 6.1.3.1(d) and 6.5.2.2.1, respectively, shall be filled only
with a liquid having a vapour pressure:
.1 such that the total gauge pressure in the packaging or IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance
plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55°C, determined on the basis of a
maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of 15°C, will not exceed two
thirds of the marked test pressure; or
.2 at 50°C, less than four sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa; or
.3 at 55°C, less than two thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa.
IBCs intended for the transport of liquids shall not be used to carry liquids having a vapour pressure of more
than 110 kPa (1.1 bar) at 50°C or 130 kPa (1.3 bar) at 55°C.
Examples of required marked test pressures for packagings, including IBCs,
calculated as in 4.1.1.10.3
Required Minimum
minimum test pressure
(Vp55×1.5)
Packing Vp55 Vp55×1.5 test pressure (gauge) to be
UN No. Name Class minus 100
group (kPa) (kPa) (gauge) under marked on
(kPa)
6.1.5.5.4.3 the packaging
(kPa) (kPa)
2056 Tetrahydrofuran 3 II 70 105 5 100 100
2247 n-Decane 3 III 1.4 2.1 -97.9 100 100
1593 Dichloromethane 6.1 III 164 246 146 146 150
1155 Diethyl ether 3 I 199 299 199 199 250
Note 1: For pure liquids, the vapour pressure at 55°C (Vp55) can often be obtained from scientific tables.
Note 2: The table refers to the use of 4.1.1.10.3 only, which means that the marked test pressure shall exceed 1.5 times
the vapour pressure at 55°C less 100 kPa. When, for example, the test pressure for n-decane is determined according to
6.1.5.5.4.1, the minimum marked test pressure may be lower.
Note 3: For diethyl ether, the required minimum test pressure under 6.1.5.5.5 is 250 kPa.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.1.11 Empty packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, that have contained a dangerous substance shall
be treated in the same manner as is required by this Code for a filled packaging, unless adequate measures
have been taken to nullify any hazard.
4.1.1.12 Every packaging as specified in chapter 6.1 intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a suitable
leakproofness test. This test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.1.1.3 which shows
the capability of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.4:
.1 before it is first used for transport;
.2 after remanufacturing or reconditioning of any packaging, before it is re-used for transport.
For this test, the packaging need not have its closures fitted. The inner receptacle of a composite packaging
may be tested without the outer packaging, provided the test results are not affected. This test is not necessary
for inner packagings of combination packagings or large packagings.
4.1.1.13 Packagings, including IBCs, used for solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered
during transport shall also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.
4.1.1.14 Packagings, including IBCs, used for powdery or granular substances shall be sift-proof or shall be provided
with a liner.
4.1.1.15 For plastics drums and jerricans, rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles,
unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the transport of
dangerous substances shall be five years from the date of manufacture of the receptacles, except where a
shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the substance to be transported.
Note: For composite IBCs the period of use refers to the date of manufacture of the inner receptacle.
4.1.1.16 Where ice is used as a coolant it shall not affect the integrity of the packaging.
4.1.1.17 Explosives, self-reactive substances and organic peroxides
Unless specific provision to the contrary is made in this Code, the packagings, including IBCs and large
packagings, used for goods of class 1, self-reactive substances of class 4.1 and organic peroxides of class 5.2
shall comply with the provisions for the medium danger group (packing group II).
4.1.1.18 Use of salvage packagings and large salvage packagings
4.1.1.18.1 Damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or leaked
may be transported in salvage packagings mentioned in 6.1.5.1.11 and 6.6.5.1.9. This does not prevent the
use of a larger size packaging or large packaging of appropriate type and performance level and under the
conditions of 4.1.1.18.2 and 4.1.1.18.3.
4.1.1.18.2 Appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent excessive movement of the damaged or leaking packages
within a salvage packaging. When the salvage packaging contains liquids, sufficient inert absorbent material
shall be added to eliminate the presence of free liquid.
4.1.1.18.3 Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure there is no dangerous build-up of pressure.
4.1.1.19 Use of salvage pressure receptacles
4.1.1.19.1 In the case of damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming pressure receptacles, salvage pressure
receptacles according to 6.2.3 may be used.
Note: A salvage pressure receptacle may be used as an overpack in accordance with 5.1.2. When used as
an overpack, marks shall be in accordance with 5.1.2.1 instead of 5.2.1.3.
4.1.1.19.2 Pressure receptacles shall be placed in salvage pressure receptacles of suitable size. More than one pressure
receptacle may be placed in the same salvage pressure receptacle only if the contents are known and do not
react dangerously with each other (see 4.1.1.6). In this case the total sum of water capacities of the placed
pressure receptacles shall not exceed 3,000 L. Measures shall be taken to prevent movement of the pressure
receptacles within the salvage pressure receptacle, e.g. by partitioning, securing or cushioning.
4.1.1.19.3 A pressure receptacle may only be placed in a salvage pressure receptacle if:
.1 the salvage pressure receptacle is in accordance with 6.2.3.5 and a copy of the approval certificate is
available;
.2 parts of the salvage pressure receptacle which are, or are likely to be in direct contact with the dangerous
goods will not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and will not cause a dangerous effect
(e.g. catalysing reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods); and
.3 the contents of the contained pressure receptacle(s) is limited in pressure and volume so that if totally
discharged into the salvage pressure receptacle, the pressure in the salvage pressure receptacle at 65°C
will not exceed the test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle (for gases, see packing instruction
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
in P200 (3) 4.1.4.1). The reduction of the useable water capacity of the salvage pressure receptacle, e.g.
by any contained equipment and cushioning, shall be taken into account.
4.1.1.19.4 The proper shipping name, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and label(s) as required for packages
in chapter 5.2 applicable to the dangerous goods inside the contained pressure receptacle(s) shall be applied
to the salvage pressure receptacle for transport.
4.1.1.19.5 Salvage pressure receptacles shall be cleaned, purged and visually inspected internally and externally after
each use. They shall be periodically inspected and tested in accordance with 6.2.1.6 at least once every five
years.
4.1.1.20 During transport, packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be securely fastened to or contained
within the cargo transport unit, so that lateral or longitudinal movement or impact is prevented and adequate
external support is provided.
4.1.1.21 Except as provided in 4.1.1.18 and 4.1.1.19, packagings including large packagings and IBCs shall not be filled
or discharged while they remain on board.
4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs
4.1.2.1 When IBCs are used for the transport of liquids with a flashpoint of 60°C (closed cup) or lower, or of powders
liable to dust explosion, measures shall be taken to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge.
4.1.2.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC shall be inspected and tested, as relevant, in accordance with
6.5.4.4 or 6.5.4.5:
– before it is put into service;
– thereafter at intervals not exceeding two and a half and five years, as appropriate; and
– after the repair or remanufacture, before it is re-used for transport.
An IBC shall not be filled and offered for transport after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection.
However, an IBC filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection may be transported
for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In
addition, an IBC may be transported after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection:
.1 after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the required test or inspection prior to
refilling; and
.2 unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond
the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection in order to allow the return of dangerous goods
or residues for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be entered in the transport
document.
4.1.2.3 IBCs of type 31HZ2 when transporting liquids shall be filled to at least 80% of the volume of the outer casing
and shall be transported in closed cargo transport units.
4.1.2.4 Except for routine maintenance of metal, rigid plastics, composite and flexible IBCs performed by the owner
of the IBC, whose State and name or authorized symbol is durably marked on the IBC, the party performing
routine maintenance shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer’s UN design type mark to show:
.1 the State in which the routine maintenance was carried out; and
.2 the name or authorized symbol of the party performing the routine maintenance.
4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions
4.1.3.1 Packing instructions applicable to dangerous goods of classes 1 to 9 are specified in 4.1.4. They are
ubdivided in three subsections depending on the type of packagings to which they apply:
s
subsection 4.1.4.1 for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings; these packing instructions are
designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letter “P”;
subsection 4.1.4.2 for IBCs; these are designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letters “IBC”;
subsection 4.1.4.3 for large packagings; these are designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the
letters “LP”.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Generally, packing instructions specify that the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and/or 4.1.3, as appropriate,
are applicable. They may also require compliance with the special provisions of 4.1.5, 4.1.6, 4.1.7, 4.1.8 or 4.1.9
when appropriate. Special packing provisions may also be specified in the packing instruction for individual
substances or articles. They are also designated by an alphanumeric code comprising the letters:
“PP” for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings
“B” for IBCs
“L” for large packagings.
Unless otherwise specified, each packaging shall conform to the applicable provisions of part 6. Generally,
packing instructions do not provide guidance on compatibility and the user shall not select a packaging
without checking that the substance is compatible with the packaging material selected (such as, most
fluorides are unsuitable for glass receptacles). Where glass receptacles are permitted in the packing
instructions, porcelain, earthenware and stoneware packagings are also allowed.
4.1.3.2 Column 8 of the Dangerous Goods List shows for each article or substance the packing instruction(s) that
shall be used. Column 9 indicates the special packing provisions applicable to specific substances or articles.
4.1.3.3 Each packing instruction shows, where applicable, the acceptable single and combination packagings.
For combination packagings, the acceptable outer packagings, inner packagings and, when applicable,
the maximum quantity permitted in each inner or outer packaging are shown. Maximum net mass and
maximum capacity are as defined in 1.2.1. Where packagings which need not meet the requirements of
4.1.1.3 (e.g. crates, pallets, etc.) are authorized in a packing instruction or the special provisions named in the
Dangerous Goods List, these packagings are not subject to the mass or volume limits generally applicable to
packagings conforming to the requirements of chapter 6.1, unless otherwise indicated in the relevant packing
instruction or special provision.
4.1.3.4 The following packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported are liable to become
liquid during transport:
Packagings
Drums: 1D and 1G
Boxes: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G and 4H1
Bags: 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5M1 and 5M2
Composite: 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PD2, 6PG1, 6PG2 and 6PH1
Large packagings
Flexible plastics: 51H (outer packaging)
IBCs
For substances of packing group I:
All types of IBCs
For substances of packing groups II and III:
Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F
Fibreboard: 11G
Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2
Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2
4.1.3.5 Where the packing instructions in this chapter authorize the use of a particular type of packaging (such as
4G; 1A2), packagings bearing the same packaging identification code followed by the letters “V”, “U” or
“W” marked in accordance with the provisions of part 6 (such as “4GV”, “4GU” or “4GW”; “1A2V”, “1A2U”
or “1A2W”) may also be used under the same conditions and limitations applicable to the use of that type
of packaging according to the relevant packing instructions. For example, a combination packaging marked
with the packaging code “4GV” may be used whenever a combination packaging marked “4G” is authorized,
provided the provisions in the relevant packing instruction regarding types of inner packagings and quantity
limitations are respected.
4.1.3.6 Pressure receptacles for liquids and solids
4.1.3.6.1 Unless otherwise indicated in this Code, pressure receptacles conforming to:
.1 the applicable requirements of chapter 6.2; or
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 the National or International standards on the design, construction, testing, manufacturing and
inspection, as applied by the country in which the pressure receptacles are manufactured, provided that
the provisions of 4.1.3.6 and 6.2.3.3 are met,
are authorized for the transport of any liquid or solid substance other than explosives, thermally unstable
substances, organic peroxides, self-reactive substances, substances where significant pressure may develop
by evolution of chemical reaction and radioactive material (unless permitted in 4.1.9).
This subsection is not applicable to the substances mentioned in 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P200, table 3.
4.1.3.6.2 Every design type of pressure receptacle shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of
manufacture or as indicated in chapter 6.2.
4.1.3.6.3 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles having a minimum test pressure of 0.6 MPa shall be used.
4.1.3.6.4 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles may be provided with an emergency pressure relief device
designed to avoid bursting in case of overfill or fire accidents.
Pressure receptacle valves shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able
to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause
inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the methods as given in 4.1.6.1.8.1
to 4.1.6.1.8.5.
4.1.3.6.5 The level of filling shall not exceed 95% of the capacity of the pressure receptacle at 50°C. Sufficient ullage
(outage) shall be left to ensure that the pressure receptacle will not be liquid-full at a temperature of 55°C.
4.1.3.6.6 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles shall be subjected to a periodic inspection and test every
five years. The periodic inspection shall include an external examination, an internal examination or alternative
method as approved by the competent authority, a pressure test or equivalent effective non-destructive
testing with the agreement of the competent authority, including an inspection of all accessories (e.g.
tightness of valves, emergency relief valves or fusible elements). Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after
they become due for periodic inspection and test but may be transported after the expiry of the time limit.
Pressure receptacle repairs shall meet the requirements of 4.1.6.1.11.
4.1.3.6.7 Prior to filling, the filler shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the pressure
receptacle is authorized for the substances to be transported and that the provisions of this Code have been
met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during transport. The consignor shall verify
that the closures and equipment are not leaking.
4.1.3.6.8 Refillable pressure receptacles shall not be filled with a substance different from that previously contained
unless the necessary operations for change of service have been performed.
4.1.3.6.9 Marking of pressure receptacles for liquids and solids according to 4.1.3.6 (not conforming to the requirements
of chapter 6.2) shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority of the country of
manufacturing.
4.1.3.7 Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, not specifically authorized in the applicable packing
instruction shall not be used for the transport of a substance or article unless specifically approved by the
competent authority and provided:
.1 the alternative packaging complies with the general provisions of this chapter;
.2 when the packing instruction indicated in the Dangerous Goods List so specifies, the alternative
packaging meets the provisions of part 6;
.3 the competent authority determines that the alternative packaging provides at least the same level of
safety as if the substance were packed in accordance with a method specified in the particular packing
instruction indicated in the Dangerous Goods List; and
.4 a copy of the competent authority approval accompanies each consignment or the transport document
includes an indication that alternative packaging was approved by the competent authority.
Note: The competent authorities granting such approvals shall take action to amend the Code to include the
provisions covered by the approval as appropriate.
4.1.3.8 Unpackaged articles other than class 1 articles
4.1.3.8.1 Where large and robust articles cannot be packaged in accordance with the requirements of chapter 6.1
or 6.6 and they have to be transported empty, uncleaned and unpackaged, the competent authority may
approve such transport. In doing so, the competent authority shall take into account that:
.1 Large and robust articles shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during transport, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between
cargo transport units and warehouses, as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or
mechanical handling.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 All closures and openings shall be sealed so that there can be no loss of contents which might be caused
under normal conditions of transport, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure
(resulting from altitude, for example). No dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of the large and
robust articles.
.3 Parts of large and robust articles, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods:
.1 shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; and
.2 shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods.
.4 Large and robust articles containing liquids shall be stowed and secured to ensure that neither leakage
nor permanent distortion of the article occurs during transport.
.5 They shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices in such a way that they will not become
loose during normal conditions of transport.
4.1.3.8.2 Unpackaged articles approved by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.8.1 shall
be subject to the consignment procedures of part 5. In addition the consignor of such articles shall ensure
that a copy of any such approval is transported with the large and robust articles.
Note: A large and robust article may include flexible fuel containment systems, military equipment, machinery
or equipment containing dangerous goods above the limited quantity thresholds.
4.1.3.9 Where, in 4.1.3.6 and in the individual packing instructions, cylinders and other pressure receptacles for
gases are authorized for the transport of any liquid or solid substance, use is also authorized of cylinders and
pressure receptacles of a kind normally used for gases which conform to the requirements of the competent
authority of the country in which the cylinder or pressure receptacle is filled. Valves shall be suitably protected.
Pressure receptacles with capacities of 1 L or less shall be packed in outer packagings constructed of
suitable material of adequate strength and design in relation to the capacity of the packaging and its intended
use and secured or cushioned so as to prevent significant movement within the outer packaging during
normal conditions of transport.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.4 List of packing instructions
4.1.4.1 Packing instructions concerning the use of packagings (except IBCs and large packagings)
P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) P001
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings Maximum capacity/net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 L Drums
Plastics 30 L steel (1A1, 1A2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Metal 40 L aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 40 kg 60 kg 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 60 kg 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 60 kg 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 30 kg 120 kg 120 kg
Single packagings
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 L 450 L 450 L
steel, removable head (1A2) prohibited 250 L 250 L
aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 L 450 L 450 L
aluminium, removable head (1B2) prohibited 250 L 250 L
other metal, non-removable head (1N1) 250 L 450 L 450 L
other metal, removable head (1N2) prohibited 250 L 250 L
plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 L* 450 L 450 L
plastics, removable head (1H2) prohibited 250 L 250 L
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 L 60 L 60 L
steel, removable head (3A2) prohibited 60 L 60 L
aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 L 60 L 60 L
aluminium, removable head (3B2) prohibited 60 L 60 L
plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 L* 60 L 60 L
plastics, removable head (3H2) prohibited 60 L 60 L
Composite packagings
Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium or plastics drum 250 L 250 L 250 L
(6HA1, 6HB1, 6HH1)
Plastics receptacle in fibre or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HD1) 120 L* 250 L 250 L
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or 60 L* 60 L 60 L
plastics receptacle in wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid
plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre, plywood, 60 L 60 L 60 L
expanded or solid plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1,
6PD1, 6PH1 or 6PH2) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or
fibreboard box or in a wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2,
6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2)
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met
Not permitted for class 3, packing group I.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) (continued) P001
Special packing provisions:
PP1 For UN Nos. 1133, 1210, 1263 and 1866 and for adhesives, printing inks, printing ink related materials, paints,
paint related materials and resin solutions which are assigned to UN 3082, metal or plastics packagings for
substances of packing groups II and III in quantities of 5 L or less per packaging are not required to meet the
performance tests in chapter 6.1 when transported:
(a) in palletized loads, a pallet box or a unit load device, such as individual packagings placed or stacked and
secured by strapping, shrink- or stretch-wrapping or other suitable means to a pallet. For sea transport,
the palletized loads, pallet boxes or unit load devices shall be firmly packed and secured in closed cargo
transport units. On roll-on/roll-off ships the unit loads may be carried in vehicles other than closed vehicles
provided they are securely fenced to the full height of the cargo carried; or
(b) as an inner packaging of a combination packaging with a maximum net mass of 40 kg.
PP2 For UN 3065, wooden barrels with a maximum capacity of 250 L and which do not meet the provisions of
chapter 6.1 may be used.
PP4 For UN 1774, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level.
PP5 For UN 1204, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal
pressure. Gas cylinders and gas receptacles shall not be used for these substances.
PP10 For UN 1791, for packing group II, the packaging shall be vented.
PP31 For UN Nos. 1131, 1553, 1693, 1694, 1699, 1701, 2478, 2604, 2785, 3148, 3183, 3184, 3185, 3186, 3187, 3188,
3398 (PG II and III), 3399 (PG II and III), 3413 and 3414, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
PP33 For UN 1308, for packing groups I and II, only combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg
are allowed.
PP81 For UN 1790 with more than 60% but not more than 85% hydrogen fluoride and UN 2031 with more than 55%
nitric acid, the permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years from their
date of manufacture
PP93 For UN Nos. 3532 and 3534, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or
vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization.
P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) P002
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 kg Drums
Plastics1 30 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Metal 40 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Paper 1, 2, 3 50 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Fibre1, 2, 3 50 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
1
These inner packagings shall reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
be sift-proof. fibreboard (4G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
2
These inner packagings
shall not be used when the
expanded plastics (4H1) 40 kg 60 kg 60 kg
substances being transported solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
may become liquid during
transport (see 4.1.3.4). Jerricans
3
Paper and fibre inner steel (3A1, 3A2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg
packagings shall not be used aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg
for substances of packing
group I. plastics (3H1, 3H2) 75 kg 120 kg 120 kg
Single packagings
Drums
steel (1A1 or 1A24) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (1B1 or 1B24) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N24) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1 or 1H24) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G5) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D5) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
4
These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I
that may become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4).
5
These packagings shall not be used when the substances being
transported may become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (continued) P002
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Single packagings (continued) Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Jerricans
steel (3A1 or 3A24) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1 or 3B24) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1 or 3H24) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
Boxes
steel (4A)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
solid plastics (4H2)5 Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
Bags
bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2)5 Not allowed 50 kg 50 kg
Composite packagings
Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG15, 6HD15, or 6HH1)
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box, 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg
wooden box, plywood box, fibreboard box or solid
5 5
plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 , 6HG2 or 6HH2)
Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg
drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD15 or 6PG15) or in steel, aluminium,
wood, or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2,
6PB2, 6PC, 6PG25 or 6PD25) or in expanded or solid
plastics packaging (6PH2 or 6PH15)
4
These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing
group I that may become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4).
5
These packagings shall not be used when the substances being
transported may become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4).
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Special packing provisions:
PP7 For UN 2000, celluloid may be transported unpacked on pallets, wrapped in plastic film and secured by
appropriate means, such as steel bands, as a single commodity in closed cargo transport units. Each pallet
shall not exceed 1,000 kg.
PP8 For UN 2002, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal
pressure. Gas cylinders and gas receptacles shall not be used for these substances.
PP9 For UN Nos. 3175, 3243 and 3244, packagings shall conform to a design type that has passed a leakproofness
test at the packing group II performance level. For UN 3175 the leakproofness test is not required when the
liquids are fully absorbed in solid material contained in sealed bags.
PP11 For UN 1309, packing group III, and UN 1362, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed if they are overpacked in
plastic bags and are wrapped in shrink or stretch wrap on pallets.
PP12 For UN Nos. 2213 and 3077, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed when transported in closed cargo transport
units.
PP13 For articles classified under UN 2870, only combination packagings meeting the packing group I performance
level are authorized.
PP14 For UN Nos. 2211, 2698 and 3314, packagings are not required to meet the performance tests in chapter 6.1.
PP15 For UN Nos. 1324 and 2623, packagings shall meet the packing group III performance level.
PP20 For UN 2217, any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used.
PP30 For UN 2471, paper or fibre inner packagings are not permitted.
PP31 For UN Nos. 1362, 1463, 1565, 1575, 1626, 1680, 1689, 1698, 1868, 1889, 1932, 2471, 2545, 2546, 2881, 3048,
3088, 3170, 3174, 3181, 3182, 3189, 3190, 3205, 3206, 3341, 3342, 3448, 3449 and 3450, packagings shall be
hermetically sealed.
PP34 For UN 2969 (as whole beans), 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are permitted.
PP37 For UN Nos. 2590 and 2212, 5M1 bags are permitted. All bags of any type shall be transported in closed cargo
transport units or be placed in closed rigid overpacks.
PP38 For UN 1309, bags are permitted only in closed cargo transport units or as unit loads.
PP84 For UN 1057, rigid outer packagings meeting the packing group II performance level shall be used. The
packagings shall be designed and constructed and arranged to prevent movement, inadvertent ignition of the
devices or inadvertent release of flammable gas or liquid.
PP85 For UN Nos. 1748, 2208, 2880, 3485, 3486 and 3487, bags are not allowed.
PP92 For UN Nos. 3531 and 3533, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or
vapour to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization.
PP100 For UN numbers 1309, 1323, 1333, 1376, 1435, 1449, 1457, 1472, 1476, 1483, 1509, 1516, 1567, 1869, 2210,
2858, 2878, 2968, 3089, 3096 and 3125, flexible, fibreboard or wooden packagings shall be sift-proof and
water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P003 PACKING INSTRUCTION P003
Dangerous goods shall be placed in suitable outer packagings. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1,
4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and be so designed that they meet the construction provisions of 6.1.4. Outer packagings
constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its
intended use, shall be used. Where this packing instruction is used for the transport of articles or inner packagings of
combination packagings, the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge of articles
during normal conditions of transport.
Special packing provisions:
PP16 For UN 2800, batteries shall be protected from short circuit within the packagings.
PP17 For UN 2037, packages shall not exceed 55 kg net mass for fibreboard packagings or 125 kg net mass for other
packagings.
PP18 For UN 1845, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of carbon dioxide gas to
prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings.
PP19 For UN Nos. 1327, 1364, 1365, 1856 and 3360, transport as bales is authorized.
PP20 For UN Nos. 1363, 1386, 1408 and 2793, any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used.
PP32 UN Nos. 2857 and 3358 and robust articles consigned under UN 3164 may be transported unpackaged, in
crates or in appropriate overpacks.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
PP90 For UN Nos. 3506 and 3554, sealed inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture resistant material
impervious to mercury or gallium, as appropriate, which will prevent escape of the substance from the package
irrespective of the position of the package shall be used.
PP91 For UN 1044, large fire extinguishers may also be transported unpackaged provided that the requirements of
4.1.3.8.1.1 to 4.1.3.8.1.5 are met, the valves are protected by one of the methods in accordance with 4.1.6.1.8.1 to
4.1.6.1.8.4 and other equipment mounted on the fire extinguisher is protected to prevent accidental activation.
For the purpose of this special packing provision, “large fire extinguishers” means fire extinguishers as
described in subparagraphs .3 to .5 of special provision 225 of chapter 3.3.
PP96 For UN 2037 waste gas cartridges transported in accordance with special provision 327, the packagings shall
be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure.
PP100 For UN Nos. 1408 and 2793 flexible, fibreboard or wooden packagings shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or
shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner.
P004 PACKING INSTRUCTION P004
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3473, 3476, 3477, 3478 and 3479.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) For fuel cell cartridges, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) For fuel cell cartridges packed with equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of
4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3.
When fuel cell cartridges are packed with equipment, they shall be packed in inner packagings or placed in the
outer packaging with cushioning material or divider(s) so that the fuel cell cartridges are protected against damage
that may be caused by the movement or placement of the contents within the outer packaging.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
For the purpose of this packing instruction, “equipment” means apparatus requiring the fuel cell cartridges with
which it is packed for its operation.
(3) For fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of
4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3.
Large robust equipment (see 4.1.3.8) containing fuel cell cartridges may be transported unpackaged. For fuel
cell cartridges contained in equipment, the entire system shall be protected against short circuit and inadvertent
operation.
Note: The packagings authorized in (2) and (3) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P005 PACKING INSTRUCTION P005
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3528, 3529 and 3530.
If the engine or machinery is constructed and designed so that the means of containment containing the dangerous
goods affords adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required.
Dangerous goods in engines or machinery shall otherwise be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable
material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, and meeting
the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1, or they shall be fixed in such a way that they will not become loose during
normal conditions of transport, e.g. in cradles or crates or other handling devices.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
In addition, the manner in which means of containment are contained within the engine or machinery, shall be such
that under normal conditions of transport, damage to the means of containment containing the dangerous goods is
prevented; and in the event of damage to the means of containment containing liquid dangerous goods, no leakage
of the dangerous goods from the engine or machinery is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this
requirement).
Means of containment containing dangerous goods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their
breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the engine or machinery during normal conditions of
transport. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously with the content of the means of containment. Any leakage
of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material.
Additional requirement:
Other dangerous goods (e.g. batteries, fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators or safety devices) required
for the functioning or safe operation of the engine or machinery shall be securely mounted in the engine or machine.
P006 PACKING INSTRUCTION P006
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3537, 3538, 3540, 3541, 3546, 3547 and 3548.
(1) The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) In addition, for robust articles the following packagings are authorized:
Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation to the
packaging capacity and its intended use. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.8
and 4.1.3 in order to achieve a level of protection that is at least equivalent to that provided by chapter 6.1.
Articles may be transported unpackaged or on pallets when the dangerous goods are afforded equivalent
protection by the article in which they are contained.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
(3) Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Receptacles within articles containing liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and
secured in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be
punctured or leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging;
(b) Receptacles containing liquids with closures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented. The
receptacles shall in addition conform to the internal pressure test provisions of 6.1.5.5;
(c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or
stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured. Any leakage of the contents shall not
substantially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging;
(d) Receptacles within articles containing gases shall meet the requirements of section 4.1.6 and chapter 6.2 as
appropriate or be capable of providing an equivalent level of protection to packing instructions P200
or P208;
(e) Where there is no receptacle within the article, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and
prevent their release under normal conditions of transport.
(4) Articles shall be packed to prevent movement and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of transport.
(5) Articles containing pre-production prototype lithium cells or batteries when these prototypes are transported
for testing or production runs of not more than 100 lithium cells or batteries that are of a type that have not met
the testing requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 38.3 shall in addition meet the
following:
(a) Packagings shall conform to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction.
(b) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement
of the article within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport.
When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible and electrically
non‑conductive.
(c) Non-combustibility of the cushioning material shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the
country where the packaging is designed or manufactured.
(d) The article may be transported unpackaged under conditions specified by the competent authority.
Additional conditions that may be considered in the approval process include, but are not limited to:
(i) the article shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during
transport, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units
and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical handling; and
(ii) the article shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices in such a way that it will not
become loose during normal conditions of transport.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P010 PACKING INSTRUCTION P010
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings
Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Inner packagings Outer packagings
Glass 1 L Drums
Steel 40 L steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 400 kg
plywood (4D) 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg
Single packagings Maximum capacity (see 4.1.3.3)
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 450 L
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 L
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle in steel drums (6HA1) 250 L
Steel pressure receptacles
provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
P099 PACKING INSTRUCTION P099
Only packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.3.7). A copy
of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an
indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority.
P101 PACKING INSTRUCTION P101
Only packagings which are approved by the competent authority may be used. The distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic of the country for which the authority acts shall be marked on the transport
documents as follows:
“Packaging approved by the competent authority of …”
Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic, e.g. in accordance with
the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of 1968.
P110(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(a)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Bags Drums
plastics plastics steel (1A1, 1A2)
textile, plastic coated or lined textile, plastic coated or lined metal, other than steel or aluminium
rubber rubber (1N1, 1N2)
textile, rubberized textile, rubberized plastics (1H1, 1H2)
textile
Receptacles
Receptacles plastics
wood metal
wood
Additional provisions:
1 The intermediate packagings shall be filled with water-saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted
cushioning.
2 Outer packagings shall be filled with water-saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted
cushioning. Outer packagings shall be constructed and sealed to prevent evaporation of the wetting solution,
except for UN 0224 when transported dry.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P110(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles Dividing partitions Boxes
metal metal natural wood, sift-proof wall (4C2)
wood wood plywood (4D)
rubber, conductive plastics reconstituted wood (4F)
plastics, conductive fibreboard
Bags
rubber, conductive
plastics, conductive
Special packing provision:
PP42 For UN Nos. 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135 and 0224, the following conditions shall be met:
.1 inner packagings shall not contain more than 50 g of explosive substance (quantity corresponding to dry
substance);
.2 compartments between dividing partitions shall not contain more than one inner packaging, firmly fitted;
and
.3 the outer packaging may be partitioned into up to 25 compartments.
P111 PACKING INSTRUCTION P111
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
paper, waterproofed Not necessary steel (4A)
plastics aluminium (4B)
textile, rubberized other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
Sheets natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plastics plywood (4D)
textile, rubberized reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
Receptacles
plastics, expanded (4H1)
wood
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP43 For UN 0159, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics (1H1 or
1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P112(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(a)
(Solid wetted, 1.1D)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Bags Boxes
paper, multiwall, water-resistant plastics steel (4A)
plastics textile, plastic coated or lined aluminium (4B)
textile other metal (4N)
textile, rubberized Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
woven plastics metal natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plastics plywood (4D)
Receptacles wood reconstituted wood (4F)
metal fibreboard (4G)
plastics plastics, expanded (4H1)
wood plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional provision:
Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219 and 0394, packagings shall be lead-free.
PP45 For UN Nos. 0072 and 0226, intermediate packagings are not required.
P112(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(b)
(Solid dry, other than powder 1.1D)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Bags (for UN 0150 only) Bags
paper, kraft plastics woven plastics, sift-proof (5H2)
paper, multiwall, water-resistant textile, plastic coated or lined woven plastics, water-resistant
plastics (5H3)
textile plastics, film (5H4)
textile, rubberized textile, sift-proof (5L2)
woven plastics textile, water-resistant (5L3)
paper, multiwall, water-resistant (5M2)
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead-free.
PP46 For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum
net mass of 30 kg.
PP47 For UN 0222, inner packagings are not required when the outer packaging is a bag.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P112(c) PACKING INSTRUCTION P112(c)
(Solid dry powder 1.1D)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Bags Boxes
paper, multiwall, water-resistant paper, multiwall, water-resistant steel (4A)
plastics with inner lining aluminium (4B)
woven plastics plastics other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
Receptacles Receptacles natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
fibreboard metal plywood (4D)
metal plastics reconstituted wood (4F)
plastics wood fibreboard (4G)
wood plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional provisions:
1 Inner packagings are not required if drums are used as the outer packaging.
2 The packaging shall be sift-proof.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead-free.
PP46 For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum
net mass of 30 kg.
PP48 For UN 0504, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of metal,
for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered metal
packagings.
P113 PACKING INSTRUCTION P113
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
paper Not necessary steel (4A)
plastics aluminium (4B)
textile, rubberized other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
Receptacles natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
fibreboard plywood (4D)
metal reconstituted wood (4F)
plastics fibreboard (4G)
wood plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional provision:
The packaging shall be sift-proof.
Special packing provisions:
PP49 For UN Nos. 0094 and 0305, no more than 50 g of substance shall be packed in an inner packaging.
PP50 For UN 0027, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as the outer packaging.
PP51 For UN 0028, paper kraft or waxed paper sheets may be used as inner packagings.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P114(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P114(a)
(Solid wetted)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Bags Boxes
plastics plastics steel (4A)
textile textile, plastic coated or lined metal, other than steel or aluminium
woven plastics (4N)
Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
Receptacles metal natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
metal plastics plywood (4D)
plastics reconstituted wood (4F)
wood Dividing partitions
fibreboard (4G)
wood
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional provision:
Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead-free.
PP43 For UN 0342, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics (1H1 or
1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.
P114(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P114(b)
(Solid dry)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
paper, kraft Not necessary natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
plastics natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
textile, sift-proof plywood (4D)
woven plastics, sift-proof reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
Receptacles
fibreboard Drums
metal steel (1A1, 1A2)
paper aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
plastics other metal (1N1, 1N2)
woven plastics, sift-proof plywood (1D)
wood fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead-free.
PP48 For UN Nos. 0508 and 0509, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small
amount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not
considered metal packagings.
PP50 For UN Nos. 0160, 0161 and 0508, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as the outer
packaging.
PP52 For UN Nos. 0160 and 0161, when metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) are used as the outer
packaging, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal
pressure from internal or external causes, is prevented.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P115 PACKING INSTRUCTION P115
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles Bags Boxes
plastics plastics in metal receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
wood natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
Drums plywood (4D)
metal reconstituted wood (4F)
Receptacles Drums
wood steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP45 For UN 0144, intermediate packagings are not required.
PP53 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when boxes are used as the outer packaging, inner packagings shall
have taped screw-cap closures and be not more than 5 L capacity each. Inner packagings shall be surrounded
with non-combustible absorbent cushioning materials. The amount of absorbent cushioning material shall be
sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. Metal receptacles shall be cushioned from each other. Net mass of
propellant is limited to 30 kg for each package when outer packagings are boxes.
PP54 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when drums are used as the outer packaging and when intermediate
packagings are drums, they shall be surrounded with non-combustible cushioning material in a quantity
sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. A composite packaging consisting of a plastics receptacle in a metal
drum may be used instead of the inner and intermediate packagings. The net volume of propellent in each
package shall not exceed 120 L.
PP55 For UN 0144, absorbent cushioning material shall be inserted.
PP56 For UN 0144, metal receptacles may be used as inner packagings.
PP57 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, bags shall be used as intermediate packagings when boxes are used
as outer packagings.
PP58 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, drums shall be used as intermediate packagings when drums are used
as outer packagings.
PP59 For UN 0144, fibreboard boxes (4G) may be used as outer packagings.
PP60 For UN 0144, aluminium drums (1B1 or 1B2) and metal, other than steel or aluminium, drums (1N1 or 1N2) shall
not be used.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P116 PACKING INSTRUCTION P116
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Bags
paper, water- and oil-resistant Not necessary woven plastics (5H1, 5H2, 5H3)
plastics paper, multiwall, water-resistant
textile, plastic coated or lined (5M2)
woven plastics, sift-proof plastics, film (5H4)
textile, sift-proof (5L2)
Receptacles textile, water-resistant (5L3)
fibreboard, water-resistant
metal Boxes
plastics steel (4A)
wood, sift-proof aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
Sheets natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
paper, water-resistant natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
paper, waxed plywood (4D)
plastics reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
plywood (1D)
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2)
plastics (3H1, 3H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP61 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums
are used as the outer packaging.
PP62 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required when the explosive is contained in a
material impervious to liquid.
PP63 For UN 0081, inner packagings are not required when contained in rigid plastic which is impervious to nitric
esters.
PP64 For UN 0331, inner packagings are not required when bags (5H2, 5H3 or 5H4) are used as outer packagings.
PP65 [Deleted]
PP66 For UN 0081, bags shall not be used as outer packagings.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P130 PACKING INSTRUCTION P130
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Boxes
Not necessary Not necessary steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP67 The following applies to UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048,
0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281,
0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412,
0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, 0502 and 0510: large and robust explosives articles,
normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing
at least two effective protective features, may be transported unpackaged. When such articles have propelling
charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during
normal conditions of transport. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the
article can be considered for transport unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or
contained in crates or other suitable handling devices.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
P131 PACKING INSTRUCTION P131
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
paper Not necessary steel (4A)
plastics aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
fibreboard natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
metal plywood (4D)
plastics reconstituted wood (4F)
wood fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Reels
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP68 For UN Nos. 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels shall not be used as inner packagings.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P132(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P132(a)
(Articles consisting of closed metal, plastics or fibreboard casings that contain
a detonating explosive, or consisting of plastics-bonded detonating explosives)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Boxes
Not necessary Not necessary steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
P132(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P132(b)
(Articles without closed casings)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles Boxes
fibreboard Not necessary steel (4A)
metal aluminium (4B)
plastics other metal (4N)
wood natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
Sheets plywood (4D)
paper reconstituted wood (4F)
plastics fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
P133 PACKING INSTRUCTION P133
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles Receptacles Boxes
fibreboard fibreboard steel (4A)
metal metal aluminium (4B)
plastics plastics other metal (4N)
wood wood natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plywood (4D)
fibreboard reconstituted wood (4F)
plastics fibreboard (4G)
wood plastics, solid (4H2)
Additional provision:
Receptacles are only required as intermediate packagings when the inner packagings are trays.
Special packing provision:
PP69 For UN Nos. 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306, trays shall not be used as inner packagings.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P134 PACKING INSTRUCTION P134
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
water-resistant Not necessary steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
Receptacles other metal (4N)
fibreboard natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
metal natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plastics plywood (4D)
wood reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
Sheets
plastics, expanded (4H1)
fibreboard, corrugated
plastics, solid (4H2)
Tubes Drums
fibreboard steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P135 PACKING INSTRUCTION P135
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
paper Not necessary steel (4A)
plastics aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
fibreboard natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
metal plywood (4D)
plastics reconstituted wood (4F)
wood fibreboard (4G)
Sheets plastics, expanded (4H1)
paper plastics, solid (4H2)
plastics Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P136 PACKING INSTRUCTION P136
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
plastics Not necessary steel (4A)
textile aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
Boxes natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
fibreboard natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plastics plywood (4D)
wood reconstituted wood (4F)
Dividing partitions in the outer fibreboard (4G)
packagings plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P137 PACKING INSTRUCTION P137
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
plastics Not necessary steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
Boxes other metal (4N)
fibreboard natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
wood natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
Tubes
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard
fibreboard (4G)
metal
plastics, solid (4H2)
plastics
Drums
Dividing partitions in the outer
steel (1A1, 1A2)
packagings
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP70 For UN Nos. 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, when the shaped charges are packed singly, the conical cavity
shall face downwards and the package shall be marked as illustrated in figures in 5.2.1.7.1. When the shaped
charges are packed in pairs, the conical cavities shall face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in the event of
accidental initiation.
P138 PACKING INSTRUCTION P138
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
plastics Not necessary steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional provision:
If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P139 PACKING INSTRUCTION P139
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
plastics Not necessary steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
Receptacles other metal (4N)
fibreboard natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
metal natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plastics plywood (4D)
wood reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
Reels
plastics, solid (4H2)
Sheets
Drums
paper
steel (1A1, 1A2)
plastics
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP71 For UN Nos. 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the ends of the detonating cord shall be sealed; for example, by
a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape. The ends of flexible detonating cord shall be fastened
securely.
PP72 For UN Nos. 0065 and 0289, inner packagings are not required when they are in coils.
P140 PACKING INSTRUCTION P140
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
plastics Not necessary steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
Reels other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
Sheets
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
paper, kraft
plywood (4D)
plastics
reconstituted wood (4F)
Receptacles fibreboard (4G)
wood plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP73 For UN 0105, no inner packagings are required if the ends are sealed.
PP74 For UN 0101, the packaging shall be sift-proof except when the fuse is covered by a paper tube and both ends
of the tube are covered with removable caps.
PP75 For UN 0101, steel, aluminium or other metal boxes or drums shall not be used.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P141 PACKING INSTRUCTION P141
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles Boxes
fibreboard Not necessary steel (4A)
metal aluminium (4B)
plastics other metal (4N)
wood natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plywood (4D)
plastics reconstituted wood (4F)
wood fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P142 PACKING INSTRUCTION P142
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
paper Not necessary steel (4A)
plastics aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
Receptacles natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
fibreboard natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
metal plywood (4D)
plastics reconstituted wood (4F)
wood fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Sheets
paper Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
Trays, fitted with dividing partitions
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
plastics
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P143 PACKING INSTRUCTION P143
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Boxes
paper, kraft Not necessary steel (4A)
plastics aluminium (4B)
textile other metal (4N)
textile, rubberized natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
Receptacles plywood (4D)
fibreboard reconstituted wood (4F)
metal fibreboard (4G)
plastics plastics, solid (4H2)
wood
Drums
Trays, fitted with dividing partitions steel (1A1, 1A2)
plastics aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
wood other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional provision:
Instead of the above inner and outer packagings, composite packagings (6HH2) (plastics receptacle with outer solid
box) may be used.
Special packing provision:
PP76 For UN Nos. 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491, when metal packagings are used, metal packagings shall be so
constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external
causes, is prevented.
P144 PACKING INSTRUCTION P144
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles Boxes
fibreboard Not necessary steel (4A)
metal aluminium (4B)
plastics other metal (4N)
wood natural wood, ordinary with
metal liner (4C1)
Dividing partitions in the outer plywood (4D) with metal liner
packagings reconstituted wood with
metal liner (4F)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP77 For UN Nos. 0248 and 0249, packagings shall be protected against the ingress of water. When water-activated
contrivances are transported unpackaged, they shall be provided with at least two independent protective
features which prevent the ingress of water.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION P200
For pressure receptacles, the general packing provisions of 4.1.6.1 shall be met. In addition, for MEGCs, the general
requirements of 4.2.4 shall be met.
Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, bundles of cylinders constructed as specified in 6.2 and MEGCs constructed as
specified in 6.7.5 are authorized for the transport of a specific substance when specified in the following tables. For
some substances, the special packing provisions may prohibit a particular type of cylinder, tube, pressure drum or
bundle of cylinders.
(1) Pressure receptacles containing toxic substances with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mL/m3 (ppm) as
specified in the table shall not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Pressure relief devices shall be fitted
on pressure receptacles used for the transport of UN 1013 carbon dioxide and UN 1070 nitrous oxide. Other
pressure receptacles shall be fitted with a pressure relief device if specified by the competent authority of the
country of use. The type of pressure relief device, the set-to-discharge pressure and relief capacity of pressure
relief devices, if required, shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of use.
(2) The following three tables cover compressed gases (Table 1), liquefied and dissolved gases (Table 2) and
substances not in Class 2 (Table 3). They provide:
(a) The UN number, proper shipping name and classification of the substance;
(b) The LC50 for toxic substances;
(c) The types of pressure receptacles authorized for the substance, shown by the letter “X”;
(d) The maximum test period for periodic inspection of the pressure receptacles.
Note: For pressure receptacles which make use of composite materials, the maximum test period shall be
5 years. The test period may be extended to that specified in Tables 1 and 2 (i.e. up to 10 years), if approved
by the competent authority of the country of use.
(e) The minimum test pressure of the pressure receptacles;
(f) The maximum working pressure of the pressure receptacles for compressed gases (where no value is
given, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure) or the maximum filling ratio(s)
dependent on the test pressure(s) for liquefied and dissolved gases;
(g) Special packing provisions that are specific to a substance.
(3) In no case shall pressure receptacles be filled in excess of the limit permitted in the following requirements.
(a) For compressed gases, the working pressure shall be not more than two thirds of the test pressure of the
pressure receptacles. Restrictions to this upper limit on working pressure are imposed by special packing
provision “o” in (5) below. In no case shall the internal pressure at 65°C exceed the test pressure.
(b) For high pressure liquefied gases, the filling ratio shall be such that the settled pressure at 65°C does not
exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles.
The use of test pressures and filling ratios other than those in the table is permitted, except where (5), special
packing provision “o” applies, provided that:
(i) the criterion of (5), special packing provision “r” is met when applicable; or
(ii) the above criterion is met in all other cases.
For high pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available, the maximum
filling ratio (FR) shall be determined as follows:
FR = 8.5 × 10-4 × dg × Ph
where FR = maximum filling ratio
dg = gas density (at 15°C, 1 bar) (in g/L)
P h = minimum test pressure (in bar)
If the density of the gas is unknown, the maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows:
P × MM × 10-3
FR = _____________
h
R × 338
where FR = maximum filling ratio
Ph = minimum test pressure (in bar)
MM = molecular mass (in g/mol)
R = 8.31451 × 10-2 bar·L/mol·K (gas constant)
For gas mixtures, the average molecular mass is to be taken, taking into account the volumetric
concentrations of the various components.
(c) For low pressure liquefied gases, the maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall equal
0.95 times the density of the liquid phase at 50°C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not fill the pressure
receptacle at any temperature up to 60°C. The test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall be at least equal
to the vapour pressure (absolute) of the liquid at 65°C, minus 100 kPa (1 bar).
For low pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available, the maximum
filling ratio shall be determined as follows:
FR = (0.0032 × BP – 0.24) × dl
where FR = maximum filling ratio
BP = boiling point (in kelvin)
dl = density of the liquid at boiling point (in kg/L)
(d) For UN 1001, acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, see (5), special packing provision “p”.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
(e) For liquefied gases charged with compressed gases, both components – the liquefied gas and the
compressed gas – have to be taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the
pressure receptacle.
The maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall not exceed 0.95 times the density of the liquid
phase at 50°C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not completely fill the pressure receptacle at any temperature
up to 60°C.
When filled, the internal pressure at 65°C shall not exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles.
The vapour pressures and volumetric expansions of all substances in the pressure receptacles shall be
considered. When experimental data is not available, the following steps shall be carried out:
(i) calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas and of the partial pressure of the compressed gas
at 15°C (filling temperature);
(ii) calculation of the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase resulting from the heating from 15°C to 65°C
and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase;
(iii) calculation of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65°C considering the volumetric expansion of
the liquid phase;
Note: The compressibility factor of the compressed gas at 15°C and 65°C shall be considered.
(iv) calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas at 65°C;
(v) the total pressure is the sum of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas and the partial pressure of the
compressed gas at 65°C;
(vi) consideration of the solubility of the compressed gas at 65°C in the liquid phase.
The test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus
100 kPa (1bar).
If the solubility of the compressed gas in the liquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test pressure
can be calculated without taking the gas solubility (subparagraph (vi)) into account.
(4) The filling of pressure receptacles shall be carried out by qualified staff using appropriate equipment and
procedures.
The procedures should include checks of:
(a) the conformity of receptacles and accessories with the provisions of this Code;
(b) their compatibility with the product to be transported;
(c) the absence of damage which might affect safety;
(d) compliance with the degree or pressure of filling, as appropriate;
(e) marks and identification.
These requirements are deemed to be met if the following standards are applied:
ISO 10691:2004 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) –
Procedures for checking before, during and after filling.
ISO 11372:2011 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Filling conditions and filling inspection
ISO 11755:2005 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles for compressed and liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) –
Inspection at time of filling
ISO 13088:2011 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinder bundles – Filling conditions and filling inspection
+ Amd 1:2020
ISO 24431:2016 Gas cylinders – Seamless, welded and composite cylinders for compressed and liquefied
gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at time of filling
(5) Special packing provisions:
Material compatibility
a: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall not be used.
b: Copper valves shall not be used.
c: Metal parts in contact with the contents shall not contain more than 65% copper.
d: When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those
bearing the "H" mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are permitted.
Requirements for toxic substances with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mL/m3 (ppm)
k: Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure-retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads that match those of
the valve outlets.
Each cylinder within a bundle shall be fitted with an individual valve that shall be closed during transport. After
filling, the manifold shall be evacuated, purged and plugged.
Bundles containing UN 1045 fluorine, compressed, may be constructed with isolation valves on groups of
cylinders not exceeding 150 L total water capacity instead of isolation valves on every cylinder.
Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall have a test pressure greater than or equal to 200 bar and
a minimum wall thickness of 3.5 mm for aluminium alloy or 2 mm for steel. Individual cylinders not complying
with this requirement shall be transported in a rigid outer packaging that will adequately protect the cylinder
and its fittings and meeting the packing group I performance level. Pressure drums shall have a minimum wall
thickness as specified by the competent authority.
Pressure receptacles shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device.
Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall be limited to a maximum water capacity of 85 L.
Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle and be connected
directly to the pressure receptacle by either a taper thread or other means which meets the requirements of
ISO 10692-2:2001.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which prevents
leakage through or past the packing.
Each pressure receptacle shall be tested for leakage after filling.
Gas specific provisions
l: UN 1040 ethylene oxide may also be packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings
suitably cushioned in fibreboard, wooden or metal boxes meeting the packing group I performance
level. The maximum quantity permitted in any glass inner packaging is 30 g, and the maximum quantity
permitted in any metal inner packaging is 200 g. After filling, each inner packaging shall be determined to
be leaktight by placing the inner packaging in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a period of time,
sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapour pressure of ethylene oxide at 55°C is
achieved. The maximum net mass in any outer packaging shall not exceed 2.5 kg.
m: Pressure receptacles shall be filled to a working pressure not exceeding 5 bar.
n: Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas. When bundles
containing UN 1045 fluorine, compressed are divided into groups of cylinders in accordance with special
packing provision “k” each group shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas.
o: In no case shall the working pressure or filling ratio shown in the table be exceeded.
p: For UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free: cylinders shall be filled with a
homogeneous monolithic porous material; the working pressure and the quantity of acetylene shall not
exceed the values prescribed in the approval or in ISO 3807-1:2000, ISO 3807-2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013,
as applicable.
For UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylinders shall contain a quantity of acetone or suitable solvent as
specified in the approval (see ISO 3807-1:2000, ISO 3807-2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013, as applicable);
cylinders fitted with pressure relief devices or manifolded together shall be transported vertically.
The test pressure of 52 bar applies only to cylinders fitted with a fusible plug.
q: Valve outlets of pressure receptacles for pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing
more than 1% of pyrophoric compounds shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps. When these pressure
receptacles are manifolded in a bundle, each of the pressure receptacles shall be fitted with an individual
valve that shall be closed during transport, and the outlet of the manifold valve shall be fitted with a
pressure-retaining gas-tight plug or cap. Gas-tight plugs or caps shall have threads that match those of
the valve outlets.
r: The filling ratio of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does
not exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle.
ra: This gas may also be packed in capsules under the following conditions:
(i) The mass of gas shall not exceed 150 g per capsule;
(ii) The capsules shall be free from faults liable to impair the strength;
(iii) The leakproofness of the closure shall be ensured by an additional device (cap, crown, seal, binding,
etc.) capable of preventing any leakage of the closure during transport;
(iv) The capsules shall be placed in an outer packaging of sufficient strength. A package shall not weigh
more than 75 kg.
s: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall be:
(a) equipped only with brass or stainless steel valves; and
(b) cleaned in accordance with ISO 11621:1997 and not contaminated with oil.
t: (a) The wall thickness of pressure receptacles shall be not less than 3 mm.
(b) Prior to transport, it shall be ensured that the pressure has not risen due to potential hydrogen
generation.
Periodic inspection
u: The interval between periodic tests may be extended to 10 years for aluminium alloy pressure receptacles
when the alloy of the pressure receptacle has been subjected to stress corrosion testing as specified in
ISO 7866:2012 + Cor 1:2014.
v: The interval between periodic inspections for steel cylinders may be extended to 15 years if approved by
the competent authority of the country of use.
Requirements for N.O.S. descriptions and for mixtures
z: The construction materials of the pressure receptacles and their accessories shall be compatible with the
contents and shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith.
The test pressure and filling ratio shall be calculated in accordance with the relevant requirements of (3).
Toxic substances with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mL/m3 shall not be transported in tubes,
pressure drums or MEGCs and shall meet the requirements of special packing provision “k”. However,
UN 1975 nitric oxide and dinitrogen tetroxide mixtures may be transported in pressure drums.
For pressure receptacles containing pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more
than 1% pyrophoric compounds, the requirements of special packing provision “q” shall be met.
The necessary steps shall be taken to prevent dangerous reactions (i.e. polymerization or decomposition)
during transport. If necessary, stabilization or addition of an inhibitor shall be required.
Mixtures containing UN 1911 diborane shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete decomposition
of the diborane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded.
Mixtures containing UN 2192 germane, other than mixtures of up to 35% germane in hydrogen or
nitrogen or up to 28% germane in helium or argon, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete
decomposition of the germane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not
be exceeded.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Mixtures of fluorine and nitrogen with a fluorine concentration below 35% by volume may be filled in
pressure receptacles up to a maximum allowable working pressure for which the partial pressure of
fluorine does not exceed 31 bar (absolute).
31
working pressure (bar) < __ x -1
f
in which xf = fluorine concentration in % by volume/100.
Mixtures of fluorine and inert gases with a fluorine concentration below 35% by volume may be filled
in pressure receptacles up to a maximum allowable working pressure for which the partial pressure of
fluorine does not exceed 31 bar (absolute), additionally taking the coefficient of nitrogen equivalency in
accordance with ISO 10156:2017 into account when calculating the partial pressure.
31
working pressure (bar) < __ x ( xf + Kk × xk) - 1
f
in which xf = fluorine concentration in % by volume/100;
Kk = coefficient of equivalency of an inert gas relative to nitrogen (coefficient of nitrogen
equivalency); and
xk = inert gas concentration in % by volume/100.
However, the working pressure for mixtures of fluorine and inert gases shall not exceed 200 bar. The
minimum test pressure of pressure receptacles for mixtures of fluorine and inert gases equals 1.5 times
the working pressure or 200 bar, with the greater value to be applied.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Table 1: COMPRESSED GASES
Bundles of cylinders
Subsidiary hazards
Maximum working
Test pressure, bar
Test period, years
Special packing
Pressure drums
pressure, bar
UN
LC50, mL/m3
Proper shipping name
provisions
No.
Cylinders
MEGCs
Tubes
Class
1002 AIR, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10
1006 ARGON, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10
1016 CARBON MONOXIDE, COMPRESSED 2.3 2.1 3,760 X X X X X 5 u
1023 COAL GAS, COMPRESSED 2.3 2.1 X X X X X 5
1045 FLUORINE, COMPRESSED 2.3 5.1, 8 185 X X 5 200 30 a, k,
n, o
1046 HELIUM, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10
1049 HYDROGEN, COMPRESSED 2.1 X X X X X 10 d
1056 KRYPTON, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10
1065 NEON, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10
1066 NITROGEN, COMPRESSED 2.2 X X X X X 10
1071 OIL GAS, COMPRESSED 2.3 2.1 X X X X X 5
1072 OXYGEN, COMPRESSED 2.2 5.1 X X X X 10 s
1612 HEXAETHYL TETRAPHOSPHATE AND 2.3 X X X X 5 z
COMPRESSED GAS MIXTURE
1660 NITRIC OXIDE, COMPRESSED 2.3 5.1, 8 115 X X 5 225 33 k, o
1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, 2.3 2.1 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
N.O.S.
1954 COMPRESSED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S 2.1 X X X X X 10 z
1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 X X X X X 10 z
1957 DEUTERIUM, COMPRESSED 2.1 X X X X X 10 d
1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, 2.1 X X X X X 10 z
COMPRESSED, N.O.S.
1971 METHANE, COMPRESSED or NATURAL GAS, 2.1 X X X X X 10
COMPRESSED with high methane content
2034 HYDROGEN AND METHANE MIXTURE, 2.1 X X X X X 10 d
COMPRESSED
2190 OXYGEN DIFLUORIDE, COMPRESSED 2.3 5.1, 8 2.6 X X 5 200 30 a, k,
n, o
3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.2 5.1 X X X X X 10 z
3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, 2.3 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
N.O.S.
3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, 2.3 2.1, 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
CORROSIVE, N.O.S.
3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, 2.3 5.1, 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
CORROSIVE, N.O.S.
Where the entries are blank, the maximum working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
Bundles of cylinders
Subsidiary hazards
Test pressure, bar
Test period, years
Special packing
Pressure drums
UN
LC50, mL/m3
Proper shipping name
Filling ratio
provisions
No.
Cylinders
MEGCs
Tubes
Class
1001 ACETYLENE, DISSOLVED 2.1 X X 10 60 c, p
52 c, p
1005 AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS 2.3 8 4,000 X X X X X 5 29 0.54 b
1008 BORON TRIFLUORIDE 2.3 8 864 X X X X X 5 225 0.715 a
300 0.86 a
1009 BROMOTRIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 42 1.13
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 13B1) 120 1.44
250 1.60
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.59
(1,2-butadiene), or
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.55
(1,3-butadiene), or
1010 BUTADIENES AND HYDROCARBON MIXTURE, 2.1 X X X X X 10 v, z
STABILIZED with more than 20% butadienes
1011 BUTANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.52 v
1012 BUTYLENE (butylenes mixture) or 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.50 z
1012 BUTYLENE (1-butylene) or 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.53
1012 BUTYLENE (cis-2-butylene) or 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.55
1012 BUTYLENE (trans-2-butylene) 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.54
1013 CARBON DIOXIDE 2.2 X X X X X 10 190 0.68
250 0.76
1017 CHLORINE 2.3 5.1, 293 X X X X X 5 22 1.25 a
8
1018 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 27 1.03
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 22)
1020 CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 25 1.05
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 115)
1021 1-CHLORO-1,2,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 11 1.20
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 124)
1022 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 100 0.83
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 13) 120 0.90
190 1.04
250 1.11
1026 CYANOGEN 2.3 2.1 350 X X X X X 5 100 0.70 u
1027 CYCLOPROPANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 18 0.55
1028 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 16 1.15
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 12)
1029 DICHLOROFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 10 1.23
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 21)
1030 1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 16 0.79
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 152a)
1032 DIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.59 b
1033 DIMETHYL ETHER 2.1 X X X X X 10 18 0.58
1035 ETHANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 95 0.25
120 0.30
300 0.40
1036 ETHYLAMINE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.61 b
1037 ETHYL CHLORIDE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.80 a, ra
1039 ETHYL METHYL ETHER 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.64
1040 ETHYLENE OXIDE or ETHYLENE OXIDE WITH 2.3 2.1 2,900 X X X X X 5 15 0.78 l
NITROGEN up to a total pressure of 1 MPa
(10 bar) at 50°C
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued)
Bundles of cylinders
Subsidiary hazards
Test pressure, bar
Test period, years
Special packing
Pressure drums
UN
LC50, mL/m3
Proper shipping name
Filling ratio
provisions
No.
Cylinders
MEGCs
Tubes
Class
1041 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE 2.1 X X X X X 10 190 0.66
MIXTURE with more than 9% ethylene oxide
but not more than 87% 250 0.75
1043 FERTILIZER AMMONIATING SOLUTION 2.2 X X X 5 b, z
with free ammonia
1048 HYDROGEN BROMIDE, ANHYDROUS 2.3 8 2,860 X X X X X 5 60 1.51 a, d
1050 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE, ANHYDROUS 2.3 8 2,810 X X X X X 5 100 0.30 a, d
120 0.56 a, d
150 0.67 a, d
200 0.74 a, d
1053 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE 2.3 2.1 712 X X X X X 5 48 0.67 d, u
1055 ISOBUTYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.52
1058 LIQUEFIED GASES, non-flammable, 2.2 X X X X X 10 z
charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air
1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 c, z
MIXTURE, STABILIZED or
1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND PROPADIENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 22 0.52 c
MIXTURE, STABILIZED (Propadiene
with 1% to 4% methylacetylene)
1061 METHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2.1 X X X X X 10 13 0.58 b
1062 METHYL BROMIDE with not more than 2.3 850 X X X X X 5 10 1.51 a
2% chloropicrin
1063 METHYL CHLORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 40) 2.1 X X X X X 10 17 0.81 a
1064 METHYL MERCAPTAN 2.3 2.1 1,350 X X X X X 5 10 0.78 d, u
1067 DINITROGEN TETROXIDE (NITROGEN DIOXIDE) 2.3 5.1, 115 X X X 5 10 1.30 k
8
1069 NITROSYL CHLORIDE 2.3 8 35 X X 5 13 1.10 k
1070 NITROUS OXIDE 2.2 5.1 X X X X X 10 180 0.68
225 0.74
250 0.75
1075 PETROLEUM GASES, LIQUEFIED 2.1 X X X X X 10 v, z
1076 PHOSGENE 2.3 8 5 X X X 5 20 1.23 k, a
1077 PROPYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 27 0.43
1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 X X X X X 10 z
1079 SULPHUR DIOXIDE 2.3 8 2,520 X X X X X 5 12 1.23
1080 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE 2.2 X X X X X 10 70 1.06
140 1.34
160 1.38
1081 TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 200 m, o
1082 TRIFLUOROCHLOROETHYLENE, STABILIZED 2.3 2.1 2,000 X X X X X 5 19 1.13 u
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 1113)
1083 TRIMETHYLAMINE, ANHYDROUS 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.56 b
1085 VINYL BROMIDE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 1.37 a
1086 VINYL CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 12 0.81 a
1087 VINYL METHYL ETHER, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.67
1581 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL BROMIDE 2.3 850 X X X X X 5 10 1.51 a
MIXTURE with more than 2% chloropicrin
1582 CHLOROPICRIN AND METHYL CHLORIDE 2.3 X X X X X 5 17 0.81 a
MIXTURE
1589 CYANOGEN CHLORIDE, STABILIZED 2.3 8 80 X X 5 20 1.03 k
1741 BORON TRICHLORIDE 2.3 8 2,541 X X X X X 5 10 1.19 a
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued)
Bundles of cylinders
Subsidiary hazards
Test pressure, bar
Test period, years
Special packing
Pressure drums
UN
LC50, mL/m3
Proper shipping name
Filling ratio
provisions
No.
Cylinders
MEGCs
Tubes
Class
1749 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE 2.3 5.1, 299 X X X X X 5 30 1.40 a
8
1858 HEXAFLUOROPROPYLENE 2.2 X X X X X 10 22 1.11
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 1216)
1859 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 922 X X X X X 5 200 0.74 a
300 1.10 a
1860 VINYL FLUORIDE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 250 0.64 a
1911 DIBORANE 2.3 2.1 80 X X 5 250 0.07 d, k, o
1912 METHYL CHLORIDE AND METHYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 17 0.81 a
CHLORIDE MIXTURE
1952 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE 2.2 X X X X X 10 190 0.66
MIXTURE with not more than 9% ethylene oxide 250 0.75
1958 1,2-DICHLORO-1,1,2,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 10 1.30
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 114)
1959 1,1-DIFLUOROETHYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 250 0.77
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 1132a)
1962 ETHYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 225 0.34
300 0.38
1965 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE, LIQUEFIED, 2.1 X X X X X 10 v, z
N.O.S.
1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 X X X X X 5 z
1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 X X X X X 10 z
1969 ISOBUTANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.49 v
1973 CHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND 2.2 X X X X X 10 31 1.01
CHLOROPENTAFLUOROETHANE MIXTURE
with fixed boiling point, with approximately
49% chlorodifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 502)
1974 CHLORODIFLUOROBROMOMETHANE 2.2 X X X X 10 10 1.61
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 12B1)
1975 NITRIC OXIDE AND DINITROGEN TETROXIDE 2.3 5.1, 115 X X X 5 k, z
MIXTURE (NITRIC OXIDE AND NITROGEN 8
DIOXIDE MIXTURE)
1976 OCTAFLUOROCYCLOBUTANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 11 1.32
(REFRIGERANT GAS RC 318)
1978 PROPANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 23 0.43 v
1982 TETRAFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 200 0.71
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 14) 300 0.90
1983 1-CHLORO-2,2,2-TRIFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 10 1.18
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 133a)
1984 TRIFLUOROMETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 190 0.88
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 23) 250 0.96
2035 1,1,1-TRIFLUOROETHANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 35 0.73
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 143a)
2036 XENON 2.2 X X X X X 10 130 1.28
2044 2,2-DIMETHYLPROPANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.53
2073 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density less 2.2
than 0.880 at 15°C in water,
with more than 35% but not more than 40% X X X X X 0.80 b
ammonia
with more than 40% but not more than 50% X X X X X 5 12 0.77 b
ammonia
2188 ARSINE 2.3 2.1 178 X X 5 42 1.10 d, k
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued)
Bundles of cylinders
Subsidiary hazards
Test pressure, bar
Test period, years
Special packing
Pressure drums
UN
LC50, mL/m3
Proper shipping name
Filling ratio
provisions
No.
Cylinders
MEGCs
Tubes
Class
2189 DICHLOROSILANE 2.3 2.1, 314 X X X X X 5 10 0.90 a
8 200 1.08 a
2191 SULPHURYL FLUORIDE 2.3 3,020 X X X X X 5 50 1.10 u
2192 GERMANE 2.3 2.1 620 X X X X X 5 250 0.064 d, q, r
2193 HEXAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 200 1.13
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 116)
2194 SELENIUM HEXAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 50 X X 5 36 1.46 k
2195 TELLURIUM HEXAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 25 X X 5 20 1.00 k
2196 TUNGSTEN HEXAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 218 X X X X X 5 10 3.08 a
2197 HYDROGEN IODIDE, ANHYDROUS 2.3 8 2,860 X X X X X 5 23 2.25 a, d
2198 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 261 X X X X X 5 200 0.90
300 1.25
2199 PHOSPHINE 2.3 2.1 20 X X 5 225 0.30 d, k, q
250 0.45 d, k, q
2200 PROPADIENE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 22 0.50
2202 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ANHYDROUS 2.3 2.1 51 X X 5 31 1.60 k
2203 SILANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 225 0.32 q
250 0.36 q
2204 CARBONYL SULPHIDE 2.3 2.1 1,700 X X X X X 5 30 0.87 u
2417 CARBONYL FLUORIDE 2.3 8 360 X X X X X 5 200 0.47
300 0.70
2418 SULPHUR TETRAFLUORIDE 2.3 8 40 X X 5 30 0.91 k, a
2419 BROMOTRIFLUOROETHYLENE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 1.19
2420 HEXAFLUOROACETONE 2.3 8 470 X X X X X 5 22 1.08
2421 NITROGEN TRIOXIDE 2.3 5.1, 57 X X 5 k
8
2422 OCTAFLUOROBUT-2-ENE 2.2 X X X X X 10 12 1.34
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 1318)
2424 OCTAFLUOROPROPANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 25 1.04
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 218)
2451 NITROGEN TRIFLUORIDE 2.2 5.1 X X X X X 10 200 0.50
2452 ETHYLACETYLENE, STABILIZED 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.57 c
2453 ETHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 161) 2.1 X X X X X 10 30 0.57
2454 METHYL FLUORIDE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 41) 2.1 X X X X X 10 300 0.63
2455 METHYL NITRITE 2.2 (see special provision 900)
2517 1-CHLORO-1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.99
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 142b)
2534 METHYLCHLOROSILANE 2.3 2.1, 2,810 X X X X X 5 z
8
2548 CHLORINE PENTAFLUORIDE 2.3 5.1, 122 X X 5 13 1.49 a, k
8
2599 CHLOROTRIFLUOROMETHANE AND 2.2 X X X X X 10 31 0.12
TRIFLUOROMETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE 42 0.17
with approximately 60% chlorotrifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 503) 100 0.64
2601 CYCLOBUTANE 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.63
2602 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE AND 2.2 X X X X X 10 22 1.01
DIFLUOROETHANE AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE
with approximately 74% dichlorodifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 500)
2676 STIBINE 2.3 2.1 178 X X 5 200 0.49 k, r
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES (continued)
Bundles of cylinders
Subsidiary hazards
Test pressure, bar
Test period, years
Special packing
Pressure drums
UN
LC50, mL/m3
Proper shipping name
Filling ratio
provisions
No.
Cylinders
MEGCs
Tubes
Class
2901 BROMINE CHLORIDE 2.3 5.1, 290 X X X X X 5 10 1.50 a
8
3057 TRIFLUOROACETYL CHLORIDE 2.3 8 10 X X X 5 17 1.17 k
3070 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND DICHLORODIFLUORO- 2.2 X X X X X 10 18 1.09
METHANE MIXTURE with not more than 12.5%
ethylene oxide
3083 PERCHLORYL FLUORIDE 2.3 5.1 770 X X X X X 5 33 1.21 u
3153 PERFLUORO(METHYL VINYL ETHER) 2.1 X X X X X 10 20 0.75
3154 PERFLUORO(ETHYL VINYL ETHER) 2.1 X X X X X 10 10 0.98
3157 LIQUEFIED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.2 5.1 X X X X X 10 z
3159 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 18 1.05
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 134a)
3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
3161 LIQUEFIED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 X X X X X 10 z
3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 X X X X X 10 z
3220 PENTAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 49 0.95
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 125) 35 0.87
3252 DIFLUOROMETHANE (REFRIGERANT GAS R 32) 2.1 X X X X X 10 48 0.78
3296 HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 13 1.21
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 227)
3297 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CHLOROTETRA- 2.2 X X X X X 10 10 1.16
FLUOROETHANE MIXTURE with not more
than 8.8% ethylene oxide
3298 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND PENTAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 26 1.02
MIXTURE with not more than 7.9% ethylene
oxide
3299 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND TETRAFLUOROETHANE 2.2 X X X X X 10 17 1.03
MIXTURE with not more than 5.6% ethylene oxide
3300 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND CARBON DIOXIDE 2.3 2.1 More X X X X X 5 28 0.73
MIXTURE with more than 87% ethylene oxide than
2,900
3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.3 8 ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, 2.3 2.1, ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8
3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, 2.3 5.1, ≤ 5,000 X X X X X 5 z
CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8
3318 AMMONIA SOLUTION, relative density 2.3 8 X X X X 5 b
less than 0.880 at 15°C in water, with more
than 50% ammonia
3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R 404A 2.2 X X X X X 10 36 0.82
3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407A 2.2 X X X X X 10 32 0.94
3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407B 2.2 X X X X X 10 33 0.93
3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407C 2.2 X X X X X 10 30 0.95
3354 INSECTICIDE GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 X X X X X 10 z
3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 X X X X X 5 z
3374 ACETYLENE, SOLVENT FREE 2.1 X X 5 60 c, p
52 c, p
3553 DISILANE 2.1 X X X X 10 225 0.39 q
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P200
Table 3: SUBSTANCES NOT IN CLASS 2
Bundles of cylinders
Subsidiary hazards
Test pressure, bar
Test period, years
Special packing
Pressure drums
UN
LC50, mL/m3
Proper shipping name
Filling ratio
provisions
No.
Cylinders
MEGCs
Tubes
Class
1051 HYDROGEN CYANIDE, STABILIZED containing 6.1 3 40 X X 5 100 0.55 k
less than 3% water
1052 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE, ANHYDROUS 8 6.1 1307 X X X 5 10 0.84 t, a
1745 BROMINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5.1 6.1, 25 X X X 5 10 k
8
1746 BROMINE TRIFLUORIDE 5.1 6.1, 50 X X X 5 10 k
8
2495 IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5.1 6.1, 120 X X X 5 10 k
8
A minimum ullage of 8% by volume is required.
P201 PACKING INSTRUCTION P201
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3167, 3168 and 3169.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) Cylinders and gas receptacles conforming to the construction, testing and filling requirements approved by
the competent authority.
(2) The following combination packagings provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
(a) For non-toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of
5 L per package;
(b) For toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 1 L
per package.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
P202 PACKING INSTRUCTION P202
[Reserved]
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P203 PACKING INSTRUCTION P203
This instruction applies to class 2 refrigerated liquefied gases.
Requirements for closed cryogenic receptacles:
(1) The general requirements of 4.1.6.1 shall be met.
(2) The requirements of chapter 6.2 shall be met.
(3) The closed cryogenic receptacles shall be so insulated that they do not become coated with frost.
(4) Test pressure
Refrigerated liquids shall be filled in closed cryogenic receptacles with the following minimum test pressures:
(a) For closed cryogenic receptacles with vacuum insulation, the test pressure shall not be less than 1.3 times
the sum of the maximum internal pressure of the filled receptacle, including during filling and discharge, plus
100 kPa (1 bar);
(b) For other closed cryogenic receptacles, the test pressure shall be not less than 1.3 times the maximum
internal pressure of the filled receptacle, taking into account the pressure developed during filling and
discharge.
(5) Filling
For non-flammable, non-toxic refrigerated liquefied gases the volume of liquid phase at the filling temperature and
at a pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar) shall not exceed 98% of the water capacity of the pressure receptacle.
For flammable refrigerated liquefied gases the gas filled into the receptacle shall remain below the level at which,
if the contents were raised to the temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening pressure of the
relief valve, the volume of the liquid phase would reach 98% of the water capacity at that temperature.
(6) Pressure-relief devices
Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be fitted with at least one pressure-relief device.
(7) Compatibility
Materials used to ensure the leakproofness of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures shall be compatible
with the contents. In the case of receptacles intended for the transport of oxidizing gases (i.e. with a subsidiary
hazard of 5.1), these materials shall not react with these gases in a dangerous manner.
(8) Periodic inspection
The periodic inspection and test frequencies of pressure relief valves in accordance with 6.2.1.6.3 shall not exceed
five years.
Requirements for open cryogenic receptacles:
Only the following non-oxidizing refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2.2 may be transported in open cryogenic
receptacles: UN Nos. 1913, 1951, 1963, 1970, 1977, 2591, 3136 and 3158. For these gases, when used as a coolant,
the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply.
Open cryogenic receptacles shall be constructed to meet the following requirements:
(1) The receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all
conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during their normal use and during normal conditions
of transport.
(2) The capacity shall be not more than 450 L.
(3) The receptacle shall have a double wall construction with the space between the inner and outer wall being
evacuated (vacuum insulation). The insulation shall prevent the formation of hoar frost on the exterior of the
receptacle.
(4) The materials of construction shall have suitable mechanical properties at the service temperature.
(5) Materials which are in direct contact with the dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the
dangerous goods intended to be transported and shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g. catalysing a reaction or
reacting with the dangerous goods.
(6) Receptacles of glass double wall construction shall have an outer packaging with suitable cushioning or
absorbent materials which withstand the pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of
transport.
(7) The receptacle shall be designed to remain in an upright position during transport, e.g. have a base whose smaller
horizontal dimension is greater than the height of the centre of gravity when filled to capacity or be mounted on
gimbals.
(8) The openings of the receptacles shall be fitted with devices allowing gases to escape, preventing any splashing
out of liquid, and so configured that they remain in place during transport.
(9) Open cryogenic receptacles shall bear the following marks permanently affixed, e.g. by stamping, engraving or
etching:
(a) The manufacturer’s name and address;
(b) The model number or name;
(c) The serial or batch number;
(d) The UN number and proper shipping name of gases for which the receptacle is intended;
(e) The capacity of the receptacle in litres.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P205 PACKING INSTRUCTION P205
This instruction applies to UN 3468.
(1) For metal hydride storage systems, the general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 shall be met.
(2) Only pressure receptacles not exceeding 150 L in water capacity and having a maximum developed pressure not
exceeding 25 MPa are covered by this packing instruction.
(3) Metal hydride storage systems meeting the applicable requirements for the construction and testing of pressure
receptacles containing gas of chapter 6.2 are authorized for the transport of hydrogen only.
(4) When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those bearing
the “H” mark, in accordance with 6.2.2.9.2(j), shall be used.
(5) Metal hydride storage systems shall meet the service conditions, design criteria, rated capacity, type tests,
batch tests, routine tests, test pressure, rated charging pressure and provisions for pressure relief devices for
transportable metal hydride storage systems specified in ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018 and their conformity
and approval shall be assessed in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
(6) Metal hydride storage systems shall be filled with hydrogen at a pressure not exceeding the rated charging
pressure shown in the permanent mark on the system as specified by ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018.
(7) The periodic test requirements for a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance with ISO 16111:2008 or
ISO 16111:2018 and carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.6, and the interval between periodic inspections shall not
exceed five years. See 6.2.2.4 to determine which standard is applicable at the time of periodic inspection and
test.
P206 PACKING INSTRUCTION P206
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505.
Unless otherwise indicated in these provisions, cylinders and pressure drums conforming to the applicable requirements
of Chapter 6.2 are authorized.
(1) The general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 shall be met.
(2) The maximum test period for periodic inspection shall be 5 years.
(3) Cylinders and pressure drums shall be so filled that at 50°C the non-gaseous phase does not exceed 95% of
their water capacity and they are not completely filled at 60°C. When filled, the internal pressure at 65°C shall not
exceed the test pressure of the cylinders and pressure drums. The vapour pressures and volumetric expansion
of all substances in the cylinders and pressure drums shall be taken into account. For liquids charged with a
compressed gas both components – the liquid and the compressed gas – have to be taken into consideration in
the calculation of the internal pressure in the pressure receptacle. When experimental data is not available, the
following steps shall be carried out:
(a) calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquid and of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 15°C
(filling temperature);
(b) calculation of the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase resulting from the heating from 15°C to 65°C and
calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase;
(c) calculation of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65°C considering the volumetric expansion of the
liquid phase;
Note: The compressibility factor of the compressed gas at 15°C and 65°C shall be considered.
(d) calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquid at 65°C;
(e) the total pressure is the sum of the vapour pressure of the liquid and the partial pressure of the compressed
gas at 65°C;
(f) consideration of the solubility of the compressed gas at 65°C in the liquid phase.
The test pressure of the cylinders or pressure drums shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus
100 kPa (1bar).
If the solubility of the compressed gas in the liquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test pressure can be
calculated without taking the gas solubility (subparagraph (f)) into account.
(4) The minimum test pressure shall be in accordance with P200 for the propellant but shall not be less than 20 bar.
Additional requirement:
Cylinders and pressure drums shall not be offered for transport when connected with spray application equipment such
as a hose and wand assembly.
Special packing provisions:
PP89 For UN Nos. 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, notwithstanding 4.1.6.1.9.2, non-refillable cylinders
used may have a water capacity in L not exceeding 1 000L divided by the test pressure expressed in
bars provided capacity and pressure restrictions of the construction standard comply with clause 1 of
ISO 11118:2015 + Amd 1:2019, which limits the maximum capacity to 50L.
PP97 For fire-extinguishing agents assigned to UN 3500 the maximum test period for periodic inspection shall be
10 years. They may be transported in tubes of a maximum water capacity of 450 L conforming to the applicable
requirements of chapter 6.2.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P207 PACKING INSTRUCTION P207
This instruction applies to UN 1950.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(a) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(b) Rigid outer packagings with a maximum net mass as follows:
Fibreboard 55 kg
Other than fibreboard 125 kg
The provisions of 4.1.1.3 need not be met.
The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent excessive movement of the aerosols and inadvertent
discharge during normal conditions of transport.
Special packing provision:
PP87 For UN 1950, waste aerosols transported in accordance with special provision 327, the packagings shall have
a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during transport, e.g. absorbent material. The packaging
shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure.
P208 PACKING INSTRUCTION P208
This instruction applies to class 2 adsorbed gases.
(1) The following packagings are authorized provided the general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 are met:
(a) cylinders constructed as specified in 6.2.2 and in accordance with ISO 11513:2011, ISO 11513:2019,
ISO 9809-1:2010 or ISO 9809-1:2019; and
(b) cylinders constructed before 1 January 2016 in accordance with 6.2.3 and a specification approved by the
competent authorities of the countries of transport and use.
(2) The pressure of each filled cylinder shall be less than 101.3 kPa at 20°C and less than 300 kPa at 50°C.
(3) The minimum test pressure of the cylinder shall be 21 bar.
(4) The minimum burst pressure of the cylinder shall be 94.5 bar.
(5) The internal pressure at 65°C of the filled cylinder shall not exceed the test pressure of the cylinder.
(6) The adsorbent material shall be compatible with the cylinder and shall not form harmful or dangerous compounds
with the gas to be adsorbed. The gas in combination with the adsorbent material shall not affect or weaken the
cylinder or cause a dangerous reaction (e.g. a catalyzing reaction).
(7) The quality of the adsorbent material shall be verified at the time of each fill to assure the pressure and chemical
stability requirements of this packing instruction are met each time an adsorbed gas package is offered for
transport.
(8) The adsorbent material shall not meet the criteria of any of the classes or divisions in this Code.
(9) Requirements for cylinders and closures containing toxic gases with an LC50 less than or equal to
200 mL/m3 (ppm) (see table 1) shall be as follows:
(a) Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads matching those of
the valve outlets.
(b) Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which prevents
leakage through or past the packing.
(c) Each cylinder and closure shall be tested for leakage after filling.
(d) Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the cylinder and be directly connected to the
cylinder by either a taper-thread or other means which meets the requirements of ISO 10692-2:2001.
(e) Cylinders and valves shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device.
(10) Valve outlets for cylinders containing pyrophoric gases shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps having threads
matching those of the valve outlets.
(11) The filling procedure shall be in accordance with annex A of ISO 11513:2011 (applicable until 31 December 2024)
or annex A of ISO 11513:2019.
(12) The maximum period for periodic inspections shall be 5 years.
(13) Special packing provisions that are specific to a substance (see table 1).
Material compatibility
a: Aluminium alloy cylinders shall not be used.
d: When steel cylinders are used, only those bearing the “H” mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are permitted.
Gas specific provisions
r: The filling ratio of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does not
exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the cylinder.
Material compatibility for N.O.S. adsorbed gas entries
z: The construction materials of the cylinders and their accessories shall be compatible with the contents and
shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P208 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P208
Table 1: ADSORBED GASES
Special
UN Class or Subsidiary LC50
Proper shipping name packing
No. Division hazard mL/m3
provisions
3510 ADSORBED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.1 z
3511 ADSORBED GAS, N.O.S. 2.2 z
3512 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 2.3 ≤ 5,000 z
3513 ADSORBED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.2 5.1 z
3514 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 2.3 2.1 ≤ 5,000 z
3515 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 2.3 5.1 ≤ 5,000 z
3516 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 2.3 8 ≤ 5,000 z
3517 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, 2.3 2.1 ≤ 5,000 z
CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8
3518 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, 2.3 5.1 ≤ 5,000 z
CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 8
3519 BORON TRIFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 2.3 8 387 a
3520 CHLORINE, ADSORBED 2.3 5.1 293 a
8
3521 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 2.3 8 450 a
3522 ARSINE, ADSORBED 2.3 2.1 20 d
3523 GERMANE, ADSORBED 2.3 2.1 620 d, r
3524 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 2.3 8 190
3525 PHOSPHINE, ADSORBED 2.3 2.1 20 d
3526 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ADSORBED 2.3 2.1 2
P300 PACKING INSTRUCTION P300
This instruction applies to UN 3064.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings consisting of inner metal cans of not more than 1 L capacity each and outer wooden
boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) containing not more than 5 L of solution.
Additional provisions:
1 Metal cans shall be completely surrounded with absorbent cushioning material.
2 Wooden boxes shall be completely lined with suitable material impervious to water and nitroglycerin.
P301 PACKING INSTRUCTION P301
This instruction applies to UN 3165.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.5, 4.1.1.6
and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Aluminium pressure receptacle made from tubing and having welded heads
Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded aluminium bladder having a
maximum internal volume of 46 L. The outer receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1,275 kPa
and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 2,755 kPa. Each receptacle shall be leak-checked during manufacture
and before shipment and shall be found leakproof. The complete inner unit shall be securely packed in
non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which
will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per primary containment and package is 42 L.
(2) Aluminium pressure receptacle
Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded vapourtight fuel compartment
with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L. The pressure receptacle shall have a
minimum design gauge pressure of 2,680 kPa and a minimum burst pressure of 5,170 kPa. Each receptacle shall
be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and shall be securely packed in non-combustible
cushioning material such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately
protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per primary containment and package is 42 L.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P302 PACKING INSTRUCTION P302
This instruction applies to UN 3269.
The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G).
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2).
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid, and
500 g per inner packaging if solid.
The base material and the activator shall be each separately packed in inner packagings.
The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in
the event of a leakage.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 3
applied to the base material.
P303 PACKING INSTRUCTION P303
This instruction applies to UN 3555.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 as well as 4.1.5.12
are met:
Plastics drum non-removeable head (1H1) of maximum capacity 250 L.
Additional requirement:
The packagings shall be transported in an upright position.
Special packing provision:
PP26 For UN 3555, packagings shall be lead free.
P400 PACKING INSTRUCTION P400
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and shall
be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar, gauge
pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than
20 kPa (0.2 bar).
(2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1D or 1G) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2,
3B1 or 3B2) enclosing hermetically sealed metal cans with inner packagings of glass or metal, with a capacity of
not more than 1 L each, having closures with gaskets. Inner packagings shall have threaded closures or closures
physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or
vibration during transport. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible
material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than
90% of their capacity. Outer packagings shall have a maximum net mass of 125 kg.
(3) Steel, aluminium or metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) or boxes (4A,
4B or 4N) with a maximum net mass of 150 kg each with hermetically sealed inner metal cans of not more than
4 L capacity each, with closures fitted with gaskets. Inner packagings shall have threaded closures or closures
physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or
vibration during transport. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible
material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Each layer of inner packagings shall be separated by
a dividing partition in addition to cushioning material. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their
capacity.
Special packing provision:
PP86 For UN Nos. 3392 and 3394, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P401 PACKING INSTRUCTION P401
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and
subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge
pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than
20 kPa (0.2 bar).
(2) Combination packagings
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1,4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
Glass, metal or plastics which have threaded closures with a maximum capacity of 1 L.
Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to
absorb the entire contents.
The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 30 kg.
Special packing provision:
PP31 For UN Nos. 1183, 1242, 1295, 2965 and 2988, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
P402 PACKING INSTRUCTION P402
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and
subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge
pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than
20 kPa (0.2 bar).
(2) Combination packagings
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings with a maximum net mass as follows:
Glass 10 kg
Metal or plastics 15 kg
Each inner packaging shall be fitted with threaded closures.
Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to
absorb the entire contents.
The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 125 kg.
(3) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 L.
(4) Composite packagings consisting of plastics receptacle in a steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) with a
maximum capacity of 250 L.
Special packing provision:
PP31 For UN Nos. 1389, 1391, 1392, 1420, 1421, 1422, 3148, 3184 (PG II), 3185 (PG II), 3187 (PG II), 3188 (PG II),
3398 (PG I), 3399 (PG I) and 3482, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P403 PACKING INSTRUCTION P403
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings
Maximum net mass
Inner packagings Outer packagings
Glass
2 kg Drums
Plastic 15 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
Metal 20 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg
Inner packagings shall be hermetically plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
sealed (e.g. by taping or by threaded plywood (1D) 400 kg
closures).
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 400 kg
other metal (4N) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 250 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls 250 kg
(4C2)
plywood (4D) 250 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 250 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg
Single packagings
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 250 kg
aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 kg
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 250 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg
Composite packagings
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) 250 kg
Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1) 75 kg
Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid 75 kg
plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met
Special packing provisions:
PP31 For UN Nos. 1360, 1397, 1402, 1404, 1407, 1409, 1410, 1413, 1414, 1415, 1418, 1419, 1423, 1426, 1427, 1428,
1432, 1433, 1436, 1714, 1870, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2257, 2463, 2806, 2813, 3131, 3132, 3134, 3135, 3208,
3209, 3395, 3396, 3397, 3401, 3402, 3403 and 3404, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
PP83 Deleted
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P404 PACKING INSTRUCTION P404
This instruction applies to pyrophoric solids: UN Nos. 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 2846, 2881, 3200,
3391 and 3393.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2).
Inner packagings:
Metal receptacles with a maximum net mass of 15 kg each. Inner packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
Glass receptacles, with a maximum net mass of 1 kg each, having closures with gaskets, cushioned on all sides
and contained in hermetically sealed metal cans.
Outer packagings shall have a maximum net mass of 125 kg.
Inner packagings shall have threaded closures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of
preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport.
(2) Metal packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2).
Maximum gross mass: 150 kg
(3) Composite packagings:
Plastics receptacle in a steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1)
Maximum gross mass: 150 kg
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Special packing provisions:
PP31 For UN Nos. 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 2846, 2881 and 3200, packagings shall be hermetically
sealed.
PP86 For UN Nos. 3391 and 3393, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
P405 PACKING INSTRUCTION P405
This instruction applies to UN 1381.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For UN 1381, wet phosphorus:
.1 Combination packagings
Outer packagings:
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F); maximum net mass: 75 kg
Inner packagings:
(i) hermetically sealed metal cans, with a maximum net mass of 15 kg; or
(ii) glass inner packagings cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity
sufficient to absorb the entire contents with a maximum net mass of 2 kg; or
.2 Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2); maximum net mass: 400 kg
Jerricans (3A1 or 3B1); maximum net mass: 120 kg.
These packagings shall be capable of passing the leakproofness test specified in 6.1.5.4 at the packing group II
performance level.
(2) For UN 1381, dry phosphorus:
.1 When fused, drums (1A2, 1B2 or 1N2) with a maximum net mass of 400 kg; or
.2 In projectiles or hard-cased articles when transported without class 1 components, as specified by the
competent authority.
Special packing provision:
PP31 For UN 1381, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P406 PACKING INSTRUCTION P406
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings
Outer packagings: (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2, 1G, 1D, 1H1, 1H2, 3H1 or 3H2)
Inner packagings shall be water-resistant.
(2) Plastics, plywood or fibreboard drums (1H2, 1D or 1G) or boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4D, 4F, 4C2, 4G and 4H2) with a
water-resistant inner bag, plastics film lining or water-resistant coating.
(3) Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), plastics drums (1H1 or 1H2), metal jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2),
plastics jerricans (3H1 or 3H2), plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or 6HB1), plastics receptacle
in fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1), plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, wood, plywood,
fibreboard or solid plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2).
Additional provisions:
1 Packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent the loss of water or alcohol content or the content of the
phlegmatizer.
2 Packagings shall be so constructed and closed as to avoid an explosive overpressure or pressure build-up of
more than 300 kPa (3 bar).
3 The type of packaging and maximum permitted quantity per packaging are limited by the provisions of 2.1.3.4.
Special packing provisions:
PP24 UN Nos. 2852, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368 and 3369 shall not be transported in quantities of more than 500 g
per package.
PP25 UN 1347 shall not be transported in quantities of more than 15 kg per package.
PP26 For UN Nos. 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1517, 2907, 3317, 3344 and 3376, packagings shall
be lead-free.
PP31 For UN Nos. 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1336, 1337, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1354, 1355, 1356, 1357, 1517, 1571,
2555, 2556, 2557, 2852, 3317, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368, 3369, 3370 and 3376, packagings shall be
hermetically sealed.
PP48 For UN 3474, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of metal,
for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered metal
packagings.
PP78 UN 3370 shall not be transported in quantities of more than 11.5 kg per package.
PP80 For UN Nos. 2907 and 3344, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level. Packagings
meeting the test criteria of packing group I shall not be used.
P407 PACKING INSTRUCTION P407
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1331, 1944, 1945 and 2254.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
Matches shall be tightly packed in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under normal
conditions of transport.
The maximum gross mass of the package shall not exceed 45 kg except for fibreboard boxes which shall not exceed
30 kg.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
Special packing provision:
PP27 UN 1331, Strike-anywhere matches, shall not be packed in the same outer packaging with any other dangerous
goods other than safety matches or wax Vesta matches, which shall be packed in separate inner packagings.
Inner packagings shall not contain more than 700 strike-anywhere matches.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P408 PACKING INSTRUCTION P408
This instruction applies to UN 3292.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
There shall be sufficient cushioning material to prevent contact between cells and between cells and the
internal surfaces of the outer packaging and to ensure that no dangerous movement of the cells within the outer
packaging occurs in transport.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) Batteries may be transported unpacked or in protective enclosures (e.g. fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates).
The terminals shall not support the weight of other batteries or materials packed with the batteries.
Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirement:
Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit and shall be isolated in such a manner as to prevent short
circuits.
P409 PACKING INSTRUCTION P409
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2956, 3242 and 3251.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Fibre drum (1G) which may be fitted with a liner or coating; maximum net mass: 50 kg.
(2) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) with a single inner plastic bag; maximum net mass: 50 kg.
(3) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G) with inner plastic packagings each containing a
maximum of 5 kg; maximum net mass: 25 kg.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION P410
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings Maximum net mass
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 kg Drums
Plastics1 30 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg
Metal 40 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg 400 kg
Paper1, 2 10 kg plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg
Fibre1, 2 10 kg plywood (1D) 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G)1 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof 400 kg 400 kg
walls (4C2)
plywood (4D) 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G)1
400 kg 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1)
60 kg 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2)
400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
1
Packagings shall be sift-proof. steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg
2
These inner packagings shall not be used aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg
when the substances being transported plastics (3H1, 3H2)
may become liquid during transport 120 kg 120 kg
(see 4.1.3.4).
Single packagings
Drums
steel (1A1 or 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (1B1 or 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2) 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1 or 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1 or 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1 or 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1 or 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg
Boxes
steel (4A)3 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B)3 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N)3 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1)3 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2)3 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D)3 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F)3 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G)3
400 kg 400 kg
solid plastics (4H2)3
400 kg 400 kg
Bags
Bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2)3, 4 50 kg 50 kg
Composite packagings
Plastics receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or plastics drum 400 kg 400 kg
(6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HD1 or 6HH1)
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box, wooden box, 75 kg 75 kg
plywood box, fibreboard box or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2,
6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre drum 75 kg 75 kg
(6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or in steel, aluminium, wooden,
wickerwork hamper or fibreboard box (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PD2
or 6PG2) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2)
3
These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may
become liquid during transport (see 4.1.3.4).
4
For packing group II substances, these packagings may only be used when transported
in a closed cargo transport unit.
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P410
Special packing provisions:
PP31 For UN Nos. 1326, 1339, 1340, 1341, 1343, 1352, 1358, 1373, 1374, 1378, 1379, 1382, 1384, 1385, 1390, 1393,
1394, 1395, 1396, 1398, 1400, 1401, 1402, 1405, 1409, 1417, 1418, 1431, 1436, 1437, 1871, 1923, 1929, 2004,
2008, 2318, 2545, 2546, 2624, 2805, 2813, 2830, 2835, 2844, 2881, 2940, 3078, 3088, 3131, 3132, 3134, 3135,
3170, 3182, 3189, 3190, 3205, 3206, 3208, 3209, 3395, 3396 and 3397, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
PP39 For UN 1378, for metal packagings a venting device is required.
PP40 For the following UN Nos., falling in PG II, bags are not allowed: 1326, 1340, 1352, 1358, 1374, 1378, 1382, 1390,
1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1400, 1401, 1402, 1405, 1409, 1417, 1418, 1436, 1437, 1871, 2624, 2805, 2813, 2830,
2835, 3078, 3131, 3132, 3134, 3170, 3182, 3208 and 3209.
PP83 Deleted
PP100 For UN 2950 flexible, fibreboard or wooden packagings shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted
with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner.
P411 PACKING INSTRUCTION P411
This instruction applies to UN 3270.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2),
provided that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure.
The maximum net mass shall not exceed 30 kg.
P412 PACKING INSTRUCTION P412
This instruction applies to UN No. 3527.
The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2)
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2);
(2) Inner packagings:
(a) The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid, and
500 g per inner packaging if solid.
(b) The base material and the activator shall be each separately packed in inner packagings.
The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the
event of a leakage.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for class 4.1 applied
to the base material.
P500 PACKING INSTRUCTION P500
This instruction applies to UN 3356.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
The generator(s) shall be transported in a package which meets the following requirements when one generator in the
package is actuated:
(1) Other generators in the package will not be actuated;
(2) Packaging material will not ignite; and
(3) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not exceed 100°C.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P501 PACKING INSTRUCTION P501
This instruction applies to UN 2015.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Inner packagings Outer packagings
Combination packagings
maximum capacity maximum net mass
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2) or 5L 125 kg
drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2,
1D) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2)
with glass, plastics or metal inner packagings
Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G), with 2L 50 kg
plastics or metal inner packagings each in a
plastics bag
Single packagings Maximum capacity
Drums
steel (1A1) 250 L
aluminium (1B1) 250 L
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1) 250 L
plastics (1H1) 250 L
Jerricans
steel (3A1) 60 L
aluminium (3B1) 60 L
plastics (3H1) 60 L
Composite packagings
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 L
Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 L
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle 60 L
in wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2,
6HG2 or 6HH2)
Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 60 L
6PG1) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper
(6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging
(6PH1 or 6PH2)
Additional provisions:
1 Packagings shall have a minimum ullage of 10%.
2 Packagings shall be vented.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P502 PACKING INSTRUCTION P502
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings
Maximum net mass
Inner packagings Outer packagings
Glass 5 L Drums
Metal 5 L steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg
Plastic 5 L aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg
plywood (1D) 125 kg
fibre (1G) 125 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 125 kg
aluminium (4B) 125 kg
other metal (4N) 125 kg
natural wood (4C1) 125 kg
natural wood with sift-proof 125 kg
walls (4C2)
plywood (4D) 125 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Single packagings Maximum capacity
Drums
steel (1A1) 250 L
aluminium (1B1) 250 L
plastics (1H1) 250 L
Jerricans
steel (3A1) 60 L
aluminium (3B1) 60 L
plastics (3H1) 60 L
Composite packagings
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 L
Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 L
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle in 60 L
wood, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2,
6HG2 or 6HH2)
Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 60 L
6PG1) or in a steel, aluminium, wood or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper
(6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging
(6PH1 or 6PH2)
Special packing provision:
PP28 For UN No. 1873, parts of packagings which are in direct contact with perchloric acid shall be constructed of
glass or plastics.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P503 PACKING INSTRUCTION P503
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings
Maximum net mass
Inner packagings Outer packagings
Glass 5 kg Drums
Metal 5 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg
Plastic 5 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg
fibre (1G) 125 kg
plywood (1D) 125 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 125 kg
aluminium (4B) 125 kg
other metal (4N) 125 kg
natural wood (4C1) 125 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 125 kg
plywood (4D) 125 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 40 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Single packagings Maximum net mass
Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) 250 kg
Fibreboard (1G) or plywood drums (1D) fitted with inner liners 200 kg
P504 PACKING INSTRUCTION P504
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings Maximum net mass
(1) Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 75 kg
4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2)
Inner packagings: Glass receptacles with a maximum capacity of 5 L
(2) Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 75 kg
4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2)
Inner packagings: Plastics receptacles with a maximum capacity of 30 L
(3) Outer packagings: (1G, 4F or 4G) 125 kg
Inner packagings: Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 L
(4) Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 225 kg
4H2)
Inner packagings: Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 L
Single packagings Maximum capacity
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 L
aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 L
metal, other than steel or aluminium, non-removable head (1N1) 250 L
plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 L
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 L
aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 L
plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 L
Composite packagings
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 L
Plastics receptacle in fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 120 L
Plastics receptacle in steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle in wood, 60 L
plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) 60 L
or in a steel, aluminium, wood or fibreboard box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2,
6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or in expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2)
Special packing provisions:
PP10 For UN Nos. 2014 and 3149, the packaging shall be vented.
PP31 For UN 2626, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P505 PACKING INSTRUCTION P505
This instruction applies to UN 3375.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Combination packagings Maximum capacity/
Inner packagings Outer packagings maximum net mass
Glass 5 L Boxes
Plastics 5 L aluminium (4B) 125 kg
Metal 5 L natural wood, ordinary (4C1) 125 kg
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2) 125 kg
plywood (4D) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
plastics, solid (4H2) 125 kg
Drums
aluminium, removable head (1B2) 125 kg
fibre (1G) 125 kg
other metal, removable head (1N2) 125 kg
plastics, removable head (1H2) 125 kg
plywood (1D) 125 kg
Jerricans
aluminium, removable head (3B2) 125 kg
plastics, removable head (3H2) 125 kg
Single packagings
Drums
aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 L
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 L
Jerricans
aluminium (3B1, 3B2), 60 L
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 60 L
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum (6HB1) 250 L
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum 250 L
(6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1)
plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with 60 L
outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2,
6HH2)
glass receptacle with outer aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1) 60 L
or with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics receptacles (6PH1, 6PH2) or with
outer aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard box or with outer
wickerwork hamper (6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2, 6PD2)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION P520
This instruction applies to organic peroxides of class 5.2 and self-reactive substances of class 4.1.
The packagings listed below are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.7 are met.
The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP8. The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently
assigned organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3 and 2.5.3.2.4. The quantities
specified for each packing method are the maximum quantities authorized per package. The following packagings are
authorized:
(1) Combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and
4H2), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D) and jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2);
(2) Single packagings consisting of drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D) and jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1,
3B2, 3H1 and 3H2);
(3) Composite packagings with plastics inner receptacles (6HA1, 6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2,
6HH1 and 6HH2).
The maximum quantities per packaging/package for packing methods OP1 to OP8 are:
OP1 OP21 OP3 OP41 OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
Maximum net mass (kg) for solids and for 0.5 0.5/10 5 5/25 25 50 50 4002
combination packagings (liquid and solid)
Maximum contents in litres for liquids3 0.5 – 5 – 30 60 60 2254
1
If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the maximum
net mass of the complete package.
2
60 kg for jerricans/200 kg for boxes and, for solids, 400 kg in combination packagings with outer packagings
comprising boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2) and with inner packagings of plastics or fibre with a maximum
net mass of 25 kg.
3
Viscous liquids shall be treated as solids when they do not meet the criteria provided in the definition for liquids
presented in 1.2.1.
4
60 L for jerricans.
Additional provisions:
1 Metal packagings, including inner packagings of combination packagings and outer packagings of combination or
composite packagings, may only be used for packing methods OP7 and OP8.
2 In combination packagings, glass receptacles may only be used as inner packagings with a maximum content of
0.5 kg for solids or 0.5 L for liquids.
3 In combination packagings, cushioning materials shall not be readily combustible.
4 The packaging of an organic peroxide or self-reactive substance required to bear an EXPLOSIVE subsidiary
hazard label (Model No. 1, see 5.2.2.2.2) shall also comply with the provisions given in 4.1.5.10 and 4.1.5.11.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P520
Special packing provisions:
PP21 For certain self-reactive substances of types B or C, UN Nos. 3221, 3222, 3223, 3224, 3231, 3232, 3233 and
3234, a smaller packaging than that allowed by packing methods OP5 or OP6 respectively shall be used (see
4.1.7 and 2.4.2.3.2.3).
PP22 UN 3241, 2-bromo-2-nitropropane-1,3-diol, shall be packed in accordance with packing method OP6.
PP94 Very small amounts of energetic samples of section 2.0.4.3 may be carried under UN 3223 or UN 3224, as
appropriate, provided that:
.1 only combination packaging with outer packaging comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1
and 4H2) are used;
.2 the samples are carried in microtiter plates or multi-titer plates made of plastics, glass, porcelain or
stoneware as inner packaging;
.3 the maximum amount per individual inner cavity does not exceed 0.01 g for solids or 0.01 mL for liquids;
.4 the maximum net quantity per outer packaging is 20 g for solids or 20 mL for liquids, or in the case of mixed
packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 20; and
.5 when dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionally used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements
of 5.5.3 are complied with. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the inner packagings in their original
position. The inner and outer packagings shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant
used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
PP95 Small amounts of energetic samples of section 2.0.4.3 may be carried under UN 3223 or UN 3224, as
appropriate, provided that:
.1 the outer packaging consist only of corrugated fibreboard of type 4G having minimum dimensions of 60 cm
(length) by 40.5 cm (width) by 30 cm (height) and minimum wall thickness of 1.3 cm;
.2 the individual substance is contained in an inner packaging of glass or plastics of maximum capacity
30 mL placed in an expandable polyethylene foam matrix of at least 130 mm thickness having a density
of 18 ± 1 g/L;
.3 within the foam carrier, inner packagings are segregated from each other by a minimum distance of 40 mm
and from the wall of the outer packaging by a minimum distance of 70 mm. The package may contain up to
two layers of such foam matrices, each carrying up to 28 inner packagings;
.4 the maximum content of each inner packaging does not exceed 1 g for solids or 1 mL for liquids;
.5 the maximum net quantity per outer packaging is 56 g for solids or 56 mL for liquids, or in the case of mixed
packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 56; and
.6 when dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionally used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements
of 5.5.3 are complied with. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the inner packagings in their original
position. The inner and outer packagings shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant
used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
P600 PACKING INSTRUCTION P600
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1700, 2016 and 2017.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2).
Outer packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level.
Articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or
cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport.
Maximum net mass: 75 kg
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P601 PACKING INSTRUCTION P601
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings
are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of:
(a) one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum net quantity of 1 L each and filled to not more than 90%
of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing
back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during transport, individually placed in
(b) metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of
the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in
(c) 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings.
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or plastics inner packagings not exceeding 5 L in capacity
individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in
1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with
a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. The
closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or
loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport.
(3) Packagings consisting of:
Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drums, (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2), tested in accordance with the test provisions in
6.1.5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging intended to contain
inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly.
Inner packagings: Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1), meeting the provisions of
chapter 6.1 for single packagings, subject to the following conditions:
.1 the hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 3 bar (gauge pressure);
.2 the design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 0.30 bar;
.3 they shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which
surrounds the inner packaging on all sides;
.4 their capacity shall not exceed 125 L;
.5 closures shall be of a screw-cap type that are:
(i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by
impact or vibration during transport; and
(ii) provided with a cap seal.
.6 The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to a leakproofness test according to .2 at
intervals of not more than two and a half years; and
.7 The outer and inner packagings shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters:
(i) the date (month, year) of the initial testing and the latest periodic test;
(ii) the name or authorized symbol of the party performing the tests and inspections.
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial
test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure
receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic
by inhalation liquid with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mL/m3 (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve
conforming to the following:
(a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be capable
of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage;
(b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials,
a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasket joint
attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of material through or past the packing;
(c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material;
(d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall
be compatible with each other and with the lading.
Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle that
does not have fitted valve protection shall be transported in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall not be
manifolded or interconnected.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P602 PACKING INSTRUCTION P602
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the
packagings are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of:
(a) one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum net quantity of 1 L each and filled to not more than 90%
of their capacity, the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing
back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during transport, individually placed in
(b) metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents of
the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in
(c) 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings.
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or plastics inner packagings individually packed with absorbent
material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2
1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner
packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be
physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or
vibration during transport. Inner packagings shall not exceed 5 L in capacity.
(3) Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1, 6HA1 or 6HH1), subject to the following conditions:
.1 the hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 3 bar (gauge pressure);
.2 the design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 0.30 bar; and
.3 closures shall be of a screw-cap type that are:
(i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by
impact or vibration during transport; and
(ii) provided with a cap seal.
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial
test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure
receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic
by inhalation liquid with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mL/m3 (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve
conforming to the following:
(a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be capable
of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage;
(b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials,
a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasket joint
attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of material through or past the packing;
(c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material;
(d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall
be compatible with each other and with the lading.
Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle that
does not have fitted valve protection shall be transported in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall not be
manifolded or interconnected.
P603 PACKING INSTRUCTION P603
This instruction applies to UN 3507.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and the special packing
provisions of 4.1.9.1.2, 4.1.9.1.4 and 4.1.9.1.7 are met:
Packagings consisting of:
(a) Metal or plastics primary receptacle(s); in
(b) Leakproof rigid secondary packaging(s); in
(c) A rigid outer packaging:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Additional requirements:
1 Primary inner receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in a way that, under normal conditions of
transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary
packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material to prevent movement. If
multiple primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped
or separated so as to prevent contact between them.
2 The contents shall comply with the provisions of 2.7.2.4.5.2.
3 The provisions of 6.4.4 shall be met.
4 In the case of fissile-excepted material, limits specified in 2.7.2.3.5 shall be met.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P620 PACKING INSTRUCTION P620
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2814 and 2900.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the special packing provisions of 4.1.8 are met:
Packagings meeting the provisions of chapter 6.3 and approved accordingly consisting of:
.1 Inner packagings comprising:
(i) leakproof primary receptacle(s);
(ii) a leakproof secondary packaging;
(iii) other than for solid infectious substances, an absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire
contents placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging; if multiple primary
receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or
separated so as to prevent contact between them;
.2 A rigid outer packaging:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
The smallest external dimension shall be not less than 100 mm.
Additional provisions:
1 Inner packagings containing infectious substances shall not be consolidated with inner packagings containing
unrelated types of goods. Complete packages may be overpacked in accordance with the provisions of 1.2.1 and
5.1.2: such an overpack may contain dry ice. When dry ice or other refrigerants presenting a risk of asphyxiation
are used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply.
2 Other than for exceptional consignments, such as whole organs which require special packaging, the following
additional provisions shall apply:
(a) Substances consigned at ambient temperatures or at a higher temperature. Primary receptacles shall be
of glass, metal or plastics. Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal shall be provided, e.g. a heat seal, a
skirted stopper or a metal crimp seal. If screw caps are used, they shall be secured by positive means, e.g.
tape, paraffin sealing tape or a manufactured locking closure;
(b) Substances consigned refrigerated or frozen. Ice, dry ice or other refrigerant shall be placed around the
secondary packaging(s) or alternatively in an overpack with one or more complete packages marked in
accordance with 6.3.3. Interior supports shall be provided to secure secondary packaging(s) or packages
in position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. When dry ice or other refrigerants presenting a risk of
asphyxiation are used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. If ice is used, the outer packaging
or overpack shall be leakproof. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging or overpack shall permit the release of
carbon dioxide gas. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the
temperature of the refrigerant used;
(c) Substances consigned in liquid nitrogen. When liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3
shall apply. Plastics primary receptacles capable of withstanding very low temperature shall be used. The
secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding very low temperatures, and in most cases will
need to be fitted over the primary receptacle individually. Provisions for the consignment of liquid nitrogen
shall also be fulfilled. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the
temperature of the liquid nitrogen.
(d) Lyophilized substances may also be transported in primary receptacles that are flame-sealed glass ampoules
or rubber-stoppered glass vials fitted with metal seals.
3 Whatever the intended temperature of the consignment, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall
be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than
95 kPa. This primary receptacle or secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding temperatures in the
range -40°C to +55°C.
4 Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as class 6.2 infectious substances unless
they are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards
of the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 mL or less of dangerous goods included in classes 3, 8 or 9 may be
packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. These small quantities of dangerous goods
of classes 3, 8 or 9 are not subject to any additional provisions of this Code when packed in accordance with this
packing instruction.
5 Alternative packagings for the transport of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority in
accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.7.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P621 PACKING INSTRUCTION P621
This instruction applies to UN 3291.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 except 4.1.1.15 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Provided that there is sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the
packaging is capable of retaining liquids:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for solids.
(2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2);
Composite packagings (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1, 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2, 6PA1,
6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1, 6PH2, 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for liquids.
Additional requirement:
Packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and
retain liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6.1.
P622 PACKING INSTRUCTION P622
This instruction applies to waste of UN 3549 transported for disposal.
The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
metal metal Boxes
plastics plastics steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
plywood (4D)
fibreboard (4G)
other metal (4N)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A2)
aluminium (1B2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
other metal (1N2)
plastics (1H2)
Jerricans
steel (3A2)
aluminium (3B2)
plastics (3H2)
The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids.
Additional requirements:
1. Fragile articles shall be contained in either a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging.
2. Inner packagings containing sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to
puncture.
3. The inner packaging, the intermediate packaging and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids.
Outer packagings that are not capable of retaining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable
measure of retaining liquids.
4. The inner packaging and/or the intermediate packaging may be flexible. When flexible packagings are used,
they shall be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988
Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1:
Staircase methods and the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes
with respect to the length of the bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 Plastics – Film and sheeting –
Determination of tear resistance – Part 2: Elmendorf method. The maximum net mass of each flexible inner
packaging shall be 30 kg.
5. Each flexible intermediate packaging shall contain only one inner packaging.
6. Inner packagings containing a small amount of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided
that there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or
solidify all the liquid content present. Suitable absorbent material which may withstand the temperatures and
vibrations liable to occur under normal conditions of transport shall be used.
7. Intermediate packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent
material.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION P650
This instruction applies to UN 3373.
(1) The packaging shall be of good quality, strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during transport, including transhipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport
units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical
handling. Packagings shall be constructed and closed to prevent any loss of contents that might be caused under
normal conditions of transport by vibration or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure.
(2) The packaging shall consist of at least three components:
(a) a primary receptacle;
(b) a secondary packaging; and
(c) an outer packaging
of which either the secondary or the outer packaging shall be rigid.
(3) Primary receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in such a way that, under normal conditions of
transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary
packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents
shall not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging.
(4) For transport, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on
a background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a
square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm, the width of the
line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high. The proper shipping name
“BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B” in letters at least 6 mm high shall be marked on the outer packaging
adjacent to the diamond-shaped mark.
UN 3373 on
M
si
in
en
im
i m
um 0 m
d m
5
um 0 m
di m
m
im 5
en
in
si
M
on
(5) At least one surface of the outer packaging shall have a minimum dimension of 100 mm × 100 mm.
(6) The completed package shall be capable of withstanding a 1.2 m drop in any orientation without leakage from
the primary receptacle(s), which shall remain protected by absorbent material, when required, in the secondary
packaging.
Note: Capability may be demonstrated by testing, assessment or experience.
(7) For liquid substances
(a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be leakproof;
(b) The secondary packaging shall be leakproof;
(c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall either be
individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them;
(d) Absorbent material shall be placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging. The
absorbent material shall be in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s)
so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of
the outer packaging; and
(e) The primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an
internal pressure of 95 kPa (0.95 bar).
Note: Capability may be demonstrated by testing, assessment or experience.
(8) For solid substances
(a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be siftproof;
(b) The secondary packaging shall be siftproof;
(c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall either be
individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them; and
(d) If there is any doubt as to whether or not residual liquid may be present in the primary receptacle during
transport then a packaging suitable for liquids, including absorbent materials, shall be used.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) P650
(9) Refrigerated or frozen specimens: ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen
(a) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used, ice
shall be placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior supports
shall be provided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position. If ice is used, the outside
packaging or overpack shall be leakproof; and
(b) The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the
refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
(10) When packages are placed in an overpack, the package marks required by this packing instruction shall either be
clearly visible or be reproduced on the outside of the overpack.
(11) Infectious substances assigned to UN 3373 which are packed and marked in accordance with this packing
instruction are not subject to any other provisions of this Code.
(12) Clear instructions on filling and closing such packages shall be provided by packaging manufacturers and
subsequent distributors to the consignor or to the person who prepares the package (e.g. patient) to enable the
package to be correctly prepared for transport.
(13) Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as class 6.2 infectious substances unless
they are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards
of the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 mL or less of dangerous goods included in classes 3, 8 or 9 may be
packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. When these small quantities of dangerous
goods are packed with infectious substances in accordance with this packing instruction, no other provisions of
the Code need be met.
Additional provision:
Alternative packagings for the transport of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority in
accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.7.
P800 PACKING INSTRUCTION P800
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2803 and 2809.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
(2) Steel flasks or bottles with threaded closures with a capacity not exceeding 3.0 L; or
(3) Combination packagings which conform to the following provisions:
(a) Inner packagings shall comprise glass, metal or rigid plastics intended to contain liquids with a maximum net
mass of 15 kg each.
(b) The inner packagings shall be packed with sufficient cushioning material to prevent breakage.
(c) Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings shall have inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and
puncture-resistant material impervious to the contents and completely surrounding the contents to prevent it
from escaping from the package irrespective of its position or orientation.
(d) The following outer packagings and maximum net masses are authorized:
Outer packaging Maximum net mass
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 250 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 250 kg
plywood (4D) 250 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Special packing provision:
PP41 For UN 2803, when it is necessary to transport gallium at low temperatures in order to maintain it in a
completely solid state, the above packagings may be overpacked in a strong, water-resistant outer packaging
which contains dry ice or other means of refrigeration. When dry ice or other means of refrigeration presenting
a risk of asphyxiation are used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. If a refrigerant is used, all
of the above materials used in the packaging of gallium shall be chemically and physically resistant to the
refrigerant and shall have impact resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. If dry ice is
used, the outer packaging shall permit the release of carbon dioxide gas. Interior supports shall be provided to
prevent movement after the dissipation of the refrigerant.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P801 PACKING INSTRUCTION P801
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2794, 2795 and 3028.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6, and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Rigid outer packagings, wooden slatted crates or pallets.
Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Batteries’ stacks shall be in tiers separated by a layer of electrically non-conductive material;
(b) Battery terminals shall not support the weight of other superimposed elements;
(c) Batteries shall be packaged or secured to prevent inadvertent movement;
(d) Batteries shall not leak under normal conditions of transport or appropriate measures shall be taken to
prevent the release of electrolyte from the package (e.g. individually packaging batteries or other equally
effective methods); and
(e) Batteries shall be protected against short circuits.
(2) Stainless steel or plastics bins may also be used to transport used batteries.
Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) The bins shall be resistant to the electrolyte that was contained in the batteries;
(b) The bins shall not be filled to a height greater than the height of their sides;
(c) The outside of the bins shall be free of residues of electrolyte contained in the batteries;
(d) Under normal conditions of transport, no electrolyte shall leak from the bins;
(e) Measures shall be taken to ensure that filled bins cannot lose their content; and
(f) Measures shall be taken to prevent short circuits (e.g. batteries are discharged, individual protection of the
battery terminals, etc.).
Note: The packagings authorized in (1) and (2) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
P802 PACKING INSTRUCTION P802
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings
Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2;
maximum net mass: 75 kg.
Inner packagings: glass or plastics; maximum capacity: 10 L.
(2) Combination packagings
Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2;
maximum net mass: 125 kg
Inner packagings: metal; maximum capacity: 40 L
(3) Composite packagings: Glass receptacle in steel, aluminium or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PD1) or in a steel,
aluminium or wood box or in wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PD2) or in solid plastics packaging (6PH2);
maximum capacity: 60 L.
(4) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 L.
(5) Pressure receptacles may be used provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Special packing provisions:
PP79 For UN 1790 with more than 60% but not more than 85% hydrogen fluoride, see P001.
PP81 For UN 1790 with not more than 85% hydrogen fluoride and UN 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the
permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years from their date of
manufacture.
P803 PACKING INSTRUCTION P803
This instruction applies to UN 2028.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
Articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or
cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport.
Maximum net mass: 75 kg.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P804 PACKING INSTRUCTION P804
This instruction applies to UN 1744.
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings
are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 25 kg, consisting of one or more glass inner packaging(s)
with a maximum capacity of 1.3 L each and filled to no more than 90% of their capacity; the closure(s) of which
shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration
during transport, individually placed in:
(a) metal or rigid plastics receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the
entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in:
(b) 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings.
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) inner packagings, not exceeding
5 L in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning
material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer
packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90% of
their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of
preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transport.
(3) Packagings consisting of:
Outer packagings:
Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2) tested in accordance with the test requirements in 6.1.5 at a mass
corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner packagings,
or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly;
Inner packagings:
Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of chapter 6.1 for single
packagings, subject to the following conditions:
(a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 300 kPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure);
(b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa (0.3 bar);
(c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which
surrounds the inner packaging on all sides;
(d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 L;
(e) Closures shall be of a screw type that are:
(i) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by
impact or vibration during transport;
(ii) Provided with a cap seal;
(f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness
test according to (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years; and
(g) The outer and inner packagings shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters:
(i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and the latest periodic test and inspection of the inner packaging;
and
(ii) the name or authorized symbol of the expert performing the tests and inspections.
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
(a) They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than
1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure);
(b) They shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness test at intervals of not more
than two and a half years;
(c) They may not be equipped with any pressure relief device;
(d) Each pressure receptacle shall be closed with a plug or valve(s) fitted with a secondary closure device; and
(e) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets shall
be compatible with each other and with the contents.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P900 PACKING INSTRUCTION P900
This instruction applies to UN 2216.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Packagings according to P002; or
(2) Bags (5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5M1 or 5M2) with a maximum net mass of 50 kg.
Fish meal may also be transported unpackaged when it is packed in closed cargo transport units and the free air
space has been restricted to a minimum.
P901 PACKING INSTRUCTION P901
This instruction applies to UN 3316.
The following combination packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the performance level consistent with the packing group assigned to the kit as a whole
(see 3.3.1, special provision 251). Where the kit contains only dangerous goods to which no packing group is assigned,
packagings shall meet Packing Group II performance level.
Maximum quantity of dangerous goods per outer packaging: 10 kg excluding the mass of any carbon dioxide, solid
(dry ice) used as a refrigerant.
If dry ice is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply.
Additional requirement:
Dangerous goods in kits shall be packed in inner packagings which shall be protected from other materials in the kit.
P902 PACKING INSTRUCTION P902
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3268 and 3559.
(1) Packaged articles:
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
The packagings shall be designed and constructed so as to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent
operation during normal conditions of transport.
(2) Unpackaged articles:
Except for UN 3559, the articles may also be transported unpackaged in dedicated handling devices, vehicles
or containers when moved to, from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including
intermediate handling locations.
Additional requirement:
Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s)
contained therein.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P903 PACKING INSTRUCTION P903
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552.
For the purpose of this packing instruction, “equipment” means apparatus for which the cells or batteries will provide
electrical power for its operation. The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1
and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Cells or batteries shall be packed in packagings so that the cells or batteries are protected against damage that
may be caused by the movement or placement of the cells or batteries within the packaging.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) In addition for a cell or a battery with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer
casing:
(a) Strong outer packagings;
(b) Protective enclosures (e.g. fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates); or
(c) Pallets or other handling devices.
Cells or batteries shall be secured to prevent inadvertent movement, and the terminals shall not support the
weight of other superimposed elements.
Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
(3) For cells or batteries packed with equipment:
Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with the
equipment in an outer packaging; or
Packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with equipment in a packaging
conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
(4) For cells or batteries contained in equipment:
Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the
packaging capacity and its intended use. They shall be constructed in such a manner as to prevent accidental
operation during transport. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Large equipment can be offered for transport unpackaged or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded
equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained.
When intentionally active, devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature
loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be transported in strong outer
packagings.
(5) For packaging containing both cells or batteries packed with equipment and contained in equipment:
(a) For cells and batteries, packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with
equipment in a packaging conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction; or
(b) Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with
the equipment in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and
design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. The outer packaging shall be constructed
in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during transport and need not meet the requirements of
4.1.1.3.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
When intentionally active, devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature
loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be transported in strong outer
packagings.
Note: The packagings authorized in (2), (4) and (5) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P904 PACKING INSTRUCTION P904
This instruction applies to UN 3245.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) Packagings meeting the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and so designed that they meet
the construction requirements of 6.1.4. Outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate
strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing
instruction is used for the transport of inner packagings of combination packagings the packaging shall be
designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of transport.
(2) Packagings, which need not conform to the packaging test requirements of part 6, but conforming to the
following:
(a) An inner packaging comprising:
(i) primary receptacle(s) and a secondary packaging, the primary receptacle(s) or the secondary packaging
shall be leakproof for liquids or siftproof for solids;
(ii) for liquids, absorbent material placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging.
The absorbent material shall be in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary
receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the
cushioning material or of the outer packaging;
(iii) if multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging they shall be individually
wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them;
(b) An outer packaging shall be strong enough for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with a smallest
external dimension of at least 100 mm.
For transport, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a
background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a square
set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm; the width of the line shall be
at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high.
UN 3245 io
n
M
s
in
en
im
m
di m
um 0 m
5
um
di m
m
m
im 50
en
in
si
M
on
Additional requirement:
When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used, ice shall be
placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior supports shall be provided
to secure the secondary packaging in the original position. If ice is used, the outside packaging or overpack shall be
leakproof.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P905 PACKING INSTRUCTION P905
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2990 and 3072.
Any suitable packaging is authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met, except that
packagings need not conform to the provisions of part 6.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
When the life-saving appliances are constructed to incorporate or are contained in rigid outer weatherproof casings
(such as for lifeboats), they may be transported unpackaged.
Additional provisions:
1 All dangerous substances and articles contained as equipment within the appliances shall be secured to prevent
inadvertent movement and in addition:
(a) signal devices of class 1 shall be packed in plastics or fibreboard inner packagings;
(b) gases (class 2.2) shall be contained in cylinders as specified by the competent authority, which may be
connected to the appliance;
(c) electric storage batteries (class 8) and lithium batteries and sodium ion batteries (class 9) shall be
disconnected or electrically isolated and secured to prevent any spillage of liquid; and
(d) small quantities of other dangerous substances (for example in classes 3, 4.1 and 5.2) shall be packed in
strong inner packagings.
2 Preparation for transport and packaging shall include provisions to prevent any accidental inflation of the
appliance.
P906 PACKING INSTRUCTION P906
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2315, 3151, 3152 and 3432.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For liquids and solids containing or contaminated with PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated
terphenyls or halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes: Packagings in accordance with P001 or P002, as
appropriate.
(2) For transformers and condensers and other articles:
(a) Packagings in accordance with packing instructions P001 or P002. The articles shall be secured with suitable
cushioning material to prevent inadvertent movement during normal conditions of transport; or
(b) Leakproof packagings which are capable of containing, in addition to the articles, at least 1.25 times
the volume of the liquid PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated terphenyls or halogenated
monomethyldiphenylmethanes present in them. There shall be sufficient absorbent material in the packagings
to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of liquid which is contained in the articles. In general, transformers and
condensers shall be carried in leakproof metal packagings which are capable of holding, in addition to the
transformers and condensers, at least 1.25 times the volume of the liquid present in them.
Note 1: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Notwithstanding the above, liquids and solids not packaged in accordance with P001 and P002 and unpackaged
transformers and condensers may be transported in cargo transport units fitted with a leakproof metal tray to a height
of at least 800 mm, containing sufficient inert absorbent material to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of any free
liquid.
Note 2: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional provision:
Adequate provisions shall be taken to seal the transformers and condensers to prevent leakage during normal
conditions of transport.
P907 PACKING INSTRUCTION P907
This instruction applies to articles, such as machinery, apparatus or devices of UN No. 3363.
If the article is constructed and designed so that the receptacles containing the dangerous goods are afforded
adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required. Dangerous goods in an article shall otherwise be packed in
outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging
capacity and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1.
Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall conform to the general provisions in 4.1.1, except that 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.4,
4.1.1.12 and 4.1.1.14 do not apply. For class 2.2 gases, the inner cylinder or receptacle, its contents and filling ratio shall
be to the satisfaction of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or receptacle is filled.
In addition, the manner in which receptacles are contained within the article shall be such that, under normal
conditions of transport, damage to receptacles containing the dangerous goods is unlikely; and in the event of
damage to the receptacles containing solid or liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of the dangerous goods from
the article is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement). Receptacles containing dangerous
goods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their
movement within the article during normal conditions of transport. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously
with the content of the receptacles. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties
of the cushioning material.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P908 PACKING INSTRUCTION P908
This instruction applies to damaged or defective cells and batteries, including those contained in equipment, of
UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552.
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions for 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G)
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2)
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2)
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
Packagings shall also meet the following requirements:
(a) Each damaged or defective cell or battery or equipment containing such cells or batteries shall be individually
packed in inner packaging and placed inside of an outer packaging. The inner packaging or outer packaging
shall be leakproof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte.
(b) Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive
thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat.
(c) Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a venting device when appropriate.
(d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement of
the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition during
transport. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may also be used to
meet this requirement.
(e) The non-combustibility of the thermal insulation material and the cushioning material shall be assessed
according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured.
For leaking cells or batteries, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to
absorb any release of electrolyte.
A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg shall be limited to one cell or battery per outer packaging.
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P909 PACKING INSTRUCTION P909
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552 transported for disposal or recycling, either
packed together with or packed without non-lithium batteries.
(1) Cells and batteries shall be packed in accordance with the following:
(a) The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3, are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2); and
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
(b) Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(c) Metal packagings shall be fitted with an electrically non-conductive lining material (e.g. plastics) of adequate
strength for the intended use.
(2) However, lithium ion or sodium ion cells with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 20 Wh, lithium ion or sodium ion
batteries with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 100 Wh, lithium metal cells with a lithium content of not more
than 1 g and lithium metal batteries with an aggregate lithium content of not more than 2 g may be packed in
accordance with the following:
(a) In strong outer packaging up to 30 kg gross mass meeting the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.3, and
4.1.3.
(b) Metal packagings shall be fitted with an electrically non-conductive lining material (e.g. plastics) of adequate
strength for the intended use.
(3) For cells or batteries contained in equipment, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and
of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, may be used.
Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Equipment may also be offered for transport unpackaged
or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are
contained.
(4) In addition, for cells or batteries with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer
casing, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation
to the packagings capacity and its intended use, may be used.
Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Note: The packagings authorized in (3) and (4) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirements:
1 Cells and batteries shall be designed or packed to prevent short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat.
2 Protection against short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat includes, but is not limited to:
(a) individual protection of the battery terminals,
(b) inner packaging to prevent contact between cells and batteries,
(c) batteries with recessed terminals designed to protect against short circuits, or
(d) the use of an electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space
between the cells or batteries in the packaging.
3 Cells and batteries shall be secured within the outer packaging to prevent excessive movement during transport
(e.g. by using an electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material or through the use of a
tightly closed plastics bag).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P910 PACKING INSTRUCTION P910
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552 production runs consisting of not
more than 100 cells or batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are
transported for testing.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells and batteries, including when packed with equipment:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level and shall meet the following requirements:
(a) Batteries and cells, including equipment, of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer
packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed
the gross mass for which the design type has been tested;
(b) Each cell or battery shall be individually packed in an inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging;
(c) Each inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically
non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat;
(d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement of
the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport.
Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may be used to meet this
requirement;
(e) The non-combustibility of the thermal insulation material and the cushioning material shall be assessed
according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured;
(f) A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg shall be limited to one cell or battery per outer packaging.
(2) For cells and batteries contained in equipment:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level and shall meet the following requirements:
(a) Equipment of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer packaging of a tested design
type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the
design type has been tested;
(b) The equipment shall be constructed or packaged in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during
transport;
(c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement
of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport.
When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible and electrically
non-conductive; and
(d) The non-combustibility of the cushioning material shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in
the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured.
(3) The equipment or the batteries may be transported unpackaged under conditions specified by the competent
authority. Additional conditions that may be considered in the approval process include, but are not limited to:
(a) The equipment or the battery shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during transport, including transshipment between cargo transport units and between cargo
transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical
handling; and
(b) The equipment or the battery shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices in such a way that it
will not become loose during normal conditions of transport.
Note: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirements:
The cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit. Protection against short circuits includes, but is not
limited to,
(a) individual protection of the battery terminals,
(b) inner packaging to prevent contact between cells and batteries,
(c) batteries with recessed terminals designed to protect against short circuits, or
(d) the use of an electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space between
the cells or batteries in the packaging.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P911 PACKING INSTRUCTION P911
This instruction applies to damaged or defective cells and batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552
liable to rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous
emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of transport.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
The packagings shall conform to the packing group I performance level.
(1) The packaging shall be capable of meeting the following additional performance requirements in case of rapid
disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission
of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the cells or batteries:
(a) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not have a temperature of more than 100°C.
A momentary spike in temperature up to 200°C is acceptable;
(b) No flame shall occur outside the package;
(c) No projectiles shall exit the package;
(d) The structural integrity of the package shall be maintained;
(e) The packagings shall have a gas management system (e.g. filter system, air circulation, containment for gas,
gas tight packaging, etc.), as appropriate.
(2) The additional packaging performance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent
authority.
A verification report shall be available on request. As a minimum requirement, the cell or battery name, the cell or
battery number, the mass, type, energy content of the cells or batteries, the packaging identification and the test
data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the verification
report.
(3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of section 5.5.3 shall apply. The inner
packaging and outer packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as
the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the packaging:
(a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described, e.g. in section 2.9.4.5) allowing for the traceability
of tests results, reference data and characterization models used;
(b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal runaway for the cell or battery type, in the condition it is transported (e.g. usage of
an inner packaging, state of charge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible, electrically non-conductive and absorbent cushioning
material, etc.), shall be clearly identified and quantified; the reference list of possible hazards for cells or batteries (e.g. rapidly
disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or
flammable gases or vapours) can be used for this purpose. The quantification of these hazards shall rely on available scientific literature;
(c) The mitigating effects of the packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of the protections provided
and the construction material properties. A list of technical characteristics and drawings shall be used to support this assessment
(density [kg·m-3], specific heat capacity [J·kg-1·K-1], heating value [kJ·kg-1], thermal conductivity [W·m-1·K-1], melting temperature and
flammability temperature [K], heat transfer coefficient of the outer packaging [W·m-2·K-1], …);
(d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal runaway of the cell or battery inside the packaging in
the normal conditions of transport;
(e) In case the SOC of the cell or battery is not known, the assessment used shall be done with the highest possible SOC corresponding
to the cell or battery use conditions;
(f) The surrounding conditions in which the packaging may be used and transported shall be described (including for possible
consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other methods) according to the gas management
system of the packaging;
(g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal runaway triggering and propagation inside
the cell or battery: this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the normal transport condition, the maximum heat and flame
emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction;
(h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period long enough to allow all the possible consequences to occur (e.g. 24 hours);
(i) In the case of multiple batteries and multiple items of equipment containing batteries, additional requirements, such as the maximum
number of batteries and items of equipment, the total maximum energy content of the batteries, and the configuration inside the
package, including separations and protections of the parts, shall be considered.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
P912 PACKING INSTRUCTION P912
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3556, 3557 and 3558.
The vehicle shall be secured in a strong, rigid outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength
and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. It shall be constructed in such a manner as
to prevent accidental operation during transport. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. The vehicle
shall be secured by means capable of restraining the vehicle in the outer packaging to prevent any movement during
transport which would change the orientation or cause the battery in the vehicle to be damaged.
Vehicles transported in a packaging may have some parts of the vehicle, other than the battery, detached from its frame
to fit into the packaging.
Note: The packagings may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Vehicles with an individual net mass of 30 kg or more:
(a) may be loaded into crates or secured to pallets;
(b) may be transported unpackaged providing that the vehicle is capable of remaining upright during transport
without additional support and the vehicle provides adequate protection to the battery so that no damage to
the battery can occur; or
(c) where the vehicles have the potential to topple over during transport (e.g. motor cycles), may be transported
unpackaged in a cargo transport unit fitted out with the means to prevent toppling in transport, such as by the
use of bracing, frames or racking.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.4.2 Packing instructions concerning the use of IBCs
IBC01 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC01
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (31A, 31B and 31N).
IBC02 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC02
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (31A, 31B and 31N);
Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2);
Composite (31HZ1).
Special packing provisions:
B5 For UN Nos. 1791, 2014, 2984 and 3149, IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during transport.
The inlet to the venting device shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions
during transport.
B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be transported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of
more than 110 kPa at 50°C or 130 kPa at 55°C.
B15 For UN 2031 with more than 55% nitric acid, the permitted use of rigid plastics IBCs and of rigid plastics inner
receptacles of composite IBCs shall be two years from their date of manufacture.
B16 For UN 3375, IBCs of type 31A and 31N are not allowed without competent authority approval.
B20 For UN Nos. 1716, 1717, 1736, 1737, 1738, 1742, 1743, 1755, 1764, 1768, 1776, 1778, 1782, 1789, 1790, 1796,
1826, 1830, 1832, 2031, 2308, 2353, 2513, 2584, 2796 and 2817 coming under PG II, IBCs shall be fitted with
two shut-off devices.
IBC03 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC03
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (31A, 31B and 31N);
Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2);
Composite (31HZ1 and 31HA2, 31HB2, 31HN2, 31HD2 and 31HH2).
Special packing provisions:
B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be transported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of
more than 110 kPa at 50°C or 130 kPa at 55°C.
B11 Notwithstanding the provisions of the second paragraph of 4.1.1.10, UN 2672 ammonia solution in
concentrations not exceeding 25% may be transported in IBCs.
B19 For UN Nos. 3532 and 3534, IBCs shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to
prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization.
IBC04 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC04
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N).
Special packing provision:
B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/
vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC.
IBC05 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC05
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
Composite (11HZ1, 21HZ1 and 31HZ1).
Special packing provisions:
B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/
vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC.
B21 For solid substances in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo
transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of
the IBC.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
IBC06 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC06
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1).
Additional provision:
Where the solid may become liquid during transport see 4.1.3.4.
Special packing provisions:
B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/
vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC.
B12 For UN 2907, IBCs shall meet the packing group II performance level. IBCs meeting the test criteria of packing
group I shall not be used.
B21 For solid substances in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo
transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of
the IBC.
IBC07 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC07
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1);
Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F).
Additional provisions:
1 Where the solid may become liquid during transport see 4.1.3.4.
2 Liners of wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof.
Special packing provisions:
B1 For packing group I substances, IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo transport units or in freight containers/
vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of the IBC.
B4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and
water-resistant liner.
B18 For UN Nos. 3531 and 3533, IBCs shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to
prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization.
B21 For solid substances in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo
transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of
the IBC.
B40 UN 3550 may be transported in flexible IBCs (13H3 or 13H4) with siftproof liners to prevent any egress of dust
during transport.
IBC08 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC08
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1);
Fibreboard (11G);
Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F);
Flexible (13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 or 13M2).
Additional provisions:
Where the solid may become liquid during transport see 4.1.3.4.
Special packing provisions:
B3 Flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner.
B4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and
water-resistant liner.
B6 For UN Nos. 1327, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1386, 1408, 1841, 2211, 2217, 2793 and 3314, IBCs are not required to meet
the IBC testing provisions of chapter 6.5.
B21 For solid substances in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be carried in closed cargo
transport units or in freight containers/vehicles, which shall have rigid sides or fences at least to the height of
the IBC.
IBC99 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC99
Only IBCs which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.3.7). A copy of
the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an
indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
IBC100 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC100
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 0082, 0222, 0241, 0331 and 0332.
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.5 are met:
Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
Flexible (13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4 and 13M2);
Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2).
Additional provisions:
1 IBCs shall only be used for free-flowing substances.
2 Flexible IBCs shall only be used for solids.
Special packing provisions:
B2 For UN 0222 in IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs, the IBCs shall be transported in closed cargo
transport units.
B3 For UN 0222, flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water
resistant liner.
B9 For UN 0082, this packing instruction may only be used when the substances are mixtures of ammonium nitrate or
other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives
shall not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates. Metal IBCs are not authorized.
B10 For UN 0241, this packing instruction may only be used for substances which consist of water as an essential
ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizing substances, some or all of which are
in solution. The other constituents may include hydrocarbons or aluminium powder, but shall not include nitro-
derivatives such as trinitrotoluene. Metal IBCs are not authorized.
B17 For UN 0222, metal IBCs are not authorized.
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC520
This instruction applies to organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F.
The IBCs listed below are authorized for the formulations listed, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3
and special provisions of 4.1.7.2 are met. The formulations not listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3 or 2.5.3.2.4 but listed below may also be
transported packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1, with the same control and
emergency temperatures, if applicable.
For formulations not listed below, only IBCs which are approved by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.7.2.2).
Maximum Control Emergency
UN Type of
Organic peroxide quantity temper- temper-
No. IBC
(litres) ature ature
3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID
tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide 31HA1 1,000
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% with water 31A 1,250
31HA1 1,000
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1,250
31HA1 1,000
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1,250
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate, not more than 37% 31A 1,250
in diluent type A 31HA1 1,000
Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 90% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,250
Dibenzoyl peroxide, not more than 42% as a stable dispersion 31H1 1,000
Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more than 52% in diluent type A 31A 1,250
31HA1 1,000
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, not more than 37% in 31A 1,250
diluent type A
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, not more than 42% in 31H1 1,000
diluent type A
Dilauroyl peroxide, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, in 31HA1 1,000
water
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di(tert-butylperoxy)hexane, not more than 31HA1 1,000
52% in diluent type A
Isopropylcumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent 31HA1 1,250
type A
p-Menthyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,250
Peroxyacetic acid, stabilized, not more than 17% 31H1 1,500
31H2 1,500
31HA1 1,500
31A 1,500
3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane, not more than 31HA1 1,000
27% in diluent type A
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) IBC520
Maximum Control Emergency
UN Type of
Organic peroxide quantity temper- temper-
No. IBC
(litres) ature ature
3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, SOLID
Dicumyl peroxide 31A 2,000
31H1
31HA1
3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, LIQUID, TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than 62% in 31HA1 1,000 +15°C +20°C
diluent type A
tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 32% in diluent type A 31A 1,250 +10°C +15°C
tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 42%, stable 31HA1 1,000 0°C +10°C
dispersion, in water
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than 32% in 31HA1 1,000 +30°C +35°C
diluent type B 31A 1,250 +30°C +35°C
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 32% in diluent 31A 1,250 0°C +10°C
type A
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 42%, stable 31A 1,250 -5°C +5°C
dispersion, in water
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52%, stable 31A 1,250 -5°C +5°C
dispersion, in water
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 27% in diluent type B 31HA1 1,000 +10°C +15°C
31A 1,250 +10°C +15°C
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 42% in diluent type A 31HA1 1,000 +10°C +15°C
31A 1,250 +10°C +15°C
Di-(2-neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)benzene, not more than 31A 1,250 -15°C -5°C
42%, stable dispersion, in water
3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more 31A 1,250 -15°C -5°C
than 52%, stable dispersion, in water
Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52%, stable 31A 1,250 -15°C -5°C
dispersion, in water
Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more than 31HA1 1,000 +30°C +35°C
42%, stable dispersion, in water
Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42%, stable 31HA1 1,000 +30°C +35°C
dispersion, in water
Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42% as 31A 1,250 +10°C +15°C
a stable dispersion, in water
Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more than 62%, stable 31A 1,250 -20°C -10°C
dispersion, in water 31HA1 1,000 -20°C -10°C
Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42%, stable 31HA1 1,000 +15°C +20°C
dispersion, in water
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 52% in 31HA1 1,000 +10°C +15°C
diluent type A 31A 1,250 +10°C +15°C
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more than 52%, 31HA1 1,000 +10°C +15°C
stable dispersion, in water 31A 1,250 +10°C +15°C
Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 28%, stable dispersion, 31HA1 1,000 -20°C -10°C
in water 31A 1,250 -20°C -10°C
Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 42%, stable dispersion, 31HA1 1,000 -25°C -15°C
in water 31A 1,250 -25°C -15°C
1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more 31HA1 1,000 +15°C +20°C
than 67%, in diluent type A
1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 31A 1,250 -5°C +5°C
52%, stable dispersion, in water 31HA1 1,000 -5°C +5°C
3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, SOLID, TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (continued) IBC520
Additional provisions:
1 IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during transport. The inlet to the pressure relief device shall
be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during transport.
2 To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs with complete metal casing, the emergency relief
devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating
decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of fire-engulfment as calculated by the formula
in 4.2.1.13.8. The control and emergency temperatures specified in this packing instruction are based on a
non-insulated IBC. When consigning an organic peroxide in an IBC in accordance with this instruction, it is the
responsibility of the consignor to ensure that:
(a) the pressure and emergency relief devices installed on the IBC are designed to take appropriate account of
the self-accelerating decomposition of the organic peroxide and of fire engulfment; and
(b) when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures indicated are appropriate, taking into account the
design (such as insulation) of the IBC to be used.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
IBC620 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC620
This instruction applies to UN 3291.
The following IBCs are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.15, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid, leakproof IBCs conforming to the packing group II performance level.
Additional provisions:
1 There shall be sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present in the IBC.
2 IBCs shall be capable of retaining liquids.
3 IBCs intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture.
4.1.4.3 Packing instructions concerning the use of large packagings
LP01 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) LP01
The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 L Steel (50A)
Plastics 30 L Aluminium (50B) Not allowed Not allowed 3 m3
Metal 40 L Metal other than steel or
aluminium (50N)
Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
LP02 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) LP02
The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met.
Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 kg Steel (50A)
Plasticsb 50 kg Aluminium (50B) Not allowed Not allowed 3 m3
Metal 50 kg Metal other than steel or
Papera, b 50 kg aluminium (50N)
Fibrea, b 50 kg Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
Flexible plastics (51H)c
a
These packagings shall not be used when the substances being transported may become liquid during transport.
b
Packagings shall be sift-proof.
c
To be used with flexible inner packagings only.
Special packing provision:
L2 Deleted
L3 For UN Nos.1309, 1376, 1483, 1869, 2793, 2858 and 2878, flexible or fibre inner packagings shall be sift-proof
and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner.
L4 For UN Nos.1932, 2008, 2009, 2545, 2546, 2881 and 3189 flexible or fibre inner packagings shall be hermetically
sealed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
LP03 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP03
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3537, 3538, 3540, 3541, 3546, 3547 and 3548.
(1) The following large packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
(2) Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Receptacles within articles containing liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured
in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot break, be punctured or leak
their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging;
(b) Receptacles containing liquids with closures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented. The
receptacles shall in addition conform to the internal pressure test provisions of 6.1.5.5;
(c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or
stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured. Any leakage of the contents shall not
substantially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging;
(d) Receptacles within articles containing gases shall meet the requirements of section 4.1.6 and chapter 6.2 as
appropriate or be capable of providing an equivalent level of protection as packing instructions P200 or P208;
and
(e) Where there is no receptacle within the article, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and
prevent their release under normal conditions of transport.
(3) Articles shall be packed to prevent movement and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of transport.
(4) Articles containing pre-production prototype lithium cells or batteries when these prototypes are transported
for testing or production runs of not more than 100 lithium cells or batteries that are of a type that have not met
the testing requirements of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, part III, subsection 38.3 shall in addition meet the
following:
(a) Packagings shall conform to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction.
(b) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement
of the article within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport.
When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible and electrically
non‑conductive.
(c) Non-combustibility of the cushioning material shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the
country where the packaging is designed or manufactured.
LP99 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP99
Only large packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.3.7). A
copy of the competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include
an indication that the packaging was approved by the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
LP101 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP101
The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Large packagings
Steel (50A)
Not necessary Not necessary Aluminium (50B)
Metal other than steel or
aluminium (50N)
Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
Special packing provision:
L1 For UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168,
0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299,
0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435,
0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, 0502 and 0510: Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for
military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective
protective features, may be transported unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are
self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions
of transport. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be
considered for transport unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates
or other suitable handling devices.
LP102 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP102
The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special
provisions of 4.1.5 are met.
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags Steel (50A)
water-resistant Not necessary Aluminium (50B)
Receptacles Metal other than steel or
fibreboard aluminium (50N)
metal Rigid plastics (50H)
plastics Natural wood (50C)
wood Plywood (50D)
Sheets Reconstituted wood (50F)
fibreboard, corrugated Rigid fibreboard (50G)
Tubes
fibreboard
LP200 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP200
This instruction applies to UN 1950 and UN 2037.
The following large packagings are authorized for aerosols and gas cartridges, provided that the general provisions of
4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
Special packing provision:
L2 The large packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent dangerous movement and inadvertent
discharge during normal conditions of transport. For waste aerosols transported in accordance with special
provision 327, the large packagings shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during
transport, e.g. absorbent material. For waste aerosols and waste gas cartridges carried in accordance with
special provision 327, the large packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous
atmospheres and the build-up of pressure.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
LP621 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP621
This instruction applies to UN 3291.
The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For clinical waste placed in inner packagings: Rigid, leakproof large packagings conforming to the provisions of
chapter 6.6 for solids, at the packing group II performance level, provided there is sufficient absorbent material to
absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the large packaging is capable of retaining liquids.
(2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid: Large rigid packagings conforming to the provisions of
chapter 6.6, at the packing group II performance level, for liquids.
Additional provision:
Large packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture
and retain liquids under the performance test conditions in chapter 6.6.
LP622 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP622
This instruction applies to waste of UN 3549 transported for disposal.
The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
metal metal Steel (50A)
plastics plastics Aluminium (50B)
Metal other than steel or aluminium
(50N)
Plywood (50D)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
Rigid plastics (50H)
The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids.
Additional requirement:
1. Fragile articles shall be contained in either a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging.
2. Inner packagings containing sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to
puncture.
3. The inner packaging, the intermediate packaging and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids.
Outer packagings that are not capable of retaining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable
measure of retaining liquids.
4. The inner packaging and/or the intermediate packaging may be flexible. When flexible packagings are used,
they shall be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988
“Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1:
Staircase methods” and the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes
with respect to the length of the bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 Plastics – Film and sheeting –
Determination of tear resistance – Part 2: Elmendorf method. The maximum net mass of each flexible inner
packaging shall be 30 kg.
5. Each flexible intermediate packaging shall contain only one inner packaging.
6. Inner packagings containing a small amount of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided
that there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or
solidify all the liquid content present. Suitable absorbent material which withstands the temperatures and
vibrations liable to occur under normal conditions of transport shall be used.
7. Intermediate packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent
material.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
LP902 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP902
This instruction applies to UN 3268.
(1) Packaged articles:
The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group III performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation
during normal conditions of transport.
(2) Unpackaged articles:
The articles may also be transported unpackaged in dedicated handling devices, vehicles, containers or
wagons when moved to, from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including
intermediate handling locations.
Additional provision:
Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s)
contained in the pressure receptacle(s).
LP903 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP903
This instruction applies to large cells with a gross mass of more than 500 g, large batteries with a gross mass of more
than 12 kg, and equipment containing large cells or large batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552.
The following large packagings are authorized for cells, batteries and equipment containing cells or batteries, provided
that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
Cells, batteries or equipment shall be placed in inner packagings or separated by other suitable means, such as
placement in trays or by dividers, to ensure protection against damage that may be caused under normal conditions of
transport by:
(a) its movement or placement within the large packaging;
(b) contact with other cells, batteries or equipment within the large packaging; and
(c) any loads arising from the superimposed weight of cells, batteries, equipment and packaging components
above the cell, battery or equipment within the large packaging.
When multiple cells, batteries or items of equipment, are packed in the large packaging, bags (e.g. plastics) alone shall
not be used to satisfy these requirements.
Additional requirement:
Batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
LP904 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP904
This instruction applies to single damaged or defective batteries and to single items of equipment containing damaged
or defective cells or batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552.
The following large packagings are authorized for a single damaged or defective battery and for a single item of
equipment containing damaged or defective cells or batteries, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are
met.
For batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A)
aluminium (50B)
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N)
rigid plastics (50H)
plywood (50D)
Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements:
(a) T he damaged or defective battery or equipment containing such cells or batteries shall be individually
packed in an inner packaging and placed inside of an outer packaging. The inner packaging or outer
packaging shall be leakproof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte.
(b) The inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive
thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat.
(c) Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a venting device when appropriate.
(d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement of
the battery or the equipment within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition
during transport. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may also be
used to meet this requirement.
(e) The non-combustibility of the thermal insulation material and the cushioning material shall be assessed
according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is designed or manufactured.
For leaking batteries and cells, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to
absorb any release of electrolyte.
Additional requirement:
Batteries and cells shall be protected against short circuit.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
LP905 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP905
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552 production runs consisting of not
more than 100 cells or batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are
transported for testing.
The following large packagings are authorized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing cells
or batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For a single battery:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements:
(a) A battery of different size, shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a tested design type
listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the
design type has been tested;
(b) The battery shall be packed in an inner packaging and placed inside the outer packaging;
(c) The inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically
non-conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat;
(d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement
of the battery within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport.
When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible and electrically
non-conductive; and
(e) The non-combustibility of the thermal insulation material and the cushioning material shall be assessed
according to a standard recognized in the country where the large packaging is designed or manufactured.
(2) For a single item of equipment containing cells or batteries:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements:
(a) A single item of equipment of different size, shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a tested
design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for
which the design type has been tested;
(b) The equipment shall be constructed or packed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during
transport;
(c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement
of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during transport.
When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement, it shall be non-combustible and electrically
non-conductive; and
(d) The non-combustibility of the cushioning material shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in
the country where the large packaging is designed or manufactured.
Additional requirement:
Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
LP906 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP906
This instruction applies to damaged or defective batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480, 3481, 3551 and 3552 liable to
rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of
toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of transport.
The following large packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For batteries and items of equipment containing batteries:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group I performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
plywood (50D);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
(1) The large packaging shall be capable of meeting the following additional performance requirements in case of
rapid disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous
emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the battery:
(a) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not have a temperature of more than 100°C.
A momentary spike in temperature up to 200°C is acceptable;
(b) No flame shall occur outside the package;
(c) No projectiles shall exit the package;
(d) The structural integrity of the package shall be maintained; and
(e) The large packagings shall have a gas management system (e.g. filter system, air circulation, containment for
gas, gas tight packaging etc.), as appropriate.
(2) The additional large packaging performance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent
authority.
A verification report shall be made available on request. As a minimum requirement, the name of the batteries,
their type as defined in section 38.3.2.3 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, the maximum number of batteries, the
total mass of batteries, the total energy content of the batteries, the large packaging identification and the test
data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the verification
report. A set of specific instructions describing the way to use the package shall also be part of the verification
report.
(3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of section 5.5.3 shall apply. The inner
packaging and outer packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as
the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
(4) The specific instructions for use of the package shall be made available by the packaging manufacturers and
subsequent distributors to the consignor. They shall include at least the identification of the batteries and items
of equipment that may be contained inside the packaging, the maximum number of batteries contained in the
package and the maximum total of the batteries’ energy content, as well as the configuration inside the package,
including the separations and protections used during the performance verification test.
Additional requirement:
Batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the large packaging:
(a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described, e.g. in section 2.9.4.5) allowing for the traceability
of tests results, reference data and characterization models used;
(b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal runaway for the battery type, in the condition it is transported (e.g. usage of an inner
packaging, state of charge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible, electrically non-conductive and absorbent cushioning material
etc.), shall be clearly identified and quantified; the reference list of possible hazards for batteries (e.g. rapidly disassemble, dangerously
react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours) can
be used for this purpose. The quantification of these hazards shall rely on available scientific literature;
(c) The mitigating effects of the large packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of the protections provided
and the construction material properties. A list of technical characteristics and drawings shall be used to support this assessment
(density [kg·m3], specific heat capacity [J·kg-1·K-1], heating value [kJ·kg-1], thermal conductivity [W·m-1·K-1], melting temperature and
flammability temperature [K], heat transfer coefficient of the outer packaging [W·m-2·K-1], …);
(d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal run-away of the battery inside the large packaging in
the normal conditions of transport;
(e) In case the SOC of the battery is not known, the assessment used shall be done with the highest possible SOC corresponding to
the battery use conditions;
(f) The surrounding conditions in which the large packaging may be used and transported shall be described (including for possible
consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other methods) according to the gas management
system of the large packaging;
(g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal runaway triggering and propagation inside
the battery: this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the normal transport condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions
for the possible propagation of the reaction;
(h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period long enough to allow all the possible consequences to occur (e.g. 24 hours);
(i) In the case of multiple batteries and multiple items of equipment containing batteries, additional requirements such as the maximum
number of batteries and items of equipment, the total maximum energy content of the batteries, and the configuration inside the
package, including separations and protections of the parts, shall be considered.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of class 1
4.1.5.1 The general provisions of 4.1.1 shall be met.
4.1.5.2 All packagings for class 1 goods shall be so designed and constructed that:
.1 they will protect the explosives, prevent them escaping and cause no increase in the risk of unintended
ignition or initiation when subjected to normal conditions of transport, including foreseeable changes in
temperature, humidity and pressure;
.2 the complete package can be handled safely in normal conditions of transport; and
.3 the packages will withstand any loading imposed on them by foreseeable stacking to which they will be
subject during transport so that they do not add to the risk presented by the explosives, the containment
function of the packagings is not harmed, and they are not distorted in a way or to an extent which will
reduce their strength or cause instability of a stack.
4.1.5.3 All explosive substances and articles, as prepared for transport, shall have been classified in accordance
with the procedures detailed in 2.1.3.
4.1.5.4 Class 1 goods shall be packed in accordance with the appropriate packing instruction shown in columns 8
and 9 of the Dangerous Goods List, as detailed in 4.1.4.
4.1.5.5 Unless otherwise specified in this Code, packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall conform to
the requirements of chapters 6.1, 6.5 or 6.6, as appropriate, and shall meet their test provisions for packing
group II.
4.1.5.6 The closure device of packagings containing liquid explosives shall ensure a double protection against
leakage.
4.1.5.7 The closure device of metal drums shall include a suitable gasket; if a closure device includes a screw-thread,
the ingress of explosive substances into the screw-thread shall be prevented.
4.1.5.8 Packagings for water-soluble substances shall be water-resistant. Packagings for desensitized or
phlegmatized substances shall be closed to prevent changes in concentration during transport.
4.1.5.9 When the packaging includes a double envelope filled with water which may freeze during transport, a
sufficient quantity of an anti-freeze agent shall be added to the water to prevent freezing. Anti-freeze that
could create a fire hazard because of its inherent flammability shall not be used.
4.1.5.10 Nails, staples and other closure devices made of metal without protective covering shall not penetrate to the
inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosives against contact
with the metal.
4.1.5.11 Inner packagings, fittings and cushioning materials and the placing of explosive substances or articles in
packages shall be accomplished in a manner which prevents the explosive substances or articles from
becoming loose in the outer packaging under normal conditions of transport. Metallic components of articles
shall be prevented from making contact with metal packagings. Articles containing explosive substances
not enclosed in an outer casing shall be separated from each other in order to prevent friction and impact.
Padding, trays, partitioning in the inner or outer packaging, mouldings or receptacles may be used for this
purpose.
4.1.5.12 Packagings shall be made of materials compatible with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained in the
package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials nor leakage causes
the explosive to become unsafe to transport, or the hazard division or compatibility group to change.
4.1.5.13 The ingress of explosive substances into the recesses of seamed metal packagings shall be prevented.
4.1.5.14 Plastics packagings shall not be liable to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity so that a discharge
could cause the packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or function.
4.1.5.15 Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation
or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features may be transported
unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall
be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport. A negative result in Test
Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged.
Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling, storage
or launching devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of transport.
Where such large explosive articles are, as part of their operational safety and suitability tests, subjected to
test regimes that meet the provisions of this Code and such tests have been successfully undertaken, the
competent authority may approve such articles to be transported under this Code.
4.1.5.16 Explosive substances shall not be packed in inner or outer packagings where the differences in internal and
external pressures, due to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the package.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.5.17 Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance of an uncased or partly cased article
may come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 4A, 4B and metal
receptacles), the metal packaging shall be provided with an inner liner or coating (see 4.1.1.2).
4.1.5.18 Packing instruction P101 may be used for any explosive provided the package has been approved by a
competent authority regardless of whether the packaging complies with the packing instruction assignment
in the Dangerous Goods List.
4.1.5.19 Government-owned military dangerous goods, packaged prior to 1 January 1990 in accordance with the
provisions of the IMDG Code in effect at that time, may be transported provided the packagings maintain their
integrity and the goods are declared as government-owned goods packaged prior to 1 January 1990.
4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of class 2
4.1.6.1 General provisions
4.1.6.1.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of pressure receptacles for the transport
of class 2 gases and other dangerous goods in pressure receptacles (e.g. UN 1051 Hydrogen cyanide,
stabilized). Pressure receptacles shall be constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents which
might be caused under normal conditions of transport, including by vibration, or by changes in temperature,
humidity or pressure (resulting from change in altitude, for example).
4.1.6.1.2 Parts of pressure receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall not be affected or
weakened by those dangerous goods and shall not cause a dangerous effect (e.g. catalysing a reaction or
reacting with the dangerous goods). The provisions of ISO 11114-1:2020 and ISO 11114-2:2021 shall be met
as applicable.
4.1.6.1.3 Pressure receptacles, including their closures, shall be selected to contain a gas or a mixture of gases
according to the requirements of 6.2.1.2 and the requirements of the specific packing instructions of 4.1.4.1.
This section also applies to pressure receptacles which are elements of MEGCs.
4.1.6.1.4 Refillable pressure receptacles shall not be filled with a gas or gas mixture different from that previously
contained unless the necessary operations for change of gas service have been performed. The change
of service for compressed and liquefied gases shall be in accordance with ISO 11621:1997, as applicable.
In addition, a pressure receptacle that previously contained a class 8 corrosive substance or a substance
of another class with a corrosive subsidiary hazard shall not be authorized for the transport of a class 2
substance unless the necessary inspection and testing as specified in 6.2.1.6 have been performed.
4.1.6.1.5 Prior to filling, the filler shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the pressure
receptacle is authorized for the gas and, in case of a chemical under pressure, for the propellant to be
transported and that the provisions of this Code have been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and
remain closed during transport. The consignor shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking.
4.1.6.1.6 Pressure receptacles shall be filled according to the working pressures, filling ratios and provisions specified
in the appropriate packing instruction for the specific substance being filled and taking into account the
lowest design pressure of any component. Service equipment having a design pressure lower than other
components shall nevertheless comply with 6.2.1.3.1. Reactive gases and gas mixtures shall be filled to
a pressure such that if complete decomposition of the gas occurs, the working pressure of the pressure
receptacle shall not be exceeded.
4.1.6.1.7 Pressure receptacles, including their closures, shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and
testing requirements detailed in chapter 6.2. When outer packagings are prescribed, the pressure receptacles
shall be firmly secured therein. Unless otherwise specified in the detailed packing instructions, one or more
inner packagings may be enclosed in an outer packaging.
4.1.6.1.8 Valves shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able to withstand damage
without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause inadvertent release of
the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the following methods:
.1 Valves are placed inside the neck of the pressure receptacle and protected by a threaded plug or cap;
.2 Valves are protected by caps or guards. Caps shall possess vent-holes of sufficient cross-sectional area
to evacuate the gas if leakage occurs at the valves;
.3 Valves are protected by shrouds or permanent protective attachments;
.4 Pressure receptacles are transported in frames (e.g. bundles); or
.5 Pressure receptacles are transported in an outer packaging. The packaging as prepared for transport
shall be capable of meeting the drop test specified in 6.1.5.3 at the packing group I performance level.
For pressure receptacles with valves as described in .2, the requirements of ISO 11117:1998, ISO 11117:2008
+ Cor 1:2009 or ISO 11117:2019 shall be met. Requirements for shrouds and permanent protective
attachments used as valve protection under .3, are given in the relevant pressure receptacle shell design
standards, see 6.2.2.1. Valves with inherent protection used for refillable pressure receptacles shall meet
the requirements of clause 4.6.2 of ISO 10297:2006 or clause 5.5.2 of ISO 10297:2014 or clause 5.5.2 of ISO
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
10297:2014 + Amd 1:2017, or in case of self-closing valves, of clause 5.4.2 of ISO 17879:2017. For valves with
inherent protection used for non-refillable cylinders, the requirements of clause 9.2.5 of ISO 11118:2015 or of
clause 9.2.5 of ISO 11118:2015 + Amd 1:2019 shall be met.
For metal hydride storage systems, the valve protection requirements specified in ISO 16111:2008 or
ISO 16111:2018 shall be met.
4.1.6.1.9 Non-refillable pressure receptacles shall:
.1 be transported in an outer packaging, such as a box, or crate, or in shrink-wrapped trays or stretch-
wrapped trays;
.2 be of a water capacity less than or equal to 1.25 L when filled with flammable or toxic gas;
.3 not be used for toxic gases with an LC50 less than or equal to 200 mL/m3; and
.4 not be repaired after being put into service.
4.1.6.1.10 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles, shall be periodically inspected in
accordance with 6.2.1.6 and packing instruction P200, P205, P206 or P208, as applicable. Pressure relief
valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests according to
the provisions of 6.2.1.6.3 and packing instruction P203. Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after they
become due for periodic inspection but may be transported after the expiry of the time limit.
4.1.6.1.11 Repairs shall be consistent with the manufacture and testing requirements of the applicable design and
construction standards and are only permitted as indicated in the relevant periodic inspection standards
specified in 6.2.2.4. Pressure receptacles, other than the jacket of closed cryogenic receptacles, shall not be
subjected to repairs of any of the following:
.1 weld cracks or other weld defects;
.2 cracks in walls;
.3 leaks or defects in the material of the wall, head or bottom.
4.1.6.1.12 Pressure receptacles shall not be offered for filling:
.1 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacle or its service equipment
may be affected;
.2 unless the pressure receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good
working order; or
.3 unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.1.6.1.13 Filled pressure receptacles shall not be offered for transport:
.1 when leaking;
.2 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacle or its service equipment
may be affected;
.3 unless the pressure receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good
working order; or
.4 unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.1.6.1.14 Where in packing instruction P200 cylinders and other pressure receptacles for gases conforming to the
requirements of this subsection and chapter 6.2 are authorized, use is also authorized of cylinders and
pressure receptacles which conform to the requirements of the competent authority of the country in which
the cylinder or pressure receptacle is filled. Valves shall be suitably protected. Pressure receptacles with
capacities of 1 L or less shall be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable material of adequate
strength and design in relation to the capacity of the packaging and its intended use and secured or cushioned
so as to prevent significant movement within the outer packaging during normal conditions of transport.
4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides (class 5.2)
and self-reactive substances of class 4.1
4.1.7.0 General
4.1.7.0.1 For organic peroxides, all receptacles shall be “effectively closed”. Where significant internal pressure may
develop in a package by the evolution of gas, a vent may be fitted, provided the gas emitted will not cause
danger, otherwise the degree of filling shall be limited. Any venting device shall be so constructed that liquid
will not escape when the package is in an upright position and it shall be able to prevent ingress of impurities.
The outer packaging, if any, shall be so designed as not to interfere with the operation of the venting device.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.7.1 Use of packagings (except IBCs)
4.1.7.1.1 Packagings for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances shall conform to the provisions of chapter 6.1
and shall meet its test provisions for packing group II.
4.1.7.1.2 The packing methods for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in packing instruction P520
and are designated OP1 to OP8. The quantities specified for each packing method are the maximum quantities
authorized per package.
4.1.7.1.3 The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned self-reactive substances and organic
peroxides are listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3 and 2.5.3.2.4.
4.1.7.1.4 For new organic peroxides, new self-reactive substances or new formulations of currently assigned organic
peroxides or self-reactive substances, the following procedure shall be used to assign the appropriate
packing method:
.1 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE B or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE B:
Packing method OP5 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance)
satisfies the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.2 (resp. 2.4.2.3.3.2.2) in a packaging authorized by the packing method.
If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging
than those authorized by packing method OP5 (viz. one of the packagings listed for OP1 to OP4), then
the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned;
.2 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE C or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE C:
Packing method OP6 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance)
satisfies the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.3 (resp. 2.4.2.3.3.2.3) in packaging authorized by the packing method.
If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging
than those authorized by packing method OP6, then the corresponding packing method with the lower
OP number is assigned;
.3 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE D or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE D:
Packing method OP7 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance;
.4 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE E or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE E:
Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance;
.5 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE TYPE F:
Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance.
4.1.7.2 Use of intermediate bulk containers
4.1.7.2.1 The currently assigned organic peroxides specifically listed in packing instruction IBC520 may be transported
in IBCs in accordance with this packing instruction. IBCs shall conform to the requirements of chapter 6.5 and
shall meet its test provisions for packing group II.
4.1.7.2.2 Other organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F may be transported in IBCs under conditions
established by the competent authority of the country of origin when, on the basis of the appropriate tests,
that competent authority is satisfied that such transport may be safely conducted. The tests undertaken shall
include those necessary:
.1 to prove that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) complies with the principles for classification;
.2 to prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during the transport;
.3 to determine, when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures associated with the transport
of the product in the IBC concerned as derived from the SADT;
.4 to design, when applicable, pressure and emergency relief devices; and
.5 to determine if any special provisions are necessary for safe transport of the substance.
4.1.7.2.3 For self-reactive substances, temperature control is required according to 2.4.2.3.4. For organic peroxides,
temperature control is required according to 2.5.3.4.1. Temperature control provisions are given in 7.3.7.
4.1.7.2.4 Emergencies to be taken into account are self-accelerating decomposition and fire engulfment. To prevent
explosive rupture of metal or composite IBCs with a complete metal casing, the emergency relief devices
shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating
decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire engulfment calculated by the
equations given in 4.2.1.13.8.
4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances of category A
(class 6.2, UN 2814 and UN 2900)
4.1.8.1 Consignors of infectious substances shall ensure that packages are prepared in such a manner that they
arrive at their destination in good condition and present no hazard to persons or animals during transport.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.8.2 The definitions in 1.2.1 and the general packing provisions of 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.14, except 4.1.1.10 to 4.1.1.12,
apply to infectious substances packages. However, liquids shall only be filled into packagings which have an
appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of transport.
4.1.8.3 An itemized list of contents shall be enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging.
When the infectious substances to be transported are unknown, but suspected of meeting the criteria
for inclusion in category A, the words “suspected category A infectious substance” shall be shown, in
parentheses, following the proper shipping name on the document inside the outer packaging.
4.1.8.4 Before an empty packaging is returned to the consignor, or sent elsewhere, it shall be disinfected or sterilized
to nullify any hazard and any label or mark indicating that it had contained an infectious substance shall be
removed or obliterated.
4.1.8.5 Provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in the primary receptacles
placed within an intermediate packaging are allowed without further testing of the completed package:
.1 Primary receptacles of equivalent or smaller size as compared to the tested primary receptacles may be
used provided:
(a) the primary receptacles are of similar design to the tested primary receptacle (such as shape: round,
rectangular, etc.);
(b) the material of construction of the primary receptacle (glass, plastics, metal, etc.) offers resistance to
impact and stacking forces equal to or greater than that of the originally tested primary receptacle;
(c) the primary receptacles have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of similar design (such
as screw cap, friction lid, etc.);
(d) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up void spaces and to prevent significant
movement of the primary receptacles; and
(e) primary receptacles are oriented within the intermediate packaging in the same manner as in the
tested package.
.2 A lesser number of the tested primary receptacles, or of the alternative types of primary receptacles
identified in .1 above, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to
prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles.
4.1.9 Special packing provisions for radioactive material
4.1.9.1 General
4.1.9.1.1 Radioactive material, packagings and packages shall meet the provisions of chapter 6.4. The quantity of
radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the limits specified in 2.7.2.2, 2.7.2.4.1, 2.7.2.4.4, 2.7.2.4.5,
2.7.2.4.6 and 4.1.9.3.
The types of packages for radioactive materials covered by the provisions of this Code are:
.1 Excepted package (see 1.5.1.5);
.2 Industrial package Type 1 (Type IP-1 package);
.3 Industrial package Type 2 (Type IP-2 package);
.4 Industrial package Type 3 (Type IP-3 package);
.5 Type A package;
.6 Type B(U) package;
.7 Type B(M) package;
.8 Type C package.
Packages containing fissile material or uranium hexafluoride are subject to additional requirements.
4.1.9.1.2 The non-fixed contamination on the external surfaces of any package shall be kept as low as practicable and,
under routine conditions of transport, shall not exceed the following limits:
(a) 4 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters, and
(b) 0.4 Bq/cm2 for all other alpha emitters.
These limits are applicable when averaged over any area of 300 cm2 of any part of the surface.
4.1.9.1.3 A package shall not contain any items other than those that are necessary for the use of the radioactive
material. The interaction between these items and the package under the conditions of transport applicable
to the design shall not reduce the safety of the package.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.9.1.4 Except as provided in 7.1.4.5.11, the level of non-fixed contamination on the external and internal surfaces
of overpacks, cargo transport units and conveyances shall not exceed the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2. This
requirement does not apply to the internal surfaces of freight containers being used as packagings, either
loaded or empty.
4.1.9.1.5 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties the package design shall take into account those
properties. Radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard, packaged in packages that do not require competent
authority approval, shall be transported in packagings, IBCs, tanks or bulk containers fully complying with the
provisions of the relevant chapters of part 6 as appropriate, as well as applicable provisions of chapters 4.1,
4.2 or 4.3 for that subsidiary hazard.
4.1.9.1.6 Before a packaging is first used to transport radioactive material, it shall be confirmed that it has been
manufactured in conformity with the design specifications to ensure compliance with the relevant provisions
of this Code and any applicable certificate of approval. The following requirements shall also be fulfilled, if
applicable:
.1 if the design pressure of the containment system exceeds 35 kPa (gauge), it shall be ensured that the
containment system of each packaging conforms to the approved design requirements relating to the
capability of that system to maintain its integrity under that pressure;
.2 for each packaging intended for use as a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package and for each
packaging intended to contain fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of its shielding
and containment and, where necessary, the heat transfer characteristics and the effectiveness of the
confinement system are within the limits applicable to or specified for the approved design;
.3 for each packaging intended to contain fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of the
criticality safety features is within the limits applicable to or specified for the design and in particular
where, in order to comply with the requirements of 6.4.11.1 neutron poisons are specifically included,
checks shall be performed to confirm the presence and distribution of those neutron poisons.
4.1.9.1.7 Before each shipment of any package, it shall be ensured that the package contains neither:
.1 radionuclides different from those specified for the package design; nor
.2 contents in a form, or physical or chemical state different from those specified for the package design.
4.1.9.1.8 Before each shipment of any package, it shall be ensured that all the requirements specified in the relevant
provisions of this Code and in the applicable certificates of approval have been fulfilled. The following
requirements shall also be fulfilled, if applicable:
.1 it shall be ensured that lifting attachments which do not meet the requirements of 6.4.2.2 have been
removed or otherwise rendered incapable of being used for lifting the package, in accordance with 6.4.2.3;
.2 each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package shall be held until equilibrium conditions have been
approached closely enough to demonstrate compliance with the requirements for temperature and
pressure unless an exemption from these requirements has received unilateral approval;
.3 for each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package, it shall be ensured by inspection and/or appropriate
tests that all closures, valves and other openings of the containment system through which the radioactive
contents might escape are properly closed and, where appropriate, sealed in the manner for which the
demonstrations of compliance with the requirements of 6.4.8.8 and 6.4.10.3 were made;
.4 for packages containing fissile material the measurement specified in 6.4.11.5 (b) and the tests to
demonstrate closure of each package as specified in 6.4.11.8 shall be performed.
.5 for packages intended to be used for shipment after storage, it shall be ensured that all packaging
components and radioactive contents have been maintained during storage in a manner such that all
the requirements specified in the relevant provisions of this Code and in the applicable certificates of
approval have been fulfilled.
4.1.9.1.9 The consignor shall also have a copy of any instructions with regard to the proper closing of the package and
any preparation for shipment before making any shipment under the terms of the certificates.
4.1.9.1.10 Except for consignments under exclusive use, the transport index of any package or overpack shall not
exceed 10, nor shall the criticality safety index of any package or overpack exceed 50.
4.1.9.1.11 Except for packages or overpacks transported under exclusive use by rail or by road under the conditions
specified in 7.1.4.5.5.1, or under exclusive use and special arrangement by ship under the conditions specified
in 7.1.4.5.7, the maximum dose rate at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack shall not
exceed 2 mSv/h.
4.1.9.1.12 The maximum dose rate at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack under exclusive use
shall not exceed 10 mSv/h.
4.1.9.1.13 Pyrophoric radioactive material shall be packaged in Type A, Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C packages and
shall also be suitably inerted.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.1.9.2 Provisions and controls for transport of LSA material and SCO
4.1.9.2.1 The quantity of LSA material or SCO in a single Type IP-1 package, Type IP-2 package, Type IP-3 package, or
object or collection of objects, whichever is appropriate, shall be so restricted that the external dose rate at
3 m from the unshielded material or object or collection of objects does not exceed 10 mSv/h.
4.1.9.2.2 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, which is not excepted under 2.7.2.3.5, the
applicable requirements of 7.1.4.5.15 and 7.1.4.5.16 shall be met.
4.1.9.2.3 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, the applicable requirements of 6.4.11.1 shall
be met.
4.1.9.2.4 LSA material and SCO in groups LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III may be transported unpackaged under the
following conditions:
.1 all unpackaged material other than ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides shall be
transported in such a manner that, under routine conditions of transport, there will be no escape of the
radioactive contents from the conveyance nor will there be any loss of shielding;
.2 each conveyance shall be under exclusive use, except when only transporting SCO-I on which the
contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than ten times the applicable
level specified in 2.7.1.2;
.3 for SCO-I where it is suspected that non-fixed contamination exists on inaccessible surfaces in excess
of the values specified in 2.7.2.3.2.1.1, measures shall be taken to ensure that the radioactive material is
not released into the conveyance; and
.4 unpackaged fissile material shall meet the requirements of 2.7.2.3.5.5.
.5 for SCO-III;
.1 transport shall be under exclusive use by road, rail, inland waterway or sea;
.2 stacking shall not be permitted;
.3 all activities associated with the shipment, including radiation protection, emergency response and
any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls that are to be employed
during transport shall be described in a transport plan. The transport plan shall demonstrate that
the overall level of safety in transport is at least equivalent to that which would be provided if the
requirements of 6.4.7.14 (only for the test specified in 6.4.15.6, preceded by the tests specified
in 6.4.15.2 and 6.4.15.3) had been met.
.4 the requirements of 6.4.5.1 and 6.4.5.2 for a Type IP-2 package shall be satisfied, except that the
maximum damage referred to in 6.4.15.4 may be determined based on provisions in the transport
plan, and the requirements of 6.4.15.5 are not applicable.
.5 the object and any shielding are secured to the conveyance in accordance with 6.4.2.1.
.6 the shipment shall be subject to multilateral approval.
4.1.9.2.5 LSA material and SCO, except as otherwise specified in 4.1.9.2.4, shall be packaged in accordance with
table 4.1.9.2.5.
Table 4.1.9.2.5 – Industrial package provisions for LSA material and SCO
Industrial package type
Radioactive contents
Exclusive use Not under exclusive use
LSA-I
Solida Type IP-1 Type IP-1
Liquid Type IP-1 Type IP-2
LSA-II
Solid Type IP-2 Type IP-2
Liquid and gas Type IP-2 Type IP-3
LSA-III Type IP-2 Type IP-3
a
SCO-I Type IP-1 Type IP-1
SCO-II Type IP-2 Type IP-2
a
Under the conditions specified in 4.1.9.2.4, LSA-I material and SCO-I may be transported unpackaged.
4.1.9.3 Packages containing fissile material
The contents of packages containing fissile material shall be as specified for the package design either
directly in the provisions of this Code or in the certificate of approval.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 4.2
Use of portable tanks and multiple-element
gas containers (MEGCs)
The provisions of this chapter also apply to road tank vehicles to the extent indicated in chapter 6.8.
4.2.0 Transitional provisions
4.2.0.1 The provisions for the use and construction of portable tanks in this chapter and chapter 6.7 are based on the
United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods. IMO type portable tanks and road
tank vehicles certified and approved prior to 1 January 2003 in accordance with the provisions of the IMDG
Code in force on 1 July 1999 (amendment 29) may continue to be used provided that they are found to meet
the applicable periodic inspections and test provisions. They shall meet the provisions set out in columns
(13) and (14) of chapter 3.2. Detailed explanation and construction provisions may be found in CCC.1/Circ.3
Revised guidance on the continued use of existing IMO type portable tanks and road tank vehicles for the
transport of dangerous goods.
Note: For ease of reference, the following descriptions of existing IMO type tanks are included:
IMO type 1 tank means a portable tank for the transport of substances of classes 3 to 9 fitted with pressure-
relief devices, having a maximum allowable working pressure of 1.75 bar and above.
IMO type 2 tank means a portable tank fitted with pressure-relief devices, having a maximum allowable
working pressure equal to or above 1.0 bar but below 1.75 bar, intended for the transport of certain dangerous
liquids of low hazard and certain solids.
IMO type 4 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of dangerous goods of classes 3 to 9 and
includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis, with at least four
twist locks which comply with ISO standards, (e.g. ISO 1161:1984).
IMO type 5 tank means a portable tank fitted with pressure-relief devices which is used for non-refrigerated
liquefied gases of class 2.
IMO type 6 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and
includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached tank or a tank attached to a chassis which is fitted with
items of service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases.
IMO type 7 tank means a thermally insulated portable tank fitted with items of service and structural
equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases. The portable tank shall be capable of
being transported, loaded and discharged without the need of removal of its structural equipment, and shall
be capable of being lifted when full. It shall not be permanently secured on board the ship.
IMO type 8 tank means a road tank vehicle for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and
includes a semi-trailer with a permanently attached thermally insulated tank fitted with items of service
equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases.
IMO type 9 tank means a road gas elements vehicle for the transport of compressed gases of class 2 with
elements linked to each other by a manifold, permanently attached to a chassis, which is fitted with items of
service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases. Elements are cylinders,
tubes and bundles of cylinders, intended for the transport of gases as defined in 2.2.1.1.
Note: IMO type 4, 6 and 8 road tank vehicles may be constructed after 1 January 2003 in accordance with
the provisions of chapter 6.8.
4.2.0.2 UN portable tanks and MEGCs constructed according to a design approval certificate which has been issued
before 1 January 2008 may continue to be used provided that they are found to meet the applicable periodic
inspection and test provisions.
4.2.0.3 Portable tanks and MEGCs manufactured before 1 January 2012, that conform to the marking provisions of
6.7.2.20.1, 6.7.3.16.1, 6.7.4.15.1 or 6.7.5.13.1 of the IMDG Code in force on 1 January 2010 (amendment 34-08),
as relevant, may continue to be used if they comply with all other relevant provisions of the current edition of
the Code including, when applicable, the requirement of 6.7.2.20.1 (g) for marking the symbol “S” on the plate
when the shell or the compartment is divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7,500 L capacity.
When the shell, or the compartment, was already divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7,500
L capacity before 1 January 2012, the capacity of the shell, or respectively of the compartment, need not be
supplemented with the symbol “S” until the next periodic inspection or test according to 6.7.2.19.5 is performed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Portable tanks manufactured before 1 January 2014 need not be marked with the portable tank instruction as
required in 6.7.2.20.2, 6.7.3.16.2 and 6.7.4.15.2 until the next periodic inspection and test.
Portable tanks and MECGs manufactured before 1 January 2014 need not comply with the requirements
of 6.7.2.13.1.6, 6.7.3.9.1.5, 6.7.4.8.1.5 and 6.7.5.6.1 (d) concerning the marking of the pressure relief devices.
IMO portable tanks manufactured before 1 January 2003 shall be marked with an indication of the portable
tank instruction for which it meets the minimum test pressure, minimum shell thickness, pressure relief
requirements and bottom opening requirements as shown in 4.2.5.2.6 as required in 6.7.2.20.2, 6.7.3.16.2
and 6.7.4.15.2. These portable tanks need not be marked with the portable tank instruction until the next
periodic inspection and test.
4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport
of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9
4.2.1.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of substances
of classes 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9. In addition to these general provisions, portable tanks shall conform to the
design, construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6.7.2. Substances shall be transported in
portable tanks conforming to the applicable portable tank instruction and the portable tank special provisions
assigned to each substance in the Dangerous Goods List.
4.2.1.2 During transport, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment
are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way. Examples of
such protection are given in 6.7.2.17.5.
4.2.1.3 Certain substances are chemically unstable. They are accepted for transport only when the necessary
steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or polymerization during
transport. To this end, care shall in particular be taken to ensure that shells do not contain any substances
liable to promote these reactions.
4.2.1.4 The temperature of the outer surface of the shell, excluding openings and their closures, or of the thermal
insulation shall not exceed 70°C during transport. When necessary, the shell shall be thermally insulated.
4.2.1.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks
filled with the previous substance.
4.2.1.6 Substances shall not be transported in adjoining compartments of shells when they may react dangerously
with each other and cause:
.1 combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat;
.2 evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxiant gases;
.3 the formation of corrosive substances;
.4 the formation of unstable substances;
.5 dangerous rise in pressure.
4.2.1.7 The design approval certificate, the test report and the certificate showing the results of the initial inspection
and test for each portable tank issued by the competent authority or its authorized body shall be retained by
the authority or body and the owner. Owners shall be able to provide this documentation upon the request of
any competent authority.
4.2.1.8 Unless the name of the substance(s) being transported appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.2.20.2, a
copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.2.18.1 shall be made available upon the request of a competent authority
or its authorized body and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.
4.2.1.9 Degree of filling
4.2.1.9.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure that the appropriate portable tank is used and that the portable tank is
not loaded with substances which, in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and
any protective linings, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably
weaken these materials. The shipper may need to consult the manufacturer of the substance in conjunction
with the competent authority for guidance on the compatibility of the substance with the portable tank
materials.
4.2.1.9.1.1 Portable tanks shall not be filled in excess of the maximum degree of filling specified in 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.6.
The applicability of 4.2.1.9.2, 4.2.1.9.3 or 4.2.1.9.5.1 to individual substances is specified in the applicable
portable tank instructions or special provisions in 4.2.5.2.6 or 4.2.5.3 and columns 13 and 14 of the Dangerous
Goods List.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.2.1.9.2 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for general use is determined by the formula:
97
Degree of filling = _________
1 + α(tr - tf )
4.2.1.9.3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for liquids of class 6.1 and class 8, in packing groups I and II, and liquids
with an absolute vapour pressure of more than 175 kPa (1.75 bar) at 65°C, or for liquids identified as marine
pollutants is determined by the formula:
95
Degree of filling = _________
1 + α(tr - tf )
4.2.1.9.4 In these formulae, α is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid between the mean temperature
of the liquid during filling (tf ) and the maximum mean bulk temperature during transport (tr) (both in °C). For
liquids transported under ambient conditions, α could be calculated by the formula:
d – d50
α = _______
15
35 d50
in which d15 and d50 are the densities of the liquid at 15°C and 50°C, respectively.
4.2.1.9.4.1 The maximum mean bulk temperature (tr) shall be taken as 50°C except that, for journeys under temperate or
extreme climatic conditions, the competent authorities concerned may agree to a lower or require a higher
temperature, as appropriate.
4.2.1.9.5 The provisions of 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.4.1 do not apply to portable tanks which contain substances maintained
at a temperature above 50°C during transport (such as by means of a heating device). For portable tanks
equipped with a heating device, a temperature regulator shall be used to ensure the maximum degree of filling
is not more than 95% full at any time during transport.
4.2.1.9.5.1 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids transported above their melting points and for elevated
temperature liquids shall be determined by the following formula:
dr
Degree of filling = 95 __
df
in which df and dr are the densities of the liquid at the mean temperature of the liquid during filling and the
maximum mean bulk temperature during transport respectively.
4.2.1.9.6 Portable tanks shall not be offered for transport:
.1 with a degree of filling, for liquids having a viscosity less than 2,680 mm2/s at 20°C or at the maximum
temperature of the substance during transport in the case of a heated substance, of more than 20% but
less than 80% unless the shells of portable tanks are divided, by partitions or surge plates, into sections
of not more than 7,500 L capacity;
.2 with residue of substances previously transported adhering to the outside of the shell or service
equipment;
.3 when leaking or damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing
arrangements may be affected; and
.4 unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order.
For certain dangerous substances, a lower degree of filling may be required.
4.2.1.9.7 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off where the tank is filled. This provision does not apply
to portable tanks which, according to 6.7.2.17.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift
pockets.
4.2.1.9.8 Portable tanks shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board.
4.2.1.10 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 3 substances in portable tanks
All portable tanks intended for the transport of flammable liquids shall be closed and be fitted with relief
devices in accordance with 6.7.2.8 to 6.7.2.15.
4.2.1.11 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 4 substances
(other than class 4.1 self-reactive substances) in portable tanks
[Reserved]
Note: For class 4.1 self-reactive substances, see 4.2.1.13.
4.2.1.12 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 5.1 substances in portable tanks
[Reserved]
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.2.1.13 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 5.2 substances
and class 4.1 self-reactive substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.13.1 Each substance shall have been tested and a report submitted to the competent authority of the country
of origin for approval. Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of destin
ation. The notification shall contain relevant transport information and the report with test results. The tests
undertaken shall include those necessary:
.1 to prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during transport;
.2 to provide data for the design of the pressure and emergency relief devices, taking into account the
design characteristics of the portable tank.
Any additional provisions necessary for safe transport of the substance shall be clearly described in the
report.
4.2.1.13.2 The following provisions apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of type F organic peroxides or
type F self-reactive substances with a self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) of 55°C or more.
In case of conflict, these provisions prevail over those specified in 6.7.2. Emergencies to be taken into account
are self-accelerating decomposition of the substance and fire-engulfment as described in 4.2.1.13.8.
4.2.1.13.3 The additional provisions for transport of organic peroxides or self-reactive substances with an SADT less
than 55°C in portable tanks shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of origin. Notification
thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of destination.
4.2.1.13.4 The portable tank shall be designed for a test pressure of at least 0.4 MPa (4 bar).
4.2.1.13.5 Portable tanks shall be fitted with temperature-sensing devices.
4.2.1.13.6 Portable tanks shall be fitted with pressure-relief devices and emergency relief devices. Vacuum-relief
devices may also be used. Pressure-relief devices shall operate at pressures determined according to both
the properties of the substance and the construction characteristics of the portable tank. Fusible elements
are not allowed in the shell.
4.2.1.13.7 The pressure-relief devices shall consist of spring-loaded valves fitted to prevent significant build-up
within the portable tank of the decomposition products and vapours released at a temperature of 50°C.
The capacity and start-to-discharge pressure of the relief valves shall be based on the results of the tests
specified in 4.2.1.13.1. The start-to-discharge pressure shall, however, in no case be such that liquid would
escape from the valve(s) if the portable tank were overturned.
4.2.1.13.8 The emergency relief devices may be of the spring-loaded or frangible types, or a combination of the two,
designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less than one
hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the following formula:
q = 70961FA0.82
where:
q = heat absorption (W)
A = wetted area (m2)
F = insulation factor;
F = 1 for non-insulated vessels, or
U (923 - T)
F = _________for insulated shells
47032
where:
K = heat conductivity of insulation layer (W·m-1·K-1)
L = thickness of insulation layer (m)
U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation (W·m-2·K-1)
T = temperature of substance at relieving conditions (K)
The start-to-discharge pressure of the emergency relief device(s) shall be higher than that specified
in 4.2.1.13.7 and based on the results of the tests referred to in 4.2.1.13.1. The emergency relief devices shall
be dimensioned in such a way that the maximum pressure in the tank never exceeds the test pressure of the
portable tank.
Note: An example of a method to determine the size of emergency relief devices is given in appendix 5 of the
Manual of Tests and Criteria.
4.2.1.13.9 For insulated portable tanks, the capacity and setting of emergency relief device(s) shall be determined
assuming a loss of insulation from 1% of the surface area.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.2.1.13.10 Vacuum-relief devices and spring-loaded valves shall be provided with flame arresters. Due attention shall be
paid to the reduction of the relief capacity caused by the flame arrester.
4.2.1.13.11 Service equipment such as valves and external piping shall be so arranged that no substance remains in
them after filling the portable tank.
4.2.1.13.12 Portable tanks may be either insulated or protected by a sunshield. If the SADT of the substance in the
portable tank is 55°C or less, or the portable tank is constructed of aluminium, the portable tank shall be
completely insulated. The outer surface shall be finished in white or bright metal.
4.2.1.13.13 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90% at 15°C.
4.2.1.13.14 The mark as required in 6.7.2.20.2 shall include the UN number and the technical name with the approved
concentration of the substance concerned.
4.2.1.13.15 Organic peroxides and self-reactive substances specifically listed in portable tank instruction T23 in 4.2.5.2.6
may be transported in portable tanks.
4.2.1.14 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 6.1 substances in portable tanks
[Reserved]
4.2.1.15 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 6.2 substances in portable tanks
[Reserved]
4.2.1.16 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 7 substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.16.1 Portable tanks used for the transport of radioactive material shall not be used for the transport of other
goods.
4.2.1.16.2 The degree of filling for portable tanks shall not exceed 90% or, alternatively, any other value approved by the
competent authority.
4.2.1.17 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 8 substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.17.1 Pressure-relief devices of portable tanks used for the transport of class 8 substances shall be inspected at
intervals not exceeding one year.
4.2.1.18 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of class 9 substances in portable tanks
[Reserved]
4.2.1.19 Additional provisions applicable to the transport of solid substances
transported above their melting point
4.2.1.19.1 Solid substances transported or offered for transport above their melting point which are not assigned a
portable tank instruction in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List of chapter 3.2 or when the assigned
portable tank instruction does not apply to transport at temperatures above their melting point may be
transported in portable tanks provided that the solid substances are classified in classes 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1,
8 or 9 and have no subsidiary hazard other than that of class 6.1 or class 8 and are in packing group II or III.
4.2.1.19.2 Unless otherwise indicated in the Dangerous Goods List, portable tanks used for the transport of these solid
substances above their melting point shall conform to the provisions of portable tank instruction T4 for solid
substances of packing group III or T7 for solid substances of packing group II. A portable tank that affords
an equivalent or greater level of safety may be selected in accordance with 4.2.5.2.5. The maximum degree
of filling (in %) shall be determined according to 4.2.1.9.5 (TP3).
4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport
of non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure
4.2.2.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of non-
refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2 and chemicals under pressure.
4.2.2.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6.7.3.
Non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure shall be transported in portable tanks
conforming to portable tank instruction T50 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and any portable tank special provisions
assigned to specific non-refrigerated liquefied gases in the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.3.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.2.2.3 During transport, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment
are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way. Examples of
such protection are given in 6.7.3.13.5.
4.2.2.4 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases are chemically unstable. They are accepted for transport only
when the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or
polymerization during transport. To this end, care shall be taken to ensure that portable tanks do not contain
any non-refrigerated liquefied gases liable to promote these reactions.
4.2.2.5 Unless the name of the gas(es) being transported appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.3.16.2, a copy of
the certificate specified in 6.7.3.14.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and readily
provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.
4.2.2.6 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks
filled with the previous non-refrigerated liquefied gas.
4.2.2.7 Filling
4.2.2.7.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure that the portable tank is approved for the non-refrigerated liquefied gas
or the propellant of the chemical under pressure to be transported and that the portable tank is not loaded with
non-refrigerated liquefied gases, or with chemicals under pressure which, in contact with the materials of the
shell, gaskets and service equipment, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products
or appreciably weaken these materials. During filling, the temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or
propellant of chemicals under pressure shall fall within the limits of the design temperature range.
4.2.2.7.2 The maximum mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/L) shall not exceed the
density of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at 50°C multiplied by 0.95. Furthermore, the shell shall not be
liquid-full at 60°C.
4.2.2.7.3 Portable tanks shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass and the maximum permissible
load mass specified for each gas to be transported.
4.2.2.7.4 Portable tanks shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board.
4.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for transport:
.1 in an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the portable
tank;
.2 when leaking;
.3 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the tank or its lifting or securing arrangements may
be affected; and
.4 unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order.
4.2.2.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not apply to
portable tanks which, according to 6.7.3.13.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift
pockets.
4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the transport
of refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2
4.2.3.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the transport of refrigerated
liquefied gases.
4.2.3.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing provisions detailed in 6.7.4.
Refrigerated liquefied gases shall be transported in portable tanks conforming to portable tank instruction T75
as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each substance in column 14
of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.3.
4.2.3.3 During transport, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service equipment
are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, it need not be protected in this way. Examples of
such protection are provided in 6.7.4.12.5.
4.2.3.4 Unless the name of the gas(es) being transported appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.4.15.2, a copy of
the certificate specified in 6.7.4.13.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and readily
provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.2.3.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable tanks
filled with the previous substance.
4.2.3.6 Filling
4.2.3.6.1 Prior to filling, the shipper shall ensure that the portable tank is approved for the refrigerated liquefied gas to
be transported and that the portable tank is not loaded with refrigerated liquefied gases which, in contact
with the materials of the shell, gaskets and service equipment, are likely to react dangerously with them
to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. During filling, the temperature of the
refrigerated liquefied gas shall be within the limits of the design temperature range.
4.2.3.6.2 In estimating the initial quantity of gas filled into the shell, the necessary holding time for the intended journey,
including any delays which might be encountered, shall be taken into consideration. The initial quantity of gas
filled into the shell, except as provided for in 4.2.3.6.3 and 4.2.3.6.4, shall be such that if the contents, except
helium, were to be raised to a temperature at which the vapour pressure is equal to the maximum allowable
working pressure (MAWP) the volume occupied by liquid would not exceed 98%.
4.2.3.6.3 Shells intended for the transport of helium can be filled up to but not above the inlet of the pressure-relief
device.
4.2.3.6.4 A higher initial quantity of gas filled into the shell may be allowed, subject to approval by the competent
authority, when the intended duration of transport is considerably shorter than the holding time.
4.2.3.6.5 Portable tanks shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board.
4.2.3.7 Actual holding time
4.2.3.7.1 The actual holding time shall be calculated for each journey in accordance with a procedure recognized by
the competent authority, on the basis of the following:
.1 the reference holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be transported (see 6.7.4.2.8.1) (as indicated
on the plate referred to in 6.7.4.15.1);
.2 the actual filling density;
.3 the actual filling pressure;
.4 the lowest set pressure of the pressure-limiting device(s).
4.2.3.7.2 The actual holding time shall be marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to
the portable tank, in accordance with 6.7.4.15.2.
4.2.3.7.3 The date at which the actual holding time ends shall be entered in the transport document (see 5.4.1.5.19).
4.2.3.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for transport:
.1 in an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the shell;
.2 when leaking;
.3 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing
arrangements may be affected;
.4 unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order;
.5 unless the actual holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas being transported has been determined
in accordance with 4.2.3.7 and the portable tank is marked in accordance with 6.7.4.15.2; and
.6 unless the duration of transport, after taking into consideration any delays which might be encountered,
does not exceed the actual holding time.
4.2.3.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not apply to
portable tanks which, according to 6.7.4.12.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off the forklift
pockets.
4.2.4 General provisions for the use of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)
4.2.4.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)
for the transport of non-refrigerated gases.
4.2.4.2 MEGCs shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6.7.5. The
elements of MEGCs shall be periodically inspected according to the provisions set out in packing instruction
P200 and in 6.2.1.6.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.2.4.3 During transport, MEGCs shall be protected against damage to the elements and service equipment resulting
from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the elements and service equipment are so constructed
as to withstand impact or overturning, they need not be protected in this way. Examples of such protection
are given in 6.7.5.10.4.
4.2.4.4 The periodic testing and inspection requirements for MEGCs are specified in 6.7.5.12. MEGCs or their
elements shall not be charged or filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be transported
after the expiry of the time limit.
4.2.4.5 Filling
4.2.4.5.1 Prior to filling, the MEGC shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the gas to be transported and
that the applicable provisions of this Code have been met.
4.2.4.5.2 Elements of MEGCs shall be filled according to the working pressures, filling ratios and filling provisions
specified in packing instruction P200 for the specific gas being filled into each element. In no case shall an
MEGC or group of elements be filled as a unit in excess of the lowest working pressure of any given element.
4.2.4.5.3 MEGCs shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass.
4.2.4.5.4 Isolation valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during transport. Toxic gases of class 2.3 shall
only be transported in MEGCs where each element is equipped with an isolation valve.
4.2.4.5.5 The opening(s) for filling shall be closed by caps or plugs. The leakproofness of the closures and equipment
shall be verified by the shipper after filling.
4.2.4.5.6 MEGCs shall not be offered for filling:
.1 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or their structural or
service equipment may be affected;
.2 unless the pressure receptacles and their structural and service equipment have been examined and
found to be in good working order; and
.3 unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.2.4.5.7 Multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) shall not be filled or discharged while they remain on board.
4.2.4.6 Filled MEGCs shall not be offered for transport;
.1 when leaking;
.2 when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or their structural or
service equipment may be affected;
.3 unless the pressure receptacles and their structural and service equipment have been examined and
found to be in good working order; and
.4 unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.2.4.7 Empty MEGCs that have not been cleaned and purged shall comply with the same requirements as MEGCs
filled with the previous substance.
4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions
4.2.5.1 General
4.2.5.1.1 This section includes the portable tank instructions and special provisions applicable to dangerous goods
authorized to be transported in portable tanks. Each portable tank instruction is identified by an alpha-numeric
designation (T1 to T75). The Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 indicates the portable tank instruction that
shall be used for each substance permitted for transport in a portable tank. When no portable tank instruction
appears in the Dangerous Goods List, transport of the substance in portable tanks is not permitted unless a
competent authority approval is granted as set out in 6.7.1.3. Portable tank special provisions are assigned to
specific dangerous goods in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. Each portable tank special provision
is identified by an alpha-numeric designation (such as TP1). A listing of the portable tank special provisions is
provided in 4.2.5.3.
Note: The gases authorized for transport in MEGCs are indicated in the column “MEGC” in Tables 1 and 2 of
packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.2.5.2 Portable tank instructions
4.2.5.2.1 Portable tank instructions apply to dangerous goods of classes 1 to 9. Portable tank instructions provide
specific information relevant to portable tank provisions applicable to specific substances. These provisions
shall be met in addition to the general provisions in this chapter and chapter 6.7 or chapter 6.10.
4.2.5.2.2 For substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9, the portable tank instructions indicate the applicable minimum
test pressure, the minimum shell thickness (in reference steel or the minimum shell thickness of fibre-reinforced
plastics), bottom opening provisions and pressure-relief provisions. In T23, self-reactive substances of class
4.1 and class 5.2 organic peroxides permitted to be transported in portable tanks are listed along with
applicable control and emergency temperatures.
4.2.5.2.3 Non-refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T50. T50 provides the maximum
allowable working pressures, bottom opening provisions, pressure-relief provisions and filling ratio provisions
for non-refrigerated liquefied gases permitted for transport in portable tanks.
4.2.5.2.4 Refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T75.
4.2.5.2.5 Determination of the appropriate portable tank instructions
When a specific portable tank instruction is specified in the Dangerous Goods List, additional portable tanks
which possess higher test pressures, greater shell thicknesses, more stringent bottom opening and pressure-
relief device arrangements may be used. The following guidelines apply to determining the appropriate
portable tanks which may be used for transport of particular substances:
Portable tank
instruction Portable tank instructions also permitted
specified
T1 T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T2 T4, T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T3 T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T4 T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T5 T10, T14, T19, T20, T22
T6 T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T7 T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T8 T9, T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T9 T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T10 T14, T19, T20, T22
T11 T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T12 T14, T16, T18, T19, T20, T22
T13 T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T14 T19, T20, T22
T15 T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T16 T18, T19, T20, T22
T17 T18 , T19, T20, T21, T22
T18 T19, T20, T22
T19 T20, T22
T20 T22
T21 T22
T22 None
T23 None
T50 None
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.2.5.2.6 Portable tank instructions
Portable tank instructions specify the provisions applicable to a portable tank when used for the transport of
specific substances. Portable tank instructions T1 to T22 specify the applicable minimum test pressure, the
minimum shell thickness (in millimetres of reference steel) or the minimum shell thickness for fibre-reinforced
plastics (FRP) portable tanks, and the pressure relief and bottom-opening provisions.
T1 – T22 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTIONS T1 – T22
These portable tank instructions apply to liquid and solid substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9. The general
provisions of section 4.2.1 and the requirements of section 6.7.2 shall be met. The instructions for portable tanks
with FRP shells apply to substances of classes or divisions 1, 3, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9. Additionally, the provisions of
chapter 6.10 apply to the portable tanks with FRP shells.
Minimum shell
thickness Pressure relief Bottom opening
Portable tank Minimum test
(in mm – reference provisionsa provisionsb
instruction pressure (bar)
steel) (see 6.7.2.8) (see 6.7.2.6)
(see 6.7.2.4)
T1 1.5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T2 1.5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T3 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T4 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T5 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T6 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T7 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T8 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal Not allowed
T9 4 6 mm Normal Not allowed
T10 4 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T11 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T12 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T13 6 6 mm Normal Not allowed
T14 6 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T15 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T16 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T17 10 6 mm Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T18 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T19 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T20 10 8 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T21 10 10 mm Normal Not allowed
T22 10 10 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
a
When the word “Normal” is indicated, all the provisions of 6.7.2.8 apply except for 6.7.2.8.3.
b
When this column indicates “not allowed”, bottom openings are not permitted when the substance to be transported
is a liquid (see 6.7.2.6.1). When the substance to be transported is a solid at all temperatures encountered under normal
conditions of transport, bottom openings conforming to the provisions of 6.7.2.6.2 are authorized.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T23
This portable tank instruction applies to self-reactive substances of class 4.1 and organic peroxides of class 5.2. The
general provisions of 4.2.1 and the provisions of 6.7.2 shall be met. The provisions specific to self-reactive substances
of class 4.1 and organic peroxides of class 5.2 in 4.2.1.13 shall also be met.
The formulations not listed in 2.4.2.3.2.3 or 2.5.3.2.4 but listed below may also be transported packed in accordance
with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1, with the same control and emergency temperatures, if
applicable.
Minimum
Minimum shell Bottom Pressure
Control
UN test thickness opening relief Degree Emergency
Substance temper
No. pressure (mm – require- require- of filling temperature
ature
(bar) reference ments ments
steel)
3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, 4 See See See See
LIQUID 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, 4.2.1.13.6,
not more than 56% in diluent 4.2.1.13.7,
type B 4.2.1.13.8
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not
more than 72% with water
Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more
than 90% in diluent type A
Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more
than 32% in diluent type A
Isopropyl cumyl hydroperoxide,
not more than 72% in diluent
type A
p-Menthyl hydroperoxide, not
more than 72% in diluent type A
Pinanyl hydroperoxide, not more
than 56% in diluent type A
3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, 4 See See See See
SOLID 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13
Dicumyl peroxide 4.2.1.13.6,
4.2.1.13.7,
4.2.1.13.8
3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, 4 See See See See
LIQUID, TEMPERATURE 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13
CONTROLLED 4.2.1.13.6,
4.2.1.13.7,
4.2.1.13.8
tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate, -10°C -5°C
not more than 47% in diluent
type A
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not +30°C +35°C
more than 32% in diluent type B
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethyl- +15°C +20°C
hexanoate, not more than 32%
in diluent type B
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not +5°C +10°C
more than 27% in diluent type B
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5- +35°C +40°C
trimethylhexanoate, not more
than 32% in diluent type B
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) 0°C +5°C
peroxide, not more than 38% in
diluent type A or type B
Peroxyacetic acid, distilled, +30°C +35°C
stabilized
Diluent type B is tert-Butyl alcohol.
Provided that steps have been taken to achieve the safety equivalence of 65% tert-butyl hydroperoxide and 35% water.
Maximum quantity per portable tank: 2,000 kg.
As approved by the competent authority.
Formulation derived from distillation of peroxyacetic acid originating from peroxyacetic acid in concentration of not
more than 41% with water, total active oxygen (peroxyacetic acid + H2O2) ≤ 9.5%, which fulfils the criteria of 2.5.3.3.2.6.
“CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard placard required (Model No. 8, see 5.2.2.2.2).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T23
Minimum
Minimum shell Bottom Pressure
Control
UN test thickness opening relief Degree Emergency
Substance temper
No. pressure (mm – require- require- of filling temperature
ature
(bar) reference ments ments
steel)
3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE TYPE F, 4 See See See See
SOLID, TEMPERATURE 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13
CONTROLLED 4.2.1.13.6,
4.2.1.13.7,
4.2.1.13.8
3229 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID 4 See See See See
TYPE F 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13
4.2.1.13.6,
4.2.1.13.7,
4.2.1.13.8
3230 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID 4 See See See See
TYPE F 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13
4.2.1.13.6,
4.2.1.13.7,
4.2.1.13.8
3239 SELF-REACTIVE LIQUID 4 See See See See
TYPE F, TEMPERATURE 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13
CONTROLLED 4.2.1.13.6,
4.2.1.13.7,
4.2.1.13.8
3240 SELF-REACTIVE SOLID 4 See See See See
TYPE F, TEMPERATURE 6.7.2.4.2 6.7.2.6.3 6.7.2.8.2, 4.2.1.13.13
CONTROLLED 4.2.1.13.6,
4.2.1.13.7,
4.2.1.13.8
As approved by the competent authority.
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos.
3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of 4.2.2 and the provisions of 6.7.3 shall be met.
Maximum allowable
working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum
UN Non-refrigerated liquefied
(bar) Small; Bare; below provisionsb filling ratio
No. gases
Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/L)
respectivelya
1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 29.0 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.53
25.7
22.0
19.7
1009 Bromotrifluoromethane 38.0 Allowed Normal 1.13
(Refrigerant gas R 13B1) 34.0
30.0
27.5
1010 Butadienes, stabilized 7.5 Allowed Normal 0.55
7.0
7.0
7.0
1010 Butadienes and hydrocarbon See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
mixture, stabilized with more in 6.7.3.1
than 40% butadienes
1011 Butane 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.51
7.0
7.0
7.0
1012 Butylene 8.0 Allowed Normal 0.53
7.0
7.0
7.0
a
“Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter
of more than 1.5 metre without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 metre with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of
more than 1.5 metre with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (see definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b
The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50
Maximum allowable
working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum
UN Non-refrigerated liquefied
(bar) Small; Bare; below provisionsb filling ratio
No. gases
Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/L)
respectivelya
1017 Chlorine 19.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.25
17.0
15.0
13.5
1018 Chlorodifluoromethane 26.0 Allowed Normal 1.03
(Refrigerant gas R 22) 24.0
21.0
19.0
1020 Chloropentafluoroethane 23.0 Allowed Normal 1.06
(Refrigerant gas R 115) 20.0
18.0
16.0
1021 1-Chloro-1,2,2,2- 10.3 Allowed Normal 1.20
tetrafluoroethane 9.8
(Refrigerant gas R 124) 7.9
7.0
1027 Cyclopropane 18.0 Allowed Normal 0.53
16.0
14.5
13.0
1028 Dichlorodifluoromethane 16.0 Allowed Normal 1.15
(Refrigerant gas R 12) 15.0
13.0
11.5
1029 Dichlorofluoromethane 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.23
(Refrigerant gas R 21) 7.0
7.0
7.0
1030 1,1-Difluoroethane 16.0 Allowed Normal 0.79
(Refrigerant gas R 152a) 14.0
12.4
11.0
1032 Dimethylamine, anhydrous 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.59
7.0
7.0
7.0
1033 Dimethyl ether 15.5 Allowed Normal 0.58
13.8
12.0
10.6
1036 Ethylamine 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.61
7.0
7.0
7.0
1037 Ethyl chloride 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.80
7.0
7.0
7.0
1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen – Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.78
up to a total pressure of 1 MPa –
(10 bar) at 50°C –
10.0
1041 Ethylene oxide and carbon See MAWP Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
dioxide mixture with more than definition
9% but not more than 87% in 6.7.3.1
ethylene oxide
a
“Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter
of more than 1.5 metre without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 metre with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of
more than 1.5 metre with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (see definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b
The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50
Maximum allowable
working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum
UN Non-refrigerated liquefied
(bar) Small; Bare; below provisionsb filling ratio
No. gases
Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/L)
respectivelya
1055 Isobutylene 8.1 Allowed Normal 0.52
7.0
7.0
7.0
1060 Methylacetylene and propadiene 28.0 Allowed Normal 0.43
mixture, stabilized 24.5
22.0
20.0
1061 Methylamine, anhydrous 10.8 Allowed Normal 0.58
9.6
7.8
7.0
1062 Methyl bromide with not more 7.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.51
than 2% chloropicrin 7.0
7.0
7.0
1063 Methyl chloride 14.5 Allowed Normal 0.81
(Refrigerant gas R40) 12.7
11.3
10.0
1064 Methyl mercaptan 7.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.78
7.0
7.0
7.0
1067 Dinitrogen tetroxide 7.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.30
7.0
7.0
7.0
1075 Petroleum gas, liquefied See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
in 6.7.3.1
1077 Propylene 28.0 Allowed Normal 0.43
24.5
22.0
20.0
1078 Refrigerant gas, N.O.S. See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
in 6.7.3.1
1079 Sulphur dioxide 11.6 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.23
10.3
8.5
7.6
1082 Trifluorochloroethylene, 17.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.13
stabilized 15.0
(Refrigerant gas R 1113) 13.1
11.6
1083 Trimethylamine, anhydrous 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.56
7.0
7.0
7.0
1085 Vinyl bromide, stabilized 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.37
7.0
7.0
7.0
1086 Vinyl chloride, stabilized 10.6 Allowed Normal 0.81
9.3
8.0
7.0
a
“Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter
of more than 1.5 metre without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 metre with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of
more than 1.5 metre with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (see definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b
The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50
Maximum allowable
working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum
UN Non-refrigerated liquefied
(bar) Small; Bare; below provisionsb filling ratio
No. gases
Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/L)
respectivelya
1087 Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized 7.0 Allowed Normal 0.67
7.0
7.0
7.0
1581 Chloropicrin and methyl bromide 7.0 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.51
mixture with more than 2% 7.0
chloropicrin 7.0
7.0
1582 Chloropicrin and methyl chloride 19.2 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.81
mixture 16.9
15.1
13.1
1858 Hexafluoropropylene 19.2 Allowed Normal 1.11
(Refrigerant gas R 1216) 16.9
15.1
13.1
1912 Methyl chloride and methylene 15.2 Allowed Normal 0.81
chloride mixture 13.0
11.6
10.1
1958 1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2- 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.30
tetrafluoroethane 7.0
(Refrigerant gas R 114) 7.0
7.0
1965 Hydrocarbon gas, mixture See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
liquefied, N.O.S. in 6.7.3.1
1969 Isobutane 8.5 Allowed Normal 0.49
7.5
7.0
7.0
1973 Chlorodifluoromethane and 28.3 Allowed Normal 1.05
chloropentafluoroethane mixture 25.3
with fixed boiling point, with 22.8
approximately 20.3
49% chlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 502)
1974 Chlorodifluorobromomethane 7.4 Allowed Normal 1.61
(Refrigerant gas R 12B1) 7.0
7.0
7.0
1976 Octafluorocyclobutane 8.8 Allowed Normal 1.34
(Refrigerant gas RC 318) 7.8
7.0
7.0
1978 Propane 22.5 Allowed Normal 0.42
20.4
18.0
16.5
1983 1-Chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane 7.0 Allowed Normal 1.18
(Refrigerant gas R 133a) 7.0
7.0
7.0
2035 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane 31.0 Allowed Normal 0.76
(Refrigerant gas R 143a) 27.5
24.2
21.8
a
“Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter
of more than 1.5 metre without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 metre with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of
more than 1.5 metre with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (see definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b
The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50
Maximum allowable
working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum
UN Non-refrigerated liquefied
(bar) Small; Bare; below provisionsb filling ratio
No. gases
Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/L)
respectivelya
2424 Octafluoropropane 23.1 Allowed Normal 1.07
(Refrigerant gas R 218) 20.8
18.6
16.6
2517 1-Chloro-1,1-difluoroethane 8.9 Allowed Normal 0.99
(Refrigerant gas R 142b) 7.8
7.0
7.0
2602 Dichlorodifluoromethane and 20.0 Allowed Normal 1.01
difluoroethane azeotropic 18.0
mixture with approximately 16.0
74% dichlorodifluoromethane 14.5
(Refrigerant gas R 500)
3057 Trifluoroacetyl chloride 14.6 Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.17
12.9
11.3
9.9
3070 Ethylene oxide and 14.0 Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.09
dichlorodifluoromethane 12.0
mixture, with not more 11.0
than 12.5% ethylene oxide 9.0
3153 Perfluoro(methyl vinyl ether) 14.3 Allowed Normal 1.14
13.4
11.2
10.2
3159 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane 17.7 Allowed Normal 1.04
(Refrigerant gas R 134a) 15.7
13.8
12.1
3161 Liquefied gas, flammable, N.O.S. See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
in 6.7.3.1
3163 Liquefied gas, N.O.S. See MAWP definition Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
in 6.7.3.1
3220 Pentafluoroethane 34.4 Allowed Normal 0.87
(Refrigerant gas R 125) 30.8
27.5
24.5
3252 Difluoromethane 43.0 Allowed Normal 0.78
(Refrigerant gas R 32) 39.0
34.4
30.5
3296 Heptafluoropropane 16.0 Allowed Normal 1.20
(Refrigerant gas R 227) 14.0
12.5
11.0
3297 Ethylene oxide and 8.1 Allowed Normal 1.16
chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture, 7.0
with not more than 8.8% 7.0
ethylene oxide 7.0
3298 Ethylene oxide and 25.9 Allowed Normal 1.02
pentafluoroethane mixture, with 23.4
not more than 7.9% ethylene 20.9
oxide 18.6
3299 Ethylene oxide and 16.7 Allowed Normal 1.03
tetrafluoroethane mixture, with 14.7
not more than 5.6% ethylene 12.9
oxide 11.2
a
“Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter
of more than 1.5 metre without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 metre with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of
more than 1.5 metre with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (see definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b
The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (continued) T50
Maximum allowable
working pressure Openings Pressure relief Maximum
UN Non-refrigerated liquefied
(bar) Small; Bare; below provisionsb filling ratio
No. gases
Sunshield; Insulated liquid level (see 6.7.3.7) (kg/L)
respectivelya
3318 Ammonia solution, relative See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 See 4.2.2.7
density less than 0.880 at 15°C in 6.7.3.1
in water, with more than 50%
ammonia
3337 Refrigerant gas R 404A 31.6 Allowed Normal 0.82
28.3
25.3
22.5
3338 Refrigerant gas R 407A 31.3 Allowed Normal 0.94
28.1
25.1
22.4
3339 Refrigerant gas R 407B 33.0 Allowed Normal 0.93
29.6
26.5
23.6
3340 Refrigerant gas R 407C 29.9 Allowed Normal 0.95
26.8
23.9
21.3
3500 Chemical under pressure, n.o.s. See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
in 6.7.3.1
3501 Chemical under pressure, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
flammable, n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1
3502 Chemical under pressure, toxic, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1
3503 Chemical under pressure, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
corrosive, n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1
3504 Chemical under pressure, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
flammable, toxic, n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1
3505 Chemical under pressure, See MAWP definition Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
flammable, corrosive, n.o.s. in 6.7.3.1
a
“Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 metre or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a diameter
of more than 1.5 metre without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 metre with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of
more than 1.5 metre with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (see definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b
The word “Normal” in the pressure relief column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in 6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
c
For UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, the degree of filling shall be considered instead of the maximum
filling ratio.
T75 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T75
This portable tank instruction applies to refrigerated liquefied gases. The general provisions of 4.2.3 and 6.7.4 shall be
met.
4.2.5.3 Portable tank special provisions
Portable tank special provisions are assigned to certain substances to indicate provisions which are in
addition to or in lieu of those provided by the portable tank instructions or the provisions in chapter 6.7.
Portable tank special provisions are identified by an alpha-numeric designation beginning with the letters
“TP” (tank provision) and are assigned to specific substances in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List in
chapter 3.2. The following is a list of the portable tank special provisions:
TP1 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.2 shall not be exceeded.
TP2 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.3 shall not be exceeded.
TP3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids transported above their melting points and for elevated
temperature liquids shall be determined in accordance with 4.2.1.9.5.
TP4 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90% or, alternatively, any other value approved by the competent
authority (see 4.2.1.16.2).
TP5 The restrictions on filling prescribed in 4.2.3.6 shall be met.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
TP6 To prevent the tank bursting in any event, including fire engulfment, it shall be provided with pressure-
relief devices which are adequate in relation to the capacity of the tank and to the nature of the
substance transported. The device shall also be compatible with the substance.
TP7 Air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
TP8 The test pressure for the portable tank may be reduced to 1.5 bar when the flashpoint of the substances
transported is greater than 0°C.
TP9 A substance under this description shall only be transported in a portable tank under an approval
granted by the competent authority.
TP10 A lead lining, not less than 5 mm thick, which shall be tested annually, or another suitable lining
material approved by the competent authority is required. A portable tank may be offered for transport
after the date of expiry of the last lining inspection for a period not to exceed three months beyond
that date, after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or
inspection prior to refilling.
TP11 [Reserved]
TP12 [Reserved]
TP13 Self-contained breathing apparatus shall be provided when this substance is transported, unless no
self-contained breathing apparatus, as required by SOLAS regulation II-2/19 (II-2/54), is on board.
TP14 [Reserved]
TP15 [Reserved]
TP16 The tank shall be fitted with a special device to prevent under-pressure and excess pressure during
normal transport conditions. This device shall be approved by the competent authority. Pressure-
relief provisions are as indicated in 6.7.2.8.3 to prevent crystallization of the product in the pressure-
relief valve.
TP17 Only inorganic non-combustible materials shall be used for thermal insulation of the tank.
TP18
Temperature shall be maintained between 18°C and 40°C. Portable tanks containing solidified
methacrylic acid shall not be reheated during transport.
TP19 At the time of construction, the minimum shell thickness determined according to 6.7.3.4 shall be
increased by 3 mm as a corrosion allowance. Shell thickness shall be verified ultrasonically at intervals
midway between periodic hydraulic tests and shall never be lower than the minimum shell thickness
determined according to 6.7.3.4.
TP20 This substance shall only be transported in insulated tanks under a nitrogen blanket.
TP21 The shell thickness shall be not less than 8 mm. Tanks shall be hydraulically tested and internally
inspected at intervals not exceeding 2.5 years.
TP22 Lubricant for joints or other devices shall be oxygen-compatible.
TP23 [Reserved]
TP24 The portable tank may be fitted with a device located, under maximum filling conditions, in the vapour
space of the shell to prevent the build-up of excess pressure due to the slow decomposition of the
substance transported. This device shall also prevent an unacceptable amount of leakage of liquid in
the case of overturning or entry of foreign matter into the tank. This device shall be approved by the
competent authority or its authorized body.
TP25 Sulphur trioxide 99.95% pure and above may be transported in tanks without an inhibitor provided
that it is maintained at a temperature equal to or above 32.5°C.
TP26 When transported under heated conditions, the heating device shall be fitted outside the shell. For
UN 3176, this provision only applies when the substance reacts dangerously with water.
TP27 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 4 bar may be used if it is shown that a test pressure
of 4 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1.
TP28 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 2.65 bar may be used if it is shown that a test
pressure of 2.65 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1.
TP29 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 1.5 bar may be used if it is shown that a test
pressure of 1.5 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition in 6.7.2.1.
TP30 This substance shall be transported in insulated tanks.
TP31 This substance shall be transported in tanks in solid state.
TP32 For UN Nos. 0331, 0332 and 3375, portable tanks may be used subject to the following conditions:
.1 To avoid unnecessary confinement, each portable tank constructed of metal or fibre-reinforced
plastics shall be fitted with a pressure relief device that may be of the re-closing spring-loaded
type, a frangible disc or a fusible element. The set-to-discharge or burst pressure, as applicable,
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
shall not be greater than 2.65 bar for portable tanks with minimum test pressures greater than
4 bar.
.2 For UN 3375 only, suitability for transport in tanks shall be demonstrated. One method to
evaluate this suitability is test 8 (d) in Test Series 8 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, part 1,
subsection 18.7).
.3 Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the portable tank for any period that could result in
caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation and packing of substances
in the tank (e.g. cleaning, etc).
TP33 The portable tank instruction assigned for this substance applies for granular and powdered solids
and for solids which are filled and discharged at temperatures above their melting point and which are
cooled and transported as a solid mass. For solids which are transported above their melting point,
see 4.2.1.19.
TP34 Portable tanks need not be subjected to the impact test in 6.7.4.14.1 if the portable tank is marked
“NOT FOR RAIL TRANSPORT” on the plate specified in 6.7.4.15.1 and also in letters at least 10 cm
high on both sides of the outer jacket.
TP35 Deleted
TP36 Fusible elements in the vapour space may be used on portable tanks.
TP37 Deleted
TP38 Deleted
TP39 Deleted
TP40 Portable tanks shall not be transported when connected with spray application equipment.
TP41 The 2.5-year internal examination may be waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection
procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body, provided that the portable
tank is dedicated to the transport of the organometallic substances to which this tank special provision
is assigned. However, this examination is required when the conditions of 6.7.2.19.7 are met.
TP42 Portable tanks are not authorized for the transport of caesium or rubidium dispersions.
TP90 Tanks with bottom openings may be used on short international voyages.
TP91 Portable tanks with bottom openings may also be used on long international voyages.
4.2.6 Additional provisions for the use of road tank vehicles and road gas
elements vehicles
4.2.6.1 The tank of a road tank vehicle or the elements of a road gas elements vehicle shall be attached to the vehicle
during normal operations of filling, discharge and transport. IMO type 4 tanks shall be attached to the chassis
when transported on board ships. Road tank vehicles and road gas elements vehicles shall not be filled or
discharged while they remain on board. A road tank vehicle or road gas elements vehicle shall be driven on
board on its own wheels and be fitted with permanent tie-down attachments for securing on board the ship.
4.2.6.2 Road tank vehicles and road gas elements vehicles shall comply with the provisions of chapter 6.8. IMO
type 4, 6, 8 and 9 tanks may be used according to the provisions of chapter 6.8 for short international voyages
only.
4.2.6.3 Substances permitted to be transported in IMO type 9 tanks are assigned special provision 974.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 4.3
Use of bulk containers
Note: Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) shall not be used for sea transport, except as indicated in 4.3.3.
4.3.1 General provisions
4.3.1.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of containers for the transport of solid
substances in bulk. Substances shall be transported in bulk containers conforming to the applicable bulk
container instruction identified by the letters BK in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List, with the following
meaning:
BK1: the transport in sheeted bulk containers is permitted;
BK2: the transport in closed bulk containers is permitted;
BK3: the transport in flexible bulk containers is permitted.
The bulk container used shall conform to the provisions of chapter 6.9.
4.3.1.2 Except as provided in 4.3.1.3, bulk containers shall only be used when a substance is assigned a bulk
container code in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List.
4.3.1.3 When a substance is not assigned BK2 or BK3 in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List, interim approval for
transport may be issued by the competent authority of the country of origin. The approval shall be included in
the documentation of the consignment and contain, as a minimum, the information normally provided in the
bulk container instruction and the conditions under which the substance shall be transported. Appropriate
measures should be initiated by the competent authority to have the assignment included in the Dangerous
Goods List. When a substance is not permitted in a BK1 bulk container, an exemption may be issued in
accordance with 7.9.1.
4.3.1.4 Substances which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during transport are not
permitted in bulk containers.
4.3.1.5 Bulk containers shall be siftproof and shall be so closed that none of the contents can escape under normal
conditions of transport, including the effect of vibration, or by changes of temperature, humidity or pressure.
4.3.1.6 Bulk solids shall be loaded into bulk containers and evenly distributed in a manner that minimizes movement
that could result in damage to the container or leakage of the dangerous goods.
4.3.1.7 Where venting devices are fitted, they shall be kept clear and operable.
4.3.1.8 Bulk solids shall not react dangerously with the material of the bulk container, gaskets, equipment including
lids and tarpaulins, or with protective coatings which are in contact with the contents, or significantly weaken
them. Bulk containers shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot penetrate between wooden
floor coverings or come into contact with those parts of the bulk containers that may be affected by the
dangerous goods or residues thereof.
4.3.1.9 Before being filled and offered for transport, each bulk container shall be inspected and cleaned to ensure
that it does not contain any residue on the interior or exterior that could:
– cause a dangerous reaction with the substance intended for transport;
– detrimentally affect the structural integrity of the bulk container; or
– affect the dangerous goods retention capabilities of the bulk container.
4.3.1.10 During transport, no dangerous residues shall adhere to the outer surfaces of a bulk container.
4.3.1.11 If several closure systems are fitted in series, the system which is located nearest to the dangerous goods to
be transported shall be closed first before filling.
4.3.1.12 Empty bulk containers that have contained dangerous goods shall be treated in the same manner as is
prescribed in this Code for a filled bulk container, unless adequate measures have been taken to nullify any
hazard.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.3.1.13 If bulk containers are used for the carriage of bulk goods liable to cause a dust explosion, or evolve flammable
vapours (e.g. for certain wastes), measures shall be taken to exclude sources of ignition and to prevent
dangerous electrostatic discharge during transport, loading or unloading of the goods.
4.3.1.14 Substances, for example wastes, which may react dangerously with one another and substances of different
classes and goods not subject to this Code, which are liable to react dangerously with one another, shall not
be mixed together in the same bulk container. Dangerous reactions are:
.1 combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat;
.2 emission of flammable and/or toxic gases;
.3 formation of corrosive liquids; or
.4 formation of unstable substances.
4.3.1.15 Before a bulk container is filled, it shall be visually examined to ensure it is structurally serviceable, its interior
walls, ceiling and floors are free from protrusions or damage and that any inner liners or substance retaining
equipment are free from rips, tears or any damage that would compromise its cargo retention capabilities.
“Structurally serviceable” means the bulk container does not have major defects in its structural components,
such as top and bottom side rails, top and bottom end rails, door sill and header, floor cross members, corner
posts, and corner fittings in a freight container. Major defects include:
.1 bends, cracks or breaks in the structural or supporting members that affect the integrity of the container;
.2 more than one splice or an improper splice (such as a lapped splice) in top or bottom end rails or door
headers;
.3 more than two splices in any one top or bottom side rail;
.4 any splice in a door sill or corner post;
.5 door hinges and hardware that are seized, twisted, broken, missing, or otherwise inoperative;
.6 gaskets and seals that do not seal;
.7 any distortion of the overall configuration great enough to prevent proper alignment of handling
equipment, mounting and securing chassis or vehicle, or insertion into ships’ cargo spaces;
.8 any damage to lifting attachments or handling equipment interface features; or
.9 any damage to service or operational equipment.
4.3.1.16 Before a flexible bulk container is filled it shall be visually examined to ensure it is structurally serviceable, its
textile slings, load-bearing structure straps, body fabric, lock device parts including metal and textile parts
are free from protrusions or damage and that inner liners are free from rips, tears or any damage.
4.3.1.16.1 For flexible bulk containers, the period of use permitted for the transport of dangerous goods shall be two
years from the date of manufacture of the flexible bulk container.
4.3.1.16.2 A venting device shall be fitted if a dangerous accumulation of gases may develop within the flexible bulk
container. The vent shall be so designed that the penetration of foreign substances or the ingress of water is
prevented under normal conditions of transport.
4.3.2 Additional provisions applicable to bulk goods
of classes 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.2, 7 and 8
4.3.2.1 Bulk goods of class 4.2
Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used. The total mass carried in a bulk container shall be such that
its spontaneous ignition temperature is greater than 55°C.
4.3.2.2 Bulk goods of class 4.3
Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used. These goods shall be transported in bulk containers which
are waterproof.
4.3.2.3 Bulk goods of class 5.1
Bulk containers shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or
any other incompatible material.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
4.3.2.4 Bulk goods of class 6.2
4.3.2.4.1 Transport in bulk containers of animal material of class 6.2
Animal material containing infectious substances (UN Nos. 2814, 2900 and 3373) is authorized for transport
in bulk containers provided the following conditions are met:
.1 Closed bulk containers, and their openings, shall be leakproof by design or by the fitting of a suitable liner.
.2 The animal material shall be thoroughly treated with an appropriate disinfectant before loading prior to
transport.
.3 Closed bulk containers shall not be re-used until they have been thoroughly cleaned and disinfected.
Note: Additional provisions may be required by appropriate national health authorities.
4.3.2.4.2 Bulk wastes of class 6.2 (UN 3291)
.1 only closed bulk containers (BK2) shall be permitted;
.2 closed bulk containers, and their openings, shall be leakproof by design. These bulk containers shall
have non-porous interior surfaces and shall be free from cracks or other features that could damage
packagings inside, impede disinfection or permit inadvertent release;
.3 wastes of UN 3291 shall be contained within the closed bulk container in UN type tested and approved
sealed leakproof plastics bags tested for solids of packing group II and marked in accordance with 6.1.3.1.
Such plastics bags shall be capable of passing the tests for tear and impact resistance according to
ISO 7765-1:1988, Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart
method – Part 1: Staircase methods, and ISO 6383-2:1983, Plastics – Film and sheeting – D etermination of
tear resistance – Part 2: Elmendorf method. Each bag shall have an impact resistance of at least 165 g
and a tear resistance of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length
of the bag. The maximum net mass of each plastics bag shall be 30 kg;
.4 single articles exceeding 30 kg such as soiled mattresses may be transported without the need for a
plastics bag when authorized by the competent authority;
.5 wastes of UN 3291 which contain liquids shall only be transported in plastics bags containing sufficient
absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid without it spilling in the bulk container;
.6 wastes of UN 3291 containing sharp objects shall only be transported in UN type tested and approved
rigid packagings meeting the provisions of packing instructions P621, IBC620 or LP621;
.7 rigid packagings specified in packing instructions P621, IBC620 or LP621 may also be used. They shall
be properly secured to prevent damage during normal conditions of transport. Wastes transported
in rigid packagings and plastics bags together in the same closed bulk container shall be adequately
segregated from each other, e.g. by suitable rigid barriers or dividers, mesh nets or otherwise securing
the packagings, such that they prevent damage to the packagings during normal conditions of transport;
.8 wastes of UN 3291 in plastics bags shall not be compressed in a closed bulk container in such a way that
bags may be rendered no longer leakproof;
.9 the closed bulk container shall be inspected for leakage or spillage after each journey. If any wastes of
UN 3291 have leaked or been spilled in the closed bulk container, it shall not be re-used until after it has
been thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, disinfected or decontaminated with an appropriate agent. No
other goods shall be transported together with UN 3291 other than medical or veterinary wastes. Any such
other wastes transported in the same closed bulk container shall be inspected for possible contamination.
4.3.2.5 Bulk material of class 7
For the transport of unpackaged radioactive material, see 4.1.9.2.4.
4.3.2.6 Bulk goods of class 8
Only closed bulk containers (BK2) may be used. These goods shall be transported in bulk containers which
are watertight.
4.3.3 Additional provisions for the use of sheeted bulk containers (BK1)
4.3.3.1 Sheeted bulk containers (BK1) shall not be used for sea transport, except for UN 3077 not meeting the criteria
of 2.9.3 transported on short international voyages.
4.3.4 Additional provisions for the use of flexible bulk containers (BK3)
4.3.4.1 Flexible bulk containers are only allowed in the holds of general cargo ships. They are not allowed to be
transported in cargo transport units.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
PART 5
CONSIGNMENT PROCEDURES
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 5.1
General provisions
5.1.1 Application and general provisions
5.1.1.1 This part sets forth the provisions for dangerous goods consignments relative to authorization of consignments
and advance notifications, marking, labelling, documentation (by manual, electronic data processing (EDP) or
electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques) and placarding.
5.1.1.2 Except as otherwise provided in this Code, no person may offer dangerous goods for transport unless those
goods are properly marked, labelled, placarded, described and certified on a transport document, and
otherwise in a condition for transport as required by this part.
Note: In accordance with the GHS, a GHS pictogram not required by this Code should only appear in trans-
port as part of a complete GHS label and not independently (see GHS 1.4.10.4.4).
5.1.1.3 A carrier shall not accept dangerous goods for transport unless:
.1 A copy of the dangerous goods transport document and other documents or information as required by
the provisions of this Code are provided; or
.2 The information applicable to the dangerous goods is provided in electronic form.
5.1.1.4 The information applicable to the dangerous goods shall accompany the dangerous goods to final destination.
This information may be on the dangerous goods transport document or may be on another document. This
information shall be given to the consignee when the dangerous goods are delivered.
5.1.1.5 When the information applicable to the dangerous goods is given to the carrier in electronic form, the
information shall be available to the carrier at all times during transport to final destination. The information
shall be able to be produced without delay as a paper document.
5.1.1.6 The purpose of indicating the proper shipping name (see 3.1.2.1 and 3.1.2.2) and the UN number of a substance,
material or article offered for transport and, in the case of a marine pollutant, of the addition of “marine
pollutant” on documentation accompanying the consignment, and of marking the proper shipping name in
accordance with 5.2.1 on the package, including IBCs containing the goods, is to ensure that the substance,
material or article can be readily identified during transport. This ready identification is particularly important
in the case of an accident involving these goods, in order to determine what emergency procedures are
necessary to deal properly with the situation and, in the case of marine pollutants, for the master to comply
with the reporting requirements of Protocol I of MARPOL.
5.1.2 Use of overpacks and unit loads
5.1.2.1 An overpack and unit load shall be marked with the proper shipping name and the UN number and marked
and labelled, as required for packages by chapter 5.2, for each item of dangerous goods contained in the
overpack or unit load unless marks and labels representative of all dangerous goods in the overpack or unit
load are visible. An overpack, in addition, shall be marked with the word “OVERPACK” unless marks and
labels representative of all dangerous goods, as required by chapter 5.2, in the overpack are visible. Labelling
of overpacks containing radioactive materials shall be in accordance with 5.2.2.1.12. The lettering of the
“OVERPACK” mark shall be at least 12 mm high.
5.1.2.2 The individual packages comprising a unit load or an overpack shall be marked and labelled in accordance
with chapter 5.2. Each package of dangerous goods contained in the unit load or overpack shall comply with
all applicable provisions of the Code. The “OVERPACK” mark on an overpack is an indication of compliance
with this provision. The intended function of each package shall not be impaired by the unit load or overpack.
5.1.2.3 Each package bearing package orientation marks as prescribed in 5.2.1.7.1 of this Code and which is
overpacked, placed in a unit load or used as an inner packaging in a large packaging shall be oriented in
accordance with such marks.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings or units
5.1.3.1 Other than for class 7, a packaging, including an IBC, which previously contained dangerous goods shall
be identified, marked, labelled and placarded as required for those dangerous goods unless steps such as
cleaning, purging of vapours or refilling with a non-dangerous substance are taken to nullify any hazard.
5.1.3.2 Freight containers, tanks, IBCs, as well as other packagings and overpacks, used for the transport of
radioactive material shall not be used for the transport of other goods unless decontaminated below the level
of 0.4 Bq/cm2 for beta and gamma emitters and low-toxicity alpha emitters and 0.04 Bq/cm2 for all other
alpha emitters.
5.1.3.3 Empty cargo transport units still containing residues of dangerous goods, or loaded with empty uncleaned
packages or empty uncleaned bulk containers, shall comply with the provisions applicable to the goods last
contained in the unit, packagings or bulk container.
5.1.4 Mixed packing
When two or more dangerous goods are packed within the same outer packaging, the package shall be
labelled and marked as required for each substance. Subsidiary hazard labels need not be applied if the
hazard is already represented by a primary hazard label.
5.1.5 General provisions for class 7
5.1.5.1 Approval of shipments and notification
5.1.5.1.1 General
In addition to the approval of package designs described in chapter 6.4, multilateral shipment approval is also
required in certain circumstances (5.1.5.1.2 and 5.1.5.1.3). In some circumstances it is also necessary to notify
competent authorities of a shipment (5.1.5.1.4).
5.1.5.1.2 Shipment approvals
Multilateral approval shall be required for:
.1 the shipment of Type B(M) packages not conforming with the provisions of 6.4.7.5 or designed to allow
controlled intermittent venting;
.2 the shipment of Type B(M) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3,000A1
or 3,000A2, as appropriate, or 1,000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
.3 the shipment of packages containing fissile materials if the sum of the criticality safety indexes of
the packages in a single freight container or in a single conveyance exceeds 50. Excluded from this
requirement shall be shipments by seagoing vessels, if the sum of the criticality safety indexes does not
exceed 50 for any hold, compartment or defined deck area and the distance of 6 m between groups of
packages or overpacks as required in the table in 7.1.4.5.3.4 is met;
.4 radiation protection programmes for shipments by special use vessels in accordance with 7.1.4.5.8; and
.5 the shipment of SCO-III.
except that a competent authority may authorize transport into or through its country without shipment
approval, by a specific provision in its design approval (see 5.1.5.2.1).
5.1.5.1.3 Shipment approval by special arrangement
A competent authority may approve provisions under which consignments that do not satisfy all the applicable
requirements of this Code may be transported under special arrangement (see 1.5.4).
5.1.5.1.4 Notifications
Notification to competent authorities is required as follows:
.1 Before the first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval, the consignor shall
ensure that copies of each applicable competent authority certificate applying to that package design
have been submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and to the
competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported.
The consignor is not required to await an acknowledgement from the competent authority, nor is the
competent authority required to make such acknowledgement of receipt of the certificate.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 For each of the following types of shipments:
.1 Type C packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3,000A1 or 3,000A2, as
appropriate, or 1,000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
.2 Type B(U) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3,000A1 or 3,000A2,
as appropriate, or 1,000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
.3 Type B(M) packages;
.4 shipment under special arrangement;
the consignor shall notify the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and the
competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be transported. This
notification shall be in the possession of each competent authority prior to the commencement of the
shipment, and preferably at least 7 days in advance.
.3 The consignor is not required to send a separate notification if the required information has been included
in the application for approval of shipment (see 6.4.23.2).
.4 The consignment notification shall include:
.1 sufficient information to enable the identification of the package or packages, including all applicable
certificate numbers and identification marks;
.2 information on the date of shipment, the expected date of arrival and proposed routeing;
.3 the names of the radioactive material or nuclides;
.4 descriptions of the physical and chemical forms of the radioactive material, or whether it is special
form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material; and
.5 the maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport, expressed in units of becquerels
(Bq) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile material
(or of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof,
may be used in place of activity.
5.1.5.2 Certificates issued by competent authority
5.1.5.2.1 Certificates issued by the competent authority are required for the following:
.1 designs for:
.1 special form radioactive material;
.2 low dispersible radioactive material;
.3 fissile material excepted under 2.7.2.3.5.6;
.4 packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride;
.5 packages containing fissile material unless excepted by 2.7.2.3.5, 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3;
.6 Type B(U) packages and Type B(M) packages;
.7 Type C packages;
.2 special arrangements;
.3 certain shipments (see 5.1.5.1.2);
.4 determination of the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.7.2.2.1 for individual radionuclides which
are not listed in table 2.7.2.2.1 (see 2.7.2.2.2.1);
.5 alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles (see 2.7.2.2.2.2).
The certificates shall confirm that the applicable provisions are met, and for design approvals shall attribute
to the design an identification mark.
The certificates of approval for the package design and the shipment may be combined into a single certificate.
Certificates and applications for these certificates shall be in accordance with the provisions in 6.4.23.
5.1.5.2.2 The consignor shall be in possession of a copy of each applicable certificate.
5.1.5.2.3 For package designs where it is not required that a competent authority issue a certificate of approval, the
consignor shall, on request, make available, for inspection by the relevant competent authority, documentary
evidence of the compliance of the package design with all the applicable provisions.
5.1.5.3 Determination of transport index (TI) and criticality safety index (CSI)
5.1.5.3.1 The transport index (TI) for a package, overpack or freight container, or for unpackaged LSA‑I, SCO-I or
SCO-III, shall be the number derived in accordance with the following procedure:
.1 determine the dose rate in units of millisieverts per hour (mSv/h) at a distance of 1 m from the external
surfaces of the package, overpack, freight container, or unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I or SCO III. The value
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
determined shall be multiplied by 100 and the resulting number is the transport index. For uranium and
thorium ores and their concentrates, the maximum dose rate at any point 1 m from the external surface
of the load may be taken as:
0.4 mSv/h for ores and physical concentrates of uranium and thorium;
0.3 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of thorium;
0.02 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of uranium, other than uranium hexafluoride;
.2 for tanks, freight containers and unpackaged LSA‑I, SCO-I and SCO-III, the value determined in 5.1.5.3.1.1
above shall be multiplied by the appropriate factor from table 5.1.5.3.1;
.3 the value obtained in 5.1.5.3.1.1 and 5.1.5.3.1.2 above shall be rounded up to the first decimal place
(e.g. 1.13 becomes 1.2), except that a value of 0.05 or less may be considered as zero and the resulting
number is the TI value (without unit).
Table 5.1.5.3.1 – Multiplication factors for tanks, freight containers
and unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III
Size of loada Multiplication factor
size of load ≤ 1 m 2
1
1 m < size of load ≤ 5 m
2 2
2
5 m < size of load ≤ 20 m
2 2
3
20 m < size of load
2
10
a
Largest cross-sectional area of the load being measured.
5.1.5.3.2 The TI for each rigid overpack, freight container or conveyance shall be determined as the sum of the TIs of
all the packages contained therein. For a shipment from a single consignor, the consignor may determine the
TI by direct measurement of dose rate.
The TI for a non-rigid overpack shall be determined only as the sum of the TIs of all the packages within the
overpack.
5.1.5.3.3 The criticality safety index for each overpack or freight container shall be determined as the sum of the CSIs
of all the packages contained. The same procedure shall be followed for determining the total sum of the CSIs
in a consignment or aboard a conveyance.
5.1.5.3.4 Packages, overpacks and freight containers shall be assigned to either category I – WHITE, II – YELLOW or
III – YELLOW in accordance with the conditions specified in table 5.1.5.3.4 and with the following requirements:
.1 for a package, overpack or freight container, both the transport index and the surface dose rate conditions
shall be taken into account in determining which is the appropriate category. Where the transport index
satisfies the condition for one category but the surface dose rate satisfies the condition for a different
category, the package, overpack or freight container shall be assigned to the higher category. For this
purpose, category I – WHITE shall be regarded as the lowest category;
.2 the TI shall be determined following the procedures specified in 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2;
.3 if the surface dose rate is greater than 2 mSv/h, the package or overpack shall be transported under
exclusive use and under the provisions of 7.1.4.5.6 or 7.1.4.5.7, as appropriate;
.4 a package transported under a special arrangement shall be assigned to category III – YELLOW except
under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5;
.5 an overpack or freight container which contains packages transported under special arrangement shall
be assigned to category III – YELLOW except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Table 5.1.5.3.4 – Categories of packages, overpacks and freight containers
Conditions
Maximum dose rate at any point
Transport index Category
on external surface
0a Not more than 0.005 mSv/h I – WHITE
a
More than 0 but not more than 1 More than 0.005 mSv/h but not more than 0.5 mSv/h II – YELLOW
More than 1 but not more than 10 More than 0.5 mSv/h but not more than 2 mSv/h III – YELLOW
More than 10 More than 2 mSv/h but not more than 10 mSv/h III – YELLOWb
a
If the measured TI is not greater than 0.05, the value quoted may be zero in accordance with 5.1.5.3.1.3.
b
Shall also be transported under “exclusive use” except for freight containers (see the table in 7.1.4.5.3.1).
5.1.5.3.5 In all cases of international transport of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, the
categorization shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.
5.1.5.4 Specific provisions for excepted packages of radioactive material of class 7
5.1.5.4.1 Excepted packages of radioactive material of class 7 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of
the packaging with:
.1 the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”;
.2 an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both; and
.3 the permissible gross mass if this exceeds 50 kg.
5.1.5.4.2 The documentation requirements of 5.4.1 and 5.4.5 do not apply to excepted packages of radioactive material
of class 7, except that:
.1 the UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and the name and address of the consignor and the
consignee and, if relevant, the identification mark for each competent authority certificate of approval
(see 5.4.1.5.7.1.7) shall be shown on a special transport document such as a bill of lading, air waybill or
other similar document complying with the requirements of 5.4.1.2.1 to 5.4.1.2.4; and
.2 the requirements of 5.4.1.6.2 and, if relevant, those of 5.4.1.5.7.1.7, 5.4.1.5.7.3 and 5.4.1.5.7.4 shall apply.
5.1.5.4.3 The requirements of 5.2.1.5.8 and 5.2.2.1.12.5 shall apply if relevant.
5.1.5.5 Specific provisions for the consignment of fissile material
Fissile material meeting one of the provisions of 2.7.2.3.5.1 to 2.7.2.3.5.6 shall meet the following requirements:
.1 only one of the provisions of 2.7.2.3.5.1 to 2.7.2.3.5.6 is allowed per consignment;
.2 only one approved fissile material in packages classified in accordance with 2.7.2.3.5.6 is allowed per
consignment unless multiple materials are authorized in the certificate of approval;
.3 fissile material in packages classified in accordance with 2.7.2.3.5.3 shall be transported in a consignment
with no more than 45 g of fissile nuclides;
.4 fissile material in packages classified in accordance with 2.7.2.3.5.4 shall be transported in a consignment
with no more than 15 g of fissile nuclides;
.5 unpackaged or packaged fissile material classified in accordance with 2.7.2.3.5.5 shall be transported
under exclusive use on a conveyance with no more than 45 g of fissile nuclides.
5.1.6 Packages packed into a cargo transport unit
5.1.6.1 Regardless of the placarding and marking provisions for cargo transport units, each package containing
dangerous goods packed into a cargo transport unit shall be marked and labelled in accordance with the
requirements of chapter 5.2.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 5.2
Marking and labelling of packages including IBCs
Note: These provisions relate essentially to the marking and labelling of dangerous goods according to their
properties. However, additional marks or symbols indicating precautions to be taken in handling or storing
a package (such as a symbol representing an umbrella, indicating that a package shall be kept dry) may be
displayed on a package if appropriate.
5.2.1 Marking of packages including IBCs
5.2.1.1 Unless provided otherwise in this Code, the proper shipping name for the dangerous goods as determined in
accordance with 3.1.2 and the corresponding UN number, preceded by the letters “UN”, shall be displayed
on each package. The UN number and the letters “UN” shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packages
of 30 L capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass or less and for cylinders of 60 L water capacity
or less when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and except for packages of 5 L capacity or less or
of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an appropriate size. In the case of unpackaged articles, the
mark shall be displayed on the article, on its cradle or on its handling, storage or launching device. For goods
of division 1.4, compatibility group S, the division and compatibility group letter shall also be marked unless
the label for 1.4S is displayed. A typical package mark is:
CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S. (caprylyl chloride) UN 3265.
Note: Cylinders of 60 L water capacity or less marked with a UN number in accordance with the provisions
of the IMDG Code up to 31 December 2013 and which do not conform to the provisions of 5.2.1.1 regarding
the size of the UN number and of the letters “UN” applicable as from 1 January 2014 may continue to be used
until the next periodic inspection but no later than 1 July 2018.
5.2.1.2 All package marks required by 5.2.1.1:
.1 shall be readily visible and legible;
.2 shall be such that this information will still be identifiable on packages surviving at least three months’
immersion in the sea. In considering suitable marking methods, account shall be taken of the durability
of the packaging materials used and the surface of the package;
.3 shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour on the external surface of the package; and
.4 shall not be located with other package marks that could substantially reduce their effectiveness.
5.2.1.3 Salvage packagings including large salvage packagings and salvage pressure receptacles shall additionally
be marked with the word “SALVAGE”. The lettering of the “SALVAGE” mark shall be at least 12 mm high.
5.2.1.4 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 L capacity and large packagings shall be marked on two
opposing sides.
5.2.1.5 Special marking provisions for radioactive material
5.2.1.5.1 Each package shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with an identification of
either the consignor or consignee, or both. Each overpack shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside
of the overpack with an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both unless these marks of all
packages within the overpack are clearly visible.
5.2.1.5.2 The marking of excepted packages of radioactive material of class 7 shall be as required by 5.1.5.4.1.
5.2.1.5.3 Each package of gross mass exceeding 50 kg shall have its permissible gross mass legibly and durably
marked on the outside of the packaging.
5.2.1.5.4 Each package which conforms to:
.1 a Type IP-1 package, a Type IP-2 package or a Type IP-3 package design shall be legibly and durably
marked on the outside of the packaging with “TYPE IP-1”, “TYPE IP-2” or “TYPE IP-3” as appropriate;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with
“TYPE A”;
.3 a Type IP-2 package, a Type IP-3 package or a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably
marked on the outside of the packaging with the international vehicle registration code (VRI code) of
the country of origin of design and either the name of the manufacturer or other identification of the
packaging specified by the competent authority of the country of origin of design.
5.2.1.5.5 Each package which conforms to a design approved under one or more of paragraphs 5.1.5.2.1, 6.4.22.1 to
6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.4 to 6.4.23.7 and 6.4.24.2 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the package
with the following information:
.1 the identification mark allocated to that design by the competent authority;
.2 a serial number to uniquely identify each packaging which conforms to that design;
.3 “Type B(U)”, “Type B(M)” or “Type C”, in the case of a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package design.
5.2.1.5.6 Each package which conforms to a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package design shall have the outside
of the outermost receptacle which is resistant to the effects of fire and water plainly marked by embossing,
stamping or other means resistant to the effects of fire and water with the trefoil symbol shown below.
60˚
60˚
X/2
X
55XX
Basic trefoil symbol with proportions based on a central circle of radius X.
The minimum allowable size of X shall be 4 mm.
Any mark on the package made in accordance with the requirements of 5.2.1.5.4.1 and .2 and 5.2.1.5.5.3
relating to the package type that does not relate to the UN number and proper shipping name assigned to the
consignment shall be removed or covered.
5.2.1.5.7 Where LSA-I or SCO-I material is contained in receptacles or wrapping materials and is transported under
exclusive use as permitted by 4.1.9.2.4, the outer surface of these receptacles or wrapping materials may
bear the mark ”RADIOACTIVE LSA-I” or ”RADIOACTIVE SCO-I”, as appropriate.
5.2.1.5.8 In all cases of international transport of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
marking shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of the design.
5.2.1.6 Special marking provisions for marine pollutants
5.2.1.6.1 Except as provided in 2.10.2.7, packages containing marine pollutants meeting the criteria of 2.9.3 shall be
durably marked with the marine pollutant mark.
5.2.1.6.2 The marine pollutant mark shall be located adjacent to the marks required by 5.2.1.1. The provisions of 5.2.1.2
and 5.2.1.4 shall be met.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.2.1.6.3 The marine pollutant mark shall be as shown in the figure below.
M
n
in
io
im 10
m ns
um 0
m e
0 im
di m
10 m d
m
m
en
u
im
si
in
on
M
Marine pollutant mark
The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The symbol (fish and tree)
shall be black on white or a suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm ×
100 mm and the minimum width of line forming the diamond shall be 2 mm. If the size of the package so
requires, the dimensions/line thickness may be reduced, provided the mark remains clearly visible. Where
dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
Note: The labelling provisions of 5.2.2 apply in addition to any requirement for packages to bear the marine
pollutant mark.
5.2.1.7 Orientation arrows
5.2.1.7.1 Except as provided in 5.2.1.7.2:
– combination packagings having inner packagings containing liquid dangerous goods;
– single packagings fitted with vents;
– closed or open cryogenic receptacles intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases; and
– machinery or apparatus containing liquid dangerous goods when it is required to ensure the liquid
dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation (see special provision 301 of chapter 3.3),
shall be legibly marked with package orientation arrows which are similar to the illustration shown below or
with those meeting the specifications of ISO 780:1997. The orientation arrows shall appear on two opposite
vertical sides of the package with the arrows pointing in the correct upright direction. They shall be rectangular
and of a size that is clearly visible commensurate with the size of the package. Depicting a rectangular border
around the arrows is optional.
or
Two black or red arrows on white or suitable contrasting background.
The rectangular border is optional.
All features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
5.2.1.7.2 Orientation arrows are not required on:
.1 outer packagings containing pressure receptacles except closed or open cryogenic receptacles;
.2 outer packagings containing dangerous goods in inner packagings each containing not more than
120 mL, with sufficient absorbent material between the inner and outer packagings to completely absorb
the liquid contents;
.3 outer packagings containing Division 6.2 infectious substances in primary receptacles each containing
not more than 50 mL;
.4 type IP-2, type IP-3, type A, type B(U), type B(M) or type C packages containing class 7 radioactive material;
.5 outer packagings containing articles which are leak-tight in all orientations (e.g. alcohol or mercury in
thermometers, aerosols, etc.); or
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.6 outer packagings containing dangerous goods in hermetically sealed inner packagings each containing
not more than 500 mL.
5.2.1.7.3 Arrows for purposes other than indicating proper package orientation shall not be displayed on a package
marked in accordance with this subsection.
5.2.1.8 Excepted quantity mark
5.2.1.8.1 Packages containing excepted quantities of dangerous goods shall be marked according to 3.5.4.
5.2.1.9 Limited quantity mark
5.2.1.9.1 Packages containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall be marked according to 3.4.5.
5.2.1.10 Lithium or sodium ion battery mark
5.2.1.10.1 Packages containing lithium or sodium ion cells or batteries prepared in accordance with special provision
188 shall be marked as shown in figure below.
5.2.1.10.2 The mark shall indicate the UN number, preceded by the letters “UN”, i.e. ‘UN 3090’ for lithium metal cells or
batteries, ‘UN 3480’ for lithium ion cells or batteries, or ‘UN 3551’ for sodium ion cells or batteries. Where the
cells or batteries are contained in, or packed with, equipment, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”,
i.e. ‘UN 3091’, ‘UN 3481’ or ‘UN 3552’ as appropriate shall be indicated. Where a package contains cells
or batteries assigned to different UN numbers, all applicable UN numbers shall be indicated on one or more
marks.
Minimum dimension
100 mm
*
Minimum dimension
100 mm
△ Lithium or sodium ion battery mark
* Place for UN number(s)
The mark shall be in the form of a a rectangle or a square with hatched edging. The dimensions shall be
a minimum of 100 mm wide × 100 mm high and the minimum width of the hatching shall be 5 mm. The
symbol (group of batteries, one damaged and emitting flame, above the UN number(s)) shall be black on
white or suitable contrasting background. The hatching shall be red. If the size of the package so requires,
the dimensions may be reduced to not less than 100 mm wide × 70 mm high. Where dimensions are not
specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
Note: The mark shown in the figure “Lithium battery mark” in 5.2.1.10.2 of the IMDG Code Amendment 40-20,
showing the telephone number for additional information, may continue to be applied until 31 December
2026.
5.2.2 Labelling of packages including IBCs
5.2.2.1 Labelling provisions
These provisions are related essentially to danger labels. However, additional marks or symbols indicating
precautions to be taken in handling or storing a package (such as a symbol representing an umbrella,
indicating that a package shall be kept dry) may be displayed on a package if appropriate.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.2.2.1.1 Labels identifying primary and subsidiary hazards shall conform to models Nos. 1 to 9 illustrated in 5.2.2.2.2.
The “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label is model No. 1.
5.2.2.1.2 Where articles or substances are specifically listed in the Dangerous Goods List, a danger class label shall
be affixed for the hazard shown in column 3. A subsidiary hazard label shall also be affixed for any hazard
indicated by a class or division number in column 4 of the Dangerous Goods List. However, special provisions
indicated in column 6 may also require a subsidiary hazard label where no subsidiary hazard is indicated
in column 4 or may be exempt from the requirement for a subsidiary hazard label where such a hazard is
indicated in the Dangerous Goods List.
5.2.2.1.2.1 A package containing a dangerous substance which has a low degree of danger may be exempt from these
labelling requirements. In this case, a special provision specifying that no hazard label is required appears
in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List for the relevant substance. However, for certain substances the
package shall be marked with the appropriate text as it appears in the special provision, for example:
Substance UN No. Class Mark required on bales
Baled hay in cargo 1327 4.1 None
transport unit
Baled hay not in cargo 1327 4.1 Class 4.1
transport unit
Baled dry vegetable fibres 3360 4.1 None
in cargo transport unit
Substance UN No. Class Mark required on packages
in addition to the proper shipping
name and UN number
Fish meal* 1374 4.2 Class 4.2†
*
Only applicable to fish meal in packing group III.
†
Exempt from class marking when loaded in a cargo transport unit containing only fish meal under UN 1374.
5.2.2.1.3 Except as provided in 5.2.2.1.3.1, if a substance which meets the definition of more than one class is not
specifically listed by name in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2, the provisions in chapter 2.0 shall be
used to determine the primary hazard class of the goods. In addition to the label required for that primary
hazard class, subsidiary hazard labels shall also be applied as specified in the Dangerous Goods List.
5.2.2.1.3.1 Packagings containing substances of class 8 need not bear subsidiary hazard label model No. 6.1 if the
toxicity arises solely from the destructive effect on tissue. Substances of class 4.2 need not bear subsidiary
hazard label model No. 4.1.
5.2.2.1.4 Labels for class 2 gases with subsidiary hazard(s)
Subsidiary hazard(s)
Class Primary hazard label Subsidiary hazard label(s)
shown in chapter 2.2
2.1 None 2.1 None
2.2 None 2.2 None
5.1 2.2 5.1
2.3 None 2.3 None
2.1 2.3 2.1
5.1 2.3 5.1
5.1, 8 2.3 5.1, 8
8 2.3 8
2.1, 8 2.3 2.1, 8
5.2.2.1.5 Three separate labels have been provided for class 2, one for flammable gases of class 2.1 (red), one for
non-flammable, non-toxic gases of class 2.2 (green) and one for toxic gases of class 2.3 (white). Where the
Dangerous Goods List indicates that a class 2 gas possesses single or multiple subsidiary hazards, labels
shall be used in accordance with the table in 5.2.2.1.4.
5.2.2.1.6 Except as provided in 5.2.2.2.1.2, each label shall:
.1 be located on the same surface of the package near the proper shipping name mark, if the package
dimensions are adequate;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 be so placed on the packaging that it is not covered or obscured by any part or attachment to the
packaging or any other label or mark; and
.3 when primary and subsidiary hazard labels are required, be displayed next to each other.
Where a package is of such an irregular shape or small size that a label cannot be satisfactorily affixed, the
label may be attached to the package by a securely affixed tag or other suitable means.
5.2.2.1.7 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 L capacity and large packagings shall be labelled on two
opposing sides.
5.2.2.1.8 Labels shall be affixed on a surface of contrasting colour.
5.2.2.1.9 Special provisions for the labelling of self-reactive substances
An “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (No. 1) shall be applied for type B self-reactive substances, unless
the competent authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test
data have proved that the self-reactive substance in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour.
5.2.2.1.10 Special provisions for the labelling of organic peroxides
The class 5.2 label (model No. 5.2) shall be affixed to packages containing organic peroxides classified as
types B, C, D, E or F. This label also implies that the product may be flammable and hence no “FLAMMABLE
LIQUID” subsidiary hazard label (model No. 3) is required. In addition, the following subsidiary hazard labels
shall be applied:
.1 An “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (model No. 1) for organic peroxides type B, unless the competent
authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have
proved that the organic peroxide in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour.
.2 A “CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (model No. 8) is required when packing group I or II criteria of
class 8 are met.
5.2.2.1.11 Special provisions for the labelling of infectious substances packages
In addition to the primary hazard label (model No. 6.2), infectious substances packages shall bear any other
label required by the nature of the contents.
5.2.2.1.12 Special provisions for the labelling of radioactive material
5.2.2.1.12.1 Except when enlarged labels are used in accordance with 5.3.1.1.5.1, each package, overpack and freight
container containing radioactive material shall bear the labels conforming to the applicable model Nos. 7A,
7B or 7C, according to the appropriate category. Labels shall be affixed to two opposite sides on the outside
of the package or overpack or on the outside of all four sides of a freight container or tank. In addition, each
package, overpack and freight container containing fissile material, other than fissile material excepted under
the provisions of 2.7.2.3.5, shall bear labels conforming to model No. 7E; such labels, where applicable,
shall be affixed adjacent to the labels conforming to the applicable model Nos. 7A, 7B or 7C. Labels shall not
cover the marks specified in this chapter. Any labels which do not relate to the contents shall be removed or
covered.
5.2.2.1.12.2 Each label conforming to the applicable model No. 7A, 7B or 7C shall be completed with the following
information:
.1 Contents:
.1 Except for LSA-I material, the name(s) of the radionuclide(s) as taken from the table under 2.7.2.2.1,
using the symbols prescribed therein. For mixtures of radionuclides, the most restrictive nuclides
must be listed to the extent the space on the line permits. The group of LSA or SCO shall be shown
following the name(s) of the radionuclide(s). The terms “LSA-II”, “LSA-III”, “SCO-I” and “SCO-II”
shall be used for this purpose.
.2 For LSA-I material, the term “LSA-I” is all that is necessary; the name of the radionuclide is not
necessary.
.2 Activity: The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport, expressed in units of
becquerels (Bq) with the appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the total mass of
fissile nuclides in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity.
.3 For overpacks and freight containers, the “contents” and “activity” entries on the label shall bear the
information required in 5.2.2.1.12.2.1 and 5.2.2.1.12.2.2, respectively, totalled together for the entire
contents of the overpack or freight container except that, on labels for overpacks or freight containers
containing mixed loads of packages containing different radionuclides, such entries may read “See
transport documents”.
.4 Transport index: The number determined in accordance with 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2 (except for
category I-WHITE)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.2.2.1.12.3 Each label conforming to the model No. 7E shall be completed with the criticality safety index (CSI) as stated
in the certificate of approval applicable in the countries through or into which the consignment is transported
and issued by the competent authority or as specified in 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3.
5.2.2.1.12.4 For overpacks and freight containers, the label conforming to model No. 7E shall bear the sum of the criticality
safety indexes of all the packages contained therein.
5.2.2.1.12.5 In all cases of international transport of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
labelling shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.
5.2.2.1.13 Labels for articles containing dangerous goods transported as UN Nos. 3537, 3538, 3539, 3540,
3541, 3542, 3543, 3544, 3545, 3546, 3547 and 3548
.1 Packages containing articles or articles transported unpackaged shall bear labels according to 5.2.2.1.2
reflecting the hazards established according to 2.0.6. If the article contains one or more lithium or sodium
ion batteries with, for lithium metal batteries, an aggregate lithium content of 2 g or less, and for lithium
ion or sodium ion batteries, a Watt-hour rating of 100 Wh or less, the lithium or sodium ion battery mark
(5.2.1.10.2) shall be affixed to the package or unpackaged article. If the article contains one or more
lithium or sodium ion batteries with, for lithium metal batteries, an aggregate lithium content of more than
2 g and for lithium ion or sodium ion batteries, a Watt-hour rating of more than 100 Wh, the battery label
(5.2.2.2.2 No. 9A) shall be affixed to the package or unpackaged article.
.2 When it is required to ensure articles containing liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended
orientation, orientation marks meeting 5.2.1.7.1 shall be affixed and visible on at least two opposite
vertical sides of the package or of the unpackaged article where possible, with the arrows pointing in the
correct upright direction.
5.2.2.2 Provisions for labels
5.2.2.2.1 Labels shall satisfy the provisions of this section and conform, in terms of colour, symbols, numbers and
general format, to the specimen labels shown in 5.2.2.2.2.
Note: Where appropriate, labels in 5.2.2.2.2 are shown with a dotted outer boundary as provided for in
5.2.2.2.1.1. This is not required when the label is applied on a background of contrasting colour.
5.2.2.2.1.1 Labels shall be configured as shown in the figure below:
5 mm
***
**
M
n
in
io
im 10
m ns
*
um 0
m e
0 im
di m
10 m d
m
m
en
u
im
si
in
on
M
Class/division label
* The class or, for divisions 5.1 and 5.2, the division number shall be shown in the bottom corner.
** Additional text/numbers/symbol/letters shall (if mandatory) or may (if optional) be shown in this bottom half.
*** The class or division symbol or, for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, the division number,
and for model No. 7E, the word “FISSILE” shall be shown in this top half.
5.2.2.2.1.1.1 Labels shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer
boundary line.
5.2.2.2.1.1.2 The label shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45 degrees (diamond-shaped). The minimum
dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm. There shall be a line inside the edge forming the diamond which shall
be parallel and approximately 5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the label. Where dimensions
are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.2.2.2.1.1.3 If the size of the package so requires the dimensions may be reduced proportionally, provided the symbols
and other elements of the label remain clearly visible. Dimensions for cylinders shall comply with 5.2.2.2.1.2.
5.2.2.2.1.2 Cylinders for class 2 may, on account of their shape, orientation and securing mechanisms for transport,
bear labels representative of those specified in this section, which have been reduced in size, according to
ISO 7225:2005, Gas cylinders – Precautionary labels, for display on the non-cylindrical part (shoulder) of such
cylinders. Labels may overlap to the extent provided for by ISO 7225:2005; however, in all cases, the labels
representing the primary hazard and the numbers appearing on any label shall remain fully visible and the
symbols recognizable.
Note: When the diameter of the cylinder is too small to permit the display of the reduced size labels on the
non-cylindrical upper part of the cylinder, the reduced sized labels may be displayed on the cylindrical part.
5.2.2.2.1.3 With the exception of labels for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 of class 1, the upper half of the label shall contain the
pictorial symbol and the lower half shall contain the class number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.1, 5.2, 6, 7, 8 or 9 as appropriate.
However, for label model No. 9A, the upper half of the label shall only contain the seven vertical stripes of the
symbol and the lower half shall contain the group of batteries of the symbol and the class number. Except for
label model No. 9A, the label may include such text as the UN number, or words describing the hazard class
(e.g. “flammable”) in accordance with 5.2.2.2.1.5 provided that the text does not obscure or detract from the
other required label elements.
5.2.2.2.1.4 In addition, except for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, labels for class 1 shall show in the lower half, above the class
number, the division number and compatibility group letter for the substance or article. Labels for divisions
1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 shall show in the upper half the division number and in the lower half the class number and
the compatibility group letter. For division 1.4, compatibility group S, no label is generally required. However,
in cases where a label is considered necessary for such goods, it shall be based on model No. 1.4.
5.2.2.2.1.5 On labels other than those for material of class 7, the insertion of any text (other than the class or division
number) in the space below the symbol shall be confined to particulars indicating the nature of the hazard
and precautions to be taken in handling. For label No. 9A, no text other than the class mark shall be included
in the bottom part of the label.
5.2.2.2.1.6 The symbols, text and numbers shall be shown in black on all labels except for:
.1 the class 8 label, where the text (if any) and class number shall appear in white;
.2 labels with entirely green, red or blue backgrounds, where they may be shown in white;
.3 the class 5.2 label, where the symbol may be shown in white; and
.4 class 2.1 labels displayed on cylinders and gas cartridges for liquefied petroleum gases, where they may
be shown in the background colour of the receptacle if adequate contrast is provided.
5.2.2.2.1.7 The method of affixing the label(s) or applying stencil(s) of label(s) on packages containing dangerous goods
shall be such that the label(s) or stencil(s) will still be identifiable on packages surviving at least three months’
immersion in the sea. In considering suitable labelling methods, account shall be taken of the durability of the
packaging materials used and the surface of the package.
5.2.2.2.2 Specimen labels
Note: Labels shall satisfy the provisions below and conform, in terms of colour, symbols and general format, to
the models shown in 5.2.2.2.2. Corresponding models required for other modes of transport, with minor
variations which do not affect the obvious meaning of the label, are also acceptable.
Class 1: Explosives
Label Class, Division Figure in bottom corner
Symbol and symbol colour Background Specimen labels Note
model no. or Category (and figure colour)
** Place for division – to be
left blank if explosive is the
Divisions 1.1, 1 subsidiary hazard
1 Exploding bomb: black Orange
1.2, 1.3 (black) * Place for compatibility group
**
*1 – to be left blank if explosive
is the subsidiary hazard
1.4: black
Numerals shall be about 30 mm 1.4
1
1.4 Division 1.4 in height and be about 5 mm Orange * Place for compatibility group
(black)
thick (for a label measuring *
100 mm × 100 mm)
1
1.5: black
Numerals shall be about 30 mm 1.5
1
1.5 Division 1.5 in height and be about 5 mm Orange * Place for compatibility group
(black)
thick (for a label measuring *
AMENDMENTS TO THE
100 mm × 100 mm)
1
1.6: black
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
Numerals shall be about 30 mm 1.6
1
1.6 Division 1.6 in height and be about 5 mm Orange * Place for compatibility group
(black)
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
thick (for a label measuring *
100 mm × 100 mm)
1
Class 2: Gases
Label Class, Division Symbol and Figure in bottom corner
Background Specimen labels Note
model no. or Category symbol colour (and figure colour)
2
Flame: black or white
Class 2.1: (black or white)
2.1 (except as provided for Red –
Flammable gases (except as provided for in
in 5.2.2.2.1.6.4)
5.2.2.2.1.6.4)
Class 2.2:
Gas cylinder: black or 2
2.2 Non-flammable, Green –
white (black or white)
non-toxic gases
AMENDMENTS TO THE
Class 2.3: Skull and crossbones: 2
2.3 White –
Toxic gases black (black)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Class 3: Flammable liquids
Label Class, Division or Symbol and Figure in bottom corner
Background Specimen labels Note
model no. Category symbol colour (and figure colour)
3
3 – Flame: black or white Red –
(black or white)
Class 4: Flammable solids; substances liable to spontaneous combustion; substances which, in contact with water, emit flammable gases
Label Class, Division or Symbol and Figure in bottom corner
Background Specimen labels Note
model no. Category symbol colour (and figure colour)
Class 4.1:
Flammable solids,
self-reactive
White with
substances, 4
4.1 Flame: black 7 vertical red –
polymerizing (black)
stripes
substances and
solid desensitized
explosives
Class 4.2:
Upper half
Substances liable 4
4.2 Flame: black white, lower half –
to spontaneous (black)
red
combustion
Class 4.3:
Substances which, in 4
4.3 Flame: black or white Blue –
contact with water, emit (black or white)
flammable gases
AMENDMENTS TO THE
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Class 5: Oxidizing substances and organic peroxides
Label Class, Division or Symbol and Figure in bottom corner
Background Specimen labels Note
model no. Category symbol colour (and figure colour)
Class 5.1: 5.1
5.1 Flame over circle: black Yellow –
Oxidizing substances (black)
5.1
Class 5.2: Upper half red, 5.2
5.2 Flame: black or white –
Organic peroxides lower half yellow (black)
5.2 5.2
Class 6: Toxic and infectious substances
AMENDMENTS TO THE
Label Class, Division or Symbol and Figure in bottom corner
Background Specimen labels Note
model no. Category symbol colour (and figure colour)
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
Class 6.1: Skull and crossbones: 6
6.1 White –
Toxic substances black (black)
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
The lower half of the label
may bear the inscriptions:
“INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE”
Three crescents
Class 6.2: 6 and
6.2 superimposed on a White
Infectious substances (black) “In the case of damage or
circle: black
leakage immediately notify
Public Health Authority” in
black colour
Class 7: Radioactive material
Label Class, Division Figure in bottom corner
Symbol and symbol colour Background Specimen labels Note
model no. or Category (and figure colour)
Text (mandatory), black in
lower half of label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
Category I – 7 “CONTENTS ...”
7A Trefoil: black White RADIOACTIVE I
WHITE (black) CONTENTS ........................................
“ACTIVITY ...”
ACTIVITY ...................................
One red vertical bar
shall follow the word:
“RADIOACTIVE”
Text (mandatory), black in
lower half of label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
Upper half “CONTENTS ...”
Category II – yellow with white 7 “ACTIVITY ...”
7B Trefoil: black
YELLOW border, lower (black) RADIOACTIVE II In a black outlined box:
CONTENTS ........................................
ACTIVITY ...................................
TRANSPORT
half white INDEX . . . . .
“TRANSPORT INDEX”;
Two red vertical bars
shall follow the word:
“RADIOACTIVE”
Text (mandatory), black in
lower half of label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
Upper half “CONTENTS ...”
AMENDMENTS TO THE
Category III – yellow with white 7 “ACTIVITY ...”
7C Trefoil: black RADIOACTIVE III
YELLOW border, lower (black) CONTENTS ........................................
In a black outlined box:
ACTIVITY ...................................
half white TRANSPORT
INDEX . . . . .
“TRANSPORT INDEX”;
Three red vertical bars
shall follow the word:
“RADIOACTIVE”
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Text (mandatory): black in
upper half of label: “FISSILE”;
7 FISSILE In a black outlined box
7E Fissile material – White
(black) CRITICALITY
in the lower half of label:
SAFETY INDEX
..........
“CRITICALITY SAFETY
INDEX”
Class 8: Corrosive substances
Label Class, Division or Symbol and Figure in bottom corner
Background Specimen labels Note
model no. Category symbol colour (and figure colour)
Liquids, spilling from Upper half
two glass vessels and white, lower half 8
8 – –
attacking a hand and black with white (white)
a metal: black border
Class 9: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles, including environmentally hazardous substances
Label Class, Division or Symbol and Figure in bottom corner
Background Specimen labels Note
model no. Category symbol colour (and figure colour)
7 vertical stripes in 9 underlined
9 – White –
upper half: black (black)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
7 vertical stripes in
upper half: black;
9 underlined
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
9A – battery group, one White –
(black)
broken and emitting
flame in lower half: black
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 5.3
Placarding and marking of cargo transport units
and bulk containers
5.3.1 Placarding
5.3.1.1 Placarding provisions
5.3.1.1.1 General provisions
.1 Enlarged labels (placards) and marks and signs shall be affixed to the exterior surfaces of a cargo
transport unit or bulk container to provide a warning that the contents of the unit or bulk container are
dangerous goods and present hazards, unless the labels and/or marks affixed to the packages are
clearly visible from the exterior of the cargo transport unit or bulk container.
.2 The methods of placarding and marking as required in 5.3.1.1.4 and 5.3.2 on cargo transport units and
bulk containers shall be such that this information will still be identifiable on cargo transport units and
bulk containers surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea. In considering suitable marking
methods, account shall be taken of the ease with which the surface of the cargo transport unit or bulk
container can be marked.
.3 All placards, orange panels, marks and signs shall be removed from cargo transport units and bulk
containers or masked as soon as both the dangerous goods or their residues which led to the application
of those placards, orange panels, marks or signs are discharged.
5.3.1.1.2 Placards shall be affixed to the exterior surface of cargo transport units and bulk containers to provide a
warning that the contents of the unit are dangerous goods and present hazards. Placards shall correspond
to the primary hazard of the goods contained in the cargo transport unit and bulk container except that:
.1 placards are not required on cargo transport units carrying any quantity of explosives of division 1.4,
compatibility group S; and
.2 placards indicating the highest hazard only need be affixed on cargo transport units carrying substances
and articles of more than one division in class 1.
Placards shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer
boundary line.
For dangerous goods of class 9 the placard shall correspond to the label model No. 9 as in 5.2.2.2.2; label
model No. 9A shall not be used for placarding purposes.
5.3.1.1.3 Placards shall also be displayed for those subsidiary hazards for which a subsidiary hazard label is required
according to 5.2.2.1.2. However, cargo transport units and bulk containers containing goods of more than one
class need not bear a subsidiary hazard placard if the hazard represented by that placard is already indicated
by a primary hazard placard.
5.3.1.1.4 Placarding requirements
5.3.1.1.4.1 A cargo transport unit or bulk container containing dangerous goods or residues of dangerous goods shall
clearly display placards as follows:
.1 a freight container, semi-trailer, a closed or sheeted bulk container or portable tank: one on each side
and one on each end of the unit. Portable tanks having a capacity of not more than 3,000 L may be
placarded or, alternatively, may be labelled instead, on only two opposite sides;
.2 a railway wagon: at least on each side;
.3 a multiple-compartment tank containing more than one dangerous substance or their residues: along
each side at the positions of the relevant compartments. If all compartments are required to display the
same placards, these placards need to be displayed only once along each side of the cargo transport
unit;
.4 a flexible bulk container: in at least two opposing positions; and
.5 any other cargo transport unit: at least on both sides and on the back of the unit.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.3.1.1.5 Special provisions for class 7
5.3.1.1.5.1 Large freight containers carrying unpackaged LSA-I material or SCO-I or SCO-III or packages other than
excepted packages, and tanks, shall bear four placards which conform with the model No. 7D given in the
figure. The placards shall be affixed in a vertical orientation to each side wall and each end wall of the large
freight container or tank. Any placards which do not relate to the contents shall be removed. Instead of using
both labels and placards, it is permitted as an alternative to use enlarged labels only, as shown in label model
Nos. 7A, 7B and 7C, except having the minimum size shown in the figure under 5.3.1.2.2.
5.3.1.1.5.2 Rail and road vehicles carrying packages, overpacks or freight containers labelled with any of the labels
shown in 5.2.2.2.2 as model Nos. 7A, 7B, 7C and 7E, or carrying consignments under exclusive use, shall
display the placard shown in the figure (model No. 7D) on each of:
.1 the two external lateral walls, in the case of a rail vehicle;
.2 the two external lateral walls and the external rear wall, in the case of a road vehicle.
In the case of a vehicle without sides, the placards may be affixed directly on the cargo-carrying unit provided
that they are readily visible; in the case of physically large tanks or freight containers, the placards on the
tanks or freight containers shall suffice. In the case of vehicles which have insufficient area to allow the fixing
of larger placards, the dimensions of the placard as described in the figure may be reduced to 100 mm. Any
placards which do not relate to the contents shall be removed.
5.3.1.2 Specifications for placards
5.3.1.2.1 Except as provided in 5.3.1.2.2 for the class 7 placard, and in 5.3.2.3.2 for the marine pollutant mark, a
placard shall be configured as shown in the figure below.
12.5 mm
M
n
in
io
im 25
m ns
um 0
m e
0 im
di m
25 m d
m
m
en
u
im
si
in
on
M
Placard (except for class 7)
The placard shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The minimum dimensions
shall be 250 mm × 250 mm (to the edge of the placard). The line inside the edge shall be parallel and 12.5 mm
from the outside of that line to the edge of the placard. The symbol and line inside the edge shall correspond
in colour to the label for the class or division of the dangerous goods in question. The class or division symbol/
numeral shall be positioned and sized in proportion to those prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the corresponding class
or division of the dangerous goods in question. The placard shall display the number of the class or division
(and for goods in class 1, the compatibility group letter) of the dangerous goods in question in the manner
prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the corresponding label, in digits not less than 25 mm high. Where dimensions are
not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
5.3.1.2.2 For class 7, the placard shall have minimum overall dimensions of 250 mm by 250 mm (except as permitted by
5.3.1.1.5.2) with a black line running 5 mm inside the edge and parallel with it, and shall be otherwise as shown
in the figure below. When different dimensions are used, the relative proportions shall be maintained. The
number “7” shall not be less than 25 mm high. The background colour of the upper half of the placard shall
be yellow and of the lower half white; the colour of the trefoil and the printing shall be black. The use of the
word “RADIOACTIVE” in the bottom half is optional to allow the use of this placard to display the appropriate
United Nations Number for the consignment.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5 mm
10 mm
minimum
RADIOACTIVE
M
n
io
in
m ns
im 25
m e
um 0
0 dim
di m
25 m
m
m
u
en
im
si
in
on
M
Placard for radioactive material of class 7
(No. 7D)
Symbol (trefoil): black.
Background: upper half yellow with white border, lower half white.
The lower half shall show the word RADIOACTIVE or
alternatively, when required (see 5.3.2.1), the appropriate UN number
and the figure ‘7’ in the bottom corner.
5.3.2 Marking
5.3.2.0 Display of proper shipping name
5.3.2.0.1 The proper shipping name of the contents shall be durably marked on at least both sides of:
.1 tank cargo transport units containing dangerous goods;
.2 bulk containers containing dangerous goods; or
.3 any other cargo transport unit containing packaged dangerous goods of a single commodity for which no
placard, UN number or marine pollutant mark is required. Alternatively, the UN number may be displayed.
5.3.2.0.2 The proper shipping name for the goods shall be displayed in characters not less than 65 mm high. The
proper shipping name shall be of contrasting colour with the background. This may be reduced to 12 mm for
portable tank containers with a capacity of not more than 3,000 L.
5.3.2.1 Display of UN numbers
5.3.2.1.1 Except for goods of class 1, the UN number shall be displayed as required by this chapter on consignments of:
.1 solids, liquids or gases transported in tank cargo transport units, including on each compartment of a
multi-compartment tank cargo transport unit;
.2 packaged dangerous goods loaded in excess of 4000 kg gross mass, to which only one UN number has
been assigned and which are the only dangerous goods in the cargo transport unit;
.3 unpackaged LSA-I material, SCO-I or SCO-III material of class 7 in or on a vehicle, or in a freight container,
or in a tank;
.4 packaged radioactive material with a single UN number in or on a vehicle, or in a freight container, when
required to be transported under exclusive use;
.5 solid dangerous goods in bulk containers.
5.3.2.1.2 The UN number for the goods shall be displayed in black digits not less than 65 mm high, either:
.1 against a white background in the area below the pictorial symbol and above the class number and the
compatibility group letter in a manner that does not obscure or detract from the other required placard
elements (see 5.3.2.1.3); or
.2 on an orange rectangular panel not less than 120 mm high and 300 mm wide, with a 10 mm black
border, to be placed immediately adjacent to each placard or marine pollutant mark (see 5.3.2.1.3). For
portable tanks with a capacity of not more than 3,000 L, the UN number may be displayed on an orange
rectangular panel of appropriately reduced size on the external surface of the tank in characters not
less than 25 mm high. When no placard or marine pollutant mark is required, the UN number shall be
displayed immediately adjacent to the proper shipping name.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.3.2.1.3 Examples of display of UN numbers
or **
**
* *
or or
or **
**
* *
* location of class or division number
** location of UN number
5.3.2.2 Elevated temperature substance mark
5.3.2.2.1 Cargo transport units containing a substance that is transported or offered for transport in a liquid state at a
temperature equal to or exceeding 100°C or in a solid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 240°C shall
bear on each side and on each end the mark shown in the figure below.
Mi
n
m sio
nim 250
0 m en
um mm
25 dim
dim
um
en
nim
sio
Mi
n
Minimum dimension
250 mm
Mark for transport at elevated temperature
The mark shall be an equilateral triangle. The colour of the mark shall be red. The minimum dimension of the
sides shall be 250 mm except for portable tanks with a capacity of not more than 3,000 L where the sides may
be reduced to 100 mm. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion
to those shown.
5.3.2.2.2 In addition to the elevated temperature mark, the maximum temperature of the substance expected to be
reached during transport shall be durably marked on both sides of the portable tank or insulation jacket,
immediately adjacent to the elevated temperature mark, in characters at least 100 mm high.
5.3.2.3 Marine pollutant mark
5.3.2.3.1 Except as provided in 2.10.2.7, cargo transport units or bulk containers containing marine pollutants shall
clearly display the marine pollutant mark in locations indicated in 5.3.1.1.4.1.
5.3.2.3.2 The marine pollutant mark for cargo transport units and bulk containers shall be as described in 5.2.1.6.3,
except that the minimum dimensions shall be 250 mm × 250 mm. For portable tanks with a capacity of not
more than 3,000 L, the dimensions may be reduced to 100 mm × 100 mm.
Note: The requirements of 5.3.2.3.2 shall apply as from 1st January 2017.
5.3.2.4 Limited quantities
Cargo transport units containing dangerous goods packed in limited quantities shall be placarded and
marked according to 3.4.5.5.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 5.4
Documentation
Note 1 The provisions of this Code do not preclude the use of electronic data processing (EDP) and electronic
data interchange (EDI) transmission techniques as an alternative to paper documentation. All references to
“dangerous goods transport document” in this chapter also include provision of the required information by
use of EDP and EDI transmission techniques.
Note 2 When dangerous goods are offered for transport, similar documents to those required for other categories
of goods have to be prepared. The form of these documents, the particulars to be entered on them and the
obligations they entail may be fixed by international conventions applying to certain modes of transport and
by national legislation.
Note 3 One of the primary requirements of a transport document for dangerous goods is to convey the fundamental
information relative to the hazards of the goods. It is, therefore, necessary to include certain basic information
on the document for a consignment of dangerous goods unless otherwise exempted or required in this Code.
Note 4 In addition to the provisions of this chapter, other elements of information may be required by the competent
authority.
Note 5 In addition to the provisions of this chapter other additional information may be included. However, this
information shall not:
.1 divert attention from the safety information required by this chapter or by the competent authority;
.2 contradict the safety information required by this chapter or by the competent authority; or
.3 duplicate information already provided.
5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport information
5.4.1.1 General
5.4.1.1.1 Except as otherwise provided, the consignor who offers dangerous goods for transport shall give to the
carrier the information applicable to those dangerous goods, including any additional information and
documentation as specified in this Code. This information may be provided on a dangerous goods transport
document or, with the agreement of the carrier, by EDP or EDI techniques.
5.4.1.1.2 When the dangerous goods transport information is given to the carrier by EDP or EDI techniques, the
consignor shall be able to produce the information without delay as a paper document, with the information
in the sequence required by this chapter.
5.4.1.2 Form of the transport document
5.4.1.2.1 A dangerous goods transport document may be in any form, provided it contains all of the information
required by the provisions of this Code.
5.4.1.2.2 If both dangerous and non-dangerous goods are listed in one document, the dangerous goods shall be listed
first, or otherwise be emphasized.
5.4.1.2.3 Continuation page
A dangerous goods transport document may consist of more than one page, provided pages are consecutively
numbered.
5.4.1.2.4 The information on a dangerous goods transport document shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.4.1.2.5 Example of a dangerous goods transport document
The form shown in the figure in 5.4.5 is an example of a dangerous goods transport document.*
5.4.1.3 Consignor, consignee and date
The name and address of the consignor and the consignee of the dangerous goods shall be included on the
dangerous goods transport document. The date the dangerous goods transport document or an electronic
copy of it was prepared or given to the initial carrier shall be included.
5.4.1.4 Information required on the dangerous goods transport document
5.4.1.4.1 Dangerous goods description
The dangerous goods transport document shall contain the following information for each dangerous
substance, material or article offered for transport:
.1 the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”;
.2 the proper shipping name, as determined according to 3.1.2, including the technical name enclosed in
parenthesis, as applicable (see 3.1.2.8);
.3 the primary hazard class or, when assigned, the division of the goods, including, for class 1, the
compatibility group letter. The words “Class” or “Division” may be included preceding the primary hazard
class or division numbers;
.4 subsidiary hazard class or division number(s) corresponding to the subsidiary hazard label(s) required
to be applied, when assigned, shall be entered following the primary hazard class or division and shall
be enclosed in parenthesis. The words “Class” or “Division” may be included preceding the subsidiary
hazard class or division numbers;
.5 where assigned, the packing group for the substance or article, which may be preceded by “PG”
(e.g.“PG II”).
5.4.1.4.2 Sequence of the dangerous goods description
The five elements of the dangerous goods description specified in 5.4.1.4.1 shall be shown in the order
listed above (i.e. .1, .2, .3, .4, and .5) with no information interspersed, except as provided in this Code.
Unless permitted or required by this Code, additional information shall be placed after the dangerous goods
description.
5.4.1.4.3 Information which supplements the proper shipping name in the dangerous goods description
The proper shipping name (see 3.1.2) in the dangerous goods description shall be supplemented as follows:
.1 Technical names for “n.o.s.” and other generic descriptions: proper shipping names that are assigned
special provision 274 or 318 in column 6 of the Dangerous Goods List shall be supplemented with their
technical or chemical group names as described in 3.1.2.8.
.2 Empty uncleaned packagings, bulk containers and tanks: Empty means of containment (including
packagings, IBCs, bulk containers, portable tanks, road tank vehicles and railway tank wagons) which
contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes other than class 7 shall be described as such by, for
example, placing the words “EMPTY UNCLEANED” or “RESIDUE LAST CONTAINED” before or after the
dangerous goods description specified in 5.4.1.4.1.1 to .5.
.3 Wastes: For waste dangerous goods (other than radioactive wastes) which are being transported for
disposal, or for processing for disposal, the proper shipping name shall be preceded by the word
“WASTE”, unless this is already a part of the proper shipping name.
.4 Molten substances: When a substance which is solid in accordance with the definition in 1.2.1 is offered
for transport in the molten state, the qualifying word “MOLTEN” shall be added as part of the proper
shipping name, unless it is already part of the proper shipping name (see 3.1.2.5).
.5 Elevated temperature substances: If the proper shipping name of a substance which is transported or
offered for transport in a liquid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding 100°C, or in a solid state
at a temperature equal to or exceeding 240°C, does not convey the elevated temperature condition (for
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
example, by using the term “MOLTEN” or “ELEVATED TEMPERATURE” as part of the proper shipping
name), the word “HOT” shall immediately precede the proper shipping name.
.6 Marine pollutants: Except as provided in 2.10.2.7, if the goods to be transported are marine pollutants,
the goods shall be identified as “MARINE POLLUTANT”, and for “not otherwise specified” (N.O.S.)
entries the proper shipping name shall be supplemented with the recognized chemical name of the
marine pollutant (see 3.1.2.9). The term “MARINE POLLUTANT” may be supplemented with the term
“ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS”.
.7 Flashpoint: If the liquid dangerous goods to be transported have a primary or subsidiary hazard of
class 3 and a flashpoint of 60°C or below (in °C closed-cup (c.c.)), the minimum flashpoint shall be
indicated. Because of the presence of impurities, the flashpoint may be lower or higher than the reference
temperature indicated in the Dangerous Goods List for the substance.
.8 Damaged/defective lithium cells or batteries and lithium cells or batteries for disposal or recycling:
When lithium cells or batteries are offered for transport under special provision 376 or special
provision 377, “DAMAGED/DEFECTIVE”, “LITHIUM BATTERIES FOR DISPOSAL” or “LITHIUM BATTERIES
FOR RECYCLING” shall be indicated, as appropriate.
.9 Stabilized and temperature controlled substances: Unless already part of the proper shipping name,
the word “STABILIZED” shall be added to the proper shipping name if stabilization is used and the
words “TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED” shall be added to the proper shipping name if stabilization is by
temperature control or a combination of chemical stabilization and temperature control (see 3.1.2.6).
5.4.1.4.4 Examples of dangerous goods descriptions:
UN 1092, Acrolein, stabilized, class 6.1 (3), PG I, (-24°C c.c.), MARINE POLLUTANT/ENVIRONMENTALLY
HAZARDOUS
UN 1603, ETHYL BROMOACETATE 6.1 (3) II (58°C c.c.)
UN 1603, ETHYL BROMOACETATE, class 6.1, (class 3), PG II, (58°C c.c.)
UN 2761, Organochlorine pesticide, solid, toxic, (Aldrin 19%), class 6.1, PG III, MARINE POLLUTANT
5.4.1.5 Information required in addition to the dangerous goods description
In addition to the dangerous goods description, the following information shall be included after the dangerous
goods description on the dangerous goods transport document.
5.4.1.5.1 Total quantity of dangerous goods
Except for empty uncleaned packagings, the total quantity of dangerous goods covered by the description
(by volume or mass as appropriate) of each item of dangerous goods bearing a different proper shipping
name, UN number or packing group shall be included. For class 1 dangerous goods, the quantity shall be
the net explosive mass. For dangerous goods transported in salvage packagings, an estimate of the quantity
of dangerous goods shall be given. The number and kind (e.g. drum, box, etc.) of packages shall also be
indicated. UN packaging codes may only be used to supplement the description of the kind of package (e.g.
one box (4G)). Abbreviations may be used to specify the unit of measurement for the total quantity.
Note: The number, type and capacity of each inner packaging within the outer packaging of a combination
packaging is not required to be indicated.
5.4.1.5.2 Limited quantities
5.4.1.5.2.1 When dangerous goods are transported according to the exceptions for dangerous goods packed in limited
quantities provided for in column 7a of the Dangerous Goods List and chapter 3.4, the words “limited quantity”
or “LTD QTY” shall be included.
5.4.1.5.2.2 Where a shipment is offered in accordance with 3.4.4.1.2, the following statement shall be included in the
transport document: “Transport in accordance with 3.4.4.1.2 of the IMDG Code”.
5.4.1.5.3 Salvage packagings including large salvage packagings and salvage pressure receptacles
For dangerous goods transported in salvage packagings in accordance with 4.1.1.18, including large salvage
packagings, larger size packagings or large packagings of appropriate type and performance level to be used
as a salvage packaging, the words “SALVAGE PACKAGING” shall be included.
For dangerous goods transported in salvage pressure receptacles in accordance with 4.1.1.19, the words
“SALVAGE PRESSURE RECEPTACLE” shall be included.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.4.1.5.4 Substances stabilized by temperature control
If the words “TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED” are part of the proper shipping name (see also 3.1.2.6),
the control and emergency temperatures (see 7.3.7.2) shall be indicated in the transport document, as follows:
“Control temperature: … °C Emergency temperature: … °C”.
5.4.1.5.5 Self-reactive substances, polymerizing substances and organic peroxides
For self-reactive substances, organic peroxides and polymerizing substances which require temperature
control during transport, the control and emergency temperatures (see 7.3.7.2) shall be indicated on the
dangerous goods transport document, as follows:
“Control temperature: … °C Emergency temperature: … °C”.
5.4.1.5.5.1 When, for certain self-reactive substances and polymerizing substances of class 4.1 and organic peroxides
of class 5.2, the competent authority has permitted the “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary hazard label (model No. 1)
to be dispensed with for the specific package, a statement to this effect shall be included.
5.4.1.5.5.2 When organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are transported under conditions where approval is
required (for organic peroxides, see 2.5.3.2.5, 4.1.7.2.2, 4.2.1.13.1 and 4.2.1.13.3; for self-reactive substances,
see 2.4.2.3.2.4 and 4.1.7.2.2), a statement to this effect shall be included in the dangerous goods transport
document. A copy of the classification approval and conditions of transport for non-listed organic peroxides
and self-reactive substances shall be attached to the dangerous goods transport document.
5.4.1.5.5.3 When a sample of an organic peroxide (see 2.5.3.2.5.1) or a self-reactive substance (see 2.4.2.3.2.4.2) is
transported, a statement to this effect shall be included in the dangerous goods transport document.
5.4.1.5.6 Infectious substances
The full address of the consignee shall be shown on the document, together with the name of a responsible
person and their telephone number.
5.4.1.5.7 Radioactive material
5.4.1.5.7.1 The following information shall be included for each consignment of class 7 material, as applicable, in the
order given:
.1 the name or symbol of each radionuclide or, for mixtures of radionuclides, an appropriate general
description or a list of the most restrictive nuclides;
.2 a description of the physical and chemical form of the material, or a notation that the material is special
form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. A generic chemical description is
acceptable for chemical form;
.3 the maximum activity of the radioactive contents during transport expressed in units of becquerels (Bq)
with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile material (or
mass of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in units of grams (g), or appropriate multiples
thereof, may be used in place of activity;
.4 the category of the package, overpack or freight container, as assigned per paragraph 5.1.5.3.4, i.e.
I-WHITE, II-YELLOW, III-YELLOW;
.5 the TI as determined per paragraphs 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2 (except for category I-WHITE);
.6 for fissile material:
.1 shipped under one exception of 2.7.2.3.5.1 to 2.7.2.3.5.6, reference to that paragraph;
.2 shipped under 2.7.2.3.5.3 to 2.7.2.3.5.5, the total mass of fissile nuclides;
.3 contained in a package for which one of 6.4.11.2 (a) to (c) or 6.4.11.3 is applied, reference to that
paragraph;
.4 the criticality safety index, where applicable.
.7 the identification mark for each competent authority certificate of approval (special form radioactive
material, low dispersible radioactive material, fissile material excepted under 2.7.2.3.5.6, special
arrangement, package design, or shipment) applicable to the consignment;
.8 for consignments of more than one package, the information contained in 5.4.1.4.1.1 to .3 and
5.4.1.5.7.1.1 to .7 shall be given for each package. For packages in an overpack, freight container, or
conveyance, a detailed statement of the contents of each package within the overpack, freight container,
or conveyance and, where appropriate, of each overpack, freight container, or conveyance shall be
included. If packages are to be removed from the overpack, freight container, or conveyance at a point
of intermediate unloading, appropriate transport documents shall be made available;
.9 where a consignment is required to be shipped under exclusive use, the statement “EXCLUSIVE USE
SHIPMENT”; and
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.10 for LSA-II, LSA-III, SCO-I, SCO-II and SCO-III, the total activity of the consignment as a multiple of A2.
For radioactive material for which the A2 value is unlimited, the multiple of A2 shall be zero.
5.4.1.5.7.2 The transport document shall include a statement regarding actions, if any, that are required to be taken
by the carrier. The statement shall be in the languages deemed necessary by the carrier or the authorities
concerned, and shall include at least the following points:
.1 supplementary requirements for loading, stowage, transport, handling and unloading of the package,
overpack or freight container, including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation of heat
(see 7.1.4.5.2), or a statement that no such requirements are necessary;
.2 restrictions on the mode of transport or conveyance and any necessary routeing instructions;
.3 emergency arrangements appropriate to the consignment.
5.4.1.5.7.3 In all cases of international transport of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment, the
UN number and proper shipping name required in 5.4.1.4.1 shall be in accordance with the certificate of the
country of origin of design.
5.4.1.5.7.4 The applicable competent authority certificates need not necessarily accompany the consignment. The
consignor shall make them available to the carrier(s) before loading and unloading.
5.4.1.5.8 Aerosols
If the capacity of an aerosol is above 1000 mL, this shall be declared in the transport document.
5.4.1.5.9 Explosives
The following information shall be included for each consignment of class 1 goods, as applicable:
.1 Entries have been included for “SUBSTANCES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S.”, “ARTICLES, EXPLOSIVE, N.O.S.”,
and “COMPONENTS, EXPLOSIVE TRAIN, N.O.S.”. When a specific entry does not exist, the competent
authority of the country of origin shall use the entry appropriate to the hazard division and compatibility
group. The transport document shall contain the statement: “Transport under this entry approved by the
competent authority of …” followed by the State’s distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international
road traffic* of the country of the competent authority.
.2 The transport of explosive substances for which a minimum water or phlegmatizer content is specified in
the individual entry is prohibited when containing less water or phlegmatizer than the specified minimum.
Such substances shall only be transported with special authorization granted by the competent authority
of the country of origin. The transport document shall contain the statement “Transport under this entry
approved by the competent authority of …” followed by the State’s distinguishing sign used on vehicles
in international road traffic of the country of the competent authority.
.3 When explosive substances or articles are packaged “as approved by the competent authority”, the
transport document shall contain the statement “Packaging approved by the competent authority of …”
followed by the State’s distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic of the country of
the competent authority.
.4 There are some hazards which are not indicated by the hazard division and compatibility group of a substance.
The shipper shall provide an indication of any such hazards on the dangerous goods documentation.
5.4.1.5.10 Viscous substances
When viscous substances are transported in accordance with 2.3.2.5, the following statement shall be
included in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 2.3.2.5 of the IMDG Code.”.
5.4.1.5.11 Special provisions for segregation
5.4.1.5.11.1 For substances, mixtures, solutions or preparations classified under N.O.S. entries not included in the
segregation groups listed in 3.1.4.4 but belonging, in the opinion of the consignor, to one of these groups
(see 3.1.4.2), the appropriate segregation group name or segregation group code (SGG) listed in 7.2.5.2
preceded by the phrase “IMDG Code segregation group” shall be included in the transport document after
the dangerous goods description. For example:
“UN 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. (phosphoric acid, acetic acid) 8 III IMDG Code segregation
group 1 – Acids”; or
“UN 1760 CORROSIVE LIQUID, N.O.S. (phosphoric acid, acetic acid) 8 III IMDG Code segregation group
SGG1.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.4.1.5.11.2 When substances are loaded together in a cargo transport unit in accordance with 7.2.6.3, the following statement
shall be included in the transport document: “Transport in accordance with 7.2.6.3 of the IMDG Code”.
5.4.1.5.11.3 When acid and alkali substances of class 8 are transported in the same cargo transport unit, whether in the
same packaging or not, in accordance with 7.2.6.5, the following statement shall be included in the transport
document: “Transport in accordance with 7.2.6.5 of the IMDG Code”.
5.4.1.5.12 Transport of solid dangerous goods in bulk containers
For bulk containers other than freight containers, the following statement shall be included on the transport
document (see 6.9.4.6):
“Bulk container BK(x) approved by the competent authority of …”
Note: “(x)” shall be replaced with “1” or “2”, as appropriate.
5.4.1.5.13 Transport of IBCs or portable tanks after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection
For transport in accordance with 4.1.2.2.2, 6.7.2.19.6.2, 6.7.3.15.6.2 or 6.7.4.14.6.2, a statement to this effect
shall be included in the transport document, as follows: “Transport in accordance with 4.1.2.2.2”, “Transport
in accordance with 6.7.2.19.6.2”, “Transport in accordance with 6.7.3.15.6.2” or “Transport in accordance with
6.7.4.14.6.2” as appropriate.
5.4.1.5.14 Dangerous goods in excepted quantities
5.4.1.5.14.1 When dangerous goods are transported according to the exceptions for dangerous goods packed in excepted
quantities provided for in column 7b of the Dangerous Goods List and chapter 3.5, the words “dangerous
goods in excepted quantities” shall be included.
5.4.1.5.15 Firework classification reference
When fireworks of UN Nos. 0333, 0334, 0335, 0336 and 0337 are transported, the dangerous goods transport
document shall include a classification reference(s) issued by the competent authority.
The classification reference(s) shall consist of the competent authority's state, indicated by the distinguishing
sign used on vehicles in international road traffic,* the competent authority identification and a unique serial
reference. Examples of such classification references are:
– GB/HSE123456
– D/BAM1234
– USA EX20091234.
5.4.1.5.16 Classification where new data is available (see 2.0.0.2)
For transport in accordance with 2.0.0.2, a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document,
as follows “Classified in accordance with 2.0.0.2”.
5.4.1.5.17 Additional entries in the case of the application of special provisions
Where, in accordance with a special provision in chapter 3.3, additional information is necessary, this
additional information shall be included in the dangerous goods transport document.
5.4.1.5.18 Transport of UN 1361
For transport of UN 1361, the transport document shall contain the following additional information (see
special provision 978 of chapter 3.3):
.1 Date of production …
.2 Date of packing into packagings …
.3 Temperature of the material on the day of packing into the packagings … °C”.
5.4.1.5.19 Actual holding time
In the case of portable tanks carrying refrigerated liquefied gases the consignor shall enter in the transport
document the date at which the actual holding time ends, in the following format:
“END OF HOLDING TIME:………….. (DD/MM/YYYY)”
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5 .4 .1 .6 Certification
5 .4 .1 .6 .1 The dangerous goods transport document shall include a certification or declaration that the consignment
is acceptable for transport and that the goods are properly packaged, marked and labelled, and in proper
condition for transport in accordance with the applicable regulations. The text for this certification is:
“I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described above/below*
by the proper shipping name, and are classified, packaged, marked and labelled/placarded, and are in all
respects in proper condition for transport according to applicable international and national government
regulations.”
The certification shall be signed and dated by the consignor. Facsimile signatures are acceptable where
applicable laws and regulations recognize the legal validity of facsimile signatures.
5.4.1.6.2 If the dangerous goods documentation is presented to the carrier by means of EDP or EDI transmission
techniques, the signature(s) may be electronic signature(s) or may be replaced by the name(s) (in capitals) of
the person authorized to sign.
5.4.1.6.3 When the dangerous goods transport information is given to a carrier by EDP or EDI techniques and
subsequently the dangerous goods are transferred to a carrier that requires a paper dangerous goods transport
document, the carrier shall ensure that the paper document indicates “Original received electronically” and
the name of the signatory shall be shown in capital letters.
5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate
5.4.2.1 When dangerous goods are packed or loaded into any container† or vehicle, those responsible for packing
the container or vehicle shall provide a “container/vehicle packing certificate” specifying the container/
vehicle identification number(s) and certifying that the operation has been carried out in accordance with the
following conditions:
.1 The container/vehicle was clean, dry and apparently fit to receive the goods;
.2 Packages which need to be segregated in accordance with applicable segregation requirements have
not been packed together onto or in the container/vehicle (unless approved by the competent authority
concerned in accordance with 7.3.4.1);
.3 All packages have been externally inspected for damage, and only sound packages have been loaded;
.4 Drums have been stowed in an upright position, unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority,
and all goods have been properly loaded and, where necessary, adequately braced with securing
material to suit the mode(s)‡ of transport for the intended journey;
.5 Goods loaded in bulk have been evenly distributed within the container/vehicle;
.6 For consignments including goods of class 1 other than division 1.4, the container/vehicle is structurally
serviceable in accordance with 7.1.2;
.7 The container/vehicle and packages are properly marked, labelled and placarded, as appropriate;
.8 When substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation are used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such
as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951)), the
container/vehicle is externally marked in accordance with 5.5.3.6; and
.9 A dangerous goods transport document, as indicated in 5.4.1, has been received for each dangerous
goods consignment loaded in the container/vehicle.
Note: The container/vehicle packing certificate is not required for portable tanks.
5.4.2.2 The information required in the dangerous goods transport document and the container/vehicle packing
certificate may be incorporated into a single document; if not, these documents shall be attached. If the
information is incorporated into a single document, the document shall include a signed declaration such as
“It is declared that the packing of the goods into the container/vehicle has been carried out in accordance
with the applicable provisions”. This declaration shall be dated and the person signing this declaration shall
be identified on the document. Facsimile signatures are acceptable where applicable laws and regulations
recognize the legal validity of facsimile signatures.
5.4.2.3 If the container/vehicle packing certificate is presented to the carrier by means of EDP or EDI transmission
techniques, the signature(s) may be electronic signature(s) or may be replaced by the name(s) (in capitals) of
the person authorized to sign.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.4.2.4 When the container/vehicle packing certificate is given to a carrier by EDP or EDI techniques and subsequently
the dangerous goods are transferred to a carrier that requires a paper container/vehicle packing certificate,
the carrier shall ensure that the paper document indicates “Original received electronically” and the name of
the signatory shall be shown in capital letters.
5.4.3 Documentation required aboard the ship
5.4.3.1 Each ship carrying dangerous goods and marine pollutants shall have a special list, manifest* or stowage
plan setting out, in accordance with regulation VII/4.2 of SOLAS, as amended, and with regulation 5.2 of
Annex III of MARPOL, the dangerous goods (except dangerous goods in excepted packages of class 7) and
marine pollutants and the location thereof. This special list or manifest shall be based on the documentation
and certification required in this Code. It shall contain in addition to the information in 5.4.1.4, 5.4.1.5 and, for
UN 3359, in 5.5.2.4.1.1, the stowage location and the total quantity of dangerous goods and marine pollutants.
A detailed stowage plan, which identifies by primary hazard class(es) and subsidiary hazard(s) and sets
out the location of all dangerous goods and marine pollutants, may be used in place of such special list or
manifest.
5.4.3.2 Each ship carrying excepted packages of class 7 shall have a special list, manifest or stowage plan setting
out these excepted packages and the location thereof. This special list or manifest shall be based upon the
documents listed in 5.1.5.4.2.1.
5.4.3.3 A copy of the documents according to 5.4.3.1 and, if applicable, 5.4.3.2 shall be made available before
departure to the person or organization designated by the port State authority.
5.4.3.4 Emergency response information
5.4.3.4.1 For consignments of dangerous goods, appropriate information shall be immediately available at all
times for use in emergency response to accidents and incidents involving dangerous goods in transport.
The information shall be available away from packages containing the dangerous goods and immediately
accessible in the event of an incident. Methods of compliance include:
.1 appropriate entries in the special list, manifest or dangerous goods transport document; or
.2 provision of a separate document such as a safety data sheet; or
.3 provision of separate documentation, such as the Revised Emergency Response Procedures for Ships
Carrying Dangerous Goods (EmS Guide) for use in conjunction with the transport document and the
Medical First Aid Guide for Use in Accidents Involving Dangerous Goods (MFAG).
5.4.4 Other required information and documentation
5.4.4.1 In certain circumstances, special certificates or other documents are required such as:
.1 a weathering certificate; as required in the individual entries of the Dangerous Goods List;
.2 a certificate exempting a substance, material or article from the provisions of the IMDG Code;
.3 for new self-reactive substances and organic peroxides or new formulation of currently assigned
self-reactive substances and organic peroxides, a statement by the competent authority of the country
of origin of the approved classification and conditions of transport.
5.4.4.2 A certificate exempting a substance, material or article from the provisions of the IMDG Code and referred to
in a special provision assigned to an individual entry in the Dangerous Goods List shall be submitted together
with the cargo information required by SOLAS regulation VI/2.
5.4.5 Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form
5.4.5.1 This form meets the requirements of SOLAS, chapter VII, regulation 4, MARPOL, Annex III, regulation 5
and the provisions of this chapter. The information required by the provisions of this chapter is mandatory;
however, the layout of this form is not mandatory.
This form may be used as a combined dangerous goods transport document and container/vehicle packing
certificate for multimodal carriage of dangerous goods.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM
1 Shipper/Consignor/Sender 2 Transport document number
3 Page 1 of pages 4 Shipper’s reference
5 Freight forwarder’s reference
6 Consignee 7 Carrier (to be completed by the carrier)
SHIPPER’S DECLARATION
I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately
described below by the proper shipping name, and are classified, packaged,
marked and labelled/placarded and are in all respects in proper condition for
transport according to the applicable international and national governmental
regulations.
8 This shipment is within the limitations prescribed for: 9 Additional handling information
(Delete non-applicable)
PASSENGER AND CARGO CARGO AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT ONLY
10 Vessel/flight No. and date 11 Port/place of loading
12 Port/place of discharge 13 Destination
14 Shipping marks Number and kind of packages; description of goods* Gross mass (kg) Net mass (kg) Cube (m3)
15 Container identification No./ 16 Seal number(s) 17 Container/vehicle size 18 Tare mass 19 Total gross mass
vehicle registration No. and type (kg) (including tare) (kg)
CONTAINER/VEHICLE PACKING CERTIFICATE 21 RECEIVING ORGANISATION RECEIPT
I hereby declare that the goods described above have been packed/ Received the above number of packages/containers/trailers in apparent good
loaded into the container/vehicle identified above in accordance with order and condition, unless stated hereon:
the applicable provisions.† RECEIVING ORGANISATION REMARKS:
MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED FOR ALL CONTAINER/
VEHICLE LOADS BY PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR PACKING/
LOADING
20 Name of company Haulier’s name 22 Name of company (OF SHIPPER
PREPARING THIS NOTE)
Vehicle registration No.
Name/status of declarant Name/status of declarant
Signature and date
Place and date Place and date
Signature of declarant DRIVER’S SIGNATURE Signature of declarant
*
DANGEROUS GOODS:
You must specify: UN No., proper shipping name, hazard class, packing group (where assigned), marine pollutant and observe the mandatory
requirements under applicable national and international governmental regulations. For the purposes of the IMDG Code, see 5.4.1.4.
†
For the purposes of the IMDG Code, see 5.4.2.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Documentary Aspects of the International Transport of Dangerous Goods
Container/Vehicle Packing Certificate
The signature given overleaf in box 20 must be When materials are transported in bulk p
ackagings,
that of the person controlling the container/vehicle the cargo has been evenly distributed in the
operation. container/vehicle.
It is certified that: The packages and the container/vehicle have been
properly marked, labelled and placarded. Any
The container/vehicle was clean, dry and apparently irrelevant mark, labels and placards have been
fit to receive the goods. removed.
If the consignments include goods of class 1, other When substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation
than division 1.4, the container/vehicle is structurally are used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such
serviceable. as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid
(UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951)),
the container/vehicle is externally marked in
No incompatible goods have been packed into the
accordance with 5.5.3.6.
container/vehicle unless specially authorized by the
competent authority. When this Dangerous Goods Form is used as
a container/vehicle packing certificate only, not
All packages have been externally inspected for a combined document, a dangerous goods
damage and only sound packages packed. Declaration signed by the shipper or supplier must
have been issued/received to cover each dangerous
Drums have been stowed in an upright position goods consignment packed in the container/vehicle.
unless otherwise authorized by the competent
authority. Note: The container/vehicle packing certificate is
not required for tanks.
All packages have been properly packed and
secured in the container/vehicle.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM
Continuation sheet
1 Shipper/Consignor/Sender 2 Transport document number
3 Page of pages 4 Shipper’s reference
5 Freight forwarder’s reference
14 Shipping marks Number and kind of packages; description of goods* Gross mass (kg) Net mass (kg) Cube (m3)
*
DANGEROUS GOODS:
You must specify: UN No., proper shipping name, hazard class, packing group (where assigned), marine pollutant and observe the mandatory
requirements under applicable national and international governmental regulations. For the purposes of the IMDG Code, see 5.4.1.4.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.4.6 Retention of dangerous goods transport information
5.4.6.1 The consignor and the carrier shall retain a copy of the dangerous goods transport document and additional
information and documentation as specified in this Code, for a minimum period of three months.
5.4.6.2 When the documents are kept electronically or in a computer system, the consignor and the carrier shall be
able to reproduce them in a printed form.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 5.5
Special provisions
5.5.1 [Reserved]
5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359)*
5.5.2.1 General
5.5.2.1.1 Fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) containing no other dangerous goods are not subject to any
provisions of this Code other than those of this section.
5.5.2.1.2 When the fumigated cargo transport unit is loaded with dangerous goods in addition to the fumigant, any
provision of this Code relevant to these goods (including placarding, marking and documentation) applies in
addition to the provisions of this section.
5.5.2.1.3 Only cargo transport units that can be closed in such a way that the escape of gas is reduced to a minimum
shall be used for the transport of cargo under fumigation.
5.5.2.1.4 The provisions of 3.2 and 5.4.3 apply to all fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359).
5.5.2.2 Training
Persons engaged in the handling of fumigated cargo transport units shall be trained commensurate with their
responsibilities.
5.5.2.3 Marking and placarding
5.5.2.3.1 A fumigated cargo transport unit shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in 5.5.2.3.2, affixed at
each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the cargo transport
unit. This mark shall remain on the cargo transport unit until the following provisions are met:
.1 the fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of fumigant
gas; and
.2 the fumigated goods or materials have been unloaded.
5.5.2.3.2 The fumigation warning mark shall be as shown in the figure below.
DANGER
Minimum dimension 300 mm
THIS UNIT IS UNDER FUMIGATION
WITH ( fumigant name* ) APPLIED ON
( date* )
( time* )
VENTILATED ON ( date* )
DO NOT ENTER
*
Insert details as appropriate.
Minimum dimension 400 mm
Fumigation warning mark
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
The mark shall be a rectangle. The minimum dimensions shall be 400 mm wide × 300 mm high and the
minimum width of the outer line shall be 2 mm. The mark shall be in black print on a white background with
lettering not less than 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate
proportion to those shown.
The method of marking shall be such that this information will still be identifiable on cargo transport units
surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea. In considering suitable marking methods, account shall
be taken of the ease with which the surface of the cargo transport unit can be marked.
Note: The fumigation warning mark in 5.5.2.3.2 of the IMDG Code Amendment 41-22 may continue to be
applied until 31 December 2026.
5.5.2.3.3 If the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated either by opening the doors of the unit or
by mechanical ventilation after fumigation, the date of ventilation shall be marked on the fumigation warning
mark.
5.5.2.3.4 When the fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated and unloaded, the fumigation warning mark
shall be removed.
5.5.2.3.5 Class 9 placards (Model No. 9, see 5.2.2.2.2) shall not be affixed to a fumigated cargo transport unit except
as required for other class 9 substances or articles packed therein.
5.5.2.4 Documentation
5.5.2.4.1 Documents associated with the transport of cargo transport units that have been fumigated and have not
been completely ventilated before transport shall include the following information:
.1 UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit, 9, or UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit, class 9;
.2 The date and time of fumigation; and
.3 The type and amount of the fumigant used.
5.5.2.4.2 The transport document may be in any form, provided it contains the information required in 5.5.2.4.1. This
information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.
5.5.2.4.3 Instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant including fumigation devices (if used) shall be provided.
5.5.2.4.4 A document is not required when the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated and the
date of ventilation has been marked on the warning mark (see 5.5.2.3.3 and 5.5.2.3.4).
5.5.2.5 Additional provisions
5.5.2.5.1 Fumigants shall not be applied to the contents of a cargo transport unit once it has been loaded aboard the
ship.
5.5.2.5.2 Cargo transport units shall be fumigated in accordance with the requirements determined by the competent
authority, to ensure a sufficient period has elapsed to attain a reasonable uniform gas concentration
throughout the cargo in it. Twenty-four hours is normally sufficient for this purpose.
5.5.2.5.3 The master shall be informed prior to the loading of a fumigated cargo transport unit.
5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to packages and cargo transport units
containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for
cooling or conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen,
refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen)
Note 1: See also 1.1.1.7.
Note 2: In the context of this section the term “conditioning” may be used in a broader scope and includes
protection.
5.5.3.1 Scope
5.5.3.1.1 This section is not applicable to substances which may be used for cooling or conditioning purposes when
transported as a consignment of dangerous goods. When they are transported as a consignment, these
substances shall be transported under the relevant entry of the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 in
accordance with the associated conditions of transport.
5.5.3.1.2 This section is not applicable to gases in cooling cycles.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5 .5 .3 .1 .3 Dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning portable tanks or MEGCs during transport are not subject
to this section.
5.5.3.1.4 Cargo transport units containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes include cargo
transport units containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes inside packages as well as
cargo transport units with unpackaged substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes.
5.5.3.2 General
5.5.3.2.1 Cargo transport units containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes (other than fumigation)
during transport are not subject to any provisions of this Code other than those of this section.
5.5.3.2.2 When dangerous goods are loaded in cargo transport units containing substances used for cooling or
conditioning purposes, any provisions of this Code relevant to these dangerous goods apply in addition to
the provisions of this section. For dangerous goods for which temperature control is required see also 7.3.7.
5.5.3.2.3 [Reserved]
5.5.3.2.4 Persons engaged in the handling or transport of cargo transport units containing substances used for cooling
or conditioning purposes shall be trained commensurate with their responsibilities.
5.5.3.3 Packages containing a coolant or conditioner
5.5.3.3.1 Packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to packing instructions P203, P620,
P650 or P800 of 4.1.4.1 shall meet the appropriate requirements of that packing instruction.
5.5.3.3.2 For packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to other packing instructions, the
packages shall be capable of withstanding very low temperatures and shall not be affected or significantly
weakened by the coolant or conditioner. Packages shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of
gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packaging. The dangerous goods shall be packed
in such a way to prevent movement after the dissipation of any coolant or conditioner.
5.5.3.3.3 Packages containing a coolant or conditioner shall be transported in well-ventilated cargo transport units.
5.5.3.4 Marking of packages containing a coolant or conditioner
5.5.3.4.1 Packages containing dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning shall be marked with the proper
shipping name of these dangerous goods followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” as
appropriate.
5.5.3.4.2 The marks shall be durable, legible and placed in such a location and of such a size relative to the package
as to be readily visible.
5.5.3.5 Cargo transport units containing unpackaged dry ice
5.5.3.5.1 If dry ice in unpackaged form is used, it shall not come into direct contact with the metal structure of a cargo
transport unit to avoid embrittlement of the metal. Measures shall be taken to provide adequate insulation
between the dry ice and the cargo transport unit by providing a minimum of 30 mm separation (e.g. by using
suitable low heat conducting materials such as timber planks, pallets, etc.).
5.5.3.5.2 Where dry ice is placed around packages, measures shall be taken to ensure that packages remain in the
original position during transport after the dry ice has dissipated.
5.5.3.6 Marking of cargo transport units
5.5.3.6.1 Cargo transport units containing dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning purposes shall be marked
with a warning mark, as specified in 5.5.3.6.2 affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily
seen by persons opening or entering the cargo transport unit. This mark shall remain on the cargo transport
unit until the following provisions are met:
.1 the cargo transport unit has been ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of coolant or conditioner;
and
.2 the cooled or conditioned goods have been unloaded.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.5.3.6.2 The warning mark shall be as shown in the figure below.
WARNING
Minimum dimension 250 mm
*
Minimum dimension 150 mm
Asphyxiation warning mark for cargo transport units
* Insert proper shipping name or the name of the asphyxiant gas used as the coolant/conditioner. The
lettering shall be in capitals, all be on one line and shall be at least 25 mm high. If the length of the proper
shipping name is too long to fit in the space provided, the lettering may be reduced to the maximum size
possible to fit. For example: CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID. Additional information such as “AS COOLANT” or
“AS CONDITIONER” may be added.
The mark shall be a rectangle. The minimum dimensions shall be 150 mm wide × 250 mm high. The word
“WARNING” shall be in red or white and be at least 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all
features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
The method of marking shall be such that this information will still be identifiable on cargo transport units
surviving at least three months’ immersion in the sea. In considering suitable marking methods, account shall
be taken of the ease with which the surface of the cargo transport unit can be marked.
5.5.3.7 Documentation
5.5.3.7.1 Documents associated with the transport of cargo transport units containing or having contained substances
used for cooling or conditioning purposes and have not been completely ventilated before transport shall
include the following information:
.1 the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”; and
.2 the proper shipping name followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER”, as appropriate.
For example: UN 1845, CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID, AS COOLANT.
5.5.3.7.2 The transport document may be in any form, provided it contains the information required in 5.5.3.7.1. This
information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
5.5.4 Devices containing dangerous goods, which are in use or intended
for use during transport
5.5.4.1 Devices in use or intended for use during transport containing dangerous goods, such as data loggers,
sensors and cargo tracking devices, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks, bulk containers, freight
containers or other types of cargo transport units, are not subject to the provisions of this Code other than
the requirements set out in 5.5.4.1.1 to 5.5.4.5, as follows:
.1 the device shall be in use or intended for use during transport;
.2 the contained dangerous goods (e.g. lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridges) shall meet the applicable
construction and test requirements specified in this Code; and
.3 the device shall be capable of withstanding the shocks and loadings normally encountered during
transport and shall be safe for use in the dangerous environments to which it may be exposed.
5.5.4.2 When such device containing dangerous goods is transported as a consignment, the relevant entry of the
Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2 shall be used and all applicable provisions of this Code shall apply.
5.5.4.3 Data loggers, sensors and cargo tracking devices, attached to packages and overpacks in a closed cargo
transport unit are subject to 7.3.5 when dangerous goods are transported in that cargo transport unit.
5.5.4.4 Data loggers, sensors and cargo tracking devices, attached directly to the interior or exterior of cargo
transport units shall comply with the following criteria, as found in IEC 60079-0:2017 and IEC 60529:2013:
.1 Temperature class T4: the device maximum surface temperature attained in service under the most
adverse conditions is ≤ 135°C;
.2 Equipment group IIB: the device is intended for use in places with an explosive gas atmosphere other
than mines susceptible to firedamp and in explosive gas atmospheres other than those containing
hydrogen; and
.3 Degree of protection IP65: the device enclosure protects internal equipment against ingress of dust and
protects against harmful effects due to water jets against the enclosure from any direction.
Note: For devices in a reefer controller box, the requirement in 5.5.4.4.3 is complied with when the casing of
the controller box conforms to 5.5.4.4.3.
5.5.4.5 Devices subject to 5.5.4.4 shall comply with the requirements from 1 January 2028, with the exception for
fixed devices on or in reefer containers, which shall comply with these requirements as soon as possible, but
not later than 1 January 2032.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
PART 6
CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF PACKAGINGS,
INTERMEDIATE BULK CONTAINERS (IBCs),
LARGE PACKAGINGS, PORTABLE TANKS,
MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs)
AND ROAD TANK VEHICLES
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.1
Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings
6.1.1 Applicability and general provisions
6.1.1.1 Applicability
The provisions in this chapter do not apply to:
.1 pressure receptacles;
.2 packages containing radioactive material, which shall comply with the Regulations of the International
Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), except that:
(i) radioactive material possessing other dangerous properties (subsidiary hazards) shall also comply
with special provision 172 in chapter 3.3; and
(ii) low specific activity (LSA) material and surface contaminated objects (SCO) may be carried in
certain packagings defined in this Code provided that the supplementary provisions set out in the
IAEA Regulations are also met;
.3 packages whose net mass exceeds 400 kg;
.4 packagings for liquids, other than combination packagings, with capacity exceeding 450 L; and
.5 packagings for class 6.2 infectious substances of Category A except for UN 3549.
6.1.1.2 General provisions
6.1.1.2.1 The provisions for packagings in 6.1.4 are based on packagings currently used. In order to take into account
progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having specifications
different from those in 6.1.4, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority
and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.1.1.2 and 6.1.5. Methods of testing other than
those described in this chapter are acceptable, provided that they are equivalent.
6.1.1.2.2 Every packaging intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test. This
test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.1.1.3 which shows the capability of meeting
the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.4:
.1 before it is first used for transport;
.2 after remanufacturing or reconditioning, before it is re-used for transport.
For this test, packagings need not have their own closures fitted.
The inner receptacle of a composite packaging may be tested without the outer packaging provided the test
results are not affected. This test is not necessary for an inner packaging of a combination packaging.
6.1.1.2.3 Receptacles, parts of receptacles and closures (stoppers) made of plastics which may be directly in contact
with a dangerous substance shall be resistant to it and shall not incorporate materials which may react
dangerously or form hazardous compounds or lead to softening, weakening or failure of the receptacle or
closure.
6.1.1.2.4 Plastics packagings shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance
contained or by ultraviolet radiation. Any permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger
under normal conditions of transport.
6.1.1.3 Packagings shall be manufactured, reconditioned and tested under a quality-assurance programme which
satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the provisions of this chapter.
Note: ISO 16106:2020, Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate
bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001, provides acceptable
guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.1.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to
be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any
other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the
applicable performance tests of this chapter.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings
6.1.2.1 The code consists of:
.1 an Arabic numeral indicating the kind of packaging, such as drum, jerrican, etc., followed by
.2 one or more capital letters in Latin characters indicating the nature of the material, such as steel, wood,
etc., followed where necessary by
.3 an Arabic numeral indicating the category of packaging within the type to which the packaging belongs.
6.1.2.2 In the case of composite packagings, two capital letters in Latin characters shall be used in sequence in the
second position of the code. The first indicates the material of the inner receptacle and the second that of the
outer packaging.
6.1.2.3 In the case of combination packagings, only the code number for the outer packaging shall be used.
6.1.2.4 The letters ‘T’, ‘V’ or ‘W’ may follow the packaging code. The letter ‘T’ signifies a salvage packaging conforming
to the provisions of 6.1.5.1.11. The letter ‘V’ signifies a special packaging conforming to the provisions of
6.1.5.1.7. The letter ‘W’ signifies that the packaging, although of the same type as that indicated by the code,
is manufactured to a specification different to that in 6.1.4 but is considered equivalent under the provisions
of 6.1.1.2.
6.1.2.5 The following numerals shall be used for the kinds of packaging:
1 Drum
2 [Reserved]
3 Jerrican
4 Box
5 Bag
6 Composite packaging
6.1.2.6 The following capital letters shall be used for the types of material:
A Steel (all types and surface treatments)
B Aluminium
C Natural wood
D Plywood
F Reconstituted wood
G Fibreboard
H Plastics material
L Textile
M Paper, multiwall
N Metal (other than steel or aluminium)
P Glass, porcelain or stoneware
Note: “Plastics material” is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber.
6.1.2.7 The following table indicates the codes to be used for designating types of packagings depending on the kind
of packagings, the material used for their construction and their category; it also refers to the paragraphs to
be consulted for the appropriate provisions:
Kind Material Category Code Paragraph
1 Drums A Steel non-removable head 1A1 6.1.4.1
removable head 1A2
B Aluminium non-removable head 1B1 6.1.4.2
removable head 1B2
D Plywood – 1D 6.1.4.5
G Fibre – 1G 6.1.4.7
H Plastics non-removable head 1H1 6.1.4.8
removable head 1H2
N Metal, other than steel non-removable head 1N1 6.1.4.3
or aluminium
removable head 1N2
2 [Reserved]
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Kind Material Category Code Paragraph
3 Jerricans A Steel non-removable head 3A1 6.1.4.4
removable head 3A2
B Aluminium non-removable head 3B1 6.1.4.4
removable head 3B2
H Plastics non-removable head 3H1 6.1.4.8
removable head 3H2
4 Boxes A Steel – 4A 6.1.4.14
B Aluminium – 4B 6.1.4.14
C Natural wood ordinary 4C1 6.1.4.9
with sift-proof walls 4C2
D Plywood – 4D 6.1.4.10
F Reconstituted wood – 4F 6.1.4.11
G Fibreboard – 4G 6.1.4.12
H Plastics expanded 4H1 6.1.4.13
solid 4H2
N Metal, other than steel – 4N 6.1.4.14
or aluminium
5 Bags H Woven plastics without inner lining or coating 5H1 6.1.4.16
sift-proof 5H2
water-resistant 5H3
H Plastics film – 5H4 6.1.4.17
L Textile without inner lining or coating 5L1 6.1.4.15
sift-proof 5L2
water-resistant 5L3
M Paper multiwall 5M1 6.1.4.18
multiwall, water-resistant 5M2
6 Composite H Plastics receptacle in steel drum 6HA1 6.1.4.19
packagings
in steel crate or box 6HA2 6.1.4.19
in aluminium drum 6HB1 6.1.4.19
in aluminium crate or box 6HB2 6.1.4.19
in wooden box 6HC 6.1.4.19
in plywood drum 6HD1 6.1.4.19
in plywood box 6HD2 6.1.4.19
in fibre drum 6HG1 6.1.4.19
in fibreboard box 6HG2 6.1.4.19
in plastics drum 6HH1 6.1.4.19
in solid plastics box 6HH2 6.1.4.19
P Glass, porcelain or in steel drum 6PA1 6.1.4.20
stoneware receptacle
in steel crate or box 6PA2 6.1.4.20
in aluminium drum 6PB1 6.1.4.20
in aluminium crate or box 6PB2 6.1.4.20
in wooden box 6PC 6.1.4.20
in plywood drum 6PD1 6.1.4.20
in wickerwork hamper 6PD2 6.1.4.20
in fibre drum 6PG1 6.1.4.20
in fibreboard box 6PG2 6.1.4.20
in expanded plastics packaging 6PH1 6.1.4.20
in solid plastics packaging 6PH2 6.1.4.20
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.3 Marking
Note 1: The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them correspond to a successfully tested design
type and that it complies with the provisions of this chapter which are related to the manufacture, but not to
the use, of the packaging. In itself, therefore, the marks do not necessarily confirm that the packaging may be
used for any substance. The type of packaging (such as steel drum), its maximum capacity or mass, and any
special provisions are specified for each substance or article in part 3 of this Code.
Note 2: The marks are intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners, packaging
users, carriers and regulatory authorities. In relation to the use of a new packaging, the original marks are a
means for its manufacturer to identify the type and to indicate those performance test provisions that have
been met.
Note 3: The marks do not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to be taken
further into account, such as by reference to a test certificate, test reports or register of successfully tested
packagings. For example, a packaging having an X or Y mark may be used for substances to which a packing
group having a lesser degree of danger has been assigned, with the relevant maximum permissible value
of the relative density determined by taking into account the factor 1.5 or 2.25 indicated in the packaging
test provisions in 6.1.5 as appropriate, i.e. packing group I packaging tested for products of relative density
1.2 could be used as a packing group II packaging for products of relative density 1.8 or packing group III
packaging of relative density 2.7, provided, of course, that all the performance criteria can still be met with the
product having the higher relative density.
6.1.3.1 Each packaging intended for use according to this Code shall bear marks on a non-removable component
which are durable, legible and placed in such a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to
be readily visible. For packages with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the marks or a duplicate thereof shall
appear on the top or on a side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high,
except for packagings of 30 L capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6
mm in height and except for packagings of 5 L capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall
be of an appropriate size.
Note: The provisions of 6.1.3.1 of the IMDG Code Amendment 41-22 may continue to be applied until 31
December 2026. Packagings manufactured before 1 January 2027 according to the provisions applicable at
the date of manufacture may continue to be used.
The marks shall show:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol:
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk
container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5,
6.6, 6.7 or 6.9. For embossed metal packagings the capital letters “UN” may be applied as the symbol.
(b) The code designating the type of packaging according to 6.1.2.
(c) A code in two parts:
(i) a letter designating the packing group or groups for which the design type has been successfully
tested:
“X” for packing groups I, II and III
“Y” for packing groups II and III
“Z” for packing group III only;
(ii) the relative density, rounded off to the first decimal, for which the design type has been tested for
packagings, without inner packagings, intended to contain liquids; this may be omitted when the
relative density does not exceed 1.2. For packagings intended to contain solids or inner packagings,
the maximum gross mass in kilograms.
(d) Either a letter “S”, denoting that the packaging is intended for the transport of solids or inner packagings,
or, for packagings (other than combination packagings) intended to contain liquids, the hydraulic test
pressure which the packaging was shown to withstand in kilopascals, rounded down to the nearest
10 kPa.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(e) The last two digits of the year during which the packaging was manufactured. Packagings of types 1H
and 3H shall also be appropriately marked with the month of manufacture; this may be marked on the
packaging in a different place from the remainder of the marks. An appropriate method is:
*
* The last two digits of the year of manufacture may be displayed at that place. In such a case and when
the clock is placed adjacent to the UN design type mark, the indication of the year in the mark may be
waived. However, when the clock is not placed adjacent to the UN design type mark, the two digits of the
year in the mark and in the clock shall be identical.
Note: Other methods that provide the minimum required information in a durable, visible and legible form are
also acceptable.
(f) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in
international road traffic.*
(g) The name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent
authority.
6.1.3.2 In addition to the durable marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1, every new metal drum of a capacity greater than 100 L
shall bear the marks described in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) on the bottom, with an indication of the nominal thickness of
at least the metal used in the body (in millimetres, to 0.1 mm), in permanent form (such as embossed). When
the nominal thickness of either head of a metal drum is thinner than that of the body, the nominal thickness of
the top head, body and bottom head shall be marked on the bottom in permanent form (such as embossed),
for example ‘1.0 – 1.2 – 1.0’ or ‘0.9 – 1.0 – 1.0’. Nominal thicknesses of metal shall be determined according to
the appropriate ISO standard, e.g. ISO 3574:1999 for steel. The marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) shall not
be applied in a permanent form (such as embossed) except as provided in 6.1.3.5.
6.1.3.3 Every packaging other than those referred to in 6.1.3.2 liable to undergo a reconditioning process shall bear
the marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form. Marks are permanent if they are able to withstand
the reconditioning process (e.g. embossed). For packagings other than metal drums of a capacity greater
than 100 L, these permanent marks may replace the corresponding durable markings prescribed in 6.1.3.1.
6.1.3.4 For remanufactured metal drums, if there is no change to the packaging type and no replacement or removal
of integral structural components, the required marks need not be permanent (such as embossed). Every
other remanufactured metal drum shall bear the marks in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form (such as
embossed) on the top head or side.
6.1.3.5 Metal drums made from materials (such as stainless steel) designed to be re-used repeatedly may bear the
marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) in a permanent (such as embossed) form.
6.1.3.6 Packagings manufactured with recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1 shall be marked “REC”. This
mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1.
6.1.3.7 Marks shall be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs in 6.1.3.1; each mark required in these
subparagraphs and when appropriate subparagraphs (h) to (j) of 6.1.3.8 shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a
slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For examples, see 6.1.3.10. Any additional marks authorized by
a competent authority shall still enable the other marks required in 6.1.3.1 to be correctly identified.
6.1.3.8 After reconditioning a packaging, the reconditioner shall apply to it, in sequence, durable marks showing:
(h) the State in which the reconditioning was carried out, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic;
(i) the name of the reconditioner or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent
authority;
(j) the year of reconditioning; the letter “R”; and, for every packaging successfully passing the leakproofness
test in 6.1.1.2.2, the additional letter “L”.
6.1.3.9 When, after reconditioning, the marks required by 6.1.3.1 (a) to (d) no longer appear on the top head or the side
of a metal drum, the reconditioner shall apply them in a durable form followed by those required by 6.1.3.8
(h), (i) and (j). These marks shall not identify a greater performance capability than that for which the original
design type has been tested and marked.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.3.10 Examples for marking for NEW packagings
4G/Y145/S/02 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a new fibreboard box
NL/VL823 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
1A1/Y1.4/150/98 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a new steel drum to contain
liquids
NL/VL824 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
1A2/Y150/S/01 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a new steel drum to contain
solids or inner packagings
NL/VL825 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
4HW/Y136/S/98 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a new plastics box of a
specification equivalent to that
NL/VL826 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) indicated by the packaging code
1A2/Y/100/01 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) For a remanufactured steel drum
to contain liquids of relative density
USA/MM5 as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) not exceeding 1.2
Note: For liquids, the marking of
relative density not exceeding 1.2 is
optional; see 6.1.3.1 (c)(ii)
6.1.3.11 Examples for marking for RECONDITIONED packagings
1A1/Y1.4/150/97 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
NL/RB/01 RL as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j)
1A2/Y150/S/99 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
USA/RB/00 R as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j)
6.1.3.12 Examples for marking for SALVAGE packagings
1A2T/Y300/S/01 as in 6.1.3.1 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
USA/abc as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
Note: The marking, for which examples are given in 6.1.3.10, 6.1.3.11 and 6.1.3.12, may be applied in a single
line or in multiple lines provided the correct sequence is respected.
6.1.3.13 Where a packaging conforms to one or more than one tested packaging design type, including one or more
than one tested IBC or large packaging design type, the packaging may bear more than one mark to indicate
the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark appears on a
packaging, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its entirety.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.4 Provisions for packagings
6.1.4.0 General provisions
Any permeation of the substance contained in the packaging shall not constitute a danger under normal
conditions of transport.
6.1.4.1 Steel drums
1A1 non-removable head
1A2 removable head
6.1.4.1.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet of suitable type and adequate thickness in relation to the
capacity of the drum and the intended use.
Note: For carbon steel drums, “suitable” steels are identified in ISO 3573:1999, Hot rolled carbon steel sheet
of commercial and drawing qualities, and ISO 3574:1999, Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet of commercial
and drawing qualities.
For carbon steel drums below 100 L, “suitable” steels in addition to the above standards are also identified
in ISO 11949:1995, Cold-reduced electrolytic tinplate, ISO 11950:1995, Cold-reduced electrolytic chromium/
chromium oxide-coated steel, and ISO 11951:1995, Cold-reduced blackplate in coil form for the production
of tinplate or electrolytic chromium/chromium oxide-coated steel.
6.1.4.1.2 Body seams of drums intended to contain more than 40 L of liquid shall be welded. Body seams of drums
intended to contain solids or 40 L or less of liquids shall be mechanically seamed or welded.
6.1.4.1.3 Chimes shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Separate reinforcing rings may be applied.
6.1.4.1.4 Drums may have rolling hoops, either expanded or separate. If there are separate rolling hoops, they shall be
fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded.
6.1.4.1.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of drums with a non-removable head (1A1)
shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable-head
type (1A2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that they
will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges may be mechanically
seamed or welded in place. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure
is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.1.6 Closure devices for removable-head drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and
drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be
used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.1.7 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents
to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or
treatments shall retain their properties under normal conditions of transport.
6.1.4.1.8 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L.
6.1.4.1.9 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.2 Aluminium drums
1B1 non-removable head
1B2 removable head
6.1.4.2.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of aluminium at least 99% pure or of an aluminium-based alloy. Material
shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and the intended
use.
6.1.4.2.2 All seams shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing
rings.
6.1.4.2.3 Drums may have rolling hoops, either expanded or separate. If there are separate rolling hoops, they shall be
fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded.
6.1.4.2.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of drums with a non-removable head (1B1)
shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable-head
type (1B2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that
they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges shall be welded
in place so that the weld provides a leakproof seam. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with
closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.4.2.5 Closure devices for removable-head drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and
drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be
used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.2.6 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents
to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or
treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of transport.
6.1.4.2.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L.
6.1.4.2.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.3 Drums of metal other than aluminium or steel
1N1 non-removable head
1N2 removable head
6.1.4.3.1 The body and heads shall be constructed of metal or metal alloy other than steel or aluminium. Material shall
be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use.
6.1.4.3.2 Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings. All seams, if any, shall
be joined (welded, soldered, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the used metal or metal
alloy.
6.1.4.3.3 Drums may have rolling hoops, either expanded or separate. If there are separate rolling hoops, they shall be
fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be spot-welded.
6.1.4.3.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable-head (1N1) drums shall
not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable-head type
(1N2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and applied that they will
remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges shall be joined in place
(welded, soldered, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the used metal or metal alloy so
that the seam join is leakproof. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the
closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.3.5 Closure devices for removable-head drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and
drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be
used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.3.6 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents
to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or
treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of transport.
6.1.4.3.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L.
6.1.4.3.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.4 Steel or aluminium jerricans
3A1 steel, non-removable head
3A2 steel, removable head
3B1 aluminium, non-removable head
3B2 aluminium, removable head
6.1.4.4.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet, of aluminium at least 99% pure or of an aluminium-based
alloy. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the jerrican
and to its intended use.
6.1.4.4.2 Chimes of steel jerricans shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Body seams of steel jerricans intended
to contain more than 40 L of liquid shall be welded. Body seams of steel jerricans intended to contain 40 L
or less shall be mechanically seamed or welded. For aluminium jerricans, all seams shall be welded. Chime
seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of a separate reinforcing ring.
6.1.4.4.3 Openings in jerricans (3A1 and 3B1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Jerricans with larger openings are
considered to be of the removable-head type (3A2 and 3B2). Closures shall be so designed that they will
remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall
be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.4.4 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the contents
to be transported, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings or
treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of transport.
6.1.4.4.5 Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 L.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.4.4.6 Maximum net mass: 120 kg.
6.1.4.5 Plywood drums
1D
6.1.4.5.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from any defect likely to lessen the
effectiveness of the drum for the purpose intended. If a material other than plywood is used for the manufacture
of the heads, it shall be of a quality equivalent to the plywood.
6.1.4.5.2 At least two-ply plywood shall be used for the body and at least three-ply plywood for the heads; the plies
shall be firmly glued together by a water-resistant adhesive with their grain crosswise.
6.1.4.5.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum
and its intended use.
6.1.4.5.4 In order to prevent sifting of the contents, lids shall be lined with kraft paper or some other equivalent material,
which shall be securely fastened to the lid and extend to the outside along its full circumference.
6.1.4.5.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 250 L.
6.1.4.5.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.6 [Reserved]
6.1.4.7 Fibre drums
1G
6.1.4.7.1 The body of the drum shall consist of multiple plies of heavy paper or fibreboard (without corrugations) firmly
glued or laminated together and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper,
metal foil, plastics material, etc.
6.1.4.7.2 Heads shall be of natural wood, fibreboard, metal, plywood, plastics or other suitable material and may
include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc.
6.1.4.7.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the drum
and its intended use.
6.1.4.7.4 The assembled packaging shall be sufficiently water-resistant so as not to delaminate under normal conditions
of transport.
6.1.4.7.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L.
6.1.4.7.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.8 Plastics drums and jerricans
1H1 drums, non-removable head
1H2 drums, removable head
3H1 jerricans, non-removable head
3H2 jerricans, removable head
6.1.4.8.1 The packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to
its capacity and intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other
than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used. The packaging shall
be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or by ultraviolet
radiation.
6.1.4.8.2 If protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black
or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain
effective throughout the life of the packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors
other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon
black content does not exceed 2% by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3% by mass; the
content of inhibitors of ultraviolet radiation is not limited.
6.1.4.8.3 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultraviolet radiation may be included in the
composition of the plastics material, provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical
properties of the material of the packaging. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived.
6.1.4.8.4 The wall thickness at every point of the packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and intended use,
taking into account the stresses to which each point is liable to be exposed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.4.8.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable-head drums (1H1) and
jerricans (3H1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums and jerricans with larger openings are considered
to be of the removable-head type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for openings in the bodies or heads of drums and
jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions
of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently
leakproof.
6.1.4.8.6 Closure devices for removable-head drums and jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will
remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets shall be used with all removable
heads unless the drum or jerrican design is such that, where the removable head is properly secured, the
drum or jerrican is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.8.7 Maximum capacity of drums and jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 L
3H1, 3H2: 60 L
6.1.4.8.8 Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400 kg
3H1, 3H2: 120 kg
6.1.4.9 Boxes of natural wood
4C1 ordinary
4C2 with sift-proof walls
6.1.4.9.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen
the strength of any part of the box. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall
be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. The tops and bottoms may be made of water-
resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.
6.1.4.9.2 Fastenings shall be resistant to vibration experienced under normal conditions of transport. Nailing into the
end shall be avoided whenever practicable. Joins which are likely to be highly stressed shall be made using
clenched or annular ring nails or equivalent fastenings.
6.1.4.9.3 Box 4C2: each part shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one
piece when one of the following methods of glued assembly is used: Lindermann joint, tongue and groove
joint, ship lap or rabbet joint or butt joint, all with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint.
6.1.4.9.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.10 Plywood boxes
4D
6.1.4.10.1 Plywood used shall be at least three-ply. It shall be made from well-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn
veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the box. The
strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended
use of the box. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may
be used together with plywood in the construction of boxes. Boxes shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner
posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.
6.1.4.10.2 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.11 Reconstituted wood boxes
4F
6.1.4.11.1 The walls of boxes shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or
other suitable type. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to
the capacity of the boxes and their intended use.
6.1.4.11.2 Other parts of the boxes may be made of other suitable material.
6.1.4.11.3 Boxes shall be securely assembled by means of suitable devices.
6.1.4.11.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.12 Fibreboard boxes (including corrugated fibreboard boxes)
4G
6.1.4.12.1 Strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used,
appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface shall
be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the Cobb
method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m2 – see ISO 535:2014. It shall have proper
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly
without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued
to the facings.
6.1.4.12.2 The ends of boxes may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood or other suitable material. Reinforcements
of wooden battens or other suitable material may be used.
6.1.4.12.3 Manufacturing joins in the body of boxes shall be taped, lapped and glued or lapped and stitched with metal
staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap.
6.1.4.12.4 Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used.
6.1.4.12.5 Boxes shall be designed so as to provide a good fit to the contents.
6.1.4.12.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.13 Plastics boxes
4H1 expanded plastics boxes
4H2 solid plastics boxes
6.1.4.13.1 The box shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to its
capacity and intended use. The box shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either
by the substance contained or by ultraviolet radiation.
6.1.4.13.2 An expanded plastics box shall comprise two parts made of a moulded expanded plastics material, a bottom
section containing cavities for the inner packagings and a top section covering and interlocking with the
bottom section. The top and bottom sections shall be designed so that the inner packagings fit snugly. The
closure cap for any inner packaging shall not be in contact with the inside of the top section of this box.
6.1.4.13.3 For dispatch, an expanded plastics box shall be closed with a self-adhesive tape having sufficient tensile
strength to prevent the box from opening. The adhesive tape shall be weather-resistant and its adhesive
compatible with the expanded plastics material of the box. Other closing devices at least equally effective
may be used.
6.1.4.13.4 For solid plastics boxes, protection against ultraviolet radiation, if required, shall be provided by the addition
of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents
and remain effective throughout the life of the box. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors
other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if the carbon
black content does not exceed 2% by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3% by mass; the
content of inhibitors of ultraviolet radiation is not limited.
6.1.4.13.5 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultraviolet radiation may be included in the
composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical
properties of the material of the box. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived.
6.1.4.13.6 Solid plastics boxes shall have closure devices made of a suitable material of adequate strength and be so
designed as to prevent the box from unintentional opening.
6.1.4.13.7 Maximum net mass: 4H1: 60 kg
4H2: 400 kg
6.1.4.14 Steel, aluminium or other metal boxes
4A steel boxes
4B aluminium boxes
4N metal, other than steel or aluminium, boxes
6.1.4.14.1 The strength of the metal and the construction of the box shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box and
to its intended use.
6.1.4.14.2 Boxes shall be lined with fibreboard or felt packing pieces or shall have an inner liner or coating of suitable
material, as required. If a double-seamed metal liner is used, steps shall be taken to prevent the ingress of
substances, particularly explosives, into the recesses of the seams.
6.1.4.14.3 Closures may be of any suitable type; they shall remain secured under normal conditions of transport.
6.1.4.14.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.4.15 Textile bags
5L1 without inner lining or coating
5L2 sift-proof
5L3 water-resistant
6.1.4.15.1 The textiles used shall be of good quality. The strength of the fabric and the construction of the bag shall be
appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use.
6.1.4.15.2 Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by the use of:
.1 paper bonded to the inner surface of the bag by a water-resistant adhesive such as bitumen; or
.2 plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
.3 one or more inner liners made of paper or plastics material.
6.1.4.15.3 Bags, water-resistant, 5L3: to prevent the entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for example
by the use of:
.1 separate inner liners of water-resistant paper (such as waxed kraft paper, tarred paper or plastics-coated
kraft paper); or
.2 plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
.3 one or more inner liners made of plastics material.
6.1.4.15.4 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.16 Woven plastics bags
5H1 without inner liner or coating
5H2 sift-proof
5H3 water-resistant
6.1.4.16.1 Bags shall be made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the
material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use.
6.1.4.16.2 If the fabric is woven flat, the bags shall be made by sewing or some other method ensuring closure of the
bottom and one side. If the fabric is tubular, the bag shall be closed by sewing, weaving or some other equally
strong method of closure.
6.1.4.16.3 Bags, sift-proof, 5H2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by means of:
.1 paper or a plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
.2 one or more separate inner liners made of paper or plastics material.
6.1.4.16.4 Bags, water-resistant, 5H3: to prevent the entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for example
by means of:
.1 separate inner liners of water-resistant paper (such as waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft paper or
plastics-coated kraft paper); or
.2 plastics film bonded to the inner or outer surface of the bag; or
.3 one or more inner plastics liners.
6.1.4.16.5 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.17 Plastics film bags
5H4
6.1.4.17.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction
of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use. Joins and closures shall
withstand pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of transport.
6.1.4.17.2 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.18 Paper bags
5M1 multiwall
5M2 multiwall, water-resistant
6.1.4.18.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable kraft paper or of an equivalent paper with at least three plies, the middle
ply of which may be net-cloth with adhesive bonding to the outermost ply. The strength of the paper and
the construction of the bags shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and its intended use. Joins and
closures shall be sift-proof.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.4.18.2 Bags 5M2: to prevent the entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or more shall be made waterproof by the use
of either a water-resistant ply as one of the two outermost plies or a water-resistant barrier made of a suitable
protective material between the two outermost plies; a bag of three plies shall be made waterproof by the use
of a water-resistant ply as the outermost ply. Where there is a danger of the substance contained reacting
with moisture or where it is packed damp, a waterproof ply or barrier, such as double-tarred kraft paper,
plastics-coated kraft paper, plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag, or one or more inner plastics
liners, shall also be placed next to the substance. Joins and closures shall be waterproof.
6.1.4.18.3 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.19 Composite packagings (plastics material)
6HA1 plastics receptacle with outer steel drum
6HA2 plastics receptacle with outer steel crate or box
6HB1 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum
6HB2 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box
6HC plastics receptacle with outer wooden box
6HD1 plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum
6HD2 plastics receptacle with outer plywood box
6HG1 plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum
6HG2 plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box
6HH1 plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum
6HH2 plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box
6.1.4.19.1 Inner receptacle
.1 The provisions of 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.3 to 6.1.4.8.6 shall apply to inner plastics receptacles.
.2 The inner plastics receptacle shall fit snugly inside the outer packaging, which shall be free of any
projection that might abrade the plastics material.
.3 Maximum capacity of inner receptacle:
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1 250 L
6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2 60 L
.4 Maximum net mass:
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1 400 kg
6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2 75 kg
6.1.4.19.2 Outer packaging
.1 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1): the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.1
or 6.1.4.2, as appropriate, shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
.2 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box (6HA2 or 6HB2): the relevant provisions of
6.1.4.14 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
.3 Plastics receptacle with outer wooden box 6HC: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.9 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
.4 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum 6HD1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.5 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
.5 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood box 6HD2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.10 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
.6 Plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6HG1: the provisions of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
.7 Plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6HG2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.12 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
.8 Plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum 6HH1: the provisions of 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.2 to 6.1.4.8.6
shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
.9 Plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box (including corrugated plastics material) 6HH2: the
provisions of 6.1.4.13.1 and 6.1.4.13.4 to 6.1.4.13.6 shall apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20 Composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware)
6PA1 receptacle with outer steel drum
6PA2 receptacle with outer steel crate or box
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6PB1 receptacle with outer aluminium drum
6PB2 receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box
6PC receptacle with outer wooden box
6PD1 receptacle with outer plywood drum
6PD2 receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper
6PG1 receptacle with outer fibre drum
6PG2 receptacle with outer fibreboard box
6PH1 receptacle with outer expanded plastics packaging
6PH2 receptacle with outer solid plastics packaging
6.1.4.20.1 Inner receptacle
.1 Receptacles shall be of a suitable form (cylindrical or pear-shaped) and be made of good-quality material
free from any defect that could impair their strength. The walls shall be sufficiently thick at every point.
.2 Screw-threaded plastics closures, ground glass stoppers or closures at least equally effective shall be
used as closures for receptacles. Any part of the closure likely to come into contact with the contents of
the receptacle shall be resistant to those contents. Care shall be taken to ensure that the closures are
so fitted as to be leakproof and are suitably secured to prevent any loosening during transport. If vented
closures are necessary, they shall comply with 4.1.1.8.
.3 The receptacle shall be firmly secured in the outer packaging by means of cushioning and/or absorbent
materials.
.4 Maximum capacity of receptacle: 60 L.
.5 Maximum net mass: 75 kg.
6.1.4.20.2 Outer packaging
.1 Receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.1 shall apply to the construction
of the outer packaging. The removable lid required for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in the
form of a cap.
.2 Receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PA2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.14 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging. For cylindrical receptacles, the outer packaging shall, when upright,
rise above the receptacle and its closure. If the crate surrounds a pear-shaped receptacle and is of
matching shape, the outer packaging shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap).
.3 Receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.2 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
.4 Receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.14 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
.5 Receptacle with outer wooden box 6PC: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.9 shall apply to the construction
of the outer packaging.
.6 Receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.5 shall apply to the construction
of the outer packaging.
.7 Receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2: the wickerwork hamper shall be properly made with material
of good quality. It shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap) so as to prevent damage to the receptacle.
.8 Receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG1: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 shall apply to the
body of the outer packaging.
.9 Receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PG2: the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.12 shall apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
.10 Receptacle with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2): the materials
of both outer packagings shall meet the relevant provisions of 6.1.4.13. Solid plastics packaging shall
be manufactured from high-density polyethylene or some other comparable plastics material. The
removable lid for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in the form of a cap.
6.1.5 Test provisions for packagings
6.1.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests
6.1.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in this section, in accordance with procedures
established by the competent authority.
6.1.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used.
A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and
packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which differ from the design
type only in their lesser design height.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For such
tests on paper or fibreboard packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to the
provisions of 6.1.5.2.3.
6.1.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction
of a packaging.
6.1.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects
from a tested type, such as smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass; and
packagings such as drums, bags and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimensions.
6.1.5.1.6 [Reserved]
Note: For the conditions for using different inner packagings in an outer packaging and permissible variations
in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1. These conditions do not limit the use of inner packagings when applying
6.1.5.1.7.
6.1.5.1.7 Articles or inner packagings of any type for solids or liquids may be assembled and transported without
testing in an outer packaging under the following conditions:
.1 The outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.1.5.3 with fragile (such as
glass) inner packagings containing liquids, using the drop height for packing group I.
.2 The total combined gross mass of inner packagings shall not exceed one half the gross mass of inner
packagings used for the drop test in .1 above.
.3 The thickness of the cushioning material between inner packagings and between inner packagings and
the outside of the packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the originally
tested packaging; and when a single inner packaging was used in the original test, the thicknesses of
the cushioning between inner packagings shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between the
outside of the packaging and the inner packaging in the original test. When either fewer or smaller inner
packagings are used (as compared to the inner packagings used in the drop test), sufficient additional
cushioning material shall be used to take up void spaces.
.4 The outer packaging shall have successfully passed the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty. The total
mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of inner packagings used in the drop
test in .1 above.
.5 Inner packagings containing liquids shall be completely surrounded with a sufficient quantity of absorbent
material to absorb the entire liquid contents of the inner packagings.
.6 When the outer packaging is intended to contain inner packagings for liquids and is not leakproof, or is
intended to contain inner packagings for solids and is not sift-proof, a means of containing any liquid or
solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or
other equally efficient means of containment. For packagings containing liquids, the absorbent material
required in .5 above shall be placed inside the means of containing the liquid contents.
.7 Packagings shall be marked in accordance with section 6.1.3 as having been tested to packing group I
performance for combination packagings. The marked gross mass, in kilograms, shall be the sum of the
mass of the outer packaging plus one half of the mass of the inner packaging(s) as used for the drop test
referred to in .1 above. Such a packaging mark shall also contain the letter ‘V’ as described in 6.1.2.4.
6.1.5.1.8 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially
produced packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests.
6.1.5.1.9 If an inner treatment or coating is required for safety reasons, it shall retain its protective properties after the
tests.
6.1.5.1.10 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected, and with the approval of the competent authority,
several tests may be made on one sample.
6.1.5.1.11 Salvage packagings
6.1.5.1.11.1 Salvage packagings (see 1.2.1) shall be tested and marked in accordance with the provisions applicable to
packing group II packagings intended for the transport of solids or inner packagings, except as follows:
.1 The test substance used in performing the tests shall be water and the packagings shall be filled to not
less than 98% of their maximum capacity. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot,
to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed in such a way that the test results
are not affected. Alternatively, in performing the drop test, the drop height may be varied in accordance
with 6.1.5.3.5(b);
.2 Packagings shall, in addition, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness test at 30 kPa, with
the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6.1.5.7; and
.3 Packagings shall be marked with the letter ‘T’ as described in 6.1.2.4.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.1.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing
6.1.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on packagings prepared as for transport, including, with respect to combination
packagings, the inner packagings used. Inner or single receptacles or packagings, other than bags, shall
be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95% for solids. Bags shall be filled
to the maximum mass at which they may be used. For combination packagings where the inner packaging
is designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both solid and liquid contents. The
substances or articles to be transported in the packagings may be replaced by other substances or articles
except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used, it shall
have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. It is permissible
to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are
placed so that the test results are not affected.
6.1.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and viscosity
to those of the substance being transported. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under the
conditions in 6.1.5.3.5.
6.1.5.2.3 Paper or fibreboard packagings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having controlled
temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred
atmosphere is 23°C ± 2°C and 50% ± 2% r.h. The two other options are 20°C ± 2°C and 65% ± 2% r.h. or
27°C ± 2°C and 65% ± 2% r.h.
Note: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuations and measurement limitations may
cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test
reproducibility.
6.1.5.2.4 Additional steps shall be taken to ascertain that the plastics material used in the manufacture of plastics
drums, plastics jerricans and composite packagings (plastics material) intended to contain liquids complies
with the provisions in 6.1.1.2, 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.3. This may be done, for example, by submitting sample
receptacles or packagings to a preliminary test extending over a long period, for example six months, during
which the samples would remain filled with the substances they are intended to contain and after which the
samples shall be submitted to the applicable tests listed in 6.1.5.3, 6.1.5.4, 6.1.5.5, and 6.1.5.6. For substances
which may cause stress cracking or weakening in plastics drums or jerricans, the sample, filled with the
substance or another substance that is known to have at least as severe stress cracking influence on the
plastics materials in question, shall be subjected to a superimposed load equivalent to the total mass of
identical packages which might be stacked on it during transport. The minimum height of the stack including
the test sample shall be 3 m.
6.1.5.3 Drop test
6.1.5.3.1 Number of test samples (per design type and manufacturer) and drop orientation
For other than flat drops, the centre of gravity shall be vertically over the point of impact.
Packaging Number of test samples Drop orientation
Steel drums Six First drop (using three samples):
Aluminium drums (three for each drop) the packaging shall strike the target
Metal drums, other than steel or diagonally on the chime or, if the
aluminium drums packaging has no chime, on a
Steel jerricans circumferential seam or an edge
Aluminium jerricans Second drop (using the other three
Plywood drums samples): the packaging shall strike
Fibre drums the target on the weakest part not
Plastics drums and jerricans tested by the first drop, for example a
Composite packagings which are in closure or, for some cylindrical drums,
the shape of a drum the welded longitudinal seam of the
body
Boxes of natural wood Five First drop: flat on the bottom
Plywood boxes (one for each drop) Second drop: flat on the top
Reconstituted wood boxes Third drop: flat on the long side
Fibreboard boxes Fourth drop: flat on the short side
Plastics boxes Fifth drop: on a corner
Steel or aluminium boxes
Composite packagings which are in
the shape of a box
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Packaging Number of test samples Drop orientation
Bags – single-ply with a side seam Three First drop: flat on a wide face
(three drops per bag) Second drop: flat on a narrow face
Third drop: on the end of the bag
Bags – single-ply without a side Three First drop: flat on a wide face
seam or multi-ply (two drops per bag) Second drop: on an end of the bag
Where more than one orientation is possible for a given drop test, the orientation most likely to result in failure
of the packaging shall be used.
6.1.5.3.2 Special preparation of test samples for the drop test
The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to -18°C or lower for the following
packagings:
.1 plastics drums (see 6.1.4.8);
.2 plastics jerricans (see 6.1.4.8);
.3 plastics boxes other than expanded plastics boxes (see 6.1.4.13);
.4 composite packagings (plastics material) (see 6.1.4.19); and
.5 combination packagings with plastics inner packagings, other than plastics bags intended to contain
solids or articles.
Where the test samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.1.5.2.3 may be waived. Test liquids shall
be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary.
6.1.5.3.3 Removable head packagings for liquids shall not be dropped until at least 24 h after filling and closing to allow
for any possible gasket relaxation.
6.1.5.3.4 Target
The target shall be a non-resilient and horizontal surface and shall be:
.1 integral and massive enough to be immovable;
.2 flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results;
.3 rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by the tests;
and
.4 sufficiently large to ensure that the test package falls entirely upon the surface.
6.1.5.3.5 Drop height
For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be carried or with another substance
having essentially the same physical characteristics:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
For liquids in single packagings and for inner packagings of combination packagings, if the test is performed
with water:
Note: The term “water” includes water/antifreeze solutions with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for testing
at -18°C.
(a) where the substances to be transported have a relative density not exceeding 1.2:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(b) where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall
be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the first
decimal, as follows:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
d × 1.5 m d × 1.0 m d × 0.67 m
6.1.5.3.6 Criteria for passing the test
.1 Each packaging containing liquid shall be leakproof when equilibrium has been reached between the
internal and external pressures, except for inner packagings of combination packagings, when it is not
necessary that the pressures be equalized.
.2 Where a packaging for solids undergoes a drop test and its upper face strikes the target, the test sample
passes the test if the entire contents are retained by an inner packaging or inner receptacle (such as a
plastics bag), even if the closure, while retaining its containment function, is no longer sift-proof.
.3 The packaging or outer packaging of a composite or combination packaging shall not exhibit any
damage liable to affect safety during transport. Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or articles shall
remain completely within the outer packaging and there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from
the inner receptacles or inner packaging(s).
.4 Neither the outermost ply of a bag nor an outer packaging shall exhibit any damage liable to affect safety
during transport.
.5 A slight discharge from the closures upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the packaging
provided that no further leakage occurs.
.6 No rupture is permitted in packagings for goods of class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose
explosive substances or articles from the outer packaging.
6.1.5.4 Leakproofness test
6.1.5.4.1 The leakproofness test shall be performed on all design types of packagings intended to contain liquids;
however, this test is not required for the inner packagings of combination packagings.
6.1.5.4.2 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.4.3 Special preparation of test samples for the test: vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented
closures or the vent shall be sealed.
6.1.5.4.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: the packagings, including their closures, shall be restrained under
water for 5 minutes while an internal air pressure is applied. The method of restraint shall not affect the results
of the test.
The air pressure (gauge) to be applied shall be:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Not less than Not less than Not less than
30 kPa (0.3 bar) 20 kPa (0.2 bar) 20 kPa (0.2 bar)
Other methods at least equally as effective may be used.
6.1.5.4.5 Criterion for passing the test: there shall be no leakage.
6.1.5.5 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test
6.1.5.5.1 Packagings to be tested: the internal pressure (hydraulic) test shall be carried out on all design types of metal,
plastics and composite packagings intended to contain liquids. This test is not required for inner packagings
of combination packagings.
6.1.5.5.2 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacture.
6.1.5.5.3 Special preparation of packagings for testing: vented closures shall either be replaced by similar non-vented
closures or the vent shall be sealed.
6.1.5.5.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: metal packagings and composite packagings (glass, porcelain or
stoneware), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure for 5 minutes. Plastics packagings
and composite packagings (plastics material), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure
for 30 minutes. This pressure is the one to be included in the mark required by 6.1.3.1(d). The manner in which
the packagings are supported shall not invalidate the test. The test pressure shall be applied continuously
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
and evenly; it shall be kept constant throughout the test period. The hydraulic pressure (gauge) applied, as
determined by any one of the following methods, shall be:
.1 not less than the total gauge pressure measured in the packaging (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling
liquid and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55°C, multiplied by a
safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of
filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of 15°C;
.2 not less than 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50°C of the liquid to be transported, minus 100 kPa, but
with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa;
.3 not less than 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55°C of the liquid to be transported minus 100 kPa, but
with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa.
6.1.5.5.5 In addition, packagings intended to contain liquids of packing group I shall be tested to a minimum test
pressure of 250 kPa (gauge) for a test period of 5 or 30 minutes, depending upon the material of construction
of the packaging.
6.1.5.5.6 Criterion for passing the test: no packaging shall leak.
6.1.5.6 Stacking test
All design types of packagings other than bags shall be subjected to a stacking test.
6.1.5.6.1 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.6.2 Test method: the test sample shall be subjected to a force applied to the top surface of the test sample
equivalent to the total mass of identical packages which might be stacked on it during transport: where the
contents of the test sample are liquids with relative density different from that of the liquid to be transported,
the force shall be calculated in relation to the latter. The minimum height of the stack including the test sample
shall be 3 m. The duration of the test shall be 24 hours except that plastics drums, jerricans, and composite
packagings 6HH1 and 6HH2 intended for liquids shall be subjected to the stacking test for a period of 28 days
at a temperature of not less than 40°C.
6.1.5.6.3 Criteria for passing the test: no test sample shall leak. In composite packagings or combination packagings,
there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacle or inner packaging. No test
sample shall show any deterioration which could adversely affect transport safety or any distortion liable to
reduce its strength or cause instability in stacks of packages. Plastics packagings shall be cooled to ambient
temperature before the assessment.
6.1.5.7 Test report
6.1.5.7.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users
of the packaging:
.1 name and address of the test facility;
.2 name and address of applicant (where applicable);
.3 a unique test report identification;
.4 date of the test report;
.5 manufacturer of the packaging;
.6 description of the packaging design type (such as dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.),
including method of manufacture (such as blow-moulding), and which may include drawing(s) and/or
photograph(s);
.7 maximum capacity;
.8 characteristics of test contents, such as viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for
solids. For plastics packagings subject to the internal pressure test in 6.1.5.5, the temperature of the
water used;
.9 test descriptions and results;
.10 signature, with the name and status of the signatory.
6.1.5.7.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for transport was tested in accordance
with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components
may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.2
Provisions for the construction and testing of pressure
receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles
containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges
containing liquefied flammable gas
Note: Aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing
liquefied flammable gas are not subject to the provisions of 6.2.1 to 6.2.3.
6.2.1 General provisions
6.2.1.1 Design and construction
6.2.1.1.1 Pressure receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand
all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during normal conditions of transport and
intended use.
6.2.1.1.2 In recognition of scientific and technological advances, and recognizing that pressure receptacles other than
those that bear “UN” certification marks may be used on a national or regional basis, pressure receptacles
conforming to requirements other than those specified in this Code may be used if approved by the competent
authorities in the countries of transport and use.
6.2.1.1.3 In no case shall the minimum wall thickness be less than that specified in the design and construction
technical standards.
6.2.1.1.4 For welded pressure receptacles, only metals of weldable quality shall be welded.
6.2.1.1.5 The test pressure of pressure receptacle shells and bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with packing
instruction P200, or, for a chemical under pressure, with packing instruction P206. The test pressure for
closed cryogenic receptacles shall be in accordance with packing instruction P203. The test pressure of a
metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance with packing instruction P205. The test pressure of a
cylinder shell for an adsorbed gas shall be in accordance with packing instruction P208.
6.2.1.1.6 Cylinders or cylinder shells assembled in bundles shall be structurally supported and held together as a
unit. Cylinders or cylinder shells shall be secured in a manner that prevents movement in relation to the
structural assembly and movement that would result in the concentration of harmful local stresses. Manifold
assemblies (e.g. manifold, valves, and pressure gauges) shall be designed and constructed such that they are
protected from impact damage and forces normally encountered in transport. Manifolds shall have at least
the same test pressure as the cylinders. For toxic liquefied gases, each cylinder shell shall have an isolation
valve to ensure that each cylinder can be filled separately and that no interchange of cylinder contents can
occur during transport.
6.2.1.1.7 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.2.1.1.8 The following additional provisions apply to the construction of closed cryogenic receptacles for refrigerated
liquefied gases:
.1 The mechanical properties of the metal used shall be established for each pressure receptacle, including
the impact strength and the bending coefficient;
.2 The pressure receptacles shall be thermally insulated. The thermal insulation shall be protected against
impact by means of a jacket. If the space between the inner vessel and the jacket is evacuated of air
(vacuum insulation), the jacket shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an
external pressure of at least 100 kPa (1 bar) calculated in accordance with a recognized technical code
or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. If the jacket is
so closed as to be gas-tight (e.g. in the case of vacuum insulation), a device shall be provided to prevent
any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-tightness
of the inner vessel or its service equipment. The device shall prevent moisture from penetrating into the
insulation.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.3 Closed cryogenic receptacles intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling
point below -182°C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen or
oxygen-enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner, when located in parts of the thermal insulation
where there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen-enriched liquid.
.4 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be designed and constructed with suitable lifting and securing
arrangements.
6.2.1.1.9 Additional requirements for the construction of acetylene cylinders
Cylinder shells for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be filled with a
porous material, uniformly distributed, of a type that conforms to the requirements and testing specified by a
standard or technical code recognized by the competent authority and which:
.1 is compatible with the cylinder shell and does not form harmful or dangerous compounds either with the
acetylene or with the solvent in the case of UN 1001; and
.2 is capable of preventing the spread of decomposition of the acetylene in the porous material.
In the case of UN 1001, the solvent shall be compatible with those parts of the cylinder that are in contact
with it.
6.2.1.2 Materials
6.2.1.2.1 Construction materials of pressure receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall not be
affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be transported and shall not cause a dangerous
effect, e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods.
6.2.1.2.2 Pressure receptacles shall be made of the materials specified in the design and construction technical
standards and the applicable packing instruction for the substances intended for transport in the pressure
receptacle. The materials shall be resistant to brittle fracture and to stress corrosion cracking as indicated in
the design and construction technical standards.
6.2.1.3 Service equipment
6.2.1.3.1 Service equipment subjected to pressure, excluding porous, absorbent or adsorbent material, pressure relief
devices, pressure gauges or indicators, shall be designed and constructed so that the burst pressure is at
least 1.5 times the test pressure of the pressure receptacle.
6.2.1.3.2 Service equipment shall be configured or designed to prevent damage and unintended opening that could
result in the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and transport.
All closures shall be protected in the same manner as is required for valves in 4.1.6.1.8. Manifold piping
leading to shut-off valves shall be sufficiently flexible to protect the shut-off valves and the piping from
shearing or releasing the pressure receptacle contents.
6.2.1.3.3 Pressure receptacles which are not capable of being handled manually or rolled shall be fitted with handling
devices (skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they can be safely handled by mechanical means and so arranged
as not to impair the strength of, nor cause undue stresses in, the pressure receptacle.
6.2.1.3.4 Individual pressure receptacles shall be equipped with pressure relief devices as specified in packing
instruction P200(1), P205 or in 6.2.1.3.6.4 and 6.2.1.3.6.5. Pressure relief devices shall be designed to prevent
the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure. When
fitted, pressure relief devices on manifolded horizontal pressure receptacles filled with flammable gas shall
be arranged to discharge freely to the open air in such a manner as to prevent any impingement of escaping
gas upon the pressure receptacle itself under normal conditions of transport.
6.2.1.3.5 Pressure receptacles where filling is measured by volume shall be provided with a level indicator.
6.2.1.3.6 Additional provisions for closed cryogenic receptacles
6.2.1.3.6.1 Each filling and discharge opening in a closed cryogenic receptacle used for the transport of flammable
refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in series,
the first being a stop-valve, the second being a cap or equivalent device.
6.2.1.3.6.2 For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a method
of automatic pressure relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the piping.
6.2.1.3.6.3 Each connection on a closed cryogenic receptacle shall be clearly marked to indicate its function (e.g. vapour
or liquid phase).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.1.3.6.4 Pressure relief devices
6.2.1.3.6.4.1 Each closed cryogenic receptacle shall be provided with at least one pressure relief device. The pressure
relief device shall be of the type that will resist dynamic forces, including surge.
6.2.1.3.6.4.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles may, in addition, have a frangible disc in parallel with the spring-loaded
device(s) in order to meet the provisions of 6.2.1.3.6.5.
6.2.1.3.6.4.3 Connections to pressure relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass
unrestricted to the pressure relief device.
6.2.1.3.6.4.4 All pressure relief device inlets shall, under maximum filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the
closed cryogenic receptacle and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is
discharged unrestrictedly.
6.2.1.3.6.5 Capacity and setting of pressure relief devices
Note: In relation to pressure relief devices of closed cryogenic receptacles, “MAWP” means the maximum
effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of a loaded closed cryogenic receptacle in its operating
position, including the highest effective pressure during filling and discharge.
6.2.1.3.6.5.1 The pressure relief device shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at
a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. It shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower than 10% below
the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures.
6.2.1.3.6.5.2 Frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure which is the lower of either the test pressure or
150% of the MAWP.
6.2.1.3.6.5.3 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insulated closed cryogenic receptacle, the combined capacity
of all pressure relief devices installed shall be sufficient so that the pressure (including accumulation) inside
the closed cryogenic receptacle does not exceed 120% of the MAWP.
6.2.1.3.6.5.4 The required capacity of the pressure relief devices shall be calculated in accordance with an established
technical code recognized by the competent authority.
6.2.1.4 Approval of pressure receptacles
6.2.1.4.1 The conformity of pressure receptacles shall be assessed at time of manufacture as required by the competent
authority. The technical documentation shall include full specifications on design and construction, and full
documentation on the manufacturing and testing.
6.2.1.4.2 Quality assurance systems shall conform to the requirements of the competent authority.
6.2.1.4.3 Pressure receptacle shells and the inner vessels of closed cryogenic receptacles shall be inspected, tested
and approved by an inspection body.
6.2.1.4.4 For refillable cylinders, pressure drums and tubes the conformity assessment of the shell and the closure(s)
may be carried out separately. In these cases, an additional assessment of the final assembly is not required.
For bundles of cylinders, the cylinder shells and the valve(s) may be assessed separately, but an additional
assessment of the complete assembly is required.
For closed cryogenic receptacles, the inner vessels and the closures may be assessed separately, but an
additional assessment of the complete assembly is required.
For acetylene cylinders, conformity assessment shall comprise either:
.1 one assessment of conformity covering both the cylinder shell and the contained porous material; or
.2 a separate assessment of conformity for the empty cylinder shell and an additional assessment of
conformity covering the cylinder shell with the contained porous material.
6.2.1.5 Initial inspection and test
6.2.1.5.1 New pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles, metal hydride storage systems and
bundles of cylinders, shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in accordance
with the applicable design standards or recognized technical codes including the following:
On an adequate sample of pressure receptacle shells:
.1 testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 verification of the minimum wall thickness;
.3 verification of the homogeneity of the material for each manufacturing batch;
.4 inspection of the external and internal conditions;
.5 inspection of the threads used to fit closures;
.6 verification of the conformance with the design standard;
For all pressure receptacle shells:
.7 a hydraulic pressure test. Pressure receptacle shells shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in the
design and construction technical standard or technical code;
Note: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a
test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
.8 inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the pressure
receptacle shells unserviceable. In the case of welded pressure receptacle shells, particular attention
shall be paid to the quality of the welds;
.9 an inspection of the marks on the pressure receptacle shells;
.10 in addition, cylinder shells intended for the transport of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and
UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free shall be inspected to ensure proper installation and condition of the
porous material and, if applicable, the quantity of solvent.
On an adequate sample of closures:
.11 verification of materials;
.12 verification of dimensions;
.13 verification of cleanliness;
.14 inspection of completed assembly; and
.15 verification of the presence of marks.
For all closures:
.16 testing for leakproofness.
6.2.1.5.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in
accordance with the applicable design standards or recognized technical codes including the following:
On an adequate sample of inner vessels:
.1 testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction;
.2 verification of the minimum wall thickness;
.3 inspection of the external and internal conditions;
.4 verification of the conformance with the design standard or recognized technical code; and
.5 inspection of welds by radiographic, ultrasonic or other suitable non-destructive test method according
to the applicable design and construction standard or recognized technical code;
For all inner vessels:
.6 a hydraulic pressure test; the inner vessel shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in the design and
construction technical standard or recognized technical code;
Note: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a
test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
.7 inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the inner
vessel unserviceable; and
.8 an inspection of the marks.
On an adequate sample of closures:
.9 verification of materials;
.10 verification of dimensions;
.11 verification of cleanliness;
.12 inspection of completed assembly; and
.13 verification of the presence of marks.
For all closures:
.14 testing for leakproofness.
On an adequate sample of completed closed cryogenic receptacles:
.15 testing the satisfactory operation of service equipment; and
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.16 verification of the conformance with the design standard or recognized technical code.
For all completed closed cryogenic receptacles:
.17 testing for leakproofness.
Note: Closed cryogenic receptacles which were constructed in accordance with the initial inspection and
test requirements of 6.2.1.5.2 applicable in the IMDG Code Amendment 40-20 but which do not however
conform to the requirements of 6.2.1.5.2 relating to the initial inspection and test applicable in the IMDG Code
Amendment 41-22, may continue to be used.
6.2.1.5.3 For metal hydride storage systems, it shall be verified that the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1.1, .2,
.3, .4, .5 if applicable, .6, .7, .8 and .9 have been performed on an adequate sample of the pressure receptacle
shells used in the metal hydride storage system. In addition, on an adequate sample of metal hydride storage
systems, the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1.3 and .6 shall be performed, as well as 6.2.1.5.1.5, if
applicable, and inspection of the external conditions of the metal hydride storage system.
Additionally, all metal hydride storage systems shall undergo the initial inspections and tests specified in
6.2.1.5.1.8 and .9, as well as a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of the service
equipment.
6.2.1.5.4 For bundles of cylinders the cylinder shells and closures shall be subjected to initial inspection and tests
specified in 6.2.1.5.1. An adequate sample of frames shall be proof load tested to two times the maximum
gross weight of the bundles of cylinders.
Additionally, all manifolds of bundle of cylinders shall undergo a hydraulic pressure test and all the completed
bundles of cylinders shall undergo a leakproofness test.
Note: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a test
using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
6.2.1.6 Periodic inspection and test
6.2.1.6.1 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than cryogenic receptacles, shall be subjected to periodic inspections
and tests, by a body authorized by the competent authority, in accordance with the following:
.1 Check of the external conditions of the pressure receptacle and verification of the equipment and the
external marks;
.2 Check of the internal conditions of the pressure receptacle (e.g. internal inspection, verification of
minimum wall thickness);
.3 Checking of the threads either:
.1 if there is evidence of corrosion; or
.2 if the closures or other service equipment are removed;
.4 A hydraulic pressure test of the pressure receptacle shell and, if necessary, verification of the
characteristics of the material by suitable tests;
Note 1: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by
a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
Note 2: For seamless steel cylinder shells and tube shells the check of 6.2.1.6.1.2 and hydraulic pressure
test of 6.2.1.6.1.4 may be replaced by a procedure conforming to ISO 16148:2016 + Amd 1:2020 Gas
cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Acoustic emission examination (AT) and
follow-up ultrasonic examination (UT) for periodic inspection and testing.
Note 3: The check of internal conditions of 6.2.1.6.1.2 and the hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1.4 may
be replaced by ultrasonic examination carried out in accordance with ISO 18119:2018 + Amd 1:2021 for
seamless steel and seamless aluminium alloy cylinder shells. For a transitional period until 31 December
2026, the standard ISO 18119:2018 may be used for this same purpose. For a transitional period until
31 December 2024, the standard ISO 10461:2005 + Amd 1:2006 may be used for seamless aluminium
alloy cylinder shells and ISO 6406:2005 may be used for seamless steel cylinder shells for this same
purpose.
Note 4: For bundles of cylinders the hydraulic test specified in .4 above shall be carried out on the
cylinder shells and on the manifolds.
.5 Check of service equipment, if to be reintroduced into service. This check may be carried out separately
from the inspection of the pressure receptacle shell.
.6 A leakproofness test of bundles of cylinders after reassembly.
Note: For the periodic inspection and test frequencies, see packing instruction P200 or, for a chemical under
pressure, packing instruction P206 of 4.1.4.1.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.1.6.2 Cylinders intended for the transport of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free
shall be examined only as specified in 6.2.1.6.1.1, 6.2.1.6.1.3 and 6.2.1.6.1.5. In addition, the condition of the
porous material (e.g. cracks, top clearance, loosening, or settlement) shall be examined.
6.2.1.6.3 Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests.
6.2.1.7 Requirements for manufacturers
6.2.1.7.1 The manufacturer shall be technically able and shall possess all resources required for the satisfactory
manufacture of pressure receptacles; this relates in particular to qualified personnel:
.1 to supervise the entire manufacturing process;
.2 to carry out joining of materials; and
.3 to carry out the relevant tests.
6.2.1.7.2 A proficiency test of the manufacturers of pressure receptacle shells and the inner vessels of closed cryogenic
receptacles shall in all instances be carried out by an inspection body approved by the competent authority of
the country of approval. Proficiency testing of manufacturers of closures shall be carried out if the competent
authority requires it. This test shall be carried out either during design type approval or during production
inspection and certification.
6.2.1.8 Requirements for inspection bodies
6.2.1.8.1 Inspection bodies shall be independent from manufacturing enterprises and competent to perform the tests,
inspections and approvals required.
6.2.2 Provisions for UN pressure receptacles
In addition to the general requirements of 6.2.1, UN pressure receptacles shall comply with the provisions
of this section, including the standards, as applicable. Manufacture of new pressure receptacles or service
equipment according to any particular standard in 6.2.2.1 and 6.2.2.3 is not permitted after the date shown
in the right hand column of the tables.
Note 1: With the agreement of the competent authority, more recently published versions of the standards,
if available, may be used.
Note 2: UN pressure receptacles constructed according to standards applicable at the date of manufacture
may continue in use subject to the periodic inspection provisions of this Code.
6.2.2.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test
6.2.2.1.1 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of refillable
UN cylinder shells, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and
approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile December
strength less than 1 100 MPa. 2018
Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.3 of this standard shall not
be applied for UN cylinders.
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile December
strength less than 1 100 MPa 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and notice
tubes with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
ISO 9809-2:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile December
strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa 2018
ISO 9809-2:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile December
strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa 2026
ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and notice
tubes with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders December
2018
ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders December
2026
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes notice
ISO 9809-4:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 4: Stainless steel cylinders with an Rm value of less than December
1 100 MPa 2028
ISO 9809-4:2021 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 4: Stainless steel cylinders with an Rm value of notice
less than 1 100 MPa
Note: Small quantities are a batch of cylinders not exceeding 200.
ISO 7866:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, Until 31
construction and testing December
Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.2 of this standard shall not 2020
be applied for UN cylinders.
Aluminium alloy 6351A-T6 or equivalent shall not be authorized.
ISO 7866:2012+ Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy gas cylinders – Design, Until further
Cor 1:2014 construction and testing notice
Note: Aluminium alloy 6351A or equivalent shall not be used.
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and Until further
below notice
ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel cylinders – Until further
Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below notice
ISO 20703:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded aluminium-alloy cylinders – Until further
Design, construction and testing notice
ISO 11119-1:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Until 31
Part 1: Hoop wrapped composite gas cylinders December
2020
ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, Until 31
construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop wrapped fibre reinforced composite December
gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l 2028
ISO 11119-1:2020 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable composite gas Until further
cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Hoop wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas notice
cylinders and tubes up to 450 l
ISO 11119-2:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Until 31
Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with December
load-sharing metal liners 2020
ISO 11119-2:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, Until 31
+ Amd 1:2014 construction and testing – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite December
gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners 2028
ISO 11119-2:2020 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of refillable composite gas Until further
cylinders and tubes — Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas notice
cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners
ISO 11119-3:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction – Specification and test methods – Until 31
Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with non-load- December
sharing metallic or non-metallic liners 2020
Note: This standard shall not be used for linerless cylinders manufactured
from two parts joined together.
ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, Until 31
construction and testing – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite December
gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or 2028
non-metallic liners
Note: This standard shall not be used for linerless cylinders manufactured
from two parts joined together.
ISO 11119-3:2020 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of refillable composite gas Until further
cylinders and tubes — Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas notice
cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or non-metallic
liners or without liners
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 11119-4:2016 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders – Design, construction and Until further
testing – Part 4: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders up to notice
150 l with load-sharing welded metallic liners
Note 1: In the above referenced standards, composite cylinder shells shall be designed for a design life of
not less than 15 years.
Note 2: Composite cylinder shells with a design life longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15 years
from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test programme.
The programme shall be part of the initial design type approval and shall specify inspections and tests to
demonstrate that composite cylinder shells manufactured accordingly remain safe to the end of their design
life. The service life test programme and the results shall be approved by the competent authority of the
country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the cylinder design. The service life of a
composite cylinder shell shall not be extended beyond its initial approved design life.
6.2.2.1.2 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN tube shells,
except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall be in
accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 11120:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes for compressed gas transport, Until 31
of water capacity between 150 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing December
Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.1 of this standard shall not 2022
be applied for UN tubes.
ISO 11120:2015 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes of water capacity between Until further
150 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing notice
△ ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, Until 31
construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop wrapped fibre reinforced composite December
gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l 2028
■ ISO 11119-1:2020 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable composite gas Until further
cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Hoop wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas notice
cylinders and tubes up to 450 l
△ ISO 11119-2:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, Until 31
+ Amd 1:2014 construction and testing – Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite December
gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners 2028
■ ISO 11119-2:2020 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of refillable composite gas Until further
cylinders and tubes — Part 2: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas notice
cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners
△ ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and tubes – Design, Until 31
construction and testing – Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite December
gas cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or 2028
non-metallic liners
Note: This standard shall not be used for linerless tubes manufactured from
two parts joined together.
■ ISO 11119-3:2020 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of refillable composite gas Until further
cylinders and tubes — Part 3: Fully wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas notice
cylinders and tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or non-metallic
liners or without liners
ISO 11515: 2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes of water capacity Until 31
between 450 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing December
2026
ISO 11515:2013 + Gas cylinders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes of water capacity Until further
Amd 1:2018 between 450 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing notice
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and notice
tubes with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and notice
tubes with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes notice
Note 1: In the above referenced standards composite tube shells shall be designed for a design life of not
less than 15 years.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Note 2: Composite tube shells with a design life longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15 years from the
date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test programme. The programme
shall be part of the initial design type approval and shall specify inspections and tests to demonstrate that
composite tube shells manufactured accordingly remain safe to the end of their design life. The service life
test programme and the results shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of approval that
is responsible for the initial approval of the tube design. The service life of a composite tube shell shall not be
extended beyond its initial approved design life.
6.2.2.1.3 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN acetylene
cylinders, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval
shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
For the cylinder shell:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile December
strength less than 1 100 MPa 2018
Note: The note concerning the F factor in section 7.3 of this standard shall not
be applied for UN cylinders.
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile December
strength less than 1 100 MPa 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and notice
tubes with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders December
2018
ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders December
2026
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes notice
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and Until further
below notice
ISO 7866:2012 + Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminum alloy gas cylinders – Design, Until further
Cor 1:2014 construction and testing notice
Note: Aluminum alloy 6351A or equivalent shall not be used.
For the acetylene cylinder including the porous material:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 3807-1:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 1: Cylinders without fusible Until 31
plugs December
2020
ISO 3807-2:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 2: Cylinders with fusible Until 31
plugs December
2020
ISO 3807-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Basic requirements and type testing Until further
notice
6.2.2.1.4 The following standard applies for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN closed
cryogenic receptacles, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system
and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 21029-1:2004 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated vessels of not more than Until 31
1 000 l volume – Part 1: Design, fabrication, inspection and tests December
2026
ISO 21029-1:2018 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated vessels of not more than Until further
+ Amd 1:2019 1 000 l volume – Part 1: Design, fabrication, inspection and tests notice
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.2.1.5 The following standard applies for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN metal hydride
storage systems, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and
approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal Until 31
hydride December
2026
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal Until further
hydride notice
6.2.2.1.6 The following standard applies for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN bundles of
cylinders. Each cylinder in a UN bundle of cylinders shall be a UN cylinder or UN cylinder shell complying
with the requirements of 6.2.2. The inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and
approval for UN bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 10961:2010 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, testing and Until 31
inspection December
2026
ISO 10961:2019 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design, manufacture, testing and Until further
inspection notice
Note: Changing one or more cylinders or cylinder shells of the same design type, including the same test
pressure, in an existing UN bundle of cylinders does not require a new conformity assessment of the existing
bundle. Service equipment of the bundle of cylinders can also be replaced without requiring a new conformity
assessment if it complies with the design type approval.
6.2.2.1.7 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN cylinders for
adsorbed gases except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and
approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for Until 31
sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, December
testing, use and periodic inspection 2026
ISO 11513:2019 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for Until further
sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, notice
testing, use and periodic inspection
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders – Design, construction Until 31
and testing – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders with tensile December
strength less than 1 100 MPa 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of refillable seamless steel Until further
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and notice
tubes with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
6.2.2.1.8 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN pressure
drums, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval shall
be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 21172-1:2015 Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to 3 000 l capacity for the Until 31
transport of gases – Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to 1 000 l December
Note: Irrespective of section 6.3.3.4 of this standard, welded steel gas 2026
pressure drums with dished ends convex to pressure may be used for the
transport of corrosive substances provided all applicable requirements of this
Code are met.
ISO 21172-1:2015 Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to 3 000 l capacity for the Until further
+ Amd 1:2018 transport of gases – Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to 1 000 l notice
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test pressure 60 bar and Until further
below notice
ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel cylinders – Part 1: Test Until further
pressure 6 MPa and below notice
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.2.1.9 The following standards apply to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of non-refillable
UN cylinders except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and
approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 11118:1999 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test Until 31
methods December
2020
ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves for non-refillable cylinders – Until 31
Specification and prototype testing December
2020
ISO 11118:2015 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test Until 31
methods December
2026
ISO 11118:2015 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders – Specification and test Until further
+ Amd 1:2019 methods notice
6.2.2.2 Materials
In addition to the material requirements specified in the design and construction standards, and any
restrictions specified in the applicable packing instruction for the gas(es) to be transported (e.g. packing
instruction P200 or P205), the following standards apply to material compatibility:
Reference Title
ISO 11114-1:2020 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 1:
Metallic materials
ISO 11114-2:2021 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas contents – Part 2:
Non-metallic materials
6.2.2.3 Closures and their protection
The following standards apply to the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of closures and their
protection:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards for industrial and Until 31
medical gas cylinders – Design, construction and tests December
2014
ISO 11117:2008 + Gas cylinders − Valve protection caps and valve guards − Until 31
Cor 1:2009 Design, construction and tests December
2026
ISO 11117:2019 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards – Design, construction and Until further
tests notice
ISO 10297:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31
December
2008
ISO 10297:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31
December
2020
ISO 10297:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until 31
December
2022
ISO 10297:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until further
+ Amd 1:2017 notice
ISO 14246:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examination Until 31
December
2024
ISO 14246:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests and examinations Until further
+ Amd 1:2017 notice
ISO 17871:2015 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinders valves- Specification and type testing Until 31
Note: This standard shall not be used for flammable gases. December
2026
ISO 17871:2020 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until further
notice
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 17879:2017 Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves – Specification and type testing Until further
Note: This standard shall not be applied to self-closing valves in acetylene notice
cylinders.
ISO 23826:2021 Gas cylinders – Ball valves – Specification and testing Until further
notice
For UN metal hydride storage systems, the requirements specified in the following standard apply to closures
and their protection:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal Until 31
hydride December
2026
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal Until further
hydride notice
6.2.2.4 Periodic inspection and test
The following standards apply to periodic inspection and testing of UN pressure receptacles:
Reference Title Applicable
ISO 6406:2005 Seamless steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Until 31
December
2024
ISO 18119:2018 Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders Until 31
and tubes – Periodic inspection and testing December
2026
ISO 18119:2018 Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders Until further
+Amd 1:2021 and tubes – Periodic inspection and testing notice
ISO 10460:2005 Gas cylinders – Welded carbon-steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and Until 31
testing December
Note: The repair of welds described in clause 12.1 of this standard shall not 2024
be permitted. Repairs described in clause 12.2 require the approval of the
competent authority which approved the periodic inspection and test body in
accordance with 6.2.2.6.
ISO 10460:2018 Gas cylinders – Welded aluminium-alloy, carbon and stainless steel gas Until further
cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing. notice
ISO 10461:2005/ Seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing Until 31
Amd 1:2006 December
2024
ISO 10462:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic inspection and maintenance Until 31
December
2024
ISO 10462:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic inspection and maintenance Until further
+ Amd1:2019 notice
ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for Until 31
sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, December
testing, use and periodic inspection 2024
ISO 11513:2019 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders containing materials for Until further
sub-atmospheric gas packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design, construction, notice
testing, use and periodic inspection
ISO 11623:2015 Gas cylinders – Composite construction – Periodic inspection and testing Until further
notice
ISO 22434:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Inspection and maintenance of cylinder valves Until further
Note: These requirements may be met at times other than at the periodic notice
inspection and test of UN cylinders.
ISO 20475:2018 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection and testing Until further
notice
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Reference Title Applicable
ISO 23088:2020 Gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of welded steel pressure Until further
drums – Capacities up to 1 000 l notice
The following standard applies to the periodic inspection and testing of UN metal hydride storage systems:
Applicable for
Reference Title
manufacture
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal Until 31
hydride December
2024
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal Until further
hydride notice
6.2.2.5 Conformity assessment system and approval for manufacture of pressure receptacles
6.2.2.5.0 Definitions
For the purposes of this section:
Conformity assessment system means a system for competent authority approval of a manufacturer, by
pressure receptacle design type approval, approval of manufacturer’s quality system and approval of
inspection bodies;
Design type means a pressure receptacle design as specified by a particular pressure receptacle standard;
Verify means confirm by examination or provision of objective evidence that specified requirements have
been fulfilled.
Note: In this subsection, when separate assessment is used, the term pressure receptacle shall refer to
pressure receptacle, pressure receptacle shell, inner vessel of the closed cryogenic receptacle or closure, as
appropriate.
6.2.2.5.1 The requirements of 6.2.2.5 shall be used for the conformity assessments of pressure receptacles. Paragraph
6.2.1.4.3 gives details of which parts of pressure receptacles may be conformity assessed separately.
However, the requirements of 6.2.2.5 may be replaced by requirements specified by the competent authority
in the following cases:
.1 conformity assessment of closures;
.2 conformity assessment of the complete assembly of bundles of cylinders provided the cylinder shells
have been conformity assessed in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.2.5; and
.3 conformity assessment of the complete assembly of closed cryogenic receptacles provided the inner
vessel has been conformity assessed in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.2.5.
6.2.2.5.2 General requirements
Competent authority
6.2.2.5.2.1 The competent authority that approves the pressure receptacle shall approve the conformity assessment
system for the purpose of ensuring that pressure receptacles conform to the provisions of this Code. In
instances where the competent authority that approves a pressure receptacle is not the competent authority
in the country of manufacture, the marks of the approval country and the country of manufacture shall be
indicated in the pressure receptacle marking (see 6.2.2.7 and 6.2.2.8).
The competent authority of the country of approval shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating
compliance of this conformity assessment system to its counterpart in a country of use.
6.2.2.5.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this conformity assessment system in whole or in part.
6.2.2.5.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved inspection bodies and their identity
marks and approved manufacturers and their identity marks is available.
Inspection body
6.2.2.5.2.4 The inspection body shall be approved by the competent authority for the inspection of pressure receptacles
and shall:
.1 have a staff with an organizational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to satisfactorily
perform its technical functions;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.2 have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment;
.3 operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from doing so;
.4 ensure commercial confidentiality of the commercial and proprietary activities of the manufacturer and
other bodies;
.5 maintain clear demarcation between actual inspection body functions and unrelated functions;
.6 operate a documented quality system;
.7 ensure that the tests and inspections specified in the relevant pressure receptacle standard and in this
Code are performed; and
.8 maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6.
6.2.2.5.2.5 The inspection body shall perform design type approval, pressure receptacle production testing and
inspection, and certification to verify conformity with the relevant pressure receptacle standard (see 6.2.2.5.4
and 6.2.2.5.5).
Manufacturer
6.2.2.5.2.6 The manufacturer shall:
.1 operate a documented quality system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3;
.2 apply for design type approvals in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4;
.3 select an inspection body from the list of approved inspection bodies maintained by the competent
authority in the country of approval; and
.4 maintain records in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6.
Testing laboratory
6.2.2.5.2.7 The testing laboratory shall have:
.1 staff with an organizational structure, sufficient in number, competence and skill; and
.2 suitable and adequate facilities and equipment to perform the tests required by the manufacturing
standard to the satisfaction of the inspection body.
6.2.2.5.3 Manufacturer’s quality system
6.2.2.5.3.1 The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements and provisions adopted by the manufacturer.
It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of written policies, procedures and
instructions.
The contents shall in particular include adequate descriptions of:
.1 the organizational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product quality;
.2 the design control and design verification techniques, processes, and procedures that will be used when
designing the pressure receptacles;
.3 the relevant pressure receptacle manufacturing, quality control, quality assurance and process operation
instructions that will be used;
.4 quality records, such as inspection reports, test data and calibration data;
.5 management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the audits in
accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2;
.6 the process describing how customer requirements are met;
.7 the process for control of documents and their revision;
.8 the means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles, purchased components, in-process and
final materials; and
.9 training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel.
6.2.2.5.3.2 Audit of the quality system
The quality system shall be initially assessed to determine whether it meets the requirements in 6.2.2.5.3.1 to
the satisfaction of the competent authority.
The manufacturer shall be notified of the results of the audit. The notification shall contain the conclusions of
the audit and any corrective actions required.
Periodic audits shall be carried out, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the
manufacturer maintains and applies the quality system. Reports of the periodic audits shall be provided to
the manufacturer.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.2.5.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system
The manufacturer shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and efficient.
The manufacturer shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system of any intended
changes. The proposed changes shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the amended quality
system will still satisfy the requirements in 6.2.2.5.3.1.
6.2.2.5.4 Approval process
Initial design type approval
6.2.2.5.4.1 The initial design type approval shall consist of approval of the manufacturer’s quality system and approval of
the pressure receptacle design to be produced. An application for an initial design type approval shall meet
the requirements of 6.2.2.5.3, 6.2.2.5.4.2 to 6.2.2.5.4.6 and 6.2.2.5.4.9.
6.2.2.5.4.2 A manufacturer desiring to produce pressure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle standard
and this Code shall apply for, obtain, and retain a Design Type Approval Certificate issued by the competent
authority in the country of approval for at least one pressure receptacle design type in accordance with the
procedure given in 6.2.2.5.4.9. This certificate shall, on request, be submitted to the competent authority of
the country of use.
6.2.2.5.4.3 An application shall be made for each manufacturing facility and shall include:
.1 the name and registered address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by
an authorized representative, its name and address;
.2 the address of the manufacturing facility (if different from the above);
.3 the name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system;
.4 the designation of the pressure receptacle and the relevant pressure receptacle standard;
.5 details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority;
.6 the identity of the inspection body for design type approval;
.7 documentation on the manufacturing facility as specified under 6.2.2.5.3.1; and
.8 the technical documentation required for design type approval, which shall enable verification of the
conformity of the pressure receptacles with the requirements of the relevant pressure receptacle design
standard. The technical documentation shall cover the design and method of manufacture and shall
contain, as far as is relevant for assessment, at least the following:
.1 pressure receptacle design standard, design and manufacturing drawings, showing components
and sub-assemblies, if any;
.2 descriptions and explanations necessary for the understanding of the drawings and intended use of
the pressure receptacles;
.3 a list of the standards necessary to fully define the manufacturing process;
.4 design calculations and material specifications; and
.5 design type approval test reports, describing the results of examinations and tests carried out in
accordance with 6.2.2.5.4.9.
6.2.2.5.4.4 An initial audit in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2 shall be performed to the satisfaction of the competent authority.
6.2.2.5.4.5 If the manufacturer is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons for
such denial.
6.2.2.5.4.6 Following approval, changes to the information submitted under 6.2.2.5.4.3 relating to the initial approval shall
be provided to the competent authority.
Subsequent design type approvals
6.2.2.5.4.7 An application for a subsequent design type approval shall encompass the requirements of 6.2.2.5.4.8 and
6.2.2.5.4.9, provided a manufacturer is in the possession of an initial design type approval. In such a case, the
manufacturer’s quality system according to 6.2.2.5.3 shall have been approved during the initial design type
approval and shall be applicable for the new design.
6.2.2.5.4.8 The application shall include:
.1 the name and address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by an authorized
representative, its name and address;
.2 details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority;
.3 evidence that initial design type approval has been granted; and
.4 the technical documentation, as described in 6.2.2.5.4.3.8.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Procedure for design type approval
6.2.2.5.4.9 The inspection body shall:
.1 examine the technical documentation to verify that:
.1 the design is in accordance with the relevant provisions of the standard, and
.2 the prototype lot has been manufactured in conformity with the technical documentation and is
representative of the design;
.2 verify that the production inspections have been carried out as required in accordance with 6.2.2.5.5;
.3 as required by the pressure receptacle standard or technical code, carry out or supervise the tests of
pressure receptacles as required for design type approval;
.4 perform or have performed the examinations and tests specified in the pressure receptacle standard to
determine that:
.1 the standard has been applied and fulfilled, and
.2 the procedures adopted by the manufacturer meet the requirements of the standard; and
.5 ensure that the various type approval examinations and tests are correctly and competently carried out.
After prototype testing has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of
6.2.2.5.4 have been satisfied, a Design Type Approval Certificate shall be issued which shall include the
name and address of the manufacturer, results and conclusions of the examination, and the necessary data
for identification of the design type. If it was not possible to evaluate exhaustively the compatibility of the
materials of construction with the contents of the pressure receptacle when the certificate was issued, a
statement that compatibility assessment was not completed shall be included in the design type approval
certificate.
If the manufacturer is denied a design type approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed
reasons for such denial.
6.2.2.5.4.10 Modifications to approved design types
The manufacturer shall either:
(a) inform the issuing competent authority of modifications to the approved design type, where such
modifications do not constitute a new design, as specified in the pressure receptacle standard; or
(b) request a subsequent design type approval where such modifications constitute a new design according
to the relevant pressure receptacle standard. This additional approval shall be given in the form of an
amendment to the original design type approval certificate.
6.2.2.5.4.11 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority information
concerning design type approval, modifications of approvals, and withdrawn approvals.
6.2.2.5.5 Production inspection and certification
An inspection body, or its delegate, shall carry out the inspection and certification of each pressure receptacle.
The inspection body selected by the manufacturer for inspection and testing during production may be
different from the inspection body used for the design type approval testing.
Where it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the inspection body that the manufacturer has trained
and competent inspectors, independent of the manufacturing operations, inspection may be performed by
those inspectors. In such a case, the manufacturer shall maintain training records of the inspectors.
The inspection body shall verify that the inspections by the manufacturer and tests performed on those
pressure receptacles fully conform to the standard and the provisions of this Code. Should non-conformance
in conjunction with this inspection and testing be determined, the permission to have inspection performed
by the manufacturer’s inspectors may be withdrawn.
The manufacturer shall, after approval by the inspection body, make a declaration of conformity with the
certified design type. The application of the pressure receptacle certification marks shall be considered a
declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and
the requirements of this conformity assessment system and with the provisions of this Code. The inspection
body shall affix or delegate the manufacturer to affix the pressure receptacle certification marks and the
registered mark of the inspection body to each approved pressure receptacle.
A certificate of compliance, signed by the inspection body and the manufacturer, shall be issued before the
pressure receptacles are filled.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.2.5.6 Records
Design type approval and certificate of compliance records shall be retained by the manufacturer and the
inspection body for not less than 20 years.
6.2.2.6 Approval system for periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles
6.2.2.6.1 Definition
For the purposes of this section:
Approval system means a system for competent authority approval of a body performing periodic inspection
and testing of pressure receptacles (hereinafter referred to as “periodic inspection and testing body”),
including approval of that body’s quality system.
6.2.2.6.2 General provisions
Competent authority
6.2.2.6.2.1 The competent authority shall establish an approval system for the purpose of ensuring that the periodic
inspection and testing of pressure receptacles conform to the provisions of this Code. In instances where the
competent authority that approves a body performing periodic inspection and testing of a pressure receptacle
is not the competent authority of the country approving the manufacture of the pressure receptacle, the
marks of the approval country of periodic inspection and testing shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle
mark (see 6.2.2.7). The competent authority of the country of approval for the periodic inspection and testing
shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance with this approval system, including the
records of the periodic inspection and testing, to its counterpart in a country of use. The competent authority
of the country of approval may terminate the Approval Certificate referred to in 6.2.2.6.4.1, upon evidence
demonstrating non-compliance with the approval system.
6.2.2.6.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this approval system, in whole or in part.
6.2.2.6.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved periodic inspection and testing bodies
and their identity marks is available.
Periodic inspection and testing body
6.2.2.6.2.4 The periodic inspection and testing body shall be approved by the competent authority and shall:
.1 have a staff with an organizational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to perform its
technical functions satisfactorily;
.2 have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment;
.3 operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from doing so;
.4 ensure commercial confidentiality;
.5 maintain clear demarcation between actual periodic inspection and testing body functions and unrelated
functions;
.6 operate a documented quality system in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3;
.7 apply for approval in accordance with 6.2.2.6.4;
.8 ensure that the periodic inspections and tests are performed in accordance with 6.2.2.6.5; and
.9 maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.6.6.
6.2.2.6.3 Quality system and audit of the periodic inspection and testing body
6.2.2.6.3.1 Quality system. The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements and provisions adopted by the
periodic inspection and testing body. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form
of written policies, procedures and instructions. The quality system shall include:
.1 a description of the organizational structure and responsibilities;
.2 the relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions
that will be used;
.3 quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates;
.4 management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the audits
performed in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2;
.5 a process for control of documents and their revision;
.6 a means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles; and
.7 training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel.
6.2.2.6.3.2 Audit. The periodic inspection and testing body and its quality system shall be audited in order to determine
whether it meets the requirements of this Code to the satisfaction of the competent authority. An audit shall
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
be conducted as part of the initial approval process (see 6.2.2.6.4.3). An audit may be required as part of
the process to modify an approval (see 6.2.2.6.4.6). Periodic audits shall be conducted, to the satisfaction
of the competent authority, to ensure that the periodic inspection and testing body continues to meet the
provisions of this Code. The periodic inspection and testing body shall be notified of the results of any audit.
The notification shall contain the conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required.
6.2.2.6.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system. The periodic inspection and testing body shall maintain the quality system
as approved in order that it remains adequate and efficient. The periodic inspection and testing body shall
notify the competent authority that approved the quality system of any intended changes, in accordance with
the process for modification of an approval in 6.2.2.6.4.6.
6.2.2.6.4 Approval process for periodic inspection and testing bodies
Initial approval
6.2.2.6.4.1 A body desiring to perform periodic inspection and testing of pressure receptacles in accordance with a
pressure receptacle standard and with this Code shall apply for, obtain, and retain an Approval Certificate
issued by the competent authority. This written approval shall, on request, be submitted to the competent
authority of a country of use.
6.2.2.6.4.2 An application shall be made for each periodic inspection and testing body and shall include:
.1 the name and address of the periodic inspection and testing body and, if the application is submitted by
an authorized representative, its name and address;
.2 the address of each facility performing periodic inspection and testing;
.3 the name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system;
.4 the designation of the pressure receptacles, the periodic inspection and test methods, and the relevant
pressure receptacle standards met by the quality system;
.5 documentation on each facility, the equipment, and the quality system as specified under 6.2.2.6.3.1;
.6 the qualifications and training records of the periodic inspection and test personnel; and
.7 details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority.
6.2.2.6.4.3 The competent authority shall:
.1 examine the documentation to verify that the procedures are in accordance with the requirements of the
relevant pressure receptacle standards and of this Code; and
.2 conduct an audit in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2 to verify that the inspections and tests are carried out
as required by the relevant pressure receptacle standards and by this Code, to the satisfaction of the
competent authority.
6.2.2.6.4.4 After the audit has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of 6.2.2.6.4 have
been satisfied, an Approval Certificate shall be issued. It shall include the name of the periodic inspection
and testing body, the registered mark, the address of each facility, and the necessary data for identification
of its approved activities (e.g. designation of pressure receptacles, periodic inspection and test method and
pressure receptacle standards).
6.2.2.6.4.5 If the periodic inspection and testing body is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written
detailed reasons for such denial.
Modifications to periodic inspection and testing body approvals
6.2.2.6.4.6 Following approval, the periodic inspection and testing body shall notify the issuing competent authority
of any modifications to the information submitted under 6.2.2.6.4.2 relating to the initial approval. The
modifications shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the requirements of the relevant pressure
receptacle standards and of this Code will be satisfied. An audit in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2 may be
required. The competent authority shall accept or reject these modifications in writing, and an amended
Approval Certificate shall be issued as necessary.
6.2.2.6.4.7 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority, information
concerning initial approvals, modifications of approvals, and withdrawn approvals.
6.2.2.6.5 Periodic inspection and test and certification
The application of the periodic inspection and test marks to a pressure receptacle shall be considered a
declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and
with the provisions of this Code. The periodic inspection and testing body shall affix the periodic inspection
and test marks, including its registered mark, to each approved pressure receptacle (see 6.2.2.7.7). A record
certifying that a pressure receptacle has passed the periodic inspection and test shall be issued by the
periodic inspection and testing body, before the pressure receptacle is filled.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.2.6.6 Records
The periodic inspection and testing body shall retain records of pressure receptacle periodic inspection and
tests (both passed and failed), including the location of the test facility, for not less than 15 years. The owner
of the pressure receptacle shall retain an identical record until the next periodic inspection and test unless
the pressure receptacle is permanently removed from service.
6.2.2.7 Marking of refillable UN pressure receptacles
Note: Marking requirements for UN metal hydride storage systems are given in 6.2.2.9, marking requirements
for UN bundles of cylinders are given in 6.2.2.10 and marking requirements for closures are given in 6.2.2.11.
6.2.2.7.1 Refillable UN pressure receptacle shells and closed cryogenic receptacles shall be marked clearly and
legibly with certification, operational and manufacturing marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed
(e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched). The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the pressure
receptacle shell or on a permanently affixed component of the pressure receptacle (e.g. welded collar or
corrosion-resistant plate welded on the outer jacket of a closed cryogenic receptacle). Except for the UN
packaging symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter
greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm. The
minimum size of the UN packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter greater
than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter less than 140 mm.
6.2.2.7.2 The following certification marks shall be applied:
(a) The UN packaging symbol:
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk
container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6.1, 6.2, 6.3,
6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9.
(b) The technical standard (e.g. ISO 9809-1) used for design, construction and testing.
Note: For acetylene cylinders, the standard ISO 3807 shall also be marked.
(c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic.
Note: For the purpose of this mark the country of approval means the country of the competent authority
that authorized the initial inspection and test of the individual receptacle at the time of manufacture.
(d) The identity mark or stamp of the inspection body that is registered with the competent authority of the
country authorizing the marking.
(e) The date of the initial inspection, the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a
slash (i.e. “/” ).
Note: When an acetylene cylinder is conformity assessed in accordance with 6.2.1.4.4.2 and the inspection
bodies for the cylinder shell and the acetylene cylinder are different, their respective marks (d) are required.
Only the initial inspection date (e) of the completed acetylene cylinder is required. If the country of approval of
the inspection body responsible for the initial inspection and test is different, a second mark (c) shall be applied.
6.2.2.7.3 The following operational marks shall be applied:
(f) The test pressure in bar, preceded by the letters “PH” and followed by the letters “BAR”.
(g) The mass of the empty pressure receptacle including all permanently attached integral parts (e.g. neck
ring, foot ring, etc.) in kilograms, followed by the letters “KG”. This mass shall not include the mass of
closure(s), valve protection cap or valve guard, any coating, or porous mass for acetylene. The mass shall
be expressed to three significant figures rounded up to the last digit. For cylinders of less than 1 kg, the
mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded up to the last digit. In the case of pressure
receptacles for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, at least one decimal
shall be shown after the decimal point and two digits for pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg.
(h) The minimum guaranteed wall thickness of the pressure receptacle in millimetres followed by the letters
“MM”. This mark is not required for pressure receptacles with a water capacity less than or equal to 1 L
or for composite cylinders or for closed cryogenic receptacles.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(i) In the case of pressure receptacles for compressed gases, UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374
acetylene, solvent free, the working pressure in bar, preceded by the letters “PW”. In the case of closed
cryogenic receptacles, the maximum allowable working pressure preceded by the letters “MAWP”.
Note: When a cylinder shell is intended for use as an acetylene cylinder (including the porous material),
the working pressure mark is not required until the acetylene cylinder is completed.
(j) In the case of pressure receptacles for liquefied gases, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases,
the water capacity in litres expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit, followed
by the letter “L”. If the value of the minimum or nominal water capacity is an integer, the digits after the
decimal point may be neglected.
(k) In the case of cylinders for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved:
(i) the tare in kilograms consisting of the total of the mass of the empty cylinder shell, the service
equipment (including porous material) not removed during filling, any coating, the solvent and the
saturation gas expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the
letters “KG”. At least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point. For pressure receptacles of
less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit;
(ii) the identity of the porous material (e.g. name or trademark); and
(iii) the total mass of the filled acetylene cylinder in kilograms followed by the letters “KG”.
(l) In the case of cylinders for UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free:
(i) the tare in kilograms consisting of the total of the mass of the empty cylinder shell, the service
equipment (including porous material) not removed during filling and any coating expressed to three
significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters “KG”. At least one decimal
shall be shown after the decimal point. For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be
expressed to two significant figures rounded down to the last digit;
(ii) the identity of the porous material (e.g.: name or trademark); and
(iii) the total mass of the filled acetylene cylinder in kilograms followed by the letters “KG”.
Note: Acetylene cylinders constructed in accordance with the IMDG Code Amendment 40-20 which are
not marked in accordance with 6.2.2.7.3 (k) or (l) applicable in the the IMDG Code Amendment 41-22,
may continue to be used until the next periodic inspection and test two years after the coming into
force of the IMDG Code Amendment 42-24 where they have to be marked according to the IMDG Code
Amendment 42-24 or be taken out of operation.
6.2.2.7.4 The following manufacturing marks shall be applied:
(m) Identification of the cylinder thread (e.g. 25E). This mark is not required for closed cryogenic receptacles.
Note: Information on marks that may be used for identifying threads for cylinders is given in ISO/TR 11364,
Gas cylinders – Compilation of national and international valve stem/gas cylinder neck threads and their
identification and marking system.
(n) The manufacturer’s mark registered by the competent authority. When the country of manufacture is not
the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be preceded by the character(s)
identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in
international road traffic. The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space
or slash.
Note: For acetylene cylinders, if the manufacturer of the acetylene cylinder and the manufacturer of
the cylinder shell are different, only the mark of the manufacturer of the completed acetylene cylinder is
required.
(o) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer.
(p) In the case of steel pressure receptacles and composite pressure receptacles with steel liner intended
for the transport of gases with a risk of hydrogen embrittlement, the letter “H” showing compatibility of
the steel (see ISO 11114-1:2020).
(q) For composite cylinders and tubes having a limited design life, the letters “FINAL” followed by the design
life shown as the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. “/”).
(r) For composite cylinders and tubes having a limited design life greater than 15 years and for composite
cylinders and tubes having non-limited design life, the letters “SERVICE” followed by the date 15 years
from the date of manufacture (initial inspection) shown as the year (four digits) followed by the month (two
digits) separated by a slash (i.e. “/”).
Note: Once the initial design type has passed the service life test programme requirements in accordance
with 6.2.2.1.1 Note 2 or 6.2.2.1.2 Note 2, future production no longer requires this initial service life mark.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
The initial service life mark shall be made unreadable on cylinders and tubes of a design type that has
met the service life test programme requirements.
6.2.2.7.5 The above marks shall be placed in three groups.
– Manufacturing marks shall be the top grouping and shall appear consecutively in the sequence given
in 6.2.2.7.4 except for the marks described in 6.2.2.7.4 (q) and (r) which shall be adjacent to the periodic
inspection and test marks of 6.2.2.7.7.
–
The operational marks in 6.2.2.7.3 shall be the middle grouping and the test pressure (f) shall be
immediately preceded by the working pressure (i) when the latter is required.
– Certification marks shall be the bottom grouping and shall appear in the sequence given in 6.2.2.7.2.
The following is an example of marking a cylinder.
(m) (n) (o) (p)
25E D MF 765432 H
(i) (f) (g) (j) (h)
PW200 PH300BAR 62.1KG 50L 5.8MM
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
ISO 9809-1 F IB 2000/12
6.2.2.7.6 Other marks are allowed in areas other than the side wall, provided they are made in low-stress areas and
are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. In the case of closed cryogenic
receptacles, such marks may be on a separate plate attached to the outer jacket. Such marks shall not
conflict with required marks.
6.2.2.7.7 In addition to the preceding marks, each refillable pressure receptacle that meets the periodic and test
requirements of 6.2.2.4 shall be marked in sequence as follows:
(a) the character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test,
as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic. This mark is not
required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture;
(b) the registered mark of the body authorized by the competent authority for performing periodic inspection
and test;
(c) the date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits)
separated by a slash (i.e. “/”). Four digits may be used to indicate the year.
6.2.2.7.8 The marks in accordance with 6.2.2.7.7 may be engraved on a metallic ring affixed to the cylinder or pressure
drum when the valve is installed, and which is removable only by disconnecting the valve from the cylinder or
pressure drum.
6.2.2.8 Marking of non-refillable UN cylinders
6.2.2.8.1 Non-refillable UN cylinders shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification and gas or cylinder specific
marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stencilled, stamped, engraved, or etched) on the
cylinder. Except when stencilled, the marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the cylinder shell or on
a permanently affixed component of the cylinder (e.g. welded collar). Except for the “UN” mark and the “DO
NOT REFILL” mark, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for cylinders with a diameter greater than or
equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for cylinders with a diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the “UN”
mark shall be 10 mm for cylinders with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for cylinders
with a diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the “DO NOT REFILL” mark shall be 5 mm.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.2.8.2 The marks listed in 6.2.2.7.2 to 6.2.2.7.4 shall be applied with the exception of (g), (h) and (m). The serial
number (o) may be replaced by the batch number. In addition, the words “DO NOT REFILL” in letters of at least
5 mm in height are required.
6.2.2.8.3 The requirements of 6.2.2.7.5 shall apply.
Note: Non-refillable cylinders may, on account of their size, substitute a label for these permanent marks.
6.2.2.8.4 Other marks are allowed provided they are made in low-stress areas other than the side wall and are not of
a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks shall not conflict with required
marks.
6.2.2.9 Marking of UN metal hydride storage systems
6.2.2.9.1 UN metal hydride storage systems shall be marked clearly and legibly with the marks listed below. These
marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched) on the metal hydride storage system.
The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the metal hydride storage system or on a permanently
affixed component of the metal hydride storage system. Except for the United Nations packaging symbol, the
minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension
greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall
dimension less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the United Nations packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for
metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm
for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall dimension less than 140 mm.
6.2.2.9.2 The following marks shall be applied:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol:
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk
container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6.1, 6.2, 6.3,
6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9.
(b) “ISO 16111” (the technical standard used for design, manufacture and testing).
(c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic.
Note: For the purpose of this mark the country of approval means the country of the competent authority
that authorized the initial inspection and test of the individual system at the time of manufacture.
(d) The identity mark or stamp of the inspection body that is registered with the competent authority of the
country authorizing the marking.
(e) The date of the initial inspection, the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a
slash (i.e. “/”).
(f) The test pressure of the receptacle in bar, preceded by the letters “PH” and followed by the letters
“BAR”.
(g) The rated charging pressure of the metal hydride storage system in bar, preceded by the letters “RCP”
and followed by the letters “BAR”.
(h) The manufacturer’s mark registered by the competent authority. When the country of manufacture is not
the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be preceded by the character(s)
identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international
road traffic. The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash.
(i) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer.
(j) In the case of steel receptacles and composite receptacles with steel liner, the letter “H” showing
compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1:2020).
(k) In the case of metal hydride storage systems having limited life, the date of expiry, denoted by the letters
“FINAL” followed by the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. “/”).
The certification marks specified in (a) to (e) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given. The
test pressure (f) shall be immediately preceded by the rated charging pressure (g). The manufacturing marks
specified in (h) to (k) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given.
6.2.2.9.3 Other marks are allowed in areas other than the side wall, provided they are made in low stress areas and
are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks shall not conflict with
required marks.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.2.9.4 In addition to the preceding marks, each metal hydride storage system that meets the periodic and test
requirements of 6.2.2.4 shall be marked indicating:
(a) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection and test,
as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic. This mark is not
required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving manufacture;
(b) The registered mark of the body authorized by the competent authority for performing periodic inspection
and test;
(c) The date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two digits)
separated by a slash (i.e. “/” ). Four digits may be used to indicate the year.
The above marks shall appear consecutively in the sequence given.
6.2.2.10 Marking of UN bundles of cylinders
6.2.2.10.1 Individual cylinder shells in a bundle of cylinders shall be marked in accordance with 6.2.2.7. Individual
closures in a bundle of cylinders shall be marked in accordance with 6.2.2.11.
6.2.2.10.2 Refillable UN bundles of cylinders shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification, operational, and
manufacturing marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched) on a
plate permanently attached to the frame of the bundle of cylinders. Except for the UN packaging symbol, the
minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm. The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol shall be 10 mm.
6.2.2.10.3 The following marks shall be applied:
(a) The certification marks specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e).
(b) The operational marks specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (f), (i), (j) and the total of the mass of the frame of the bundle
and all permanently attached parts (cylinder shells and service equipment). Bundles intended for the
carriage of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free shall bear the tare as
specified in clause B.4.2 of ISO 10961:2010.
(c) The manufacturing marks specified in 6.2.2.7.4 (n), (o) and, where applicable, (p).
6.2.2.10.4 The marks shall be placed in three groups:
(a) The manufacturing marks shall be the top grouping and shall appear consecutively in the sequence given
in 6.2.2.10.3 (c).
(b) The operational marks in 6.2.2.10.3 (b) shall be the middle grouping and the operational mark specified
in 6.2.2.7.3 (f) shall be immediately preceded by the operational mark specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (i) when the
latter is required.
(c) Certification marks shall be the bottom grouping and shall appear in the sequence given in 6.2.2.10.3 (a).
6.2.2.11 Marking of closures for refillable UN pressure receptacles
For closures the following permanent marks shall be applied clearly and legibly (e.g. stamped, engraved or
etched):
.1 manufacturer’s identification mark;
.2 design standard or design standard designation;
.3 date of manufacture (year and month or year and week); and
.4 the identity mark of the inspection body responsible for the initial inspection and test, if applicable.
The valve test pressure shall be marked when it is less than the test pressure which is indicated by the rating
of the valve filling connection.
Note: Closures of refillable pressure receptacles manufactured before 1 January 2027 in accordance with
the requirements applicable in the IMDG Code Amendment 40-20 which are not marked in accordance with
the requirements of 6.2.2.11 applicable in the IMDG Code Amendment 41-22 may continue to be used.
6.2.3 Provisions for non-UN pressure receptacles
6.2.3.1 Pressure receptacles not designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved according to 6.2.2 shall be
designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved in accordance with a technical code recognized by
the competent authority and the general provisions of 6.2.1.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.2.3.2 Pressure receptacles designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved under the provisions of this
section shall not be marked with the UN packaging symbol.
6.2.3.3 For metallic cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles, the
construction shall be such that the minimum burst ratio (burst pressure divided by test pressure) is:
1.50 for refillable pressure receptacles;
2.00 for non-refillable pressure receptacles.
6.2.3.4 Marking shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority of the country of use.
6.2.3.5 Salvage pressure receptacles
Note: These provisions of 6.2.3.5 for salvage pressure receptacles may be applied for new salvage pressure
receptacles as from 1 January 2013, unless otherwise authorized, and shall be applied for all new salvage
pressure receptacles as from 1 January 2014. Salvage pressure receptacles approved in accordance with
national regulations may be used with the approval of the competent authorities of the countries of use.
6.2.3.5.1 To permit the safe handling and disposal of the pressure receptacles transported within the salvage pressure
receptacle, the design may include equipment not otherwise used for cylinders or pressure drums such as
flat heads, quick opening devices and openings in the cylindrical part.
6.2.3.5.2 Instructions on the safe handling and use of the salvage pressure receptacle shall be clearly shown in the
documentation for the application to the competent authority and shall form part of the approval certificate.
In the approval certificate, the pressure receptacles authorized to be transported in a salvage pressure
receptacle shall be indicated. A list of the materials of construction of all parts likely to be in contact with the
dangerous goods shall also be included.
6.2.3.5.3 A copy of the approval certificate shall be delivered by the manufacturer to the owner of a salvage pressure
receptacle.
6.2.3.5.4 The marking of salvage pressure receptacles according to 6.2.3 shall be determined by the competent
authority in taking into account suitable marking provisions of 6.2.2.7 as appropriate. The marking shall
include the water capacity and test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle.
6.2.4 Provisions for aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas
(gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas
6.2.4.1 The internal pressure of aerosol dispensers at 50°C shall not exceed 1.2 MPa (12 bar) when using flammable
liquefied gases, 1.32 MPa (13.2 bar) when using non-flammable liquefied gases, and 1.5 MPa (15 bar) when
using non-flammable compressed or dissolved gases. In case of a mixture of several gases, the stricter limit
shall apply.
6.2.4.2 Each filled aerosol dispenser or gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test in a hot water
bath in accordance with 6.2.4.2.1 or an approved water bath alternative in accordance with 6.2.4.2.2.
6.2.4.2.1 Hot water bath test
6.2.4.2.1.1 The temperature of the water bath and the duration of the test shall be such that the internal pressure reaches
that which would be reached at 55°C (50°C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the
aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge at 50°C). If the contents are sensitive to heat or if the
aerosol dispensers, gas cartridges or fuel cell cartridges are made of plastics material which softens at this
test temperature, the temperature of the bath shall be set at between 20°C and 30°C but, in addition, one
aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge in 2,000 shall be tested at the higher temperature.
6.2.4.2.1.2 No leakage or permanent deformation of an aerosol dispenser, receptacle or fuel cell cartridge may occur,
except that a plastic aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge may be deformed through softening
provided that it does not leak.
6.2.4.2.2 Alternative methods
With the approval of the competent authority, alternative methods which provide an equivalent level of safety
may be used provided that the requirements of 6.2.4.2.2.1 and, as appropriate, 6.2.4.2.2.2 or 6.2.4.2.2.3 are
met.
6.2.4.2.2.1 Quality system
Aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge fillers and component manufacturers shall have a
quality system. The quality system shall implement procedures to ensure that all aerosol dispensers, gas
cartridges or fuel cell cartridges that leak or that are deformed are rejected and not offered for transport.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
The quality system shall include:
(a) a description of the organizational structure and responsibilities;
(b) the relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions
that will be used;
(c) quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates;
(d) management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system;
(e) a process for control of documents and their revision;
(f) a means for control of non-conforming aerosol dispensers, gas cartridges or fuel cell cartridges;
(g) training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel; and
(h) procedures to ensure that there is no damage to the final product.
An initial audit and periodic audits shall be conducted to the satisfaction of the competent authority. These
audits shall ensure the approved system is and remains adequate and efficient. Any proposed changes to the
approved system shall be notified to the competent authority in advance.
6.2.4.2.2.2 Aerosol dispensers
6.2.4.2.2.2.1 Pressure and leak testing of aerosol dispensers before filling
Each empty aerosol dispenser shall be subjected to a pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum expected
in the filled aerosol dispensers at 55°C (50°C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the
receptacle at 50°C). This shall be at least two-thirds of the design pressure of the aerosol dispenser. If any
aerosol dispenser shows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or greater than 3.3 × 10-2 mbar·L·s-1 at the
test pressure, distortion or other defect, it shall be rejected.
6.2.4.2.2.2.2 Testing of the aerosol dispensers after filling
Prior to filling, the filler shall ensure that the crimping equipment is set appropriately and the specified
propellant is used.
Each filled aerosol dispenser shall be weighed and leak tested. The leak detection equipment shall be
sufficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of 2.0 × 10-3 mbar·L·s-1 at 20°C.
Any filled aerosol dispenser which shows evidence of leakage, deformation or excessive mass shall be
rejected.
6.2.4.2.2.3 Gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges
6.2.4.2.2.3.1 Pressure testing of gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges
Each gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test pressure equal to or in excess of the
maximum expected in the filled receptacle at 55°C (50°C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the
capacity of the receptacle at 50°C). This test pressure shall be that specified for the gas cartridge or fuel
cell cartridge and shall not be less than two thirds the design pressure of the gas cartridge or fuel cell
cartridge. If any gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or greater
than 3.3 × 10-2 mbar·L·s-1 at the test pressure or distortion or any other defect, it shall be rejected.
6.2.4.2.2.3.2 Leak testing gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges
Prior to filling and sealing, the filler shall ensure that the closures (if any), and the associated sealing equipment
are closed appropriately and the specified gas is used.
Each filled gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be checked for the correct mass of gas and shall
be leak tested. The leak detection equipment shall be sufficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate
of 2.0 × 10-3 mbar·L·s-1 at 20°C.
Any gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge that has gas masses not in conformity with the declared mass limits
or shows evidence of leakage or deformation, shall be rejected.
6.2.4.2.3 With the approval of the competent authority, aerosols and receptacles, small, are not subject to 6.2.4.2.1 and
6.2.4.2.2, if they are required to be sterile but may be adversely affected by water bath testing, provided:
(a) They contain a non-flammable gas and either
(i) contain other substances that are constituent parts of pharmaceutical products for medical,
veterinary or similar purposes;
(ii) contain other substances used in the production process for pharmaceutical products; or
(iii) are used in medical, veterinary or similar applications;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(b) An equivalent level of safety is achieved by the manufacturer’s use of alternative methods for leak
detection and pressure resistance, such as helium detection and water bathing a statistical sample of at
least 1 in 2,000 from each production batch; and
(c) For pharmaceutical products according to (a)(i) and (iii) above, they are manufactured under the authority
of a national health administration. If required by the competent authority, the principles of Good
Manufacturing Practice (GMP) established by the World Health Organization (WHO) shall be followed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.3
Provisions for the construction and testing of packagings
for class 6.2 infectious substances of category A
(UN 2814 and UN 2900)
6.3.1 General
6.3.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to packagings intended for the transport of infectious substances of
category A, UN 2814 and UN 2900.
6.3.2 Provisions for packagings
6.3.2.1 The provisions for packagings in this section are based on packagings, as specified in 6.1.4, currently used. In
order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings
having specifications different from those in this chapter provided that they are equally effective, acceptable
to the competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the provisions described in 6.3.5. Methods of testing
other than those described in the provisions of this Code are acceptable provided they are equivalent.
6.3.2.2 Packagings shall be manufactured and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the
competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the provisions of this chapter.
Note: ISO 16106:2020, Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate
bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001, provides acceptable
guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.3.2.3 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to
be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any
other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the
applicable performance tests of this chapter.
6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings
6.3.3.1 The codes for designating types of packagings are set out in 6.1.2.7.
6.3.3.2 The letters “U” or “W” may follow the packaging code. The letter “U” signifies a special packaging conforming
to the provisions of 6.3.5.1.6. The letter “W” signifies that the packaging, although of the same type as indicated
by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from that in 6.1.4 and is considered equivalent under
the provisions of 6.3.2.1.
6.3.4 Marking
Note 1: The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them correspond to a successfully tested design
type and that it complies with the provisions of this chapter which are related to the manufacture, but not to
the use, of the packaging.
Note 2: The marks are intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners, packaging
users, carriers and regulatory authorities.
Note 3: The marks do not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to be taken
further into account, e.g. by reference to a test certificate, to test reports or to a register of successfully tested
packagings.
6.3.4.1 Each packaging intended for use according to the provisions of this Code shall bear marks which are durable,
legible and placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages
with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the marks or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a side of the
packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings of 30 L capacity
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and except for packagings of
5 L capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an appropriate size.
6.3.4.2 A packaging that meets the provisions of this section and of 6.3.5 shall be marked with:
(a) the United Nations packaging symbol:
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk
container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6.1, 6.2, 6.3,
6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9;
(b) the code designating the type of packaging according to the provisions of 6.1.2;
(c) the text “CLASS 6.2”;
(d) the last two digits of the year of manufacture of the packaging;
(e) the State authorizing the allocation of the mark, the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international
road traffic;
(f) the name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent
authority; and
(g) for packagings meeting the provisions of 6.3.5.1.6, the letter “U” shall be inserted immediately following
the mark required in (b) above.
6.3.4.3 Marks shall be applied in the sequence shown in 6.3.4.2 (a) to (g); each mark required in these subparagraphs
shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For examples, see 6.3.4.4.
Any additional markings authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the marks required in 6.3.4.1
to be correctly identified.
6.3.4.4 Example of marking
4G/CLASS 6.2/06 as in 6.3.4.2 (a), (b), (c) and (d)
S/SP-9989-ERIKSSON as in 6.3.4.2 (e) and (f)
6.3.5 Test provisions for packagings
6.3.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests
6.3.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in this section in accordance with procedures
established by the competent authority.
6.3.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used.
A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and
packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which differ from the design
type only in their lesser design height.
6.3.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority.
6.3.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction
of a packaging.
6.3.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects from
a tested type, such as smaller sizes or lower net mass of primary receptacles; and packagings such as drums
and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s).
6.3.5.1.6 Primary receptacles of any type may be assembled within a secondary packaging and transported without
testing in the rigid outer packaging under the following conditions:
.1 the rigid outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.3.5.2.2 with fragile
(such as glass) primary receptacles;
.2 the total combined gross mass of primary receptacles shall not exceed one half of the gross mass of
primary receptacles used for the drop test in .1 above;
.3 the thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles and between primary receptacles and the
outside of the secondary packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
originally tested packaging; and if a single primary receptacle was used in the original test, the thickness
of cushioning between primary receptacles shall not be less than the thickness of cushioning between
the outside of the secondary packaging and the primary receptacle in the original test. When either fewer
or smaller primary receptacles are used (as compared to the primary receptacles used in the drop test),
sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up the void spaces;
.4 the rigid outer packaging shall have successfully passed the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty. The
total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of packagings used in the drop
test in .1 above;
.5 for primary receptacles containing liquids, an adequate quantity of absorbent material to absorb the
entire liquid content of the primary receptacles shall be present;
.6 if the rigid outer packaging is intended to contain primary receptacles for liquids and is not leakproof,
or is intended to contain primary receptacles for solids and is not sift-proof, a means of containing any
liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner, plastics
bag or other equally effective means of containment; and
.7 in addition to the marks prescribed in 6.3.4.2 (a) to (f), packagings shall be marked in accordance with
6.3.4.2(g).
6.3.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially
produced packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests.
6.3.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority,
several tests may be made on one sample.
6.3.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing
6.3.5.2.1 Samples of each packaging shall be prepared as for transport except that a liquid or solid infectious substance
shall be replaced by water or, where conditioning at -18°C is specified, by water containing antifreeze. Each
primary receptacle shall be filled to not less than 98% of its capacity.
Note: The term “water” includes water/antifreeze solution with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for testing
at -18°C.
6.3.5.2.2 Tests and number of samples required
Tests required for packaging types
a
Type of packaging Tests required
Rigid outer Primary Water Cold Drop Additional Puncture Stack
packaging receptacle spray conditioning 6.3.5.3 drop 6.3.5.4 6.1.5.6
6.3.5.3.5.1 6.3.5.3.5.2 6.3.5.3.5.3
Plastics Other Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of
samples samples samples samples samples samples
Fibreboard box x 5 5 10 Required 2 Required
on one on three
x 5 0 5 2
sample samples
Fibreboard drum x 3 3 6 when the 2 when
packaging testing a
x 3 0 3 is intended 2 “U”-marked
Plastics box x 0 5 5 to contain 2 packaging
dry ice. as defined
x 0 5 5 2 in 6.3.5.1.6
for specific
Plastics drum/ x 0 3 3 2 provisions.
jerrican
x 0 3 3 2
Boxes of other x 0 5 5 2
material
x 0 0 5 2
Drums/jerricans x 0 3 3 2
of other material
x 0 0 3 2
“Type of packaging” categorizes packagings for test purposes according to the kind of packaging and its material
characteristics.
Note 1: In instances where a primary receptacle is made of two or more materials, the material most liable to
damage determines the appropriate test.
Note 2: The materials of the secondary packagings are not taken into consideration when selecting the test
or conditioning for the test.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Explanation for use of the table:
If the packaging to be tested consists of a fibreboard outer box with a plastics primary receptacle, five
samples must undergo the water spray test (see 6.3.5.3.5.1) prior to dropping and another five must be
conditioned to -18°C (see 6.3.5.3.5.2) prior to dropping. If the packaging is to contain dry ice then one further
single sample shall be dropped in accordance with 6.3.5.3.5.3.
Packagings prepared as for transport shall be subjected to the tests in 6.3.5.3 and 6.3.5.4. For outer
packagings, the headings in the table relate to fibreboard or similar materials whose performance may be
rapidly affected by moisture; plastics which may embrittle at low temperature; and other materials such as
metal whose performance is not affected by moisture or temperature.
6.3.5.3 Drop test
6.3.5.3.1 Drop height and target
Samples shall be subjected to free-fall drops from a height of 9 m onto a non‑resilient, horizontal, flat, massive
and rigid surface in conformity with 6.1.5.3.4.
6.3.5.3.2 Number of test samples and drop orientation
6.3.5.3.2.1 Where the samples are in the shape of a box, five shall be dropped, one in each of the following orientations:
.1 flat on the base;
.2 flat on the top;
.3 flat on the longest side;
.4 flat on the shortest side; and
.5 on a corner.
6.3.5.3.2.2 Where the samples are in the shape of a drum or a jerrican, three shall be dropped, one in each of the
following orientations:
.1 diagonally on the top edge, with the centre of gravity directly above the point of impact;
.2 diagonally on the base edge; and
.3 flat on the body or side.
6.3.5.3.3 While the sample shall be released in the required orientation, it is accepted that, for aerodynamic reasons,
the impact may not take place in that orientation.
6.3.5.3.4 Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s), which
shall remain protected by cushioning/absorbent material in the secondary packaging.
6.3.5.3.5 Special preparation of test sample for the drop test
6.3.5.3.5.1 Fibreboard – Water spray test
Fibreboard outer packagings: The sample shall be subjected to a water spray that simulates exposure to
rainfall of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour. It shall then be subjected to the test described
in 6.3.5.3.1.
6.3.5.3.5.2 Plastics material – Cold conditioning
Plastics primary receptacles or outer packagings: The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall
be reduced to -18°C or lower for a period of at least 24 h and within 15 min of removal from that atmosphere
the test sample shall be subjected to the test described in 6.3.5.3.1. Where the sample contains dry ice, the
conditioning period shall be reduced to 4 hours.
6.3.5.3.5.3 Packagings intended to contain dry ice – Additional drop test
Where the packaging is intended to contain dry ice, a test additional to that specified in 6.3.5.3.1 and, when
appropriate, in 6.3.5.3.5.1 or 6.3.5.3.5.2 shall be carried out. One sample shall be stored so that all the dry
ice dissipates and then that sample shall be dropped in one of the orientations described in 6.3.5.3.2.1 or in
6.3.5.3.2.2, as appropriate; which shall be that most likely to result in failure of the packaging.
6.3.5.4 Puncture test
6.3.5.4.1 Packagings with a gross mass of 7 kg or less
Samples shall be placed on a level hard surface. A cylindrical steel rod with a mass of at least 7 kg, a diameter
of 38 mm and the impact end edges having a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see below) shall be dropped in a
vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the impact end to the impact surface of a sample. One
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
sample shall be placed on its base. A second sample shall be placed in an orientation perpendicular to that
used for the first. In each instance, the steel rod shall be aimed to impact the primary receptacle. Following
each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from
the primary receptacle(s).
6.3.5.4.2 Packagings with a gross mass exceeding 7 kg
Samples shall be dropped on to the end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod shall be set vertically in a level hard
surface. It shall have a diameter of 38 mm and the edges of the upper end a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see
below). The rod shall protrude from the surface a distance at least equal to that between the centre of the
primary receptacle(s) and the outer surface of the outer packaging with a minimum of 200 mm. One sample
shall be dropped with its top face lowermost in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the
top of the steel rod. A second sample shall be dropped from the same height in an orientation perpendicular
to that used for the first. In each instance, the packaging shall be so orientated that the steel rod would
be capable of penetrating the primary receptacle(s). Following each impact, penetration of the secondary
packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s).
38 mm
Radius ≤ 6 mm
6.3.5.5 Test report
6.3.5.5.1 A written test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to
the users of the packaging:
.1 Name and address of the test facility;
.2 Name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
.3 A unique test report identification;
.4 Date of the test and of the report;
.5 Manufacturer of the packaging;
.6 Description of the packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.), including
method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s);
.7 Maximum capacity;
.8 Test contents;
.9 Test descriptions and results;
.10 The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.
6.3.5.5.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for transport was tested in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods
or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.4
Provisions for the construction, testing and approval
of packages for radioactive material and for the approval
of such material
Note: This chapter includes provisions which apply to the construction, testing and approval of certain packages and
material only when transported by air. Whilst these provisions do not apply to packages/material transported
by sea, the provisions are reproduced for information/identification purposes, since such packages/material,
designed, tested and approved for air transport, may also be transported by sea.
6.4.1 [Reserved]
6.4.2 General provisions
6.4.2.1 The package shall be so designed in relation to its mass, volume and shape that it can be easily and safely
transported. In addition, the package shall be so designed that it can be properly secured in or on the
conveyance during transport.
6.4.2.2 The design shall be such that any lifting attachments on the package will not fail when used in the intended
manner and that, if failure of the attachments shall occur, the ability of the package to meet other provisions of
this Code would not be impaired. The design shall take account of appropriate safety factors to cover snatch
lifting.
6.4.2.3 Attachments and any other features on the outer surface of the package which could be used to lift it shall
be designed either to support its mass in accordance with the provisions of 6.4.2.2 or shall be removable or
otherwise rendered incapable of being used during transport.
6.4.2.4 As far as practicable, the packaging shall be so designed that the external surfaces are free from protruding
features and can be easily decontaminated.
6.4.2.5 As far as practicable, the outer layer of the package shall be so designed as to prevent the collection and the
retention of water.
6.4.2.6 Any features added to the package at the time of transport which are not part of the package shall not reduce
its safety.
6.4.2.7 The package shall be capable of withstanding the effects of any acceleration, vibration or vibration resonance
which may arise under routine conditions of transport without any deterioration in the effectiveness of the
closing devices on the various receptacles or in the integrity of the package as a whole. In particular, nuts,
bolts and other securing devices shall be so designed as to prevent them from becoming loose or being
released unintentionally, even after repeated use.
6.4.2.8 The design of the package shall take into account ageing mechanisms.
6.4.2.9 The materials of the packaging and any components or structures shall be physically and chemically
compatible with each other and with the radioactive contents. Account shall be taken of their behaviour under
irradiation.
6.4.2.10 All valves through which the radioactive contents could escape shall be protected against unauthorized
operation.
6.4.2.11 The design of the package shall take into account ambient temperatures and pressures that are likely to be
encountered in routine conditions of transport.
6.4.2.12 A package shall be so designed that it provides sufficient shielding to ensure that, under routine conditions
of transport and with the maximum radioactive contents that the package is designed to contain, the dose
rate at any point on the external surface of the package would not exceed the values specified in 2.7.2.4.1.2,
4.1.9.1.11 and 4.1.9.1.12, as applicable, with account taken of 7.1.4.5.3.3 and 7.1.4.5.5.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.2.13 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties, the package design shall take into account those
properties; see 4.1.9.1.5, 2.0.3.1 and 2.0.3.2.
6.4.2.14 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to
be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any
other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the
applicable performance tests of this chapter.
6.4.3 Additional provisions for packages transported by air
6.4.3.1 For packages to be transported by air, the temperature of the accessible surfaces shall not exceed 50°C at
an ambient temperature of 38°C with no account taken for insolation.
6.4.3.2 Packages to be transported by air shall be so designed that, if they were exposed to ambient temperatures
ranging from -40°C to +55°C, the integrity of containment would not be impaired.
6.4.3.3 Packages containing radioactive material, to be transported by air, shall be capable of withstanding, without
loss or dispersal of radioactive contents from the containment system, an internal pressure which produces
a pressure differential of not less than maximum normal operating pressure plus 95 kPa.
6.4.4 Provisions for excepted packages
An excepted package shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2.1 to 6.4.2.12 and, in
addition, the requirements of 6.4.7.2 if it contains fissile material allowed by one of the provisions of
sub-paragraphs .1 to .6 of 2.7.2.3.5, and the requirements of 6.4.3 if transported by air.
6.4.5 Provisions for industrial packages
6.4.5.1 A Type IP-1 package shall be designed to meet the provisions specified in 6.4.2 and 6.4.7.2, and, in addition,
shall meet the provisions of 6.4.3 if carried by air.
6.4.5.2 A package, to be qualified as a Type IP-2 package, shall be designed to meet the provisions for Type IP-1 as
specified in 6.4.5.1 and, in addition, if it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.4 and 6.4.15.5, it would
prevent:
.1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents, and
.2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package.
6.4.5.3 A package, to be qualified as a Type IP-3 package, shall be designed to meet the provisions for Type IP-1 as
specified in 6.4.5.1 and, in addition, the provisions specified in 6.4.7.2–6.4.7.15.
6.4.5.4 Alternative provisions for Type IP-2 and Type IP-3 packages
6.4.5.4.1 Packages may be used as Type IP-2 package provided that:
.1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 specified in 6.4.5.1;
.2 they are designed to satisfy the provisions for packing group I or II in chapter 6.1 of this Code; and
.3 when subjected to the tests for UN packing group I or II in chapter 6.1, they would prevent:
(i) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(ii) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package.
6.4.5.4.2 Portable tanks may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages provided that:
.1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 specified in 6.4.5.1;
.2 they are designed to satisfy the provisions of chapter 6.7 of this Code, and are capable of withstanding
a test pressure of 265 kPa; and
.3 they are designed so that any shielding which is provided shall be capable of withstanding the static and
dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of transport and of preventing more
than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the portable tanks.
6.4.5.4.3 Tanks, other than portable tanks, may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages for transporting LSA-I
and LSA-II as prescribed in the table under 4.1.9.2.5, provided that:
.1 they satisfy the provisions of 6.4.5.1;
.2 they are designed to satisfy the provisions prescribed in regional or national regulations for the transport
of dangerous goods and are capable of withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa; and
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.3 they are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided shall be capable of withstanding the
static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of transport and of preventing
more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the tanks.
6.4.5.4.4 Freight containers with the characteristics of a permanent enclosure may also be used as Type IP-2 or
Type IP-3 packages provided that:
.1 the radioactive contents are restricted to solid materials;
.2 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 specified in 6.4.5.1; and
.3 they are designed to conform to the standards prescribed in ISO 1496-1:1990(E), Series 1 Freight
Containers – Specifications and Testing – Part 1: General Cargo Containers, and subsequent amendments
1:1993, 2:1998, 3:2005, 4:2006 and 5:2006, excluding dimensions and ratings. They shall be designed
such that, if subjected to the tests prescribed in that document and the accelerations occurring during
routine conditions of transport, they would prevent:
.1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
.2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package.
6.4.5.4.5 Metal intermediate bulk containers may also be used as Type IP-2 or Type IP-3 packages provided that:
.1 they satisfy the provisions for Type IP-1 specified in 6.4.5.1; and
.2 they are designed to satisfy the provisions of chapter 6.5 of this Code for packing group I or II, and if
they were subjected to the tests prescribed in that chapter, but with the drop test conducted in the most
damaging orientation, they would prevent:
.1 loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
.2 more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package.
6.4.6 Provisions for packages containing uranium hexafluoride
6.4.6.1 Packages designed to contain uranium hexafluoride shall meet the requirements which pertain to the
radioactive and fissile properties of the material prescribed elsewhere in this Code. Except as allowed in
6.4.6.4, uranium hexafluoride in quantities of 0.1 kg or more shall also be packaged and transported in
accordance with ISO 7195:2005, Nuclear energy – Packaging of uranium hexafluoride (UF6) for transport,
and the provisions of 6.4.6.2 to 6.4.6.3.
6.4.6.2 Each package designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall be designed so that the
package would meet the following provisions:
.1 withstand, without leakage and without unacceptable stress, as specified in ISO 7195:2005, the structural
test as specified in 6.4.21 except as allowed in 6.4.6.4;
.2 withstand, without loss or dispersal of the uranium hexafluoride, the free drop test specified in 6.4.15.4;
and
.3 withstand, without rupture of the containment system, the thermal test specified in 6.4.17.3 except as
allowed in 6.4.6.4.
6.4.6.3 Packages designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall not be provided with pressure
relief devices.
6.4.6.4 Subject to multilateral approval, packages designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride may be
transported if the packages are designed:
(a) to international or national standards other than ISO 7195:2005, provided an equivalent level of safety is
maintained;
(b) to withstand, without leakage and without unacceptable stress, a test pressure of less than 2.76 MPa as
specified in 6.4.21; and/or
(c) to contain 9000 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride and the packages do not meet the requirement of
6.4.6.2.3.
In all other respects, the provisions of 6.4.6.1 to 6.4.6.3 shall be satisfied.
6.4.7 Provisions for Type A packages
6.4.7.1 Type A packages shall be designed to meet the general provisions of 6.4.2, shall meet the provisions of 6.4.3
if carried by air, and shall meet the provisions of 6.4.7.2–6.4.7.17.
6.4.7.2 The smallest overall external dimension of the package shall not be less than 10 cm.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.7.3 The outside of the package shall incorporate a feature, such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and
which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened.
6.4.7.4 Any tie-down attachments on the package shall be so designed that, under normal and accident conditions
of transport, the forces in those attachments shall not impair the ability of the package to meet the provisions
of this Code.
6.4.7.5 The design of the package shall take into account temperatures ranging from -40°C to +70°C for the
components of the packaging. Attention shall be given to freezing temperatures for liquids and to the potential
degradation of packaging materials within the given temperature range.
6.4.7.6 The design and manufacturing techniques shall be in accordance with national or international standards, or
other provisions, acceptable to the competent authority.
6.4.7.7 The design shall include a containment system securely closed by a positive fastening device which cannot
be opened unintentionally or by a pressure which may arise within the package.
6.4.7.8 Special form radioactive material may be considered as a component of the containment system.
6.4.7.9 If the containment system forms a separate unit of the package, the containment system shall be capable of
being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other part of the packaging.
6.4.7.10 The design of any component of the containment system shall take into account, where applicable, the
radiolytic decomposition of liquids and other vulnerable materials and the generation of gas by chemical
reaction and radiolysis.
6.4.7.11 The containment system shall retain its radioactive contents under a reduction of ambient pressure to 60 kPa.
6.4.7.12 All valves, other than pressure relief valves, shall be provided with an enclosure to retain any leakage from the
valve.
6.4.7.13 A radiation shield which encloses a component of the package specified as a part of the containment system
shall be so designed as to prevent the unintentional release of that component from the shield. Where the
radiation shield and such component within it form a separate unit, the radiation shield shall be capable of
being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other packaging structure.
6.4.7.14 A package shall be so designed that, if it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15, it would prevent:
(a) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(b) more than a 20% increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package.
6.4.7.15 The design of a package intended for liquid radioactive material shall make provision for ullage to accommodate
variations in the temperature of the contents, dynamic effects and filling dynamics.
Type A packages to contain liquids
6.4.7.16 A Type A package designed to contain liquid radioactive material shall, in addition:
.1 be adequate to meet the conditions specified in 6.4.7.14(a) above if the package is subjected to the tests
specified in 6.4.16; and
.2 either
(i) be provided with sufficient absorbent material to absorb twice the volume of the liquid contents. Such
absorbent material must be suitably positioned so as to contact the liquid in the event of leakage; or
(ii) be provided with a containment system composed of primary inner and secondary outer containment
components designed to enclose the liquid contents completely and ensure their retention within the
secondary outer containment components even if the primary inner components leak.
Type A packages to contain gas
6.4.7.17 A Type A package designed for gases shall prevent loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents if the package
were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.16, except for a Type A package designed for tritium gas or for
noble gases.
6.4.8 Provisions for Type B(U) packages
6.4.8.1 Type B(U) packages shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2, the requirements specified
in 6.4.3 if carried by air, and of 6.4.7.2 to 6.4.7.15, except as specified in 6.4.7.14(a), and, in addition, the
requirements specified in 6.4.8.2 to 6.4.8.15.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.8.2 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambient conditions specified in 6.4.8.5 and 6.4.8.6, heat
generated within the package by the radioactive contents shall not, under normal conditions of transport, as
demonstrated by the tests in 6.4.15, adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to meet the
applicable provisions for containment and shielding if left unattended for a period of one week. Particular
attention shall be paid to the effects of heat, which may cause one or more of the following:
(a) alter the arrangement, the geometrical form or the physical state of the radioactive contents or, if the
radioactive material is enclosed in a can or receptacle (for example, clad fuel elements), cause the can,
receptacle or radioactive material to deform or melt;
(b) lessening of the efficiency of the packaging through differential thermal expansion or cracking or melting
of the radiation shielding material;
(c) in combination with moisture, accelerate corrosion.
6.4.8.3 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambient condition specified in 6.4.8.5 and in the absence
of insolation, the temperature of the accessible surfaces of a package shall not exceed 50°C, unless the
package is transported under exclusive use.
6.4.8.4 Except as required in 6.4.3.1 for a package transported by air, the maximum temperature of any surface
readily accessible during transport of a package under exclusive use shall not exceed 85°C in the absence
of insolation under the ambient conditions specified in 6.4.8.5. Account may be taken of barriers or screens
intended to give protection to persons without the need for the barriers or screens being subject to any test.
6.4.8.5 The ambient temperature shall be assumed to be 38°C.
6.4.8.6 The solar insolation conditions shall be assumed to be as specified in the table hereunder.
Insolation data
Case Form and location of surface Insolation for 12 hours per day (W/m2)
1 Flat surfaces transported horizontally – downward facing 0
2 Flat surfaces transported horizontally – upward facing 800
3 Surfaces transported vertically 200
4 Other downward-facing (not horizontal) surfaces 200
5 All other surfaces 400
Alternatively, a sine function may be used, with an absorption coefficient adopted and the effects of possible reflection
from neighbouring objects neglected.
6.4.8.7 A package which includes thermal protection for the purpose of satisfying the provisions of the thermal test
specified in 6.4.17.3 shall be so designed that such protection will remain effective if the package is subjected
to the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17.2(a) and (b) or 6.4.17.2(b) and (c), as appropriate. Any such protection
on the exterior of the package shall not be rendered ineffective by ripping, cutting, skidding, abrasion or
rough handling.
6.4.8.8 A package shall be so designed that, if it were subjected to:
.1 the tests specified in 6.4.15, it would restrict the loss of radioactive contents to not more than 10- 6 A2 per
hour; and
.2 the tests specified in 6.4.17.1, 6.4.17.2(b), 6.4.17.3 and 6.4.17.4 and either the test in:
(i) 6.4.17.2(c), when the package has a mass not greater than 500 kg, an overall density not greater than
1,000 kg/m3 based on the external dimensions, and radioactive contents greater than 1,000A2 not
as special form radioactive material, or
(ii) 6.4.17.2(a), for all other packages,
it would meet the following provisions:
– retain sufficient shielding to ensure that the dose rate at 1 m from the surface of the package would
not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is designed to
contain; and
– restrict the accumulated loss of radioactive contents in a period of one week to not more than 10A2
for krypton-85 and not more than A2 for all other radionuclides.
Where mixtures of different radionuclides are present, the provisions of 2.7.2.2.4–2.7.2.2.6 shall apply except
that for krypton-85 an effective A2(i) value equal to 10A2 may be used. For case .1 above, the assessment shall
take into account the external non-fixed contamination limits of 4.1.9.1.2.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.8.9 A package for radioactive contents with activity greater than 105A2 shall be so designed that, if it were
subjected to the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6.4.18, there would be no rupture of the
containment system.
6.4.8.10 Compliance with the permitted activity release limits shall depend neither upon filters nor upon a mechanical
cooling system.
6.4.8.11 A package shall not include a pressure relief system from the containment system which would allow the
release of radioactive material to the environment under the conditions of the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17.
6.4.8.12 A package shall be so designed that, if it were at the maximum normal operating pressure and it were subjected
to the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17, the level of strains in the containment system would not attain values
which would adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to meet the applicable provisions.
6.4.8.13 A package shall not have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of a gauge pressure of 700 kPa.
6.4.8.14 A package containing low dispersible radioactive material shall be so designed that any features added to the
low dispersible radioactive material that are not part of it, or any internal components of the packaging, shall
not adversely affect the performance of the low dispersible radioactive material.
6.4.8.15 A package shall be designed for an ambient temperature range from -40°C to +38°C.
6.4.9 Provisions for Type B(M) packages
6.4.9.1 Type B(M) packages shall meet the provisions for Type B(U) packages specified in 6.4.8.1, except that, for
packages to be transported solely within a specified country or solely between specified countries, conditions
other than those given in 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4 to 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 above may be assumed, with the
approval of the competent authorities of these countries. The provisions for Type B(U) packages specified in
6.4.8.4 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 shall be met as far as practicable.
6.4.9.2 Intermittent venting of Type B(M) packages may be permitted during transport, provided that the operational
controls for venting are acceptable to the relevant competent authorities.
6.4.10 Provisions for Type C packages
6.4.10.1 Type C packages shall be designed to meet the provisions specified in 6.4.2 and 6.4.3, and of 6.4.7.2 to
6.4.7.15, except as specified in 6.4.7.14, and of the provisions specified in 6.4.8.2 to 6.4.8.6, 6.4.8.10 to 6.4.8.15,
and, in addition, of 6.4.10.2–6.4.10.4.
6.4.10.2 A package shall be capable of meeting the assessment criteria prescribed for tests in 6.4.8.8.2 and 6.4.8.12
after burial in an environment defined by a thermal conductivity of 0.33 W/(m·K) and a temperature of 38°C in
the steady state. Initial conditions for the assessment shall assume that any thermal insulation of the package
remains intact, the package is at the maximum normal operating pressure and the ambient temperature is 38°C.
6.4.10.3 A package shall be so designed that, if it were at the maximum normal operating pressure and subjected to:
(a) the tests specified in 6.4.15, it would restrict the loss of radioactive contents to not more than 10- 6 A2 per
hour; and
(b) the test sequences in 6.4.20.1,
(i) it would retain sufficient shielding to ensure that the dose rate at 1 m from the surface of the package
would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is designed
to contain; and
(ii) it would restrict the accumulated loss of radioactive contents in a period of 1 week to not more than
10A2 for krypton-85 and not more than A2 for all other radionuclides.
Where mixtures of different radionuclides are present, the provisions of 2.7.2.2.4 to 2.7.2.2.6 shall apply except
that for krypton-85 an effective A2(i) value equal to 10A2 may be used. For case (a) above, the assessment
shall take into account the external contamination limits of 4.1.9.1.2.
6.4.10.4 A package shall be so designed that there will be no rupture of the containment system following performance
of the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6.4.18.
6.4.11 Provisions for packages containing fissile material
6.4.11.1 Fissile material shall be transported so as to:
(a) maintain subcriticality during routine, normal and accident conditions of transport; in particular, the
following contingencies shall be considered:
(i) water leaking into or out of packages;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(ii) the loss of efficiency of built-in neutron absorbers or moderators;
(iii) rearrangement of the contents either within the package or as a result of loss from the package;
(iv) reduction of spaces within or between packages;
(v) packages becoming immersed in water or buried in snow; and
(vi) temperature changes; and
(b) meet the provisions:
(i) of 6.4.7.2 except for unpackaged material when specifically allowed by 2.7.2.3.5.5;
(ii) prescribed elsewhere in this Code which pertain to the radioactive properties of the material;
(iii) of 6.4.7.3 unless the material is excepted by 2.7.2.3.5;
(iv) of 6.4.11.4 to 6.4.11.14, unless the material is excepted by 2.7.2.3.5, 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3.
6.4.11.2 Packages containing fissile material that meet the provisions of subparagraph (d) and one of the provisions of
(a) to (c) below are excepted from the requirements of 6.4.11.4 to 6.4.11.14.
(a) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that:
(i) the smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 10 cm;
(ii) the criticality safety index (CSI) of the package is calculated using the following formula:
(
Mass of U-235 in package (g)
CSI = 50 × 5 × ______________________
Z
Mass of other fissile nuclides in package (g)
+ ________________________________
280 )
where the values of Z are taken from table 6.4.11.2;
(iii) the CSI of any package does not exceed 10.
(b) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that:
(i) the smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 30 cm;
(ii) the package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.1 to 6.4.15.6:
– retains its fissile material contents;
– preserves the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 30 cm;
– prevents the entry of a 10 cm cube;
(iii) the CSI of the package is calculated using the following formula:
(
Mass of U-235 in package (g)
CSI = 50 × 2 × ______________________
Z
Mass of other fissile nuclides in package (g)
+ ________________________________
280 )
* Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is less than that of
Pu-240 in the package.
where the values of Z are taken from table 6.4.11.2.
(iv) the CSI of any package does not exceed 10;
(c) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that:
(i) the smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 10 cm;
(ii) the package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.1 to 6.4.15.6:
– retains its fissile material contents;
– preserves the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 10 cm;
– prevents the entry of a 10 cm cube.
(iii) the CSI of the package is calculated using the following formula:
(
Mass of U-235 in package (g) Mass
CSI = 50 × 2 × ______________________
of other fissile nuclides in package (g)
+ ________________________________
450
280 )
* Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is less than that of
Pu-240 in the package.
(iv) The total mass of fissile nuclides in any package does not exceed 15 g;
(d) The total mass of beryllium, hydrogenous material enriched in deuterium, graphite and other allotropic
forms of carbon in an individual package shall not be greater than the mass of fissile nuclides in the
package except where the total concentration of these materials does not exceed 1 g in any 1,000 g of
material. Beryllium incorporated in copper alloys up to 4% in weight of the alloy does not need to be
considered.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Table 6.4.11.2 – Values of Z for calculation of criticality safety index in accordance with 6.4.11.2
Enrichmenta Z
Uranium enriched up to 1.5% 2,200
Uranium enriched up to 5% 850
Uranium enriched up to 10% 660
Uranium enriched up to 20% 580
Uranium enriched up to 100% 450
a
If a package contains uranium with varying enrichments of U-235, then the value corresponding to the
highest enrichment shall be used for Z.
6.4.11.3 Packages containing not more than 1,000 g of plutonium are excepted from the application of 6.4.11.4 to
6.4.11.14 provided that:
(a) not more than 20% of the plutonium by mass is fissile nuclides;
(b) the criticality safety index of the package is calculated using the following formula:
mass of plutonium (g)
CSI = 50 × 2 × ________________
1,000
(c) if uranium is present with the plutonium, the mass of uranium shall be no more than 1% of the mass of
the plutonium.
6.4.11.4 Where the chemical or physical form, isotopic composition, mass or concentration, moderation ratio or
density, or geometric configuration is not known, the assessments of 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be performed
assuming that each parameter that is not known has the value which gives the maximum neutron multiplication
consistent with the known conditions and parameters in these assessments.
6.4.11.5 For irradiated nuclear fuel, the assessments of 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be based on an isotopic composition
demonstrated to provide either:
(a) the maximum neutron multiplication during the irradiation history; or
(b) a conservative estimate of the neutron multiplication for the package assessments. After irradiation,
but prior to shipment, a measurement shall be performed to confirm the conservatism of the isotopic
composition.
6.4.11.6 The package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15, shall:
(a) preserve the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 10 cm; and
(b) prevent the entry of a 10 cm cube.
6.4.11.7 The package shall be designed for an ambient temperature range of -40°C to +38°C unless the competent
authority specifies otherwise in the certificate of approval for the package design.
6.4.11.8 For a package in isolation, it shall be assumed that water can leak into or out of all void spaces of the package,
including those within the containment system. However, if the design incorporates special features to prevent
such leakage of water into or out of certain void spaces, even as a result of error, absence of leakage may be
assumed in respect of those void spaces. Special features shall include either of the following:
(a) multiple high-standard water barriers, not less than two of which would remain watertight if the package
were subject to the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.13(b), a high degree of quality control in the manufacture,
maintenance and repair of packagings and tests to demonstrate the closure of each package before
each shipment; or
(b) for packages containing uranium hexafluoride only, with maximum enrichment of 5 mass percent
uranium-235:
(i) packages where, following the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.13(b), there is no physical contact between
the valve or the plug and any other component of the packaging other than at its original point of
attachment and where, in addition, following the test prescribed in 6.4.17.3, the valves and the plug
remain leaktight; and
(ii) a high degree of quality control in the manufacture, maintenance and repair of packagings coupled
with tests to demonstrate closure of each package before each shipment.
6.4.11.9 It shall be assumed that the confinement system is closely reflected by at least 20 cm of water or such greater
reflection as may additionally be provided by the surrounding material of the packaging. However, when it can
be demonstrated that the confinement system remains within the packaging following the tests prescribed
in 6.4.11.13(b), close reflection of the package by at least 20 cm of water may be assumed in 6.4.11.10(c).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.11.10 The package shall be subcritical under the conditions of 6.4.11.8 and 6.4.11.9 and with the package conditions
that result in the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with:
(a) routine conditions of transport (incident-free);
(b) the tests specified in 6.4.11.12(b);
(c) the tests specified in 6.4.11.13(b).
6.4.11.11 For packages to be transported by air:
(a) the package shall be subcritical under conditions consistent with the Type C package tests specified in
6.4.20.1 assuming reflection by at least 20 cm of water but no water in-leakage; and
(b) in the assessment of 6.4.11.10, use of special features as specified in 6.4.11.8 is allowed provided that
leakage of water into or out of the void spaces is prevented when the package is submitted to the Type C
package tests specified in 6.4.20.1 followed by the water leakage test specified in 6.4.19.3.
6.4.11.12 A number “N” shall be derived, such that five times “N” packages shall be subcritical for the arrangement and
package conditions that provide the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the following:
(a) there shall not be anything between the packages, and the package arrangement shall be reflected on
all sides by at least 20 cm of water; and
(b) the state of the packages shall be their assessed or demonstrated condition if they had been subjected
to the tests specified in 6.4.15.
6.4.11.13 A number “N” shall be derived, such that two times “N” packages shall be subcritical for the arrangement and
package conditions that provide the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with the following:
(a) hydrogenous moderation between packages, and the package arrangement reflected on all sides by at
least 20 cm of water; and
(b) the tests specified in 6.4.15 followed by whichever of the following is the more limiting:
(i) the tests specified in 6.4.17.2(b) and either 6.4.17.2(c), for packages having a mass not greater than
500 kg and an overall density not greater than 1000 kg/m3 based on the external dimensions, or
6.4.17.2(a), for all other packages; followed by the test specified in 6.4.17.3 and completed by the
tests specified in 6.4.19.1–6.4.19.3; or
(ii) the test specified in 6.4.17.4; and
(c) where any part of the fissile material escapes from the containment system following the tests specified
in 6.4.11.13(b), it shall be assumed that fissile material escapes from each package in the array and all
of the fissile material shall be arranged in the configuration and moderation that results in the maximum
neutron multiplication with close reflection by at least 20 cm of water.
6.4.11.14 The criticality safety index (CSI) for packages containing fissile material shall be obtained by dividing the
number 50 by the smaller of the two values of N derived in 6.4.11.12 and 6.4.11.13 (i.e. CSI = 50/N). The value
of the criticality safety index may be zero, provided that an unlimited number of packages is subcritical (i.e. N
is effectively equal to infinity in both cases).
6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance
6.4.12.1 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards required in 2.7.2.3.3.1, 2.7.2.3.3.2, 2.7.2.3.4.1,
2.7.2.3.4.2, 2.7.2.3.4.3 and 6.4.2–6.4.11 shall be accomplished by any of the methods listed below or by a
combination thereof.
(a) Performance of tests with specimens representing special form radioactive material, or low dispersible
radioactive material or with prototypes or samples of the packaging, where the contents of the specimen
or the packaging for the tests shall simulate as closely as practicable the expected range of radioactive
contents and the specimen or packaging to be tested shall be prepared as presented for transport.
(b) Reference to previous satisfactory demonstrations of a sufficiently similar nature.
(c) Performance of tests with models of appropriate scale incorporating those features which are significant
with respect to the item under investigation when engineering experience has shown results of such
tests to be suitable for design purposes. When a scale model is used, the need for adjusting certain test
parameters, such as penetrator diameter or compressive load, shall be taken into account.
(d) Calculation, or reasoned argument, when the calculation procedures and parameters are generally
agreed to be reliable or conservative.
6.4.12.2 After the specimen, prototype or sample has been subjected to the tests, appropriate methods of
assessment shall be used to assure that the provisions of this chapter have been fulfilled in compliance with
the performance and acceptance standards prescribed in this chapter (see 2.7.2.3.3.1, 2.7.2.3.3.2, 2.7.2.3.4.1,
2.7.2.3.4.2, 2.7.2.3.4.3 and 6.4.2–6.4.11).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.12.3 All specimens shall be inspected before testing in order to identify and record faults or damage, including the
following:
(a) divergence from the design;
(b) defects in manufacture;
(c) corrosion or other deterioration; and
(d) distortion of features.
The containment system of the package shall be clearly specified. The external features of the specimen shall
be clearly identified so that reference may be made simply and clearly to any part of such specimen.
6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding
and evaluating criticality safety
After each test or group of tests or sequence of the applicable tests, as appropriate, specified in 6.4.15 to
6.4.21:
(a) faults and damage shall be identified and recorded;
(b) it shall be determined whether the integrity of the containment system and shielding has been retained
to the extent required in this chapter for the package under test; and
(c) for packages containing fissile material, it shall be determined whether the assumptions and conditions
used in the assessments required by 6.4.11.1 to 6.4.11.14 for one or more packages are valid.
6.4.14 Target for drop tests
The target for the drop tests specified in 2.7.2.3.3.5.1, 6.4.15.4, 6.4.16(a), 6.4.17.2 and 6.4.20.2 shall be a flat,
horizontal surface of such a character that any increase in its resistance to displacement or deformation upon
impact by the specimen would not significantly increase the damage to the specimen.
6.4.15 Test for demonstrating ability to withstand normal conditions of transport
6.4.15.1 The tests are: the water spray test, the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test. Specimens
of the package shall be subjected to the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test, preceded in
each case by the water spray test. One specimen may be used for all the tests, provided that the provisions
of 6.4.15.2 are fulfilled.
6.4.15.2 The time interval between the conclusion of the water spray test and the succeeding test shall be such that
the water has soaked in to the maximum extent, without appreciable drying of the exterior of the specimen.
In the absence of any evidence to the contrary, this interval shall be taken to be two hours if the water spray
is applied from four directions simultaneously. No time interval shall elapse, however, if the water spray is
applied from each of the four directions consecutively.
6.4.15.3 Water spray test: The specimen shall be subjected to a water spray test that simulates exposure to rainfall of
approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour.
6.4.15.4 Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer maximum damage in respect of the
safety features to be tested.
(a) The height of the drop measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target,
shall be not less than the distance specified in the table hereunder for the applicable mass. The target
shall be as defined in 6.4.14.
(b) For rectangular fibreboard or wood packages not exceeding a mass of 50 kg, a separate specimen shall
be subjected to a free drop onto each corner from a height of 0.3 m.
(c) For cylindrical fibreboard packages not exceeding a mass of 100 kg, a separate specimen shall be
subjected to a free drop onto each of the quarters of each rim from a height of 0.3 m.
Free drop distance for testing packages to normal conditions of transport
Package mass (kg) Free drop distance (m)
Package mass < 5,000 1.2
5,000 ≤ Package mass < 10,000 0.9
10,000 ≤ Package mass < 15,000 0.6
15,000 ≤ Package mass 0.3
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.15.5 Stacking test: Unless the shape of the packaging effectively prevents stacking, the specimen shall be
subjected, for a period of 24 hours, to a compressive load equal to the greater of the following:
(a) the equivalent of 5 times the maximum weight of the package; and
(b) the equivalent of 13 kPa multiplied by the vertically projected area of the package.
The load shall be applied uniformly to two opposite sides of the specimen, one of which shall be the base on
which the package would typically rest.
6.4.15.6 Penetration test: The specimen shall be placed on a rigid, flat, horizontal surface which will not move
significantly while the test is being carried out.
(a) A bar of 3.2 cm in diameter with a hemispherical end and a mass of 6 kg shall be dropped and directed
to fall, with its longitudinal axis vertical, onto the centre of the weakest part of the specimen, so that, if it
penetrates sufficiently far, it will hit the containment system. The bar shall not be significantly deformed
by the test performance.
(b) The height of the drop of the bar, measured from its lower end to the intended point of impact on the
upper surface of the specimen, shall be 1 m.
6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages designed for liquids and gases
A specimen or separate specimens shall be subjected to each of the following tests unless it can be
demonstrated that one test is more severe for the specimen in question than the other, in which case one
specimen shall be subjected to the more severe test.
(a) Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage in respect
of containment. The height of the drop measured from the lowest part of the specimen to the upper
surface of the target shall be 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14.
(b) Penetration test: The specimen shall be subjected to the test specified in 6.4.15.6 except that the height
of drop shall be increased to 1.7 m from the 1 m specified in 6.4.15.6(b).
6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident conditions of transport
6.4.17.1 The specimen shall be subjected to the cumulative effects of the tests specified in 6.4.17.2 and 6.4.17.3, in that
order. Following these tests, either this specimen or a separate specimen shall be subjected to the effect(s)
of the water immersion test(s) as specified in 6.4.17.4 and, if applicable, 6.4.18.
6.4.17.2 Mechanical test: The mechanical test consists of three different drop tests. Each specimen shall be subjected
to the applicable drops as specified in 6.4.8.8 or 6.4.11.13. The order in which the specimen is subjected to
the drops shall be such that, on completion of the mechanical test, the specimen shall have suffered such
damage as will lead to the maximum damage in the thermal test which follows.
(a) For drop I, the specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage, and the height
of the drop measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target shall be
9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14.
(b) For drop II, the specimen shall drop onto a bar rigidly mounted perpendicularly on the target so as
to suffer the maximum damage. The height of the drop measured from the intended point of impact
of the specimen to the upper surface of the bar shall be 1 m. The bar shall be of solid mild steel of
circular cross-section, (15.0±0.5) cm in diameter and 20 cm long unless a longer bar would cause greater
damage, in which case a bar of sufficient length to cause maximum damage shall be used. The upper
end of the bar shall be flat and horizontal with its edge rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm.
The target on which the bar is mounted shall be as described in 6.4.14.
(c) For drop III, the specimen shall be subjected to a dynamic crush test by positioning the specimen on the
target so as to suffer maximum damage by the drop of a 500 kg mass from 9 m onto the specimen. The
mass shall consist of a solid mild steel plate 1 m by 1 m and shall fall in a horizontal attitude. The lower
face of the steel plate shall have its edges and corners rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The
height of the drop shall be measured from the underside of the plate to the highest point of the specimen.
The target on which the specimen rests shall be as defined in 6.4.14.
6.4.17.3 Thermal test: The specimen shall be in thermal equilibrium under conditions of an ambient temperature of
38°C, subject to the solar insolation conditions specified in the table under 6.4.8.6 and subject to the design
maximum rate of internal heat generation within the package from the radioactive contents. Alternatively, any
of these parameters are allowed to have different values prior to and during the test, providing due account
is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response.
The thermal test shall then consist of:
(a) exposure of a specimen for a period of 30 minutes to a thermal environment which provides a heat flux at
least equivalent to that of a hydrocarbon fuel/air fire in sufficiently quiescent ambient conditions to give a
minimum average flame emissivity coefficient of 0.9 and an average temperature of at least 800°C, fully
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
engulfing the specimen, with a surface absorptivity coefficient of 0.8 or that value which the package
may be demonstrated to possess if exposed to the fire specified, followed by:
(b) exposure of the specimen to an ambient temperature of 38°C, subject to the solar insolation conditions
specified in the table under 6.4.8.6 and subject to the design maximum rate of internal heat generation
within the package by the radioactive contents, for a sufficient period to ensure that temperatures in
the specimen are decreasing in all parts of the specimen and/or are approaching initial steady-state
conditions. Alternatively, any of these parameters are allowed to have different values following cessation
of heating, providing due account is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response.
During and following the test, the specimen shall not be artificially cooled and any combustion of materials of
the specimen shall be permitted to proceed naturally.
6.4.17.4 Water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 15 m for a period of
not less than eight hours in the attitude which will lead to maximum damage. For demonstration purposes, an
external gauge pressure of at least 150 kPa shall be considered to meet these conditions.
6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages
containing more than 105A2 and Type C packages
Enhanced water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 200 m for
a period of not less than one hour. For demonstration purposes, an external gauge pressure of at least 2 MPa
shall be considered to meet these conditions.
6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material
6.4.19.1 Packages for which water in-leakage or out-leakage to the extent which results in greatest reactivity has been
assumed for purposes of assessment under 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be excepted from the test.
6.4.19.2 Before the specimen is subjected to the water leakage test specified below, it shall be subjected to the tests
in 6.4.17.2(b), and either 6.4.17.2(a) or (c) as required by 6.4.11.13, and the test specified in 6.4.17.3.
6.4.19.3 The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 0.9 m for a period of not less than eight
hours and in the attitude for which maximum leakage is expected.
6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages
6.4.20.1 Specimens shall be subjected to the effects of each of the following test sequences in the orders specified:
(a) the tests specified in 6.4.17.2(a), 6.4.17.2(c), 6.4.20.2 and 6.4.20.3; and
(b) the test specified in 6.4.20.4.
Separate specimens are allowed to be used for each of the sequences (a) and (b).
6.4.20.2 Puncture/tearing test: The specimen shall be subjected to the damaging effects of a vertical, solid probe
made of mild steel. The orientation of the package specimen and the impact point on the package surface
shall be such as to cause maximum damage at the conclusion of the test sequence specified in 6.4.20.1(a).
(a) The specimen, representing a package having a mass less than 250 kg, shall be placed on a target and
subjected to a probe having a mass of 250 kg falling from a height of 3 m above the intended impact
point. For this test, the probe shall be a 20 cm diameter cylindrical bar with the striking end forming a
frustum of a right circular cone with the following dimensions: 30 cm height and 2.5 cm in diameter at
the top with its edge rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The target on which the specimen
is placed shall be as specified in 6.4.14.
(b) For packages having a mass of 250 kg or more, the base of the probe shall be placed on a target and
the specimen dropped onto the probe. The height of the drop, measured from the point of impact with
the specimen to the upper surface of the probe, shall be 3 m. For this test, the probe shall have the same
properties and dimensions as specified in (a) above, except that the length and mass of the probe shall
be such as to incur maximum damage to the specimen. The target on which the base of the probe is
placed shall be as specified in 6.4.14.
6.4.20.3 Enhanced thermal test: The conditions for this test shall be as specified in 6.4.17.3, except that the exposure
to the thermal environment shall be for a period of 60 min.
6.4.20.4 Impact test: The specimen shall be subject to an impact on a target at a velocity of not less than 90 m/s, at
such an orientation as to suffer maximum damage. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14, except that the
target surface may be at any orientation provided that the surface is normal to the specimen path.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.21 Tests for packagings designed to contain uranium hexafluoride
Specimens that comprise or simulate packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride
shall be tested hydraulically at an internal pressure of at least 1.38 MPa but, when the test pressure is less
than 2.76 MPa, the design will require multilateral approval. For retesting packagings, any other equivalent
non-destructive testing may be applied, subject to multilateral approval.
6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials
6.4.22.1 The approval of designs for packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride requires that:
(a) Each design that meets the provisions of 6.4.6.4 shall require multilateral approval;
(b) Each design that meets the provisions of 6.4.6.1 to 6.4.6.3 shall require unilateral approval by the
competent authority of the country of origin of the design, unless multilateral approval is otherwise
required by this Code.
6.4.22.2 Each Type B(U) and Type C package design will require unilateral approval, except that:
(a) a package design for fissile material which is also subject to 6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.7 and 5.1.5.2.1 will require
multilateral approval; and
(b) a Type B(U) package design for low dispersible radioactive material will require multilateral approval.
6.4.22.3 Each Type B(M) package design, including those for fissile material which are also subject to 6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.7
and 5.1.5.2.1 and those for low dispersible radioactive material, will require multilateral approval.
6.4.22.4 Each package design for fissile material which is not excepted by any of the paragraphs 2.7.2.3.5.1 to
2.7.2.3.5.6, 6.4.11.2 and 6.4.11.3 shall require multilateral approval.
6.4.22.5 The design for special form radioactive material will require unilateral approval. The design for low dispersible
radioactive material will require multilateral approval (see also 6.4.23.8).
6.4.22.6 The design for a fissile material excepted from “FISSILE” classification in accordance with 2.7.2.3.5.6 shall
require multilateral approval.
6.4.22.7 Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles in accordance with 2.7.2.2.2.2
shall require multilateral approval.
6.4.23 Applications for approval and approvals for radioactive material transport
6.4.23.1 [Reserved]
6.4.23.2 An application for approval of shipment shall include:
(a) the period of time, related to the shipment, for which the approval is sought;
(b) the actual radioactive contents, the expected modes of transport, the type of conveyance, and the
probable or proposed route; and
(c) the details of how the precautions and administrative or operational controls referred to in the certificate
of approval for the package design, if applicable, issued under 5.1.5.2.1.1.3, 5.1.5.2.1.1.6 or 5.1.5.2.1.1.7,
are to be put into effect.
6.4.23.2.1 An application for approval of SCO-III shipments shall include:
(a) a statement of the respects in which, and of the reasons why, the consignment is considered SCO-III;
(b) justification for choosing SCO-III by demonstrating that:
(i) no suitable packaging currently exists;
(ii) designing and/or constructing a packaging or segmenting the object is not practically, technically or
economically feasible;
(iii) no other viable alternative exists;
(c) a detailed description of the proposed radioactive contents with reference to their physical and chemical
states and the nature of the radiation emitted;
(d) a detailed statement of the design of the SCO-III, including complete engineering drawings and schedules
of materials and methods of manufacture;
(e) all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the requirements of 4.1.9.2.4.5 and the
requirements of 7.1.4.5.1, if applicable, are satisfied;
(f) a transport plan;
(g) a specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.4.23.3 An application for approval of shipments under special arrangement shall include all the information necessary
to satisfy the competent authority that the overall level of safety in transport is at least equivalent to that
which would be provided if all the applicable provisions of this Code had been met. The application shall also
include:
(a) a statement of the respects in which, and of the reasons why, the shipment cannot be made in full
accordance with the applicable provisions; and
(b) a statement of any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls which are to be
employed during transport to compensate for the failure to meet the applicable provisions.
6.4.23.4 An application for approval of Type B(U) or Type C package design shall include:
(a) a detailed description of the proposed radioactive contents with reference to their physical and chemical
states and the nature of the radiation emitted;
(b) a detailed statement of the design, including complete engineering drawings and schedules of materials
and methods of manufacture;
(c) a statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculative
methods or other evidence that the design is adequate to meet the applicable provisions;
(d) the proposed operating and maintenance instructions for the use of the packaging;
(e) if the package is designed to have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of 100 kPa gauge,
a specification of the materials of manufacture of the containment system, the samples to be taken, and
the tests to be made;
(f) if the package is to be used for shipment after storage, a justification of considerations to ageing
mechanisms in the safety analysis and within the proposed operating and maintenance instructions;
(g) where the proposed radioactive contents are irradiated nuclear fuel, a statement and a justification of
any assumption in the safety analysis relating to the characteristics of the fuel and a description of any
pre-shipment measurement required by 6.4.11.5(b);
(h) any special stowage provisions necessary to ensure the safe dissipation of heat from the package,
considering the various modes of transport to be used and type of conveyance or freight container;
(i) a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package;
(j) a specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1; and
(k) for packages which are to be used for shipment after storage, a gap analysis programme describing a
systematic procedure for a periodic evaluation of changes of regulations, changes in technical knowledge
and changes of the state of the package design during storage.
6.4.23.5 An application for approval of a Type B(M) package design shall include, in addition to the information required
in 6.4.23.4 for Type B(U) packages:
(a) a list of the provisions specified in 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4 to 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 with which the package
does not conform;
(b) any proposed supplementary operational controls to be applied during transport not regularly provided
for in this Code, but which are necessary to ensure the safety of the package or to compensate for the
deficiencies listed in (a) above;
(c) a statement relative to any restrictions on the mode of transport and to any special loading, carriage,
unloading or handling procedures; and
(d) a statement of the range of ambient conditions (temperature, solar radiation) which are expected to be
encountered during transport and which have been taken into account in the design.
6.4.23.6 The application for approval of designs for packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall
include all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the provisions of
6.4.6.1, and a specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1.
6.4.23.7 An application for a fissile package approval shall include all information necessary to satisfy the competent
authority that the design meets the provisions of 6.4.11.1, and a specification of the applicable management
system as required in 1.5.3.1.
6.4.23.8 An application for approval of design for special form radioactive material and design for low dispersible
radioactive material shall include:
(a) a detailed description of the radioactive material or, if a capsule, the contents; particular reference shall
be made to both physical and chemical states;
(b) a detailed statement of the design of any capsule to be used;
(c) a statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculations to
show that the radioactive material is capable of meeting the performance standards, or other evidence
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
that the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material meets the applicable
provisions of this Code;
(d) a specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1; and
(e) any proposed pre-shipment actions for use in the consignment of special form radioactive material or
low dispersible radioactive material.
6.4.23.9 An application for approval of design for fissile material excepted from “FISSILE” classification in accordance
with table 2.7.2.1.1, under 2.7.2.3.5.6 shall include:
(a) a detailed description of the material; particular reference shall be made to both physical and chemical
states;
(b) a statement of the tests that have been carried out and their results, or evidence based on calculation
methods to show that the material is capable of meeting the requirements specified in 2.7.2.3.6;
(c) a specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1;
(d) a statement of specific actions to be taken prior to shipment.
6.4.23.10 An application for approval of alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles
shall include:
(a) an identification and detailed description of the instrument or article, its intended uses and the
radionuclide(s) incorporated;
(b) the maximum activity of the radionuclide(s) in the instrument or article;
(c) maximum external dose rates arising from the instrument or article;
(d) the chemical and physical forms of the radionuclide(s) contained in the instrument or article;
(e) details of the construction and design of the instrument or article, particularly as related to the containment
and shielding of the radionuclide in routine, normal and accident conditions of transport;
(f) the applicable management system, including the quality testing and verification procedures to be
applied to radioactive sources, components and finished products to ensure that the maximum specified
activity of radioactive material or the maximum dose rates specified for the instrument or article are not
exceeded, and that the instruments or articles are constructed according to the design specifications;
(g) the maximum number of instruments or articles expected to be shipped per consignment and annually;
(h) dose assessments in accordance with the principles and methodologies set out in the Radiation Protection
and Safety of Radiation Sources: International Basic Safety Standards, IAEA Safety Standards Series
No. GSR Part 3, IAEA, Vienna (2014), including individual doses to transport workers and members of
the public and, if appropriate, collective doses arising from routine, normal and accident conditions of
transport, based on representative transport scenarios the consignments are subject to.
6.4.23.11 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority shall be assigned an identification mark. The
mark shall be of the following generalized type:
VRI/number/type code
(a) Except as provided in 6.4.23.12(b), “VRI” represents the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in
international road traffic of the country issuing the certificate.
(b) The number shall be assigned by the competent authority, and shall be unique and specific with regard
to the particular design or shipment or alternative activity limit for exempt consignment. The identification
mark of the approval of shipment shall be clearly related to the identification mark of the approval of
design.
(c) The following type codes shall be used, in the order listed, to indicate the types of certificate of approval
issued:
AF Type A package design for fissile material
B(U) Type B(U) package design (“B(U)F” if for fissile material)
B(M) Type B(M) package design (“B(M)F” if for fissile material)
C Type C package design (“CF” if for fissile material)
IF industrial package design for fissile material
S special form radioactive material
LD low dispersible radioactive material
FE fissile material complying with the requirements of 2.7.2.3.6
T shipment
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
X special arrangement
AL alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles.
In the case of package designs for non-fissile or fissile-excepted uranium hexafluoride, where none of
the above codes apply, then the following type codes shall be used:
H(U) unilateral approval
H(M) multilateral approval.
6.4.23.12 These identification marks shall be applied as follows:
(a) each certificate and each package shall bear the appropriate identification marks, comprising the
symbols prescribed in 6.4.23.11(a), (b) and (c) above, except that, for packages, only the applicable
design type codes shall appear following the second stroke; that is, the “T” or “X” shall not appear in
the identification mark on the package. Where the approval of design and the approval of shipment are
combined, the applicable type codes do not need to be repeated. For example:
A/132/B(M)F: a Type B(M) package design approved for fissile material, requiring multilateral
approval, for which the competent authority of Austria has assigned the design number 132 (to be
marked on both the package and on the certificate of approval for the package design);
A/132/B(M)/FT: the approval of shipment issued for a package bearing the identification mark
elaborated above (to be marked on the certificate only);
A/137/X: an approval of special arrangement issued by the competent authority of Austria, to which
the number 137 has been assigned (to be marked on the certificate only);
A/139/IF: an industrial package design for fissile material approved by the competent authority
of Austria, to which package design number 139 has been assigned (to be marked on both the
package and on the certificate of approval for the package design); and
A/145/H(U) : a package design for fissile-excepted uranium hexafluoride approved by the competent
authority of Austria, to which package design number 145 has been assigned (to be marked on both
the package and on the certificate of approval for the package design);
(b) where multilateral approval is effected by validation in accordance with 6.4.23.20, only the identification
mark issued by the country of origin of the design or shipment shall be used. Where multilateral approval
is effected by issue of certificates by successive countries, each certificate shall bear the appropriate
identification mark and the package whose design was so approved shall bear all appropriate identification
marks. For example:
A/132/B(M)F
CH/28/B(M)F
would be the identification mark of a package which was originally approved by Austria and was
subsequently approved, by separate certificate, by Switzerland. Additional identification marks would be
tabulated in a similar manner on the package;
(c) the revision of a certificate shall be indicated by a parenthetical expression following the identification mark
on the certificate. For example, A/132/B(M)F (Rev.2) would indicate revision 2 of the Austrian certificate
of approval for the package design; or A/132/B(M)/F (Rev.0) would indicate the original issuance of the
Austrian certificate of approval for the package design. For original issuances, the parenthetical entry
is optional and other words such as ‘original issuance’ may also be used in place of ‘Rev.0’. Certificate
revision numbers may only be issued by the country issuing the original certificate of approval;
(d) additional symbols (as may be necessitated by national provisions) may be added in parentheses to the
end of the identification mark. For example, A/132/B(M)F (SP503); and
(e) it is not necessary to alter the identification mark on the packaging each time that a revision to the design
certificate is made. Such re-marking shall be required only in those cases where the revision to the
package design certificate involves a change in the letter type codes for the package design following
the second stroke.
6.4.23.13 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for special form radioactive material or low
dispersible radioactive material shall include the following information:
(a) Type of certificate.
(b) The competent authority identification mark.
(c) The issue date and an expiry date.
(d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations
for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special form radioactive material or low
dispersible radioactive material is approved.
(e) The identification of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material.
(f) A description of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(g) Design specifications for the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material,
which may include references to drawings.
(h) A specification of the radioactive contents which includes the activities involved and which may include
the physical and chemical form.
(i) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1.
(j) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to
shipment.
(k) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant.
(l) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.14 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for material excepted from classification as
“FISSILE” shall include the following information:
(a) Type of certificate.
(b) The competent authority identification mark.
(c) The issue date and an expiry date.
(d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for
the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the exception is approved.
(e) A description of the excepted material.
(f) Limiting specifications for the excepted material.
(g) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1.
(h) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to
shipment.
(i) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant.
(j) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
(k) Reference to documentation that demonstrates compliance with 2.7.2.3.6.
6.4.23.15 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for a special arrangement shall include the
following information:
(a) Type of certificate.
(b) The competent authority identification mark.
(c) The issue date and an expiry date.
(d) Mode(s) of transport.
(e) Any restrictions on the modes of transport, type of conveyance, freight container, and any necessary
routeing instructions.
(f) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for
the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special arrangement is approved.
(g) The following statement: “This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any
requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported.”
(h) References to certificates for alternative radioactive contents, other competent authority validation, or
additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent authority.
(i) Description of the packaging by a reference to the drawings or a specification of the design. If deemed
appropriate by the competent authority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm,
showing the make-up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a brief description of the
packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general outside dimensions and appearance.
(j) A specification of the authorized radioactive contents, including any restrictions on the radioactive
contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical
and chemical forms, the activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass
in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate), and whether special form
radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2.7.2.3.5.6, if
applicable.
(k) Additionally, for packages containing fissile material:
(i) a detailed description of the authorized radioactive contents;
(ii) the value of the criticality safety index;
(iii) reference to the documentation that demonstrates the criticality safety of the package;
(iv) any special features, on the basis of which the absence of water from certain void spaces has been
assumed in the criticality assessment;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(v) any allowance (based on 6.4.11.5(b)) for a change in neutron multiplication assumed in the criticality
assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and
(vi) the ambient temperature range for which the special arrangement has been approved.
(l) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage,
unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe
dissipation of heat.
(m) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reasons for the special arrangement.
(n) Description of the compensatory measures to be applied as a result of the shipment being under special
arrangement.
(o) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to the use of the packaging or specific actions
to be taken prior to the shipment.
(p) A statement regarding the ambient conditions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in
accordance with those specified in 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.15, as applicable.
(q) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority.
(r) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1.
(s) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant and to the
identity of the carrier.
(t) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.16 Each certificate of approval for a shipment issued by a competent authority shall include the following information:
(a) Type of certificate.
(b) The competent authority identification mark(s).
(c) The issue date and an expiry date.
(d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for
the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the shipment is approved.
(e) Any restrictions on the modes of transport, type of conveyance, freight container, and any necessary
routeing instructions.
(f) The following statement: “This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any
requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported.”
(g) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage,
unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe
dissipation of heat or maintenance of criticality safety.
(h) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior to
shipment.
(i) Reference to the applicable certificate(s) of approval of design.
(j) A specification of the actual radioactive contents, including any restrictions on the radioactive contents
which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical and chemical
forms, the total activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams
(for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate), and whether special form radioactive
material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2.7.2.3.5.6, if applicable.
(k) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority.
(l) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1.
(m) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant.
(n) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.17 Each certificate of approval of the design of a package issued by a competent authority shall include the
following information:
(a) Type of certificate.
(b) The competent authority identification mark.
(c) The issue date and an expiry date.
(d) Any restriction on the modes of transport, if appropriate.
(e) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for
the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the design is approved.
(f) The following statement: “This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any
requirement of the government of any country through or into which the package will be transported.”
(g) References to certificates for alternative radioactive contents, other competent authority validation, or
additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(h) A statement authorizing shipment where approval of shipment is required under 5.1.5.1.2, if deemed
appropriate.
(i) Identification of the packaging.
(j) Description of the packaging by a reference to the drawings or specification of the design. If deemed
appropriate by the competent authority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm,
showing the make-up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a brief description of the
packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general outside dimensions and appearance.
(k) Specification of the design by reference to the drawings.
(l) A specification of the authorized radioactive content, including any restrictions on the radioactive
contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the physical
and chemical forms, the activities involved (including those of the various isotopes, if appropriate), mass
in grams (for fissile material the total mass of fissile nuclides or the mass for each fissile nuclide, when
appropriate) and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile
material excepted under 2.7.2.3.5.6, if applicable.
(m) A description of the containment system;
(n) For package designs containing fissile material which require multilateral approval of the package design
in accordance with 6.4.22.4:
(i) a detailed description of the authorized radioactive contents;
(ii) a description of the confinement system;
(iii) the value of the criticality safety index;
(iv) reference to the documentation that demonstrates the criticality safety of the package;
(v) any special features, on the basis of which the absence of water from certain void spaces has been
assumed in the criticality assessment;
(vi) any allowance (based on 6.4.11.5(b)) for a change in neutron multiplication assumed in the criticality
assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and
(vii) the ambient temperature range for which the package design has been approved.
(o) For Type B(M) packages, a statement specifying those prescriptions of 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4, 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6
and 6.4.8.9–6.4.8.15 with which the package does not conform and any amplifying information which
may be useful to other competent authorities.
(p) For package designs subject to 6.4.24.2, a statement specifying those requirements of the current
regulations with which the package does not conform.
(q) For packages containing more than 0.1 kg of uranium hexafluoride, a statement specifying those
prescriptions of 6.4.6.4 that apply, if any, and any amplifying information which may be useful to other
competent authorities.
(r) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading, carriage,
unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions for the safe
dissipation of heat.
(s) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to the use of the packaging or specific actions
to be taken prior to shipment.
(t) A statement regarding the ambient conditions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in
accordance with those specified in 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.15, as applicable.
(u) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.5.3.1.
(v) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority.
(w) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant.
(x) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.18 Each certificate issued by a competent authority for alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of
instruments or articles according to 5.1.5.2.1.4 shall include the following information:
(a) Type of certificate.
(b) The competent authority identification mark.
(c) The issue date and an expiry date.
(d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA Regulations for
the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the exemption is approved.
(e) The identification of the instrument or article.
(f) A description of the instrument or article.
(g) Design specifications for the instrument or article.
(h) A specification of the radionuclide(s), the approved alternative activity limit(s) for the exempt consignment(s)
of the instrument(s) or article(s).
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(i) Reference to documentation that demonstrates compliance with 2.7.2.2.2.2.
(j) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant.
(k) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.19 The competent authority shall be informed of the serial number of each packaging manufactured to a design
approved under 6.4.22.2, 6.4.22.3, 6.4.22.4 and 6.4.24.2.
6.4.23.20 Multilateral approval may be by validation of the original certificate issued by the competent authority of the
country of origin of the design or shipment. Such validation may take the form of an endorsement on the
original certificate or the issuance of a separate endorsement, annex, supplement, etc., by the competent
authority of the country through or into which the shipment is made.
6.4.24 Transitional measures for class 7
Packages not requiring competent authority approval of design under the 1985, 1985
(as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 and 2012 editions of
the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material
6.4.24.1 Packages not requiring competent authority approval of design (excepted packages, Type IP-1, Type IP-2,
Type IP-3 and Type A packages) shall meet the provisions of this Code in full, except that:
(a) Packages that meet the requirements of the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of the
IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material:
(i) may continue in transport provided that they were prepared for transport prior to 31 December 2003
and are subject to the requirements of 6.4.24.5, if applicable; or
(ii) may continue to be used, provided that all the following conditions are met:
– they were not designed to contain uranium hexafluoride;
– the applicable requirements of 1.5.3.1 of this Code are applied;
– the activity limits and classification in chapter 2.7 of this Code are applied;
– the requirements and controls for transport in parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 of this Code are applied; and
– the packaging was not manufactured or modified after 31 December 2003;
(b) Packages that meet the requirements of the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009
or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material:
(i) may continue in transport provided that they were prepared for transport prior to 31 December 2025
and are subject to the requirements of 6.4.24.5, if applicable; or
(ii) may continue to be used, provided that all the following conditions are met:
– The applicable requirements of 1.5.3.1 of this Code are applied;
– The activity limits and classification in chapter 2.7 of this Code are applied;
– The requirements and controls for transport in parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 of this Code are applied; and
– The packaging was not manufactured or modified after 31 December 2025.
Package designs approved under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised),
1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 and 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe
Transport of Radioactive Material
6.4.24.2 Packages requiring competent authority approval of the design shall meet this Edition of this Code in full
except that:
(a) Packagings that were manufactured to a package design approved by the competent authority under the
provisions of the 1985 or 1985 (as amended 1990) editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport
of Radioactive Material may continue to be used provided that all of the following conditions are met:
(i) the package design is subject to multilateral approval;
(ii) the applicable requirements of 1.5.3.1 of this Code are applied;
(iii) the activity limits and classification in chapter 2.7 of this Code are applied;
(iv) the requirements and controls for transport in parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 of this Code are applied;
(v) for a package containing fissile material and transported by air, the requirement of 6.4.11.11 is met;
(b) Packagings that were manufactured to a package design approved by the competent authority under
the provisions of the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the
IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material may continue to be used provided that
all of the following conditions are met:
(i) the package design is subject to multilateral approval after 31 December 2025;
(ii) the applicable requirements of 1.5.3.1 of this Code are applied;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(iii) the activity limits and material restrictions of chapter 2.7 of this Code are applied;
(iv) the requirements and controls for transport in parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 7 of this Code are applied.
6.4.24.3 No new manufacture of packagings to a package design meeting the provisions of the 1985, or 1985 (as
amended 1990) editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material shall be
permitted to commence.
6.4.24.4 No new manufacture of packagings of a package design meeting the provisions of the 1996, 1996 (revised),
1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of
Radioactive Material shall be permitted to commence after 31 December 2028.
Packages excepted from the requirements for fissile materials under the Regulations annexed to
the 16th revised edition or the 17th revised edition of the United Nations Recommendations on
the Transport of Dangerous Goods (2009 edition of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of
Radioactive Material)
6.4.24.5 Packages containing fissile material that is excepted from classification as “FISSILE” according to 2.7.2.3.5.1(i)
or (iii) of the IMDG Code Amendments 35-10 or 36-12 (paragraphs 417(a)(i) or (iii) of the 2009 edition of the
IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material) prepared for transport before 31 December
2014 may continue in transport and may continue to be classified as non-fissile or fissile-excepted except
that the consignment limits in table 2.7.2.3.5 of these editions shall apply to the conveyance. The consignment
shall be transported under exclusive use.
Special form radioactive material approved under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996,
1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 and 2012 editions of the
IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material
6.4.24.6 Special form radioactive material manufactured to a design which had received unilateral approval by the
competent authority under the 1985, 1985 (as amended 1990), 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003),
2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material may
continue to be used when in compliance with the mandatory management system in accordance with the
applicable requirements of 1.5.3.1. There shall be no new manufacture of special form radioactive material to a
design that had received unilateral approval by the competent authority under the 1985 or 1985 (as amended
1990) editions of the IAEA Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material. No new manufacture of
special form radioactive material to a design that had received unilateral approval by the competent authority
under the 1996, 1996 (revised), 1996 (as amended 2003), 2005, 2009 or 2012 editions of the IAEA Regulations
for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material shall be permitted to commence after 31 December 2025.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.5
Provisions for the construction and testing
of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs)
6.5.1 General requirements
6.5.1.1 Scope
6.5.1.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to IBCs intended for the transport of certain dangerous substances and
materials.
6.5.1.1.2 The requirements for IBCs in 6.5.3 are based on IBCs currently in use. In order to take into account progress
in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of IBCs having specifications different from those
in 6.5.3 and 6.5.5, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able to
successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.5.4 and 6.5.6. Methods of inspection and testing other than
those described in this Code are acceptable, provided they are equivalent.
6.5.1.1.3 The construction, equipment, testing, marking and operation of IBCs shall be subject to acceptance by the
competent authority of the country in which the IBCs are approved.
6.5.1.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of IBCs shall provide information regarding procedures to be
followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any other
components needed to ensure that IBCs as presented for transport are capable of passing the applicable
performance tests of this chapter.
6.5.1.2 Definitions
Body (for all categories of IBCs other than composite IBCs) means the receptacle proper, including openings
and their closures, but does not include service equipment.
Handling device (for flexible IBCs) means any sling, loop, eye or frame attached to the body of the IBC or
formed from a continuation of the IBC body material.
Maximum permissible gross mass means the mass of the IBC and any service or structural equipment
together with the maximum net mass.
Plastics material, when used in connection with inner receptacles for composite IBCs, is taken to include
other polymeric materials such as rubber.
Protected (for metal IBCs) means the IBC being provided with additional protection against impact, the
protection taking the form of, for example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or double-wall construction or a frame
with a metal latticework packaging.
Service equipment means filling and discharge devices and, according to the category of IBC, pressure relief
or venting, safety, heating and heat-insulating devices and measuring instruments.
Structural equipment (for all categories of IBCs other than flexible IBCs) means the reinforcing, fastening,
handling, protective or stabilizing members of the body, including the base pallet for composite IBCs with
plastics inner receptacle, fibreboard and wooden IBCs.
Woven plastics (for flexible IBCs) means a material made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable
plastics material.
6.5.1.3 Categories of IBCs
6.5.1.3.1 Metal IBCs consist of a metal body together with appropriate service and structural equipment.
6.5.1.3.2 Flexible IBCs consist of a body constituted of film, woven fabric or any other flexible material or combinations
thereof, and if necessary an inner coating or liner, together with any appropriate service equipment and
handling devices.
6.5.1.3.3 Rigid plastics IBCs consist of a rigid plastics body, which may have structural equipment together with
appropriate service equipment.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.1.3.4 Composite IBCs consist of structural equipment in the form of a rigid outer packaging enclosing a plastics
inner receptacle together with any service or other structural equipment. The IBC is so constructed that the
inner receptacle and outer packaging, once assembled, form, and are used as, an integrated single unit to be
filled, stored, transported or emptied as such.
6.5.1.3.5 Fibreboard IBCs consist of a fibreboard body with or without separate top and bottom caps, if necessary, an
inner liner (but no inner packagings) and appropriate service and structural equipment.
6.5.1.3.6 Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or collapsible wooden body together with an inner liner (but no inner
packagings) and appropriate service and structural equipment.
6.5.1.4 Designatory code system for IBCs
6.5.1.4.1 The code shall consist of two Arabic numerals as specified in .1 followed by one or more capital letters as
specified in .2; followed, when specified in an individual section, by an Arabic numeral indicating the category
of IBC.
.1
For solids, filled or discharged
under pressure of more
Type by gravity For liquids
than 10 kPa (0.1 bar)
Rigid 11 21 31
Flexible 13 – –
.2 Materials
A Steel (all types and surface treatments)
B Aluminium
C Natural wood
D Plywood
F Reconstituted wood
G Fibreboard
H Plastics material
L Textile
M Paper, multiwall
N Metal (other than steel or aluminium)
6.5.1.4.2 For a composite IBC, two capital letters in Latin characters shall be used in sequence in the second position
of the code. The first shall indicate the material of the inner receptacle of the IBC and the second that of the
outer packaging of the IBC.
6.5.1.4.3 The following types and codes of IBCs are assigned:
Material Category Code Paragraph
Metal 6.5.5.1
A Steel for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11A
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21A
for liquids 31A
B Aluminium for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11B
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21B
for liquids 31B
N Other than steel for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11N
or aluminium for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21N
for liquids 31N
Flexible 6.5.5.2
H Plastics woven plastics without coating or liner 13H1
woven plastics, coated 13H2
woven plastics with liner 13H3
woven plastics, coated and with liner 13H4
plastics film 13H5
L Textile without coating or liner 13L1
coated 13L2
with liner 13L3
coated and with liner 13L4
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Material Category Code Paragraph
Flexible (continued) 6.5.5.2
M Paper multiwall 13M1
multiwall, water-resistant 13M2
H Rigid plastics for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, fitted with 11H1 6.5.5.3
structural equipment
for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, freestanding 11H2
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, fitted with 21H1
structural equipment
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, freestanding 21H2
for liquids, fitted with structural equipment 31H1
for liquids, freestanding 31H2
HZ Composite with plastics for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with rigid plastics 11HZ1 6.5.5.4
inner receptacle* inner receptacle
for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with flexible 11HZ2
plastics inner receptacle
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, with rigid 21HZ1
plastics inner receptacle
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, with flexible 21HZ2
plastics inner receptacle
for liquids, with rigid plastics inner receptacle 31HZ1
for liquids, with flexible plastics inner receptacle 31HZ2
G Fibreboard for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11G 6.5.5.5
Wooden 6.5.5.6
C Natural wood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner liner 11C
D Plywood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner liner 11D
F Reconstituted wood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner liner 11F
The code shall be completed by replacing the letter ‘Z’ by a capital letter in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1.2 to indicate the
nature of the material used for the outer packaging.
6.5.1.4.4 The letter ‘W’ may follow the IBC code. The letter ‘W’ signifies that the IBC, although of the same type
as indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in section 6.5.3 and is
considered equivalent in accordance with the provisions in 6.5.1.1.2.
6.5.2 Marking
6.5.2.1 Primary marking
6.5.2.1.1 Each IBC manufactured and intended for use according to these provisions shall bear durable marks which
are legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters, numbers and symbols shall be at least
12 mm high and shall show:
.1 the United Nations packaging symbol:
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk
container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6.1, 6.2, 6.3,
6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9. For metal IBCs on which the mark is stamped or embossed, the capital letters “UN”
may be applied instead of the symbol;
.2 the code designating the type of IBC according to 6.5.1.4;
.3 a capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved:
“X” for packing groups I, II and III (IBCs for solids only);
“Y” for packing groups II and III; or
“Z” for packing group III only;
.4 the month and year (last two digits) of manufacture;
.5 the State authorizing the allocation of the marks, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in
international road traffic;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.6 the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identifications of the IBC as specified by the competent
authority;
.7 the stacking test load in kilograms. For IBCs not designed for stacking, the figure “0” shall be shown;
.8 the maximum permissible gross mass in kilograms.
The primary marks required above shall be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs above. The marks
required by 6.5.2.2 and any further mark authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the primary
marks to be correctly identified.
Each mark applied in accordance with .1 to .8 and with 6.5.2.2 shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or
space, so as to be easily identifiable.
6.5.2.1.2 IBCs manufactured from recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1 shall be marked “REC”. For rigid IBCs,
this mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.5.2.1.1. For the inner receptacle of composite IBCs,
this mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.5.2.2.4.
6.5.2.1.3 Examples of marks for various types of IBCs in accordance with .1 to .8 above:
11A/Y/02 99/ For a metal IBC for solids discharged by gravity and made from steel/ for
NL/...* 007/ packing groups II and III/ manufactured in February 1999/ authorized by the
5500/1500 Netherlands/ manufactured by . . . *(name of manufacturer) and of a design
type to which the competent authority has allocated serial number 007/ the
stacking test load in kilograms/ and the maximum permissible gross mass in
kilograms.
13H3/Z/03 01/ For a flexible IBC for solids discharged by gravity and made from woven
F/...* 1713/ plastics with a liner/ not designed to be stacked.
0/1500
31H1/Y/04 99/ For a rigid plastics IBC for liquids made from plastics with structural equipment
GB/...* 9099/ withstanding the stack load.
10800/1200
31HA1/Y/05 01/ For a composite IBC for liquids with a rigid plastics inner receptacle and steel
D/...* 1683/ outer packaging.
10800/1200
11C/X/01 02/ For a wooden IBC for solids with an inner liner and authorized for packing
S/...* 9876/ group I solids.
3000/910
11G/Z/06 02/ For a fibreboard IBC/ not designed to be stacked.
I/...* 962/
0/500
11D/Y/07 02/ For a plywood IBC with inner liner.
E/...* 261/
3240/600
6.5.2.1.4 Where an IBC conforms to one or more than one tested IBC design type, including one or more than one
tested packaging or large packaging design type, the IBC may bear more than one mark to indicate the
relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark appears on an IBC,
the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its entirety.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.2.2 Additional marking
6.5.2.2.1 Each IBC shall bear the marks required in 6.5.2.1 and, in addition, the following information, which may
appear on a corrosion-resistant plate permanently attached in a place readily accessible for inspection:
Note: For metal IBCs, this plate shall be a corrosion-resistant metal plate.
Category of IBC
Additional marks Rigid
Metal Composite Fibreboard Wooden
plastics
Capacity in litresa at 20°C X X X
a
Tare mass in kg X X X X X
a
Test (gauge) pressure, in kPa or bar, if
X X
applicable
Maximum filling/discharge pressure in
X X X
kPa or bar,a if applicable
Body material and its minimum thickness
X
in mm
Date of last leakproofness test, if
X X X
applicable (month and year)
Date of last inspection (month and year) X X X
Serial number of the manufacturer X
The unit used shall be indicated.
6.5.2.2.2 The maximum permitted stacking load applicable shall be displayed on a symbol as shown in the figures
below. The symbol shall be durable and clearly visible.
... kg max
Minimum dimension
Minimum dimension
100 mm
100 mm
Minimum dimension Minimum dimension
100 mm 100 mm
IBCs capable of being stacked IBCs NOT capable of being stacked
The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm x 100 mm. The letters and numbers indicating the mass shall be
at least 12 mm high. The area within the printer’s marks indicated by the dimensional arrows shall be square.
Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The
mass marked above the symbol shall not exceed the load imposed during the design type test (see 6.5.6.6.4)
divided by 1.8.
Note: The provisions of 6.5.2.2.2 shall apply to all IBCs manufactured, repaired or remanufactured as
from 1 January 2011. The provisions of 6.5.2.2.2 of the IMDG Code (amendment 36-12) may continue to be
applied to all IBCs manufactured, repaired or remanufactured between 1 January 2011 and 31 December 2016.
6.5.2.2.3 Each flexible IBC may also bear a pictogram or pictograms indicating the recommended lifting methods.
6.5.2.2.4 Inner receptacles that are of composite IBC design type shall be identified by the application of the marks
indicated in 6.5.2.1.1.2, .3, .4 where this date is that of the manufacture of the plastics inner receptacle, .5
and .6. The UN packaging symbol shall not be applied. The marks shall be applied in the sequence shown in
6.5.2.1.1. They shall be durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily accessible for inspection
after assembling the inner receptacle in the outer casing. When the marks on the inner receptacle are not
readily accessible for inspection due to the design of the outer casing, a duplicate of the required marks on
the inner receptacle shall be placed on the outer casing preceded by the wording “Inner receptacle”. This
duplicate shall be durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily accessible for inspection.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
The date of the manufacture of the plastics inner receptacle may alternatively be marked on the inner
receptacle adjacent to the remainder of the marks. In such a case, the date may be waived from the remainder
of the marks. An example of an appropriate marking method is:
Note 1: Other methods that provide the minimum required information in a durable, visible and legible form
are also acceptable.
Note 2: The date of manufacture of the inner receptacle may be different from the marked date of manufacture
(see 6.5.2.1), repair (see 6.5.4.5.3) or remanufacture (see 6.5.2.4) of the composite IBC.
6.5.2.2.5 Where a composite IBC is designed in such a manner that the outer packaging is intended to be dismantled
for transport when empty (such as for return of the IBC for re-use to the original consignor), each of the parts
intended to be detached when so dismantled shall be marked with the month and year of manufacture and
the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the IBC as specified by the competent
authority (see 6.5.2.1.1.6).
6.5.2.3 Conformity to design type
The marks indicate that the IBCs correspond to a successfully tested design type and that the provisions
referred to in the certificate have been met.
6.5.2.4 Marking of remanufactured composite IBCs (31HZ1)
The marks specified in 6.5.2.1.1 and 6.5.2.2 shall be removed from the original IBC or made permanently
illegible and new marks shall be applied to an IBC remanufactured in accordance with these provisions of
this Code.
6.5.3 Construction requirements
6.5.3.1 General requirements
6.5.3.1.1 IBCs shall be resistant to or adequately protected from deterioration due to the external environment.
6.5.3.1.2 IBCs shall be so constructed and closed that none of the contents can escape under normal conditions of
transport, including the effects of vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure.
6.5.3.1.3 IBCs and their closures shall be constructed of materials compatible with their contents, or be protected
internally, so that they are not liable:
.1 to be attacked by the contents so as to make their use dangerous;
.2 to cause the contents to react or decompose, or form harmful or dangerous compounds with the IBCs.
6.5.3.1.4 Gaskets, where used, shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the contents of an IBC.
6.5.3.1.5 All service equipment shall be so positioned or protected as to minimize the risk of escape of the contents
owing to damage during handling and transport.
6.5.3.1.6 IBCs, their attachments and their service and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand, without
loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal handling and transport.
IBCs intended for stacking shall be designed for stacking. Any lifting or securing features of IBCs shall be of
sufficient strength to withstand the normal conditions of handling and transport without gross distortion or
failure and shall be so positioned that no undue stress is caused in any part of the IBC.
6.5.3.1.7 Where an IBC consists of a body within a framework, it shall be so constructed that:
.1 the body does not chafe or rub against the framework so as to cause material damage to the body,
.2 the body is retained within the framework at all times,
.3 the items of equipment are fixed in such a way that they cannot be damaged if the connections between
body and frame allow relative expansion or movement.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.3.1.8 Where a bottom discharge valve is fitted, it shall be capable of being made secure in the closed position and
the whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage. Valves having lever closures shall be
able to be secured against accidental opening and the open or closed position shall be readily apparent. For
IBCs containing liquids, a secondary means of sealing the discharge aperture shall also be provided, such as
by a blank flange or equivalent device.
6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection
6.5.4.1 Quality assurance
IBCs shall be manufactured, remanufactured, repaired and tested under a quality assurance programme
which satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each manufactured, remanufactured or
repaired IBC meets the provisions of this chapter.
Note: ISO 16106:2020, Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate
bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001, provides acceptable
guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.5.4.2 Test provisions
IBCs shall be subjected to design type tests and, if applicable, to initial and periodic inspections and tests in
accordance with 6.5.4.4.
6.5.4.3 Certification
In respect of each design type of IBC, a certificate and mark (as in 6.5.2) shall be issued attesting that the
design type, including its equipment, meets the test provisions.
6.5.4.4 Inspection and testing
Note: See also 6.5.4.5 for tests and inspections on repaired IBCs.
6.5.4.4.1 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC shall be inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority:
.1 before it is put into service (including after remanufactured), and thereafter at intervals not exceeding five
years, with regard to:
.1 conformity to the design type, including marks;
.2 internal and external condition; and
.3 proper functioning of service equipment.
Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the
body of the IBC.
.2 at intervals of not more than two and a half years with regard to:
.1 external condition; and
.2 proper functioning of service equipment.
Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper examination of the
body of the IBC.
Each IBC shall correspond in all respects to its design type.
6.5.4.4.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC for liquids, or for solids which are filled or discharged under
pressure, shall undergo a suitable leakproofness test. This test is part of a quality assurance programme as
stipulated in 6.5.4.1 which shows the capability of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.5.6.7.3:
(a) before it is first used for transport;
(b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years.
For this test the IBC shall be fitted with the primary bottom closure. The inner receptacle of a composite IBC
may be tested without the outer casing, provided the test results are not affected.
6.5.4.4.3 A report of each inspection and test shall be kept by the owner of the IBC at least until the next inspection or
test. The report shall include the results of the inspection and test and shall identify the party performing the
inspection and test (see also the marking requirements in 6.5.2.2.1).
6.5.4.4.4 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this chapter, that the IBCs
meet the provisions of the design type tests.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.4.5 Repaired IBCs
6.5.4.5.1 When an IBC is impaired as a result of impact (e.g. accident) or any other cause, it shall be repaired or
otherwise maintained (see definition of “Routine maintenance of IBCs” in 1.2.1), so as to conform to the design
type. The bodies of rigid plastics IBCs and the inner receptacles of composite IBCs that are impaired shall be
replaced.
6.5.4.5.2 In addition to any other testing and inspection requirements in this Code, an IBC shall be subjected to the full
testing and inspection requirements set out in 6.5.4.4, and the required reports shall be prepared, whenever
it is repaired.
6.5.4.5.3 The party performing the tests and inspections after the repair shall durably mark the IBC near the
manufacturer’s UN design type marks to show:
.1 the State in which the tests and inspections were carried out;
.2 the name or authorized symbol of the party performing the tests and inspections; and
.3 the date (month, year) of the tests and inspections.
6.5.4.5.4 Tests and inspections performed in accordance with 6.5.4.5.2 may be considered to satisfy the requirements
for the 2.5- and 5-year periodic tests and inspections.
6.5.5 Specific provisions for IBCs
6.5.5.1 Specific provisions for metal IBCs
6.5.5.1.1 These provisions apply to metal IBCs for the transport of liquids and solids. There are three categories of
metal IBCs:
.1 those for solids which are filled and discharged by gravity (11A, 11B, 11N);
.2 those for solids which are filled and discharged at a gauge pressure greater than 10 kPa (21A, 21B, 21N);
and
.3 those for liquids (31A, 31B, 31N).
6.5.5.1.2 Bodies shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully demonstrated. Welds
shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account
when appropriate.
6.5.5.1.3 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals.
6.5.5.1.4 Aluminium IBCs intended for the transport of flammable liquids shall have no movable parts, such as covers,
closures, etc., made of unprotected steel liable to rust, which might cause a dangerous reaction by coming
into frictional or percussive contact with the aluminium.
6.5.5.1.5 Metal IBCs shall be made of metals which meet the following provisions:
.1 For steel, the elongation at fracture, per cent, shall not be less than 10,000/Rm with an absolute minimum
of 20%, where Rm = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the reference steel to be used, in N/mm2.
.2 For aluminium and aluminium alloys, the elongation at fracture, per cent, shall not be less than 10,000/6Rm
with an absolute minimum of 8%.
Specimens used to determine the elongation at fracture shall be taken transversely to the direction of rolling
and be so secured that:
Lo = 5d, or
__
Lo = 5.65√ A
where :
Lo = gauge length of the specimen before the test;
d = diameter; and
A = cross-sectional area of the test specimen.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.5.1.6 Minimum wall thickness
Metal IBCs with a capacity of more than 1,500 L shall comply with the following minimum wall thickness
requirement:
.1 For a reference steel having a product of Rm × Ao = 10,000, the wall thickness shall not be less than:
Wall thickness (T) in mm
Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N
Unprotected Protected Unprotected Protected
T = C/2,000 + 1.5 T = C/2,000 + 1.0 T = C/1,000 + 1.0 T = C/2,000 + 1.5
where: Ao = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the reference steel to be used on fracture under
tensile stress (see 6.5.5.1.5).
C = the capacity in litres
.2 For metals other than the reference steel described in .1, the minimum wall thickness is given by the
following equivalence formula:
21.4 × e0
e1 = _________
_________
√ Rm1 × A1
3
where:
e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be used (in mm);
e0 = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel (in mm);
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (in N/mm2) (see .3); and
A1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture under tensile
stress (see 6.5.5.1.5).
However, in no case shall the wall thickness be less than 1.5 mm.
.3 For purposes of the calculation described in .2, the guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to
be used (Rm1) shall be the minimum value according to national or international material standards.
However, for austenitic steels, the specified minimum value for Rm according to the material standards
may be increased by up to 15% when a greater value is attested in the material inspection certificate.
When no material standard exists for the material in question, the value of Rm shall be the minimum value
attested in the material inspection certificate.
6.5.5.1.7 Pressure relief provisions
IBCs for liquids shall be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapour in the event of fire engulfment to
ensure that no rupture of the shell will occur. This can be achieved by conventional pressure relief devices or
by other constructional means. The start-to-discharge pressure shall not be higher than 65 kPa and no lower
than the total gauge pressure experienced in the IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the
partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55°C, determined on the basis of a maximum
degree of filling as defined in 4.1.1.4. The pressure relief devices shall be fitted in the vapour space.
6.5.5.2 Specific provisions for flexible IBCs
6.5.5.2.1 These provisions apply to flexible IBCs of the following types:
13H1 woven plastics without coating or liner
13H2 woven plastics, coated
13H3 woven plastics with liner
13H4 woven plastics, coated and with liner
13H5 plastics film
13L1 textile without coating or liner
13L2 textile, coated
13L3 textile with liner
13L4 textile, coated and with liner
13M1 paper, multiwall
13M2 paper, multiwall, water-resistant.
Flexible IBCs are intended for the transport of solids only.
6.5.5.2.2 Bodies of IBCs shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the construction
of a flexible IBC shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.5.2.3 All materials used in the construction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1 and 13M2 shall, after complete immersion
in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85% of the tensile strength as measured originally on the
material conditioned to equilibrium at 67% relative humidity or less.
6.5.5.2.4 Seams of IBCs shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, gluing or any equivalent method. All stitched
seam-ends shall be secured.
6.5.5.2.5 Flexible IBCs shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation,
by climatic conditions, or by the substance contained within which would thereby render them unsuitable for
their intended use.
6.5.5.2.6 For plastics flexible IBCs where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the
addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the
contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body of the IBC. Where use is made of carbon black,
pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be
waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely
affect the physical properties of the material of construction.
6.5.5.2.7 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve
other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the
material.
6.5.5.2.8 No material recovered from used receptacles shall be used in the manufacture of IBC bodies. Production
residues or scrap from the same manufacturing process may, however, be used. Component parts such as
fittings and pallet bases may also be used provided such components have not in any way been damaged in
previous use.
6.5.5.2.9 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1.
6.5.5.2.10 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of
the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joints and closures shall be
sift-proof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of
handling and transport.
6.5.5.3 Specific provisions for rigid plastics IBCs
6.5.5.3.1 These provisions apply to rigid plastics IBCs for the transport of solids or liquids. Rigid plastics IBCs are of
the following types:
11H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,
for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity
11H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity
21H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,
for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure
21H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure
31H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,
for liquids
31H2 freestanding, for liquids.
6.5.5.3.2 The body shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of adequate
strength in relation to its capacity and to the service it is required to perform. Except for recycled plastics
material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same
manufacturing process may be used. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation
caused by the substance contained within or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low-temperature
performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance contained
within shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.
6.5.5.3.3 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black
or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain
effective throughout the life of the body of the IBC. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors
other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if changes in
the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical
properties of the material of construction.
6.5.5.3.4 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve other
purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the material.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.5.4 Specific provisions for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles
6.5.5.4.1 These provisions apply to composite IBCs for the transport of solids or liquids of the following types:
11HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by gravity
11HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by gravity
21HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under
pressure
21HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under
pressure
31HZ1 composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for liquids
31HZ2 composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for liquids.
This code shall be completed by replacing the letter ‘Z’ by a capital letter in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1.2 to
indicate the nature of the material used for the outer packaging.
6.5.5.4.2 The inner receptacle is not intended to perform a containment function without its outer packaging. A “rigid”
inner receptacle is a receptacle which retains its general shape when empty without closures in place and
without the benefit of the outer packaging. Any inner receptacle that is not “rigid” is considered to be “flexible”.
6.5.5.4.3 The outer packaging normally consists of rigid material formed so as to protect the inner receptacle from
physical damage during handling and transport, but is not intended to perform the containment function. It
includes the base pallet where appropriate.
6.5.5.4.4 A composite IBC with a fully enclosing outer packaging shall be so designed that the integrity of the inner
receptacle may be readily assessed following the leakproofness and hydraulic tests.
6.5.5.4.5 IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall be limited to a capacity of not more than 1,250 L.
6.5.5.4.6 The inner receptacle shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and
be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and to the service it is required to perform. Except for
recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from
the same manufacturing process may be used. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to
degradation caused by the substance contained and, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low-temperature
performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance contained shall
not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.
6.5.5.4.7 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black
or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain
effective throughout the life of the inner receptacle. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors
other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes
in carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical
properties of the material of construction.
6.5.5.4.8 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the inner receptacle to improve the resistance to ageing or to
serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the
material.
6.5.5.4.9 The inner receptacle of IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall consist of at least three plies of film.
6.5.5.4.10 The strength of the material and the construction of the outer packaging shall be appropriate to the capacity
of the composite IBC and its intended use.
6.5.5.4.11 The outer packaging shall be free of any projection that might damage the inner receptacle.
6.5.5.4.12 Outer packagings of steel or aluminium shall be constructed of a suitable metal of adequate thickness.
6.5.5.4.13 Outer packagings of natural wood shall be of well-seasoned wood, commercially dry and free from defects
that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the packaging. The tops and bottoms may be made of
water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.
6.5.5.4.14 Outer packagings of plywood shall be made of well-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn veneer plywood,
commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the packaging. All adjacent
plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used in conjunction with
plywood for the construction of packagings. Packagings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or
ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.
6.5.5.4.15 The walls of outer packagings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood
such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. Other parts of the packagings may be made of other
suitable material.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.5.4.16 For fibreboard outer packagings, strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single
or multiwall) shall be used appropriate to the capacity of the packaging and to its intended use. The water
resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out
over 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m2 – see
ISO 535:2014. It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and
slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated
fibreboard shall be firmly glued by water-resistant adhesive to the facings.
6.5.5.4.17 The ends of fibreboard outer packagings may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood. Reinforcements
of wooden battens may be used.
6.5.5.4.18 Manufacturing joins in the fibreboard outer packagings shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and
stitched with metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap. Where closing is effected by
gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used.
6.5.5.4.19 Where the outer packagings are of plastics material, the relevant provisions of 6.5.5.4.6 to 6.5.5.4.8 shall
apply.
6.5.5.4.20 The outer packagings of IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall enclose the inner receptacle on all sides.
6.5.5.4.21 Any integral pallet base forming part of the IBC or a detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical handling
with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.5.5.4.22 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might
be liable to damage in handling.
6.5.5.4.23 The outer packagings shall be secured to a detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport.
Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the
IBC.
6.5.5.4.24 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be
external to the inner receptacle.
6.5.5.4.25 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surfaces shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe
manner. Such IBCs shall be designed so that the load is not supported by the inner receptacle.
6.5.5.5 Specific provisions for fibreboard IBCs
6.5.5.5.1 These provisions apply to fibreboard IBCs for the transport of solids which are filled or discharged by gravity.
Fibreboard IBCs are of the following type: 11G.
6.5.5.5.2 Fibreboard IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices.
6.5.5.5.3 The body shall be made of strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or
multiwall), appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer
surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes
by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m2 – see ISO 535:2014. It shall
have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit
assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be
firmly glued to the facings.
6.5.5.5.4 The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J, measured according
to ISO 3036:1975.
6.5.5.5.5 Manufacturing joins in the body of IBCs shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped, glued,
stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective. Where joins are effected by
gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal staples shall pass completely through all pieces
to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them.
6.5.5.5.6 The liner shall be made of suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the liner
shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and its intended use. Joins and closures shall be sift-proof
and capable of withstanding pressure and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and
transport.
6.5.5.5.7 Any integral pallet base forming part of the IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical
handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.5.5.5.8 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might
be liable to damage in handling.
6.5.5.5.9 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a
detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.5.5.10 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be
external to the liner.
6.5.5.5.11 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe
manner.
6.5.5.6 Specific provisions for wooden IBCs
6.5.5.6.1 These provisions apply to wooden IBCs for the transport of solids which are filled or discharged by gravity.
Wooden IBCs are of the following types:
11C natural wood with inner liner
11D plywood with inner liner
11F reconstituted wood with inner liner.
6.5.5.6.2 Wooden IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices.
6.5.5.6.3 The strength of the materials used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and
intended use of the IBC.
6.5.5.6.4 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the
strength of any part of the IBC. Each part of the IBC shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts
are considered equivalent to one piece, when:
– a suitable method of glued assembly, as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship
lap or rabbet joint is used; or
– a butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint is used; or
– other methods at least equally effective are used.
6.5.5.6.5 Bodies of plywood shall be at least three-ply. It shall be made of well-seasoned rotary-cut, sliced or sawn
veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the body. All
adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with
plywood for the construction of the body.
6.5.5.6.6 Bodies of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard,
particle board or other suitable type.
6.5.5.6.7 IBCs shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.
6.5.5.6.8 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of the
liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and its intended use. Joins and closures shall be sift-proof
and capable of withstanding pressure and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and
transport.
6.5.5.6.9 Any integral pallet base forming part of the IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical
handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.5.5.6.10 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that might
be liable to damage in handling.
6.5.5.6.11 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a
detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.
6.5.5.6.12 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be
external to the liner.
6.5.5.6.13 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a safe
manner.
6.5.6 Test provisions for IBCs
6.5.6.1 Performance and frequency of tests
6.5.6.1.1 Each IBC design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being used. An IBC
design type is defined by the design, size and material and thickness, manner of construction and means of
filling and discharging, but may include various surface treatments; it also includes IBCs which differ from the
design type only in their lesser external dimensions.
6.5.6.1.2 Tests shall be carried out on IBCs as prepared for transport. IBCs shall be filled as indicated in the relevant
section. The substances to be transported in the IBCs may be replaced by other substances except where
this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used, it shall have the
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be transported. It is permissible to
use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package gross mass, so long as they
are placed so that the test results are not affected.
6.5.6.2 Design type tests
6.5.6.2.1 One IBC of each design type, size, wall thickness and manner of construction shall be submitted to the tests
in the order shown in 6.5.6.3.5 and as set out in 6.5.6.4 to 6.5.6.13. These design type tests shall be carried
out as required by the competent authority.
6.5.6.2.2 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of IBCs which differ only in minor respects from the
tested type, such as with small reductions in external dimensions.
6.5.6.2.3 If detachable pallets are used in the tests, the test report issued in accordance with 6.5.6.14 shall include a
technical description of the pallets to be used.
6.5.6.3 Preparation of IBC for testing
6.5.6.3.1 Paper and fibreboard IBCs and composite IBCs with fibreboard outer packagings shall be conditioned for at
least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three
options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23°C±2°C and 50%±2% r.h. The two
other options are 20°C±2°C and 65%±2% r.h. or 27°C±2°C and 65%±2% r.h.
Note: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuations and measurement limitations may
cause individual measurements to vary by up to ±5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test
reproducibility.
6.5.6.3.2 Additional steps shall be taken to ascertain that the plastics material used in the manufacture of rigid plastics
IBCs of types 31H1 and 31H2 and composite IBCs of type 31HZ1 and 31HZ2 complies with the provisions of
6.5.5.3.2 to 6.5.5.3.4 and 6.5.5.4.6 to 6.5.5.4.8.
6.5.6.3.3 This may be done, for example, by submitting sample IBCs to a preliminary test extending over a long period,
for example six months, during which the samples would remain filled with the substances they are intended
to contain or with substances which are known to have at least as severe a stress-cracking, weakening or
molecular degradation influence on the plastics materials in question, and after which the samples shall be
submitted to the applicable tests listed in the table in 6.5.6.3.5.
6.5.6.3.4 Where the behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above compatibility
test may be dispensed with.
6.5.6.3.5 Design type tests required in sequential order:
Bottom Leak- Hydraulic
Type of IBC Vibrationf Top lifta Stackingb Drop Tear Topple Rightingc
lift proofness pressure
Metal:
11A, 11B, 11N – 1sta 2nd 3rd – – 4the – – –
21A, 21B, 21N – 1sta 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6the – – –
31A, 31B, 31N 1st 2nda 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7the – – –
Flexibled – – xc x – – x x x x
Rigid plastics:
11H1, 11H2 – 1sta 2nd 3rd – – 4th – – –
21H1, 21H2 – 1sta 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th – – –
31H1, 31H2 1st 2nda 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th – – –
Composite:
11HZ1, 11HZ2 – 1sta 2nd 3rd – – 4the – – –
21HZ1, 21HZ2 – 1sta 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6the – – –
31HZ1, 31HZ2 1st 2nda 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7the – – –
Fibreboard – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – –
Wooden – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – –
When IBCs are designed for this method of handling.
When IBCs are designed to be stacked.
When IBCs are designed to be lifted from the top or the side.
Required test indicated by “x”; an IBC which has passed one test may be used for other tests, in any order.
Another IBC of the same design may be used for the drop test.
Another IBC of the same design may be used for the vibration test.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.6.4 Bottom lift test
6.5.6.4.1 Applicability
For all fibreboard and wooden IBCs and for all types of IBCs which are fitted with means for lifting from the
base, as a design type test.
6.5.6.4.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled. A load shall be added and evenly distributed. The mass of filled IBC and the load shall
be 1.25 times its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.5.6.4.3 Method of testing
The IBC shall be raised and lowered twice by a forklift truck with the forks centrally positioned so that the
space between them is three quarters of the length of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed).
The forks shall penetrate to three quarters of the depth in the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated
from each possible direction of entry.
6.5.6.4.4 Criteria for passing the test
No permanent deformation which renders the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and
no loss of contents.
6.5.6.5 Top lift test
6.5.6.5.1 Applicability
For all types of IBCs which are designed to be lifted from the top, and for flexible IBCs designed to be lifted
from the top or the side, as a design type test.
6.5.6.5.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be filled. A load shall be added and evenly distributed. The
mass of filled IBC and the load shall be twice the maximum permissible gross mass. Flexible IBCs shall be
filled with a representative material and then shall be loaded to six times their maximum permissible gross
mass, the load being evenly distributed.
6.5.6.5.3 Method of testing
Metal and flexible IBCs shall be lifted in the manner for which they are designed until clear of the floor and
maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.
Rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be lifted:
.1 by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied vertically, for a
period of five minutes; and
.2 by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied towards the
centre at 45° to the vertical, for a period of five minutes.
6.5.6.5.4 Other methods of top-lift testing and preparation at least equally effective may be used for flexible IBCs.
6.5.6.5.5 Criteria for passing the test
.1 Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC remains safe for normal conditions of transport, there
is no observable permanent deformation of the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, and no loss of
contents.
.2 Flexible IBCs: no damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for transport or
handling and no loss of contents.
6.5.6.6 Stacking test
6.5.6.6.1 Applicability
For all types of IBCs which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test.
6.5.6.6.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. If the specific gravity of the product being
used for testing makes this impracticable, the IBC shall additionally be loaded so that it is tested at its
maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.6.6.3 Method of testing
.1 The IBC shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed
superimposed test load (see 6.5.6.6.4). IBCs shall be subjected to the test load for a period of at least:
– 5 minutes, for metal IBCs;
– 28 days at 40°C, for rigid plastics IBCs of types 11H2, 21H2 and 31H2 and for composite IBCs with
outer packagings of plastics material which bear the stacking load (i.e. types 11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1,
21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2);
– 24 hours, for all other types of IBCs.
.2 The load shall be applied by one of the following methods:
– one or more IBCs of the same type, filled to the maximum permissible gross mass, stacked on the
test IBC;
– appropriate mass loaded on to either a flat plate or a reproduction of the base of the IBC, which is
stacked on the test IBC.
6.5.6.6.4 Calculation of superimposed test load
The load to be placed on the IBC shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of the
number of similar IBCs that may be stacked on top of the IBC during transport.
6.5.6.6.5 Criteria for passing the test
.1 All types of IBCs other than flexible IBCs: no permanent deformation which renders the IBC, including the
base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.
.2 Flexible IBCs: no deterioration of the body which renders the IBC unsafe for transport and no loss of
contents.
6.5.6.7 Leakproofness test
6.5.6.7.1 Applicability
For those types of IBCs used for liquids, or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type
test and a periodic test.
6.5.6.7.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. Vented closures shall
either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed.
6.5.6.7.3 Method of testing and pressure to be applied
The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes, using air at a gauge pressure of not less than
20 kPa (0.2 bar). The airtightness of the IBC shall be determined by a suitable method such as air-pressure
differential test or by immersing the IBC in water, or for metal IBCs, by coating the seams and joints with a
soap solution. In the latter case, a correction factor shall be applied for the hydrostatic pressure.
6.5.6.7.4 Criterion for passing the test
No leakage of air.
6.5.6.8 Hydraulic pressure test
6.5.6.8.1 Applicability
For those types of IBCs used for liquids or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type test.
6.5.6.8.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. Pressure relief devices
shall be removed and their apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative.
6.5.6.8.3 Method of testing
The test shall be carried out for a period of at least ten minutes, applying a hydraulic pressure of not less than
that indicated in 6.5.6.8.4. The IBC shall not be mechanically restrained during the test.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.6.8.4 Pressures to be applied
6.5.6.8.4.1 Metal IBCs:
.1 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B and 21N, for packing group I solids, a 250 kPa (2.5 bar) gauge pressure;
.2 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, for packing groups II or III substances, a 200 kPa
(2 bar) gauge pressure;
.3 In addition, for IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, a 65 kPa (0.65 bar) gauge pressure. This test shall be
performed before the 200 kPa (2 bar) test.
6.5.6.8.4.2 Rigid plastics and composite IBCs:
.1 For IBCs of types 21H1, 21H2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (0.75 bar) gauge;
.2 For IBCs of types 31H1, 31H2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever is the greater of two values, the first as
determined by one of the following methods:
– the total gauge pressure measured in the IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance and
the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55°C multiplied by a safety
factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of
filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of 15°C; or
– 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50°C of the substance to be transported minus 100 kPa, but with
a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; or
– 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55°C of the substance to be transported minus 100 kPa, but with a
minimum test pressure of 100 kPa;
and the second as determined by the following method:
– twice the static pressure of the substance to be transported, with a minimum of twice the static
pressure of water.
6.5.6.8.5 Criteria for passing the test(s)
.1 For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in
6.5.6.8.4.1.1 or .2: no leakage;
.2 For IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified in 6.5.6.8.4.1.3:
neither permanent deformation which would render the IBC unsafe for transport nor leakage; and
.3 For rigid plastics and composite IBCs: no permanent deformation which would render the IBC unsafe for
transport and no leakage.
6.5.6.9 Drop test
6.5.6.9.1 Applicability
For all types of IBCs, as a design type test.
6.5.6.9.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
.1 Metal IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity for solids or 98% of its
maximum capacity for liquids. Pressure relief devices shall be rendered inoperative or shall be removed
and their apertures sealed.
.2 Flexible IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to the maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being evenly
distributed.
.3 Rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity
for solids or 98% of its maximum capacity for liquids. Arrangements provided for pressure relief may be
removed and sealed or rendered inoperative. Testing of IBCs shall be carried out when the temperature of
the test sample and its contents has been reduced to -18°C or lower. Where test samples of composite
IBCs are prepared in this way, the conditioning specified in 6.5.6.3.1 may be waived. Test liquids shall be
kept in the liquid state, if necessary by the addition of anti-freeze. This conditioning may be disregarded
if the materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures.
.4 Fibreboard and wooden IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its maximum capacity.
6.5.6.9.3 Method of testing
The IBC shall be dropped on its base onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in
conformity with the requirements of 6.1.5.3.4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is that
part of the base of the IBC considered to be the most vulnerable. IBCs of 0.45 m3 or less capacity shall also
be dropped:
.1 Metal IBCs: on the most vulnerable part other than the part of the base of the IBC tested in the first drop;
.2 Flexible IBCs: on the most vulnerable side;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.3 Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: flat on a side, flat on the top and on a corner.
The same IBC or a different IBC of the same design may be used for each drop.
6.5.6.9.4 Drop height
For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be transported or with another
substance having essentially the same physical characteristics:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
For liquids, if the test is performed with water:
(a) where the substances to be transported have a relative density not exceeding 1.2:
Packing group II Packing group III
1.2 m 0.8 m
(b) where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop heights shall be
calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be transported rounded up to the
first decimal as follows:
Packing group II Packing group III
d × 1.0 m d × 0.67 m
6.5.6.9.5 Criteria for passing the test(s)
.1 Metal IBCs: no loss of contents.
.2 Flexible IBCs: no loss of contents. A slight discharge, such as from closures or stitch holes, upon impact
shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs after the IBC
has been raised clear of the ground.
.3 Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: no loss of contents. A slight discharge from a
closure upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage
occurs.
.4 All IBCs: no damage which renders the IBC unsafe to be transported for salvage or for disposal, and no
loss of contents. In addition, the IBC shall be capable of being lifted by an appropriate means until clear
of the floor for five minutes.
Note: The criterion in 6.5.6.9.5.4 applies to design types for IBCs manufactured as from 1 January 2011.
6.5.6.10 Tear test
6.5.6.10.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible IBCs, as a design type test.
6.5.6.10.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the
contents being evenly distributed.
6.5.6.10.3 Method of testing
Once the IBC is placed on the ground, a 100 mm knife score, completely penetrating the wall of a wide face,
is made at a 45° angle to the principal axis of the IBC, halfway between the bottom surface and the top level
of the contents. The IBC shall then be subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed load equivalent to
twice the maximum permissible gross mass. The load shall be applied for at least five minutes. An IBC which
is designed to be lifted from the top or the side shall then, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted
until it is clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.
6.5.6.10.4 Criterion for passing the test
The cut shall not propagate more than 25% of its original length.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.5.6.11 Topple test
6.5.6.11.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible IBCs, as a design type test.
6.5.6.11.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass, the
contents being evenly distributed.
6.5.6.11.3 Method of testing
The IBC shall be caused to topple onto any part of its top onto a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and horizontal
surface.
6.5.6.11.4 Topple height
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
6.5.6.11.5 Criterion for passing the test
No loss of contents. A slight discharge, such as from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be
considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs.
6.5.6.12 Righting test
6.5.6.12.1 Applicability
For all flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or side, as a design type test.
6.5.6.12.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95% of its capacity and its maximum permissible gross mass, the
contents being evenly distributed.
6.5.6.12.3 Method of testing
The IBC, lying on its side, shall be lifted at a speed of 0.1 m/s to an upright position, clear of the floor, by one
lifting device or by two lifting devices when four are provided.
6.5.6.12.4 Criterion for passing the test
No damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for transport or handling.
6.5.6.13 Vibration test
6.5.6.13.1 Applicability
For all IBCs used for liquids, as a design type test.
Note: This test applies to design types for IBCs manufactured as from 1 January 2011.
6.5.6.13.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
A sample IBC shall be selected at random and shall be fitted and closed as for transport. The IBC shall be
filled with water to not less than 98% of its maximum capacity.
6.5.6.13.3 Test method and duration
6.5.6.13.3.1 The IBC shall be placed in the centre of the test machine platform with a vertical sinusoidal, double amplitude
(peak-to-peak displacement) of 25 mm ± 5%. If necessary, restraining devices shall be attached to the platform
to prevent the specimen from moving horizontally off the platform without restricting vertical movement.
6.5.6.13.3.2 The test shall be conducted for one hour at a frequency that causes part of the base of the IBC to be
momentarily raised from the vibrating platform for part of each cycle to such a degree that a metal shim can
be completely inserted intermittently at, at least, one point between the base of the IBC and the test platform.
The frequency may need to be adjusted after the initial set point to prevent the packaging from going into
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
resonance. Nevertheless, the test frequency shall continue to allow placement of the metal shim under the
IBC as described in this paragraph. The continuing ability to insert the metal shim is essential to passing the
test. The metal shim used for this test shall be at least 1.6 mm thick, 50 mm wide, and be of sufficient length
to be inserted between the IBC and the test platform a minimum of 100 mm to perform the test.
6.5.6.13.4 Criteria for passing the test
No leakage or rupture shall be observed. In addition, no breakage or failure of structural components, such
as broken welds or failed fastenings, shall be observed.
6.5.6.14 Test report
6.5.6.14.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users
of the IBC:
.1 name and address of the test facility;
.2 name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
.3 a unique test report identification;
.4 date of the test report;
.5 manufacturer of the IBC;
.6 description of the IBC design type (such as dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.), including
method of manufacture (such as blow-moulding), and which may include drawing(s) and/or photograph(s);
.7 maximum capacity;
.8 characteristics of test contents, such as viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size
for solids. For rigid plastics and composite IBCs subject to the hydraulic pressure test in 6.5.6.8, the
temperature of the water used;
.9 test descriptions and results; and
.10 signature, with the name and status of the signatory.
6.5.6.14.2 The test report shall contain statements that the IBC, prepared as for transport, was tested in accordance
with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or components
may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.6
Provisions for the construction and testing
of large packagings
6.6.1 General
6.6.1.1 The provisions of this chapter do not apply to:
– class 2, except articles including aerosols;
– class 6.2, except clinical waste of UN 3291;
– class 7 packages containing radioactive material.
6.6.1.2 Large packagings shall be manufactured, tested and remanufactured under a quality-assurance programme
which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each manufactured or remanufactured large
packaging meets the provisions of this chapter.
Note: ISO 16106:2020, Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings, intermediate
bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001, provides acceptable
guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.6.1.3 The specific requirements for large packagings in 6.6.4 are based on large packagings currently used. In
order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of large
packagings having specifications different from those in 6.6.4 provided they are equally effective, acceptable
to the competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the provisions described in 6.6.5. Methods of testing
other than those prescribed in this Code are acceptable provided they are equivalent.
6.6.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding procedures to
be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and any
other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for transport are capable of passing the
applicable performance tests of this chapter.
6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings
6.6.2.1 The code used for large packagings consists of:
(a) two Arabic numerals:
“50” for rigid large packagings; or
“51” for flexible large packagings; and
(b) capital letters in Latin characters indicating the nature of the material, such as wood, steel, etc. The
capital letters used shall be those shown in 6.1.2.6.
6.6.2.2 The letters “T” or “W” may follow the large packaging code. The letter “T” signifies a large salvage packaging
conforming to the requirements of 6.6.5.1.9. The letter “W” signifies that the large packaging, although of the
same type as indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in 6.6.4 and is
considered equivalent in accordance with the requirements in 6.6.1.3.
6.6.3 Marking
6.6.3.1 Primary marking
Each large packaging manufactured and intended for the use according to this Code shall bear marks which
are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters, numerals and symbols shall
be at least 12 mm high and shall show:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol:
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk
container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6.1, 6.2, 6.3,
6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9. For metal large packagings on which the marks are stamped or embossed, the capital
letters “UN” may apply instead of the symbol.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(b) The code “50” designating a large rigid packaging or “51” for flexible large packagings, followed by the
material type in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1.2.
(c) A capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved:
“X” for packing groups I, II and III
“Y” for packing groups II and III
“Z” for packing group III only.
(d) The month and year (last two digits) of manufacture.
(e) The State authorizing the allocation of the marks, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in
international road traffic.
(f) The name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the large packagings as specified by
the competent authority.
(g) The stacking test load in kilograms. For large packagings not designed for stacking, the figure “0” shall
be shown.
(h) The maximum permissible gross mass in kilograms.
The primary mark required above shall be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs. Each mark applied
in accordance with subparagraphs (a) to (h) shall be clearly separated, such as by a slash or space, so as to
be easily identifiable.
6.6.3.2 Examples of marking
50A/X/05 01/N/PQRS For a large steel packaging suitable for stacking; stacking load:
2500/1000 2,500 kg; maximum gross mass: 1,000 kg.
50AT/Y/05/01/B/PQRS For a large steel salvage packaging suitable for stacking; stacking
2500/1000 load: 2,500 kg; maximum gross mass: 1,000 kg.
50H/Y/04 02/D/ABCD 987 For a large plastics packaging not suitable for stacking; maximum
0/800 gross mass: 800 kg.
51H/Z/06 01/S/1999 For a large flexible packaging not suitable for stacking; maximum
0/500 gross mass: 500 kg.
6.6.3.3 The maximum permitted stacking load applicable shall be displayed on a symbol as shown in the figures
below. The symbol shall be durable and clearly visible.
... kg max
Minimum dimension
Minimum dimension
100 mm
100 mm
Minimum dimension Minimum dimension
100 mm 100 mm
Large packagings capable of being stacked Large packagings NOT capable of being stacked
The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm. The letters and numbers indicating the mass shall be
at least 12 mm high. The area within the printer’s marks indicated by the dimensional arrows shall be square.
Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The mass
marked above the symbol shall not exceed the load imposed during the design type test (see 6.6.5.3.3.4)
divided by 1.8.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Note: The provisions of 6.6.3.3 shall apply to all large packagings manufactured, repaired or remanufactured
as from 1 January 2015. The provisions of 6.6.3.3 of the IMDG Code (amendment 36-12) may continue to be
applied to all large packagings manufactured, repaired or remanufactured between 1 January 2015 and 31
December 2016.
6.6.3.4 Where a large packaging conforms to one or more than one tested large packaging design type, including
one or more than one tested packaging or IBC design type, the large packaging may bear more than one
mark to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark
appears on a large packaging, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall
appear in its entirety.
6.6.4 Specific provisions for large packagings
6.6.4.1 Specific provisions for metal large packagings
50A steel
50B aluminium
50N metal (other than steel or aluminium)
6.6.4.1.1 The large packaging shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully
demonstrated. Welds shall be skillfully made and afford complete safety. Low-temperature performance shall
be taken into account when appropriate.
6.6.4.1.2 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals.
6.6.4.2 Specific provisions for flexible material large packagings
51H flexible plastics
51M flexible paper
6.6.4.2.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the
construction of the flexible large packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use.
6.6.4.2.2 All materials used in the construction of flexible large packagings of types 51M shall, after complete immersion
in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85% of the tensile strength as measured originally on the
material conditioned to equilibrium at 67% relative humidity or less.
6.6.4.2.3 Seams shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, gluing or any equivalent method. All stitched seam-ends
shall be secured.
6.6.4.2.4 Flexible large packagings shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet
radiation or the climatic conditions, or by the substance contained, thereby rendering them appropriate to
their intended use.
6.6.4.2.5 For plastics flexible large packagings where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be
provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be
compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the large packaging. Where use is
made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design
type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor
content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction.
6.6.4.2.6 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing or
to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of
the material.
6.6.4.2.7 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1.
6.6.4.3 Specific provisions for plastics large packagings
50H rigid plastics
6.6.4.3.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and
be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use. The material shall be adequately
resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet
radiation. Low-temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of
the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.
6.6.4.3.2 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon black
or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and remain
effective throughout the life of the outer packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in
the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical
properties of the material of construction.
6.6.4.3.3 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing or
to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of
the material.
6.6.4.4 Specific provisions for fibreboard large packagings
50G rigid fibreboard
6.6.4.4.1 Strong and good-quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used,
appropriate to the capacity of the large packagings and to their intended use. The water resistance of the outer
surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes
by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m2 – see ISO 535:2014. It shall
have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so as to permit
assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be
firmly glued to the facings.
6.6.4.4.2 The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J, measured according
to ISO 3036:1975.
6.6.4.4.3 Manufacturing joins in the outer packaging of large packagings shall be made with an appropriate overlap
and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective.
Where joins are effected by gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal staples shall
pass completely through all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot
be abraded or punctured by them.
6.6.4.4.4 Any integral pallet base forming part of a large packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for
mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.6.4.4.5 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large packaging
that might be liable to damage in handling.
6.6.4.4.6 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a
detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large
packaging.
6.6.4.4.7 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be
external to the liner.
6.6.4.4.8 Where large packagings are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load
in a safe manner.
6.6.4.5 Specific provisions for wooden large packagings
50C natural wood
50D plywood
50F reconstituted wood
6.6.4.5.1 The strength of the materials used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and
intended use of the large packagings.
6.6.4.5.2 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the
strength of any part of the large packaging. Each part of the large packaging shall consist of one piece or be
equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly
is used, as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt joint with at
least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, or when other methods at least equally effective are used.
6.6.4.5.3 Large packagings of plywood shall be at least three-ply. They shall be made of well-seasoned rotary-cut,
sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the
large packaging. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may
be used with plywood for the construction of the large packaging.
6.6.4.5.4 Large packagings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as
hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.
6.6.4.5.5 Large packagings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally
suitable devices.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.6.4.5.6 Any integral pallet base forming part of a large packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for
mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.6.4.5.7 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large packaging
that might be liable to damage in handling.
6.6.4.5.8 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a
detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large
packaging.
6.6.4.5.9 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall be
external to the liner.
6.6.4.5.10 Where large packagings are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load
in a safe manner.
6.6.5 Test provisions for large packagings
6.6.5.1 Performance and frequency of test
6.6.5.1.1 The design type of each large packaging shall be tested as provided in 6.6.5.3 in accordance with procedures
established by the competent authority.
6.6.5.1.2 Each large packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this chapter before being
used. A large packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of
construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes large packagings that
differ from the design type only in their lesser design height.
6.6.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For such
tests on fibreboard large packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to the
provisions of 6.6.5.2.4.
6.6.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of construction
of large packagings.
6.6.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of large packagings that differ only in minor respects
from a tested type, such as smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass, and large
packagings which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s).
6.6.5.1.6 [Reserved]
Note: For the conditions for assembling different inner packagings in a large packaging and permissible
variations in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1.
6.6.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that serially
produced large packagings meet the provisions of the design type tests.
6.6.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected, and with the approval of the competent authority,
several tests may be made on one sample.
6.6.5.1.9 Large salvage packagings
Large salvage packagings shall be tested and marked in accordance with the provisions applicable to packing
group II large packagings intended for the transport of solids or inner packagings, except as follows:
(a) The test substance used in performing the tests shall be water, and the large salvage packagings shall be
filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of
lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed so that the test results
are not affected. Alternatively, in performing the drop test, the drop height may be varied in accordance
with 6.6.5.3.4.4.2(b);
(b) Large salvage packagings shall, in addition, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness test
at 30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6.6.5.4; and
(c) Large salvage packagings shall be marked with the letter “T” as described in 6.6.2.2.
6.6.5.2 Preparation for testing
6.6.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on large packagings prepared as for transport, including the inner packagings or
articles used. Inner packagings shall be filled to not less than 98% of their maximum capacity for liquids or
95% for solids. For large packagings where the inner packagings are designed to carry liquids and solids,
separate testing is required for both liquid and solid contents. The substances in the inner packagings or
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
the articles to be transported in the large packagings may be replaced by other material or articles except
where this would invalidate the results of the tests. When other inner packagings or articles are used, they
shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, etc.) as the inner packagings or articles to be carried. It is
permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long
as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.
6.6.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and viscosity
to those of the substance being transported. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under the
conditions in 6.6.5.3.4.4.
6.6.5.2.3 Large packagings made of plastics materials and large packagings containing inner packagings of plastic
materials – other than bags intended to contain solids or articles – shall be drop tested when the temperature
of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to -18°C or lower. This conditioning may be disregarded
if the materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures. Where test
samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.6.5.2.4 may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the
liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary.
6.6.5.2.4 Large packagings of fibreboard shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a
controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h). There are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The
preferred atmosphere is 23°C±2°C and 50%±2% r.h. The two other options are 20°C±2°C and 65%±2% r.h.
or 27°C±2°C and 65%±2% r.h.
Note: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuation and measurement limitations may
cause individual measurements to vary by up to ±5% relative humidity without significant impairment of test
reproducibility.
6.6.5.3 Test provisions
6.6.5.3.1 Bottom lift test
6.6.5.3.1.1 Applicability
For all types of large packagings which are fitted with means of lifting from the base, as a design type test.
6.6.5.3.1.2 Preparation of large packaging for test
The large packaging shall be filled to 1.25 times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly
distributed.
6.6.5.3.1.3 Method of testing
The large packaging shall be raised and lowered twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned and
spaced at three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed). The forks
shall penetrate to three quarters of the depth in the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated from each
possible direction of entry.
6.6.5.3.1.4 Criteria for passing the test
No permanent deformation which renders the large packaging unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.
6.6.5.3.2 Top lift test
6.6.5.3.2.1 Applicability
For types of large packaging which are intended to be lifted from the top and fitted with means of lifting, as
a design type test.
6.6.5.3.2.2 Preparation of large packaging for test
The large packaging shall be loaded to twice its maximum permissible gross mass. A flexible large packaging
shall be loaded to six times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed.
6.6.5.3.2.3 Method of testing
The large packaging shall be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor and maintained
in that position for a period of five minutes.
6.6.5.3.2.4 Criteria for passing the test
.1 All types of large packagings other than flexible: no permanent deformation which renders the large
packaging, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.
.2 Flexible large packagings: no damage to the large packaging or its lifting devices which renders the large
packaging unsafe for transport or handling and no loss of contents.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.6.5.3.3 Stacking test
6.6.5.3.3.1 Applicability
For all types of large packaging which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test.
6.6.5.3.3.2 Preparation of large packaging for test
The large packaging shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.6.5.3.3.3 Method of testing
The large packaging shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed
superimposed test load (see 6.6.5.3.3.4) for a period of at least five minutes: for large packaging of wood,
fibreboard and plastics materials for a period of 24 hours.
6.6.5.3.3.4 Calculation of superimposed test load
The load to be placed on the large packaging shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross
mass of the number of similar large packagings that may be stacked on top of the large packaging during
transport.
6.6.5.3.3.5 Criteria for passing the test
.1 All types of large packagings other than flexible large packagings: no permanent deformation which
renders the large packaging, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for transport and no loss of contents.
.2 Flexible large packagings: no deterioration of the body which renders the large packaging unsafe for
transport and no loss of contents.
6.6.5.3.4 Drop test
6.6.5.3.4.1 Applicability
For all types of large packaging, as a design type test.
6.6.5.3.4.2 Preparation of large packaging for testing
The large packaging shall be filled in accordance with 6.6.5.2.1.
6.6.5.3.4.3 Method of testing
The large packaging shall be dropped onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in
conformity with the requirements of 6.1.5.3.4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is that
part of the base of the large packaging considered to be the most vulnerable.
6.6.5.3.4.4 Drop height
Note: Large packagings for substances and articles of class 1 shall be tested at the packing group II
performance level.
For inner packagings containing solid or liquid substances or articles, if the test is performed with the
6.6.5.3.4.4.1
solid, liquid or articles to be transported, or with another substance or article having essentially the same
characteristics:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
6.6.5.3.4.4.2 For inner packagings containing liquids if the test is performed with water:
(a) Where the substances to be transported have a relative density not exceeding 1.2:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
(b) Where the substances to be transported have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall
be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to the
first decimal, as follows:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
d × 1.5 m d × 1.0 m d × 0.67 m
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.6.5.3.4.5 Criteria for passing the test
The large packaging shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during transport. There shall be no
6.6.5.3.4.5.1
leakage of the filling substance from inner packaging(s) or article(s).
6.6.5.3.4.5.2 No rupture is permitted in a large packaging for articles of class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose
explosive substances or articles from the large packaging.
6.6.5.3.4.5.3 Where a large packaging undergoes a drop test, the sample passes the test if the entire contents are
retained even if the closure is no longer sift-proof.
6.6.5.4 Certification and test report
6.6.5.4.1 In respect of each design type of large packaging, a certificate and mark (as in 6.6.3) shall be issued attesting
that the design type, including its equipment, meets the test provisions.
6.6.5.4.2 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the users
of the large packaging:
.1 name and address of the test facility;
.2 name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
.3 a unique test report identification;
.4 date of the test report;
.5 manufacturer of the large packaging;
.6 description of the large packaging design type (such as dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.)
and/or photograph(s);
.7 maximum capacity/maximum permissible gross mass;
.8 characteristics of test contents, such as types and descriptions of inner packaging or articles used;
.9 test descriptions and results;
.10 the test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.
6.6.5.4.3 The test report shall contain statements that the large packaging prepared as for transport was tested in
accordance with the appropriate provisions of this chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or
components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Chapter 6.7
Provisions for the design, construction,
inspection and testing of portable tanks
and multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)
Note 1: The provisions of this chapter also apply to road tank vehicles to the extent indicated in chapter 6.8.
Note 2: The provisions of this chapter also apply to portable tanks with shells made of fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP)
to the extent indicated in chapter 6.10.
6.7.1 Application and general provisions
6.7.1.1 The provisions of this chapter apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of dangerous goods, and to
MEGCs intended for the transport of non-refrigerated gases of class 2, by all modes of transport. In addition
to the provisions of this chapter, unless otherwise specified, the applicable provisions of the International
Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention), as amended, shall be fulfilled by any multimodal
portable tank or MEGC which meets the definition of a “container” within the terms of that Convention.
Additional provisions may apply to offshore portable tanks that are handled in open seas.
6.7.1.1.1 The International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC Convention) does not apply to offshore tank-
containers that are handled in open seas. The design and testing of offshore tank-containers shall take into account
the dynamic lifting and impact forces that may occur when a tank is handled in open seas in adverse weather and
sea conditions. The provisions for such tanks shall be determined by the approving competent authority (see also
Guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas (MSC/Circ.860)).
6.7.1.2 In recognition of scientific and technological advances, the technical provisions of this chapter may be varied
by alternative arrangements. These alternative arrangements shall offer a level of safety not less than that
given by the provisions of this chapter with respect to the compatibility with substances transported and
the ability of the portable tank to withstand impact, loading and fire conditions. For international transport,
alternative arrangement portable tanks or MEGCs shall be approved by the applicable competent authorities.
6.7.1.3 When a substance is not assigned a portable tank instruction (T1 to T75) in the Dangerous Goods List in
chapter 3.2, interim approval for transport may be issued by the competent authority of the country of origin.
The approval shall be included in the documentation of the consignment and contain, as a minimum, the
information normally provided in the portable tank instructions and the conditions under which the substance
shall be transported. Appropriate measures shall be initiated by the competent authority to include the
assignment in the Dangerous Goods List.
6.7.2 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks
intended for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9
6.7.2.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this section:
Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure-vessel
code. The design pressure shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures:
.1 the maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or
.2 the sum of:
.1 the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the substance at 65°C (or at the highest temperature during
filling, discharge or transport for substances which are filled, discharged or transported over 65°C),
minus 1 bar;
.2 the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space, being determined by a maximum
ullage temperature of 65°C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk temperature of
tr – tf (tf = filling temperature, usually 15°C; tr = 50°C, maximum mean bulk temperature); and
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.3 a head pressure determined on the basis of the static forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12, but not less than
0.35 bar; or
.3 two thirds of the minimum test pressure specified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6;
Design temperature range for the shell shall be -40°C to 50°C for substances transported under ambient
conditions. For the other substances filled, discharged or transported above 50°C, the design temperature
shall not be less than the maximum temperature of the substance during filling, discharge or transport. More
severe design temperatures shall be considered for portable tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions;
Fine grain steel means steel which has a ferritic grain size of 6 or finer when determined in accordance with
ASTM E 112-96 or as defined in EN 10028-3, Part 3;
Fusible element means a non-reclosable pressure relief device that is thermally actuated;
Leakproofness test means a test using gas, subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective
internal pressure of not less than 25% of the MAWP;
Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest of the
following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position:
.1 the maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or
.2 the maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed, which shall be not less than the
sum of:
.1 the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the substance at 65°C (or at the highest temperature during
filling, discharge or transport for substances which are filled, discharged or transported over 65°C)
minus 1 bar; and
.2 the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space, being determined by a maximum
ullage temperature of 65°C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk temperature of
tr – tf (tf = filling temperature, usually 15°C; tr = 50°C, maximum mean bulk temperature);
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the
heaviest load authorized for transport;
Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm2 to 440 N/mm2 and a
guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.7.2.3.3.3;
Offshore portable tank means a portable tank specially designed for repeated use for transport of dangerous
goods to, from and between offshore facilities. An offshore portable tank is designed and constructed in
accordance with the Guidelines for the approval of offshore containers handled in open seas (MSC/Circ.860).
Portable tank means a multimodal tank used for the transport of substances of class 1 and classes 3 to 9.
The portable tank includes a shell fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the
transport of dangerous substances. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and discharged without
the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the shell, and shall
be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded onto a vehicle or ship and
shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Road tank-vehicles,
rail tank-wagons, non-metallic tanks (except FRP portable tanks, see chapter 6.10), gas cylinders, large
receptacles, and intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) are not considered to fall within this definition;
Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%;
Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, heating, cooling and
insulating devices;
Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the substance intended for transport (tank proper),
including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural
equipment;
Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the
shell;
Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the hydraulic pressure test,
equal to not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The minimum test pressure for portable tanks intended
for specific substances is specified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6.
6.7.2.2 General design and construction provisions
6.7.2.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of a pressure-vessel code
recognized by the competent authority. Shells shall be made of metallic materials suitable for forming. The
materials shall, in principle, conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells, only
a material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skillfully made and
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shells shall
be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat-affected zones. In
choosing the material, the design temperature range shall be taken into account with respect to risk of
brittle fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine grain-steel is used, the
guaranteed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm2 and the guaranteed value of the
upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm2 according to the material specification.
Aluminium may only be used as a construction material when indicated in a portable tank special provision
assigned to a specific substance in the Dangerous Goods List or when approved by the competent authority.
When aluminium is authorized, it shall be insulated to prevent significant loss of physical properties when
subjected to a heat load of 110 kW/m2 for a period of not less than 30 minutes. The insulation shall remain
effective at all temperatures less than 649°C and shall be jacketed with a material with a melting point of not
less than 700°C. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which they may be
transported.
6.7.2.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings, and pipework shall be constructed from materials which are:
.1 substantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to be transported; or
.2 properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction; or
.3 lined with corrosion-resistant material directly bonded to the shell or attached by equivalent means.
6.7.2.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the substance(s) intended to be transported.
6.7.2.2.4 When shells are lined, the lining shall be substantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to
be transported, homogeneous, non-porous, free from perforations, sufficiently elastic and compatible with
the thermal expansion characteristics of the shell. The lining of every shell, shell fittings and piping shall be
continuous, and shall extend around the face of any flange. Where external fittings are welded to the tank, the
lining shall be continuous through the fitting and around the face of external flanges.
6.7.2.2.5 Joints and seams in the lining shall be made by fusing the material together or by other equally effective
means.
6.7.2.2.6 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.7.2.2.7 The materials of the portable tank, including any devices, gaskets, linings and accessories, shall not adversely
affect the substance(s) intended to be transported in the portable tank.
6.7.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport
and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments.
6.7.2.2.9 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to
the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport.
The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads
through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account.
6.7.2.2.9.1 For portable tanks that are intended for use as offshore tank-containers, the dynamic stresses imposed by
handling in open seas shall be taken into account.
6.7.2.2.10 A shell which is to be equipped with a vacuum-relief device shall be designed to withstand, without permanent
deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0.21 bar above the internal pressure. The vacuum-relief
device shall be set to relieve at a vacuum setting not greater than -0.21 bar unless the shell is designed for a
higher external overpressure, in which case the vacuum-relief pressure of the device to be fitted shall be not
greater than the tank design vacuum pressure. A shell used for the transport of solid substances of packing
groups II or III only which do not liquefy during transport may be designed for a lower external pressure,
subject to competent authority’s approval. In this case, the vacuum-relief device shall be set to relieve at this
lower pressure. A shell that is not to be fitted with a vacuum-relief device shall be designed to withstand,
without permanent deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0.4 bar above the internal pressure.
6.7.2.2.11 Vacuum-relief devices used on portable tanks intended for the transport of substances meeting the flashpoint
criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature substances transported at or above their flashpoint, shall
prevent the immediate passage of flame into the shell, or the portable tank shall have a shell capable of
withstanding, without leakage, an internal explosion resulting from the passage of flame into the shell.
6.7.2.2.12 Portable tanks and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing the
following separately applied static forces:
.1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);
.2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly
determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);*
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g); and
.4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the
acceleration due to gravity (g).*
6.7.2.2.13 Under each of the forces in 6.7.2.2.12, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows:
.1 for metals having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield
strength; or
.2 for metals with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed
0.2% proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength.
6.7.2.2.14 The value of yield strength or proof strength shall be the value according to national or international material
standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values of yield strength or proof strength
according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested
in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, the value of
yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent authority.
6.7.2.2.15 Portable tanks shall be capable of being electrically earthed when intended for the transport of substances
meeting the flashpoint criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature substances transported above their
flashpoint. Measures shall be taken to prevent dangerous electrostatic discharge.
6.7.2.2.16 When required for certain substances by the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in column 13 of the
Dangerous Goods List, or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods
List, portable tanks shall be provided with additional protection, which may take the form of additional shell
thickness or a higher test pressure, the additional shell thickness or higher test pressure being determined in
the light of the inherent risks associated with the transport of the substances concerned.
6.7.2.2.17 Thermal insulation directly in contact with the shell intended for substances transported at elevated
temperature shall have an ignition temperature at least 50°C higher than the maximum design temperature of
the tank.
6.7.2.3 Design criteria
6.7.2.3.1 Shells shall be of a design capable of being stress-analysed mathematically or experimentally by resistance
strain gauges, or by other methods approved by the competent authority.
6.7.2.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a hydraulic test pressure not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Specific provisions are laid down for certain substances in the applicable portable tank
instruction indicated in column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable
tank special provision indicated in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.3. The
minimum shell thickness shall not be less than that specified for these tanks in 6.7.2.4.1 to 6.7.2.4.10.
6.7.2.3.3 For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof
strength, generally, or 1% proof strength for austenitic steels), the primary membrane stress σ (sigma) in the
shell shall not exceed 0.75Re or 0.50Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where:
Re = yield strength in N/mm2, or 0.2% proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1% proof strength;
Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/mm2.
6.7.2.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or international
material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re and Rm according
to the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when these greater values are attested in the
material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, the values of Re
and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.
6.7.2.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells. The
values of Re and Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material inspection
certificate.
6.7.2.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/Rm
with an absolute minimum of 16% for fine-grain steels and 20% for other steels. Aluminium and aluminium
alloys used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less than 10,000/6Rm
with an absolute minimum of 12%.
6.7.2.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis
of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The permanent
elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross-section in accordance with
ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.7.2.4 Minimum shell thickness
6.7.2.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on:
.1 the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the provisions of 6.7.2.4.2 to 6.7.2.4.10;
.2 the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure-vessel code, including
the provisions in 6.7.2.3; and
.3 the minimum thickness specified in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in column 13 of the
Dangerous Goods List, or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 14.
6.7.2.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of shells not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be
not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells more
than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness
in the metal to be used, except that for powdered or granular solid substances of packing group II or III the
minimum thickness requirement may be reduced to not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of
equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.
6.7.2.4.3 When additional protection against shell damage is provided, portable tanks with test pressures less than
2.65 bar may have the minimum shell thickness reduced, in proportion to the protection provided, as approved
by the competent authority. However, shells not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 3 mm thick
in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diameter
shall be not less than 4 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.
6.7.2.4.4 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 3 mm thick
regardless of the material of construction.
6.7.2.4.5 The additional protection referred to in 6.7.2.4.3 may be provided by overall external structural protection, such as
suitable “sandwich” construction with the outer sheathing (jacket) secured to the shell, double-wall construction
or by enclosing the shell in a complete framework with longitudinal and transverse structural members.
6.7.2.4.6 The equivalent thickness of a metal other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.2.4.3
shall be determined using the following equation:
21.4 × e0
e1 = ________
_________
× A1
√Rm1
3
where:
e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable tank
instruction or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 13 or 14 of the Dangerous
Goods List;
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm2) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.2.3.3);
A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national
or international standards.
6.7.2.4.7 When, in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6, a minimum thickness of 8 mm, 10 mm or 12 mm
is specified, it shall be noted that these thicknesses are based on the properties of the reference steel and a
shell diameter of 1.80 m. When a metal other than mild steel (see 6.7.2.1) is used or the shell has a diameter of
more than 1.80 m, the thickness shall be determined using the following equation:
21.4 × e0d1
__________
e1 =
_________
1.83√Rm1 × A1
where:
e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable tank
instruction or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column 13 or 14 of the Dangerous
Goods List;
d1 = diameter of the shell (in m), but not less than 1.80 m;
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm2) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.2.3.3);
A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to national
or international standards.
6.7.2.4.8 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.2.4.2, 6.7.2.4.3 and 6.7.2.4.4. All parts
of the shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.2.4.2 to 6.7.2.4.4. This thickness shall be
exclusive of any corrosion allowance.
6.7.2.4.9 When mild steel is used (see 6.7.2.1), calculation using the equation in 6.7.2.4.6 is not required.
6.7.2.4.10 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the cylindrical
portion of the shell.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.7.2.5 Service equipment
6.7.2.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or damaged
during handling and transport. When the connection between the frame and the shell allows relative movement
between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without risk
of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), the internal
stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external forces (for
example, by using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and
any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening.
6.7.2.5.1.1 For offshore tank-containers, where positioning of service equipment and the design and strength of
protection for such equipment is concerned, the increased danger of impact damage when handling such
tanks in open seas shall be taken into account.
6.7.2.5.2 All openings in the shell, intended for filling or discharging the portable tank, shall be fitted with a manually
operated stop-valve located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable. Other openings, except for
openings leading to venting or pressure relief devices, shall be equipped with either a stop-valve or another
suitable means of closure located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable.
6.7.2.5.3 All portable tanks shall be fitted with a manhole or other inspection openings of a suitable size to allow for
internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior. Compartmented portable
tanks shall have a manhole or other inspection openings for each compartment.
6.7.2.5.4 As far as reasonably practicable, external fittings shall be grouped together. For insulated portable tanks, top
fittings shall be surrounded by a spill-collection reservoir with suitable drains.
6.7.2.5.5 Each connection to a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function.
6.7.2.5.6 Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less
than the MAWP of the shell, taking into account the temperatures expected during transport. All stop-valves
with screwed spindles shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. For other stop-valves, the position
(open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All stop-valves shall be designed to
prevent unintentional opening.
6.7.2.5.7 No moving parts, such as covers, components of closures, etc., shall be made of unprotected corrodible
steel when they are liable to come into frictional or percussive contact with aluminium portable tanks intended
for the transport of substances meeting the flashpoint criteria of class 3, including elevated-temperature
substances transported above their flashpoint.
6.7.2.5.8 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal expansion
and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of a suitable metallic material. Welded
pipe joints shall be used wherever possible.
6.7.2.5.9 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of brazing
materials shall be no lower than 525°C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of the tubing, as may
happen when cutting threads.
6.7.2.5.10 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the MAWP of
the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or other
device (except pressure relief devices).
6.7.2.5.11 Ductile metals shall be used in the construction of valves and accessories.
6.7.2.5.12 The heating system shall be designed or controlled so that a substance cannot reach a temperature at which
the pressure in the tank exceeds its MAWP or causes other hazards (e.g. dangerous thermal decomposition).
6.7.2.5.13 The heating system shall be designed or controlled so that power for internal heating elements is not available
unless the heating elements are completely submerged. The temperature at the surface of the heating
elements for internal heating equipment or the temperature at the shell for external heating equipment shall,
in no case, exceed 80% of the auto-ignition temperature (in °C) of the substances carried.
6.7.2.5.14 If an electrical heating system is installed inside the tank, it shall be equipped with an earth leakage circuit
breaker with a releasing current of less than 100 mA.
6.7.2.5.15 Electrical switch cabinets mounted to tanks shall not have a direct connection to the tank interior and shall
provide protection of at least the equivalent of IP 56 according to IEC 144 or IEC 529.
6.7.2.6 Bottom openings
6.7.2.6.1 Certain substances shall not be transported in portable tanks with bottom openings. When the applicable
portable tank instruction identified in the Dangerous Goods List and described in 4.2.5.2.6 indicates that
bottom openings are prohibited, there shall be no openings below the liquid level of the shell when it is filled
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
to its maximum permissible filling limit. When an existing opening is closed, it shall be accomplished by
internally and externally welding one plate to the shell.
6.7.2.6.2 Bottom discharge outlets for portable tanks carrying certain solid, crystallizable or highly viscous substances
shall be equipped with not less than two serially fitted and mutually independent shut-off devices. The design
of the equipment shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body and shall
include:
.1 an external stop-valve, fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable, and so designed as to
prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act; and
.2 a liquid-tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap.
6.7.2.6.3 Every bottom discharge outlet, except as provided in 6.7.2.6.2, shall be equipped with three serially fitted
and mutually independent shut-off devices. The design of the equipment shall be to the satisfaction of the
competent authority or its authorized body and include:
.1 a self-closing internal stop-valve, that is a stop-valve within the shell or within a welded flange or its
companion flange, such that:
.1 the control devices for the operation of the valve are designed so as to prevent any unintended
opening through impact or other inadvertent act;
.2 the valve may be operable from above or below;
.3 if possible, the setting of the valve (open or closed) shall be capable of being verified from the
ground;
.4 except for portable tanks having a capacity of not more than 1000 L, it shall be possible to close the
valve from an accessible position of the portable tank that is remote from the valve itself; and
.5 the valve shall continue to be effective in the event of damage to the external device for controlling
the operation of the valve;
.2 an external stop-valve fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable; and
.3 a liquid-tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap.
6.7.2.6.4 For a lined shell, the internal stop-valve required by 6.7.2.6.3.1 may be replaced by an additional external
stop-valve. The manufacturer shall satisfy the provisions of the competent authority or its authorized body.
6.7.2.7 Safety relief devices
6.7.2.7.1 All portable tanks shall be fitted with at least one pressure relief device. All relief devices shall be designed,
constructed and marked to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body.
6.7.2.8 Pressure relief devices
6.7.2.8.1 Every portable tank with a capacity not less than 1900 L and every independent compartment of a portable
tank with a similar capacity shall be provided with one or more pressure relief devices of the spring-loaded
type and may in addition have a frangible disc or fusible element in parallel with the spring-loaded devices
except when prohibited by reference to 6.7.2.8.3 in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6. The
pressure relief devices shall have sufficient capacity to prevent rupture of the shell due to over-pressurization
or vacuum resulting from filling, from discharging, or from heating of the contents.
6.7.2.8.2 Pressure relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of liquid and the
development of any dangerous excess pressure.
6.7.2.8.3 When required for certain substances by the applicable portable tank instruction identified in the Dangerous
Goods List and described in 4.2.5.2.6, portable tanks shall have a pressure relief device approved by the
competent authority. Unless a portable tank in dedicated service is fitted with an approved relief device
constructed of materials compatible with the load, the relief device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding
a spring-loaded pressure relief device. When a frangible disc is inserted in series with the required pressure
relief device, the space between the frangible disc and the pressure relief device shall be provided with a
pressure gauge or suitable tell-tale indicator for the detection of disc rupture, pinholing, or leakage which
could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief system. The frangible disc shall rupture at a nominal pressure
10% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the relief device.
6.7.2.8.4 Every portable tank with a capacity less than 1900 L shall be fitted with a pressure relief device, which may
be a frangible disc when this disc complies with the provisions of 6.7.2.11.1. When no spring-loaded pressure
relief device is used, the frangible disc shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the test pressure.
In addition, fusible elements conforming to 6.7.2.10.1 may also be used.
6.7.2.8.5 When the shell is fitted for pressure discharge, the inlet line shall be provided with a suitable pressure relief
device set to operate at a pressure not higher than the MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve shall be fitted as
close to the shell as reasonably practicable.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.7.2.9 Setting of pressure relief devices
6.7.2.9.1 It shall be noted that the pressure relief devices shall operate only in conditions of excessive rise in temperature,
since the shell shall not be subject to undue fluctuations of pressure during normal conditions of transport
(see 6.7.2.12.2).
6.7.2.9.2 The required pressure relief device shall be set to start to discharge at a nominal pressure of five sixths of
the test pressure for shells having a test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar and 110% of two thirds of the test
pressure for shells having a test pressure of more than 4.5 bar. After discharge, the device shall close at a
pressure not more than 10% below the pressure at which the discharge starts. The device shall remain closed
at all lower pressures. This requirement does not prevent the use of vacuum relief or combination pressure
relief and vacuum relief devices.
6.7.2.10 Fusible elements
6.7.2.10.1 Fusible elements shall operate at a temperature between 100°C and 149°C on condition that the pressure in
the shell at the fusing temperature will be not more than the test pressure. They shall be placed at the top of
the shell with their inlets in the vapour space, and when used for transport safety purposes, they shall not be
shielded from external heat. Fusible elements shall not be used on portable tanks with a test pressure which
exceeds 2.65 bar unless specified by special provision TP36 in column 14 of the Dangerous Goods List of
chapter 3.2. Fusible elements used on portable tanks intended for the transport of elevated-temperature
substances shall be designed to operate at a temperature higher than the maximum temperature that will
be experienced during transport and shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized
body.
6.7.2.11 Frangible discs
6.7.2.11.1 Except as specified in 6.7.2.8.3, frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the test
pressure throughout the design temperature range. Particular attention shall be given to the provisions of
6.7.2.5.1 and 6.7.2.8.3 if frangible discs are used.
6.7.2.11.2 Frangible discs shall be appropriate for the vacuum pressures which may be produced in the portable tank.
6.7.2.12 Capacity of pressure relief devices
6.7.2.12.1 The spring-loaded pressure relief device required by 6.7.2.8.1 shall have a minimum cross-sectional flow area
equivalent to an orifice of 31.75 mm diameter. Vacuum relief devices, when used, shall have a cross-sectional
flow area not less than 284 mm2.
6.7.2.12.2 The combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief system (taking into account the reduction of the flow
when the portable tank is fitted with frangible discs preceding spring-loaded pressure relief devices or when
the spring-loaded pressure relief devices are provided with a device to prevent the passage of the flame),
in conditions of complete fire engulfment of the portable tank shall be sufficient to limit the pressure in the
shell to 20% above the start-to-discharge pressure of the pressure-limiting device. Emergency pressure relief
devices may be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed. These devices may be fusible, spring-
loaded or frangible disc components, or a combination of spring-loaded and frangible disc devices. The
total required capacity of the relief devices may be determined using the formula in 6.7.2.12.2.1 or the table in
6.7.2.12.2.3.
6.7.2.12.2.1 To determine the total required capacity of the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum of the
individual capacities of all the contributing devices, the following formula shall be used:
___
Q = 12.4 ___ √
FA ___
ZT
0.82
LC M
where:
Q = m inimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m3/s) at standard
conditions: 1 bar and 0°C (273 K);
F = a coefficient with the following value:
for uninsulated shells, F = 1
for insulated shells, F = U(649 – t)/13.6 but in no case is less than 0.25
where:
U = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation, in kW·m-2·K-1, at 38°C;
t = actual temperature of the substance during filling (in °C) (when this temperature is
unknown, let t = 15°C);
The value of F given above for insulated shells may be taken provided that the insulation is in
conformance with 6.7.2.12.2.4;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
A = total external surface area of shell in square metres;
Z =
the gas compressibility factor in the accumulating condition (when this factor is unknown, let Z
equal 1.0);
T = a
bsolute temperature in kelvin (°C + 273) above the pressure relief devices in the accumulating
condition;
L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condition;
M = molecular mass of the discharged gas;
C =
a constant which is derived from one of the following formulae as a function of the ratio k of
specific heats:
Cp
k = __
Cv
where:
Cp = specific heat at constant pressure; and
Cv = specific heat at constant volume.
When k > 1:
__________
√( )
_____ k+1
2 k - 1
_____
C = k
k+1
When k = 1 or k is unknown:
C = ___ 1__ = 0.607
e
√
where e is the mathematical constant 2.7183.
C may also be taken from the following table:
k C k C k C
1.00 0.607 1.26 0.660 1.52 0.704
1.02 0.611 1.28 0.664 1.54 0.707
1.04 0.615 1.30 0.667 1.56 0.71
1.06 0.620 1.32 0.671 1.58 0.713
1.08 0.624 1.34 0.674 1.60 0.716
1.10 0.628 1.36 0.678 1.62 0.719
1.12 0.633 1.38 0.681 1.64 0.722
1.14 0.637 1.40 0.685 1.66 0.725
1.16 0.641 1.42 0.688 1.68 0.728
1.18 0.645 1.44 0.691 1.70 0.731
1.20 0.649 1.46 0.695 2.0 0.77
1.22 0.652 1.48 0.698 2.2 0.793
1.24 0.656 1.50 0.701
6.7.2.12.2.2 As an alternative to the formula above, shells designed for the transport of liquids may have their relief devices
sized in accordance with the table in 6.7.2.12.2.3. This table assumes an insulation value of F =1 and shall be
adjusted accordingly when the shell is insulated. Other values used in determining this table are:
M = 86.7; T = 394 K; L = 334.94 kJ/kg; C = 0.607; Z = 1
6.7.2.12.2.3 Minimum required rate of discharge, Q, in cubic metres of air per second at 1 bar and 0°C (273 K):
A Q A Q
Exposed area (cubic metres of Exposed area (cubic metres of
(square metres) air per second) (square metres) air per second)
2 0.230 14 1.132
3 0.320 16 1.263
4 0.405 18 1.391
5 0.487 20 1.517
6 0.565 22.5 1.670
7 0.641 25 1.821
8 0.715 27.5 1.969
9 0.788 30 2.115
10 0.859 32.5 2.258
12 0.998 35 2.400
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
A Q A Q
Exposed area (cubic metres of Exposed area (cubic metres of
(square metres) air per second) (square metres) air per second)
37.5 2.539 62.5 3.860
40 2.677 65 3.987
42.5 2.814 67.5 4.112
45 2.949 70 4.236
47.5 3.082 75 4.483
50 3.215 80 4.726
52.5 3.346 85 4.967
55 3.476 90 5.206
57.5 3.605 95 5.442
60 3.733 100 5.676
6.7.2.12.2.4 Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing venting capacity, shall be approved by the competent
authority or its authorized body. In all cases, insulation systems approved for this purpose shall:
(a) remain effective at all temperatures up to 649°C; and
(b) be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700°C or greater.
6.7.2.13 Marking of pressure relief devices
6.7.2.13.1 Every pressure relief device shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following:
.1 the pressure (in bar or kPa) or temperature (in °C) at which it is set to discharge;
.2 the allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure, for spring-loaded devices;
.3 the reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure, for frangible discs;
.4 the allowable temperature tolerance, for fusible elements;
.5 the rated flow capacity of the spring-loaded pressure relief devices, frangible discs or fusible elements
in standard cubic metres of air per second (m3/s); and
.6 the cross sectional flow areas of the spring-loaded pressure relief devices, frangible discs and fusible
elements in mm2.
When practicable, the following information shall also be shown:
.7 the manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number.
6.7.2.13.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the spring-loaded pressure relief devices shall be determined according
to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.
6.7.2.14 Connections to pressure relief devices
6.7.2.14.1 Connections to pressure relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass
unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure relief
devices except where duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-valves
serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one
of the duplicate devices is always in use. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to a vent or
pressure relief device which might restrict or cut off the flow from the shell to that device. Vents or pipes from
the pressure relief device outlets, when used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in
conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving devices.
6.7.2.15 Siting of pressure relief devices
6.7.2.15.1 Each pressure relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal and
transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure relief device inlets shall, under maximum
filling conditions, be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure
the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For flammable substances, the escaping vapour shall be
directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the shell. Protective devices which
deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced.
6.7.2.15.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure relief devices by unauthorized persons and to
protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.7.2.16 Gauging devices
6.7.2.16.1 Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct communication with the
contents of the tank, shall not be used.
6.7.2.17 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments
6.7.2.17.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during
transport. The forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.2.2.13 shall be considered in
this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are acceptable.
6.7.2.17.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (such as cradles, framework, etc.) and portable
tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell. Permanent
lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be fitted to the
portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the points of support.
6.7.2.17.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into account.
6.7.2.17.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a permanent
part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single-compartment portable tanks with a
length less than 3.65 m need not have closed-off forklift pockets provided that:
.1 the shell, including all the fittings, is well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and
.2 the distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of the
portable tank.
6.7.2.17.5 When portable tanks are not protected during transport, according to 4.2.1.2, the shells and service equipment
shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral or longitudinal
impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the shell contents
upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of protection include:
.1 protection against lateral impact, which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both
sides at the level of the median line;
.2 protection of the portable tank against overturning, which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars
fixed across the frame;
.3 protection against rear impact, which may consist of a bumper or frame;
.4 protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance
with ISO 1496-3:1995.
6.7.2.18 Design approval
6.7.2.18.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new design
of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that a portable tank has been surveyed by that authority,
is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the provisions of this chapter and, where appropriate, the
provisions for substances provided in chapter 4.2 and in the Dangerous Goods List in chapter 3.2. When a
series of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the
entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the substances or group of substances
allowed to be transported, the materials of construction of the shell and lining (when applicable) and an
approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose
territory the approval was granted, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road
traffic and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the
certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the
same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures
and other appurtenances.
6.7.2.18.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following:
.1 the results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995;
.2 the results of the initial inspection and test in 6.7.2.19.3; and
.3 the results of the impact test in 6.7.2.19.1, when applicable.
6.7.2.19 Inspection and testing
6.7.2.19.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972
(CSC Convention), as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a
representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the Manual
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
of Tests and Criteria, part IV, section 41. This provision only applies to portable tanks which are constructed
according to a design approval certificate which has been issued on or after 1 January 2008.
6.7.2.19.2 The shell and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put into
service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year intervals (5-year
periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5-year periodic inspection
and test) midway between the 5-year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5-year periodic inspection and test
may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed
regardless of the date of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6.7.2.19.7.
6.7.2.19.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an
internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances to
be transported, and a pressure test. Before the portable tank is placed into service, a leakproofness test
and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the shell
and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a
leakproofness test.
6.7.2.19.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test shall include an internal and external examination and, as a general
rule, a hydraulic pressure test. For tanks only used for the transport of solid substances other than toxic or
corrosive substances, which do not liquefy during transport, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced
by a suitable pressure test at 1.5 times MAWP, subject to competent authority approval. Sheathing, thermal
insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the
portable tank. When the shell and equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected
together after assembly to a leakproofness test.
6.7.2.19.4.1 The heating system shall be subject to inspection and tests including pressure tests on heating coils or ducts
during the 5-year periodic inspection.
6.7.2.19.5 The intermediate 2.5-year periodic inspection and test shall at least include an internal and external
examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances intended to be transported,
a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment. Sheathing, thermal
insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of
the portable tank. For portable tanks dedicated to the transport of a single substance, the 2.5-year internal
examination may be waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the
competent authority or its authorized body.
6.7.2.19.6 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for transport after the date of expiry of the last 5-year or 2.5-year
periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.2.19.2. However, a portable tank filled prior to the date of expiry
of the last periodic inspection and test may be transported for a period not to exceed three months beyond
the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may be transported after
the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection:
.1 after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or inspection prior
to refilling; and
.2 unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months beyond the
date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for
proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport document.
Except as provided for in this paragraph, portable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their scheduled
5-year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may only be filled and offered for transport if a new 5-year
periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6.7.2.19.4.
6.7.2.19.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or
corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of the
portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of damage or
deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5-year periodic inspection and test according
to 6.7.2.19.5.
6.7.2.19.8 The internal and external examinations shall ensure that:
.1 the shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other
conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for transport. The wall thickness
shall be verified by appropriate measurement if this inspection indicates a reduction of wall thickness;
.2 the piping, valves, heating/cooling system, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any
other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or
transport;
.3 devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers or
gaskets;
.4 missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or tightened;
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.5 all emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could
prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves shall be operated to
demonstrate proper operation;
.6 linings, if any, are inspected in accordance with criteria outlined by the lining manufacturer;
.7 required marks on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable provisions; and
.8 the framework, supports and arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in a satisfactory condition.
6.7.2.19.9 The inspections and tests in 6.7.2.19.1, 6.7.2.19.3, 6.7.2.19.4, 6.7.2.19.5 and 6.7.2.19.7 shall be performed or
witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. When the pressure
test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the
portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any leaks in the shell, piping or
equipment.
6.7.2.19.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall be to
the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body, taking into account the pressure-vessel code
used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original test pressure shall be performed after the
work is completed.
6.7.2.19.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service until
it has been corrected and the test is repeated and passed.
6.7.2.20 Marking
6.7.2.20.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable
tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank arrangements
the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at least the information
required by the pressure-vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following information shall be marked on
the plate by stamping or by any other similar method:
(a) Owner information
(i) Owner’s registration number;
(b) Manufacturing information
(i) Country of manufacture;
(ii) Year of manufacture;
(iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark;
(iv) Manufacturer’s serial number;
(c) Approval information
(i) The United Nations packaging symbol:
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible bulk
container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in chapters 6.1, 6.2,
6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.9;
(ii) Approval country;
(iii) Authorized body for the design approval;
(iv) Design approval number;
(v) Letters “AA”, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2);
(vi) Pressure-vessel code to which the shell is designed;
(d) Pressures
(i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge);
(ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge);*
(iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year);
(iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness;
(v) External design pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge);*
(vi) MAWP for heating/cooling system (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)* (when applicable);
(e) Temperatures
(i) Design temperature range (in °C);*
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
(f) Materials
(i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s);
(ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm);* and
(iii) Lining material (when applicable);
(g) Capacity
(i) Tank water capacity at 20°C (in litres);
This indication is to be followed by the symbol “S” when the shell is divided by surge plates into
sections of not more than 7,500 L capacity;
(ii) Water capacity of each compartment at 20°C (in litres)* (when applicable, for multi-compartment
tanks).
This indication is to be followed by the symbol “S” when the compartment is divided by surge plates
into sections of not more than 7,500 L capacity;
(h) Periodic inspections and tests
(i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional);
(ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year);
(iii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)* of the most recent periodic test (if applicable);
(iv) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent test.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
Figure 6 .7 .2 .20 .1 – Example of a plate for marking
Owner’s registration number
MANUFACTURING INFORMATION
Country of manufacture
Year of manufacture
Manufacturer
Manufacturer’s serial number
APPROVAL INFORMATION
Approval country
Authorized body for design approval
Design approval number “AA” (if applicable)
Shell design code (pressure-vessel code)
PRESSURES
MAWP bar or kPa
Test pressure bar or kPa
Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp:
External design pressure bar or kPa
MAWP for heating/cooling system (when applicable) bar or kPa
TEMPERATURES
Design temperature range °C to °C
MATERIALS
Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s)
Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm
Lining material (when applicable)
CAPACITY
Tank water capacity at 20°C litres “S” (if applicable)
Water capacity of compartment ⎯ ⎯ at 20°C litres “S” (if applicable)
(when applicable, for multi-compartment tanks)
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS/TESTS
Witness stamp and Witness stamp and
Test type Test date Test type Test date
test pressurea test pressurea
(mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa
a
Test pressure if applicable.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.7.2.20.2 The following information shall be durably marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly
secured to the portable tank:
Name of the operator
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) . . . . . . . . . . kg
Unladen (tare) mass . . . . . . . . . . kg
Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6.
6.7.2.20.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE PORTABLE
TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate.
6.7.3 Provisions for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks
intended for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2
Note: These requirements also apply to portable tanks intended for the transport of chemicals under pressure
(UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505).
6.7.3.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this section:
Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure-vessel
code. The design pressure shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures:
.1 the maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or
.2 the sum of:
.1 the maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed, as defined in .2 of the MAWP
definition (see below); and
.2 a head pressure determined on the basis of the static forces specified in 6.7.3.2.9, but not less than
0.35 bar;
Design reference temperature means the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the contents is
determined for the purpose of calculating the MAWP. The design reference temperature shall be less than
the critical temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or liquefied gas propellants of chemicals under
pressure intended to be transported to ensure that the gas at all times is liquefied. This value for each
portable tank type is as follows:
.1 shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less: 65°C;
.2 shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 m:
.1 without insulation or sunshield: 60°C;
.2 with sunshield (see 6.7.3.2.12): 55°C; and
.3 with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12): 50°C;
Design temperature range for the shell shall be -40°C to 50°C for non-refrigerated liquefied gases transported
under ambient conditions. More severe design temperatures shall be considered for portable tanks subjected
to severe climatic conditions;
Filling density means the average mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/L). The
filling density is given in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6;
Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective
internal pressure of not less than 25% of the MAWP;
Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest of the
following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position, but in no case less than 7 bar:
.1 the maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or
.2 the maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed, which shall be:
.1 for a non-refrigerated liquefied gas listed in the portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6, the MAWP
(in bar) given in portable tank instruction T50 for that gas;
.2 for other non-refrigerated liquefied gases, not less than the sum of:
– the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at the design reference
temperature minus 1 bar; and
– the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space, being determined by the
design reference temperature and the liquid phase expansion due to an increase of the mean
bulk temperature of tr – tf (tf = filling temperature, usually 15°C; tr = 50°C, maximum mean bulk
temperature);
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
.3 for chemicals under pressure, the MAWP (in bar) given in T50 portable tank instruction for the
liquefied gas portion of the propellants listed in T50 in 4.2.5.2.6.
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the
heaviest load authorized for transport;
Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm2 to 440 N/mm2 and a
guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.7.3.3.3.3;
Portable tank means a multimodal tank having a capacity of more than 450 L used for the transport of
non-refrigerated liquefied gases of class 2. The portable tank includes a shell fitted with service equipment
and structural equipment necessary for the transport of gases. The portable tank shall be capable of being
filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members
external to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded
onto a transport vehicle or ship and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate
mechanical handling. Road tank-vehicles, rail tank-wagons, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers
(IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks;
Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm2 and an elongation at fracture of 27%;
Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety and insulating devices;
Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the non-refrigerated liquefied gas intended for
transport (tank proper), including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or
external structural equipment;
Structural equipment means reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to the shell;
Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test.
6.7.3.2 General design and construction provisions
6.7.3.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of a pressure-vessel code
recognized by the competent authority. Shells shall be made of steel suitable for forming. The materials shall,
in principle, conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells, only a material whose
weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete
safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shells shall be suitably
heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat-affected zones. In choosing the
material, the design temperature range shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to
stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine-grain steel is used, the guaranteed value of
the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm2 and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile
strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm2, according to the material specification. Portable tank materials
shall be suitable for the external environment in which they may be transported.
6.7.3.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings and pipework shall be constructed of materials which are:
.1 substantially immune to attack by the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be transported; or
.2 properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction.
6.7.3.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials compatible with the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be
transported.
6.7.3.2.4 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.7.3.2.5 The materials of the portable tank, including any devices, gaskets, and accessories, shall not adversely affect
the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended for transport in the portable tank.
6.7.3.2.6 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during transport
and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments.
6.7.3.2.7 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to
the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and transport.
The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads
through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account.
6.7.3.2.7.1 For portable tanks that are intended for use as offshore tank-containers, the dynamic stresses imposed by
handling in open seas shall be taken into account.
6.7.3.2.8 Shells shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at least 0.4 bar gauge above the internal pressure
without permanent deformation. When the shell is to be subjected to a significant vacuum before filling or
during discharge, it shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at least 0.9 bar gauge above the
internal pressure and shall be proven at that pressure.
RESOLUTION MSC.556(108) (adopted on 23 May 2024)
AMENDMENTS TO THE
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME DANGEROUS GOODS (IMDG) CODE
6.7.3.2.9 Portable tanks and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing the
following separately applied static forces:
.1 in the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);
.2 horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is not clearly
determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);*
.3 vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g);* and
.4 vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied by the
acceleration due to gravity (g).*
6.7.3.2.10 Under each of the forces in 6.7.3.2.9, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows:
.1 for steels having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield
strength; or
.2 for steels with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed 0.2% proof
strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength.
6.7.3.2.11 The values of yield strength or proof strength shall be the values according to national or international material
standard